Leica Viva Tech Ref_en Ref En
User Manual: Leica Viva TechRef_en
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 1641
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Leica Viva Series Technical Reference Manual Version 1.0 English Introduction Purchase Congratulations on the purchase of a Leica SmartWorx Viva instrument. ) To use the product in a permitted manner, please refer to the detailed safety directions in the CS10/CS15 User Manual and the GS10/GS15 User Manual. Product identification Symbols The type and serial number of your product are indicated on the type plate. Enter the type and serial number in your manual and always refer to this information when you need to contact your agency or Leica Geosystems authorised service workshop. Type: _______________ Serial No.: _______________ The symbols used in this manual have the following meanings: Type ) Trademarks • • • • All Viva Series, Introduction Description Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they enable the product to be used in a technically correct and efficient manner. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries CompactFlash and CF are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. SD is a trademark of the SD Card Association other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2 Validity of this manual • • Available documentation Viva Series, Introduction This manual applies to SmartWorx Viva. For the Lite version of SmartWorx Viva, some functionality described in this manual is not available. This manual applies to the Leica Viva Series. Differences between GPS and TPS are marked and described. Name Description/Format CS10/CS15 User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic 9 level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and safety directions. 9 GS10/GS15 User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic 9 level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and safety directions. 9 Name Description/Format Viva GNSS Getting Started Guide Describes the general working of the product in standard use. 9 Intended as a quick reference field guide. 9 Viva TPS Getting Started Guide Describes the general working of the product in standard use. 9 Intended as a quick reference field guide. 9 Viva Series Technical Reference Manual Overall comprehensive guide to the product and application functions. Included are detailed descriptions of special software/hardware settings and software/hardware functions intended for technical specialists. 9 3 Refer to the following resources for all CS10/CS15 documentation/software: • the SmartWorx Viva DVD • https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com Viva Series, Introduction 4 Table of Contents In this manual Chapter 1 Configurable Keys 1.1 1.2 2 Main Menu Functions Go to Work! Jobs & Data Instrument User Jobs & Data - Jobs 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Viva Series, Table of Contents Leica TPS Favourites Check Point Joystick Turn Instrument to Hz/V Orientation With Compass Main Menu 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4 Hot Keys Favourites Key TPS Settings 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 3 Page Overview Creating a New Job Job Properties and Editing a Job Choosing a Job Managing Job Codes 30 30 32 34 34 37 40 42 44 46 46 48 49 50 52 53 53 54 63 67 68 5 5 Jobs & Data - Data 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 6 Codelists 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing Data Management Point Management 5.3.1 Creating a New Point 5.3.2 Editing a Point 5.3.3 Mean Page Line/Area Management 5.4.1 Overview 5.4.2 Creating a New Line/Area 5.4.3 Editing a Line/Area Data Log Point Sorting and Filters 5.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas 5.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter 5.6.3 Stakeout Filter Overview Accessing Codelist Management Creating/Editing a Codelist Managing Codes 6.4.1 Accessing Codes 6.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code Managing Code Groups 72 72 73 77 77 82 86 92 92 93 98 102 104 104 111 113 114 114 115 116 117 117 119 122 6 7 Coordinate Systems 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 8 Jobs & Data - Import data 8.1 8.2 8.3 9 Overview Importing Data in ASCII/GSI Format Importing Data in DXF Format Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 9.1 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing Coordinate System Management Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing Transformations 7.4.1 Accessing Transformation Management 7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation Ellipsoids 7.5.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management 7.5.2 Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid Projections 7.6.1 Accessing Projection Management 7.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection Geoid Models 7.7.1 Overview 7.7.2 Accessing Geoid Model Management 7.7.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage Device / Internal Memory CSCS Models Overview 124 124 126 128 131 131 133 135 135 137 138 138 141 143 143 144 146 147 148 148 151 156 158 158 7 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 10 Instrument - TPS settings 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 11 Measure mode & target 10.1.1 Measure & Target Settings 10.1.2 Targets 10.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target Prism search settings Atmospheric corrections Level bubble & compensator Quality control & offsets Lights Instrument - GPS settings 11.1 11.2 11.3 Viva Series, Table of Contents Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII Format Exporting Data in DXF Format Exporting Data in LandXML Format Exporting Data in FBK/RW5/RAW Format Copy Data Between Jobs RTK rover wizard 11.1.1 Overview 11.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile 11.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile 11.1.4 Editing an Existing RTK Profile Satellite tracking Antenna heights 11.3.1 Rover Antenna Heights 11.3.2 Antennas 11.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna 160 162 167 170 175 177 177 177 181 183 185 189 192 194 199 201 201 201 203 204 205 206 211 211 213 214 8 11.4 11.5 12 Antenna Heights 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 13 Starting the TPS Connection Wizard Connection Using Cable Connection Using Bluetooth Connection Using Internal Radio Instrument connections - All other connections 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Mechanical Reference Planes, MRP Determining Antenna Heights 12.3.1 Pillar Setup 12.3.2 Tripod Setup 12.3.3 Pole Setup SmartStation Setup Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 14 Quality control Raw data logging Accessing Configuration Connections CS Internet / GS Internet GPS Rover / Base Sensor ASCII Input 14.4.1 Configuration of an ASCII Input Connection 14.4.2 Configuration of a Command to the Device GPS Hidden Pt Export Job RTK Rover 216 226 229 229 231 233 233 238 240 242 244 244 246 248 250 251 251 253 258 260 260 264 265 273 275 9 14.7.1 14.7.2 14.7.3 14.8 14.9 14.10 14.11 14.12 15 Instrument connections - All other connections , Cntrl.. Key 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.8 Viva Series, Table of Contents Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and Radio Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications Base RTK 1 / Base RTK 2 14.8.1 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection NMEA 1 / NMEA 2 Remote (OWI) Total Station GSI Output Digital Cellular Phones 15.1.1 Overview 15.1.2 Configuring a GSM Connection 15.1.3 Configuring a CDMA Connection Modems Radios for GPS Real-Time Radios for Remote Control RS232 Internet Configuring the Stations to Dial 15.7.1 Accessing Dial-up Connection List 15.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial Configuring the Server to Connect 15.8.1 Accessing Server to Connect 15.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server 275 292 293 296 296 302 310 313 315 324 324 324 325 329 333 336 340 342 343 348 348 350 352 352 354 10 16 Configuration of Devices 16.1 16.2 16.3 17 Instrument - Instrument status info 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 17.8 Viva Series, Table of Contents Devices 16.1.1 Overview 16.1.2 Digital Cellular Phones 16.1.3 Modems 16.1.4 Radios for Real-Time 16.1.5 Radios for Remote Control 16.1.6 RS232 16.1.7 Hidden Point Measurement Devices 16.1.8 GPRS / Internet Devices Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices Creating/Editing a Device Status Functions Battery & memory Satellite tracking RTK data link status Current GPS position Raw data logging Connection status 17.7.1 Connection Status 17.7.2 Internet 17.7.3 ASCII Input 17.7.4 RTK Data Link Status 17.7.5 Remote (OWI) TPS current station info 356 356 356 357 359 360 362 363 364 366 368 371 375 375 378 380 385 394 397 401 401 402 403 404 405 407 11 18 Instrument - Base settings 18.1 18.2 19 User - Work settings 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 20 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 409 409 415 ID templates 19.1.1 Accessing ID Template Configuration 19.1.2 Creating/Editing an ID Template Coding & linework My Survey Screen Hot keys & favourites 418 418 418 422 426 431 439 Overview Thematical Coding 20.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist 20.2.2 Thematical Coding without Codelist Free Coding 20.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist 20.3.2 Free Coding with Direct Input Quick Coding SmartCodes 20.5.1 Overview 20.5.2 Configuring SmartCodes 20.5.3 Code Block Code and Attribute Mismatch 442 442 446 446 451 452 452 455 456 458 458 459 464 468 Coding 20.1 20.2 Viva Series, Table of Contents Satellite tracking Base raw data logging 12 20.6.1 20.6.2 21 Linework 21.1 21.2 21.3 22 Regional settings SmartWorx options Screen & audio User - Tools & other utilities 24.1 24.2 24.3 24.4 24.5 24.6 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing the Working Style Wizard Choosing a Different Working Style Creating a New Working Style Editing a Working Style User - System settings 23.1 23.2 23.3 24 Overview Performing Linework using the Linework Field Performing Linework with Thematical Coding User - Working style wizard 22.1 22.2 22.3 22.4 22.5 23 Code Mismatch Attribute Mismatch Transfer user objects Uploading System Files Load licence keys Format memory devices View contents of ASCII files About Leica Viva 468 469 471 471 472 473 479 479 480 481 482 483 484 484 494 496 499 499 502 504 506 508 509 13 25 TPS Functions 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 26 Calculator 26.1 26.2 26.3 27 Configuring Access to the Internet Using the NTRIP Service with a Real-Time Rover MapView Interactive Display Feature 28.1 28.2 28.3 28.4 Viva Series, Table of Contents Accessing the Calculator Configuring the Calculator Using the Calculator 26.3.1 RPN Mode 26.3.2 Standard Mode 26.3.3 Description of Softkeys NTRIP via Internet 27.1 27.2 28 EDM Prism Search Methods 25.2.1 Automatic aiming 25.2.2 PowerSearch Follow Moving Prisms - Lock RCS EGL Illumination Overview Accessing MapView Configuring MapView MapView Components 28.4.1 Screen Area 511 511 512 512 515 517 519 520 522 523 523 524 526 526 528 530 535 535 538 542 542 543 544 549 549 14 28.5 28.6 28.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar 28.4.3 Point Symbols Selecting Points, Lines and Areas Viewing Results 552 555 556 558 29 Applications - General 561 30 COGO 563 563 565 568 575 575 579 582 587 593 600 600 606 611 616 621 626 629 629 636 643 30.1 30.2 30.3 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.7 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing COGO Configuring COGO COGO Calculation - Inverse Method 30.4.1 Selecting the Inverse Method 30.4.2 Point to Point and Current Position to Point 30.4.3 Point to Line and Current Position to Line 30.4.4 Point to Arc and Current Position to Arc COGO Calculation - Traverse Method COGO Calculation - Intersection Method 30.6.1 Selecting the Intersection Method 30.6.2 Intersection with Double Bearing 30.6.3 Intersection with Double Distance 30.6.4 Intersection with Bearing - Distance 30.6.5 Intersection with By Points 30.6.6 Intersection with TPS Observation - TPS Observation COGO Calculation - Line/Arc Calculations Method 30.7.1 Selecting the Line/Arc Method 30.7.2 Arc Calculation 30.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point 15 30.8 30.9 30.10 30.11 31 Determine Coordinate System 31.1 31.2 31.3 31.4 Viva Series, Table of Contents 30.7.4 Segment an Arc 30.7.5 Segment a Line COGO Calculation - Area Division 30.8.1 Selecting the Division Method 30.8.2 Choosing an Area to be Divided 30.8.3 Dividing an Area 30.8.4 Results of the Area Division COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale 30.9.1 Selecting the Shift, Rotate & Scale Method and the Points to be Moved 30.9.2 Manually Entered 30.9.3 Matching Points Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations Modifying Values for Azimuths, Distances and Offsets Overview Selecting the Transformation Method The Normal Method 31.3.1 Configuring the Normal Method 31.3.2 Determining a New Coordinate System 31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System 31.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points 31.3.5 Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep 31.3.6 Transformation Results for Classic 3D The One Point Localisation Method 31.4.1 Determining a New Coordinate System 649 650 652 652 660 662 665 668 668 677 685 692 694 698 698 700 705 705 708 722 723 725 727 730 730 16 31.4.2 31.4.3 31.4.4 32 QuickGrid 32.1 32.2 33 Selecting the Transformation Method Determining a New Coordinate System Reference Line 33.1 33.2 33.3 33.4 33.5 33.6 33.7 33.8 Viva Series, Table of Contents Computing Required Azimuth Computing the Grid Scale Factor Computing the Height Scale Factor Overview Accessing Reference Line Configuring Reference Line Choosing Reference Lines/Arcs 33.4.1 Overview 33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc 33.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from the Job 33.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc Slopes 33.4.5 Defining Reference Line/Arc Shifts Measuring to a Reference Line/Arc Staking to a Reference Line/Arc Gridstaking to a Reference Line/Arc Staking to Alignment 33.8.1 Overview 33.8.2 Accessing Staking an Alignment & Choosing an Alignment 33.8.3 Stake Parameters 33.8.4 Staking Operation 33.8.5 Results of Stakeout 745 747 749 751 751 757 763 763 770 773 782 782 783 787 790 794 799 812 819 828 828 830 832 835 840 17 34 Reference Plane 34.1 34.2 34.3 34.4 34.5 34.6 34.7 35 Roads - General 35.1 35.2 35.3 35.4 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing Reference Plane Creating/Editing a Reference Plane Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job Configuring Reference Plane Measuring Points to a Reference Plane Scanning a Plane Overview Accessing Roads Applications Configuring Roads Applications 35.3.1 Configuration Settings 35.3.2 Road Stringline - Info Page 35.3.3 Road Individual Stringline - Info Page 35.3.4 Road Cross Slope - Info Page 35.3.5 Road Manual Slope and Slope - Info Page 35.3.6 Road Crown - Info Page 35.3.7 Road Layer - Info Page 35.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page 35.3.9 Rail - Info Page 35.3.10 Tunnel - Info Page 35.3.11 Workflow for Height (aim to stake ht) Jobs & Design Data 35.4.1 Choosing a Job 35.4.2 Working with a DTM Job 842 842 850 853 859 860 864 867 871 871 875 879 879 904 909 914 920 926 931 936 938 941 944 946 946 947 18 35.5 35.6 35.7 36 Roads - Alignment Editor 36.1 36.2 Viva Series, Table of Contents 35.4.3 Design Data 35.4.4 Viewing and Editing the Design Data Working with Shifts Tasks Understanding Terms and Expressions 35.7.1 Road - Basic Terms 35.7.2 Road - Horizontal and Vertical Geometry Elements 35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements 35.7.4 Road - Stake Offset and Stake Height Difference 35.7.5 Road - Chainage or Station Equations 35.7.6 Road - Working Corridor 35.7.7 Road - Extension of the Centreline 35.7.8 Road/Rail - Working with Heights 35.7.9 Rail - Working with a Single Track 35.7.10 Rail - Working with Multiple Tracks 35.7.11 Rail - Check Elements and Stakeout Elements 35.7.12 Rail - Working with Offsets 35.7.13 Tunnel - Basic Terms 35.7.14 Tunnel - Elements for Stake Out and Check Measurements 35.7.15 Tunnel - Shifts Basic Terms Starting Alignment Editor 36.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor 36.2.2 Creating a New Alignment 36.2.3 Modifying an Existing Alignment 948 953 963 972 974 974 976 977 981 983 986 988 989 990 994 996 998 999 1002 1007 1010 1010 1012 1012 1013 1015 19 36.3 36.4 36.5 36.6 36.7 36.8 36.9 37 Roads - Road 37.1 37.2 Viva Series, Table of Contents 36.2.4 Importing Alignment Data 36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu Configuring Alignment Editor Edit Horizontal Alignments 36.4.1 Overview 36.4.2 Editing the Start Point 36.4.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Horizontal Alignment Edit Vertical Alignments 36.5.1 Overview 36.5.2 Editing the Start Point 36.5.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Vertical Alignment Edit Cross Section Templates 36.6.1 Overview 36.6.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template 36.6.3 Add/Edit a Layer Edit Cross Section Assignments 36.7.1 Overview 36.7.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Assignment Edit Chainage Equation 36.8.1 Overview 36.8.2 Creating/editing a Chainage Equation Convert to RoadRunner Job Creating a New Road Job Defining the Work 37.2.1 Defining the Method and the Task 1017 1019 1020 1023 1023 1025 1027 1038 1038 1039 1040 1048 1048 1049 1051 1056 1056 1057 1059 1059 1060 1061 1063 1063 1065 1065 20 37.3 37.4 Viva Series, Table of Contents 37.2.2 Selecting a Line 37.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings 37.2.4 Toggle Offsets Right/Left Staking/Checking the Road 37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen 37.3.2 Measuring Points by Chainage and Offset 37.3.3 Measuring Stringlines Relative to a Centreline 37.3.4 Measuring Individual Stringlines without Centrelines 37.3.5 Measuring Cross Slopes 37.3.6 Measuring Manual Slopes and Design Slopes 37.3.7 Measuring Road Crowns 37.3.8 Measuring Road Layers 37.3.9 Measuring Digital Terrain Models (DTM) The Tools Menu 37.4.1 Overview 37.4.2 Use heights from DTM 37.4.3 Apply current chainage 37.4.4 Get current angle to alignment 37.4.5 Individual point 37.4.6 Additional layer information 37.4.7 Box / base definition 37.4.8 Get current slope 37.4.9 Reset slope to design 37.4.10 Shift reference line 37.4.11 Re-initialise search 1077 1080 1091 1093 1093 1102 1104 1106 1109 1111 1113 1115 1116 1117 1117 1118 1120 1121 1123 1124 1125 1130 1134 1135 1139 21 38 Roads - Rail 38.1 38.2 38.3 38.4 39 Roads - Tunnel 39.1 39.2 39.3 Viva Series, Table of Contents Creating a New Rail Job 38.1.1 Overview 38.1.2 Installing all necessary Software 38.1.3 Importing the Track Design with LEICA Geo Office 38.1.4 Loading the Track Design onto the Instrument Defining the Work Staking/Checking the Track 38.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen 38.3.2 Offset Library 38.3.3 Working with Pendular Displacements The Tools Menu 38.4.1 Overview 38.4.2 Use heights from DTM 38.4.3 Apply current chainage 38.4.4 Individual point 38.4.5 Second point of cant Creating a New Tunnel Job 39.1.1 Preparing Design Data 39.1.2 Tunnel Centreline 39.1.3 Design Profiles 39.1.4 Data Transfer to Instrument Defining the Work Staking/Checking the Tunnel 39.3.1 Overview 1141 1141 1141 1143 1144 1159 1160 1163 1163 1177 1179 1180 1180 1181 1183 1184 1185 1187 1187 1187 1188 1189 1192 1193 1199 1199 22 39.3.2 39.3.3 39.3.4 40 Sets of Angles 40.1 40.2 40.3 41 Overview Sets of Angles 40.2.1 Accessing Sets of Angles 40.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles 40.2.3 Managing the Points List 40.2.4 Measuring the New Points 40.2.5 Measuring the Sets 40.2.6 Calculations - Calculating Angles and Distances in Two Faces 40.2.7 Calculations - Viewing Angle and Distance Results in Two Faces 40.2.8 Calculations - Viewing Results in One Face Monitoring Setup 41.1 41.2 41.3 41.4 41.5 41.6 41.7 Viva Series, Table of Contents Stake face Stake profile and Check profile Scan profile Overview Accessing Setup Configuring Setup Set Station Point Enter Station Information Setup Reminder Setup Methods 41.7.1 Set orientation and Known backsight 1214 1219 1221 1229 1229 1232 1232 1235 1237 1240 1244 1247 1249 1253 1255 1259 1259 1262 1263 1269 1272 1273 1275 1275 23 41.8 41.9 42 Stakeout 42.1 42.2 42.3 42.4 42.5 42.6 43 Start base over known point Start base over last setup Start base over any point Survey - General 44.1 44.2 44.3 44.4 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing Stakeout Configuring Stakeout Staking Out Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM Base Menu - Start base 43.1 43.2 43.3 44 41.7.2 Multiple backsights 41.7.3 Transfer height 41.7.4 Resection 41.7.5 Orientate to line Setup Results Finding a Target Point Surveying Points 44.1.1 Post-Processed Kinematic and Static Operations 44.1.2 Real-Time Rover Operations Adding Annotations Timed Measurements Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 44.4.1 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 1282 1286 1287 1288 1291 1300 1301 1301 1305 1307 1316 1325 1328 1331 1331 1334 1335 1336 1336 1336 1340 1344 1346 1348 1348 24 44.4.2 44.4.3 44.4.4 45 46 1353 Survey - Auto Points 1357 1357 1359 1370 1375 1375 1379 Overview Accessing Survey Cross Section Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template Surveying Cross Sections Configuring Survey Cross Section Survey - Hidden Points 48.1 48.2 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Configuring Auto Points Measuring Auto Points Offset Points of Auto Points 46.4.1 Overview 46.4.2 Configuring Offset Points Survey Cross Section 47.1 47.2 47.3 47.4 47.5 48 1349 1350 1351 Survey - General 46.1 46.2 46.3 46.4 47 Initialise while Moving Initialise while Static Initialise on Known Point Overview Hidden Point Methods 48.2.1 Bearing & Distance 48.2.2 Using 2 Bearings 48.2.3 Using 2 Distances 48.2.4 Chainage & Offset 48.2.5 Backwards Bearing & Distance 1384 1384 1387 1389 1393 1398 1401 1401 1404 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 25 48.3 48.4 48.5 48.6 48.7 49 Hidden Point 49.1 49.2 49.3 50 1409 1413 1416 1416 1418 1421 1424 1427 1427 1429 1433 Overview Accessing Remote Point Configuring Remote Point 1436 1436 1438 1440 Overview Accessing Traverse Creating/Editing a Traverse Selecting an Existing Traverse Traverse Data Configuring Traverse Traverse Methods 51.7.1 Starting Traverse 51.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse 1442 1442 1444 1445 1447 1449 1451 1455 1455 1457 Traverse 51.1 51.2 51.3 51.4 51.5 51.6 51.7 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing Hidden Point and Measuring Configuring Hidden Point Survey - Remote Point 50.1 50.2 50.3 51 Hidden Point Measurements Hidden Point Results Computing an Azimuth 48.5.1 Using the Sun 48.5.2 Using Auxiliary Point Computing Horizontal Distances from Slope Distances Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights 26 51.8 51.9 51.10 52 51.7.3 51.7.4 Traverse Traverse Traverse 51.10.1 51.10.2 Closing Traverse Creating a Control Point from Backsight by Azimuth Point Results Results Adjustment Accessing Traverse Adjustment Adjustment Results Volume Calculations 1459 1463 1464 1469 1472 1472 1475 Overview Accessing Volumes Calculations Configuring Volume Calculations Calculating Volumes 52.4.1 Create a New Surface by Measuring New Points 52.4.2 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points 52.4.3 Choosing an Existing Surface 52.4.4 Selecting the Surface Task 52.4.5 Boundary Definition 52.4.6 Compute Volumes 1479 1479 1481 1482 1484 1484 1490 1493 1494 1495 1498 Appendix A Menu Tree 1502 Appendix B Internal Memory 1511 Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device 1512 Appendix D Pin Assignments and Sockets 1514 1514 1517 52.1 52.2 52.3 52.4 D.1 D.2 Viva Series, Table of Contents GS10 GS15 27 D.3 D.4 Appendix E E.1 E.2 Appendix F F.1 F.2 F.3 F.4 F.5 F.6 F.7 F.8 F.9 F.10 F.11 F.12 F.13 F.14 F.15 Appendix G Appendix H H.1 H.2 Viva Series, Table of Contents CS10 /CS15 TPS1200+ 1520 1522 Cables 1523 1523 1529 GPS Cables TPS Cables NMEA Message Formats Overview Symbols Used for Describing the NMEA Formats GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP, Trimble Proprietary GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ GLL - Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude GNS - GNSS Fix Data GSA - GNSS DOP and Active Satellites GSV - GNSS Satellites in View LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality RMC - Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed ZDA - Time and Date 1531 1531 1532 1536 1538 1540 1542 1544 1546 1548 1550 1552 1554 1556 1558 1560 AT Commands 1561 Glossary 1565 1565 1569 A C 28 H.3 H.4 H.5 H.6 H.7 H.8 H.9 H.10 H.11 H.12 H.13 Index Viva Series, Table of Contents D G H I N O P S T V W 1584 1585 1590 1591 1593 1596 1597 1598 1603 1612 1613 1614 29 1 Configurable Keys 1.1 Hot Keys ) Hot keys are found on the CS15 model only. The CS10 model does not have any hotkeys. Description Two levels of hot keys exist: • The first level is the keys F7, F8, ..., F12. • The second level is the combination of Fn and F7, F8, ..., F12. Functionality Hot keys provide a shortcut for quickly and directly carrying out functions or starting applications assigned to the keys. The assignment of functions and applications to hot keys is user configurable. Use • • • Define hot key step-bystep This step-by-step description shows how to assign the Coding & linework settings screen to the F7 key and to the first line of the My GPS Favourites or My TPS Favourites menu. The first level is accessed by pressing F7, F8, ..., F12 directly. The second level is accessed by pressing Fn first followed by F7, F8, ..., F12. Hot keys can be pressed at any time. It is possible that a function or application assigned to a hot key cannot be executed in certain situations. Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Hot keys & favourites. 2. Hot Keys & Favourites For hot keys/Fn hot keys select F7: User - Coding & linework settings. For favourites select 1: User - Coding & linework settings. 3. Viva Series, Configurable Keys OK 30 Step Description 4. OK 5. Press F7 to access Coding & linework settings. OR Press the favourites key Press Fn, the favourites key settings. Viva Series, Configurable Keys and 1 to access Coding & linework settings. and 1 to access Coding & linework 31 1.2 Favourites Key Description ) • The • • Fn The key opens the My GPS Favourites menu. opens the My TPS Favourites menu. key alone opens Leica TPS Favourites. The following chapter is about the My GPS Favourites and My TPS Favourites menus only. Refer to Leica TPS Favourites for more information about Leica TPS Favourites. Functionality of the favourites menu The My GPS Favourites and My TPS Favourites menus can be configured to contain the most used functions or applications. The favourites menu cannot be accessed while in a configuration screen. Selecting an option in the menu carries out the function or starts the application assigned to the option. My favourites menu The following screen is an example of what a My GPS Favourites or My TPS Favourites menu can look like. The softkeys and their order is fixed. The functions and applications Viva Series, Configurable Keys 32 which are assigned to the individual places in the menu can differ depending on the configuration. OK To execute the selected function. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Define favourites menu step-by-step Defining the favourites menu is the same process as for defining the hot keys. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys". Viva Series, Configurable Keys 33 2 TPS Settings 2.1 Leica TPS Favourites Description Frequently used settings can be accessed and changed quickly. The change is applied immediately. The workflow is not interrupted. This screen displays the possible settings to change to. All possible settings have two states. ) Changes made on the Leica TPS Favourites screen are stored in the active working style. Access Tap the target aiming icon or select Leica TPS Favourites The appearance of the screen changes, depending on whether the instrument is equipped with motorisation, ATR, reflectorless EDM or PowerSearch. To change to the displayed setting do one of the following: • Tap on the icon on the touch screen. • Highlight a field and press . Viva Series, TPS Settings . • Highlight a field and press • • Highlight a field and press OK. Press the number next to the function. OK . 34 OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Comps To turn the instrument using compass readings. Refer to Orientation With Compass. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of options No. Icon Description 1 Measure any surface To measure to any surface (reflectorless). Automatically sets Target aiming: Manual. Measure to prism To measure to prisms. Continuous meas on To set the measure mode to continuous. Continuous meas off To set the measure mode to the previous non-continuous mode. 3 Check point To check a point or the instrument orientation. Refer to Check Point. 4 Change face To change the face of the telescope. 2 Viva Series, TPS Settings 35 No. Icon Description 5 Joystick To turn the instrument using the arrow keys. Refer to Joystick. 6 Turn to Hz/V To turn the instrument to a specific entered position. Refer to Turn Instrument to Hz/V. 7 Auto aiming To set Target aiming: Automatic. Manual aiming To set Target aiming: Manual. Target lock on To set Target aiming: LOCK. Target lock off To set Target aiming to the previous non-lock setting. PowerSearch Prisms are searched for with PowerSearch in the PS window when this icon is used. 8 9 ) Viva Series, TPS Settings If this icon is selected and reflectorless measurements is still set, then this setting is changed to measurements to prisms. 36 2.2 Check Point Description This screen is used to check if a measured point is identical to a point already stored in the job, or if the instruments orientation to a backsight point is still correct. Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Check point. Check Point Store To store the point and return to Main Menu. Dist To measure a distance. More To display additional information. Last To recall the point ID of the last checked point. Fn Positn To position to the selected point. For Target aiming: Automatic the instrument does an ATR search. For Target aiming: LOCK the instrument tries to lock on to a prism. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, TPS Settings 37 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list Point ID to be checked. If a stored point was checked, the point ID for that point is remembered and recalled when Last is pressed. Target height Editable field The last used prism height is suggested. An individual prism height can be typed in. Target Selectable list Target names as configured in the Targets screen. Δ azimuth Display only Difference between calculated azimuth and current orientation. Δ hz dist Display only Difference between calculated and current distance. Δ height Display only Difference between calculated and current height. Current azimuth Display only Current orientation. Horiz distance Display only Current distance between station and backsight point. Height difference Display only Current height difference between station and backsight point. Calc'd azimuth Display only Calc'd hz dist Viva Series, TPS Settings Display only Calculated azimuth between station and backsight point. Calculated horizontal distance between station and backsight point. 38 Field Option Calc'd Δheight Display only Viva Series, TPS Settings Description Calculated height difference between station and backsight point. 39 2.3 Joystick Description The instrument can be turned using the keyboard arrow keys on the instrument or field controller, or the arrow keys displayed on the touch screen. When this screen is accessed, the EGL is turned on automatically. When leaving the screen, the EGL is turned off. Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Joystick. Move by Joystick Use the arrow keys to start the telescope movement. Press an arrow key again to speed up the movement. Press any of the other arrow keys while the instrument turns to stop the movement. Press OK to stop the instrument movement. OK To return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, TPS Settings 40 Description of fields Viva Series, TPS Settings Field Option Description Speed -----, Slow, Medium and Fast Displays the rotating speed of the instrument. Press the same arrow key to change the speed. 41 2.4 Turn Instrument to Hz/V Description This screen is used when the instrument is remote controlled and the telescope is to be turned to a certain direction. Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Turn to Hz/V. Turn Instrument to Hz/V, Absolute page OK To return to Main Menu. The instrument turns to the prism. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, TPS Settings Field Option Description Azimuth Editable field Oriented horizontal direction for the instrument to turn to. V angle Editable field Vertical direction for the instrument to turn to. 42 Next step Page changes to the Relative page. Turn Instrument to Hz/V, Relative page The values are added to the current telescope position to calculate the new direction for the telescope to turn to. Description of fields Field Option Description ?Hz Editable field Angular difference for the horizontal angle to turn to. ?V Editable field Angular difference for the vertical angle to turn to. Next step Press OK. The instrument turns to the prism. For Target aiming: Automatic an ATR measurement is performed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in. For Target aiming: Lock the instrument locks on the prism and the LOCK icon is displayed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in. Viva Series, TPS Settings 43 2.5 Orientation With Compass Description Using a conventional magnetic compass while remotely controlling the instrument, it is possible to determine the direction towards which the instrument should turn to perform a target search to locate the prism. Access In Leica TPS Favourites press Comps. ) The instrument must be connected to a radio to be remote controlled with the field controller. Orientation with compass step-by-step Step Description 1. Set up the instrument. 2. Start the Survey application. 3. Turn the telescope until Hz: 0.0000. 4. Look through the telescope with Hz: 0.0000 to select an object which is easily recognisable. 5. Standing at the instrument, point the compass to the selected object. Turn the rotating dial until the "N" lines up with the north end of the compass needle. The compass dial must not be turned once the "N" is lined up with the north end of the compass needle. ) Viva Series, TPS Settings 6. Go to the prism. From the prism aim the "N" of the compass towards the instrument. Read the horizontal angle as pointed to by the north end of the compass needle. 7. In Leica TPS Favourites press Comps. 8. Orientation With Compass 44 Step Description Compass reading: The horizontal angle read from the compass while aiming to the instrument. V angle: If the compass works as a clinometer, those values can also be used. ) 9. The horizontal and vertical angle reads from the compass are always displayed in degree regardless of the system settings. OK to return to the survey screen. The instrument turns to the prism. For Target aiming: Automatic an ATR measurement is performed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in. For Target aiming: Lock the instrument locks on the prism and the LOCK icon is displayed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in. Viva Series, TPS Settings 45 3 Main Menu 3.1 Main Menu Functions Main Menu OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Mode To switch between GPS and TPS mode. Fn Exit To close Leica SmartWorx Viva software. Description of the main menu functions Viva Series, Main Menu Main menu function Description Refer to chapter Go to Work! To select and start an application. "3.2 Go to Work!" Jobs & Data To manage jobs and data, as well as import and export. Available for RTK rover and TPS. "3.3 Jobs & Data" Instrument To access settings regarding GPS and instrument "3.4 Instruconnections as well as status information. ment" 46 Viva Series, Main Menu Main menu function Description Refer to chapter User To make settings regarding the software and the "3.5 User" display as well as other useful tools. Available for RTK rover and TPS. 47 3.2 Go to Work! Description The Go to Work! drop-down menu contains all loaded applications. Selecting an option in the menu starts the application. Configurations and measurements that can be performed depend on the application. Go to Work! OK To start the highlighted application or to open a submenu. Next step Viva Series, Main Menu Refer to Applications - General for information on the applications. 48 3.3 Jobs & Data Description Jobs & Data is available for RTK rover and TPS. It is used to: • • • Create a new job. Select a job. View job properties. • • • View and edit data. Import data. Export and copy data. Jobs & Data OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Next step Viva Series, Main Menu New job View & edit data Job properties Choose working job Choose control job Import data Export & copy data Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer to to to to to to to chapter chapter chapter chapter chapter chapter chapter 4.2. 5. 4.3. 4.4. 4.4. 8. 9. 49 3.4 Instrument Description Instrument is used to: • Configure parameters related to the instrument. • Configure parameters related to the interfaces. • Check status information. Instrument OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Next step Viva Series, Main Menu GPS settings TPS settings Base settings Instrument connections • GPS connection • TPS connection wizard • All other connections Base connections Refer to chapter 11. Avialable for TPS. Refer to chapter 11. Available for RTK base. Refer to chapter 17. Refer to chapter 11.1. Avialable for TPS. Refer to chapter 11. Refer to chapter 14. Available for RTK base. Refer to chapter 17. 50 Instrument status info Base status info Viva Series, Main Menu Available for RTK rover and TPS. Refer to chapter 17. Available for RTK base. Refer to chapter 17. 51 3.5 User Description User is available for RTK rover and TPS. It is used: • To configure user favourite settings for the survey and the instrument. • For functionality which is not directly related to surveying data, such as loading firmware or licence keys, format data storage devices and viewing ASCII files. User OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Next step Viva Series, Main Menu Work settings Working style wizard System settings Tools & other utilities Refer Refer Refer Refer to to to to chapter chapter chapter chapter 19. 22. 23. 24. 52 4 Jobs & Data - Jobs 4.1 Overview Description Jobs • structure surveying projects. • contain all points, lines, areas and codes that are recorded and stored. • can be downloaded to LGO for post-processing or for data transfer to a further program. • can be uploaded from LGO, for example, for real-time stakeout operations. • can be stored on the data storage device or, if fitted, the internal memory. Type of jobs • • • Default job A job called Default is available on the instrument after: formatting the memory device, inserting a previously formatted data storage device or deleting all jobs from Job properties. Working job The working job is the one data is stored to. One job is always considered the working job. After formatting the memory device, the job Default is used until a user-defined job is created and selected. When a job becomes the working job, then the sort and filter settings of this job are saved in the SystemRAM. If the data storage device is formatted then these last used sort and filter settings are used for the job Default. Data jobs. Explained in this chapter. DTM files. Refer to "42.6 Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM". Road alignment files. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 53 4.2 Creating a New Job Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job. New Job, General Store To store the settings. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new job. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input required. Description Editable field Two lines for a detailed description of the job, for example, work to be performed or the classes contained in the job. Input optional. Creator Editable field The person’s name who is creating the job. Input optional. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 54 Field Option Description Device Selectable list The device on which the new job will be stored. Depending on the instrument options, this may be a display only field. Next step Page changes to the Codelist page. New Job, Codelist page Description of fields Field Option Description Codelist Selectable list Choosing a codelist copies the codes to the job. Next step Page changes to the CAD files page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 55 New Job, CAD files page Store To store the settings. Selected and attached CAD files will be available in the job as background maps. Attach To attach a CAD file found in the same location to which the new job is to be stored. The setting in the Use column will be updated. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description File The name of the CAD files available on the data storage device in the \DATA directory. Size (MB) The size of the CAD file in megabites. Use If set to Yes, the file is attached to the job when Store is pressed. Next step Page changes to the Coord system page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 56 New Job, Coord system page Description of fields Field Option Description Coord system Selectable list Choosing a coordinate system attaches it to the job. If it is not known which coordinate system to use, select Coord system: WGS 1984. All other fields on this screen are display only fields. They depend on the transformation type of the selected coordinate system. Next step Page changes to the Averaging page. Page changes to the Scale page. New Job, Averaging page In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured more than once. If activated, an average or an absolute difference is calculated. Description of fields Field Option Defines the averaging principles for multiple measured points. The selection determines the availability of the subsequent fields for setting the acceptable averaging limits or absolute differences. Mode Average Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs Description Computes the average for the position and the height. Points exceeding the defined limits are marked with ! in Edit Point:, Mean page. 57 Field Option Description Absolute differences Computes the absolute differences between two points selected from a list of measured points which are all stored with the same point ID. Off Averaging is turned off. No other fields are available. The method used for computing the average. Available for Mode: Average. Method Weighted Calculates a weighted average No weighting Calculates an arithmetic average. Points to use Selectable list The type of points which will be taken into account for averaging or absolute differences. Available for Mode: Average and Mode: Absolute differences. Limit in position and Limit in height Editable field The acceptable difference for the position and height components. Available for Mode: Average. From Easting to Editable fields Cartesian Z The acceptable absolute differences for each coordinate component. Available for Mode: Absolute differences. Next step Store creates a new job. New Job, Scale page The geometric distance correction (geometric ppm) is derived from the map projection distortion (map projection ppm), the height above reference datum correction (height ppm) and an individual correction (individual ppm). Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 58 The calculation of the map projection ppm follows the formula for the Transversal Mercator Projection. The individual factors are: the scale factor of the line of projection central meridian, Gauss-Krüger = 1.0, UTM = 0.9996, etc. and the offset from the line of projection. The calculation of the height ppm is derived from the height of the instrument station above the reference datum. Normally this is the height above mean sea level MSL. Store To store the settings. SF/ppm To change between entering the scale factor or the ppm. Only available for Compute scale using:SF/GeoPPM. ppm=0 To set Geometric ppm: 0.0. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Compute scale using Projection & ht To enter all values for determining the geometric info ppm. SF/GeoPPM Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs Description To enter only the scale factor or the geometric ppm value. 59 Field Option Description Stn & coord system To automatically calculate the ppm/scale factor from the coordinate system and station position. Scale at CM Editable field The scale at the central meridian. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info Offset to CM Editable field The offset to the central meridian. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info Map proj ppm Display only The map projection ppm value. If this value cannot be calculated, then ----- is displayed and is also ignored in the calculation of the geometric ppm value. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info and Compute scale using: Stn & coord system Ground height Editable field The height of the instrument station above the reference datum. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info Height ppm Display only The height ppm value calculated from the height coordinates of the current station stored in the internal memory. If this value cannot be calculated, then ----- is displayed and is also ignored in the calculation of the geometric ppm value. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info and Compute scale using: Stn & coord system Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 60 Field Option Description User entered ppm Editable field The individual ppm value. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info and Compute scale using: SF/GeoPPM Geometric ppm Display only For Projection & ht info: Geometric ppm = Map proj ppm + User entered ppm + height ppm value calculated fromGround height. For Stn & coord system: Geometric ppm = Map proj ppm + Height ppm. User entered scale factor Editable field The user entered scale factor. Compute scale using: SF/GeoPPM Additional calculation method for the geometric ppm value The geometric ppm value can also be calculated by a resection calculation. The scale factor from the resection is used for User entered ppm. Individual ppm=(s-1)*106.s=1+ppm*10-6. The Geometric ppm value is calculated with the following: • Scale at CM: 1, • Offset to CM: 0, • Map proj ppm: 0 and • Ground height: 0. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 61 Automatic calculation of the geometric ppm value When Compute scale using: Stn & coord system: • the ppm values for Map Proj ppm, Height ppm and Geometric ppm are automatically calculated. The coordinates of the current instrument station stored in the internal memory are used, which are based on the currently active coordinate system. • each time an application is accessed, the geometric ppm value is automatically calculated. The coordinates of the current instrument station stored in the internal memory are used (these coordinates may have been updated), which are based on the currently active coordinate system (this coordinate system may have changed). This way, the user is always working with the correct geometric ppm value. • when thecoordinate system is chosen, then the geometric ppm value cannot be automatically calculated. A message will appear, allowing the user to either manually enter the ppm values or accept ppm values of 0. Next step Page changes to the Averaging page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 62 4.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job Description In the Job Properties:, the settings for a job can be viewed and changed. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties. Job Properties:, General page The fields on this page are identical with the fields in New Job, General. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job". Store To store the settings. Data.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort and filter settings apply. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Log.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are sorted by time in one list. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the Codelist page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 63 Job Properties:, Codelist page Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs Store To store the settings. Import To add additional codes from a new codelist to the job. The name of this codelist is copied to the job. Codes.. To view codes currently stored in the job. Refer to "4.5 Managing Job Codes" Data.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort and filter settings apply. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Log.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are sorted by time in one list. Fn Export To copy codes from the job to an existing or new codelist. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 64 Description of fields Field Option Description Codelist No codes are stored in the job. This default setting can be changed. Choosing a codelist copies the codes to the job. Display only Codes are stored in the job. If codes had been copied from a codelist in the internal memory, the name of the codelist is displayed. If codes have been typed in, then the name of the working job is displayed. Next step Page changes to the CAD files page. Job Properties:, CAD files page Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs Store To store the settings. Add To select a CAD file that is added to the job properties. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job" for a description of the screen. Rmove To delete a CAD file from the job properties. View To change the setting in the View column. Page To change to another page on this screen. 65 Fn Layrs.. To change to the CAD layers screen. In this screen, it is possible to make layers from the CAD file visible or invisible for MapView. Fn Log.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are sorted by time in one list. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Maps The name of the CAD files that can be used. View If set to Yes, the map is visible as background maps in MapView. Next step Page changes to the Coord system page and the Averaging page and for also to the Scale page. The functionality on all pages is identical with the creation of a new job. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job" If the coordinate system of the working job is edited, and Use auto coordinate system has been selected in the RTK Rover Wizard, a message will display requesting confirmation to deactivate auto coordinate system. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 66 4.4 Choosing a Job Access • • Choose working job For a working job, where measured points are stored to, select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose working job. For a control job with control points, select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose control job. Listed are all data jobs stored on the data storage device or in the internal memory depending on the current device. OK To select the highlighted job and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a job. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job". Edit.. To edit the highlighted job. Refer to "4.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job". Delete To delete the highlighted job. CF card, SD card or Intrnl To change between viewing jobs stored on another data storage device or internal memory. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 67 4.5 Managing Job Codes Description Available for jobs which have a codelist attached. To view, edit, group and sort all codes currently stored in the job. The functionality of this screen is mainly the same as for Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job, Codelist. For simplicity, the functionality which is different for Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties, Codelist is explained here. Refer to "6.4 Managing Codes" for information on Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job, Codelist. Access step-by-step Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties. OR Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose working job or Choose control job. Edit.. to access Job Properties:. 2. Page until the Codelist page is active. 3. Codes.. to access Job Codes. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 68 Job Codes OK To return to the previous screen. New.. To create a new code. Refer to "6.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code". Info To edit the highlighted code. Accesses Edit Code where new attributes can be added to a code and line styles can be changed. More To display information about the code group, the code type, the code description and the quick codes if available. Fn Group To access Code Groups. To view, create, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "6.5 Managing Code Groups". Fn Sort To access Sort Codes. To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code or last used. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 69 Next step IF THEN the job codes do not need to be changed OK closes the screen. a new job code is to be created New... Refer to "6.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code". an existing job code is to be edited highlight the job code and Info. Edit Code Store To store the code including any newly created attributes. +Attrib To add a new attribute to a code. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Fn Quit To exit the screen. The behaviour of this screen varies with the type of code to be edited. The differences are explained in the table. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 70 Type of code Description Point codes and Free codes New attributes can be added with +Attrib. Line codes and Area codes • • Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs New attributes can be added with +Attrib. The line style can be changed. This new line style is stored to the code. It can be decided whether to update the line style of all previously stored lines/areas with this code in this job. 71 5 Jobs & Data - Data 5.1 Overview Description Data management is the administration of data stored in the working job, including • viewing data and related information. • editing data. • creating new data. • deleting existing data. • filtering existing data. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 72 5.2 Accessing Data Management Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data. ) The objects listed on the pages belong to the working job. The objects listed and their order depend on the active sort and filter settings. An active filter for a page is indicated by * to the right of the name of the page. Refer to "5.6 Point Sorting and Filters" for information about sort and filter settings. Data:, Points page Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a point. Edit.. To edit the highlighted point. Delete To delete the highlighted point. More To display information about the codes if stored with any point, the time and the date of when the point was stored, the 3D coordinate quality, the class and the flag for Linework. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Log.. To view points, lines, areas and free codes stored with the job sorted by time. Refer to "5.5 Data Log". 73 Fn Filter.. To define sort and filter settings. Refer to "5.6 Point Sorting and Filters". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the Lines and Areas page. Data:, Lines and Areas page The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for both pages. The number in brackets next to the name of the page indicate the number of open lines/areas. Example: Lines (2)/Areas (2) means that two lines/areas are open. OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a line/area. After storing the new line/area, all existing lines and areas which are open are closed. Refer to "5.3.1 Creating a New Point". Edit.. To edit the highlighted line/area. Close and Open To change between the options in the Open column of the highlighted line/area. Only available for the current working job. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 74 More To display information about the codes if stored with any line/area, the start time, the end time of when the last point was added to the line/area, the length of the line, the perimeter and the area of the area. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Delete To delete the highlighted line/area. Fn Filter.. To define sort and filter settings. Refer to "5.6 Point Sorting and Filters". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Line or Area The listed lines/areas already stored in the working job. Open The status of a line/area. • Yes The line/area is open. Measured points are assigned to the line/area. • No The line/area is closed. Measured points are not assigned to the line/area. Close and Open change between the options. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 75 Next step IF the line/area THEN which was last used is press a hot key configured to reopen last used line/area. This hot to be opened key can be used at any time. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys. is to be viewed Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data Page until the Map page is active. 76 5.3 Point Management 5.3.1 Creating a New Point Access In Data:, Points page, press New... New Point, Coords page Store To store the new point entered and all associated information. Coord To view other coordinate properties. North or South Available for local geodetic or WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates when Local latitude or WGS84 latitude is highlighted. Changes between North and South latitude. East or West Available for local geodetic or WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates when Local longitude or WGS84 longitude is highlighted. Changes between East and West longitude. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht or Fn Elev Available for local coordinates. Changes between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 77 Fn IndivID or Fn Run For an individual name independent of the ID template or to change back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The name of the new point. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: Coordinate fields Editable field • To start a new sequence of point IDs, type over the point ID. • For an individual name independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Negative geodetic coordinates are interpreted as being of the opposite hemisphere or other side of the central meridian. For example, entering -25 °N will be stored as 25 °S, entering -33 °E will be stored as 33 °W. Next step Page changes to the Code page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 78 New Point, Code page The settings for Code & attributes in Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework determine the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys. Store To store the new point entered and all associated information. +Attrib To create additional attributes for this point code. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values which were stored with this point code. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 79 Description of fields Field Option Description Point code Selectable list When the check box Use a list box to view codes is checked in Coding & Linework Settings: The codes from the job codelist are used. All point codes of the job codelist can be selected. The description of the code is shown as a display only field. The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on their definition. Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is not checked in Coding & Linework Settings: Codes for points can be typed in but not selected from a codelist. A check is performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in the job. If so, an information message is displayed. If Suggested attributes: Last used in Coding & Linework Settings, the according attributes are also shown. Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is checked: Up to 20 attribute values are available. When the check box Use a list box to view codes is not checked: Up to eight attribute values are available. Attribute Next step Store stores the new point entered and all associated information. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 80 The properties stored with the point are: • Class: Ctrl • Sub class: Fixed (Pos & Ht) • Source: User entered • Instrument source: GPS ) It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where they can be corrected. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 81 5.3.2 Editing a Point Access In Data:, Points page highlight a point to be edited. Press Edit... Edit Point:, Coords page The visible pages on this screen depend on the properties of the point being edited. It is possible to edit the point ID and for points of Class: Ctrl and Class: Est also the coordinates. Other point-related data is shown in display only fields. Changing the point ID of a point, applies this new point ID to all other points with the same original name, regardless of their class. Points of Class: Ref cannot be renamed. Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in other applications, for example COGO, or hidden point measurements does not update the application results. An edited point retains the creation value for Time. ) ) ) ) Store To store the changes. Coord To view other coordinate properties. More To display information about class, sub class, 3D coordinate quality, time and date of when point was stored, instrument source, source and the flag for Linework if available. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 82 Fn Ell Ht or Fn Elev Available for local coordinates. Changes between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Changing the height type does not edit the point. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the next page. Edit Point:, Obs page Available when the edited point is Class: Meas. For GPS points The name of the real-time base station from where the GPS/GNSS point was measured, the name of antenna used to measure the point and the baseline values, are shown in display only/observations fields. For TPS points It is possible to edit the reflector height. The name of the station from where the point was measured is shown in a display only field. Changing the reflector height recalculates the point height. The distance variables ?Hz, ?V, ?slope dist are shown in a display only field, whenever a measurement has been taken in both faces. More displays the horizontal angle or the azimuth from the point to the instrument. ) Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 83 Next step Page changes to the next page. Edit Point:, Code page Available when the edited point is Class: Meas. The point code can be edited. All point codes in the job can be selected. The description of the code is shown as a display only field. The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on their definition. The attribute values shown depend on the setting in Coding & Linework Settings. Suggested attributes: Last used shows the last used attribute values which are stored for this point code in the active codelist. Suggested attributes: Default values shows the default attribute values for this point code if existing. ) It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where they can be corrected. Next step Page changes to the next page. Edit Point:, Annots page Available when the edited point is Class: Nav or Class: Meas and no offset point. The comments to be stored with the point can be edited. Next step Page changes to the next page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 84 Edit Point:, Mean page Available when the edited point is Class: Avge. Refer to "5.3.3 Mean Page" for a detailed description. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 85 5.3.3 Mean Page Description In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured more than once. These measured points are assigned the class Meas. The various measured coordinate triplets for one point can be recorded using the same point ID. If the averaging mode is activated, an average is calculated when more than one measured coordinate triplet is available for the same point ID. The averaged point is given the class Avge. It is checked if the deviations of each single point are within the limits configured in Job Properties:, Averaging page. After averaging, the Mean page becomes available in Edit Point: and accessible from the Survey application. Available functionality on the Mean page depends on the selected averaging mode. Averaging Defining the averaging mode and configuring the limits The averaging mode and the limits are configured in Job Properties:, Averaging page. Refer to "4.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job". Description of averaging modes Averaging mode Description Average When more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the same point, the average for the position and the height is computed. Depending on the selected averaging method, the average will be computed weighted or arithmetic (no weighting). The class Avge is assigned to the averaged point. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 86 Averaging mode Description The horizontal and height distances from the measured points to the average are computed and displayed on the Mean page. A check is performed that the differences in position and height, between the averaged point and the point being stored, do not exceed the defined limits. Absolute differ- What is described for Average also applies for Absolute differences. ences Additionally, the absolute difference between two points selected from a list of measured points with the same point ID, is checked to be within the defined limits. Off Averaging functionality is turned off. With more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point, no average for the position and the height is computed. Averaging with position only or height only points Position only points, height only points and points with full coordinate triplets are handled in the averaging. Access step-by-step The Mean page can be accessed if Mode: Average or Mode: Absolute differences is configured in Job Properties:, Averaging page. AND more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the same point using the same point ID. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 87 Access within data management Step Description 1. In Data:, Points page highlight a point to be edited. 2. Edit.. to access Edit Point:, Mean page. Access within Survey From within the Survey application, the Mean page is accessible when the RTK Rover interface is active. In Survey, Points page, press Fn Avg or Fn Abs to access Edit Point:, Mean page. Edit Point:, Mean page All measured coordinate triplets recorded using the same point ID are shown. Store To store the changes. Use To change between the options in the Use column for the highlighted coordinate triplet. To include or exclude this triplet in or from the calculation of the average. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 88 Edit.. To view and edit the highlighted measured coordinate triplet. It is possible to edit the point ID and the antenna height without impact on all other classes of the point with the same original name. The coordinates are updated. Codes cannot be changed. The average point has the higher priority. A change in codes must be an overall change for the average point. Example: One of the measured coordinate triplets has a wrong point ID and should not be included in the average. By editing the point ID, the point is renamed and no longer contributes to the average. Delete To delete the highlighted coordinate triplet. The average is recomputed. More To change between time and date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Diffs Available for Mode: Absolute differences and Yes is set in the Use column for exactly two measurements. To display the absolute coordinate differences when a local coordinate system is active. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by !. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 89 Description of columns Column Description Use The use of a measured coordinate triplet in the averaging. • Auto The coordinate triplet is included in the averaging computation if within the averaging limit defined in Job Properties::Averaging page. • Yes The coordinate triplet is always included in the averaging computation even if it would fall outside the averaging limit defined in Job Properties::Averaging page. • No The coordinate triplet is never included in the averaging computation. • ----The coordinate triplet cannot be included in the averaging computation. Automatically set by the system. Use changes between the options. Time The time the measured coordinate triplet was stored. Date The date the measured coordinate triplet was stored. The format is as defined in Regional Settings, Time page. dPos The horizontal distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the average. dPos : ----- indicates unavailable information, for example for a height only point. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 90 Column Description dHt The height distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the average. dHt: ----- indicates unavailable information, for example for a position only point. ! Available for measured coordinate triplets with Auto or Yes in the Use column if Mode: Average. Indicates an exceeding of the limits. Next step Store stores the changes. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 91 5.4 Line/Area Management 5.4.1 Overview Description A line/area consists of points and can be created/edited in Data:, Lines and Areas page. The individual points are measured within any application. All points can be used except auxiliary points. Points can be simultaneously assigned to one or more lines and/or areas. A line/area can have • a style for display in MapView. • a code independent of the point code of the points comprising the line/area. ) Points are assigned to a line/area when the line/area is open. Refer to "5.2 Accessing Data Management" for information on how to open a line/area. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 92 5.4.2 Creating a New Line/Area ) The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and areas. The descriptions for lines can be applied for areas. Access In Data:, Lines page, press New... New Line, General page Store To store the new line entered and all associated information. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn IndivID or Fn Run For an individual name independent of the ID template or to change back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Line ID Editable field The name of the new line. The configured ID template for lines is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: • Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data To start a new sequence of line IDs, type over the line ID. 93 Field Option Description • Points to store Selectable list For an individual name independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. The type of points which are used to form the line during a survey. Style Selectable list The line style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and LGO. For Line code: on the Code page a line style can be selected from a selectable list. Otherwise the line style as defined for the selected line code is shown. Colour Selectable list A colour in which the line will be displayed. Next step Page changes to the Code page. New Line, Code page The settings for Code & attributes in Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework determine the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 94 ) The value for Start time with which the line is stored is the time when Store was pressed. The same value is assigned to the value for End time until a point is added to the line. Store To store the new line entered and all associated information. Any existing lines and areas which are open are closed. +Attrib To create additional attributes for this line code. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values which were stored with this line code. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 95 Description of fields Field Option Description Selectable list When the check box Use a list box to view codes is checked in Coding & Linework Settings: All line codes of the job codelist can be selected. The description of the code is shown as a display only field. The line style is shown as defined for the selected line code. It is the style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and LGO. For Line code: , it can be changed. The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on their definition. Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is not checked in Coding & Linework Settings: Codes for lines can be typed in but not selected from a codelist. A check is performed to see if a line code of this name already exists in the job. If so, the line style and colour are copied from the existing code and shown as display only. If Suggested attributes: Last used in Coding & Linework Settings, the according attributes are also shown. The line code to be stored with the point. Line code Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 96 Field Option Description Attribute Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is checked: up to 20 attribute values are available. When the check box Use a list box to view codes is not checked: up to eight attribute values are available. Next step Store stores the new line entered and all associated information. Creating lines/areas most efficiently IF the task is to create THEN multiple lines/areas with subsequent line/area IDs use the hot key/favourites menu function Linework - Create new line (quick)/Linework - Create new area (quick). Pressing the hot key or selecting the function from the My GPS Favourites menu creates and immediately stores the new line/area. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID Templates is used. The code and attributes are taken over from the last created line/area. lines/areas with certain codes use quick coding. The job codelist must contain quick codes for lines/areas. By tying the quick code a new line/area is created and immediately stored with that line/area code and attributes. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID Templates is used. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 97 5.4.3 Editing a Line/Area ) The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and areas. The descriptions for lines can be applied for areas. Access In Data:, Lines page, press Edit... Edit Line, General page Store To store the changes. More To display End time and End date. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Line ID Editable field The name of the line can be edited. A line cannot be renamed to an already existing line ID. Points to store Selectable list Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data ) The type of points which are used to form the line during a survey can be edited. 98 Field Option Description Style Display only The line style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and LGO. Colour Display only A colour in which the line will be displayed. Number of points Display only The number of points contained within the line. Length Display only The sum of the distances between the points in the sequential order in which they are stored for the line. This length can be a horizontal grid distance or a geodetic distance on the WGS 1984 ellipsoid. Start date and Start time Display only The time/date when the line was created. An edited line retains the creation value for Start time. ) End date and End time Display only The time/date when the last point was added to the line. This can be different to the time the point was created. The values do not change after deleting the last added point or after editing unless an additional point is added to the line. Next step Page changes to the Points page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 99 Edit Line, Points page All points belonging to the line are listed. The point that was added last to the line is at the top of the list. Store To store the changes. Add To add an existing point from the working job to the line. A new point is added above the point which was highlighted when the key was pressed. The value for End time on the General page changes when a point was added to the line. Edit.. To edit the highlighted point. Remov To remove the highlighted point from the line. The point itself is not deleted. More To display information about the point codes if stored with the line, the time and the date of when the line was stored, the 3D coordinate quality, the class and the flag for Linework. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 100 Next step Page changes to the Code page. Edit Line, Code page The line code can be edited. All line codes can be selected. For Line code:None, the line style can be changed. The description of the code is shown as a display only field. The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on their definition. Next step Store stores the changes. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 101 5.5 Data Log Description A list of all objects and free codes in the working job is displayed in order of time. Access step-by-step Access within data management In Data:, Points page, press Fn Log.. to access Data Log. Access within job management In Job Properties:, General page, press Fn Log.. to access Data Log. Data Log In the column Data record, all points, lines and areas as well as free codes stored within the working job are displayed. They are always sorted by time with the most recent record at the top. For lines and areas, the value for Start time is relevant. OK To close the screen. New.. To insert a free code below/before the currently highlighted object or record. The functionality of inserting a free code is identical to the functionality of entering a free code during a survey. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 102 Edit.. To edit the highlighted object or free code. The functionality of editing a free code is identical to the functionality of entering a free code during a survey. Refer to "20.3 Free Coding". Delete To delete the highlighted object or free code. More To display information about the type of data recorded, the time and the date of when it was stored or for lines and areas when they were created and the codes if stored with any object. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step OK returns to the screen from where Data Log was accessed. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 103 5.6 Point Sorting and Filters 5.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas Description The sort settings define the order of the objects in the working job. The filter settings define the objects to be viewed. Three types of filters are available: Point filter: Line filter: Area filter: ) ) ) Access An active point filter shows selected points in Data:, Points page. An active line filter shows selected lines in Data:, Lines page. An active area filter shows selected areas in Data:, Areas page. The sort and filter settings are stored in the job. They are remembered after turning off the instrument. When a job becomes active, then the sort and filter settings of this job are saved in the internal memory. If the data storage device is formatted then these last used sort and filter settings are used for the job Default. When a new job is created, the sort and filter settings from what was the working job are copied to the new job. Changing the working job influences the sort and filter settings for the objects. The settings are changed to those of the selected job. An active filter for an object is indicated in Data: by * located on the right side of the page name. In Data: on the Points, Lines or Areas page, press Fn Filter.. to access Sorts & Filters. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 104 Sorts & Filters, Points page The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for Filter by. OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The selected sort and filter settings are applied. Codes.. Available for Filter by: Point code. To define the code filters. Refer to "5.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter". Stake.. To filter points for the Stakeout application. Refer to "5.6.3 Stakeout Filter". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Sort by Ascending point ID, Always available. The method points are sorted Descending point ID, by. Forward time or Backward time Always available. The method the points are filtered by. Filter by No filter Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data Description Shows all points. 105 Field Start ID Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data Option Description Highest class Shows points of highest class. Range of point IDs Shows points with point IDs between the entered start and end ID. The points are left aligned and sorted by the first digit. Pt ID wildcard Shows points with point IDs matching the wildcard. Time Shows points which were recorded within a defined time window. Class Shows points of the selected class. Instrument Shows points originating from the selected instrument or software program type. Coordinate type Shows points of the selected type of coordinates. Point code Shows points with selected codes attached. Radius from pt Shows points within the defined radius from a particular point. The radius is the horizontal distance. Individual line Shows points forming a selected line. This can be useful, for example, during stakeout. Individual area Shows points forming a selected area. This can be useful, for example, during stakeout. Editable field Available for Filter by: Range of point IDs. The first point to be displayed. 106 Field Option Description End ID Editable field Available for Filter by: Range of point IDs. The last point to be displayed. Wildcard Editable field Available for Filter by: Pt ID wildcard. * and ? are supported. * indicates an undefined number of unknown characters. ? indicates a single unknown character. Start date Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The date of the first point to be displayed. Start time Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The time of the first point to be displayed. End date Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The date of the last point to be displayed. End time Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The time of the last point to be displayed. Show or Hide Control (Ctrl), Adjusted (Adj), Reference (Ref), Average (Avge), Measured (Meas), Navigated (Nav), Estimated (Est), None Available for Filter by: Class. Defined classes are shown or hidden. View Available for Filter by: Class. Highest triplet Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data The coordinate triplets of the highest class are shown. 107 Field Option Description All triplets All classes for one coordinate triplet are shown. Instrument All, TPS, GPS, LEICA Available for Filter by: Instrument. Points origiGeo Office, Level, nating from this instrument type are shown. Controller, Third party SW or Unknown Type WGS84 only or Local Available for Filter by: Coordinate type. Points only from the chosen coordinate type are shown. Point ID Selectable list Available for Filter by: Radius from pt. The point to which the radius is applied. Opening the selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "5.2 Accessing Data Management". Radius Editable field Available for Filter by: Radius from pt. The radius of the circle within which the points are shown. Line ID Selectable list Available for Filter by: Individual line. Opening the selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "5.2 Accessing Data Management". Area ID Selectable list Available for Filter by: Individual area. Opening the selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "5.2 Accessing Data Management". Next step Page changes to the Lines page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 108 Sorts & Filters, Lines and Areas page OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The selected sort and filter settings are applied. Codes.. Available for Filter by: Code / code group. To select the line codes to be used. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Sort by Ascending line ID, Descending Always available. The method the lines are line ID, Forward start time, sorted by. Backward start time, Forward end time, Backward end time Always available. The method by which the lines are filtered. Filter by Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data Description No filter Shows all lines. Code / code group Shows lines with selected codes attached. 109 Next step OK closes the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 110 5.6.2 ) Access step-by-step Point Code Filter Point, Line and Area Code Filter For each object, a code filter exists. The point, line and area code filters are independent from each other. The functionality is identical. For simplicity, the point code filter is explained. Step Description 1. In Sorts & Filters select Filter by: Point code. 2. Codes.. to access Point Code Filter. This screen shows the point codes from the working job and codes currently used as filter. Point codes are sorted according to the settings in Sort Codes. OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Group To activate and deactivate code groups. Accesses Code Groups. Any code group that has been previously deactivated are displayed as deactivated here. Codes belonging to a deactivated code group are not displayed in Point Code Filter. Use To activate and deactivate the filter for the highlighted code. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 111 None or All To deactivate or activate all point codes. Fn Sort To define the order of the codes. Accesses Sort Codes. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 112 5.6.3 Stakeout Filter Description The settings on this screen define a filter for the Stakeout application. The Stakeout filter can be applied to show points which are already staked or points that are still to be staked. ) The stakeout filter acts in addition to any other filter set in Sorts & Filters. For example, points still to be staked out with a particular code can be filtered. Access In Sorts & Filters, Points page, press Stake.. to access Stakeout Filter. Stakeout Filter OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Reset To reset the staked flag for all points of the currently working job. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description View All points Shows all points. Points to stake Shows points not yet staked out. Staked points Shows points which are already staked out. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 113 6 Codelists 6.1 Overview ) It is recommended to create a codelist in LGO. A codelist can be transferred from LGO to the internal memory of the instrument using the data storage device. Steps from creating to using a codelist Instrument Codelist Management: Create codelist LGO Serial upload Tools: Transfer Data storage device System RAM: System RAM codelist Selecting codelist(s) for a job: Copy of codes Job: Job codelist The creating, editing and managing of codelists is explained in this chapter. In order to use a codelist on the instrument, it must be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory. Viva Series, Codelists 114 6.2 Access Codelists Accessing Codelist Management Step Description 1. Go to Job Properties:, Codelist page when creating a new job or editing an existing working or control job. 2. Open the selectable list for Codelist. Listed are all codelists stored in the internal memory. OK To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The codes from the highlighted codelist are copied to the working job. New.. To create a codelist. Refer to "6.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist". Edit.. To edit the highlighted codelist. Refer to "6.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist". Delete To delete the highlighted codelist. More To display information about the creator and the date of when the codelist was created. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Codelists 115 6.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist Access In Codelists press New.. or Edit... New Codelist or Edit Codelist Store To store the codelist. Codes.. To access Codes where codes can be created, edited or deleted and code groups can be accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Codelists Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the codelist. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input required. Description Editable field A detailed description of the codelist. This description can be, for example, work to be performed. Input optional. Creator Editable field The person’s name who is creating the codelist. Input optional. 116 6.4 Managing Codes 6.4.1 Accessing Codes Description Managing codes includes • creating new codes • viewing codes with their related information • editing codes • deleting existing codes. Access step-by-step Codes Step Description 1. In Codelists, highlight the codelist of the codes which are to be managed. 2. Edit.. to access Edit Codelist. 3. Codes.. to access Codes. Codes from currently active code groups are shown. The listed codes belong to the codelist selected from the internal memory when this screen was accessed through New job \ Codelist OR to the job codelist when this screen was accessed through Job properties \ Codelist. The * indicates codes which have attributes attached. Viva Series, Codelists 117 OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new code. Refer to "6.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code". Edit.. To edit the highlighted code. Refer to "6.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code". Delete To delete the highlighted code. More To display information about the code description, the quick codes if available, the code groups and the code type. Fn Group To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "6.5 Managing Code Groups". Fn Sort To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code or the last use. Viva Series, Codelists 118 6.4.2 ) ) ) New Code or Edit Code Viva Series, Codelists Creating/Editing a Code The values for code groups, codes and attributes are case sensitive. For example, the code group Tree is not the same as the code group TREE. Attribute names that have already been typed in cannot be edited in a job codelist. A new code can also be created within an application. In this case, the new code is added to the job codelist. Store To add the new code and any associated attributes to the codelist in the internal memory. +Attrib To add a new editable field for an attribute of attribute type normal and of value type text. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and the attribute value to be used as the default attribute value can be typed in. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 119 Description of fields Field Option Description Code Editable field A unique name for the new code. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input required. Description Editable field A detailed description of the code. This description can be, for example, the full designation if Code is an abbreviation. Input optional. Code group Selectable list The code group to which the code is to be assigned. Code type Selectable list Defines the use of the code. It can be used as thematical code for points, lines or areas or as a free code. Makes a code unique. A code can have the same value with different types within the same codelist. For example a code OAK can be of type Point, Line, Area and/or Free. Linework Viva Series, Codelists Selectable list Only available for Code type: Point. To allow a new line or new area to be opened whenever the point code is newly selected. This functionality is also available when creating codelists with LGO Codelist Management. None Select this option to disable the functionality. All other code settings on the instrument are not affected when this option is set. 120 Field Viva Series, Codelists Option Description Begin line When a point code is newly selected, a new line is opened and the point being stored is added to the line. When the same point code remains selected, a new line is not opened. The point being stored is added to the current line. Begin area The behaviour for opening a new area is the same as the behaviour for opening a new line. Style Selectable list Available for Code type: Line and Code type: Area. The style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and LGO. Attribute Editable field Up to twenty attributes can be created. ) Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed and of value type real or integer must be created in LGO. 121 6.5 Managing Code Groups Access In Codes, press Fn Group. Code Groups The listed code groups belong to the codelist selected from the internal memory when this screen was accessed through New job \ Codelist OR to the job codelist when this screen was accessed through Job properties \ Codelist. Codes from currently active code groups are shown. OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new code group. In New Code Group type in a unique name for Name. Store stores the new code group typed in and returns to Code Groups. Viva Series, Codelists 122 Edit.. Available for codelists in the internal memory. To edit the highlighted code group. In Edit Code Group type in the changes for Name. Store stores the changes and returns to Code Groups. Use To activate and deactivate the highlighted code group. Codes belonging to a deactivated code group are not displayed in Codes. None or All To deactivate or activate all code groups. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Viva Series, Codelists Column Description Code group The name of the code group. Activated Use code group or not. The codes belonging to a deactivated code group cannot be selected from the selectable list for code selection. Use changes between the options. 123 7 Coordinate Systems 7.1 Overview Description A coordinate system • consists of up to five elements. • allows the conversion from WGS 1984 geodetic or cartesian coordinates to, local cartesian, geodetic or grid coordinates and back. • can be attached to jobs. • can be manually defined. • can be computed in the field. • can be directly received from a reference network. Refer to "14.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection". • can be downloaded to LGO. • can be uploaded from LGO. Using coordinate systems on TPS Coordinate systems are used on TPS instruments to combine GPS data with TPS data. ) ) ) An attached coordinate system is not used to reduce any measured distance on a TPS instrument. All GPS surveyed points are always stored as WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates regardless of the coordinate system being used. Using a different coordinate system converts the coordinates displayed on the screen, but does not convert and restore the coordinate values in the database DB-X. Points surveyed with a TPS instrument are always stored in local GRID coordinates regardless of the coordinate system being used. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 124 GPS surveyed points are always stored as WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates regardless of the coordinate system being used. Using a different coordinate system converts the coordinates displayed on the screen, but does not convert and restore the coordinate values in the database DBX. ) One coordinate system can be attached to a job at one time. This coordinate system remains attached to the job unless it is changed. Default coordinate systems The default coordinate system is WGS 1984. It cannot be deleted. It is not possible to create a coordinate system called WGS 1984. Additional default coordinate systems may be available for certain countries. Active coordinate system The active coordinate system is the one attached to the working job. One coordinate system is always considered as the active coordinate system. Automatic coordinate system When Use auto coordinate system is checked in the RTK Rover Wizard, the coordinate system is directly received from the reference network. Refer to "14.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection". Coordinate systems when transferring jobs between GPS and TPS When transferring a job from GPS to TPS, or vice versa, the coordinate system stays attached to the job. It then appears like any other coordinate system on the instrument. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 125 7.2 Access Coordinate Systems Accessing Coordinate System Management Step Description 1. Go to Job Properties:, Coord system page when creating a new job or editing an existing working or control job. 2. Open the selectable list for Coord system. Listed are all coordinate systems stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown as -----. OK To select the highlighted coordinate system and to return to the previous screen. With a data storage device inserted, the selected coordinate system will be attached to the working job. New.. To create a coordinate system manually. Refer to "7.3 Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing". Edit.. To edit the highlighted coordinate system. Refer to "7.3 Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing". Delete To delete the highlighted coordinate system. Deletion is not possible if the highlighted coordinate system is active and its source is RTCM. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 126 More To display information about the type of transformation used, the type of heights computed, the number of control points used for the determination and the date of when the coordinate system was created. Fn Set-D Available unless a default coordinate system is highlighted. To turn the highlighted coordinate system into a user defined default coordinate system stored in the instrument. Fn Default To recall the deleted default coordinate systems. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 127 7.3 ) ) ) ) Access Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing Coordinate systems can be defined by manual creation or determined by calculation. In this chapter, the manual creation of coordinate systems is explained. Refer to "31 Determine Coordinate System" for information on the determination by calculation. Coordinate systems with a Classic 3D transformation can be defined by manual creation. The type of transformation of the selected coordinate system determines which elements of a coordinate system can be edited. The name of the coordinate system, the method of residual distribution and the geoid model in use are always editable. For coordinate systems with source RTCM, only the geoid model in use can be changed. However, if no projection is received with the automatic coordinate system, then the projection can also be defined. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. A copy of this coordinate system is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit... Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 128 New Coordinate System or Edit Coordinate System Store To store the coordinate system. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new coordinate system. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Available for transformations with control points. Manually entered transformations do not have control points. The method by which residuals are distributed throughout the transformation area. The transformation results become more realistic and any strain is dispersed in the transformation. Residuals 1/distance, 1/distance², 1/distance³/² Viva Series, Coordinate Systems Distribute the residuals of the control points according to the distance between each control point and the newly transformed point. 129 Field Option Description Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach. Transformation Selectable list The type of transformation. Pre Transform Selectable list Available when editing a coordinate system and for Twostep transformations. The name of a preliminary 3D transformation, which, together with the selected projection, is used to obtain preliminary grid coordinates for a final 2D transformation. Ellipsoid Selectable list Available unless projection Type: Customised. The local coordinates are based on this ellipsoid. Projection Selectable list The map projection. Geoid model Selectable list The geoid model. CSCS model Selectable list The Country Specific Coordinate System model. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 130 7.4 Transformations 7.4.1 Accessing Transformation Management ) Transformations cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to "Automatic coordinate system". Access step-by-step Transformations Step Description 1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. 2. Press New.. or Edit... 3. Highlight Transformation. 4. ENTER to access Transformations. Listed are all Classic 3D transformations stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown as -----. OK To select the highlighted transformation and to return to the previous screen. New.. To create a new transformation. Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation". Edit.. To edit the highlighted transformation. Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation". Delete To delete the highlighted transformation. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 131 More To display information about the type of heights computed and the number of control points used for the determination of the transformation. Fn Set-D To turn the highlighted transformation into a user-defined default transformation stored in the instrument. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 132 7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation ) Classic 3D transformations can be created. Access In Transformations, highlight a transformation. A copy of this transformation is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit... New Transformation or Edit Transformation, General page Store To store the transformation. Clear To set the editable fields to 0. Available on the Parameters and the Advanced page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new transformation. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Type Display only No other transformations than Classic 3D can be created. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 133 Next step Page changes to the Parameters page. New Transformation or Edit Transformation, Parameters page Enter the known values of the transformation parameters. New Transformation or Edit Transformation, Advanced page Select at least a height mode and a transformation model. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Description of fields Field Option Description Height mode Selectable list The type of heights to be computed. Model Selectable list The transformation model to be used. For Model:Molodensky-Badakus, additional editable fields are available. Next step Store stores the transformation. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 134 7.5 Ellipsoids 7.5.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management ) Ellipsoids cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to "Automatic coordinate system". Access step-by-step Ellipsoids Step Description 1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. 2. Press New.. or Edit... 3. Highlight Ellipsoid. 4. ENTER to access Ellipsoids. Listed are all ellipsoids stored in the database DBX. OK To select the highlighted ellipsoid and to return to the previous screen. New.. To create a new ellipsoid. Refer to "7.5.2 Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid". Edit.. To edit the highlighted ellipsoid. Refer to "7.5.2 Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid". Delete To delete the highlighted ellipsoid. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 135 Fn Set-D To turn the highlighted ellipsoid into a userdefined default ellipsoid stored in the instrument. Fn Default To recall the deleted default ellipsoids. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 136 7.5.2 Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid Access In Ellipsoids, highlight an ellipsoid. A copy of this ellipsoid is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit... New Ellipsoid or Edit Ellipsoid Store To store the ellipsoid. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new ellipsoid. A name is mandatory, can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Axis a Editable field The semi-major axis a. 1/f Editable field The reciprocal value of flattening f. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 137 7.6 Projections 7.6.1 Accessing Projection Management ) Projections cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to "Automatic coordinate system". Access step-by-step Projections Step Description 1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. 2. Press New.. or Edit... 3. Highlight Projection. 4. ENTER to access Projections. Listed are all projections stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown as -----. OK To select the highlighted projection and to return to the previous screen. New.. To create a new projection. Refer to "7.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection". Edit.. To edit the highlighted projection. Refer to "7.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection". Delete To delete the highlighted projection. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 138 Fn Set-D Available unless a default projection is highlighted. To turn the highlighted projection into a user-defined default projection stored in the instrument. Fn Default To recall the deleted default projections. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Option The projection type. Refer to standard surveying literature for details on projections. Type Viva Series, Coordinate Systems Description Customised Customised projection. Certain fixed projections which cannot be defined by any of the following options. Transverse Mercator Transverse Mercator. Conformal projection onto a cylinder with its axis lying on the equatorial plane. The cylinder is tangential to a meridian. UTM Universal Transverse Mercator. Transverse Mercator Projection with fixed zone-defining constants. The central meridian is selected automatically according to the selected zone number. Oblique Mercator Oblique Mercator. Oblique Mercator Conformal projection onto a cylinder. The cylinder is tangent to any circle other than the equator or a meridian. 139 Column Viva Series, Coordinate Systems Option Description Mercator Mercator. Conformal projection onto a cylinder with its axis lying on a meridian plane. The cylinder is tangent to the sphere along the equator. Lambert 1 parallel Lambert 1 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone, with its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid. Lambert 2 parallel Lambert 2 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone, with its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid. The cone is secant to the sphere. Cassini Soldner-Cassini. Projection onto a cylinder. It is not an equal area or conformal. The scale is true along the central meridian and along lines perpendicular to central meridian. Polar stereo Polar Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projection onto a plane. The point of projection is on the surface of the ellipsoid diametrically opposite of the origin which is the centre of the projection. Double stereo Double Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projection onto a plane. The point of projection is on the surface of the sphere diametrically opposite of the centre of the projection. RSO Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic. This is a special type of Oblique Mercator projection. 140 7.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection Access In Projections, highlight a projection. A copy of this projection is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit... New Projection or Edit Projection Store To store the projection. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new projection. A name is mandatory, can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 141 Field Option Description Type Selectable list The projection type. The setting for determines the availability of the subsequent fields for the parameters of the projection. Refer to "7.6.1 Accessing Projection Management" for a description of the projection types. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 142 7.7 Geoid Models 7.7.1 Overview Use in the field For use on the instrument in the field, geoid field files are created from the geoid model. Create geoid models on the instrument Geoid models can be created on the instrument in one of three ways: 1. 2. 3. The geoid field file is stored on a data storage device and can be used when the data storage device is inserted in the instrument. It is recommended for large geoid field files. This method is explained in this chapter. The geoid field file is stored in the internal memory of the instrument. It is recommended for large geoid field files. This method is also explained in this chapter. The geoid field file is transferred to the internal memory and can be used at any time. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects"for information on how to transfer geoid field files to the internal memory on the instrument. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 143 7.7.2 Access step-by-step Geoid Models Accessing Geoid Model Management Step Description 1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. 2. Press New.. or Edit... 3. Highlight Geoid model. 4. ENTER to access Geoid Models. Listed are all geoid models stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown as -----. For example, ----- would be shown if the geoid field file associated to the geoid model is not available on the data storage device / internal memory. OK To select the highlighted geoid model and to return to the previous screen. CF card To create a new geoid model. The \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage device is automatically scanned for geoid field files. Refer to "7.7.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage Device / Internal Memory". Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 144 Edit.. To view the highlighted geoid model. None of the fields can be edited. The geoid field file from which the geoid model was created must be stored in the internal memory or in the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage device. Delete To delete the highlighted geoid model. The geoid field file which was associated with this geoid model is then also deleted. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 145 7.7.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage Device / Internal Memory Requirement At least one geoid field file with the extension *.gem is in the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage device / internal memory. Create geoid model step-by-step Step Description 1. Listed in Geoid Models are all geoid models stored in the internal memory. OR Press CF card to scan the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage device. 2. For each geoid field file on the data storage device or in the internal memory, one geoid model is automatically created. The names given to the geoid models are those names which were entered in LGO. Existing geoid models are automatically overwritten by new models with the same name. ) 3. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems The creation of a geoid model is finished. 146 7.8 CSCS Models Use in the field For use on the instrument in the field, CSCS field files are created from the CSCS model. ) The creation of CSCS models on the instrument and the functionality of all screens and fields are similar to those for geoid models. Refer to " Requirement". The directory on the data storage device / internal memory for CSCS field files with the extension *.csc is \DATA\GPS\CSCS. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 147 8 Jobs & Data - Import data 8.1 Overview Description The data to import must be stored on the data storage device or in the internal memory. Data can be imported to a job • on the data storage device. • on the internal memory. Import formats Format Characteristic Description ASCII Import variables Point ID, grid coordinates, thematical codes. No free codes, no attributes. Format definition Free format. Use and order of variables and delimiter can be defined during import. Units As currently configured on the instrument Height Orthometric or ellipsoidal Specialities Local heights but no coordinates in file Points are imported without coordinates but with local height and code if available. Coordinates but no heights in Points are imported without height but with file coordinates and code if available. No coordinates or heights in No import file No point IDs in file Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data No import 148 Format Characteristic Description GSI8 GSI16 Import variables Point ID (WI 11), local coordinates (WI 81, WI 82, WI 83), thematical codes (WI 71). No free codes, no attributes. Example for GSI8: 110014+00001448 81..01+00001363 82..01-00007748 83..01-00000000 71....+000sheep Format definition Fixed format. Easting and Northing can be switched during import. Units As defined in the GSI file Heights Orthometric or ellipsoidal Specialities Local heights but no coordinates in file Points are imported without coordinates but with local height and code if available. Coordinates but no heights in Points are imported without height but with file coordinates and code if available. No coordinates or heights in No import file DXF Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data No point IDs in file No import Import variables Block, point, line, arc, polyline. Local coordinates. No free codes, no attributes. Format definition Fixed format (X/Y/Z). Units Not predefined. Heights Z value imported as orthometric. 149 Format Characteristic Description Specialities No coordinates or heights in No import file Checks Points are always imported with the class Ctrl and a coordinate quality of -----. Refer to "Appendix H Glossary". While importing points to a job, checks are performed against point ID, class and coding of points already existing in the job. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 150 8.2 Importing Data in ASCII/GSI Format Requirements At least one ASCII file with any file extension, is stored in the \DATA or \GSI directory of the data storage device. ) Access Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import ASCII data. Import ASCII Data OK To import the data. Config.. To define the format of the data to be imported. Edit.. To view the file from which data will be imported. Fn Hts.. To define how heights and the Easting are imported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description From Selectable list Defines from which storage device the data are imported. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 151 Field Option Description Data type to import Selectable list Defines if ASCII or GSI data are imported. From file Selectable list For Data type to import: ASCII data: All files in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. For Data type to import: GSI data: All files with extension *.gsi in the \GSI directory on the data storage device can be selected. To job Selectable list Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the working job. Header lines Selectable list This option allows up to ten header lines which can exist in an ASCII file to be skipped. Select the number of header lines. Next step Config.. accesses, depending on selection for Data type to import, either Configuration or Configuration (GSI). Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 152 Configuration OK To return to the previous screen. Default To recall the default import settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Delimiter Selectable list The separator between the import variables. Point ID position, Easting position, Northing position, Height position and Code position Selectable list Select the positions of the particular variables. An example is shown at the bottom of the screen. Available for Delimiter: Space. Multi Spaces Yes Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data For space delimited data having one space between the variables. 153 Field Number of lines/pt Option Description No For space delimited data having multiple spaces between the variables. Selectable list Available for Delimiter: Line feed. The number of lines used to describe each point. Next step Configuration (GSI) Step Description 1. OK leads back to Import ASCII Data. 2. Fn Hts.. to access Define Ht Type & Easting Import. Description of fields Field Option Description Switch WI81/WI82 Yes or No All WI 81 data, normally Easting, is imported as Northing and all WI 82 data, normally Northing, is imported as Easting. This coordinate switch is necessary for “left handed” coordinate systems. Definition of feet Selectable list The type of feet used in the GSI file. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 154 Next step Define Ht Type & Easting Import Step Description 1. OK leads back to Import ASCII Data. 2. Fn Hts.. to access Define Ht Type & Easting Import. Description of fields Field Option Description Delimiter Selectable list The height type for the imported data. Multi Spaces Selectable list The Easting can be imported as written in the ASCII file or it can be multiplied by -1. This change is required by some coordinate systems. OK leads back to Import ASCII Data. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 155 8.3 Importing Data in DXF Format Requirements At least one file in DXF format with the file extension *.dxf has to be stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device. ) Access Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import DXF Data. Import DXF Data OK To import the data. Config.. To define the format of the data to be imported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description From Selectable list Defines from which storage device the data are imported. From file Selectable list All files with extension *.dxf in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 156 Field Option Description To job Selectable list Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the working job. Next step Config.. accesses Configuration. Configuration Description of fields Field Option Description Block prefix Editable field Optional prefix to imported blocks. Point prefix Editable field Optional prefix to imported points. Line prefix Editable field Optional prefix to imported lines. File units Selectable list Choosing the unit for the DXF data to be imported. Create points at Selectable list the vertices of lines Option if points will be created at vertices of the imported line/arc/polyline elements. Convert white elements Selectable list Option if white coloured elements will be converted to black coloured elements. Height to exclude Selectable list Height values inside the DXF file are considered invalid and will not be converted. Next step OK leads back to Import DXF Data. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 157 9 Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 9.1 Overview Description Data can be exported • to a file on the data storage device. • to a file on the internal memory. Export format Format Characteristic Description ASCII Export variables Refer to the online help of LGO. Format definition Composed individually as format file using LGO. Refer to the online help of LGO for information on creating format files. Units Defined within the format file. Coordinate conversion All coordinate types are supported. Height All height types are supported. If the desired height cannot be computed, the default value for the missing variable is output. Specialities: Points in file outside of CSCS If the variable is missing, the default value is model output. Points in file outside of geoid If the variable is missing, or a geoid separamodel tion is available, the default value is output. DXF Coordinate conversion Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data All points are converted to local grid position using the coordinate system. 158 Format Characteristic Description Height Orthometric height and ellipsoidal height are supported. Specialities: Points in file outside of CSCS Points outside of CSCS model are not model exported. Points in file outside of geoid The ellipsoidal height is exported. model LandXML Coordinate conversion All points are converted to local grid position using the coordinate system. Height Orthometric height and ellipsoidal height are supported. Specialities: Points in file outside of CSCS LocalGrid position of the points outside of model CSCS model is not exported. Points in file outside of geoid The ellipsoidal height is exported. model FBK/RAW5/ RAW Coordinate conversion All points are converted to local grid position using the coordinate system. Height If a geoid model exists, then orthometric height is supported, otherwise ellipsoidal height is exported. Units Metre, US Ft or Int Feet, Gons, Dec Deg, DMS Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 159 9.2 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII Format Description The settings on this screen define the data that is converted and exported and what format is used. Data is exported from the selected job. Currently active view, filter and sort settings are applied. Requirements At least one format file was created using LGO and transferred to the internal memory. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export ASCII data. Export ASCII Data OK To select the highlighted format file. Config.. To configure the default extension to be used. Filter.. To define the order in which points, lines and areas are exported as well as which points are exported. CrdSys. To update the coordinate system in which the coordinates are exported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 160 Description of fields Field Option Description Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to. ) For Export to: Internal memory the data is always exported to the \DATA directory. Folder Selectable list Available for Export to: CF card, Export to: SD card and Export to: USB. The data can be exported to the \DATA, the \GSI or the root directory. Data must be stored to the \GSI directory to be read in a TPS instrument. Job Selectable list To select the job to export. Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. Format file to use Selectable list The format files currently available in the internal memory. Report sheet Editable field The name of the file to which the data will be exported. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 161 9.3 Exporting Data in DXF Format General Data can be exported to a DXF file in the \DATA directory of the data storage device or the internal memory. ) Access Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export DXF Data. Export DXF data OK To export the data. Config.. To define what is exported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to. Folder Selectable list Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data ) The data is always exported to the \DATA directory. 162 Field Option Description Job Selectable list To select the job to export. Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. Report sheet Editable field The name of the file to which the data will be exported. Next step Config.. goes to Configuration, Objects page. Configuration, Objects page OK To export the data. Filter.. To define the order in which points, lines and areas are exported as well as which points are exported. Refer to "5.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Points Check box When this box is checked, points are exported. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 163 Field Option Description Lines Check box When this box is checked, lines are exported. Areas Check box When this box is checked, areas are exported. Next step Page changes to the DXF page. Configuration, DXF page Description of fields Field Option Description Export lines & areas Selectable list Defines if lines and areas are exported as Line or Polyline entities. Export LGO symbols Editable field Defines if a block is created for each point with the same icons used in LGO. Symbol size Selectable list Defines the size used for creation of the LGO symbols. Dimensions Selectable list Defines the dimension of the DXF file. Export to DXF layer Selectable list Defines the DXF layer. Export LGO symbols Check box When this box is checked, the relevant symbols for LGO are also exported. Next step Page changes to the Labels page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 164 Configuration, Labels page OK To accept the settings. Edit.. To define the colour for each label and also the DXF layer name for user-defined labels. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Label The name of the label. Export Shows if the label is exported or not. Layer name The name of the layer that is exported. The information that is exported can be the point ID, the coordinates, the height or the point code. Colour The colour of the label. Decimals The number of decimals used. Next step Edit.. access Labels. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 165 The settings on this page define which labels with information (Point ID, Coords, Height and Pt Code) for each point are exported. Each label can be exported as separate layer or in the same layer as the point is exported. Additionally the decimals can be defined for the Coords and Height label. Labels Description of fields Field Option Description First field on screen Check box When this box is checked, labels for the point IDs, coordinates, heights or point codes are exported. Colour Selectable list Available when the check box in the first row is checked. Defines the colour for the label. Layer Selectable list When this box is checked, the label is exported as separate layer. Layer name Selectable list Available when Layer is checked. The name of the separate layer. Next step OK returns to Configuration. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 166 9.4 Exporting Data in LandXML Format General Data can be exported to a LandXML file in the \DATA directory of the data storage device or the internal memory. ) Access Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export LandXML Data. Export LandXML Data OK To export the data. Config.. To define what is exported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data ) The data is always exported to the \DATA directory. 167 Field Option Description Job Selectable list To select the job to export. Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. Report sheet Editable field The name of the file to which the data will be exported. Next step Config.. accesses Configuration, Export page. Configuration, Export page OK To return to the previous screen. Filter.. To set the sort and filter settings for export. Refer to "5.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Points Check box When this box is checked, points are exported. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 168 Field Option Description Lines Check box When this box is checked, lines are exported. Areas Check box When this box is checked, areas are exported. TPS measurements Check box When this box is checked, TPS observations are exported. GPS measurements Check box When this box is checked, GPS observations are exported. Codes Check box When this box is checked, point codes, line codes and area codes are exported. Free codes Check box When this box is checked, the free code, free code description, free code group and the free code attributes, are all exported to the LandXML file associated to each exported point. Next step Page changes to the LandXML page. Configuration, LandXML page Description of fields Field Option Description Dimensions Selectable list Defines the dimension of the exported entities. LandXML version Selectable list Defines the LandXML version of the file exported file. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 169 9.5 Exporting Data in FBK/RW5/RAW Format General Data can be exported to an AutoDesk FBK, TDS RAW, TDS RW5, Carlson RW5 or MicroSurvey RW5 file. The newly created file is stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device or the internal memory. The formatted FBK files can be imported directly into Autodesk products. The created RW5 and RAW files can be processed with various survey office packages. Although the export operation converts any job to an FBK/RW5/RAW file, the figure creation is based on existing lines and areas present in the job. Point codes Each point collected should have a point code. IF you are creating THEN Autodesk FBK file Point codes are used to match the Description Keys in Autodesk LDT and Civil 3D to each position located. TDS RW5 file Point codes are used to generate raw linework in TDS Foresight. MicroSurvey RW5 file Point codes are used to match the Description Keys in MicroSurvey CAD to each position located. Line/Area ID IF you are creating THEN Autodesk FBK file The figure ID follows the user selection as defined in the configuration menu. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 170 ) Access IF you are creating THEN TDS RW5 file The line and area IDs are not used when importing data into TDS Foresight. MicroSurvey RW5 file The line and area IDs are not used when importing data into MicroSurvey CAD 2005. Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export FBK/RW5/RAW data. Export FBK/RW5/RAW data OK To export the data. Config.. To configure some format-specific options. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 171 Description of fields Field Option Description Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to. Folder Display only The data is always exported to the \DATA directory. Job Selectable list To select the job to export. Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. Data format Autodesk FBK, TDS RW5, TDS RAW, Carlson RW5 or MicroSurvey RW5 Ensure that this field is set properly. File name Editable field Default is the name of the selected Job. It can be changed. The extension designation (.FBK, .RW5 or .RAW) is added automatically. ) Next step Config.. to access the configuration screen. Configuration, General page Description of fields Field Option Description Use numerical pt ID Check box Available unless Data format: TDS RW5. Pt ID offset Editable field The point IDs are offset by this value. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 172 Field Option Use angle right Check box Figure ID Selectable list Description Define if angle right values are exported. Available for Data format: Autodesk FBK. For all other formats, the figure ID is set to point code only automatically. Next step Page changes to the Objects page. Configuration, Objects page OK To return to Export FBK/RW5/RAW data. All To check all boxes at once. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 173 Description of fields Field Option Description All fields Check box To include points from an application, check a box. Next step OK returns to Export FBK/RW5/RAW data. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 174 9.6 Copy Data Between Jobs Description This chapter explains the process of copying data from one job to another. ) Access Important features: • Points are copied as defined by the point filter settings. • Points selected for copying can be viewed in a points listing. The point sort settings define the order of the points in the listing. The point filter settings define the points to be viewed in the listing. • Only points are copied - observation data is not copied. • When points are copied from one job to another: • the point codes and attached attributes are also copied. • the Class is retained. • the Sub class is retained. • the Source is changed to Copied Point. • the point coordinate quality is retained. • the Instrument Flag is retained. • the Date and Time is retained. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Copy data between jobs. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 175 Copy Data Between Jobs OK To copy a selection of points. Filter.. To define the point sort and/or point filter settings of points from the job. Refer to "5.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas". Data.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort and filter settings apply. Refer to "5 Jobs & Data - Data". CrdSys. To select a different coordinate system. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description From job Selectable list Describes where the points are to be copied from. Coord system Display only The coordinate system which is currently attached to the job. To job Selectable list Describes where the points are to be copied to. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 176 10 Instrument - TPS settings 10.1 Measure mode & target 10.1.1 Measure & Target Settings Description The settings on this screen define the active EDM Electronic Distance Measurement and ATR Automatic Target Recognition settings. ) Available options depend on the purchased model, for example with or without ATR. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Measure mode & target. Measure & Target Settings Description • This screen has two pages - the Survey page and the Setup page. • The Survey page and Setup page contain identical fields. • The settings made in the Survey page are used by all applications and all measurements taken outside of the Setup application. • The settings made in the Setup page are only used inside the Setup application. • Any changes made to the Measure & Target Settings, for example via icons or hotkeys, while the Setup application is active, only affect the Setup Measure & Target Settings. • Any changes made to the Measure & Target Settings, for example via icons or hotkeys, while the Setup application is not active, only affect the Survey Measure & Target Settings. • When entering the Setup application, the Setup Measure & Target Settings are active. • When leaving the Setup application, the Survey Measure & Target Settings are active. • Both Survey and Setup Measure & Target Settings are part of the working styles. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 177 Diagram OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Test To access the EDM Test Signal/Frequency screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Measure Prism All fields are set to the last used options. The infrared EDM exists for all instrument types and allows to measure the distance to a prism or a tape. For Target aiming: Automatic or Target aiming: Lock this option is automatically set. Any surface To measure without reflector. Standard Available for Measure: Prism. Standard single distance measurement. Single (fast) Available only for Measure: Prism. Fast single distance measurement. Measure mode Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 178 Field Option Description Continuous Continuous distance measurement. Long range (>4km) Available only for Measure: Any surface. Distance measurement over long distances. Single Available for Measure: Prism. Standard single distance measurement. Target Selectable list Target names as configured in the Targets screen. Leica constant Display only The additive constant as stored for the selected prism in the SmartWorx Viva software. Absolute constant Display only The true additive constant. Target aiming Manual Measurements are done without any automation. ATR search and/or ATR measurement are not performed. Automatic Positioning to static prisms. The ATR sensor is used for measurements to static prisms. If needed an ATR measurement or ATR search is performed after pressing Meas or Dist. Lock Unavailable for SmartStation. The instrument locks onto and follows the moving prism. The ATR sensor is used to follow moving prisms and to find prisms after loss of lock. Depending on Measure single or continuous measurements are performed pressing Meas or Dist. Good If weather conditions are normal, then select this mode. Visibility Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 179 Field Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings Option Description Rain & fog To increase the instrument measuring ability during suboptimal weather conditions. This mode has a considerable influence on the range (restriction to 100-150 m). This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off. Rain & fog always As for Rain & fog, however this mode stays active when the instrument is turned off. Sun & reflections To increase the instrument measuring ability during incident solar radiation and reflections. This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off. Sun & rflctns always As for Sun & reflections, however this mode stays active when the instrument is turned off. 180 10.1.2 Targets Description Each prism type has an absolute constant. Leica Geosystems prisms are predefined as defaults and can be selected. Additional prisms can be defined. Default targets Following default prisms are always available on the instrument: Product Name Name in list Type Leica constant Absolute constant GRZ4, GRZ122 Leica 360° Prism Prism +23.1 mm -11.3 mm GMP111-0 Leica Mini 0 Prism 0.0 mm -34.4 mm GRZ101 Leica Mini 360° Prism +30.0 mm -4.4 mm GMP101, GMP111 Leica Mini Prism Prism +17.5 mm -16.9 mm GZM29, GZM30, GZM31, Leica Reflectve CPR105 Tape Tape +34.4 mm 0.0 mm GPR1, GPR111, GPR113, Leica Round GPR121, GPH1P Prism Prism 0.0 mm -34.4 mm - RL +34.4 mm 0.0 mm +34.4 mm 0.0 mm Reflectorless MPR122 Leica HDS Target Prism For Machine Control purposes only! ) Access Open the selectable list for Target in Measure & Target Settings. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 181 Targets OK To select the highlighted target and to return to the previous screen. New.. To define a new target. Refer to "10.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target". Edit.. To edit the highlighted target. It is not possible to edit default targets. Refer to "10.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target". Delete To delete the highlighted target. It is not possible to delete default targets. More To display information about the additive constant, the target type and the creator of the target. Fn Default To recall previously deleted default targets and to reset default targets to the default settings. User-defined targets are not affected. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 182 10.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target Access In Targets, highlight a target. All constants are copied from this target. Press New.. or Edit... New Target Store To store the target. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A significant name for the new target. Type Prism, Tape or Undefined The type of target to be defined. Leica constant Editable field Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings The additive constant as stored for the selected prism in the SmartWorx Viva software. 183 Field Absolute constant Creator Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings Option Editable field Description ) The true additive constant. The additive constant is always in mm. ) Editable field An additive constant of 0.0 mm has been defined for the Leica Geosystems standard targets GPR1, GPR111, etc. All entered or selected additive constant values are differences to this 0.0 mm based Leica Geosystems TPS prism system. The additive constants of non-Leica Geosystems prisms are often given in the true zero prism system. Use the following formula to convert the additive constant to the Leica Geosystems TPS prism system. This Leica constant must be entered into the Leica instrument. Formula: True zero constant - 34.4 mm = Leica constant. It is highly recommended to check the additive constant for non-Leica Geosystems prisms on a baseline with an appropriate procedure. A name of the creator or other comments can be entered. 184 10.2 Prism search settings Description The settings on this screen define • the size of search windows for prisms to be searched in. The prisms can be searched with PowerSearch in the PowerSearch window or with ATR in the Fine search window. • the behaviour of automatic prism search after the target is lost in lock mode. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Prism search settings. Prism Search Settings, Target prediction page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Default To recall the default settings. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Time limit for predicting target location From 1 s to 5 s If the target is lost when Target aiming: Lock the path of the prism is predicted for the selected number of seconds. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings Description 185 Field Option If no target found Stop after prediction then searching Description Perform no search after prediction. Start fine search Perform search after prediction with ATR in a dynamic Fine search window. Start PowerSearch Perform search after prediction with PowerSearch. Activate PowerSearch on the PowerSearch window page. Turn to last msd pt If the target is lost when Target aiming: Lock, then the instrument turns back to the last stored point. The field of view is disabled while the instrument is repositioning. Next step Page changes to the PowerSearch window page. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 186 Prism Search Settings, PowerSearch window page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. New.. To define new PowerSearch window. Centre To centre the PowerSearch window to the current position of the telescope. Show To position the telescope to corners of PowerSearch window. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Use PowerSearch window Check box If checked, PowerSearch searches in the defined window. Hz angle left, Hz angle right, V angle up and V angle down Display only The left, right, upper and lower boundaries of the PowerSearch window. Minimum range No limit and from 25 m to 175 m Minimum distance of the search range for the PS window to be defined. Maximum range From 25 m to 175 m and No limit Maximum distance of the search range for the PS window to be defined. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 187 Next step Page changes to the Fine search window page. Prism Search Settings, Fine search window page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Default To recall the default settings. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Width of Hz search Editable field Horizontal extent of window. Height of V search Editable field Vertical extent of window. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 188 10.3 Atmospheric corrections Description The settings on this screen define the atmospheric ppm and the refraction. For standard applications, the distance is corrected due to atmospheric influences. The geometrical correction and the projection distortions are set to 0.00. Heights are reduced with the standard refraction coefficient. Refer to TPS1200+ User Manual for information on calculations. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Atmospheric corrections. Atmospheric Corrections, Atmospheric ppm page The atmospheric distance corrections are derived from the dry air temperature, air pressure or elevation above mean sea level MSL, and the relative air humidity or wet bulb temperature. OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn P<>E To change Pressure to Elev above MSL and back. Fn %<>T' To change Humidity to Temp wet-bulb and back. Fn ppm=0 To set Atmospheric ppm: 0.0. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 189 Description of fields Field Option Description Temperature Editable field Sets the temperature. Pressure or Elev above MSL Editable field Sets the atmospheric pressure or the elevation above mean sea level dependent on selection. Humidity or Temp wet-bulb Editable field Sets the relative air humidity or the wet bulb temperature dependent on selection. Atmospheric ppm Editable field The atmospheric ppm is either set or calculated from or display only the values in the previous fields. Next step Page changes to the Refraction page. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 190 Atmospheric Corrections, Refraction page The refraction correction is taken into account during the calculation of the height difference. OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Default To recall the default settings. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Use refraction coef- Check box ficient correction Coefficient (k) Editable field Description If checked, refraction correction is applied to measurements. Refraction coefficient to be used for calculation. Next step Page changes to another page. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 191 10.4 Level bubble & compensator Description If raw data is to be displayed and recorded, the compensator and the horizontal correction can be deactivated. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator. OR Tap / . Level Bubble & Compensator OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Intensity Scroll bar To adjust the intensity of the laser plummet. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 192 Field Option Description Tilt compensator On Vertical angles are relative to plumb line. The horizontal angle is corrected for the transversal tilt errors. Off The correction is turned off temporarily. Always off The mode stays always deactivated. On The horizontal angles are corrected for the line of sight and tilting axis. Off The correction is turned off temporarily. Always off The mode stays always deactivated. Hz correction Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 193 10.5 Quality control & offsets Description Quality control The instrument can be configured to monitor sequentially stored measurements and to notify the user if the coordinates lie within a defined range of each other. If configured, the X,Y coordinates of a point being stored can be compared to the coordinates of the last previously stored point. If the difference is less than the defined position tolerance then a warning is shown. It can now be decided whether to store the point or not. If configured, backsight target points and resection target points which were measured during the setup procedure are then also checked in this manner. Offsets The offset values are applied to measured points. The Offset function allows offset points to be determined, for instance when the reflector cannot be set up directly on a point. Transverse, longitudinal and/or elevation offsets can be defined from the reflector position to the offset point. All of the displayed and recorded measurement data is in relation to the offset point. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 194 P2 d6 d1 d2 d3 P1 d5 P3 P0 TS_003 Access d4 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 Station Current position Offset point Offset point Offset cross left Offset cross right Offset length towards instrument Offset length away from instrument Offset height down Offset height up Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Quality control & offsets. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 195 Quality Control & Offsets, Target QC page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Check for repeated meas- Check box urements to same target Target tolerance Editable field Description If checked, target checking is activated. The position tolerance. The units are defined by User\System settings\Regional settings. Next step Page changes to the Target offsets page. ) If configured in a survey screen page, the offset values appear also in the survey screen page in Survey. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 196 Quality Control & Offsets, Target offsets page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Offst=0 To set all offsets to 0.000. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Offset mode Reset after storing The offset values are reset to 0.000 after a point is measured with Store or Meas. Permanent The offset values are applied to every measured point until reset or changed. Offset left/right Editable field Sets cross offset of target point, perpendicular to the line of sight. Offset in/out Editable field Sets length offset of target point, in the direction of the line of sight. Offset height Editable field Sets height offset of target point. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 197 Next step Page changes to another page. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 198 10.6 Lights Description The settings on this screen allow the lights on the instrument to be configured. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Lights. Instrument Lights OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Use the red laser pointer Check box If checked, the red laser of the reflectorless EDM is turned on. Use the instrument guide lights (EGL) Checkbox If checked, the Emitting Guide Light (EGL) is turned on. This field is only available if EGL is fitted. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 199 Field Option Description Intensity From 0 % to 100 % To adjust the EGL/Laser Guide intensity using the left and right arrow keys. Use the reticule light Check box Intensity Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings From 0 % to 100 % If checked, the reticule illumination is turned on. To adjust the reticule illumination intensity using the left and right arrow keys. 200 11 Instrument - GPS settings 11.1 RTK rover wizard 11.1.1 Overview Description Using this wizard, the settings for a real-time rover behaviour are defined at one glance. These settings are stored in an RTK profile. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\RTK rover wizard. ) If RTK profiles exist, the wizard starts with the screen shown in this section. Otherwise, the wizard starts the process of creating a new RTK profile. In this case refer to "11.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile". RTK rover wizard Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 201 Next step IF you want to THEN create a new set of settings select Create a new profile, press Next and continue with "11.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile". select a different set select Load an existing profile, press Next and continue with of settings "11.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile". edit an existing set of select Edit an existing profile, press Next and continue with "11.1.4 settings Editing an Existing RTK Profile". Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 202 11.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile RTK rover wizard, Enter the RTK profile details Type in the name and a description for the new set of settings. Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 203 11.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile RTK rover wizard, Choose an RTK Profile Select an existing RTK profile from the selectable list. Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Delete Pressing this key deletes the RTK profile currently shown in the selectable list. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 204 11.1.4 Editing an Existing RTK Profile RTK rover wizard, Choose an RTK Profile Select the RTK profile to be edited from the selectable list. Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Delete Pressing this key deletes the RTK profile currently shown in the selectable list. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of fields Field Option Description Create a copy Check box Creates a copy before the editing process starts. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 205 11.2 Satellite tracking Description The settings on this screen define which satellite system, satellites and satellite signals are used by the instrument. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Satellite tracking. Satellite Tracking Status, Tracking page OK To accept changes. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description GPS L5 Check box Defines if the GPS L5 signal will be tracked. GLONASS Check box Defines if GLONASS satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. GALILEO Check box Defines if Galileo satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 206 Field Option Description COMPASS Check box Defines if Compass satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. Show message & audio warning, when loss of lock occurs Check box Activates an acoustic warning signal and a message given by the instrument when satellites are lost. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Satellite Tracking Status, Advanced page OK To accept changes. Hlth.. Available for Satellite health: User defined. To configure the satellites used in the survey. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 207 Description of fields Field Option Description Cut-off angle Editable field Sets the elevation in degrees below which satellite signals are not recorded and are not shown to be tracked. Recommended settings: • For real-time: 10°. • For purely post-processing applications: 15°. DOP limit None, GDOP, HDOP, PDOP or VDOP If activated, the limit defined in Limiting value is checked. GPS positions are unavailable when the limit is exceeded. Limiting value Editable field The maximum acceptable DOP value. Available unless DOP limit: None. Sets the satellite tracking behaviour. Satellite health Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings ) This setting is remembered when the instrument is turned off. It is stored as part of the configuration set. Automatic Incoming satellite signals are monitored by the instrument. Data from signals which are flagged as unhealthy is not recorded or used for real-time computations. User defined Satellites must manually be included/excluded from data recording and real-time computations with Hlth... 208 Next step Hlth.. changes to Satellite Health. Satellite Health This screen consists of the GPS page, Glonass page and the Galileo page. The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for all pages. OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Use To change between the options in the column User. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Option Description Satellite 01 to 32 The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS, 1 to 32), the Slot ID (GLONASS, 1 to 24) or the Space Vehicle number (Galileo, 1 to 30) of the satellites. There is a prefix G for GPS satellites, a prefix R for GLONASS satellites and a prefix E for Galileo satellites. System OK, N/A or Unhealthy Information on the satellite health taken from the almanac. N/A stands for not available. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 209 Column Option Description User Bad Excludes satellite from tracking. OK Includes satellite in tracking. Auto Automatic satellite tracking when satellite is healthy. Next steps Step Description 1. Page changes to the Glonass page and to the Galileo page, where GLONASS satellites and Galileo satellites used in the survey can be configured. 2. OK returns to Satellite Tracking Status. 3. OK returns to Main Menu. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 210 11.3 Antenna heights 11.3.1 Rover Antenna Heights Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Antenna heights. Rover Antenna Heights OK To return to the Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Rover antenna Selectable list Leica Geosystems antennas are predefined as default and can be selected from the list. Default antennas contain an elevation dependent correction model. New antenna correction models can be set up and transferred to the instrument using LGO. Open the list to define or edit additional antennas. Refer to "12 Antenna Heights". Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 211 Field Option Description Vertical offset Display only The vertical antenna offset for the selected antenna. Antenna height Editable field when measuring points Sets the default antenna height for the current working style. This height is then also the default antenna height during the use of applications. The antenna height can still be changed during a survey. The change will not update this default height. The initial value depends on the selected antenna. Antenna height Editable field when moving Sets the default antenna height for auto points and for the moving part of a track when logging raw observations. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 212 11.3.2 Antennas Description Listed are antennas in the instrument’s System RAM. Access Open the selectable list for Rover antenna in Rover Antenna Heights. Antennas OK To select the highlighted antenna and to return to the previous screen. New.. To define a new antenna. Refer to "11.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna". Edit.. To edit the highlighted antenna. It is not possible to edit default antennas. Refer to "11.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna". Delete To delete the highlighted antenna. It is not possible to delete default antennas. Fn Default To recall previously deleted default antennas and to reset default antennas to the default settings. User-defined antennas are not affected. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 213 11.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna Access In Antennas, highlight an antenna. All offsets are copied from this antenna. Press New.. or Edit... New Antenna or Edit Antenna, General page Store To store the antenna. Clear To set the editable fields to 0. Available on the Parameters and the Advanced page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new antenna. Hz offset Editable field Horizontal offset of measurement reference point. Vertical offset Editable field Vertical offset of measurement reference point. L1 phase offset Editable field Offset of L1 phase centre. L2 phase offset Editable field Offset of L2 phase centre. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 214 Field Option Copy additional Check box corrections Description Allows additional corrections to be copied from the antenna which was highlighted before this screen was accessed. Next step Page changes to the IGS page. New Antenna or Edit Antenna, IGS page The combination of values typed in here provides a unique standardised ID for the antenna being used. Description of fields Field Option Description IGS name Editable field The International GPS/GNSS Service name of the antenna. Serial number Editable field The serial number of the antenna. Setup number Editable field The setup number of the antenna. Identifies the version number of the current calibration. Next step Store stores the new antenna. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 215 11.4 Quality control Description The settings on this screen define the limits for coordinate quality accepted for point occupations. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control. Quality Control, General page OK To accept changes. Param.. To configure the time interval after which a point occupation can be stopped automatically. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Automatically stop point measurement Check box Activates a selectable list for the stop criteria. Stops the measurements automatically when the parameter defined for Stop criteria reaches 100 %. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 216 Field Option Description Defines the method used for Automatically stop point measurement. The setting determines the computation and value to be shown in the survey screen mask and in the status screen. Parameters for the selected method are defined with Param... Stop criteria Accuracy or Posi- Available when working with real-time device. tions Records observations between pressing Meas and Stop. Recommended for normal real-time applications. Refer to the diagram below. Immediately Records the time tag when Meas is pressed. A coordinate is interpolated between the positions at the neighbouring two epochs to filter out effects of slight movement. Recommended when measuring positions of objects while the antenna is moving. Example: Measuring the position of lampposts by driving in a car along the road and pressing Meas when the car is next to the lamppost. Refer to the diagram below. Time, ObservaAvailable when working without real-time device. tions or Number of satellites Automatically store point Check box Stores points automatically after stopping the point occupation. Check quality before storing Check box If activated, the limit defined in Tolerance is checked before storing a point. A warning signal is given when the limit is exceeded. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 217 Field Option Description Check Position only, Height only or Position & height The type of coordinate quality to be checked before storing a point. Tolerance Editable field The maximum acceptable coordinate quality. Stop criteria: Accuracy or Positions b c a 1 2 GS_046 Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 3 d 4 5 a) b) c) d) Time in epochs Meas pressed Stop pressed Post-processed coordinates computed by averaging resulting positions of epochs 2 and 3 218 Stop criteria: Immediately b c a 1 2 3 4 5 5 f 2 1 GS_047 e 4 3 d a) Time in epochs b) Meas pressed and point coordinates polated based on epochs 2 and 3 c) Meas pressed and point coordinates polated based on epochs 4 and 5 d) Plan view e) Meas pressed and point coordinates polated based on epochs 2 and 3 f) Meas pressed and point coordinates polated based on epochs 4 and 5 interinter- interinter- Next step IF parameters for Stop criteria THEN are not to be configured Page changes to the Advanced page. are to be configured Param.. changes to Parameters for Auto Stop or Real-Time Stop Criteria. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 219 Quality Control, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Automatically start measuring No point on entering survey Description Starts point occupation when pressing Meas. Yes Starts point occupation automatically when entering the survey screen. All subsequent points must be occupied by pressing Meas. Timed Starts point occupation automatically at a certain time. Next step OK closes the screen. Parameters for Auto Stop The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for Stop criteria. OK To accept changes. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 220 Description of fields Field Option Description Time at point Editable fields Sets the required observation time for each point. Counting time starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops measuring when the set length of time is reached. Number of obs Editable fields Sets the required number of observations that are to be recorded at each point. Counting observations starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops measuring when the set number of observations is reached. At logging rate Display only Displays the rate at which static raw observations are logged as configured. 8+ satellites for, 7 satellites for, 6 satellites for, 5 satellites for and 4 satellites for Editable field Sets the required observation time depending on the number of satellites available. Counting time starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops measuring when the set length of time for a certain number of satellites is reached. Should the number of available satellites change during observation, the observations already recorded will be taken into account. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 221 Next step Step Description 1. OK closes the screen. 2. OK returns to the screen from where Parameters for Auto Stop was accessed. Observation time depending on the number of satellites available a d c b b b 6 5 4 e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GS_048 a) b) c) d) e) Meas is pressed. Counting time starts. Observation is stopped. 40 % for five satellites. 30 % for five satellites. 30 % for four satellites. Thin line represents 6 satellites for: 3 min. Bold line represents 5 satellites for: 5 min. Dashed line represents 4 satellites for: 7 min. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 222 a d c b b b 6 5 4 e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GS_048 Thin line represents 6 satellites for: 3 min. Bold line represents 5 satellites for: 5 min. Dashed line represents 4 satellites for: 7 min. a) b) c) d) e) Meas is pressed. Counting time starts. Observation is stopped. 40 % for five satellites 30 % for five satellites 30 % for four satellites Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 223 Real-Time Stop Criteria The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for Stop criteria. OK To accept changes. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Pos quality Editable field better than and Ht quality better than Sets the maximum position and height qualities for each point occupation. Calculating the qualities starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops measuring when the position and height qualities are both less than the configured values. Editable field Raw data is logged for a minimum number of positions even when the Pos quality better than and Ht quality better than is already less than the specified maximum. Positions Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 224 Field Option Description Position update Display only Displays the value for GPS postion update rate as configured in Instrument\Instrument status info: Position. No. of positions Editable field Sets the number the positions which must be observed before the instrument stops measuring. Counting the number of positions starts when Meas is pressed. Next step OK closes the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 225 11.5 Raw data logging Description Logged raw observations are used for • static and kinematic operations. With these operations, raw data is always post-processed in the office. Raw data must therefore be logged on both base and rover instruments. • real-time operations to check the work in the office by post-processing. OR to fill in gaps when a real-time position could not be calculated in the field, for example, due to problems with the real-time data reception. Observations must be logged on all instruments which will be used for post-processing. The settings on this screen define the logging of raw observations. Access To log raw data, a licence key is required. The licence key can only be loaded from an SD card using the Webserver or myWorld@Leica Geosystems. The licence for raw data logging is required to log GNSS raw data on the GS10/GS15 or on a field controller. The licence for RINEX logging is required to log RINEX data on the GS10/GS15. Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Raw data logging. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 226 Raw data logging settings OK To accept changes. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Log data for postprocessing Check box Activates raw data logging. Log data to Controller or GS sensor Data can either be logged to the field controller or to the antenna. Logging starts Selectable list Available for Log data to:GS sensor. Data logging can start as soon as the instrument is turned on or only while in the Survey application. Log data when Static Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings Raw observation logging during static intervals when occupying a point. The instrument has to be stationary. 227 Field Option Description Static & kinematic Raw observation logging during static and moving intervals. For post-processed kinematic rover operations. Rate Kinematic Raw observation logging during moving intervals. For post-processed kinematic antenna operations. From 0.05s to 300.0s Rate at which raw observations are logged. Recommendations: Data type Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings Selectable list • The maximum logging rate using Bluetooth on the field controller is 0.2 s. • For static operations with long baselines and over long time Rate: 15.0s or Rate: 30.0s. • For base stations for post-processed and realtime kinematic rovers, Rate at the base should be the same rate as at the rover. • For initialisation while static and occupying distinct points in kinematic chains Rate between 0.1s and 2.0s. Available for Log data to:GS sensor. Data can be logged in the Leica proprietary MDB format or in RINEX. 228 12 Antenna Heights 12.1 Overview Description The height of the GNSS antenna above a point consists of three components: • • • the vertical or slope height reading, the vertical offset, the vertical phase centre variations. For most operations, pre-configured standard settings in the instrument can be used. They automatically take the vertical phase centre variations into account. Vertical or slope height Only vertical antenna heights measured to the Mechanical Reference Plane are accepted. Measurements required This table is an overview of required measurements depending on antennas, setup and accessories. All former Leica antenna types are supported. IF the antenna is AND the accessories are AND the setup is THEN the measurements required are Leica antenna, for example GS15 standard Leica tripod vertical height from height hook Leica antenna, for example GS15 standard Leica pole none. Value is 2.00 m. Leica antenna, for example GS15 standard Leica pillar vertical height to the MRP. Leica antenna, for example GS15 non-Leica any • Viva Series, Antenna Heights vertical height to the MRP. 229 IF the antenna is non-Leica antenna Vertical phase centre variations AND the accessories are standard Leica OR non-Leica AND the setup is THEN the measurements required are any • possibly vertical offset. • vertical height to the MRP. possibly vertical offset. • • phase centre variations. • horizontal offset if a slope height reading. For Leica antennas: Are handled automatically in the standard antenna records. For non-Leica antennas: Can be stored in a newly created antenna record. OR Antenna records including azimuth and elevation-dependent corrections must be created using LGO. The antenna calibrations to determine the phase centre variations were executed by Geo++® GmbH. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 230 12.2 Mechanical Reference Planes, MRP General The Mechanical Reference Plane • • • is where the antenna heights are measured to. is where the phase centre variations refer to. varies for different antennas. GS15 GS_031 Viva Series, Antenna Heights a a) The mechanical reference plane is the underside of the threaded metal insert. 231 AX1201/AX1203+ GNSS GS_032 Viva Series, Antenna Heights a a) The mechanical reference plane is the underside of the threaded metal insert. 232 12.3 Determining Antenna Heights 12.3.1 Pillar Setup ) • • One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica antenna types are supported. Leica standard accessories are used. Pillar setup a b c d a) b) c) d) GS_033 Viva Series, Antenna Heights Mechanical reference plane Vertical phase centre offset for L1 Vertical phase centre offset for L2 Vertical height reading Vertical offset = 0 233 Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the pillar benchmark and the mechanical reference plane of the antenna. Normally, it is determined indirectly by levelling. Determine the antenna height step-by-step Sometimes, it is difficult to measure to the MRP directly. Step Description 1. Determine the height difference between the pillar benchmark and a surface on the carrier. 2. Look up the height difference between this surface on the carrier and where the MRP of the antenna sits on the carrier. 3. Add the values determined in step 1. and 2., to get the vertical height reading. 4. For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.00 m. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 234 40 mm GS_038 GRT247 carrier, preferred for GS15 Viva Series, Antenna Heights 109 mm 36.5 mm 145.5 mm Carrier and adapter dimensions GS_036 GRT146 carrier. 235 9.3 mm 99.7 mm 36.5 mm 145.5 mm GS_037 GRT144 carrier with GAD31 screw-to-stub adapter. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 236 Next step • • • ) ) At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument. The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pillar setup and will automatically be taken into account. Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations. For carriers other than those carriers shown in the diagram above, the dimensions must be determined. Except for Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset must be measured. This value must be entered in the antenna setup record. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 237 12.3.2 Tripod Setup ) • • One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica antenna types are supported. Leica standard accessories are used. Tripod setup a c b d e GS_034 Viva Series, Antenna Heights a) b) c) d) e) Mechanical reference plane Vertical phase centre offset for L1 Vertical phase centre offset for L2 Vertical offset Vertical height reading 238 Vertical height reading Determine the antenna height step-by-step Next step The vertical height reading is the height difference between the ground mark and the bottom end of the height hook. It is determined using the height hook. Step Description 1. Determine the vertical height reading using the height hook. 2. For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.36 m. • • • ) ) ) At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument. The vertical offset of 0.36 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a tripod setup and will automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered. Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations. For other than the carriers shown in the diagram above, the dimensions must be determined, the vertical offset must be adapted and entered into a new antenna record. For other height measurement devices than the height hook, the dimensions must be determined and the vertical offset must be adapted. For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must be entered in the antenna setup record. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 239 12.3.3 Pole Setup ) • One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica antenna types are supported. Leica standard accessories are used. • Pole setup a c b d a) b) c) d) GS_035 Viva Series, Antenna Heights Mechanical reference plane Vertical phase centre offset for L1 Vertical phase centre offset for L2 Vertical height reading Vertical offset = 0 240 Vertical height reading Determine the antenna height step-by-step Next step The vertical height reading is the height difference between the bottom end and the top end of the pole. Usually, this height difference is a fixed value. Step Description 1. The vertical height reading for • the Leica standard pole consisting of an upper and a lower half is 2.00 m. • the Leica standard pole consisting of an upper and a lower half with an additional 1.00 m pole section added is 3.00 m. • the lower half of the pole alone is 1.00 m. 2. For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.00 m. • • • ) ) At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument. A standard rover configuration with a standard antenna setup record for a pole setup uses the value of 2.00 m already as default. The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pole setup and will automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered. Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations. For other than the Leica standard poles, the dimensions must be determined. For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must be entered in the antenna setup record. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 241 12.4 SmartStation Setup ) • • • A SmartStation setup requires that the user configures Rover antenna: GS15SmartStn in Rover Antenna Heights. This configuration will ensure the correct vertical offset is applied to the antenna heights. For a SmartStation setup, the antenna height value in the GPS survey screen must equal the value for Instrument height. Instrument height is seen in the preceding Set Station Point. Leica standard accessories are used. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 242 SmartStation setup a b c d e GS_078 Viva Series, Antenna Heights a) b) c) d) e) Mechanical reference plane Vertical phase centre offset for L1 Vertical phase centre offset for L2 Vertical offset Instrument height reading 243 13 Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 13.1 Starting the TPS Connection Wizard Description This chapter explains how the field controller can be connected with a total station using a wizard. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument connections\TPS connection wizard. TPS Connection Wizard Step 1 Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Manufacturer Selectable list The brand of the instrument. Model Selectable list The instrument model. Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 244 Field Option Description Connect using Cable, Bluetooth or Internal radio How the instrument is connected. The options available depend on the selection for Model. Next step Next changes to the next screen. IF THEN connected via cable refer to Connection Using Cable. connected via Bluetooth refer to Connection Using Bluetooth. connected via internal radio refer to Connection Using Internal Radio. Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 245 13.2 Connection Using Cable Description The connection settings must be specified. TPS Connection Wizard Step 2 Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Default To return the fields back to their default values. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Baud rate From 1200 to 115200 Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device in bits per second. Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data. Data bits 6, 7 or 8 Number of bits in a block of digital data. Stop bit 1 or 2 Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data. Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 246 Field Option Description Flow control None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake. When the instrument/device is ready for data, it asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the data. Next step Next and follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 247 13.3 Connection Using Bluetooth Description The screen shown depends on whether a last used Bluetooth ID is available for the chosen instrument model. TPS Connection Wizard Step 2 This screen is displayed if the chosen instrument model has a previously used Bluetooth ID already stored. Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Search To search for a different total station. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 248 Total Station Connections - Step 2 This screen is displayed if the chosen instrument model has NO previous used Bluetooth ID already stored. Move the focus using the arrow keys or the stylus to select a Bluetooth device. Next To connect to the selected device and continue to the next screen. Search To search for a different total station. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 249 13.4 Connection Using Internal Radio TPS Connection Wizard Step 2 Description of fields Field Option Description Link number Editable field The assigned channel number. Set as Remote or Base ) The radio modules inside the field controller and the TPS instrument must be set to opposite settings. It is recommended to set the field controller to Remote and TPS instrument to Base. Next step Next and follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 250 14 Instrument connections - All other connections 14.1 Accessing Configuration Connections Description The instrument has various connections which can be configured to be used with different ports and devices. The configuration varies depending on the individual application. Access For RTK rover and TPS: • Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument connections\All other connections. For RTK base: • Select Main Menu: Base connections\Instrument connections\All other connections. Connection Settings The screen gives an overview of all connections with the currently assigned port and device. For an RTK rover, this screen consists of the CS connections and the GS connections page. OK To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Edit.. To configure the parameters related to the highlighted connection. Refer to the sections on each individual connection in this chapter. Cntrl.. Available for certain devices connected to certain connections. To configure additional parameters related to the highlighted device. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 251 Fn Conect and Fn Disco Available for a real-time connection configured to use an Internet connection. To dial the number of another station configured in the active working style and to hang up again. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 252 14.2 CS Internet / GS Internet Description The Internet connection • allows accessing the Internet using the field controller or the instrument plus normally a GPRS device. • can be used together with the real-time connection to receive real-time data from, for example, an Ntrip Caster via Internet communication. Refer to "27 NTRIP via Internet" for information about Ntrip. The settings on this screen define the port and parameters required for accessing the Internet. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight CS Internet. Edit... • In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight GS Internet. Edit... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, select GS Internet. Edit... For TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight CS Internet. Edit... Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 253 Internet Connection, Internet page Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Available if CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Available if the Internet connection is activated. Page To change to another page on this screen. Available if the Internet connection is activated. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 254 Description of fields Field Option Description Use Internet connection on CS or Use Internet connection on GS Check box Activates the Internet connection. The ports available for connection to the Internet. Connect using CS Internal GSM An internal port in the field controller. This port has a “fixed” device. CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. CS Bluetooth 1 and The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will CS Bluetooth 2 be used for the connection functionality. GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box. For GS15: The red LEMO port. GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box. For GS15: The black LEMO port. GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box. For GS15: The port for the slot devices. Device Display only The name of the selected device. Use user ID & password for Internet connection Check box If checked, a user ID and a password can be typed in. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 255 Field Option Description User ID Editable field Some providers ask for a user ID to allow connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a user ID must be used. It is possible to show/hide the User ID. Password Editable field Some providers ask for a password to allow connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a password is required. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Internet Connection, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Description Use static IP address Check box In order to get access to the Internet, an IP address is required. This IP address identifies the instrument in the Internet. This option should only be checked if a static IP address is available for the instrument. The IP address to get access to the Internet is provided by the network provider permanently. Each time the instrument wants to access the Internet via the device the same IP address identifies the instrument. This behaviour is important if the instrument is used as a TCP/IP server. IP address Editable field Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections Available if Use static IP address is checked. To set the IP address. 256 Next step OK returns to the screen from where Internet Connection was accessed. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 257 14.3 GPS Rover / Base Sensor Description To connect the field controller to the sensor (antenna) either on the base or on the rover side. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight GPS Rover. Edit... • Select Instrument\Instrument connections\GPS connection. For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, select Base Sensor. Edit... • Select Instrument\Base connections\Connect to base sensor. GPS Connection / Connect to Base Sensor OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Available if Use Bluetooth is activated. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 258 Description of fields Field Option Description Use Bluetooth Check box Activates the Bluetooth connection. Last used rover Display only Available for RTK rover. The name of the selected Bluetooth device. Last used base Display only Available for RTK base. The name of the selected Bluetooth device. Bluetooth ID Display only Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections The ID of the selected Bluetooth device. 259 14.4 ASCII Input 14.4.1 Configuration of an ASCII Input Connection Description The ASCII Input connection receives ASCII messages from third-party devices such as depth sounders, barometers, digital cameras, pipe detectors, Geiger counters, etc. The ASCII messages are stored as annotations together with the next manually measured point and/or auto point. After receiving the ASCII message, a reply can be sent back to the device as confirmation. The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used and the type of ASCII messages to be written to individual annotations. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight ASCII Input. Edit... ASCII Input, ASCII input page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Devce.. Available when Receive ASCII data via a device is checked. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 260 Fn Cmnd.. To configure a message to be sent through the configured port to the device. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Receive ASCII data via a device Check box Activates the ASCII input connection. Connect using CS Bluetooth 1 and The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will CS Bluetooth 2 be used for the connection functionality. CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. Device Display only The name of the device selected for ASCII input. End of message CR, LF or CR/LF The character to be used to identify the end of the incoming ASCII message. Next step Page changes to the Annotation 1/Annotation 2/Annotation 3/Annotation 4 page. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 261 ASCII Input, Annotation 1/Annotation 2/Annotation 3/Annotation 4 page Description of fields Field Option Description Store ASCII data to this annotation Check box If checked, ASCII messages are recorded with the selected annotation. Message desc Editable field The description for the ASCII message being received. This description is then displayed in other screens, for example in the status screen. Message ID Display only The message ID to identify a particular ASCII message coming from the device. The message is then saved to the annotation. The following characters can be used as filter: ^ To accept strings starting with the subsequent characters. For example, ^1 accepts 12 but not 21. $ To accept strings ending with the preceding characters. For example, 1$ accepts 21 but not 12. . To accept any character except newline. [ ] To accept a set of characters. For example, [0-9] accepts all numbers. Any characters to accept strings that include the characters at any position. For example 1 accepts 1234, 4321 or 2134 but not 2345. Prefix '@ @' when writing Check box Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections Stores the description in Message desc as prefix to the ASCII message. This prefix helps to more easily identify the annotations registered with a point. 262 Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 263 14.4.2 Configuration of a Command to the Device Access For RTK rover: • In ASCII Input, ASCII input page, Fn Cmnd... Send Command to Device OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Send To send the command to the device. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Command Editable field A message to be sent to the device through the configured port when the survey or stakeout application is accessed. This functionality, for example, allows the device to be started remotely. The last used command that was entered is remembered as part of the active working style. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 264 14.5 GPS Hidden Pt Description Hidden point measurement devices are used for measuring to points which cannot be directly measured with GPS, for example house corners or trees. The measurements made with a hidden point measurement device are directly transferred to the instrument for the calculation of the coordinates of the hidden point. They can also be entered manually. The settings on this screen define the port, the device and estimated qualities to be used for the hidden point connection. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight GPS Hidden Pt. Edit... Hidden Point Connection OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Offset.. To configure the height and external angle offsets. Search Available when a Bluetooth port and device is selected. To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 265 Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Use a device to Check box measure hidden points Connect using Description To compute a hidden point with height. Activates the hidden point connection. If not checked, the measured values must be entered manually. CS Bluetooth 1 and The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will CS Bluetooth 2 be used for the connection functionality. CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. Device Display only The name of the selected hidden point device. Bluetooth ID Display only Available if CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. The Bluetooth ID of the hidden point device. The method which is suggested first when starting the Survey Hidden Points application. Default method Bearing & distance The distance and bearing from the known point to the hidden point are to be determined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. The auxiliary point can be measured in the direction from the known point to the hidden point. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 266 Field Option Description Using 2 bearings The bearings from the known points to the hidden point are to be determined. Auxiliary points help compute the bearings which might not be known. Auxiliary points can be measured in the direction from the known points to the hidden point. Using 2 distances The distances from the known points to the hidden points are to be determined. The location of the hidden point relative to the line between the two known points is to be defined. Chainage & offset The chainage from one known point along the line between the two known points must be determined. The offset of the hidden point to the line between the two known points must be determined. Back brng & distance The distance and the bearing from the hidden point to the known point are to be determined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. An auxiliary point can be measured in the direction from the hidden point to the known point. Set 2DCQ to Editable field The estimated value for the position quality assigned to all hidden points. This value must be estimated because hidden point measurement devices do not output position qualities. Compute height for hidden points Check box Select to compute a hidden point with height. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 267 Field Option Description Set 1DCQ to Editable field Available when Compute height for hidden points is checked. The estimated value for the height quality assigned to all hidden points. Next step IF height and external angle/distance offsets THEN are not to be configured OK closes the screen and returns to the screen from where Hidden Point Connection was accessed. are to be configured Offset... Hidden Point Device Offsets OK To accept changes and to return to Hidden Point Connection. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 268 Description of fields Field Option Description Distance offset Editable field The offset is automatically added to the measured distance. Height offset Available when Compute height for hidden points is checked in Hidden Point Connection. None No height offsets are used. The result is the delta height between the centre of the device and the aimed point. Device height When measuring hidden points, the height of the hidden point measurement device can be typed in. This option should be used when the hidden point can be directly measured using the hidden point device. Device & target ht When measuring hidden points, the height of the hidden point measurement device as well as the target height can be typed in. This option should be used when the hidden point cannot be directly measured with a hidden point device, but a target point can be used to calculate the position. Device height Editable field The height of the hidden point measurement device. This height is the distance from the ground to the centre of the device. Target height Editable field The distance from the hidden point to the aimed point. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 269 Field Option Description Sets the default method for entering an angle offset. EAO is an offset angle between the North of the device being used and WGS 1984 geodetic North. EAOs are applied when measuring hidden points using a device capable of measuring azimuths. Angle offset None No EAO value is applied to the azimuth measurement received from the hidden point measurement device. Permanent Applies a default value for the offset angle. The value is changeable. New for each point Offset angle values must be entered for each new hidden point. Editable field Offset Available for Angle offset: Permanent. The default value for the offset angle. Next step Step Description 1. OK returns to Hidden Point Connection. 2. OK returns to the screen from where Hidden Point Connection was accessed. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 270 Diagram P1 d2 d3 b d1 a P2 d5 P0 GS_052 Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections d4 P0 P1 P2 a b d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Known point Target point Hidden point Height of P0 Height of P2 = a + d1 + d4 - d3 Device height: height of hidden point measurement device above P0 Slope distance Device height: height of P1 above P2 Height difference between hidden point measurement device and P1 Horizontal distance 271 Distance offsets at hidden point measurement devices A Leica DISTO is shown as an example P0 d b c a GS_053 Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections a) b) c) d) P0 Negative Distance offset Positive Distance offset Pole DISTO Hidden point 272 14.6 Export Job Description The Export Job connection allows data from a job to be exported from the instrument to another instrument. The settings on this screen define the port and the device to which the data will be exported. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight Export Job. Edit... For TPS: • In Connection Settings highlight Export Job. Edit... Export Job Connection OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search Available when CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 273 Description of fields Field Option Export job to Check box external device Connect using Description Activates the connection. CS Bluetooth 1 and The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will CS Bluetooth 2 be used for the connection functionality. CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port within the active working style. The device which is selected determines the availability of the next fields. Job Number Selectable list Available if the Device is a Leica instrument. Select a job number to assign to the job. Name Editable field Available if the Device is a Leica instrument. The name of the job. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 274 14.7 RTK Rover 14.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection Description The real-time connection allows real-time related parameters to be configured. These parameters include defining the real-time messages and the base to be used. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight RTK Rover. Edit... RTK Rover Settings, General page The available fields and keys on this screen depend on the selected settings. OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search Available when connecting via Bluetooth. To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 275 Description of fields Field Option Description Receive RTK data Check box If checked, the rover real-time connection is activated. Connect using CS Internal GSM An internal port in the field controller. This port has a “fixed” device. CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. CS Bluetooth 1 and The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will CS Bluetooth 2 be used for the connection functionality. Device CS Internet 1, CS Internet 1 and CS Internet 3 The Internet ports on the field controller. If these ports are not assigned to a specific connection, then these ports are additional remote ports. GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box. For GS15: The red LEMO port. GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box. For GS15: The black LEMO port. GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box. For GS15: The slot for a device. GS Internet 1, GS Internet 2 and GS Internet 3 The Internet ports on the GS10 or GS15. If these ports are not assigned to a specific connection, then these ports are additional remote ports. Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port within the active working style. The device which is selected determines the availability of the next fields. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 276 Field Option Description RTK data format Leica The proprietary Leica real-time GPS data format supporting GPS L1/L2 and GLONASS L1/ L2. This format is recommended when working exclusively with Leica instruments. Leica 4G The proprietary Leica real-time GNSS data format supporting GPS L1/ L2/ L5, GLONASS L1/ L2 and Galileo E1/E5a/E5b/Alt-BOC. This format is recommended when working exclusively with Leica instruments. CMR/CMR+ CMR and CMR+ are compacted formats used to broadcast data for third-party instruments. RTCM 18,19 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Uncorrected carrier phase and pseudorange. Message 3 is also generated. Use for real-time operations where the ambiguities will be resolved at the rover. Accuracy at the rover: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity resolution. RTCM v3 Use RTCM when rover units from a different manufacturer are to be used. Message according to RTCM version 3. A new standard format for transmission of Global Navigation Satellite System correction information. Higher efficiency than RTCM v2.x. Supports real-time services with significantly reduced bandwidth. Message types for real-time GNSS operation: • Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 1001: L1-only GPS real-time observables 277 Field Option Description • 1002: Extended L1-only GPS real-time observables • 1003: L1 & L2 GPS real-time observables • 1004: Extended L1 & L2 GPS real-time observables • 1005: Stationary real-time base station Antenna Reference Point • 1006: Stationary real-time base station ARP with antenna height • 1007: Antenna descriptor • 1008: Antenna descriptor and serial number • 1009: L1-only GLONASS real-time observables • 1010: Extended L1-only GLONASS real-time observables • 1011: L1 & L2 GLONASS real-time observables • 1012: Extended L1 & L2 GLONASS real-time observables Network RTK Messages according to MasterAuxiliary Concept: Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 278 Field Option Description • 1014: Network Auxiliary Station Data message. This message contains details of the base stations in the network. For example, the master station and its coordinates, and the coordinate differences between the master and its auxiliaries. • 1015: Ionospheric Correction Differences message • 1016: Geometric Correction Differences message • 1029: Unicode Text String message • 1033: Receiver and Antenna Descriptor message Pseudorange and phase range values for L1 and L2. Depending on the type of instrument, the data for L1-only or for L1 and L2 are sent out. Accuracy at the rover: RTCM 1,2 v2 Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections • For L1-only: 0.25 - 1 m rms. • For L1 and L2: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity resolution. Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Differential and delta differential GPS corrections. Message 3 is also generated. Use for DGPS applications. Accuracy at the rover: 0.25 - 1 m rms. 279 Field Option Description RTCM 9,2 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. GPS partial correction set and delta differential GPS corrections. Message 3 is also generated. Use for DGPS applications with a slow data channel in the presence of interference. Accuracy at the rover: 0.25 - 1 m rms. RTCM 20,21 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Real-time carrier phase corrections and high accuracy pseudorange corrections. Message 3 is also generated. Use for real-time operations. Accuracy at the rover: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity resolution. RTCM 1,2,18,19 v2 Available for RTK base. Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Combination of RTCM 1,2 v2 and RTCM 18,19 v2. RTCM 1,2,20,21 v2 Available for RTK base. Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Combination of RTCM 1,2 v2 and RTCM 20,21 v2. The availability of the following options, depends on the selection made for SBAS tracking on the Advanced page. Automatic SBAS SBAS satellites will be tracked and the SBAS service used will be automatically selected. WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System satellites will be tracked. WAAS (test) To track Wide Area Augmentation System satellites while the system is still in test mode. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 280 Field Option Description EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System satellites will be tracked. EGNOS (test) To track European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System satellites while the system is still in test mode. MSAS MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System where MTSAT stands for Multi-functional Transport SATellite GAGAN GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation satellites will be tracked. RTCM version 1.x, 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 Available when the selected RTK data format is an RTCM version 2 format. The same version must be used at the reference and the rover. Bits per byte 6 or 8 Use auto coor- Check box dinate system Defines the number of bits/byte in the RTCM message being received. Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. To set an RTCM coordinate system received by a reference network as active coordinate system. Receive RTK network information Check box Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. Activates an info message (RTCM message 1029). Behaviour Selectable list Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. Log only The info message will only be logged to a text file. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 281 Field Option Description Show only The info message will only be shown by the instrument. Show & log The info message will be shown by the instrument and logged to a text file. Next step Page changes to the RTK base page. RTK Rover Settings, RTK base page Description of fields Field Option Sensor at base Selectable list Antenna at base Selectable list Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections Description The instrument type used at the base. If the real-time data format contains information of the instrument type, certain corrections based on this information are applied in order to provide correct results. The realtime data formats Leica, Leica 4G, CMR/CMR+ and RTCM v3 contain this information. These corrections are important when a System300 instrument or an instrument from a different manufacturer is used as reference. The antenna used at the base. If the real-time data format contains information of the antenna, certain corrections based on this information are applied in order to provide correct results. The real-time data formats Leica, Leica 4G, CMR/CMR+ and RTCM v3 contain this information. 282 Field Option RTK base is Check box sending unique ID RTK base ID Description ) If the reference data is corrected by absolute antenna calibration values and a Leica standard antenna is being used on the rover, select ADVNULLANTENNA as base antenna. If checked, an ID can be typed in. Editable field The special ID of the base station from which real-time data is to be received. The allowed minimum and maximum values vary. From 0 to 31 For RTK data format: Leica and RTK data format: CMR/CMR+. From 0 to 1023 For RTCM version: 2.x. From 0 to 4095 For RTK data format: Leica 4G and RTK data format: RTCM v3. Next step Page changes to the RTK network page. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 283 RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn GGA.. To activate the sending of a GGA message for RTK network applications. Refer to "14.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Use RTK network Check box If checked, an RTK network can be used. Network type Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections Defines the type of reference network to be used. Refer to Leica GNSS Spider documentation for more detailed descriptions. 284 Field Option Description Nearest The rover sends its position via NMEA GGA message to Leica GNSS Spider. From this position, Leica GNSS Spider determines the reference in a reference network that is closest to the rover. The corrections from that reference are sent to the rover. Supported for all real-time data formats. If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message must be activated using Fn GGA... i-MAX individualised Master-AuXiliary corrections. The rover sends its position via NMEA GGA message to Leica GNSS Spider where the Master-Auxiliary corrections are calculated. The corrections are also individualised by Leica GNSS Spider, which means it determines the best suitable corrections for that rover. If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message can be activated using Fn GGA... MAX Master-AuXiliary corrections The rover typically does not send its position to Leica GNSS Spider. Leica GNSS Spider calculates and sends Master-Auxiliary corrections to the rover. The rover individualises the corrections for its position, which means it determines the best suitable corrections. The corrections are sent in RTCM v3 with message types 1015/1016. If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message can be activated using Fn GGA... Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 285 Field Option Description VRS Virtual Reference Station. If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message must be activated using Fn GGA... Refer to "14.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications". FKP Area correction parameters. Derived from German: FlächenKorrektur Parameter Send user ID Check box Activates the sending of a Leica proprietary NMEA message defining the user. User ID 1 and User ID 2 Editable field The specific user IDs to be sent as part of the Leica proprietary NMEA message. By default the serial number of the instrument is displayed. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Description Use prediction Check box To activate and deactivate the prediction of real-time observations between the data rate of the base. Available unless RTK data format: RTCM 1,2 v2 or RTK data format: RTCM 9,2 v2. Use height filter Check box Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections To activate and deactivate the height filter for height smoothing. 286 Field Option Description Glonass mode Automatic The instrument decides automatically if GLONASS observations are fixed or not (only GLONASS instruments). Glonass fix The GLONASS observations are fixed in an RTK solution. Glonass float The GLONASS observations are not fixed in an RTK solution. Allows a Space-Based Augmentation System to be configured to provide additional corrections in conjunction with GPS signals. Also commonly referred to as Satellite-Based Augmentation System, SBAS provides corrected time and distance measurements calculated by a network of ground relay stations and geostatic satellites. An SBAS can correct for problems such as atmospheric delays, poor satellite geometry and incorrect satellite positioning. SBAS tracking Automatic SBAS SBAS satellites will be tracked and the SBAS service used will be automatically selected. WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System satellites will be tracked. WAAS (test) To track Wide Area Augmentation System satellites while the system is still in test mode. EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System satellites will be tracked. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 287 Field Option Description EGNOS (test) To track European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System satellites while the system is still in test mode. MSAS MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System where MTSAT stands for Multi-functional Transport SATellite GAGAN GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation satellites will be tracked. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Prediction The following provides additional information on the prediction of real-time positions between the data rate of the base. Access In RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page. Description Prediction is the interpolation of real-time corrections between those corrections regularly transmitted by a reference at a defined data rate. Advantages in using prediction • Computation of real-time positions on the rover is independent from the transmission rate of the data from the base station. • Positions computed with prediction have a reduced latency of around 20 ms. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 288 Recommended settings for using prediction The slower the data rate the more important it is to activate prediction. Height smoothing The following provides additional information on the height filter for height smoothing. Access In RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page. Description Height smoothing is a filter applied to all heights measured in the WGS84 or a local coordinate system or output via NMEA. The filter defaults are best suited for high dynamic variations in height up to 1 m/s as carried out by graders. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 289 Height Smoothing with high dynamic GPS operations All GPS computed positions are almost twice as accurate in plan than in height. For the position determination, satellites can appear in all four quadrants. For the height determination, satellites can appear in two quadrants. Having fewer quadrants, weakens the height position compared to the plan position. N E N H GS12_041 Position determination with satellites appearing in all four quadrants. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections Height determination with satellites appearing in two quadrants. 290 In high dynamic GPS operations, this fact results in height variations of a few centimetres as shown in the blue curve in the following diagram. Some GPS monitoring applications require a stabilised height. By applying the filter, the height variations are smoothed and most of the noise in the height component is eliminated. a [m] 201.2 b 201.19 c 201.18 201.17 201.16 201.15 201.14 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 [sec] GS_050 Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections a) Height b) Height variations c) Smoothed height 291 14.7.2 Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and Radio Description An ideal real-time setup is to combine a radio and a digital cellular phone to get the best of both technologies. The radio can be used where the radio signals can be received, the advantage being that the radio data transmission is free. If the radio channel is broken, when the rover goes out of range or due to an obstruction, change to the digital cellular phone to complete the survey. This switch allows maximum productivity and minimal costs with real-time GPS. Field procedure stepby-step Step Description 1. Set up a base. 2. On the base, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to another port. 3. Configure both connections on the base. 4. Start the base. Real-time data is transmitted on two ports simultaneously - using different devices. 5. Set up a rover. 6. On the rover, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to another port. 7. Use two working styles to configure both connections on the rover. 8. Start the rover using either the digital cellular phone connection or the radio connection. 9. On the rover, change the working style in use in order to change between using digital cellular phone and radio. There is no need to return to the base. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 292 14.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications Description Most reference networks require an approximate position of the rover. For reference network applications, a rover dials into the reference network and submits its approximate position in form of an NMEA GGA message. By default, the instrument sends GGA messages with updated current positions automatically when a reference network is selected. Surveying regulations in some countries require that one certain position can be selected. This position is then sent to the reference network as GGA message through the real-time connection every five seconds. Refer to "F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data" for information on GGA message format. Access step-by-step In RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page, press Fn GGA... Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 293 Send GGA NMEA OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Coord Available for GGA position: From job and GGA position: LAST/HERE Posn. To view other coordinate types. Local coordinates are available when a local coordinate system is active. Last Available for GGA position: LAST/HERE Posn. To use the same coordinates in the GGA message as when the instrument was last used in a reference network application. This functionality is possible when position coordinates from a previous reference network application are still stored in the internal memory. Here Available for GGA position: LAST/HERE Posn. To use the coordinates of the current navigation position in the GGA message. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 294 Description of fields Field Option Description GGA position Automatic The current rover position is sent to the reference network. The position is updated and sent every five seconds. From job A point from the working job can be selected in Point ID. The position of this point is sent to the reference network every five seconds. LAST/HERE Posn The position last used in a reference network application or the current navigation position can be selected using Last or Here. The selected position is sent every five seconds. None No GGA message is sent to the reference network. Selectable list Available for GGA position: From job. The coordinates of this point are sent out in the GGA message. Point ID Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 295 14.8 Base RTK 1 / Base RTK 2 14.8.1 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection Description The real-time connection allows real-time related parameters to be configured. These parameters include defining the real-time messages, data rates and time slicing. Up to two real-time connections can be configured on the instrument. Access For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings highlight Base RTK 1. Edit... Two real-time devices can be attached to two different ports, for example a radio and a digital cellular phone. On the reference, the two devices can operate simultaneously. Highlight Base RTK 2 and press Edit.. to configure a second real-time connection. ) RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), General page The available fields and pages on this screen depend on the selected settings. OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Devce.. Available for Connect using: GS Port 1/GS Port 2/GS Port 3. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 296 Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Transmit RTK base info Check box Activates the base real-time connection. Connect using GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box. For GS15: The red LEMO port. GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box. For GS15: The black LEMO port. GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box. For GS15: The slot for a device. GS Internet 1, GS Internet 2 and GS Internet 3 The internet ports on the GS10 or GS15. If these ports are not assigned to a specific connection, then these ports are additional remote ports. Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port within the active working style. RTK data format Leica, Leica 4G, Refer to "14.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time CMR/CMR+, RTCM Connection" for information about these real-time 18,19 v2, RTCM v3, data formats. RTCM 1,2 v2, RTCM 9,2 v2, RTCM 20,21 v2, RTCM 1,2,18,19 v2 Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 297 Field Option Description RTCM version 1.x, 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 Available when the selected RTK data format is an RTCM version 2 format. The same version must be used at the reference and the rover. Use external antenna on GS15 Check box Available for Connect using: GS Port 3. Allows external radio / GSM antenna on the GS15 to be used for slot devices. Next step Page changes to the Data rates page. RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), Data rates page Description For all real-time data formats, parts of the message can be output at different rates. The settings on this screen define the output rates for the various parts of the selected realtime data format. The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for RTK data format in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2). Description of fields Field Option Description RTK data format Display only The selected data format. Data From 0.1s to 60.0s Rates for the transmission of raw observations. The default settings are suitable for standard applications. They can be changed for special applications. A check is performed for permissible combinations. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 298 Field Option Description Message type Selectable list The message type of RTCM v3 and Leica 4G. Compact is suitable for standard applications. Coords From 10s to 120s Rate for the transmission of reference coordinates. Info From 10s to 120s Rate for the transmission of base station information such as point ID. End of message Nothing or CR Messages Selectable list (coordinates are computed using the coord system on the GS sensor) RTK base ID Editable field To add a Carriage Return at the end of the real-time message. Available for RTCM version: 2.3. The messages sent within the coordinate message. An identification for a base station. It is converted into a compact format and sent out with real-time data in all real-time data formats. It is different from the point ID of the base station. An ID of the base station is required if working with several base stations in time slicing mode on the same frequency. In this case, the ID of the base station from which data is to be accepted must be typed in at the rover. The allowed minimum and maximum values vary. From 0 to 31 Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections For Leica and CMR/CMR+. 299 Field Option Description From 0 to 1023 For any RTCM version 2 format. From 0 to 4095 For Leica 4G and RTCM v3. Next step Page changes to the Time slicing page. RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), Time slicing page Description of fields Field Option Use time slicing Check box Description The possibility to send delayed real-time messages. This functionality is required when real-time messages from different base stations are sent on the same radio channel. Time slicing works for all device types. Total base stations being used 2, 3 or 4 The number of base stations in use from where realtime messages are sent. Time slot for this base 2, 3 or 4 The contents of the selectable list depend on the settings for Total base stations being used. The time slot represents the actual time delay. The number of possible time slots is the number of base stations in use. The time delay equals 1 s divided by the total number of base stations. If two base stations are used, the time delay is 0.50 s. Therefore, the time slots are at 0.00 s and at 0.50 s. With three base stations, the time delay is 0.33 s. The time slots are at 0.00 s, 0.33 s and 0.66 s. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 300 Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 301 14.9 NMEA 1 / NMEA 2 Description National Marine Electronics Association has developed a message standard related to the marine electronics industry. NMEA messages have been accepted as the standard for sharing specific data information between companies since the late 1970s. Refer to "Appendix F NMEA Message Formats" for a comprehensive description of each NMEA message. The settings on this screen define the port, the device and the type of NMEA message to be used for the NMEA Out connection. Up to two NMEA Out connections can be configured. Each NMEA Out connection can output different messages at different rates with different talker IDs. The output of NMEA messages on both ports is simultaneous. The screens for the configuration of both NMEA connections are identical except for the title - NMEA Output 1 and NMEA Output 2. For simplicity, the title NMEA Output 1 is used in the following. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight NMEA 1 or NMEA 2. Edit... Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 302 NMEA Output 1 OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Mesgs To configure what NMEA messages are output, the rates and the output timing method. Refer to paragraph "NMEA Messages". Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Stream NMEA Check box messages from the GS Activates the output of NMEA. Connect using GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box. For GS15: The red LEMO port. GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box. For GS15: The black LEMO port. GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box. For GS15: The slot for a device. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 303 Field Option Description GS BT The Bluetooth port on the GS10/GS15. Device Display only Usually, RS232 is used to transfer NMEA messages. Use a defined talker ID Check box When this box is checked, a user-defined talker ID can be typed in. Otherwise, the NMEA Talker ID based on the NMEA standards v3.0 is used (default GP for GPS.) Talker ID Editable field Available when Use a defined talker ID is checked. Appears at the beginning of each NMEA message. Display only Messages (coordinates are computed using the coord system on the GS sensor) The NMEA messages currently selected for output. Next step IF NMEA messages THEN are not configured OK closes the screen. are to be configured Mesgs. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 304 NMEA Messages This screen shows the messages that can be output, which messages are currently output, the output rates and the output timing method. OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Edit.. To configure how the currently highlighted message is output. Refer to paragraph "NMEA Message to Send". All and None To activate and deactivate the output for all messages. Use To activate and deactivate the output for the highlighted message. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step IF an NMEA message THEN is not to be configured OK closes the screen. is to be configured highlight the message and Edit... Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 305 NMEA Message to Send OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Stream the NMEA message Check box When this box is checked, the selected NMEA message is output. Output At each epoch The NMEA message is created at the exact epoch of the screen update rate. It is sent out in the time interval as defined in Rate. With Output Delay, the output can also be delayed by a time after this epoch. Refer to paragraph "Diagram". Immediately The NMEA message is created as soon as the information is available. It is sent out in the time interval as defined in Rate. On Point Stored The NMEA message is sent on point storage. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 306 Field Output Delay Option Editable field Description ) If the time interval defined in Rate is shorter than the epochs of the screen update, then the internal computation of positions is changed to allow the specified rate of NMEA positions. The screen update remains unchanged. Available for Output: At each epoch. Delays the output of the NMEA message. The delay is applied from the epoch as defined in Rate. The time of delay can be a value up to Rate. This option is required if two or more instruments are being used to monitor the position of an object. The position of each instrument is being output as NMEA message back to a control station. If all instruments sent their position message at the same time, as would be the case with Output: Immediately, then the control station may not be able to cope with all the positional data messages. In this case, the output of the second instrument could be delayed. The control station would then receive the message from each instrument at a slightly different time. Available for Output: On Point Stored. Defines the type of points for which the NMEA message is sent. Point Type All points Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections The NMEA message is sent when any type of point is stored. 307 Field Option Description Occupy Pts Only The NMEA message is sent when a manually measured point is stored. Auto pts only The NMEA message is sent when auto points are stored. Rate From 0.05s to 3600.0s Available unless Output: On Point Stored. Defines the time intervals at which the NMEA messages are created. Monitor CQ values Check box When this box is checked the CQ control can be defined. CQ Control Position only, Height only or Position & height Available when Monitor CQ values is checked. Activates a control over the coordinate quality. If the coordinate quality of the position and/or height component exceeds the limit as defined in Maximum CQ, then NMEA messages are not output, Maximum CQ Editable field Available when Monitor CQ values is checked. The limit for the coordinate quality up to which NMEA messages are output. Next step Step Description 1. OK returns to NMEA Messages. 2. OK returns to the screen from where NMEA Messages. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 308 0 B1 A2 B2 b1 c1,a2 b2 1 2 For a1 b1 c1 a2 b2 c2 c2 A1 a1 Diagram 3 4 GS_051 Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections Output: At each epoch with Rate: 1.0s Data 1 available NMEA message for data 1 composed NMEA message for data 1 sent Data 2 available NMEA message for data 2 composed NMEA message for data 2 sent For Output: Immediately with Rate: 1.0s A1 Data 1 available B1 NMEA message for data 1 composed and sent A2 Data 2 available B2 NMEA message for data 2 composed and sent 309 14.10 Remote (OWI) Description The remote connection allows: • the instrument to be controlled using a device other than the field controller, for example a computer. Outside World Interface or Leica Binary 2 commands can be used to control the instrument through the remote port. Documentation for OWI and LB2 is available on request from the Leica Geosystems representative. • a message log to be requested from a remote client via an OWI message. A message log contains a history of warning messages and message lines. • the downloading of data directly from the instrument’s memory device to LGO through a serial port on the computer. The CS does not need to be removed from the instrument. The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used for the remote control. ) ) A port configured as a remote port can be used to output event input, meteo or tilt notification messages. The OWI commands listed here are protected by a licence key. Refer to "24.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to type in the licence key. The corresponding LB2 commands are also protected. If these OWI commands have been activated by a licence key, it is indicated in User About Leica Viva, Instrument page. • • • • • AHT ANT CNF DCF DCT • • • • • DPM GGA GGK GGK(PT) GGQ • • • • • Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections GLL GNS LLK LLQ NET • • • • • POB POE POQ POS RMC • • • RTK TPV USR 310 Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight Remote (OWI). Edit... Remote (OWI) Connections OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Cntrl.. To configure additional parameters. Devce.. Available unless an internet connection is used. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Use Available unless a connection is NMEA 1, NMEA 2 or Remote (OWI). To use the highlighted connection by Remote (OWI). Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Port The physical port on the instrument which will be used for the connection functionality. Connection The connection configured for the ports. Any port which is not configured is automatically assigned the remote connection. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 311 Column Description Device The hardware connected to the chosen port. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 312 14.11 Total Station Description The settings on this screen define the communication of the field controller with total stations, for example TPS1200, TS09 / TS06 / TS02 and third-party instruments. Access For TPS: • In Connection Settings highlight Total Station. Edit... Total Station Connections OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Available if Connect using: Bluetooth is selected. Cntrl.. Available for certain devices connected to certain connections. To configure additional parameters, for example changing the radio channel. Default To return the fields back to their default values. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 313 Description of fields Field Option Description Manufacturer Selectable list The brand of the instrument. Model Selectable list The instrument model. Connect using Cable, Bluetooth, Internal radio or External radio How the instrument is connected. The options available depend on the selection for Model. The availability of the other fields depends on the selection made here. Baud rate From 1200 to 115200 Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device in bits per second. Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data. Data bits 6, 7 or 8 Number of bits in a block of digital data. Stop bit 1 or 2 Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data. Flow control None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake. When the instrument/device is ready for data, it asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the data. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 314 14.12 GSI Output Description Each time a measured point is stored to the working job, GSI data is streamed through the configured port of the field controller. Access In Connection Settings highlight GSI Output. Edit... GSI Output Connection OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search Available when CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Output GSI data to device Check box Activates the connection. Connect using CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 315 Field Option Description CS Bluetooth 1 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will and CS Blue- be used. tooth 2 Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port. GSI Format GSI8 polar & crtsn GSI Polar and Cartesian (8 data characters) (Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM, E, N, Elev.) GSI16 polar GSI Polar (16 data characters) (Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM, reflector height) GSI16 cartesian GSI Cartesian (16 data characters) (E, N, Elev, Reflector Height) Pt,N,E,Ht,Date Coordinate data (Northing BEFORE Easting) Pt,E,N,Ht,Date Coordinate data (Easting BEFORE Northing) Pseudo NMEA Based on NMEA (National Marine Electronics AssociGGA ation), which is a standard for interfacing marine electronic devices. Use RS232 GSI protocol GSI8 polar GSI Polar (8 data characters) (Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM) GSI16 polar 2 GSI Polar (16 data characters) (Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM) Check box A protocol defines if the system expects a handshake or no handshake. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 316 Field Option Description If checked, a handshake is required. A data block is sent out from the instrument and a receipt confirmation is expected. This handshake requires that GeoCom Mode is activated. Output format - GSI Format GSI data is transmitted in blocks. Every block consists of several data words, refer to the examples in the following table. Every data word begins with a two character Word Index, the WI code, specifying the data type within this block. Each GSI8 word has in total 16 characters, consisting of 7 information characters followed by 8 data characters and finally the blank character ASCII code 32. The GSI16 block is like the GSI8 block, but begins with * and the data word contains 16 characters for large values such as UTM coordinates, alphanumeric codes, attributes or point IDs. Example 1 shows a GSI8 block sequence with the words for point ID (11), Easting coordinate (81) and Northing coordinate (82). Example 2 shows a GSI16 block sequence with the words for point ID (11), horizontal (21) and vertical angle (22). Type GSI8 Polar&Cart GSI16 Polar GSI16 Cartesian WI 11 Point ID Point ID Point ID WI 21 Hz Hz - WI 22 V V - WI 31 SlopeDist SlopeDist - WI 51 PPM Total/mm PPM Total/mm - WI 81 East - East Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 317 Type GSI8 Polar&Cart GSI16 Polar GSI16 Cartesian WI 82 North - North WI 83 Elev. - Elev. WI 87 Refl. Ht - Refl. Ht Example 1: GSI8 Each word has 16 characters of which 8 characters are used for the data block. Word 1 110001+0000A110 110002+0000A111 110003+0000A112 110004+0000A113 110005+0000A114 Word 2 81..00+00005387 81..00+00007586 81..00+00007536 81..00+00003839 81..00+00001241 Word 3 82..00-00000992 82..00-00003031 82..00-00003080 82..00-00003080 82..00-00001344 Example 2: GSI16 Each word has 24 characters of which 16 characters are used for the data block. Word 1 *110001+000000000PNC0055 *110002+000000000PNC0056 *110003+000000000PNC0057 *110004+000000000PNC0058 *110005+000000000PNC0059 Word 2 Word 3 21.002+000000001338465022.002+0000000005371500 21.002+000000001280253022.002+0000000005255000 21.002+000000001122236022.002+0000000005433800 21.002+000000001057355022.002+0000000005817600 21.002+000000000998361022.002+0000000005171400 Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 318 GSI Word information Pos. Name Description of values Applicable for 1-2 Word Index (WI) 3 No signifi- .: No information. cance WI 11, WI 21, WI 22, WI 31, WI 51, WI 81, WI 82, WI 83, WI 87 4 Automatic .: No information. index 0: Tilt compensator: Off informa3: Tilt compensator: On tion WI 21, WI 22 5 Input mode .: No information. WI 21, WI 22, WI 31, 0: Measured values transferred from instrument WI 51, WI 81, WI 82, 1: Manual input from keyboard WI 83, WI 87 2: Measured value, Hz correction: Off. 3: Measured value, Hz correction: On. 4: Result calculated from functions 6 Units .: No information. 0: Distance: Metre (m), last digit 1 / 1000 m 1: Distance: US ft (ft) last digit 1 / 1000 ft 2: Angle: 400 gon 3: Angle: 360° dec 4: Angle: 360°'" 5: Angle: 6400 mil 6: Distance: Metre (m), last digit 1 / 10000 m 7: Distance: US ft (ft) last digit 1 / 10000 ft Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections WI 21, WI 22, WI 31, WI 81, WI 82, WI 83, WI 87 319 Output format Pt,N,E,Ht,Date Pos. Name Description of values Applicable for 7 Sign +: Positive value -: Negative value WI 21, WI 22, WI 31, WI 51, WI 81, WI 82, WI 83, WI 87 8-15 8-23 Data Data includes a sequence of 8 (16) numerical or WI 11, WI 21, WI 22, alphanumerical characters. WI 31, WI 51, WI 81, Certain data blocks are allowed to carry WI 82, WI 83, WI 87 more than one value for example ppm/mm. This data is automatically transferred with the according sign before each single value. 16 24 Separating character ) : Blank WI 11, WI 21, WI 22, WI 31, WI 51, WI 81, WI 82, WI 83, WI 87 Format Point ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Date, Time Description of fields The format settings are defined in Regional Settings. Field Description Point ID Text describing the point identification Northing The Northing coordinate. Easting The Easting coordinate. Elevation The height coordinate. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 320 Field Description Date The measurement/origination date. Time The measurement/origination time. Carriage Return Line Feed Example 2004,4997.635,6010.784,393.173,09/10/2001,16:34:12.2 2005,4997.647,6010.765,393.167,09/10/2001,16:34:12.4 2006,4997.657,6010.755,393.165,09/10/2001,16:34:12.7 Output format Pt,E,N,Ht,Date Format This output format is identical to the Pt,N,E,Ht,Date format except the order of the Easting and Northing variables are reversed. Output format - Pseudo NMEA GGA Description This output format is based on NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association), which is a standard for interfacing marine electronic devices. Format $GPGGA,Time,Northing,N,Easting,E,1,05,1.0,Elevation,M,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 Description of Fields Field Description $GPGGA Sentence identification (header including talker identification). A Talker ID appears at the beginning of the header of each NMEA message. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 321 Field Description Time UTC time of position (hhmmss.ss) Northing The Northing coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places) N Fixed text (N) Easting The Easting coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places) E Fixed text (E) GPS Quality Indicator Fixed number (1=no real-time position, navigation fix) Number of satellites Number of satellites in use (00 to 12) HDOP Fixed number (1.0) Elevation The height coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places) Elevation units Elevation units (F or M). The format settings are defined in Regional Settings. Height Geoid Fixed number (0.0) Height units Fixed text (M) Time since last DGPS Fixed number (0.0) update DGPS Base station ID Fixed number (0.0001) Checksum Fixed number (*99) Carriage Return Line Feed Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 322 Example $GPGGA,171933.97,7290747.02,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 $GPGGA,171934.20,7290747.02,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 $GPGGA,171934.45,7290747.03,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 ) Fields are always separated by a comma. A comma is never placed before the Checksum field. When information for a field is not available, the position in the data string is empty. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 323 15 Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 15.1 Digital Cellular Phones 15.1.1 Overview Description For digital cellular phones, information such as • the base stations that can be contacted • the phone numbers of the base stations and • the type of protocol to be used can be defined. Changing the base station to be dialled is of interest in two cases. Case 1: Case 2: Technologies CDMA GSM Two real-time base stations, each equipped with a digital cellular phone, are set up at two locations belonging to different network providers. When leaving the area of one base, the station can be changed and the other base can be called. Set up as in case 1. Two separate fixes from each base for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations. Code Division Multiple Access is a high speed data transmission for effective and flexible use of available resources such as bandwidth. Users of a cellular phone network occupy the same frequency band. The signal is especially coded for each user. Global System for Mobile Communications is a more efficient version of CDMA technology that uses smaller time slots but faster data transfer rates. It is the world’s most commonly used digital network. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 324 15.1.2 Configuring a GSM Connection Access For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of GSM technology attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of GSM technology attached. Cntrl... GSM Dial-Up Connection, Dial-up details page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Near To find the nearest base station with a digital cellular phone of GSM technology. Available when base stations to dial are already created in Dial-up Connection List. Coordinates of these stations must be known. Page To change to another page on this screen. Available if the Internet connection is activated. Fn Cmnd.. To send AT commands to the digital cellular phone. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 325 Fn Clear Available on the Sim codes page. To set the additional editable fields to 0. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description GSM device Display only Available for RTK rover and TPS. The type of digital cellular phone highlighted when this screen was accessed. Dial-up connec- Selectable list tion Available for RTK rover and TPS. The digital cellular phone base station to be dialled. Opening the selectable list accesses Dial-up Connection List where new base stations can be created and existing base stations can be selected or edited. Refer to "15.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial". Number Display only Available for RTK rover and TPS. The number of the digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Protocol Display only Available for RTK rover and TPS. The configured protocol of the digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 326 Field Option Description APN Editable field Available for RTK base with Internet capable devices. The Access Point Name of a server from the network provider, which allows access to data services. Contact your provider to get the correct APN. Next step Page changes to the Sim codes page. GSM Dial-Up Connection, Sim codes page Description of fields Field Option Description PIN code Editable field To enter the Personal Identification Number of the SIM card. PUK code Editable field If the PIN is locked for any reason, for example the wrong PIN was entered, input the Personal UnblocKing code for access to the PIN. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. GSM Dial-Up Connection, Advanced page Description of fields Field Network data rate Option Description The network baud rate. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 327 Field Option Description Selectable list For digital cellular phones of GSM technology that do not support autobauding choose the baud rate from the selectable list. Autobauding Select this option for an automatic search of the network baud rate. Check box Define if the digital cellular phone uses Radio channel Protocol. Check for digital cellular phones that do use transparent mode. Uncheck for digital cellular phones that use RLP. Check with the network provider if the digital cellular phone uses transparent mode or not. Manually select Check box cellphone network To select a network provider from a list. This function is helpful when working close to boarders. By default, the strongest network is used. Using this option, a network other than the strongest can be selected. Press Search for a list of all available networks. Use transparent mode Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 328 15.1.3 Configuring a CDMA Connection Access For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of CDMA technology attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of CDMA technology attached. Cntrl... CDMA Connection OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Near To find the nearest base station with a digital cellular phone of CDMA technology. Available when base stations to dial are already created in Dial-up Connection List. Coordinates of these stations must be known. Fn Info To provide information about the CDMA device being used, such as the manufacturer, the model and the electronic serial number. Fn Reg To register the settings of the CDMA digital cellular phone over the air. For US and Canada only. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 329 Fn Cmnd.. To send AT commands to the digital cellular phone. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description CDMA Type Display only The type of digital cellular phone highlighted when this screen was accessed. Dial-up connec- Selectable list tion The digital cellular phone base station to be dialled. Opening the selectable list accesses Dial-up Connection List where new base stations can be created and existing base stations can be selected or edited. Refer to "15.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial". Number Display only The number of the digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Protocol Display only The configured protocol of the digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Next step Fn Info changes to CDMA Information. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 330 CDMA Information Description of fields Field Option Description Manufact Display only The manufacturer of the CDMA device being used. Model Display only The model of the CDMA device being used. ESN No. Display only Electronic Serial Number For registration purposes, send the electronic serial number to the network provider in order to receive the service programming code and the mobile directory number. These numbers must be typed in CDMA Registration. Next step CDMA Registration Step Description 1. Press Print to print all information to a file CDMA Info.log in the \DATA directory on the data storage device. 2. Press OK to return to CDMA Connection. 3. For US and Canada only: Press Reg to access CDMA Registration. The settings allow the CDMA digital cellular phone to be registered over the air. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 331 Description of fields Field Option Description MSL/SPC Display only The Service Program Code provided by the network provider. MDN Display only The Mobile Directory Number provided by the network provider MSID/MIN Display only Mobile Station Identity Number and Mobile IdentificationNumber. Another 10-digit number to identify the mobile phone. Sometimes identical with the MDN. Next step OK to return to CDMA Connection. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 332 15.2 Modems Description For modems, information such as • the base stations that can be contacted and • the phone numbers of the base stations can be controlled. Changing the base station to be dialled is of interest in two cases. Case 1: Case 2: Access Two real-time base stations, each equipped with a digital cellular phone, are set up at two locations belonging to different network providers. When leaving the area of one base, the station can be changed and the other base can be called. Set up as in case 1. Two separate fixes from each base for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations. For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a modem attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a modem attached. Cntrl... Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 333 Modem Dial-up Connection OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Near To find the nearest base station with a modem. Available when base stations to dial are already created in Dial-up Connection List. Coordinates of these stations must be known. Fn Cmnd.. To send AT commands to the modem. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Modem Display only The type of modem highlighted when this screen was accessed. Dial-up connec- Selectable list tion The modem base station to be dialled. Opening the selectable list accesses Dial-up Connection List where new base stations can be created and existing base stations can be selected or edited. Refer to "15.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial". Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 334 Field Option Description Number Display only The number of the modem at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Protocol Display only The configured protocol of the modem at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 335 15.3 Radios for GPS Real-Time Description For radios the channels on which the radio broadcasts can be changed. Changing channels changes the frequency at which the radio operates. Not all radios support channel changing. Changing radio channels is of interest in three cases. Case 1: Case 2: Case 3: Requirements for channel changing Two real-time base stations are set up at two locations, each broadcasting on a different channel. If the signal from one base station is jammed, the channel can be changed and the other base can be used. Set up as in case 1. Two separate fixes for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations. One real-time base and one real-time rover are being used. If the signal is blocked due to radio interference, the channel at the base and the rover can be changed in order to work on a different frequency. Pacific Crest radios: Satelline radios: ) ) • channel changing must be activated by a Pacific Crest dealer. • A special licence might be required. The radio must be in programming mode. This mode can be set by a Satelline dealer. Channel changing may contravene radio broadcasting regulations in certain countries. Before operating with radios, check the regulations in force in the working area. The number of channels available and the frequency spacing between channels depends on the radio used. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 336 ) Access If channel changing is to be used, when configuring the base real-time connection, set RTK base ID in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), Data rates page to a different ID for each base site. By doing so, the rover can recognise if the incoming real-time data after channel changing is being received from a different base station or if the original base station is using a new frequency. In the first case, the ambiguities are recomputed. For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a radio attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a radio attached. Cntrl... Radio Channel OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Scan To provide information such as the station ID, latency and the data format of incoming signals from base stations broadcasting on the same radio channel. This information can be used to select appropriate base stations to dial. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 337 Description of fields Field Option Description Radio type Display only The type of radio highlighted when this screen was accessed. Channel Editable field The radio channel. The channel used must be within minimum and maximum allowed input values. The minimum and maximum allowed input values for a radio depend on the number of channel supported by the radio and the spacing between the channels. Actual frequency Display only Available for Radio type: Satelline 3AS. Displays the actual frequency of the radio. Next step Scan to access Scan for Base Station. Scan for Base Station This screen provides information about the base stations, with specific types of devices attached, for example a radio, from which real-time corrections are being received. This information can also be useful for finding out if anyone else in the area is using a particular radio channel. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 338 OK To select the highlighted base station and to continue with the subsequent screen. Chnl-1 and Chnl+1 Available for scanning base stations with radios attached. To switch the radio to one channel lower/higher than the current channel. The base stations displayed change to those broadcasting on the new channel. Description of columns Column Description Station ID Station ID of available base stations from which a signal is being received. For radios, the base station radios transmitting on the same channel will be listed. Latency(s) Time delay, in seconds and configured on the base, from when the base collects the data to when the data is transmitted. RTK format Format of the data from the base station. Refer to "14.8.1 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection" for more information about data formats. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 339 15.4 Radios for Remote Control Description For radios the channels on which the radio broadcasts can be changed. Changing channels changes the frequency at which the radio operates. This change in frequency can be necessary to enable multiple pairs of radios to work simultaneously in the same area without interfering with each other. Access For TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an internal radio, a TCPS or a GFU attached. Cntrl... Internal radio OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Default To change to the default radio settings. Fn Save To save the radio settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 340 Description of fields Field Option Description Radio type Display only The type of radio device selected for the connection. Link number Editable field The assigned channel number. The channel number for the field controller and the radio must be the same. The communication settings for the field controller and the radio must also be same. Set as Remote or Base ) ) The radio modules inside the field controller and the radio must be set to opposite settings. It is recommended to set the field controller to Remote and the radio to Base. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 341 15.5 RS232 Description RS232 is a standard serial communication method that is able to transfer data without the need for predefined time slots. Access For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an RS232 device attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an RS232 device attached. Cntrl... RS232 Connection Displayed is the type of device highlighted when this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 342 15.6 Internet Description Internet The Internet connection allows connection to the Internet to receive real-time data. A GPRS / Internet device must be attached to the instrument. Requirements For Internet • Check Use Internet connection on GS in Internet Connection. • An Internet port must be selected in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2) or RTK Rover Settings. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet device attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet device attached. Cntrl... Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 343 Internet Port Connection OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Internet port Display only The name of the Internet port attached to the connection that was highlighted when this page was accessed. User type Selectable list How the instrument will operate in the Internet. Available for RTK base. Client Must be selected when using Ntrip as Internet application. Inside the Internet, Ntrip Clients and Ntrip Servers are considered as clients. Selectable list The server to be accessed in the Internet. Opening the selectable list accesses Server to Connect where new servers can be created and existing servers can be selected or edited. Server to use Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 344 Field Option Description NTRIP mountpoint Editable field Mountpoints are the Ntrip servers sending out realtime data. Next step Select Source to access NTRIP Source Table. Highlight a mountpoint about which more information is required. This information helps to configure the instrument to use the selected mountpoint as a base. Press Info to access Mountpoint. Mountpoint, General page Description of fields Field Option Description Identifier Display only The name of the selected Mountpoint. Format Display only The real-time data format sent out by the Mountpoint. Format details Display only Details about Format, for example the RTCM message types including update rates in seconds displayed in brackets. The type of password protection required for the authorisation to the Ntrip server. Authentic None If no password is required Basic If the password does not require encryption. Digest If the password must be encrypted. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 345 Field Option Description NMEA Display only Indicates if the Mountpoint must receive GGA NMEA data from the rover in order to compute VRS information. Charges Display only Indicates if charges are currently made for the connection. Carrier Display only The type of carrier message sent out. System Display only The type of satellite system supported by the Mountpoint. Next step Page changes to the Location page. Mountpoint, Location page Detailed information about the location of the Mountpoint is displayed. Next step Page changes to the Miscell page. Mountpoint, Miscell page Description of fields Field Option Description Generator Display only The hard- or software generating the data stream. Compress Display only The name of the compression / encryption algorithm. Bitrate Display only The data speed in bits per second. Info Display only Miscellaneous information if available. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 346 Next step OK to return to the previous screen. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 347 15.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial 15.7.1 Accessing Dial-up Connection List Description Dial-up Connection List allows new stations to be created, provides a list of base stations that can be dialled and allows existing stations to be edited. For digital cellular phones of any technology and for modems, the phone numbers of the device at the base station must be known. For a base station to be dialled, a name, the phone number and, if available, the coordinates can be configured. The configuration is possible for rover and base digital cellular phones and modems. Access step-by-step Step Description 1. In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of any technology or modem attached. 2. Cntrl... 3. Open the selectable list for Dial-up connection. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 348 Dial-up Connection List OK To select the highlighted station and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new station. Refer to "15.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial". Edit.. To edit a station. Refer to "15.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial". Delete To delete the highlighted station. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Name Name of all available base stations. Number Phone number of the station to dial. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 349 15.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial Access In Dial-up Connection List press New.. or Edit... New Dial-up Connection Store To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Coord To view other coordinate types. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new base station to be dialled. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input optional. Number Editable field The number of the base station to dial. If the survey is to be undertaken across country borders it is necessary to input the phone number using standard international dialling codes. For example, +41123456789. Otherwise it can be input as a standard digital cellular phone number. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 350 Field Option Description Available for digital cellular phones of GSM technology. The configured protocol of the digital cellular phone of GSM technology. Protocol Analog For conventional phone networks. ISDN v.110 or ISDN For GSM networks. v.120 Use coordinates Selectable list Select Yes to type in the approximate coordinates of the base station. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 351 15.8 Configuring the Server to Connect 15.8.1 Accessing Server to Connect Description Server to Connect allows new servers to be created, provides a list of servers that can be accessed in the Internet and allows existing servers to be edited. Access step-by-step Step Description 1. In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet connection attached. 2. Cntrl... 3. Open the selectable list for Server name. Server to Connect OK To select the highlighted server and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new server. Refer to "15.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server". Edit.. To edit a server. Refer to "15.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server". Delete To delete the highlighted server. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 352 More To change between the IP Address and the TCP/IP Port of the server. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Name Name of all available servers. IP address IP addresses of all available servers. TCP/IP port TCP/IP Port numbers of all available servers. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 353 15.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server Access In Server to Connect press New.. or Edit... New Server, General page Store To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new server to be accessed. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Address Editable field Type in the host name or the IP address of the server to be accessed in the Internet.of the server to be accessed in the Internet. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 354 Field Option Description Port Editable field The port of the Internet server through which the data is provided. Each server has several ports for various services. Next step Page changes to the NTRIP page. New Server, NTRIP page Description of fields Field Option Description Use NTRIP Check box Check to activate Ntrip. User ID Editable field A user ID is required to receive data from to the Ntrip Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for information. Password Editable field A password is required to receive data from the Ntrip Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for information. Next step Store to store the settings. Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 355 16 Configuration of Devices 16.1 Devices 16.1.1 Overview Description Before using any device, it is necessary to configure the interface with which it will be used. Refer to "14.1 Accessing Configuration Connections" for information on how to configure the interfaces. Some devices can be used with different interfaces for different applications. For example: • A radio can be used to receive real-time base data but a second radio could also be used to output simultaneous NMEA messages. • A radio can be used for remote control with a TPS but also to send GeoCOM commands from a computer to a TPS. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 356 16.1.2 Digital Cellular Phones Description Digital cellular phones comprise of the technologies CDMA and GSM. Typical uses • • • • To To To To transmit real-time data. receive real-time data. download raw observations from a remote location. steer an instrument. Example use Step Description 1. Base and rover must both be equipped with a digital cellular phone. 2. Ensure that the digital cellular phone at the base is on. 3. The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected base of which the phone number was pre-defined. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". 4. One rover can dial in to the base digital cellular phone at a time. 5. As soon as the base digital cellular phone is contacted, real-time data is sent to the rover digital cellular phone that has called. ) Requirements for using digital cellular phones Several digital cellular phone numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialling a different number dials that particular base station. Always required: • • • Viva Series, Configuration of Devices AT command language must be supported by the digital cellular phone. Working area must be covered by a digital cellular phone network. The network operator must support data transmission. 357 Sometimes required: • • • SIM card. This SIM card is the same as is normally used in mobile phones. The SIM card must be enabled to transmit data. Contact the service provider to enable the SIM card. Personal Identification Number Registration Supported digital cellular phones Some digital cellular phones are predefined. Other digital cellular phones can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new digital cellular phone configuration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These digital cellular phones must be connected with a cable or Bluetooth. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on cables. Please contact the local selling unit or dealer for further information. Advantages • • • Disadvantages Fees are charged for the time that the digital cellular phone network is being used. ) Unlimited range of the data channel between base and rover. Free of jamming from other users. Cheaper in price in the initial costs of buying. Base and rover can both be equipped with a digital cellular phone and a radio. On the base, they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio range of the base and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 358 16.1.3 Modems Typical uses • • • To transmit NMEA messages. To download raw observations from a remote location. To transmit real-time data. Example of use Step Description 1. The base is equipped with a modem. 2. The rover is equipped with a digital cellular phone. 3. Ensure that the modem is switched on. 4. The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected base of which the phone number was pre-defined. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". 5. One rover can dial in to the base modem at a time. 6. As soon as the base modem is contacted, it sends its data to the rover digital cellular phone that has called. ) Several modem numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialling a different number changes the base station. Requirements for using modem AT command language must be supported by the modem. Supported modems Some modems are predefined. Modems must be connected with a cable. Other modems can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new modem configuration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 359 16.1.4 Radios for Real-Time Typical uses • • • To transmit real-time data. To receive real-time data. To steer an instrument. Example of use Step Description 1. Base and rover must both be equipped with radios using the same frequency range and the same data format. 2. The base radio continuously sends out real-time data until the instrument is turned off, the configuration is changed or the radio is detached. 3. The rover radio continuously receives real-time data until the instrument is turned off, the configuration is changed or the radio is detached. 4. Several rovers can receive data from the same base at the same time. ) Supported radios Several base radios can transmit real-time data simultaneously using different radio channels. Changing to a different radio channel on the rover changes the base from which real-time data is received. Some radios are predefined. Other radios can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new radio configuration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These radios must be connected with a cable. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 360 ) Base and rover can both be equipped with a digital cellular phone and a radio. On the base, they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio range of the base and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 361 16.1.5 Radios for Remote Control Typical uses • • To remote control the TPS. To transmit data between a TPS and computer. Supported radios • The default radios used with TPS for remote control are the internal radio RadioHandle and the external radio TCPS28. The TPS has to be set to the correct communication mode to send and receive data and commands via the radio. A radio is also integrated in the field controller to allow communication. A Communication side cover must be fitted to the TPS when operating with the RadioHandle. • User defined radios Other radios than the default radios can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new radio configuration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These radios must be connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on cables. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 362 16.1.6 Standard RS232 RS232 Standard RS232 is supported by default. The settings are: Baud rate: Parity: Data bits: Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 115200 None 8 Stop bits: Flow control: 1 None 363 16.1.7 Hidden Point Measurement Devices Typical uses To measure • distances (reflectorless distance measurements using laser technology) • angles • azimuths to points which are not directly accessible with GPS, for example house corners or trees. If the device is connected to the instrument, the measurements taken with hidden point measurement devices are directly transferred. If the device is not connected, measurement can be typed in manually to calculate the coordinates of a hidden point. Example of use Step Description 1. An instrument must be a rover with or without real-time configuration. 2. A hidden point measurement device is connected to the instrument via cable or Bluetooth. 3. Hidden point measurements are configured and activated. 4. Distances, angles and azimuths are measured to the hidden point with the hidden point measurement device. 5. The measurements are directly transferred to the instrument and displayed in the appropriate fields. ) Hidden point measurement devices can be connected in addition to any of the other devices. They can be active at the same time. Changing of ports is not required. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 364 Supported hidden point measurement devices Some devices are predefined. Hidden point measurement devices of the same type but with different settings must be defined by creating a new hidden point measurement device. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 365 16.1.8 GPRS / Internet Devices Description GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting data packages using the Internet Protocol. When using GPRS technology, charges are made based on the amount of transferred data and not, as per normal digital cellular phones, for the connection time. Typical uses To access the Internet with an instrument in order to receive real-time data from the Internet. Example use Step ) Requirements for using GPRS / Internet devices Description The following is an example use for receiving data from the Internet. 1 Rover must be equipped with a GPRS / Internet device. 2 The GPRS / Internet device accesses the Internet where the rover connects for example to Ntrip. 3 The rover receives real-time corrections via the Internet. • • • • • AT command language must be supported by the digital cellular phone. Access Point Name of a server from the network provider. The APN can be thought of as the home page of a provider supporting GPRS data transfer. SIM card. This SIM card is the same as is normally used in mobile phones. The SIM card must be enabled to transmit data. Contact the service provider to enable the SIM card. Personal Identification Number Registration Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 366 Supported GPRS / Internet devices Some GPRS/Internet devices are predefined. Other GPRS capable devices can be used as long as they use AT commands. Their settings must be defined by creating a new device configuration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Please contact the local selling unit or dealer for further information. Advantages • • • Unlimited range of the data channel between base and rover. Free of jamming from other users. Fees are charged for the amount of data being transferred. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 367 16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices Description Allows devices to be created, edited, selected and deleted. Access step-by-step Step Description 1. For RTK rover and TPS: • Select Main Menu:Instrument\Instrument connections\All other connections. For RTK base: • Select Main Menu:Base connections\Instrument connections\All other connections. 2. Highlight the appropriate interface based on the type of device to be configured. For example, highlight RTK Rover when a radio is to be configured. 3. Edit... 4. Activate the interface by checking the check box. 5. Devce.. to access Devices. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 368 Devices This screen may consist of several pages and provides different devices for selection depending on which interface the screen was accessed from. The functionality described here is always the same. OK To select the highlighted device and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new device. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Edit.. To edit the highlighted device. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Delete To delete the highlighted device. More To display information about the type of device and the creator of the device. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn All or Fn Filter.. Available for Internet and Bluetooth devices. To list all devices or to hide devices which are not Internet or Bluetooth capable. Fn Default To recall previously deleted default devices and to reset default devices to the default settings. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 369 Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Name Names of available devices. Type Type of device defined when creating the device. Creator The creator of the device. The creator can be either Default if the device is a default, or User if the device has been created. ) Viva Series, Configuration of Devices If a Default device is edited by using Edit.. then its creator is still displayed as Default. 370 16.3 Creating/Editing a Device Description Allows a new device to be configured or an existing device to be edited. Access In Devices, highlight a device of the same type as the device to be created, from the list. Press New.. or Edit... New Device or Edit Device Store To store the new device and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. AT Msg Available for digital cellular phones and modems. To configure communication commands. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field Name of new device. Type Display only Same device type as was highlighted when New.. or Edit.. was used. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 371 Field Option Use this device Check box for internet Description Available for digital cellular phones and modems. Defines the device as an Internet capable device and adds it to the list in GPRS Internet Devices. Baud rate From 2400 to 115200 Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data. Data bits 6, 7 or 8 Number of bits in a block of digital data. Stop bit 1 or 2 Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data. Flow control None or Flow control Activates hardware handshake. When the instrument/device is ready for data, it asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the data. Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device in bits per second. Next step IF the device is a THEN radio or device other Store to close the screen and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. than digital cellular phone or modem digital cellular phone or modem Viva Series, Configuration of Devices AT Msg. 372 AT Msg For Use this device for internet checked in New Device or Edit Device, this screen consists of two pages: GSM/CSD page: GPRS/Internet page The AT commands configure the devices for normal digital cellular phone/modem mode. The AT commands configure the devices for GPRS/Internet mode. Please refer to the manual of the GPRS / Internet device for information about which AT commands must be entered or contact the supplier. The following table lists the fields of both pages. Description of fields Field Option Description Initialisation 1 Editable field Initialisation sequence to initialise digital cellular phone/modem. When the device is used, between Initialisation 1 and Initialisation 2, a check for the PIN is performed. (continued) Editable field Allows the Initialisation 1, Initialisation 2 or the Connect string to continue onto a new line. Initialisation 2 Editable field Initialisation sequence to initialise digital cellular phone/modem. Dial Editable field Dialling string used to dial the phone number of the real-time base. Hang-up Editable field Hangup sequence used to end the network connection. Escape Editable field Escape sequence used to switch to the command mode before using the hangup sequence. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 373 Field Option Description Connect Editable field Dialling string used to dial into the Internet. Next step Store returns to New Device or Edit Device. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 374 17 Instrument - Instrument status info 17.1 Status Functions ) The Status functions for the GPS RTK base menu, the GPS rover menu and for TPS are similar. The functions are described in the same chapters, differences are outlined. Description The STATUS functions help using the instrument by showing the state of many instrument functions. All fields are display only fields. Unavailable information is indicated by -----. Access • • For RTK base: Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base status info. For RTK rover and TPS: Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument status info. Status Menu OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 375 Description of the Status functions STATUS function Description Refer to chapter Battery & memory Information related to usage and status of battery and memory. "17.2 Battery & memory" Satellite tracking • Information related to the satellites ordered "17.3 Satellite by the elevation angle. tracking" • A skyplot shows satellite information in a graphical way. • Another page shows the date of the used almanacs, and, as shown on the skyplot, the number of satellites tracked and the number of satellites available above the cut-off elevation mask. RTK data link status Information related to real-time data, for example the data link and the device used to transfer real-time data. Current GPS position Information related to the current antenna position and the speed of the antenna. "17.4 RTK data link status" "17.5 Current GPS position" Raw data logging Information related to logging of raw observa- "17.6 Raw data tions. logging" Connection status • Information related to the configuration and "17.7 Connection use of interfaces, ports and devices. status" • Information related to the incoming data from active devices. TPS current station info Information related to the current station set on the instrument. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info "17.8 TPS current station info" 376 Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 377 17.2 Battery & memory Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access is also possible by: • Tapping the battery icon. • Tapping the data storage device/internal memory icon. Battery & Memory This description is valid for all pages of the screen. For the GPS base page, the information that is displayed depends on the real-time message. Leica/ Leica 4G: RTCM: CMR/CMR+: Transfers precise values for all fields. Transfer of any of the information not part of the message. Transfers general status information such as O.K. and Low. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 378 Description of fields Field Description Battery, Battery The percentage of remaining power capacity for the battery is displayed 1 or Battery 2 numerically. If no information for a field is available, for example no battery is inserted, then 0% is displayed. External power Shows if an external power supply is connected. Internal memory, CF card, SD card or USB stick The total/free memory for data storage on the data storage device. If no information for a field is available, for example no data storage device is inserted, then ----- is displayed. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 379 17.3 Satellite tracking Description This screen shows information related to the satellites ordered by the elevation angle. Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access is also possible by tapping the number of visible satellites icon. Satellite Tracking Status: GPS, GPS/GLO/GAL page Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info OK To return to the Main Menu. Base / Rover To change between the SNR values of rover and base. Hlth.. To view the numbers of satellites categorised in good, bad and unavailable. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. More To display information about the SNR values for GPS satellites (if GPS L5 is checked in GPS settings\Satellite tracking) and Galileo satellites. Available on the Satellite tracking and GAL page. 380 Description of columns Column Description Sat The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS), the Slot number (GLONASS) or the Space Vehicle number (Galileo) of the satellites. Elev The elevation angle in degrees. The arrows indicate if the satellite is rising or falling. Azmth The azimuth of the satellite. S/N 1, S/N 2 and The SNR on L1, L2 and L5 for GPS, on L1 and L2 for GLONASS and on E1, S/N L5 E5a, E5b and Alt-Boc for Galileo. If the signal is currently not being used in the position calculations, the number is shown in brackets. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 381 Satellite Tracking Status: GPS, Skyplot page Satellites below the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking Status are marked grey. The part of the skyplot between the 0° elevation and the cut-off angle is marked grey. OK To return to the Main Menu. GPS ? / GPS ? To hide or show the GPS satellites (shown by the prefix G). GLO ? / GLO ? To hide or show the GLONASS satellites (shown by the prefix R). Available when Glonass is activated in Satellite Tracking Status. GAL ? / GAL ? To hide or show the Galileo satellites (shown by the prefix E). Available when Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking Status. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 382 Description of symbols Symbol Description Satellites above the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking Status. Satellites below the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking Status. Next step Page changes to the Almanac page. Satellite Tracking Status: GPS, Almanac page The almanac page shows the date of the used almanacs, and, as shown on the skyplot, the number of satellites tracked and the number of satellites available above the cut-off elevation mask. OK To return to the Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 383 Next step OK exits Satellite Tracking Status. Satellite Tracking Status, RTK rover page The information about the satellites at the base shown on this page is identical with the information shown for the rover. Next step OK exits Satellite Tracking Status. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 384 17.4 RTK data link status Description This screen shows information related to real-time data, for example the data link and the device used to transfer real-time data. Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access is also possible by tapping the number of RTK status icon. RTK Data Link Status, General page OK To exit the screen. Data.. To view the data being received. Depending on the RTK data format, the shown data differ. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Description RTK data format The received real-time data format message type. GPS used L1/L2 The number of satellites on L1, L2 and L5 (when GPS L5 is activated in Satellite Tracking Status) being used in the current position solution. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 385 Field Description GLO used L1/L2 Available if Glonass is activated in Satellite Tracking Status. The number of satellites on L1 and L2 being used in the current position solution. GAL used E1/E5a Available if Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking Status. The number of satellites on E1 and E5a being used in the current position solution. GAL used E5b/ABOC Available if Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking Status. The number of satellites on E5b and Alt-BOC being used in the current position solution. Last data sent Available for an RTK base. Seconds since the last message from the base was sent. Last received Available for an RTK rover. Seconds since the last message from the base was received. In last minute Available for an RTK rover. The percentage of real-time data received from the base compared with the data received from the antenna within the last minute. This percentage indicates how well the data link is working. RTK network Available for an RTK rover. The type of base network in use. Stream NMEA messages from the GS Available for an RTK rover in a base network. NMEA positions must be send to a network. The type of NMEA message sent to the base network. If more than one message is sent at a time, then all types are shown separated by comma. Next step Page changes to the Device page. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 386 RTK Data Link Status, Device page The content of this page differs for each type of device in use. OK To exit the screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. For all devices available Description of fields Field Description Name The name of the device. For RS232 Description of fields Field Description Type The type of device. Port The port to which the device is connected. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 387 Field Description Bluetooth Available if device is connected via Bluetooth. Indicates the state of the connection. For digital cellular phones and modems Description of fields Field Description Type The type of device. Port The port to which the device is connected. Firmware The software version of the attached digital cellular phone. Operator The name of the network operator in which the digital cellular phone is operating. Status The current mode of the digital cellular phone. The options are Unknown, Detection and Registered. Bluetooth Available if device is connected via Bluetooth. Indicates the state of the connection. Signal Indication of received signal strength of the digital cellular phone network. For radios Description of fields The available fields depend on the radio type. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 388 Field Description Port The port to which the device is connected. Type The type of device. Channel The radio channel. Actual frequency The current set frequency of the radio. Central freq The defined central frequency of the radio. Firmware The software version of the attached radio. Signal Indication of strength of received radio signal. Next step Page changes to the RTK base page. RTK Data Link Status, RTK base page As shown below, the name of the page changes depending on the type of base being used. Name of page Description RTK base page Base is a real base station. Base (Nearest) page Base is the closest to the rover determined by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (i-MAX) page Base information is individualised Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (MAX) page Base information is Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (VRS) page Base is a virtual base station. Base (FKP) page Base information is area correction parameters. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 389 Description of fields Field Description RTK base ID An identification for a base station. The ID can be converted into a compact format to be sent out with real-time data in all real-time data formats. It is different from the point ID of the base station. Antenna height • • • Coords of For RTK data format: Leica, RTK data format: Leica 4G, RTK data format: RTCM v3 or RTK data format: RTCM 9,2 v2/RTCM 1,2 v2 with RTCM version: 2.3: The antenna height at the base from the marker to the MRP. For RTK data format: CMR/CMR+ and RTK data format: RTCM 18,19 v2 or RTK data format: RTCM 18,19 v2 with RTCM version: 2.2: The antenna height at the base from the marker to the phase centre. For all other RTK data format: ----- is displayed because the data format does not include information about the antenna height. The coordinates for the base station which are transferred depend on the active real-time data format. • For real-time messages which include antenna height and antenna type: Marker. • For real-time messages which do not include antenna information: Phase Centre of L1. Number of aux The number of active auxiliary base stations from which data is received. ref Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 390 Field Description Antenna at base The antenna used at the base. Sensor type at base The instrument type used at the base. Next step IF THEN other coordinate types are to be viewed Coord. Local coordinates are available when a local coordinate system is active. another page is to be accessed Page. this screen is to be quit OK exits the screen. RTK Data Link Status, Connectivity page This screen shows the status real-time connectivity as dynamic troubleshooting screen. It shows the success of each of the steps in the connectivity to receive real-time corrections. If one step fails, the check box is unchecked. As each step is successfully completed, the check box will be checked. Real-Time Input Data The following provides additional information on the satellite data received via real-time message. Information of those satellites is displayed, which are used on both base and rover. Access Data.. on RTK Data Link Status, General page. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 391 OK To return to RTK Data Link Status. Sat To display information about the satellite with the next smaller PRN. Sat + To display information about the satellite with the next larger PRN. Description of fields The data being received from the satellites and the layout of the screen depend on the active real-time data format. Field Description Sat PRN The PRN number (GPS), the Slot number (GLONASS) or the Space Vehicle number (Galileo) of the satellites shown with the prefix G (GPS), R (GLONASS) or E (Galileo). Sat Time The GPS time of the satellite. Phase L1, Phase L2, Phase L5 The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the GPS satellite on L1, L2 and L5. Phase L1, Phase L2 The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the GLONASS satellite on L1 and L2. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 392 Field Description Phase E1, Phase E5a, Phase E5b, Phase AltBOC The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the Galileo satellite on E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC. Msg 18 L1, Msg 18 L2 The uncorrected carrier phases for L1 and L2. Msg 20 L1, Msg 20 L2 The carrier phase corrections for L1 and L2. Code L1, Code L2, Code L5 The pseudorange from the antenna to the GPS satellite for L1, L2 and L5. Code L1, Code L2 The pseudorange from the antenna to the GLONASS satellite on L1 and L2. Code E1, Code E5a, Code E5b, Code AltBOC The pseudorange from the antenna to the Galileo satellite on E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC. Msg 19 L1, Msg 19 L2 The uncorrected pseudoranges for L1 and L2. Msg 21 L1, Msg 21 L2 The pseudorange corrections for L1 and L2. PRC Pseudorange corrections. RRC Rate of change of the corrections. IODE Issue Of Data Ephemeris. The identification number of the ephemeris for a satellite. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 393 17.5 Current GPS position Description This screen shows information related to the current antenna position and the speed of the antenna. For real-time rover configurations, the baseline vector is also shown. MapView shows the current position in a graphical format. Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access is also possible by: • Tapping the position Status icon. Current GPS Position, Position page OK To return to the Main Menu. Coord To see other coordinate types. Local coordinates are available when a local coordinate system is active. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To determine how often positions are computed and the screen display is updated. Fn Elev To see height as elevation. Available when local grid coordinates are displayed. Fn Ell Ht To see height as ellipsoidal height. Available when local grid coordinates are displayed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 394 Description of fields Field Description Position latency The latency of the computed position. Latency is mostly due to time required for data transfer and computation of position. Depends on the use of the prediction mode. Position quality and Available for phase fixed and code only solutions. The 2D coordinate Height quality and height quality of the computed position. HDOP and VDOP Available for navigated solutions. Next step Current GPS Position, Baseline page IF THEN the instrument is a real-time rover Page changes to the Baseline page. the instrument is not configured for realtime Page changes to the Speed page. the instrument is a real-time base OK exits Current GPS Position. Information on the baseline vector is displayed. Next step Page changes to the Speed page. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 395 Current GPS Position, Speed page Description of fields Field Description Horizontal speed The speed over ground in the horizontal direction. On bearing Available for local coordinate systems. The bearing for the horizontal direction related to the North direction of the active coordinate system. Vertical speed The vertical component of the current velocity. Next step OK exits Current GPS Position. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 396 17.6 Raw data logging Description This screen shows information related to logging of raw observations. Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access is also possible by tapping the number of RTK status icon. Raw Data Logging Status, General page OK To return to the Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Description Logging raw data Shows if raw data is saved and if so in which format. Logging to Shows where the data is saved. Current interval The type of current interval. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 397 Field Description Obs logged in The number of observations logged in current interval. current interval Total no. of static obs. The number of static epochs recorded in the current job. Total no. of moving obs. The number of moving epochs recorded in the current job. Next step Page changes to the Point occupation page. Raw Data Logging Status, Point occupation page Description of fields Field Description Current Status Shows if the instrument is moving or not. GDOP Current GDOP. Logging rate Rate at which raw observations are being recorded. No. of moving obs The number of logged moving raw observations. Reset as soon a new moving interval starts. Logging data from >5 sats since The time for how long five or more satellites are tracked on L1 and L2 without interruption. If less than five satellites were tracked, the counter is reset. The counter is not reset after Meas, Stop or Store. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 398 Field Description Obs Completed The percentage of collected data required for successful processing. It is a conservative estimate based on a 10 - 15 km baseline. The criteria used to display this value depend on the settings for Automatically stop point measurement, Stop criteria and Auto STOP/%Indicator based on in Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control. Time to go The estimated time in hours, minutes and seconds until the configured criteria for Stop criteria or Auto STOP/%Indicator based on is reached. The criteria used to display this value depend on the settings for Automatically stop point measurement, Stop criteria and Auto STOP/%Indicator based on in Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control. Next step Page changes to the RTK base page. Raw Data Logging Status, RTK base page As shown below, the name of the page changes depending on the type of base used. Name of page Description RTK base page Base is a real base station. Base (Nearest) page Base is the closest to the rover determined by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (i-MAX) page Base information is individualised Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (MAX) page Base information is Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (VRS) page Base is a virtual base station. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 399 Name of page Description Base (FKP) page Base information is area correction parameters. Description of fields Field Option Description Logging static obs A time in sec The logging rate at the base. This information is shown if the real-time message format supports this information and raw observations are being logged at the base. ----- Raw observations are not being logged, or status information is not supported by RTK format. Next step OK exits Raw Data Logging Status. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 400 17.7 Connection status 17.7.1 Connection Status Description This screen gives an overview of all interfaces with the port and the devices currently assigned. Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access is also possible by tapping the number of RTK status icon. Connection Status This screen consists of two pages, one for the field controller interfaces and one for the rover interfaces. OK To return to the Main Menu. Intfce Available for configured interfaces being highlighted. To view information related to real-time data or the internet connection. Devce.. To view the status of the attached device. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 401 17.7.2 Internet Description This screen shows • if the instrument is online on the Internet. • for how long the instrument is online. • the technology of data transfer. • the amount of data received or sent since the instrument is online. Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated Internet interface. • • On the Connection Status, CS connections page, highlight CS Internet.Intfce. On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight GS Internet. Intfce. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 402 17.7.3 ASCII Input Description This screen shows the • incoming ASCII data which is stored as an annotation. • description of the incoming ASCII data for each annotation field. Not used is shown for annotation fields which are not configured to receive incoming ASCII data. Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated ASCII Input interface. On the Connection Status, CS connections page, highlight ASCII Input.Intfce. ASCII Input - Data OK To exit the screen. Data.. and Descr To change between the given description for the incoming ASCII data or the last received ASCII data. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 403 17.7.4 RTK Data Link Status Description For information about this screen, refer to "17.4 RTK data link status". Access This screen is accessible for a configured RTK rover interface. On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight RTK Rover.Intfce. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 404 17.7.5 Remote (OWI) Description This screen shows all available ports and the interfaces and devices configured to these ports. Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated remote interface. On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight Remote (OWI) Connections. Remote (OWI) OK To exit the screen. Devce.. Available for some devices. To view status information about the devices. Description of fields Column Description Port The physical port on the instrument which is being used for the interface functionality. Connection The interface configured for the ports. Device The hardware connected to the chosen port. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 405 Next step OK exits the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 406 17.8 TPS current station info Access Standard access from the Instrument status info menu. TPS Current Station Info OK To exit the screen. Coord To display other coordinate types. ppm/SF To switch between displaying the station scale factor and the station ppm. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Description Station ID Station ID of the current station setup. Instrument height Instrument height of the current station setup. Easting Easting value of the instrument position. Northing Northing value of the instrument position. Local ellipsoid ht or For a selected coordinate system, ellipsoidal height and elevation can Elevation be displayed. Temperature Temperature set on the instrument. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 407 Field Description Pressure Pressure set on the instrument. Atmospheric ppm Atmospheric ppm set on the instrument. Station ppm Ppm of the current station set up. Station scale Scale factor of the current station set up. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 408 18 Instrument - Base settings 18.1 Satellite tracking Description The settings on this screen define which satellite system, satellites and satellite signals are used by the instrument. ) Access This screen contains the same settings as the RTK Rover Satellite Tracking Status screen. Changes made to the settings here in RTK Base mode, will be reflected in the RTK Rover mode and vice versa. For RTK base: Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base settings\Satellite tracking. Satellite Tracking Status, Tracking page OK To accept changes. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 409 Description of fields Field Option Description GPS L5 Check box Defines if the GPS L5 signal will be tracked. GLONASS Check box Defines if GLONASS satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. GALILEO Check box Defines if Galileo satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. COMPASS Check box Defines if Compass satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. Show message & audio warning, when loss of lock occurs Check box Activates an acoustic warning signal and a message given by the instrument when satellites are lost. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 410 Satellite Tracking Status, Advanced page OK To accept changes. Hlth.. Available for Satellite health: User defined. To configure the satellites used in the survey. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Cut-off angle Editable field Sets the elevation in degrees below which satellite signals are not recorded and are not shown to be tracked. Recommended settings: • For real-time: 10°. • For purely post-processing applications: 15°. DOP limit None, GDOP, HDOP, PDOP or VDOP If activated, the limit defined in Limiting value is checked. GPS positions are unavailable when the limit is exceeded. Limiting value Editable field The maximum acceptable DOP value. Available unless DOP limit: None. Satellite health Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings Sets the satellite tracking behaviour. 411 Field Option Description ) This setting is remembered when the instrument is turned off. It is stored as part of the configuration set. Automatic Incoming satellite signals are monitored by the instrument. Data from signals which are flagged as unhealthy is not recorded or used for real-time computations. User defined Satellites must manually be included/excluded from data recording and real-time computations with Hlth... Next step Hlth.. changes to Satellite Health. Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 412 Satellite Health This screen consists of the GPS page, Glonass page and the Galileo page. The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for all pages. OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Use To change between the options in the column User. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Option Description Satellite 01 to 32 The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS, 1 to 32), the Slot ID (GLONASS, 1 to 24) or the Space Vehicle number (Galileo, 1 to 30) of the satellites. There is a prefix G for GPS satellites, a prefix R for GLONASS satellites and a prefix E for Galileo satellites. System OK, N/A or Unhealthy Information on the satellite health taken from the almanac. N/A stands for not available. User Bad Excludes satellite from tracking. OK Includes satellite in tracking. Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 413 Column Option Description Auto Automatic satellite tracking when satellite is healthy. Next steps Step Description 1. Page changes to the Glonass page and to the Galileo page, where GLONASS satellites and Galileo satellites used in the survey can be configured. 2. OK returns to Satellite Tracking Status. 3. OK returns to Main Menu. Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 414 18.2 Base raw data logging Description Logged raw observations are used for • static and kinematic operations. With these operations, raw data is always post-processed in the office. Raw data must therefore be logged on both base and rover instruments. • real-time operations to check the work in the office by post-processing. OR to fill in gaps when a real-time position could not be calculated in the field, for example, due to problems with the real-time data reception. Observations must be logged on all instruments which will be used for post-processing. The settings on this screen define the logging of raw observations. Access For RTK base: Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base settings\Base raw data logging. Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 415 Logging GPS Base Data OK To accept changes. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Log base data for post processing Check box Activates raw data logging. Rate From 0.05s to 300.0s Rate at which raw observations are logged. Recommendations: Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings • For static operations with long baselines and over long time Rate: 15.0s or Rate: 30.0s. • For base stations for post-processed and realtime kinematic rovers, Rate at the base should be the same rate as at the rover. 416 Field Option Description Data type Selectable list Data can be logged in the Leica proprietary MDB format or in RINEX. Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 417 19 User - Work settings 19.1 ID templates 19.1.1 Accessing ID Template Configuration Description ID templates are predefined templates for point, line or area numbers. ID templates save having to type in the ID for each object. They are useful when many points are collected quickly, for example in post-processed and real-time kinematic operations. The ID templates that are selected to be used suggest IDs for Point ID, Line ID and Area ID when points, lines and areas are to be surveyed. Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\ID templates. ID Templates OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The currently active working style is automatically updated, to include the selected ID template. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Work settings 418 Description of fields Field Option Description GPS points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for manually occupied GPS points. GPS auto points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for GPS auto points. These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. TPS points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for manually occupied TPS points. TPS auto points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for TPS auto points. These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. Auxiliary points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for auxiliary points. These points are used when trying to find a stakeout point. Lines Selectable list Sets the ID templates for lines. Areas Selectable list Sets the ID templates for areas. Next step ENTER to open a selectable list and to access ID Template Library. Viva Series, User - Work settings 419 ID Template Library OK To select the highlighted template. New.. To create a new ID template. Edit.. To edit the highlighted ID template. Delete To delete the highlighted ID template. It does not matter if the ID template is being used in a working style. The ID template will be rebuilt when that working style becomes active. Fn Default To recall deleted default ID templates. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Template The name of the ID template and the format of the ID object. Increment The amount by which the point ID is incremented. Default ID templates Some ID templates are implemented by default. Viva Series, User - Work settings 420 Default ID template Description The last point ID during a survey will be displayed. This ID is automatically incremented if it contains numerical characters. If this ID is overwritten, the auto increment starts from the new ID. The automatic incrementation can be turned off when editing this ID template. Area0001 Suggested as ID for areas in default working styles. This ID is automatically incremented. Aux0001 Suggested as ID for auxiliary points in default working styles. These points are used when trying to find a stakeout point. This ID is automatically incremented. GPS0001 Suggested as ID for GPS measured points in default working styles. This ID is automatically incremented. GPS_Auto_0001 Suggested as ID for GPS auto points in default working styles. These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. This ID is automatically incremented. Line0001 Suggested as ID for lines in default working styles. This ID is automatically incremented. TPS0001 Suggested as ID for TPS measured points in default working styles. This ID is automatically incremented. TPS_Auto_0001 Suggested as ID for TPS auto points in default working styles. These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. This ID is automatically incremented. Time & date The current local time and date is the ID. Viva Series, User - Work settings 421 19.1.2 Creating/Editing an ID Template Access In ID Template Library, highlight an ID template. A copy of this ID template is taken for further configurations. New... New ID Template/Edit ID Template OK To store the new ID template into the ID template library. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description ID Editable field The name of the ID template and the format of the ID object. Any characters including spaces are allowed. Leading spaces are not accepted. Increment Selectable list IDs are incremented numerically or alphanumerically. Increment by Editable field The amount by which the point ID is incremented. Viva Series, User - Work settings 422 Field Option Cursor position Selectable list Examples for incrementation Description The character position at which the cursor is placed when ENTER is pressed in Point ID, Line ID or Area ID when surveying points. Last Character means that the cursor is placed immediately to the right of the last character. For Increment: Numeric only The rightmost numeric part is incremented within the point ID. ID Increment by Next point ID Notes Point994 5 Point999 Point1004 ... - 994point 5 999point 1004point ... - 123point123 -10 123point113 Numbers on the right are incremented. Negative increments allowed. Point11 -6 Point5 Point-1 Point-7 Point-13 ... - Viva Series, User - Work settings 423 ID Increment by Next point ID Notes Abcdefghijklmn94 5 Abcdefghijklmno99 Point ID increment fail Incrementation fails if next increment will result in more than 16 characters. Abcdefghijklmno9 -5 Abcdefghijklmnop4 Point ID increment fail Negative incrementing fails if next increment requires negative sign and will result in more than 16 characters. For Increment: Alphanumeric The rightmost character within the point ID is incremented regardless of whether that character is numeric or alphanumeric. ID Increment by Next point ID Notes Point994 5 Point999 Point99E Point99J ... - 994point 5 994poiny Point ID increment fail Lower case alpha characters increment until z is reached. Then a new point ID must be entered. Abcdef -5 Abcdea AbcdeV … AbcdeB Point ID increment fail Lower case alpha characters decrement from lower to upper case until A is reached. Then a new point ID must be entered. Viva Series, User - Work settings 424 ID Increment by Next point ID Notes ABCDEB 5 Upper case alpha characters increment from upper to lower case until z is reached. Then a new point ID must be entered. Viva Series, User - Work settings ABCDEB ABCDEG ... Abcdez Point ID increment fail 425 19.2 Coding & linework Description The settings on this screen define the method of coding. Refer to "20 Coding" for a complete description of coding. Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework. Coding & linework settings, Code & attributes page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Use a list box to Check box view codes Viva Series, User - Work settings Description If checked, codes stored within the job codelist can be selected from a selectable list to code points, lines and areas. Otherwise, each code must be entered manually. 426 Field Option Determines the attribute values displayed under certain circumstances. This setting is applicable to both the storing and displaying of attribute values. Suggested attributes Prompt for mandatory attributes Description Default values When available, the default attribute values, as stored in the job, are displayed and stored. Last used When available, the last used attribute values as stored in the job are displayed and stored. Always prompt A screen to enter mandatory attributes will always appear when codes being stored have one or more attributes of attribute type mandatory. Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed can only be created in LGO. Only if no value A screen to enter mandatory attributes will only appear when codes being stored have one or more attributes of attribute type mandatory, without an attribute value. Attributes of attribute type mandatory must always be created in LGO. Code change only A screen to type in mandatory attributes will only appear when a new code with a mandatory attribute was selected. Next step Page changes to the Linework page. Viva Series, User - Work settings 427 Coding & linework settings, Linework page The flags for Linework are defined on this screen. A flag • is stored as a property of a point. • can be exported with a format file. • is different to a code. The flags defined on this screen are linked to the options available for Linework in a survey screen page of an application. The selection for Linework in a survey screen page determines the flag stored with a point. The availability of Linework in a survey screen page is configured in My Survey Screen Settings. Refer to "21 Linework" for information on Linework. Description of fields Field Option Description Automatically create lines & areas when coding Check box If checked, lines and areas can be automatically created and opened using codes. Use a stringing Check box attribute Attribute Viva Series, User - Work settings Selectable list Available if Automatically create lines & areas when coding is checked. If checked, surveyed points that have the same code and attribute value for the Stringing attribute are strung together on one line. Available if Use a stringing attribute is checked. The attribute value used to determine which surveyed points are strung together on one line. 428 Field Option Description Begin line Editable field Opens a new line when the next point is stored. Any lines which are currently open are closed. The point can be stored with a point code. 3pt curve Editable field Stores the linework flag for a curve through the next three measured points and continues a line/area. Re-open last line Editable field Opens the last used line again. End line Editable field Closes all open lines. Cont line/area Editable field Indicates a line/area is open. Start spline Editable field Stores the linework flag for beginning a spline and continues any open line/area. End spline Editable field Stores the linework flag to stop a spline. Cont spline Editable field Indicates a line/area is open with spline line type. Begin area Editable field Opens a new area when the next point is stored. Any areas which are currently open are closed. The point can be stored with a point code. Re-open last area Editable field Opens the last used area again. Close area Editable field Closes all open areas. Next step Page changes to the Quick coding page. Viva Series, User - Work settings 429 Coding & linework settings, Quick coding page Description of fields Field Quick coding Digits to use Option Description Never Prevents the use of quick coding completely. On Allows the use of quick coding and activates it. Off Allows the use of quick coding, but keeps it deactivated. 1, 2 or 3 Sets the mostly used number of digits for the quick code. Quick codes with fewer digits can still be used. While typing a quick code during a survey, using ENTER after typing one or two digits of the quick code indicates the end of the input. Store free code After pt is stored or Determines if a free code measured with a quick code Before pt is stored is stored before or after the point. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, User - Work settings 430 19.3 My Survey Screen Description Display settings define the parameters shown on a page on the survey screen. Four survey screen pages are definable. Page Page Page Page 1: 2: 3: 4: Always shown on the survey screen. Can be shown or hidden on the survey screen. Can be shown or hidden on the survey screen. Never shown on the survey screen. Reserved for applications. The settings on this screen define the layout of the four survey screen pages. Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\My Survey Screen. My Survey Screen Settings, TPS and GPS page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Config.. To configure the selected survey screen page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Work settings 431 Description of fields Field Option Description Define Page 1, 2, 3 or 4 Selected survey screen page. Use in survey Check box Indicates if the survey screen page is shown or hidden as a page in Survey. Next step Highlight the survey screen page and Config.. to access Configure Page. Configure Page OK To accept changes and to return to previous screen. Clear To set all fields to Line space full. Default To recall the default settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the page is shown as page name in Survey. Viva Series, User - Work settings 432 Field Option Show in the Check box Survey application 1st line Display only 2nd line to 16th line Viva Series, User - Work settings Description Shows or hides the page as a page in Survey. Fixed to Point ID. For each line, one of the following options can be selected. Angle right Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position. % completed Display only field for the percentage of the time for which the point has been occupied based on the setting for Stop criteria in screen Quality Control. Appears in the page during the point occupation if Quality Control is checked. Annotation 1 to Annotation 4 Editable field for comments to be stored with the point. Antenna height Input field for antenna height for static observations. Attrib (free) 01 to Attrib (free) 20 Display only field for attributes for free codes. Attrib 01 to Attrib 20 Editable field for attributes for codes. Automation Unavailable for SmartStation. Select automation type. 433 Field Viva Series, User - Work settings Option Description Avg max #distances Input field for maximum number of distance measurements in the averaging EDM mode. Azimuth Display only field for the azimuth. Backsight pt ID Display only field for the point ID of the backsight point. Code Editable field for codes. Code (free) Editable field for free codes. Code desc (free) Display only field for the description of free codes. Description Display only field for the description of codes. Easting Display only field for Easting coordinate of measured point. GDOP Display only field for the current GDOP of the computed position. HDOP Display only field for the current HDOP of the computed position. Elevation Display only field for the height coordinate of the measured point. Height difference Display only field for the height difference between station and reflector. Horiz distance Display only field for horizontal distance. 434 Field Viva Series, User - Work settings Option Description Humidity Editable field for relative humidity to be stored with point. Hz angle Display only field for the horizontal angle. Instrument height Display only field for the instrument height. Line space full Insert full line space. Line space half Insert half line space. Linework Selectable list with option for flagging a line/area. Measure mode Select EDM measurement mode. Measure Select EDM type. Moving antenna ht Input field for antenna height for moving observations. Msd PP obs Display only field for the number of static observations recorded over the period of point occupation. Appears in the page when recording of static observations is configured. Northing Display only field for Northing coordinate of measured point. Number of dists Display only field for number of averaged distances measured with EDM mode averaging. 435 Field Viva Series, User - Work settings Option Description Offset left/right Input field for horizontal distance offset for measured point, perpendicular to the line of sight. Offset height Input field for height offset for measured point. Offset in/out Input field for horizontal distance offset, in the direction of line of sight. Offset mode Select offset mode. PDOP Display only field for the current PDOP of the computed position. PPM atmos Display only field for atmospheric ppm. PPM geometric Display only field for geometric ppm value. PPM total Display only field for the total ppm value. Point ID Editable field for the point ID. Pressure Editable field for atmospheric pressure. Prism constant Display only field for additive constant of currently selected reflector. Quality 1D Display only field for the current height coordinate quality of computed position. Quality 2D Display only field for the current 2D coordinate quality of computed position. 436 Field Viva Series, User - Work settings Option Description Quality 3D Display only field for the current 3D coordinate quality of computed position. RTK positions Display only field for the number of positions recorded over the period of point occupation. Appears in the page of real-time rover configurations. SD (last recorded) Display only field for the last recorded distance. Slope distance Display only field for measured slope distance. Station ID Display only field for current station ID. Station easting Display only field for current station Easting coordinates. Station height Display only field for current station height coordinates. Station northing Display only field for current station Northing coordinates. Std deviation Display only field of standard deviation in millimetres of averaged distances. Target Select a prism. Target height Input field for prism height. 437 Field Viva Series, User - Work settings Option Description Temp dry Editable field for dry temperature to be stored with point. Temp wet Editable field for wet temperature to be stored with point. Time at point Display only field for the time from when the point is occupied until point occupation is stopped. Appears in the page during the point occupation. Type Display only field for the type of code, for example point code, line code or area code. V angle Display only field for vertical angle. V angle display Select vertical angle display. VDOP Display only field for the current VDOP of the computed position. 438 19.4 Hot keys & favourites Description The settings on this screen assign functions, screens or applications to each of the first and second level of hot keys, and the favourites key. Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Hot keys & favourites. OR Hold a hot key down for two seconds. This action is also possible after pressing Fn. Hot Keys & Favourites, GPS Hot Keys/TPS Hot Keys page To configure the first level of hot keys. This page is only available for CS15 models. CS10 models do not have hot keys. OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description F7 to F12 Selectable list All functions, screens or applications which can be assigned to the particular key. Viva Series, User - Work settings 439 Next step Page changes to the GPS Fn+hot keys/TPS Fn+hot keys page. Hot Keys & Favourites, GPS Fn+hot keys/TPS Fn+hot keys page To configure the second level of hot keys. This page is only available for CS15 models. CS10 models do not have hot keys. The functionality on this page is identical to the one on the GPS Hot Keys/TPS Hot Keys page. Next step Page changes to the GPS favourites/TPS favourites page. Hot Keys & Favourites, GPS favourites/TPS favourites page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Work settings 440 Description of fields Field Option Description 1 to 9 Selectable list All functions, screens or applications which can be assigned to the individual lines in the user-defined menu. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, User - Work settings 441 20 Coding 20.1 Overview Description A code is a description which can be stored by itself or with a point, line, or area. SmartWorx Viva coding is flexible with what types of codes can be stored and also how they are entered. Thematical and/or free codes can be stored to the system by; • selecting codes from a codelist, • entering a quick code combination, • directly typing in the code, or • selecting the code from a SmartCodes screen. Quick coding and SmartCodes are both quick ways for a code to be selected, a point to be measured, and both code and point to be stored. ) Coding methods Viva Series, Coding For coding, points, lines and areas have the same behaviour. In this chapter, the word object is used as a generic term for points, lines and areas. Coding method Characteristic Description Thematical Use To store a description together with an object inside an application or in Main Menu: Jobs & Data\ View & edit data. 442 Coding method Characteristic Description Selection of the codes • • Free For thematical coding without codelist: On a configured survey screen page, codes are manually typed in. Recording of the codes Together with the objects. Use To store a description independent of an object at any time. A free code can be used to store a description related to an object, or additional descriptions such as the job name or temperature. Selection of the codes • Viva Series, Coding For thematical coding with codelist: On a configured survey screen page, codes are selected from the job codelist in a selectable list. It is also possible to add thematical codes from the codelist to a SmartCodes screen for quick selection, or to select thematical codes using the quick coding method. The job codelist must contain thematical codes. For free coding using a codelist: Pressing the configured hot key opens a selectable list with the free codes of the job codelist. It is also possible to select free codes using the quick coding method. The job codelist must contain free codes. 443 Coding method Characteristic Description • Quick For free coding with direct input: Pressing the configured hot key opens a screen for alphanumeric input. Recording of the codes Stored as time-related information. A time stamp is stored with each free code. Free codes selected using quick coding can be configured to be stored before or after the object. Use Quick coding is the storing of an object plus a thematical or free code using a minimum number of keystrokes. Selection of the codes Shortcuts must be assigned to codes in the job codelist. Quick coding: On must be set in Coding & linework settings, Quick coding page. Typing the shortcut searches for the assigned code. Point measurement begins. Recording of the codes Viva Series, Coding • For thematical codes: Together with the objects. With Automatically stop point measurement and Automatically store point both checked in Quality control, the points and codes are immediately stored. • For free codes: Stored as time-related information before or after the points. A time stamp is stored with each free code. 444 Coding method Configure coding Viva Series, Coding Characteristic ) ) Description Quick codes must be created in LGO. Characters that can be assigned to quick codes are: • 0 to 9 • A to Z • a to z Refer to "19.2 Coding & linework" for information on configuring coding. 445 20.2 Thematical Coding 20.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist Requirements • • • Access The job codelist contains thematical codes for points, lines and/or areas. Use a list box to view codes is checked in Coding & Linework Settings. A survey screen page with an editable field for codes must be configured. Open the selectable list for Code in a survey screen page of an application. OR Open the selectable list for a Code/Point code in New Point, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas. OR Open the selectable list for Point code in Edit Point:, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas. OR Open the selectable list for Code (auto) in Survey, Auto page, if configured. Select Code Viva Series, Coding Select Code is shown as an example. Depending on the setting for Automatically create lines & areas when coding in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page, either; • all point, line and area codes are available for selection, or • only those point codes from the job codelist, which belong to an active code group, are available for selection. 446 Codes marked with * have attributes attached. OK To accept changes and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new code. Attrib Available unless creating/editing a point/line/area. To type in attribute values for the selected code and/or add new attributes for the selected code. Last Available if a code has been previously used in the working job. To select from a list of last used codes. The codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list. More To display information about the code description, the code group, the code type and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in the job. Fn Group To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "6.5 Managing Code Groups" Viva Series, Coding 447 Fn Sort To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code, in the order they were added to the codelist, or the last used. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Highlight the desired code. • If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The measured point is stored with the selected code independently of any line/area. • If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the selected code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID template. The measured point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until it is closed manually or another line code is selected. • If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines. Attrib to access Enter Attributes. Enter Attributes Viva Series, Coding If configured for the selected code, editable fields for attribute values are available. Any preconfigured attribute rules, for example, integer numbers only, a set range, or a selectable list, control what values can be entered. Type in the attribute values. Attribute values for attributes of type • normal can be edited. • fixed cannot be edited. 448 OK To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. +Attrib To add a new attribute of type normal and of value type text. Up to twenty attributes can be added. Attributes of type mandatory or fixed and of value type real or integer must be created in LGO. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and the attribute value to be used as the default attribute value can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values for the selected code. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coding 449 Next step Press OK. The code and any associated attribute values are stored when the point is stored. If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should they not be identical, a screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected. Viva Series, Coding 450 20.2.2 Thematical Coding without Codelist Requirements • • • Access A thematical code is typed in the field Code in a survey screen page of an application. OR Code/Point code in New Point, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas. OR Point code in Edit Point:, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas. OR in the field Code (auto) in Survey, Auto page, if configured. Survey, Code page Type in a code and attribute values. Up to eight attributes can be added. This setting is configured in the survey screen page. • If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The measured point is stored with the selected code independently of any line/area. • If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the selected code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID template. The measured point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until it is closed manually or another line code is selected. • If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines. Use a list box to view codes is NOT checked in Coding & Linework Settings. A survey screen page with an editable field for codes must be configured. A survey screen page with a selectable list for code types must be configured. Next step Press Meas. Viva Series, Coding 451 20.3 Free Coding 20.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist Requirements • • Access The job codelist contains free codes. A hot key is configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes or the favourites menu is configured to display the option Select free code from list. Press a hot key configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys. OR For GPS mode, press and select Select free code from list to access the screen Select Free Code. For TPS mode, press Fn and select Select free code from list to access the screen Select Free Code. Refer to "1.2 Favourites Key" for information on the key. Viva Series, Coding 452 Select Free Code All free codes from the job codelist which belong to an active code group, are available for selection. Free codes marked with * have attributes attached. Store To store the free code and any associated attribute values and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new code. Attrib To type in attribute values and/or add new attributes for the selected free code. Refer to "20.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist". Last Available if a free code has been previously used in the working job. To select from a list of last used free codes. The free codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list. More To display information about the code description, the code group and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in the job. Fn Group To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "6.5 Managing Code Groups" Viva Series, Coding 453 Fn Sort To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code or the last used. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coding 454 20.3.2 Free Coding with Direct Input Requirements A hot key is configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes or the favourites menu is configured to display the option Enter free code. Access Press a hot key configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys. OR For GPS mode, press and select Enter free code to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. For TPS mode, press Fn and select Enter free code to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. Refer to "1.2 Favourites Key" for information on the key. Enter Free Code & Attributes Type in a code and attribute values. As soon as a free code is typed in, a codelist is created within the job. Up to eight attributes can be added. Refer to "20.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist" for a description of keys. Next step Press Store. Viva Series, Coding 455 20.4 Quick Coding Requirements • • Activate quick coding The current setting for Quick coding in the Quick coding page determines how quick coding is activated. Quick coding can be activated at any time. • • • Performing Quick coding Viva Series, Coding The job codelist contains quick codes for points, lines and/or areas. According to the user requirements, set Store free code: Before pt is stored or Store free code: After pt is stored in Coding & Linework Settings, Quick coding. For Quick coding: On, Quick coding is active and can be used. For Quick coding: Off, use a hot key, the favourites menu or tap the quick coding icon. For Quick coding: Never, change the setting manually. A screen must be active where points can be measured. Type in the one, two or three digits of the quick code. The current setting for Digits to use in Coding & Linework Settings, Quick coding page determines by how many keystrokes quick coding is executed. Press ENTER to execute quick coding after less than the configured keystrokes. This action is possible after one keystroke for Digits to use: 2 and one or two keystrokes for Digits to use: 3. Press ESC to clear digits from the entry. Only mandatory attribute values can be entered. For non-mandatory attributes, either the default or the last used attribute values are stored, depending on the setting for Suggested attributes in Coding & Linework Settings, Code & attributes page. 456 For point codes: • The point code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and point measurement begins. • The point code and any associated attribute values are stored with the point. • If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should they not be identical, a screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected. For free codes: • The free code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and point measurement begins. • The free code, associated attribute values and time related information are stored. The setting for Store free code in Coding & Linework Settings, Quick coding page determines if the free code is stored before or after the point. For line/area codes: • The line/area code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist. • A new line/area is created and immediately stored with that line/area code and attributes. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID Templates is used. Viva Series, Coding 457 20.5 SmartCodes 20.5.1 Overview Description SmartCodes is a quick way for a code to be selected and a point to be measured. All existing coding, linework, and point measurement functionality is retained. Viva Series, Coding 458 20.5.2 Configuring SmartCodes Access In Survey press Fn Config.. to access Configuration. Configuration SmartCodes page The settings on this page activate the using of SmartCodes and define the method. All settings in this screen are stored within the currently active working style. OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Coding Field Option Description Use SmartCodes Check box If checked, using of SmartCodes is activated. All other fields on the screen are active and can be edited. Measure point when box is tapped Check box If checked, when one of the code boxes is tapped in Survey, SmartCodes page, then the code is selected and the point is measured. ) 459 Field Option Method by which subsequent code box is selected after a point is stored. Automatically move focus to next box Not used Nine code boxes are shown in the Survey, SmartCodes page, but no automatic movement of the focus takes place. Zig-Zag Each new code rotation through the block is started at the same end where the previous code rotation finished. Same direction Each new code rotation through the block is started at the same end where the previous code rotation started. ) Refer to "47 Survey Cross Section" for an explanation of Zig-Zag and Same direction. Available for Automatically move focus to next box: Zig-Zag and Automatically move focus to next box: Same direction. The way of using the code boxes. This setting controls the order in which the code boxes will be rotated through automatically. Direction to move Viva Series, Coding Description Forward The code boxes are used in the same way as defined in Survey, SmartCodes page. Backward The code boxes are used in the reverse way as defined in Survey, SmartCodes page. 460 Field Option Number of code From 1 to 9 boxes Available for Automatically move focus to next box: Zig-Zag and Automatically move focus to next box: Same direction. Number of code boxes shown in Survey, SmartCodes page. Show at bottom of screen Information shown in line 8 of Survey, SmartCodes page. Not used No survey screen page element is shown. Point ID The identifier for manually measured points. The configured point ID template is used. 3D CQ The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. 2D CQ The current 2D coordinate quality of the computed position. 1D CQ The current height coordinate quality of the computed position. Linework The linework flag to be stored with the point. The options available depend on whether a line/area is currently open. Antenna The height of the antenna that is being used. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. height Viva Series, Coding Description 461 Field Option Description Target height The height of the reflector that is being used. Changing the reflector height here does not update the default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set. Hz The current horizontal angle of the measured point. V The current vertical angle of the measured point. Horiz distance The current horizontal distance of the measured point. Slope The current slope distance of the measured point. distance Height difference Automatically create lines & areas when coding Check box Use a stringing Check box attribute Viva Series, Coding The current height difference between the station and the measured point. If checked, lines and areas can be automatically created and opened using codes. Available if Automatically create lines & areas when coding is checked. If checked, surveyed points that have the same code and attribute value for the Stringing attribute are strung together on one line. 462 Viva Series, Coding Field Option Description Stringing attribute Selectable list Available if Use a stringing attribute is checked. The attribute value used to determine which surveyed points are strung together on one line. 463 20.5.3 Code Block Requirements • Use SmartCodes ticked in Configuration, SmartCodes page. Survey, SmartCodes page Meas To start recording positions. Codes.. To select a code to be assigned to the highlighted code block. Available when a code box is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Coding Field Option Description Code block Selectable list The code block to be used. Code box - A measured point is stored with the code assigned to the highlighted code box. 464 Field Option Description ) ) ) Linework Selectable list When Stringing attribute is configured in Stringing attribute, SmartCodes page, an attribute value can be typed in below the code name of the highlighted code box. The attribute value can also be modified using the softkeys + and -. For Measure point when box is tapped being checked in Stringing attribute, SmartCodes page, tapping the code box with the supplied stylus automatically starts measuring the point. Selecting the code box by using the arrow keys will not start measuring the point. Lines/areas are automatically opened and closed using SmartCodes, as configured. Available for Show at bottom of screen: Linework. Select the linework flag to be stored with the point. Then move the focus on the line/area code box. Next step Highlight a code block and press Codes.. to access Select Code. Viva Series, Coding 465 Select Code OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new code. Attrib To type in attribute values for the selected code and/or add new attributes for the selected code. Last Available if a code has been previously used in the working job. To select from a list of last used codes. The codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list. More To display information about the code description, the code group, the code type and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in the job. Fn Group To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "6.5 Managing Code Groups" Fn Sort To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code, in the order they were added to the codelist, or the last used. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coding 466 Copying a code block to a new job step-by-step Step ) Description Code blocks are stored in the job. 1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\ Job properties. OR ) 2. ) Codelist: If codes had been copied from the internal memory codelist, the name of the codelist is displayed. If codes have been typed in, then the name of the job is displayed. Fn Export to copy codes and code blocks from the job to an existing or new codelist. Copying code blocks to an existing codelist overwrites the code blocks of the existing codelist. 3. OK and Store to save the current job and return to Main Menu. 4. Create a new job and assign the related codelist to the job. ) Viva Series, Coding Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\ Choose working job or Choose control job. Edit.. to access Job Properties:. SmartCodes from the codelist are now available within the new job. 467 20.6 Code and Attribute Mismatch 20.6.1 Code Mismatch Description When storing a point with a code, it can happen that a point with the same point ID already exists in the job. If the codes of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where the code can be corrected. One point cannot have different codes. Point Code Mismatch This screen opens automatically if the codes of the new and the existing point do not match. Highlight the code to be stored with the new point. Store To store the highlighted code and any associated attributes with the point being stored and to continue with the application or data management. More To display information about the code description, the code group and any attributes associated with the highlighted code. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Coding Field Option Description New Code Display only The code for the point. Stored Code Display only The code as stored for the existing point in the job. 468 20.6.2 Attribute Mismatch Description If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should the attributes not be identical, a screen opens where the attribute mismatch can be corrected. One point cannot have different attribute information. ) Attributes Already Stored/Attributes Being Stored The name of the screen changes with pressing Current or Stored: Pressing Current: Pressing Stored: Attributes Being Stored Attributes Already Stored This screen opens automatically if the attribute names and/or values of the new and the existing point do not match. Store To store the selected attributes with the new/created point and to continue with the application or data management. Current or Stored To change between viewing the attribute names and values of the new/created point and those values stored for the existing point in the job. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coding 469 Description of fields Field Option Description Point code Display only • For Attributes Already Stored: The code of the existing point in the job. • For Attributes Being Stored: The code of the new point. • For Attributes Already Stored: The attributes as stored for the existing point in the job. • For Attributes Being Stored: The attributes of the new point. Attributes Viva Series, Coding Display only 470 21 Linework 21.1 Overview Description Working with lines can be automated. Two ways of working are available. They are listed in this table. The two ways of working can be mixed. Linework by Description Linework listbox In all applications and on the Auto page in Survey, a survey screen page can be configured to show a field Linework with a selectable list. The selection from the selectable list determines • the action taken for a line/area, for example opening or closing a line. • the linework flag stored with a point. The linework flags • are configured in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page. • can be exported with a format file. Coding Point, line or area codes can be selected in many applications. Selecting a point, line or area code closes any open line/area and opens a new line/area. Refer to "20 Coding" for more information. ) Viva Series, Linework The linework flag can be used without thematical coding by using the linework field in the Survey screen page configuration. The code can be linked to linework if it is configured as a point code to start a line/area, or it is a line or area code. Quick coding can be used as described in "20.4 Quick Coding". 471 21.2 Performing Linework using the Linework Field ) The Survey application is used here to explain Linework. Requirements • • A survey screen page with a selectable list for Linework must be configured. The linework flags must be defined in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page. • Access Linework using the linework field step-bystep Viva Series, Linework The rover menu must be used. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey. Step Description 1. Go to the point to be measured. 2. Select the linework flag to be stored with the point. 3. Measure the point. ) Depending on the option selected for Linework, a line/area is opened, closed or reopened. 4. Repeat steps 1. to 5. until all points for the linework are measured. 5. Fn Quit to exit the Survey application. 6. Use a format file to export the points including the linework flags. 472 21.3 Performing Linework with Thematical Coding Description Linework and coding can be combined. This combination can be useful, because coding, assigning linework flags and opening/closing lines/areas can all be done with one point observation. Combining Linework and coding can only be configured if thematical point codes or if thematical point, line and area codes are available for selection. Thematical coding can be done with or without codelists. ) Configuration options Viva Series, Linework Linework and coding can also be combined using SmartCodes. Refer to "20.5 SmartCodes". The configuration for the types of codes available and the configuration for coding with/without a codelist both have an influence on the following: • The required configuration of a survey screen page. • The behaviour of the fields configured for the survey screen page. • The behaviour of the software. 473 The possible configurations and their influence on the coding related fields are shown in this table: Configuration selected in the Coding Behaviour of the coding related fields & Linework Settings screen depending on the configuration selected. Use a list box to view codes Code Code type Linework Selectable list Display only Selectable list Selectable list Display only Selectable list Editable field Selectable list Selectable list Editable field Display only Selectable list Automatically create lines & areas when coding Use a list box to view codes Automatically create lines & areas when coding Use a list box to view codes Automatically create lines & areas when coding Use a list box to view codes Automatically create lines & areas when coding Viva Series, Linework 474 Requirements • A • • • • Configure in Coding & Linework Settings, Code & attributes page • Automatically create lines & areas when coding checked or not checked. • Use a list box to view codes checked or not checked. In Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page, define the linework flags. • • ) Access Viva Series, Linework survey screen page must be configured with a field for Code. a selectable list for Linework. a selectable list for Code type when using point, line and area codes without a codelist (Use a list box to view codes is unchecked). This field is not required if only point codes are used, or when working with a codelist (Use a list box to view codes is checked). The rover menu must be used. The Survey application is used here to explain the combination of Linework and Coding. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey. 475 Survey, Survey page This example is what a survey screen page configured for Linework and coding looks like. The most important keys are explained. Meas To start recording positions. The key changes to Stop. Stop To end recording of positions when enough data is collected. The key changes to Store. Store To store the point information. The key changes to Meas. All To measure and store distances and angles. Stop Available if Measure mode: Tracking and Dist was pressed. Stops the distance measurements. The key changes back to All. Dist To measure and display distances. Available unless Measure mode: Tracking and/or Log auto points checked, after the tracking or logging is started. Viva Series, Linework 476 Store To record data. If Measure mode: Tracking and/or Log auto points checked, records measured point and continues tracking. Linework and Coding step-by-step Step 1. Field Code ) Description for thematical coding Use a list box to view codes checked Use a list box to view codes not checked Select a code from the selectable list. Depending on the configuration only point codes, or also line and area codes are available for selection. Type in a code. to store a point without code or to perform Linework without coding. ----- to store a point without code or to perform Linework without coding. 2. Code type Point is displayed. This field is a display only field. It cannot be changed. 3. Linework Select an option for the linework flag to be stored with the point. Refer to "21.2 Performing Linework using the Linework Field" for a description of the options. ) 4. Select ----- to store a point without linework flag or to perform coding without Linework. - Press Meas, Stop and Store. Press All. Viva Series, Linework 477 Step ) Viva Series, Linework Field Description for thematical coding Use a list box to view codes checked Use a list box to view codes not checked - • The point is stored with the selected code. - • The point is stored with the selected linework flag. - • The choice of linework flags available for Linework is updated. 478 22 User - Working style wizard 22.1 Overview Description The software has many configurable parameters and functions which can be set by the user to suit their preferred method of working. These preferred settings can be saved as a Working Style. Using the Working Style Wizard, all the settings can be defined at once. Alternatively, all screens of this wizard can also be accessed individually from User\Work settings and User\System settings. Default working style A default working style exists on the instrument. It uses standard settings for most applications. The default working style can be edited or deleted. It is always possible to restore the default working style by formatting the internal memory. User defined working styles New working styles can be created. The working style wizard assists in editing working styles. Edit outside the working style wizard Parameters and functions can be edited without going through the working style wizard. Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 479 22.2 Accessing the Working Style Wizard Access Select Main Menu: User\Working style wizard. Working Style Wizard Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Next step IF you want to THEN select a different set select New working style, press Next and continue with "22.3 of settings Choosing a Different Working Style". create a new set of settings select Choose a different working style, press Next and continue with "22.4 Creating a New Working Style". edit an existing set of select Edit a working style, press Next and continue with "22.5 settings Editing a Working Style". Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 480 22.3 Choosing a Different Working Style Working Style Wizard, Choose the working style to use. Select an existing working style from the selectable list. Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Delete To delete the highlighted working style. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 481 22.4 Creating a New Working Style Working Style Wizard, Enter the working style details Type in the name and a description for the new working style. Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 482 22.5 Editing a Working Style Working Style Wizard, Choose the working style to edit. Select the working style to be edited from the selectable list. Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Delete To delete the working style currently shown in the selectable list immediately. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of fields Field Option Description Create a copy Check box Creates a copy of the working style before the editing process starts. Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 483 23 User - System settings 23.1 Regional settings Description The settings on this screen define • the units for all types of measurement data displayed. • information related to some types of measurement data. • the order in which coordinates are displayed. • the instrument identification number. • the languages available on the instrument. Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Regional settings. Regional Settings, Distance page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - System settings 484 Description of fields Field Option The units shown for all distance and coordinate related fields. Distance Distance decimal Metre (m) Metres [m] International ft (fi) International feet [fi], storage in US feet Intl ft/inch (fi) International feet [fi], inches and 1/8 inches (0' 00 0/8 fi), storage in US feet US ft (ft) US feet [ft] US ft/inch (ft) US feet, inches and 1/8 inches (0' 00 0/8 fi) [ft] US miles (mi) US miles [mi] Kilometres (km) Kilometres [km] From 0 to 4 The number of decimal places shown for all distance and coordinate related fields. This setting is for data display and does not apply to data export or storage. The available options depend on the selected Distance. Selects display format for all chainage information fields. Chainage format Viva Series, User - System settings Description +123456.789 Default chainage display form. +123+456.789 Separator between hundreds and thousands. +1234+56.789 Separators between tens and hundreds. +123.4+56.789 Separator between tens and hundreds with additional decimal point. 485 Field Option Description Area m², Intl acres (Ai), The units shown for all area-related fields. US acres (A), Hectares (ha), fi² or ft² Volume m³, fi³, ft³ or yd³ The units shown for all volume-related fields. Next step Page changes to the Slope page. Regional Settings, Slope page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field All fields Viva Series, User - System settings Option Description The input and output format for grades. 486 Field Option Description h:v Horizontal by vertical distance. v:h Vertical by horizontal distance. %(v/h x 100) Percentage of vertical by horizontal distance. Elevation angle Elevation angle. Next step Page changes to the Angle page. Regional Settings, Angle page Description of fields Field Option Description Angle 400 gon, 360°'", 360° dec or 6400 mil The units shown for all angular and coordinate related fields. The number of decimal places shown for all angular and coordinate related fields. This setting is for data display and does not apply to data export or storage. Angle decimal From 1 to 3 Viva Series, User - System settings Available for Angle: 6400 mil. From 2 to 4 Available for Angle: 400 gon and Angle: 360° dec. 1", 5", 10" or 60" Available for Angle: 360°'". 487 Field Option Description Azimuth ref North azimuth, South azimuth,North anti-clockwise or Bearing Sets the reference direction as well as the direction from where and how azimuths are computed. For Azimuth ref: Bearing, the azimuth/bearing fields in other screens are called Bearing. NE, SW, SE and NW indicate the quadrant of the bearing. NW SW N NE SE GS_049 For all other options, the azimuth/bearing fields in other screens are called Azimuth. GPS direction ref True or Magnetic Sets the North direction. Declination Editable field Available for GPS direction ref: Magnetic. The value for the magnetic declination. It is considered when computing or using any azimuth values. Viva Series, User - System settings 488 Field Option V angle display Zenith angle Hold V angle after a Dist measurement Description V = 0 in zenith. Elevation angle V = 0 horizontal elevation angle. Vertical angles are positive above the horizon and negative below it. Elevation angle % V = 0 horizontal. Vertical angles are expressed in % and are positive above the horizon and negative below it. Check box If checked, the vertical angle is fixed after a distance measurement with Dist, whereas the horizontal angle is continuously updated with the telescope movement. If not checked, the vertical angle is continuously updated with the telescope movement. The active prism height is applied in the calculation of remote point elevations. The prism height must be set to zero to display and record the elevation of the targeted remote point. ) Next step Page changes to the Time page. Viva Series, User - System settings 489 Regional Settings, Time page The time zone is read from WinCE. Description of fields Field Option Description Time format 24 hour or 12 hour How the time is shown in all time-related fields. (am/pm) Current time Display only Date format Day.month.year, How the date is shown in all date-related fields. Month/day/year or Year/month/day Current date Display only Shows an example of the selected time format. Shows an example of the selected date format. Next step Page changes to the Coords page. Regional Settings, Coords page Description of fields Field Option Description Grid format Easting, northing or Northing, easting The order in which grid coordinates are shown in all screens. The order in survey screen pages depends on the user settings. Geodetic format Latitude, longiThe order in which geodetic coordinates are shown in tude or Longitude, all screens. The order in survey screen pages depends latitude on the user settings. Viva Series, User - System settings 490 Next step Page changes to the Language page. Regional Settings, Language page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Delete To delete the highlighted language. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Language The languages available on the instrument. Three languages can be stored on the instrument at one time - English and two others. English cannot be deleted. The selected language is used for the system software. If a language is not available for the system software, the English language is used instead. Applications are available in the languages that were loaded on the instrument when the application was installed. Viva Series, User - System settings 491 Next step Page changes to the Others page. Regional Settings, Others page Description of fields Field Option Description Temperature Celsius (°C)) or Fahrenheit (°F) The units shown for all temperature-related fields. Pressure mbar, mmHg, Inch The units shown for all pressure-related fields. Hg (inHg), hPa or PSI = pounds per square inch. psi Velocity unit Km/h (kmh), Mph (mph) or Knots (kn) The units shown for all velocity-related fields. Next step Page changes to the Device ID page. Viva Series, User - System settings 492 Regional Settings, Device ID page Description of fields Field Option Description Device ID Editable field This number is used for the generation of the file names. Using format files, the instrument ID can be exported together with data from the instrument. By doing so, it can be identified which instrument was used for certain measurements. Sets a four-digit number as instrument identification number. By default the last four numbers of the serial number are used. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, User - System settings 493 23.2 SmartWorx options Description The settings on this screen define the behaviour of the instrument for a general start up. Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\SmartWorx options. Welcome to SmartWorx Viva! If a check box is checked, the corresponding screen is shown during start up. If all check boxes are unchecked, then, after turning on the instrument, the Main Menu is accessed immediately. OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Welcome to SmartWorx Viva!, StartUp PIN code page If Use PIN: Yes, then, after turning on the instrument, a PIN code must be entered. Description of fields Field Option Description Use PIN Yes PIN protection is activated and a PIN code must be entered at startup. Viva Series, User - System settings 494 Field New PIN Option Description No PIN protection is not activated and no PIN code is required at startup. Editable field Available if Use PIN: Yes The new PIN code that will be required at startup. PIN codes must be numerical only and 4 to 6 digits in length. Next step Page changes to the General page. Welcome to SmartWorx Viva!, General page If the check box for Use drop down menus in the main menu is checked, then menus will appear as drop down menus. If the check box for Use drop down menus in the main menu is unchecked, then menus will appear as graphical menus. Next step OK to the save the changes and return to the Main Menu. Viva Series, User - System settings 495 23.3 Screen & audio Description The settings on this screen allow the screen appearance to be configured, turn the notification beeps on and off and define the behaviour of the keys. The settings are stored on the field controller itself. If the field controller is exchanged, the settings stored on the new field controller apply. Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Screen & audio. Screen & Audio Settings, Screen page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Calib To calibrate the touch screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Minimize Check box instrument icon tool bar Viva Series, User - System settings Description If checked, the icon tool bar on the top of the screen is minimised to one small icon on the top left. Tap this icon to make the full icon tool bar visible again. 496 Field Option Description Use the touch screen Check box If checked, the touch screen is turned on. Next step Page changes to the Audio page. Screen & Audio Settings, Audio page Description of fields Field Option Description Message sounds Sounds only A sound alert will be given when an information message appears. Sounds & voice A sound and voice alert will be given when an information message appears. Warnings volume Slider from 0% to 100% Controls the beep for acoustic warning signals. Key clicks Slider from 0% to 100% Controls the beep when pressing a key on the field controller. Screen taps Slider from 0% to 100% Controls the beep when touching the touch screen. Use Hz sector beeps Check box If checked, the horizontal sector beep is turned on. The instrument beeps when within 5 gon/4°30’ of the defined sector, has a long and consistent beep within 0.5 gon/27’ and no beep within 0.005 gon/16’’. Viva Series, User - System settings 497 Field Option Hz sector angle Editable field Description Editable field for the sector angle for which a beep will sound. Next step Page changes to the Text input page. Screen & Audio Settings, Text input page Description of fields Field Option Description Alpha mode Function keys, Mobile phone style or Pop-up keyboard Alphanumeric input can either be through function or numeric keys. For the CS10 model, alphanumeric input can also be through an on-screen pop-up keyboard to be used with the stylus. Alpha input method Selectable list Sets the set of extra characters available through Alpha or F1-F6 whenever an entry is made. The choices available depend on the character sets loaded on the instrument and the language configured to be used. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, User - System settings 498 24 User - Tools & other utilities 24.1 Transfer user objects Description This chapter describes the basic procedure for transferring objects between the data storage device and the internal memory. Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device" for information about file types and locations of files on the data storage device. Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Transfer user objects. Transfer User Objects OK To transfer an object and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 499 Description of fields Field Option Description Object to transfer Selectable list Listed are the objects that can be transferred. The available fields on the screen depend on the option selected. Memory device to transfer object from. From CF card Transfer from CompactFlash card. SD card Transfer from Secure Digital Memory card. USB Transfer from USB. Internal memory Transfer from the field controller. To Selectable list Memory device to transfer object to. Memory device not selected in From. Antenna Selectable list To select the antenna records to be transferred. Codelist Selectable list To select the codelist to be transferred. Working style Selectable list To select the configuration set to be transferred. Coordinate system Selectable list To select the coordinate system to be transferred. CSCS field file Selectable list To select the Country Specific Coordinate System to be transferred. File Display only The dial-up list or the server list to be transferred as a binary file. Format file Selectable list To select the format files to be transferred. Geoid field file Selectable list To select the Geoid Field File to be transferred. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 500 Field Option Description Choose working job Selectable list To select the job to be transferred. Transfer all objects of the selected type Check box Available for some transfer object options. To transfer all objects. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 501 24.2 Uploading System Files Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load firmware & Apps. Load firmware & Apps OK To upload an application, firmware or language and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Delete To delete an application or language. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Object to transfer Apps Application uploads are possible from the data storage device to the field controller. These files are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage device and use the extension *.a*. Firmware Firmware uploads are possible from the data storage device to the field controller. These files are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the active memory device and use the extension *.fw. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 502 Field ) ) Option Description Language Language uploads are possible from the data storage device to the field controller. These files are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage device and use an extension that is individual to each language. From Selectable list Upload from CompactFlash card, Secure Digital Memory card or USB stick. App Selectable list List of application files stored on the card. Firmware Selectable list List of firmware files stored on the card. Language Selectable list List of language files stored on the card. Version Display only Version of the application/firmware/language file chosen. It is not possible to have more than three language files stored on the instrument. English is always available as the default language and cannot be deleted. There is only one version of each application. The application will be installed in English and in any other language that is already loaded onto the instrument. If a new language is loaded after an application has been installed, the application will need to be reinstalled to become available in the new language. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 503 24.3 Load licence keys Description A licence key can be used to activate applications and protected options and can be used to define the expiry date of the software maintenance. Refer to "24.6 About Leica Viva" to find out how to check the expiry date of the software maintenance. A licence key file can be uploaded to the field controller. To upload a licence key file the file must be located on the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage device. Licence key files use the naming convention L_123456.key, where 123456 is the instrument serial number. Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys. OR Select an application not yet activated. Load Licence Keys OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu or continue with the application. Fn Delete To delete all licence keys on the field controller. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 504 Description of fields Field Option The method used to input the licence key to activate the application or the protected options or the software maintenance. Load key Key Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities Description Upload key from file The licence key file is uploaded from the data storage device. The licence key file must be stored in the \SYSTEM directory on the data storage device. Enter manually Allows the licence key to be typed in manually. Editable field Available for Load key: Enter manually. The licence key required to activate an application. Entry is not case sensitive. 505 24.4 Format memory devices Description Allows the data storage device and the internal memory to be formatted. All data will be erased. ) Access If the internal memory is formatted, all system data such as almanac, user-defined configuration sets, user-defined antennas, codelists, geoid field files and CSCS field files will be lost. Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Format memory devices. Format Memory Device OK To format a memory device and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Apps To format the applications memory. System To format the internal memory. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 506 Description of fields Field Option Memory Device CF card, SD card, USB or Internal memory Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities Description The type of memory to be formatted. 507 24.5 View contents of ASCII files Description Allows ASCII files selected for From file in Import ASCII Data to be viewed in WordPad. Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\View contents of ASCII files. WordPad opens. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 508 24.6 About Leica Viva Access Select Main Menu: User\About Leica Viva. About Leica Viva, Controller page The information relates to the field controller. This screen shows: • The serial number, • The equipment number, • The firmware version of the boot software, • The firmware version for the Electric Front Interface, • If a total station radio installed, • If Wireless LAN is installed, • If a GSM is installed. Next step Page changes to the Total station page. About Leica Viva, Total station page The information relates to the TPS instrument. This screen shows: • The type of instrument, • Additional instrument hardware options such as EDM or PowerSearch. Next step Page changes to the GPS rover page. About Leica Viva, GPS rover page V i v a S e r i e s , The information relates to the GPS instrument. This screen shows: • The currently active system language, • The serial number of the measurement engine, User - Tools & other utilities 509 • • The availability of additional instrument hardware options, If the protected OWI commands and the ability to track GPS L5, GLONASS, Galileo and Compass have been activated by a licence key. Next step Page changes to the SmartWorx page. About Leica Viva, SmartWorx page The information relates to the SmartWorx Viva instrument. This screen shows the applications installed on the instrument, and the following information. Description of fields Field Description Firmware version Firmware version for the onboard software. Build number Build number for the onboard software. API version Firmware version for the application interface. Maintenance end Expiry date of the software maintenance. Load licence keys The information listed here indicates for which applications the licence keys are loaded. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 510 25 TPS Functions 25.1 EDM Description Electronic Distance Measurement EDM is the function used for distance measurements. There are different modes the instrument can work in. Refer to Measure & Target Settings. Viva Series, TPS Functions 511 25.2 Prism Search Methods 25.2.1 Automatic aiming Description Automatic aiming is the function which recognises and measures the position of a prism using a CCD array. A laser beam is transmitted and the reflected beam is received by the built-in CCD array. The position of the reflected spot with respect to the centre of the CCD is computed. These automatic aiming offsets are used to correct the horizontal and vertical angles. The automatic aiming offsets are also used to control the motors which turn the instrument to centre the crosshairs to the prism. In order to minimise the time for measuring, the crosshairs are not moved to the exact centre of the prism. The automatic aiming offset can be up to 500 cc depending on selected Measure mode. The automatic aiming function measures the offsets between the crosshairs and prism centre and corrects the horizontal and vertical angles accordingly. Therefore the horizontal and vertical angles are measured to the prism-centre, even if the crosshairs are not aimed precisely at the centre of the prism. Motorised instruments can be equipped with automatic aiming. For Target aiming: Automatic the instrument can find a static prism and measure a distance once Meas or Dist is pressed. The instrument does not follow a moving prism. Field of view The telescope field of view is the region seen when looking through the telescope. The automatic aiming field of view is the region seen by the automatic aiming. Both are identical on TPS instruments. Viva Series, TPS Functions 512 Automatic aiming measurement If the prism is in the field of view with Target aiming: Automatic the crosshairs are automatically positioned to the prism when, for example Meas or Dist is pressed. No automatic aiming search is started. The displayed values are always related to the centre of the prism after Meas or Dist is pressed. For Meas, these values are displayed only shortly after the key press. The crosshairs of the telescope may not fully coincide with the centre of the prism when viewed through the telescope. The remaining automatic aiming offsets for the horizontal and vertical angles are measured by the automatic aiming function and applied to the measured and displayed angles. ) TS_004 Automatic aiming search TS_005 Viva Series, TPS Functions If the prism is not in the field of view when Meas or Dist is pressed, an automatic aiming search is started. For the automatic aiming search the automatic aiming window is scanned line by line starting at the current telescope position. If the • prism was not found: Retry can be pressed to search for the prism in an increased area. • prism was found: The automatic aiming measurement is performed to position the telescope to the centre of the prism. 513 Automatic aiming window The automatic aiming window is a relative window based on the current telescope position. The horizontal and vertical extent can be defined. Fine search window If no target is found after the prediction time and If no target found after prediction then: Start fine search is set, then the prism is searched for with automatic aiming using a dynamic automatic aiming window. This window covers a horizontal region from the position of loss of lock to the current telescope position, and the same extent on the other side. The vertical dimension of the dynamic window is one third of the horizontal expansion. Targeting modes Refer to Measure & Target Settings. Viva Series, TPS Functions 514 25.2.2 PowerSearch Description The PowerSearch module allows an automatic prism detection within a short time period. The PowerSearch function can be started in the Leica TPS Favourites screen and configured in TPS settings\Prism search settings, PowerSearch window. Functionality a b c The PowerSearch function consists of a transmitter (a) and a receiver (b). Both are installed in the telescope. When PowerSearch is activated, the instrument starts to rotate around its standing axis. The transmitter emits a vertical laser swath. If the laser swath detects a prism, the rotation of the instrument is stopped. Afterwards an automatic aiming measurement in the vertical direction is performed. TS_006 Viva Series, TPS Functions a) EGL b) Transmitter c) Receiver 515 ) If a PS window is defined and active, PowerSearch is executed within the defined limits. 360° search If the search window is not defined and PowerSearch is started, the prism is searched for with PowerSearch in the 360° window. The default search with PowerSearch consists of a short swing in anti-clockwise direction followed by a complete 360° turn in clockwise direction. If a prism is detected the movement is stopped and an automatic aiming search is performed. PowerSearch window The PowerSearch window can be defined individually. It is specified by absolute angle values and does not change its position. The PowerSearch window can be set in the Prism Search Settings, PowerSearch window page by aiming at two opposite points of the PowerSearch window. When Use PowerSearch window is checked and a PowerSearch is started, a prism is searched for within the defined window. Dynamic PowerSearch window When Use PowerSearch window is not checked and the instrument has lost lock, after the prediction time, the prism is searched for in a dynamic PowerSearch window. This window covers a region at the position after prediction of horizontal 100 gon by vertical 40 gon. Direction of search The PowerSearch routine can be activated clockwise or anticlockwise by using hotkeys. This action will have no influence on the prism search settings. Viva Series, TPS Functions 516 25.3 Follow Moving Prisms - Lock Description Lock enables instruments equipped with automatic aiming to follow a moving prism. The automatic aiming sensor is active when Lock is active. When Target lock on is selected in Leica TPS Favourites, an automatic aiming search is executed. The instrument locks onto the prism and follows its movements. Automatic aiming offsets are continuously applied to the angle measurements. When the instrument loses lock to the prism, a PowerSearch or fine search (auto aiming search) can be executed depending on the prism search settings. Lock is unavailable for SmartStation. ) If the speed of the prism is too fast, the target may be lost. Make sure that the speed does not exceed the figure given in the technical data. Enable lock Selecting Target lock on in Leica TPS Favourites, will immediately activate an automatic aiming search to find the prism. Alternatively, as long as Target aiming is set to Lock in Measure & Target Settings, then pressing Meas, Dist, PowerSearch, OK in Check Point, Joystick, Turn to Hz/V and Orientation With Compass will start a PowerSearch or automatic aiming search to find the prism. When the prism is found, the instrument locks onto the prism. The instrument follows the moving prism and the automatic aiming function remains active. Loss of lock When the instrument is locked onto a prism, lock may be lost if the movement of the prism is too fast for the instrument to follow or the prism is hidden behind an object. After lock is lost, the prediction, as set in Prism Search Settings is used to find the prism again. The automatic aiming function is still active. ) Whenever the prism is moved in the field of view during the prediction and any other search periods, the instrument locks automatically to the prism. Viva Series, TPS Functions 517 Prediction a TS_007 b c a) Moving prism locked onto by the instrument b) Loss of lock c) Prediction As long as the prism is being tracked by the instrument a mathematical filter continuously calculates the average speed and direction of the prism. If the line of sight between instrument and prism is disturbed, the instrument keeps on moving using these calculated values. This behaviour is called prediction. The prediction time can be configured. During prediction, the LOCK icon is displayed and if the prism comes into the instruments field of view again the automatic aiming will lock to the prism. Prism search after prediction After prediction, the prism is searched for depending on the settings in Prism Search Settings. • If no target found after prediction then: Stop searching. If the prism moved in the field of view, the prism is not searched for until Meas, Dist, Target lock on is pressed. • If no target found after prediction then: Start fine search: prism is searched for in the dynamic automatic aiming window with automatic aiming. • If no target found after prediction then: Start PowerSearch and Use PowerSearch window is checked: prism is searched for in the PS window with PowerSearch. • If no target found after prediction then: Start PowerSearch and Use PowerSearch window is NOT checked: prism is searched for in the dynamic PowerSearch window. Relock Independent of the setting for If no target found after prediction then the instrument can relock to the prism. Refer to paragraph "Enable lock". Viva Series, TPS Functions 518 25.4 RCS Description The instrument can be controlled by the field controller via radio. The automatic aiming function does not necessarily have to be active when working in RCS mode. The field controller is used to remote control the instrument. No data can be stored on the field controller. The screen and content displayed on the field controller are a copy of the remote controlled instrument. The communication between the total station and the field controller is established via radio modems. One radio modem has to be connected to the total station serial port. Viva Series, TPS Functions 519 25.5 EGL Description The Emitting Guide Light, EGL, consists of two differently coloured flashing lights in the telescope housing of the TPS. The EGL is used for guidance into the line of sight. If the left light is seen, the prism must be moved right and vice versa. If both flashing lights can be seen, the prism is in the line of sight of the instrument. Functionality 100 m (300 ft) The EGL can be used • to help guide the prism into the telescope line of sight when the instrument is controlled remotely and Target aiming: Lock. • to stake out points. 6m (20 ft) The instrument emits two differently coloured flashing cones of light. At a target distance of 100 m, the cones have a width of 6 m. Between the two cones of light, a sector with a width of 30 mm is created where both guide lights are visible simultaneously. In this position, the prism is in the line of sight of the instrument. 6m (20 ft) TS_008 Viva Series, TPS Functions 520 Using the EGL step-bystep Step Description 1. Check Use the instrument guide lights (EGL) in the Instrument Lights screen. OR Set Target aiming: Lock and press Comps or Turn to Hz/V or J Stick on the Leica TPS Favourites screen. 2. Align instrument line of sight and prism, where both flashing EGL lights can be seen simultaneously. 3. OK to lock onto the prism. 4. If the instrument has locked onto the prism the EGL is turned off automatically. ) Viva Series, TPS Functions If the EGL was turned on in Instrument Lights, it has to be turned off by unchecking the check box. 521 25.6 Illumination Description There are several different illumination types built into the instrument that all fulfil different functions. Some are to support measurements, for example the visible red laser pointer. Others, such as the screen illumination, are for more convenient work with the instrument. These different types of illumination are described in this chapter. Laser plummet The laser plummet allows setting up the instrument over a marked point. The laser beam is emitted from the bottom of the instrument, pointing to the ground. When the instrument is levelled and the laser beam points exactly at the ground point, the instrument is set up correctly. The laser plummet can be turned on and off. It is turned on automatically when opening the Instrument\ TPS settings\ Level bubble & compensator screen and turned off when leaving the screen. Visible red laser pointer The visible red laser pointer is used to measure to any surface. The visible red laser pointer is arranged coaxially with the line of sight of the telescope and emitted through the objective. If the instrument is correctly adjusted, the visible red laser beam coincides with the line of sight. ) GUS74 Laser Guide The direction of the beam should be inspected before precise distance measurements are executed. An excessive deviation of the laser beam from the line of sight can cause inaccurate results. The GUS74 Laser Guide is an option for TPS instruments. It is built into a special telescope compartment and emits a visible red laser beam to visualise the line of sight over long ranges. The GUS74 Laser Guide is used for special applications such as tunnelling. Refer to GUS74 Laser Guide Manual for detailed information. Viva Series, TPS Functions 522 26 Calculator 26.1 Accessing the Calculator Description The calculator can be used to perform the following arithmetic operations such as • addition, subtraction, multiplication and division • statistics • trigonometry, hyperbolic trigonometry and calculations with Pi • polar, rectangular and angle conversions • powers, logs, roots and exponential functions. Operating modes The calculator has two operating modes - RPN mode and Standard mode. The arithmetic operations available are identical, the difference lies in the way information is entered, stored and displayed on the screen. Type RPN Description Reverse Polish Notation This operating mode was developed as a way of writing mathematical expressions without using parenthesis and brackets. Many scientific calculators, for example Hewlett Packard calculators, are implemented with this operating mode. Values are entered and kept in a working stack. Standard Access Viva Series, Calculator This operating mode is based on the principles of conventional pocket calculators. There is no stacking of values. Press Calc in any screen when editing an editable field for numeric characters, such as Azimuth in Traverse Input. 523 26.2 Configuring the Calculator Access In RPN Calculator or Standard Calculator press Fn Config.. to access Calculator Configuration. Calculator Configuration OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Operatng Mode RPN Standard The principle of, for example, Hewlett Packard calculators. The principle of conventional pocket calculators. The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calculator. The selection here is independent from the angle setting in Regional Settings, Angle. Angular unit DEG Viva Series, Calculator Description Degrees 524 Field Display Dec Option Description RAD Radians GRAD Gon From 0 to 10 deci- The number of decimal places shown. mals Next step OK confirms the selections made and returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Calculator 525 26.3 Using the Calculator 26.3.1 RPN Mode Requirements Operatng Mode: RPN in Calculator Configuration. RPN Calculator OK The function keys F1 - F6 are allocated seven times. Refer to Description of Softkeys. Using the up and down keys the various allocations can be accessed. Description of fields Field Option First field on the Display only screen Viva Series, Calculator Description The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calculator as configured in Calculator Configuration. DEG Degrees RAD Radians GRAD Gon 526 Field Option Description ΣY Display only The result of the sum or difference of values in Y using Σ+ and Σ-. ΣX Display only The result of the sum or difference of values in X using Σ+ and Σ-. T Display only Third stack. After an operation, the value from Z is written here. Z Display only Second stack. After an operation, the value from Y is written here. Y Display only First stack. After an operation, the value from X is written here. X Editable field The value for the next operation. Next step Fn Quit returns to Main Menu. Viva Series, Calculator 527 26.3.2 Standard Mode Requirements Operatng Mode: Standard in Calculator Configuration. Standard Calculator OK The function keys F1 - F6 are allocated seven times. Refer to Description of Softkeys. Using the up and down keys the various allocations can be accessed. Description of fields Field Option First field on the Display only screen Σ Viva Series, Calculator Description The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calculator as configured in Calculator Configuration. DEG Degrees RAD Radians GRAD Gon Display only The result of the sum or difference of values in the last field on the screen using Σ+ and Σ-. 528 Field Option Description Third to sixth field on the screen Display only Previously entered value OR Latest operation including result. # indicates that the value is cut after the third decimal. Last field on the Editable field screen The value for next operation or result from latest operation. Next step Fn Quit returns to Main Menu. Viva Series, Calculator 529 26.3.3 Description of Softkeys Overview of softkeys The softkeys shown and described are from Operatng Mode: RPN. Most of the softkeys are identical and their functionality is similar to the softkeys from Operatng Mode: Standard. OK Description of softkeys The function keys F1 - F6 are allocated seven times. Using the up and down keys the various allocations can be accessed. First level + To add X and Y. Viva Series, Calculator 530 To subtract X from Y. * To multiply X by Y. * To divide Y by X. +/To change between positive and negative algebraic sign for X. Clr X (F6) To clear X. Second level Σ+ To add X to ΣX and Y to ΣY. ΣTo Mean To SDev To SDev To subtract X from ΣX and Y from ΣY. calculate the mean ΣX. calculate the standard deviation for ΣX. clear ΣX and T. Third level Sin To calculate sine of X. Viva Series, Calculator 531 Cos To Tan To Asin To Acos To Atan To calculate cosine of X. calculate tangent of X. calculate arcsine of X. calculate arccosine of X. calculate arctangent of X. Fourth level °DMS To convert decimal degrees into dd.mm.ss. °Dec To convert dd.mm.ss into decimal degrees. PI To insert X: 3.1415926536. The number of decimals depends on the selection for Display Dec in Calculator Configuration. D->R To convert degrees into radians. R->D To convert radians into degrees. Viva Series, Calculator 532 Fifth level Polar Conversion of rectangular coordinates into polar coordinates. The y coordinate must be visible in Y and the x coordinate in X when pressing this key. The angle is displayed in Y and the distance in X. Rect Conversion of polar coordinates into rectangular coordinates. The angle must be visible in Y and the distance in X when pressing this key. The y coordinate is displayed in Y, the x coordinate in X. Sqrt To calculate √X. X^2 To calculate X2. 1/X To inverse X:. Y^X To calculate YX. Sixth level Log To calculate the log10X. 10^X To calculate 10X. LN To calculate the logeX. Viva Series, Calculator 533 e^X To calculate eX. Y^X To calculate YX. Seventh level Sto To store X to the memory. Up to ten values can be stored. Rcl To recall a value for X from the memory. Up to ten values can be recalled. X<>Y To swap the values for X and Y. Last X To recall the last X before recent calculation. Clear To delete everything. Fn to access the second level of function keys Fn Config.. To configure the calculator. Fn Done To return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Calculator 534 27 NTRIP via Internet 27.1 Configuring Access to the Internet ) ) ) Select the internet interface It is recommended to configure an Ntrip connection via the RTK Rover Wizard. Select Main Menu\Instrument\GPS settings\RTK rover wizard and follow the on-screen instructions. The remainder of this chapter describes each of the steps and screens when configuring without the use of the RTK Rover Wizard. One Internet interface is available - the CS Internet. Two Internet interfaces are available - the CS Internet and the GS Internet. The CS Internet is used as an example. The explanations are also valid for the GS Internet. To access the Internet with a GPS or TPS instrument, General Packed Radio System devices will normally be used. GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting data packages using the Internet Protocol (IP). Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument connections\All other connections. On the CS connections page highlight CS Internet. Press Edit... Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 535 Configure the Internet interface 1 Select a port (Connect using). 2 Select a device (Devce..). 3 If necessary enter User ID and Password. Some providers ask for a User ID and a Password to allow connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a user ID and password needs to be used. 4 OK to return to Connection Settings. 5 In Connection Settings press Cntrl... Continue with the next paragraph. Configure the GSM Dial-up Connection 1 On the Dial-up details page, type in the APN (Access Point Name of a server from the network provider). Contact your provider to get the correct APN.) Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 536 2 On the Sim codes page, type in the PIN code for the Sim card. If the PIN is locked for any reason, for example the wrong PIN was entered, input the Personal UnblocKing code for access to the PIN. 3 OK twice to return to the Main Menu. The instrument is now online to the Internet. The Internet online status icon is displayed. But because GPRS is being used, no charges are yet made since no data transfer from the Internet has yet taken place. Check the status of the Internet connection 1 Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument status info\Connection status. 2 On the CS connections page highlight CS Internet. 3 Press Intfce. 4 Check the Internet online status. 5 OK twice to return to the Main Menu. Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 537 27.2 Using the NTRIP Service with a Real-Time Rover Select the internet interface Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument connections\All other connections. On the GS connections page highlight RTK Rover. Press Edit... Settings for the RTK rover 1 On the General page, make sure that an Internet port is selected for Connect using. 2 On the RTK network page, enable Use RTK network. 3 Press OK to return to Connection Settings, GS connections page. 4 Press Cntrl.. to access Internet Port Connection. Continue with the next paragraph. Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 538 Select the server to be accessed in the Internet 1 The Server to use, must be Ntrip enabled. To create a new server click into the selectable list. 2 In New Server, General page, type in the IP address and the port of the server through which the data is provided. Each server has several ports for various services. Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 539 3 In New Server, NTRIP page, activate the use of Ntrip. 4 Type in the NTRIP user ID and theNTRIP password. A user ID and the password are required to receive data from to the Ntrip Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for information. 5 Store followed by OK to return to Internet Port Connection. Select the Ntrip mountpoint 1 If the selected server is Ntrip enabled, Ntrip mountpoint is available. 2 Press Source to access NTRIP Source Table. Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 540 3 All mountpoints are listed. Mountpoints are the Ntrip servers sending out real-time data. This screen consists of two columns. The first column shows the abbreviations for the Mountpoints, the second the city where the Mountpoint is located. 4 Highlight a mountpoint. 5 Press OK twice to return to Connection Settings, GS connections page. 6 Fn Conect and Fn Disco are now available in all applications to connect to and disconnect from the Ntrip server. Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 541 28 MapView Interactive Display Feature 28.1 Overview Description MapView is an interactive display feature embedded in the firmware but used by all applications as well as data management. MapView provides a graphical display of the survey elements which allows for a better overall understanding of how the data being used and measured relates to each other. Depending on the application and where in the application MapView is accessed from, different functionality is available. The displayed data in all modes of MapView can be shifted by using both the arrow keys and the touchscreen. Displayable data The data displayed in MapView is defined by the application through which it was accessed, filters set in Sorts & Filters, and the selections made in Map View Configuration. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 542 28.2 Accessing MapView Description The MapView interactive display feature is provided as a page within all applications and data management. It is accessed through the application itself. Depending on the application and from where in the application MapView is accessed, different MapView modes are available. Access step-by-step Example for data management Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data. 2. Page until the Map page is active. Example for an application Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Intersection. 2. COGO Intersection Choose a method and enter appropriate data. 3. Calc to access the results page. 4. Page until the Plot page is active. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 543 28.3 Configuring MapView Description Allows options to be set which are used as default options within MapView. These settings are stored within the working style and apply to all Map and Plot pages, regardless of how MapView is accessed. ) Any changes made in Map View Configuration affect the appearance of MapView in all applications, not just the active application. Access step-by-step Press Fn Config.. on any Map or Plot page. Map View Configuration, General page Description of fields Field Option Display toolbar Check box Show my path Centre to Description Determines if the toolbar of touch icons is displayed. Refer to "28.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar". Check box Displays the path of the rover as a dashed line. Target To centre the map on the target. For Measure mode: Standard and Measure mode: Single (fast), the map will centre onto the last measured point. For Measure mode: Continuous and Measure mode: Long range (>4km), the map will centre onto the current reflector position. TPS instrument Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature To centre the map on the instrument. 544 Field Option Description Datum view WGS 1984 or Local Determines the datum in which the points are viewed. Depending on the configured coordinate system being used, it is possible that some data will not be displayed. ) Reverse coordinates Check box Available for Datum view: Local. To rotate the map by 180°. The north arrow is not rotated and still orientated towards the top of the screen. Vertical exaggeration of alignment maps Editable field The exaggeration factor of the map. The value can be between 0.1 and 50. This setting only has an affect in applications where vertical alignments are displayed. ) Next step Page changes to the Points page. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 545 Map View Configuration, Points page OK To confirm the selections and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Symbol To view all point symbols and their descriptions. Page To change to another page on this screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Display points Check box Determines if points are displayed in MapView. Point ID Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if the ID of a point is displayed. Point code Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if the code of a point is displayed. Height of point Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if the height of a point is displayed. Quality of point Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if the coordinate quality of a point is displayed. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 546 Field Option Show pt info for Check box a maximum of 200 pts Description If checked, the point information as configured is shown regardless of the number of points being displayed. If not checked, point information is not shown when more than 200 points are displayed. Displayable point information a) b) c) d) Point ID Point code Height of point Quality of point Next step Page changes to the Lines & areas page. Map View Configuration, Lines & areas page Description of fields Field Option Description Display lines Check box Determines if lines are displayed in MapView. Line ID Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the ID of a line is displayed. Line code Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the code of a line is displayed. Display areas Check box Determines if areas are displayed in MapView. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 547 Field Option Description Area ID Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the ID of an area is displayed. Area code Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the code of an area is displayed. Displayable line/area information A line is shown as example. a) Line ID b) Line code Next step OK confirms the selections and returns to the previous screen. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 548 28.4 MapView Components 28.4.1 Screen Area Standard screen a c a) North arrow b) Scale bar c) Toolbar b SYS13_030 Scale bar Symbol Description Scale of the current screen. The minimum is 0.1 m. There is no maximum for the zoom but the scale cannot display values greater than 99000 m. In this case the value displayed will be >99000 m. North arrow Symbol Description North arrow. North is always orientated towards the top of the screen. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 549 Toolbar Symbol Description Touch icon toolbar. Refer to "28.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar" for more information about the functionality of the touch icons in the toolbar. Point with focus Symbol Description The point that has the focus. Line/area with focus Symbol Description The line/area that has the focus is bolder than other lines shown in blue for the full and in orange for Lite version of SmartWorx Viva. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 550 Rover Symbol Description Available in survey mode. Position of the rover. The rover path is shown as dotted line. Prism Symbol Description Measured position. The reflector path is shown as dotted line. Instrument station Symbol Description Position of the instrument station. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 551 28.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar Description Standard functionality is provided by softkeys, keys and a toolbar within MapView. The softkeys are available regardless of the mode in which MapView was accessed and always perform the same functions. If Display toolbar is checked in Map View Configuration, General page, touch icons are available in a toolbar. The toolbar is always located on the right side of the screen. Some of the functions performed by the touch icons can also be replicated using a softkey or key in the same mode as when the touch icon appears. The softkey/key equivalent of each touch icon, if one exists, are indicated in the following table. Overview of keys, softkeys and touch icons The softkeys described in this table are standard on all MapView screens. For descriptions of mode-specific softkeys, see appropriate chapters. Touch icon Key or Softkey Description - To scroll the MapView toolbar. 1 or Fn Refrsh in some applications The fit touch icon fits all displayable data, according to filters and the map configuration, into the screen area, using the largest possible scale. 2 To zoom into the map. Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. 3 To zoom out of the map. Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature ) ) 552 Touch icon Key or Softkey Description - The windowing touch icon zooms to a specified area window. An area window can be drawn by dragging the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular area or by tapping twice on the screen to define diagonally opposite corners of a rectangular area. This action causes the screen to zoom to the selected area. 5 To centre the selected point,the GPS rover, the TPS target or TPS instrument. - Available in survey mode. This touch icon displays the current direction as dashed line. A location on the Map page can then be tapped and the instrument turns to this direction. If Target aiming: Automatic the instrument does an ATR search. If Target aiming: Lock the instrument tries to lock on to a prism. Fn Config.. To configure MapView. Refer to "28.3 Configuring MapView". Fn Layrs.. To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and off. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job" for information on CAD files. To import CAD files for background only maps. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job". Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 553 Touch icon Key or Softkey Description To switch the view. Available in some applications, for example Reference Plane, Road or Rail. - 0 To make the MapView do a complete redraw. - Fn Filter.. To change the filter settings. Refer to "5.6 Point Sorting and Filters". Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 554 28.4.3 Point Symbols Description When Display points is checked in Map View Configuration, Points page, points are displayed, in all modes, according to their class. A list of the point types available, and their description, is available. Access Press Symbol in Map View Configuration, Points page. Symbols Symbol Description 3D control point is a point of class Ctrl with full coordinate triplet. 2D control point is a position only point of class Ctrl. Adjusted point is a point of class Adj. Base point is a point of class Ref. Average point is a point of class Avge. Measured point is a point of class Meas. Single Point Position uploaded from LGO. Navigated point is a point of class Nav. Estimated point is a point of class Est. ) Points of class None or points of class Ctrl/Meas with a height only component cannot be displayed in MapView. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 555 28.5 Selecting Points, Lines and Areas Selecting a point/line/area using the touch screen stepby-step The instructions for selecting a point using the softkeys can be applied for lines and areas. Step Description 1. Go to Data:, Map page. ) 2. ) 3. Display If no point field is highlighted on the previous page when the Map page is accessed, then any point that is selected will be assigned to the first point field on the previous page, the second point to the second point field, etc. If a point field is highlighted when the Map page is accessed then the point selected will be assigned to that field. Tap on the point to be selected. When there are multiple points within the same area and the precise selection is unclear, tapping on the point will access Select Point. Have multiple points been selected? • If yes, continue with step 4. • If no, continue with step 5. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 556 Step Description 4. Select Point Display Point ID The ID of the points within range of the point selection. Point code The code of the points within range of the point selection. ) Select a point/line/area without touch screen Select the desired point. More to display information about the point code, the 3D coordinate quality and class, the time the point was stored and the date the point was stored. 5. OK returns to Data:, Map page with the focus on the selected point. 6. A square is centred on the selected point and the point parameter text is highlighted. Without touch screen or when Use the touch screen is not checked in Screen & Audio Settings, Screen page, points, lines and areas can only be selected using the selectable lists. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 557 28.6 Viewing Results Description MapView can be used to view the results of an application. Results are shown in black, all other information, that is displayable, is shown in grey. Example of results displayed in MapView Application Display Description COGO Intersection, Double bearing Intersecting lines with known bearings from known points COGO line calculation, Segmentation Points defining the line and those points created on the line Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 558 Application Display Description COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale Original points in grey, calculated COGO points in black COGO Area Division Points from the area and the area division are black, other points are grey Reference Line, Edit Reference Line Reference line or arc with target point as offset from reference line Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 559 Application Display Description Reference Plane, Edit Reference Plane A dashed rectangle indicates the face view of the plane. Sets of Angles, Calculating Angles Directions from station to sets of angle points Setup Directions to resection points. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 560 29 Applications - General Description Applications are software packages supporting specific tasks. Available for both GPS and TPS are: • COGO • Determine coord system • • • Go to Work! TPS hidden point Reference plane Roads (Alignment Editor, Roads - Stakeout, Roads - As built check, Rail - Stakeout, Rail - As built check, Tunnel - Stakeout , Tunnel - As built check • Setup • • • • • Sets of Angles including monitoring Stake a DTM Stakeout Stake points & DTM Measure to ref line / Stake to ref line • • Survey, including auto point and for Cross Section • Setup • • • Traverse Volume calculations Customised applications • Start base over known point Viva Series, Applications - General ) also hidden points 561 • Start base over last setup • Start base over any point For an explanation of the applications refer to the relevant chapters. Loadable and non-loadable applications Loadable applications: Non-loadable application: • • • • Can be loaded onto the instrument. Can be deleted from the instrument. Are always available on the instrument. Survey is a non-loadable application. To get an update for the application, the system software has to be reloaded. Licence key Some loadable applications are protected. They are activated through a specific licence key, which can either be typed in Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys or the first time the application is started. Refer to "24.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to type in or upload a licence key. Customised applications Customised applications can be developed locally using the GeoC++ development environment. Information on the GeoC++ development environment is available on request from the Leica Geosystems representative. Access to the Go to Work! drop-down menu Select Main Menu: Go to Work!. OR Press ) . The screens for each COGO.. calculation method can be accessed directly by pressing a configured hot key or via the key. The currently active configuration set and job are used. Viva Series, Applications - General 562 30 COGO 30.1 Overview Description COGO is an application to perform coordinate geometry calculations such as • coordinates of points. • bearings between points. • distances between points. The calculations can be made from • existing point data in the job, known distances or known azimuths. • manually measured points. • entered coordinates. In contrast to hidden point measurements within the Survey application, COGO is more of a calculation program than a measuring program. ) COGO calculation methods Viva Series, COGO Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in COGO does not result in the point being recomputed. The COGO calculation methods are: • Inverse • Traverse • Intersection • Line and arc calculations • Area division • Shift, rotate & scale 563 Distances and azimuths Type of distances: Type of azimuths: Coding of COGO points • • Properties of COGO points Viva Series, COGO The choices are • Ground • Grid • Ellipsoidal The azimuths are grid azimuths relative to the local grid. Thematical coding is available in the results screen after the COGO calculation. Thematical coding of COGO points is identical to coding manually measured points. Refer to "20 Coding" for information on coding. For the COGO calculation shift, rotate & scale, the codes from the original points are taken over for the calculated COGO points. The properties stored with COGO points are: • Class: Either Meas or Ctrl depending on the COGO configuration. • Sub class: COGO • Source: Arc base pt, Arc centre pt, Arc offset pt, Arc segment pt, COGO Area Div, COGO Shift/Rtn, COGO Traverse, Intsct (Brg Brg), Intsct (Brg Dst), Intsct (Dst Dst), Intsct (4 Pts), Line Base Pt, Line Offset Pt or Line Segmt Pt depending on the COGO calculation method used • Instrument source: GPS or TPS 564 30.2 Accessing COGO Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO and select a COGO calculation method. COGO calculation methods Description of the COGO calculation methods COGO calculation methods Description Inverse To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate differences between two known points (or one known point and the current GPS position). To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate differences between a known point (or the current GPS position) and a user-defined line. To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate differences between a known point (or the current GPS position) and a user-defined arc. For these calculations, only points with full coordinate triplets or position only points can be used. Traverse To calculate the position of new points using • the azimuth/bearing and the distance from a known point. Offset optional. • the angle and the distance from a known point. Offset optional. For these calculations, only points with full coordinate triplets or position only points can be used. Viva Series, COGO 565 COGO calculation methods Description Intersection To calculate the position of an intersection point using • bearings from two known points. • a bearing and a distance from two known points. • distances from two known points. • four points. • two TPS observation lines. For these calculations, only points with full coordinate triplets or position only points can be used. Line & arc calculations Area division Viva Series, COGO To calculate; • the centre point of an arc. • an offset point from a distance along, and offset from, an arc. • an offset point from a distance along, and offset from, a line. • a base point on an arc of a known offset point. • a base point on a line of a known offset point. • new points along an arc by segmentation. • new points along a line by segmentation. To divide an area by a • defined line. • percentage. 566 COGO calculation methods Description • Shift, rotate & scale defined area size. To calculate the coordinates of new points using shifts, rotation and scale. The values for the shift, rotation and/or scale can either be entered manually or computed using selected matching points. For these calculations, points with full coordinate triplets, position only points or height only points can be used. Viva Series, COGO 567 30.3 Configuring COGO Access Press Fn Config.. in the Input screen of any COGO calculation method. Configuration, General page This screen consists of the General page, Points & Quality page, TPS specific page, Residuals page and the Report sheet page. The explanations given for the softkeys given are valid for all pages. OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Distance type Viva Series, COGO Option Description The type of distances and offsets to be accepted as input or displayed in the fields, and used in the calculation. 568 Field Option Description Grid Distances are calculated as the trigonometric distance between the position of two points. The distance field is Horiz distance. Ground Distances are horizontal distances between two points at the mean elevation parallel to the ellipsoid of the active coordinate system. The distance field is Horiz dist (ground). Ellipsoid Distances are reduced to the ellipsoid. They are calculated as the shortest distance between the two points on the ellipsoid. A scale factor is applied. The distance field is Horiz dist (ell). In the attached coordinate system, a projection, an ellipsoid and a transformation have to be defined to calculate grid, ground and ellipsoid coordinates. ) Use offsets Viva Series, COGO Yes or No Activates the use of offsets in the COGO calculations. Editable fields for the offsets are available in the Input screen of any COGO calculation method. 569 P1 d1 P2 d2 d3 a SYS13_001 a Ellipsoid Known P1 First known point P2 Second known point Unknown d1 Ground distance d2 Ellipsoid distance d3 Grid distance Next step Page changes to the Points & Quality page. Configuration, Points & Quality page Description of fields Field Option Description Store computed COGO points with class Measured (Meas) or Control (Ctrl) Defines the point class of COGO calculated and stored points as Measured (Meas) or Control (Ctrl) triplets. Position quality Editable field for computed COGO point Viva Series, COGO The estimated value for the position quality assigned to all calculated COGO points which is used for the averaging calculation. 570 Field Option Description Height quality for computed COGO point Editable field The estimated value for the height quality assigned to all calculated heights which is used for the averaging calculation. Next step Page changes to the TPS specific page. Configuration, TPS specific page Description of fields Field Option Defines if the instrument measures the second face automatically after storing the first. Measure in two faces Yes After storing a measurement with Meas or Store motorised instruments change face automatically, non-motorised instruments access Telescope Positioning. The measurements of face I and face II are averaged on the base of face I. The averaged value is stored. No No automatic measurement in two faces. Defines the height being used within TPS observations. TPS observation Compute height Viva Series, COGO Description Using average Using an average of the two observations. Use upper height Using the upper height. Use lower height Using the lower height. 571 Next step Page changes to the Residuals page. Configuration, Residuals page Viva Series, COGO This page applies to Shift, Rotate & Scale (Match Pts). Description of fields Field Option Description Easting Editable field The limit above which Easting residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Northing Editable field The limit above which Northing residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Elevation Editable field The limit above which Height residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Residual Distbtn The method by which the residuals of the control points will be distributed throughout the transformation area. None No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their associated points. 1/distance, 1/distance² or 1/distance³/² Distributes the residuals according to the distance between each control point and the newly transformed point. Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach. 572 Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Viva Series, COGO Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. 573 Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. ) Viva Series, COGO Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term should also always be considered to mean Bearing. 574 30.4 COGO Calculation - Inverse Method 30.4.1 Selecting the Inverse Method Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Inverse. COGO Inverse OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. Viva Series, COGO 575 Description of the Inverse methods Inverse methods Description Point to point The direction, the distance and the coordinate differences between the two known points can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of two points. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Point to current pos The direction, distance and coordinate differences between the current rover position and a known point can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of one point. The coordinates of the known point • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 576 Inverse methods Description Current pos to line The direction, distance and coordinate differences between the current position and a given line can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Sufficient information must be known to define a line. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Point to line The direction, distance and coordinate differences between a known point and a given line can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Sufficient information to define a line and the coordinates of one point must be known. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 577 Inverse methods Description Point to arc The direction, distance and coordinate differences between the current position and a given arc can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Sufficient information to define an arc and the coordinates of one point must be known. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Current pos to arc The direction, distance and coordinate differences between a known point and a given arc can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Sufficient information must be known to define an arc. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 578 30.4.2 Point to Point and Current Position to Point Diagram P1 d GS_001 Viva Series, COGO P0 Known P0 First known point/current position P1 Second known point Unknown α Direction from P0 to P1 d1 Slope distance between P0 and P1 d2 Horizontal distance between P0 and P1 d3 Height difference between P0 and P1 579 Inverse Point to Point/Inverse Point to Current Pos, Inverse page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example Δ height cannot be calculated if a position only point is used. Store To store the result. Revers To swap the From and To points around. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when From or To is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description From Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calculation. Current position Available for Inverse method: Point to current pos. 580 Field Option Description To Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO calculation. Current position Available for Inverse method: Point to current pos. Display only The direction from the first to the second known point. Horiz distance, Display only Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) The horizontal distance between the two known points. Δ height The height difference between the two known points. Azimuth Display only Slope distance Display only The slope distance between the two known points. Grade Display only The grade between the two known points. Δ easting Display only The difference in Easting between the two known points. Δ northing Display only The difference in Northing between the two known points. Next step Page changes to the Map page. The calculated distance between the two known points is indicated. Viva Series, COGO 581 30.4.3 Point to Line and Current Position to Line Diagram P1 P3 d1 d2 GS_003 Viva Series, COGO P0 P2 Known P0 Start point P1 End point P2 Offset point Unknown P3 Base point d1 Offset distance d2 ΔLine distance 582 Inverse Point to Line/Inverse Current Pos to Line, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example Δ height cannot be calculated if a position only point is used. Calc To calculate COGO point. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available if Start point, End point or Offset point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To mathematically modify the values. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Viva Series, COGO 583 Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Offset point Selectable list Available for Inverse to: Known Point. The offset point. Current position Available for Inverse method: Current pos to line. The method by which the line will be defined. Create line using Viva Series, COGO 2 points Uses two known points to define the line. Pt, bearing & dist Defines the line using a known point, a distance and an azimuth of the line. Start point Selectable list The start point of the line. End point Selectable list Available for Method: 2 points. The end point of the line. Azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Pt, bearing & dist. The azimuth of the line. Horiz distance, Editable field Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) Available for Method: Pt, bearing & dist. The horizontal distance from the start point to the end point of the line. 584 Next step Calc calculates and accesses Inverse Result. Inverse Result, Result page Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point or Current position. Distance along line Display only Horizontal distance from start point to base point. Offset Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Bearing to offset pt Display only Bearing from base point to offset point. Line length Display only Length of line from start point to end point. 585 Field Option Description Line bearing Display only Bearing of line from start point to end point. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Display only The height of the calculated point. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. Viva Series, COGO 586 30.4.4 Point to Arc and Current Position to Arc Diagram P1 P3 d1 P2 d2 P0 GS_004 Viva Series, COGO Known P0 Start point P1 End point P2 Offset point Unknown P3 Base point d1 Offset-XX d2 ΔArcDist-XX 587 Inverse Point to Arc/Inverse Current Pos to Arc, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example Δ height cannot be calculated if a position only point is used. Calc To calculate COGO point. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available if Radius, Arc length or Chord length is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available if Radius, Arc length or Chord length is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available if Start point, Second point, End point, Offset point or PI point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Viva Series, COGO 588 Fn Modif.. To mathematically modify the values. Available if Radius, Arc length or Chord length is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Offset point Selectable list Available for Point to arc: Point to line. The offset point. Current position Available for Inverse method: Current pos to arc. The method by which the arc will be defined. Create arc using Start point Viva Series, COGO 3 points Uses three known points to define the arc. 2 points & radius Defines the arc using two known points and a radius of the arc. 2 tngnts & radius Defines the arc using two tangents and a radius of the arc. 2 tngnts & arc lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the length of the arc. 2 tngnts & crd lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the chord of the arc. Selectable list The start point of the arc. Available for Method: 3 points and Method: 2 points & radius. 589 Field Option Description Second point Selectable list The second point of the arc. Available for Method: 3 points. End point Selectable list The end point of the arc. Available for Method: 3 points and Method: 2 points & radius. Point 1 Selectable list A point on the first tangent. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & radius, Method: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. PI point Selectable list The point of intersection of the two tangents. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & radius, Method: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Point 2 Selectable list A point on the second tangent. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & radius, Method: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Radius Editable field The radius of the arc. Available for Method: 2 points & radius and Method: 2 tngnts & radius. Arc length Editable field The length of the arc. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & arc lngth. Chord length Editable field The length of the chord. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Inverse Result. Viva Series, COGO 590 Inverse Result, Result page Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point for Inverse to: Known Point or current position. Distance along arc Display only Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to base point. Offset Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Bearing to offset pt Display only Bearing of offset point from base point to offset point. Arc radius Display only Computed radius of arc. Arc length Display only Computed length of arc. 591 Field Option Description Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Display only The height of the calculated point. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. Viva Series, COGO 592 30.5 COGO Calculation - Traverse Method Description Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of one point. • the direction from the known point to the COGO point. • the distance from the known point to the COGO point. • offsets, if necessary and configured. The coordinates of the known point • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. The direction from the known point to the COGO point can be an azimuth or an angle. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Position only is calculated, height can be typed in. A • • • Viva Series, COGO COGO traverse calculation can be calculated for a single point. multiple points. Several single points are calculated in one sequence. sideshots. 593 Diagram COGO traverse calculation with offset for a single point P3 d3 P1 d2 P2 d1 P0 GS_005 Viva Series, COGO Known P0 Known point α Direction from P0 to P1 d1 Distance between P0 and P1 d2 Positive offset to the right d3 Negative offset to the left Unknown P1 COGO point without offset P2 COGO point with positive offset P3 COGO point with negative offset 594 COGO traverse calculation without offset for multiple points d4 P1 d1 P0 GS_002 Viva Series, COGO d2 P4 P2 d3 P3 Known P0 Known point α1 Direction from P0 to P1 α2 Direction from P1 to P2 α3 Direction from P2 to P3 α4 Direction from P2 to P4 d1 Distance between P0 and P1 d2 Distance between P1 and P2 d3 Distance between P2 and P3 d4 Distance between P2 and P4 Unknown P1 First COGO point P2 Second COGO point P3 Third COGO point - sideshot P4 Fourth COGO point 595 Traverse Input, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance, Offset or Angle right is highlighted. SShot To calculate the point as a sideshot. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance, Offset or Angle right is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when From or Backsight is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, COGO 596 Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance, Offset or Angle right is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Method Azimuth The direction from the known point to the COGO point is an azimuth. Angle right The direction from the known point to the COGO point is an angle. From Selectable list The point ID of the known point for the COGO calculation. Backsight Selectable list The point ID of a point used as backsight. Available for Angle right. Angle right Editable field The angle between Backsight and the new COGO point to be calculated from the point selected as From: A positive value is for clockwise angles. A negative value is for anticlockwise angles. Available for Angle right. Azimuth Editable field The direction from the known point to the COGO point. 597 Field Option Horiz distance, Editable field Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) Offset Editable field Description The horizontal distance between the known point and the COGO point. The offset of the COGO point from the line of direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Traverse Results. Traverse Results, Result page Viva Series, COGO Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. 598 Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for the currently active instrument type in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Editable field The height of the known point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, an arrow points from the known point to the calculated COGO point. Store stores the result. Viva Series, COGO 599 30.6 COGO Calculation - Intersection Method 30.6.1 Selecting the Intersection Method Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Intersection. COGO Intersection OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. Viva Series, COGO 600 Description of the Intersection methods Intersection methods Description Double bearing Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is defined by a point and a direction. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of two points. • the direction from these known points to the COGO point. • offsets if necessary and configured. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Position only is calculated, height can be typed in. Viva Series, COGO 601 Intersection methods Description Double distance Calculates the intersection point of two circles. The circles are defined by the known point as the centre point and the distance from the known point to the COGO point as the radius. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of two points. • the distance from the known points to the COGO point. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Viva Series, COGO 602 Intersection methods Description Bearing & distance Calculates the intersection point of a line and a circle. The line is defined by a point and a direction. The circle is defined by the centre point and the radius. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of points. • the direction from one known point to the COGO point. • the distance from the second known point to the COGO point. • offsets if necessary and configured. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Viva Series, COGO 603 Intersection methods Description By points Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is defined by two points. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of four points. • offsets of the lines if necessary and configured. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Viva Series, COGO 604 Intersection methods Description TPS observations Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is defined by a TPS station and a TPS measurement from this station. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of two points. • azimuths of the lines. The coordinates of the known points • must be taken from the working job. • must be TPS station points. The azimuths of the lines • must be TPS measurements from the known points. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Viva Series, COGO 605 30.6.2 Intersection with Double Bearing Diagram P2 P0 P1 GS_006 Viva Series, COGO Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point α1 Direction from P0 to P2 α2 Direction from P1 to P2 Unknown P2 COGO point 606 Intersection Double Bearing, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Azimuth or Offset is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Azimuth or Offset is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st point or 2nd point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Viva Series, COGO 607 Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Azimuth or Offset is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description 1st point Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calculation. 2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO calculation. Azimuth Editable field The direction from the first known point to the COGO point. Offset Editable field The offset of the COGO point from the line of direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Viva Series, COGO 608 Intersection Result, Result page Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for Auxiliary points in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. 609 Field Option Description Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, arrows point from the known points to the calculated COGO point. Store stores the result. Viva Series, COGO 610 30.6.3 Intersection with Double Distance Diagram r1 P2 P0 r2 P3 P1 GS_008 Viva Series, COGO Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point r1 Radius, as defined by the distance from P0 to P2 r2 Radius, as defined by the distance from P1 to P2 Unknown P2 First COGO point P3 Second COGO point 611 Intersection Double Distance, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Horiz distance is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Horiz distance is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st point or 2nd point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Viva Series, COGO 612 Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Horiz distance is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description 1st point Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calculation. 2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO calculation. Horiz distance, Editable field Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) The horizontal distance between the known points and the COGO point. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Viva Series, COGO 613 Intersection Result, Result 1/Result 2 page Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Result1 or Result2 To view the first and second result. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. 614 Field Option Description Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, the calculated COGO points are shown. Store stores the result. Viva Series, COGO 615 30.6.4 Intersection with Bearing - Distance Diagram P2 r P3 P0 GS_007 Viva Series, COGO P1 Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point α Direction from P0 to P2 r Radius, as defined by the distance from P1 to P2 Unknown P2 First COGO point P3 Second COGO point 616 Intersection Bearing & Dist, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st point or 2nd point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Viva Series, COGO 617 Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description 1st point Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calculation. 2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO calculation. Azimuth Editable field The direction from the first known point to the COGO point. Offset Editable field The offset of the COGO point from the line of direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page. Horiz distance, Editable field Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) Viva Series, COGO The horizontal distance between the known point and the COGO point. 618 Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Intersection Result, Result 1 page Viva Series, COGO Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Result1 or Result2 To view the first and second result. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. 619 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, an arrow points from the first known points to the calculated COGO point. Store stores the result. Viva Series, COGO 620 30.6.5 Intersection with By Points Diagram P1 a P3 b P4 P2 GS_009 Viva Series, COGO P0 Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point P2 Third known point P3 Fourth known point a Line from P0 to P1 b Line from P2 to P3 Unknown P4 COGO point 621 Intersection By Points, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Offset is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Offset is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st point, 2nd point, 3rd point or 4th point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Viva Series, COGO 622 Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Offset is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description 1st point Selectable list The point ID of the known start point of the first line for the COGO calculation. 2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the known end point of the first line for the COGO calculation. 3rd point Selectable list The point ID of the known start point of the second line for the COGO calculation. 4th point Selectable list The point ID of the known end point of the second line for the COGO calculation. Offset Editable field The offset of the line in the direction 1st point to 2nd point or 3rd point to 4th point. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Viva Series, COGO 623 Intersection Result, Result page Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. 624 Field Option Description Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, two solid lines are displayed. Store stores the result. Viva Series, COGO 625 30.6.6 Intersection with TPS Observation - TPS Observation Diagram 1 P2 P0 2 P1 TS_001 Viva Series, COGO Known P0 First known point (TPS station) P1 Second known point (TPS station) α1 Direction from P0 to P2 α2 Direction from P1 to P2 Unknown P2 COGO point 626 Intersection TPS Obs, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Calc To calculate the result. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st TPS station or 2nd TPS station is highlighted and the selected station is the active TPS setup. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option 1st TPS station Selectable list Viva Series, COGO Description The point ID of the first TPS station which is the known start point of the first line for the COGO calculation. 627 Field Option Description TPS intersection observations Selectable list The point ID of the TPS measurement which is the known end point of the first line for the COGO calculation. Azimuth Display only The azimuth related to the known end point of the first/second line for the COGO calculation. 2nd TPS station Selectable list The point ID of the second TPS station which is the known start point of the second line for the COGO calculation. Selectable list The point ID of the TPS measurement which is the known end point of the second line for the COGO calculation. TPS intersection observations Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Viva Series, COGO 628 30.7 COGO Calculation - Line/Arc Calculations Method 30.7.1 Selecting the Line/Arc Method Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Line & arc calculations. COGO Line/Arc Calculations OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. Viva Series, COGO 629 Description of the Line/Arc methods Line/Arc Methods Description Calculate arc centre Calculates the coordinates of the centre of the arc. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of three points OR • coordinates of two points • radius to the two points The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 630 Line/Arc Methods Description Calculate arc offset pt Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of arc and offset values in relation to an arc. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of three points. • offsets. OR • coordinates of two points. • radius to the two points. • offsets. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 631 Line/Arc Methods Description Calculate line offset pt Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of station and offset values in relation to a line. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of two points. • offsets. OR • coordinates of one point. • bearing and distance from one point. • offsets. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 632 Line/Arc Methods Description Calculate arc base pt Calculates the coordinates of the base point, station and offset of a point in relation to an arc. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of three points • coordinates of an offset point OR • coordinates of two points • radius to the two points • coordinates of an offset point The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 633 Line/Arc Methods Description Calculate line base pt Calculates the base point, station and offset of a point in relation to a line. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of two points and an offset point. OR • coordinates of one point and an offset point • bearing and distance from one point The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Segment an arc Viva Series, COGO This method is similar to Segment a line. See the following row. 634 Line/Arc Methods Description Segment a line Calculates the coordinates of new points on a line. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of the start and the end point of the line OR • a bearing and distance from a known point that define the line AND EITHER • the number of segments dividing the line OR • a segment length for the line. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 635 30.7.2 Arc Calculation Diagram for arc centre d2 P1 d1 P0 GS_010 Viva Series, COGO P2 P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 Start point End point Arc centre Arc radius Arc length 636 Diagram for arc base point and offset point P1 P3 d1 P2 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d2 P0 GS_004 Create Arc, Input page Start point End point Offset point Base point Offset Distance along arc The softkeys are similar to line calculation. Refer to "30.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point" for information on softkeys. Description of fields Field Option Viva Series, COGO Description The method by which the arc will be defined. Create arc using 3 points Uses three known points to define the arc. 2 points & radius Defines the arc using two known points and a radius of the arc. 637 Field Viva Series, COGO Option Description 2 tngnts & radius Defines the arc using two tangents and a radius of the arc. 2 tngnts & arc lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the length of the arc. 2 tngnts & crd lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the chord of the arc. Start point Selectable list The start point of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 3 points and Create arc using: 2 points & radius. Second point Selectable list The second point of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 3 points. End point Selectable list The end point of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 3 points and Create arc using: 2 points & radius. Point 1 Selectable list A point on the first tangent. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. PI point Selectable list The point of intersection of the two tangents. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth 638 Field Option Description Point 2 Selectable list A point on the second tangent. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Radius Editable field The radius of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 2 points & radius and Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius. Arc length Editable field The length of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth. Chord length Editable field The length of the chord. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Next step IF THEN Line/arc method: Calculate arc centre Calc accesses Centre of Arc Result. Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt OK accesses Calculations Input. Line/arc method: OK accesses Calculations Input. Calculate arc base pt Viva Series, COGO 639 Calculations Input, Input page Description of fields Field Option Description Distance along Editable field arc Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to base point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Offset, Offset (ground) or Offset (ell) Editable field Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the arc. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Offset point Selectable list Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc base pt. Next step IF THEN Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result. Line/arc method: Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result. Calculate arc base pt Centre of Arc Result/Line/Arc Calculation Result, Result page Viva Series, COGO The result screens for base point and offset point are similar. Refer to paragraph " Line/Arc Calculation Result, Result page" for information on softkeys. 640 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. Elevation or Local ellipsoid ht Editable field The height of the start point of the arc is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Arc radius Display only Computed radius of arc. Arc length Display only Computed length of arc. Bearing to offset pt Display only Bearing of offset point from base point to offset point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc base pt. Distance along Display only arc, Distance along arc (grnd) or Distance along arc (ell) Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to base point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Offset, Offset (ground) or Offset (ell) Viva Series, COGO 641 Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, the arc and the new point is shown. Store stores the result Viva Series, COGO 642 30.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point Diagram P1 P3 d1 d2 GS_003 ) Viva Series, COGO P0 P2 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 Start point End point Offset point Base point Offset-XX: ΔLine-XX: Line management is not available for COGO line calculations. 643 Create Line, Input page Viva Series, COGO OK To change to the second layer of editable fields. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Last.. To select the values for the distance and the offset from previous COGO inverse calculations. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Survy.. To measure a point manually for the COGO calculation. Available if Start point or End point is highlighted. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To mathematically modify the values. Available if, Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. 644 Description of fields Field Option Description The method by which the line will be defined. Create line using 2 points Uses two known points to define the line. Pt, bearing & dist Defines the line using a known point, a distance and an azimuth of the line. Start point Selectable list The start point of the line. End point Selectable list The end point of the line. Available for Create line using: 2 points. Azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the line. Available for Create line using: Pt, bearing & dist. Horiz distance, Editable field Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) The horizontal distance from the start point to the end point of the line. Available for Create line using: Pt, bearing & dist. Next step OK accesses Calculations Input. Viva Series, COGO 645 Calculations Input, Input page Description of fields Field Option Description Distance along Editable field line, Distance along line (ground) or Distance along line (ell) Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line offset pt. Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Offset, Offset (ground) or Offset (ell) Editable field Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line offset pt. Horizontal distance from start point to base point. Offset point Selectable list Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt. The offset point. Next step Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result. Viva Series, COGO 646 Line/Arc Calculation Result, Result page The result screens for base point and offset point are similar. The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for the Result page. Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. 647 Field Option Description Elevation or Local ellipsoid ht Editable field The height of the start point of the line is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt. Distance along Display only line, Distance along line (ground) or Distance along line (ell) Horizontal distance from start point to base point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt. Offset, Offset (ground) or Offset (ell) Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt. Line length Display only Length of line from start point to end point. Line bearing Display only Bearing of line from start point to end point. Bearing to offset pt Display only Bearing of offset point from base point to offset point. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, the line and the new point is shown. Store stores the result. Viva Series, COGO 648 30.7.4 Segment an Arc Exceptions to line calculation segmentation The arc segmentation and the functionality of all screens and fields are similar to those for line segmentation. Refer to "30.7.5 Segment a Line" New field and option in Define Arc Segmentation Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Method Delta angle To divide the arc by an angular value. Delta angle Editable field The angular value by which new points will be defined on the arc. 649 30.7.5 Segment a Line Diagram Line divided by Method: No. of segments d d d d P0 P1 P0 P1 d SYS13_002 Start point End point Equally spaced segments result from dividing a line by a certain number of points. Line divided by Method Segment length d1 d1 d1 P0 P1 SYS13_003 ) Define Line Segmentation Viva Series, COGO d2 P0 P1 d1 d2 Start point End point Segment length Remaining segment For a description of the Create Line, Input page, refer to "30.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point". Description of fields Field Option Description Method Selectable list How the line is to be divided. Depending on the selection, the following fields are editable or display only fields. Line length Display only Calculated line length between the selected Start point and End point. 650 Field Option Description No. of segments Editable field or display only For Method: No. of segments type in the number of segments for the line. For Method: Segment length this field indicates the calculated number of segments. This method can result in a remaining segment. Segment length Editable field or display only For Method: No. of segments this field is the calculated length of each segment. For Method: Segment length type in the required segment length. Last segment Display only Available for Method: Segment length. The length of the remaining segment. Starting pt ID Editable field The point ID to be assigned to the first new point on the line. The selected point ID templates from ID Templates are not applied. Pt ID increment Editable field Is incremented numerically for the second, third, etc. point on the line. Next step Calc calculates the coordinates of the new points. The heights are computed along the line assuming a linear slope between Start point and End point. On the Plot page, the known points defining the line and those points created on the line are shown. Viva Series, COGO 651 30.8 COGO Calculation - Area Division 30.8.1 Selecting the Division Method Description The COGO calculation area division divides an area by a defined line, by percentage or by the size of a subarea. Elements that must be known for the calculation depend on the area division method. At least three points are required to form an area. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Area division. COGO Area Division OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. Viva Series, COGO 652 Description of the Area Division methods Viva Series, COGO Area Division method Description Parallel line (%) The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated using a defined percentage split. Parallel line (area) The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated using a defined area size. Parallel line (line) The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated by defining the position of the dividing line. Perpendic line (%) The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated using a defined percentage split. Perpendic line (area) The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated using a defined area size. Perpendic line (line) The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated by defining the position of the dividing line. Swing line (%) The border will be a line rotated around a rotation point by an azimuth. The division is calculated using a defined percentage split. Swing line (area) The border will be a line rotated around a rotation point by an azimuth. The division is calculated using a defined area size. 653 Elements required Divide by Using Line Parallel line Perpendicular line Percentage Area Viva Series, COGO Elements required Through a point • • Two points defining the line One point on the dividing line By a distance Two points defining the line Distance • • Through a point • • Two points defining the line One point on the dividing line By a distance • • Two points defining the line Distance Parallel line - • • Percentage size of new area Two points defining the line Perpendicular line - • • Percentage size of new area Two points defining the line Swing line Rotation point • • Percentage size of new area Rotation point of the swing line Parallel line - • • Size of new area Two points defining the line Perpendicular line - • • Size of new area Two points defining the line Swing line Rotation point • • Size of new area Rotation point of the swing line 654 Diagram The diagrams show the area division methods. Some diagrams apply to several area division methods. Area division method Using Divide Shift 1. Parallel Line By Defined Line By Distance 2. Parallel Line By Percentage - 3. Parallel Line By Area - P3 d P1 a P2 P0 GS_011 Viva Series, COGO P0 P1 P2 P3 d a Point A of defined line Point B of defined line First new COGO point Second new COGO point Horiz distance Area left of line 655 Area division method Using Divide Shift 1. Perpendic Line By Defined Line By Distance 2. Perpendic Line By Percentage - 3. Perpendic Line By Area - P2 P1 P3 a P0 GS_012 Viva Series, COGO d P0 P1 P2 P3 d a Point A of defined line Point B of defined line First new COGO point Second new COGO point Horiz distance Area left of line 656 Area division method Using Divide Shift 1. Parallel Line By Defined Line Through Point P2 d P1 P0 P1 P2 P3 P0 GS_013 Viva Series, COGO P3 d Point A of defined line Point B of defined line Through point; in this case it is a known point of the existing border New COGO point Horiz distance 657 Area division method Using Divide Shift 1. Perpendic Line By Defined Line Through Point P2 P1 P3 P0 GS_014 Viva Series, COGO d P0 P1 P2 P3 d Point A of defined line Point B of defined line Through point; in this case it is a known point of the existing border New COGO point Horiz distance 658 Area division method Using Divide Shift 1. Swing Line By Percentage - 2. Swing Line By Area - P1 P2 P0 SYS13_007 Viva Series, COGO a P0 P1 P2 α a First new COGO point Second new COGO point Rotation point Azimuth Area left of line 659 30.8.2 Choosing an Area to be Divided Choose Area to be Divided OK To accept the changes and access the subsequent screen. Description of fields Field Option The setting determines the availability of the subsequent fields and screen. Area to use Viva Series, COGO Description Select existing area To use an area from the working job. The area can be edited and a new area can be created from points existing in the job. Survey new area To survey points that do not exist in the job yet. The points will be added to a new area. Create new with pts To create a new area by selecting points from the job. 660 Field Option Description Area ID Selectable list For Area to use: Select existing area. To select the area to be divided. Editable field For Area to use: Survey new area and Area to use: Create new with pts. To enter a name for the new area. No. of points Display only Number of points forming the area. Area Display only The size of the selected area. Perimeter Display only The perimeter of the area. Next step Viva Series, COGO IF THEN Area to use: Select existing area OK accesses Define How to Divide Area. Refer to "30.8.3 Dividing an Area". Area to use: Survey new area OK accesses Survey Job name. Refer to "44 Survey - General". Area to use: Create new with pts OK accesses Edit Area. Refer to "5.4.3 Editing a Line/Area". 661 30.8.3 Dividing an Area Define How to Divide Area, Input page After each change of parameters on this screen, the values in the display only fields are recalculated and updated. Viva Series, COGO Calc To perform the area division and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. Inv.. To calculate the value for the distance from two existing points. Available if Horiz distance is highlighted. Size and % To display the size and the percentage of the subarea. Last.. To select the value for the distance from previous COGO inverse calculations. Available if Horiz distance is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available if Point A, Point B, Rotation point or Through point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. 662 Description of fields Field Option Area left of line Editable field Description For dividing by percentage or area. The size of the sub area must be typed either in % or in m2. When dividing the area using a parallel or perpendicular line, a reference line is defined by Point A and Point B. The direction of the new dividing line is always the same as the direction of the reference line. The direction of a perpendicular line is the same as the reference line rotated 90° anticlockwise. The sub area is always to the left of the new dividing line. When dividing an area using a swing line, the direction of the new dividing line is defined by the Rotation point and the Azimuth. The sub area is always to the left of the new dividing line. Display only For dividing by a line. The size of the sub area is calculated and displayed. Point A Selectable list The first point of the line which is used as the reference for a new parallel or perpendicular border. Point B Selectable list The second point of the line which is used as the reference for a new parallel or perpendicular border. Available for dividing by a line. Shift By distance Viva Series, COGO The new border will run in a certain distance from the line defined by Point A and Point B. 663 Field Option Description Through point The new border will run through a point defined in Through point. Through point Selectable list Available for Shift: Through point. The point through which the new border will run. Rotation point Selectable list Available for using a swing line. The point around which the new border will rotate by Azimuth. Azimuth Display only Horiz distance, Display only Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) Available for using a swing line. The angle of the new border from Rotation point to the new COGO point. The distance from the line defined by Point A and Point B to the new border. Next step Calc performs the area division and accesses Area Division Result. Viva Series, COGO 664 30.8.4 Results of the Area Division Area Division Result, Result page OK To accept the calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Area ratio Display only The ratio of the size of the two sub areas in percent. Area left of line Display only Area right of line Display only The size of the first sub area in m2. The size of the second sub area in m2. Next step On the Plot page, the points defining the area and the calculated COGO points are shown in black. Viva Series, COGO 665 OK accesses Area Divisions Results. Area Divisions Results, Result page The coordinates of the intersection points of the new border with the original area are displayed. Store To store the two results and to return to Choose Area to be Divided once both points are stored. Coord To view other coordinate types. Result1 or Result2 To view the first and second result. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. Viva Series, COGO 666 On the Plot page, The points defining the area and the points of the new border are shown in black. Store stores the results. Viva Series, COGO 667 30.9 COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale 30.9.1 Selecting the Shift, Rotate & Scale Method and the Points to be Moved Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Shift, rotate & scale. COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. Viva Series, COGO 668 Description of the Shift, Rotate & Scale methods Shift, Rotate & Scale methods Description Manually entered Applies shifts and/or rotation and/or scale to one or several known points. The values for shifts and/or rotation and/or scale are typed in manually. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of the points to be shifted, rotated and/or scaled. They must be stored in the working job. • the shift values. They can be defined as: the direction of Easting, Northing and Height, or as an azimuth and a grid distance, or as shift from one point to another. • the rotation value. It can be defined by a point as rotation centre plus a rotation or by an existing and new azimuth. • the scale. It is only applied to the position, not to the height. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Viva Series, COGO 669 Shift, Rotate & Scale methods Description Matching points Applies shifts and/or rotation and/or scale to one or several known points. The shifts and/or rotation and/or scale are calculated from selected points using a 2D Helmert transformation. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of at least two matching points for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. • the coordinates of the points to be shifted, rotated and/or scaled. They must be stored in the working job. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. The number of pairs of points matched determines whether the shift, rotation and scale values are computed. For only one point, only shifts are calculated, rotation and scale are not. Next step OK accesses Point Selection which is the same for Method: Manually entered and Method: Matching points. Viva Series, COGO 670 Point Selection Listed are points which have been selected for shifting, rotating and/or scaling. OK To perform the shift, rotation and scale calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. + All.. To add all points from the working job to the list. Selected sort and filter settings apply. OK adds all displayed points to the list in Point Selection and returns to that screen. + One.. To add one point from the working job to the list. Selected sort and filter settings apply. OK adds the currently highlighted point to the list in Point Selection and returns to that screen. Remov To remove the highlighted point from the list. The point itself is not deleted. More To display information about the codes if stored with any point, the time and the date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality and the class. Fn Rem A To remove all points from the list. The points itself are not deleted. Viva Series, COGO 671 Fn Range To define a range of points from the working job to be added to the list. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Next step IF AND THEN all points are to be added - + All... one point is to be added - + One... a range of points is to be added - Fn Range accesses Select points by range. all points are added Method:Manually entered OK accesses Parameters. Refer to "30.9.2 Manually Entered". Method:Matching points Viva Series, COGO OK accesses Match Points (%d). Refer to "30.9.3 Matching Points". 672 Select points by range OK To add the points within the selected range to the list in Point Selection. Returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Next To add the points within the selected range to the list in Point Selection without quitting this screen. Another range of point IDs can be selected. Description of fields Field Option From pt ID and Editable field To pt ID Viva Series, COGO Description • Numeric point IDs in both fields: Points with numeric point IDs falling within the range are selected. Example: From pt ID: 1, To pt ID: 50 Selected are point IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10…. 49, 50 as well as 001, 01, 0000045, ... Not selected are point IDs 100,200,300, ... 673 Field Option Description • Alphanumeric point IDs in both fields: The left most character of both entries is used as the basis for the range. The standard ASCII numerical range is used. Points with alphanumeric point IDs falling within the range are selected. Example: From pt ID: a9, To pt ID: c200 Selected are point IDs a, b, c, aa, bb, cc, a1, b2, c3, c4, c5, a610, ... Not selected are point IDs d100, e, 200, 300, tzz ... Next step Select a range of points. OK returns to Point Selection. Viva Series, COGO 674 Diagram a P1’ P2’ b P1 P2 SYS13_004 Shift a Height b Easting P1 Known point P1’ Shifted point P2 Known point P2’ Shifted point a b P1’ P0 P1 P2’ P2 SYS13_005 Viva Series, COGO Rotation a Height b Easting P0 Rotation point P1 Known point P1’ Rotated point P2 Known point P2’ Rotated point 675 a P4’ P5’ P4 P5 b P2 P2’ SYS13_006 Viva Series, COGO P1 P3 P3’ Scale a Height b Easting P1 Rotation point, can be held fixed, all other points are then scaled from here P2 Known point P2’ Scaled point P3 Known point P3’ Scaled point P4 Known point P4’ Scaled point P5 Known point P5’ Scaled point 676 30.9.2 Parameters, Shift page Viva Series, COGO Manually Entered Calc To perform the shift, rotation and scale calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. Inv.. To calculate the amount of shift in Easting, Northing and height from two existing points. Available if Azimuth, Horiz distance, Δ easting, Δ northing or Δ height is highlighted. Last.. To select the value for the shift from previous COGO inverse calculations. Available if Azimuth, Horiz distance, Δ easting, Δ northing or Δ height is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available for Method: Use 2 points if From or To is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Refer to "30.3 Configuring COGO". 677 Fn Modif.. To mathematically modify the values. Available if Azimuth, Horiz distance, Δ easting, Δ northing or Δ height is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description The method by which the shift in Δ Easting, Δ Northing and Δ Height will be determined. Method Δeast, Δnorth, Δht Defines the shift using coordinate differences. Viva Series, COGO Bearing, dist, height Defines the shift using an azimuth, a distance and a height difference. Use 2 points Computes the shift from the coordinate differences between two known points. From Selectable list Available for Method: Use 2 points. The point ID of the first known point for calculating the shift. To Selectable list Available for Method: Use 2 points. The point ID of the second known point for calculating the shift. Azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Bearing, dist, height. The azimuth defines the direction of the shift. 678 Field Option Description Horiz distance, Editable field Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) Available for Method: Bearing, dist, height. The amount of shift from the original point to the calculated COGO points. Δ easting Editable field or display only The amount of shift in East direction. Δ northing Editable field or display only The amount of shift in North direction. Δ height Editable field or display only The amount of shift in height. Next step Page accesses Parameters, Rotate page. Parameters, Rotate page The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page. Description of fields Field Option The method by which the rotation angle will be determined. Method Viva Series, COGO Description User entered The rotation can be manually typed in. Computed The rotation will be calculated as New azimuth minus Existing azimuth. 679 Field Option Description Rotation point Selectable list The point around which all points will be rotated. Existing azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known direction before rotating. New azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known direction after rotating. Rotation Editable field or display only The amount by which the points will be rotated. Next step Page accesses Parameters, Scale page. Parameters, Scale page The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page. Description of fields Field Option The method by which the scale factor will be determined. Method Existing distance Viva Series, COGO Description User entered The scale factor can be manually typed in. Computed The scale factor will be calculated as New distance divided by Existing distance. Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known distance before scaling. This value is used for calculating the scale factor. 680 Field Option Description New distance Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known distance after scaling. This value is used for calculating the scale factor. Scale Editable field or display only The scale factor used in the calculation. Scale from point No Scaling is performed by multiplying the original coordinates of the points by Scale. Yes Scale is applied to the coordinate difference of all points relative to Rotation point selected on the Rotation page. The coordinates of Rotation point will not change. Next step Calc performs the shift, rotation and scale calculation and accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results. Viva Series, COGO 681 Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, General page Store To store the results and continue with the next screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Viva Series, COGO Option Description Points selected Display only The number of selected points having been shifted, rotated and/or scaled. Store points to Selectable list job The calculated COGO points will be stored in this job. The original points are not copied to this job. Add Identfier Yes or No Activates the use of identifiers for the point IDs of the calculated COGO points. Store Point ID with Editable field The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the calculated COGO points. Prefix / suffix Prefix Adds the setting for Store Point ID with in front of the original point IDs. 682 Field Option Description Suffix Adds the setting for Store Point ID with at the end of the original point IDs. Next step IF THEN the used parameters Page accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Summary page. are to be viewed Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page Viva Series, COGO the calculated COGO points are to be viewed graphically Page accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Plot page. Original points are displayed in grey, calculated COGO points are displayed in black. the calculated COGO points are to be stored Store accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page. Refer to paragraph "Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page". Description of fields Field Option Description No. of new points Display only Number of new points created. No. of skipped pts Display only Number of points which were skipped either due to not being able to convert coordinates, or points with identical point IDs already in the Store points to job. 683 Next step OK returns to COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale. Viva Series, COGO 684 30.9.3 Matching Points Point Selection Listed are points which have been selected for shifting, rotating and/or scaling. OK To perform the shift, rotation and scale calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. + All.. To add all points from the working job to the list. Selected sort and filter settings apply. OK adds all displayed points to the list in Point Selection and returns to that screen. + One.. To add one point from the working job to the list. Selected sort and filter settings apply. OK adds the currently highlighted point to the list in Point Selection and returns to that screen. Remov To remove the highlighted point from the list. The point itself is not deleted. More To display information about the codes if stored with any point, the time and the date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality and the class. Viva Series, COGO 685 Fn Rem A To remove all points from the list. The points itself are not deleted. Fn Range To define a range of points from the working job to be added to the list. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Next step IF AND THEN all points are to be added - + All... one point is to be added - + One... a range of points is to be added - Fn Range accesses Select points by range. all points are added Method:Manually entered OK accesses Parameters. Refer to "30.9.2 Manually Entered". Method:Matching points Match Points Viva Series, COGO OK accesses Match Points (%d). Refer to "30.9.3 Matching Points". This screen provides a list of points chosen from the working job. The points are used for the determination of the 2D Helmert transformation. The number of points matched is indi- 686 cated in the title, for example (2). Unless there is no pair of matching points in the list all softkeys are available. Calc To confirm the selections, compute the transformation and continue with the subsequent screen. New.. To match a new pair of points. This pair is added to the list. A new point can be manually measured. Refer to paragraph "Choose Matching Points or Edit Matching Points". Edit.. To edit the highlighted pair of matched points. Delete To delete the highlighted pair of matched points from the list. Match To change the type of match for a highlighted pair of matched points. Resid To display a list of the matched points used in the transformation calculation and their associated residuals. Refer to paragraph "Fix Parameters". Fn Param To define the parameters to be fixed in the 2D transformation. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Viva Series, COGO 687 Description of columns Column Description Source point The point ID of the points of origin for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. Target point The point ID of the target points for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. Match The type of match to be made between the points. This information is used in the transformation calculation. Position &Height, Position only, Height only or None. None removes matched common points from the transformation calculation but does not delete them from the list. This option can be used to help improve residuals. Next step IF THEN the transformation is Calc. The calculated shift, rotation and scale values are displayed in to be computed Point Selection. They cannot be edited. The remaining functionality of the calculation is similar to shift, rotate & scale (manual). Refer to "30.9 COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale". a pair of points is to New.. or Info. Refer to paragraph "Choose Matching Points or Edit be matched or edited Matching Points". Viva Series, COGO 688 IF THEN parameters for the Fn Param. Refer to paragraph "Fix Parameters". transformation are to be fixed Choose Matching Points or Edit Matching Points OK To confirm the selections. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Source point Selectable list A point of origin for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. Target point Selectable list A target point for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. Match type Viva Series, COGO The type of match to be made between the points selected. 689 Field Fix Parameters Option Description Pos & height Position and height Pos only Position only Height only Height only None None The settings on this screen define the parameters to be used in the transformation. IF the value for a field is THEN the value for this parameter will be ----- calculated. any number fixed to that value. Description of fields Field Viva Series, COGO Option Description Δ easting Editable field Shift in Easting direction. Δ northing Editable field Shift in Northing direction. Δ height Editable field Shift in Height direction. Rotation Editable field Rotation around the X axis. Scale Editable field Scale factor. 690 Next step IF AND a field displays - the parameter ---must be fixed to a value Viva Series, COGO THEN highlight the field. Enter the value of the parameter. Fix. a field displays a value the parameter highlight the field. Adjst. must be calculated all parameters are configured - OK to return to Match Points. 691 30.10 Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations Description Azimuths, distances and offsets required within the COGO traverse and intersection calculations can be selected from previously calculated inverse results. Access In Traverse or Intersection, highlight Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset and press Last... Last Inverse Calculations All previous COGO inverse calculations stored in the working job are displayed, sorted by time with the most recent at the top. This screen consists of three columns. The information displayed can vary. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example the Azimuth cannot be calculated if a height only point is used. OK To return to the previous screen. View To view all calculated values for the highlighted COGO inverse calculation. Includes the height difference, the slope distance, the grade and the coordinate differences between the two known points. Delete To delete the highlighted COGO inverse calculation. More To display other information in the third column. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Viva Series, COGO 692 Description of columns Column Description From The point ID of the first known point for the COGO inverse calculation. To The point ID of the second known point for the COGO inverse calculation. Azimuth The direction from the first to the second known point. HDist The horizontal distance between the two known points. Date and Time When the COGO inverse calculation was stored. Next step Highlight the COGO inverse calculation of which a result is to be taken over. OK. The relevant result of the highlighted COGO inverse calculation is copied into the field which was initially highlighted on the Input page. Viva Series, COGO 693 30.11 Modifying Values for Azimuths, Distances and Offsets Description The values for the azimuth, the distance and the offset required within the COGO traverse and intersection calculation can be mathematically modified. Access step-by-step In Traverse or Intersection, highlight Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset and press Fn Modif... Modify Value On this screen, numbers can be typed in for the multiplication, division, addition and subtraction with the original azimuth, distance or offset value. The standard rules of mathematical operations apply. OK To accept the modified value and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The modified value is copied into the field which was initially highlighted on the Input page. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Azimuth, Horiz Display only distance or Offset Viva Series, COGO Description The name of the field and the value which was highlighted before accessing Modify Value. 694 Field Option Description Multiply Editable field The number to multiply by. Divide Add Subtract Editable field Editable field Editable field • Minimum: -3000 • Maximum: 3000 • ----- performs a multiplication by 1. The number to divide by. • Minimum: -3000 • Maximum: 3000 • ----- performs a division by 1. The number to be added. • For azimuths Minimum: 0 Maximum: Full circle • For distances and offsets Minimum: 0 m Maximum: 30000000 m • ----- performs an addition of 0.000. The number to be subtracted. • Viva Series, COGO For azimuths Minimum: 0 Maximum: Full circle 695 Field Option Azimuth, Horiz Display only distance or Offset Description • For distances and offsets Minimum: 0 m Maximum: 30000000 m • ----- performs a subtraction of 0.000. The modified value for the field in the first line. This field is updated with every mathematical operation. Angles greater than the full circle are reduced accordingly. Next step OK accepts the modified value and returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Example: Calculations for an azimuth Example: Calculations for a distance Step Value as calculated Value as displayed ) 1. Multiply: 2 500 Azimuth: 100.0000 g 2. Divide: 3 166.667 Azimuth: 166.6670 g 3. Add: 300 466.667 Azimuth: 66.6670 g 4. Subtract: 100 366.667 Azimuth: 366.6670 g Azimuth: 250.0000 g The behaviour for an offset is identical. Step ) Viva Series, COGO Editable field Editable field Value as calculated Value as displayed Horiz distance: 250.000 m 696 Viva Series, COGO Step Editable field Value as calculated Value as displayed 1. Multiply: 2 500 Horiz distance: 500.000 m 2. Divide: 3 166.667 Horiz distance: 166.667 m 3. Add: 300 466.667 Horiz distance: 466.667 m 4. Subtract: 100 366.667 Horiz distance: 366.667 m 697 31 Determine Coordinate System 31.1 Overview Description GPS measured points are always stored based on the global geocentric datum known as WGS 1984. Most surveys require coordinates in a local grid system. For example, based on a country’s official mapping datum or an arbitrary grid system used in a particular area such as a construction site. To convert the WGS 1984 coordinates into local coordinates a coordinate system must be created. Part of the coordinate system is the transformation used to convert coordinates from the WGS 1984 datum to the local datum. The Determine Coordinate System application allows: • the parameters of a new transformation to be determined. • the parameters of an existing transformation to be recomputed. ) With one common control point, it is still possible to calculate a Classic 3D transformation, as long as the rotations and the scale parameter are fixed. Such a transformation fits perfectly in the vicinity of the common control point, but is degraded by the distance from that point. This degradation is because the orientation of the local reference frame or any scale factor within the local datum cannot be taken into account. Requirements to determine a transformation To determine a transformation it is necessary to have common control points whose positions are known in both WGS 1984 coordinates and local coordinates. The more points that are common between datum, the more accurately the transformation parameters can be calculated. Depending on the type of transformation used, details about the map projection, the local ellipsoid and a local geoid model can also be needed. Requirements for control points • The control points used for the transformation should surround the area for which the transformation is to be applied. It is not good practice to survey or convert coordinates Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 698 • outside of the area covered by the control points as extrapolation errors can be introduced. When a geoid field file, and/or a CSCS field file is used in the determination of a coordinate system, the control points for the calculation must fall within the areas of the field files. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 699 31.2 Selecting the Transformation Method Description Determine Coordinate System is the conventional method of determining a coordinate system. Parameters such as the height mode must be set by the user. One or more control points for both the WGS 1984 and the local datum are needed. Depending on the number of control points and available information, a Onestep, Twostep or Classic 3D transformation can be used. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Determine coord system. Determine Coord System Description of fields Field Option Description The type of transformation to be used when determining a coordinate system. Method Onestep Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to local grid and vice versa without knowledge about the local ellipsoid or the map projection. Procedure: 1 The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto a temporary Transverse Mercator Projection. The central meridian of this projection passes through the centre of gravity of the common control points. 2 The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates for the WGS 1984 points. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 700 Field Option Description 3 These preliminary grid coordinates are matched with the local grid control points. The Easting and Northing shifts, the rotation and the scale factor between these two sets of points are then computed. This process is known as a classic 2D transformation. 4 The height transformation is a single dimension height approximation. Refer to "Appendix H Glossary". Twostep Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position and height separately, but is not restricted to smaller areas. Procedure: 1 The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common control points are shifted closely to the local datum using a given Classic 3D pre-transformation. This Classic 3D transformation is typically a rough transformation valid for the country of the local datum. 2 The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary grid, but this time using the true map projection of the local points. 3 A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with the Onestep transformation. Refer to "Appendix H Glossary". Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 701 Field Option Description Classic 3D Also known as Helmert transformation. Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian to local cartesian coordinates and vice versa. A map projection can then be applied to obtain grid coordinates. As a similarity transformation, it is the most rigorous transformation type and keeps the full geometrical information. Refer to "Appendix H Glossary". Modify existing To modify an existing determine coordinate system. Refer to "31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System". Next step IF the selected method is THEN Onestep, Twostep or Classic 3D OK to access Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Refer to the following paragraph: Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Modify existing OK to access Coordinate Systems. Refer to "31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System". Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 702 Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Config.. To configure the selected coordinate system determination method. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the coordinate system. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and can include spaces. Input is mandatory. Entering the name of a coordinate system will allow that existing system to be updated. ) WGS84 points job Selectable list The job from which the points with WGS 1984 coordinates will be taken. Local points job Selectable list The job from which the points with local coordinates will be taken. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 703 Field Option Description Use one point localisation method Check box Number of control points needed: One control point for both the WGS 1984 and the local datum. Transformation to use: • Onestep or Twostep when information about the necessary rotations and scale factor is known. • Classic 3D when the rotations are to be set to zero and the scale factor to one. Next step Press Config.. with Use one point localisation method NOT checked to access Configuration. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 704 31.3 The Normal Method 31.3.1 Configuring the Normal Method Description The configuration allows options to be set, which are used in the Determine Coordinate System application. These settings are stored within the active working style. Access Press Config.. in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method NOT checked. Configuration, Residuals page The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for all pages, unless otherwise stated. OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Easting Editable field The limit above which Easting residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 705 Field Option Description Northing Editable field The limit above which Northing residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Elevation Editable field The limit above which Height residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. The method by which the residuals of the control points will be distributed throughout the transformation area. Default Default residual distribution method None No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their associated points. 1/distance, 1/distance² or 1/distance³/² Distributes the residuals according to the distance between each control point and the newly transformed point. Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Configuration, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Description Model Bursa-Wolf or MolodenskyBadakus The transformation model to be used. Refer to standard surveying literature for details on the models. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 706 Field Option Prompt me to Check box enter fixed transformation parameters Description To configure Classic 3D transformation parameters during the process of calculation. Next step OK returns to Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 707 31.3.2 Determining a New Coordinate System Access Press OK in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method NOT checked. Set Height Mode OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Transformation name Editable field A unique name for the transformation. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces. If a coordinate system is being updated then its name is displayed. Transfrm Type Display only The type of transformation to be used when determining a coordinate system. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 708 Field Option Description The height mode to be used in the determination of a coordinate system. Height mode Orthometric or Ellipsoidal Available when determining a new coordinate system. Display only Available when updating a coordinate system. The height mode shown is the same as the mode used in the existing system. Next step OK continues to Choose System Components. ) If a coordinate system was chosen to be edited in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs, pressing OK accesses Matched Points (n). Pressing ESC does not reaccess Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs but accesses Choose System Components and Set Height Mode. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 709 Choose System Components This screen contains different fields, depending on what method was chosen in Determine Coord System. OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. For Onestep Description of fields Field Option Description Geoid model Selectable list The geoid model to be used in the transformation. Pre Transform Selectable list For Twostep: The pre-transformation to use for the preliminary 3D transformation. Ellipsoid Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid to use in the transformation. Display only For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid being used by a fixed projection when selected in Projection. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 710 Field Option Description Projection Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The projection to use in the transformation. CSCS model Selectable list For Classic 3D: The CSCS model to use in the transformation. Next step OK continues to Matched Points (n). Matched Points (n) This screen provides a list of points chosen from WGS84 points job and Local pts. The number of control points matched between both jobs is indicated in the title. Unless there is no pair of matching points in the list all softkeys are available. Refer to "31.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points" for information on how to match points. Calc To confirm the selections, compute the transformation and continue with the subsequent screen. New.. To match a new pair of points. This pair is added to the list. A new point can be manually occupied. Refer to " Choose Matching Points/Edit Matching Points". Edit.. To edit the highlighted pair of matched points. Refer to " Choose Matching Points/Edit Matching Points". Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 711 ) If a coordinate system to be updated contains a point that was deleted from the working job and a new point was created in that job with the same point ID but different coordinates, the coordinates of the old point will still be used for the calculation. Pressing Edit.. to edit a highlighted pair of matched points containing the deleted point, will overwrite the coordinates of the old point. The coordinates of the new point will be used in the calculation. Delete To delete the highlighted pair of matched points from the list. Match To change the type of match for a highlighted pair of matched points. Refer to "31.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points". Auto To scan both jobs for points that have the same point ID. Points with matching point IDs are added to the list. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 712 Description of columns Column Description WGS84 pts The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job. Local pts The point ID of the points chosen from Local points job. Match The type of match to be made between the points. This information is used in the transformation calculation. Position & Height, Position only, Height only or None. • For Onestep or Twostep possible options are P & H, P only, H only or None. • For Classic 3D, possible options are P & H or None. None removes matched common points from the transformation calculation but does not delete them from the list. This option can be used to help improve residuals. Next step Calc computes the transformation and continues to Check Residuals or to Classic 3D Parameters if Prompt me to enter fixed transformation parameters was checked during the configuration. Classic 3D Parameters The settings on this page define the parameters to be used in a Classic 3D transformation. Refer to "Appendix H Glossary" for more information about how many transformation parameters are computed, based on the number of points common to both datum. IF the value for a field is THEN the value for this parameter will be ----- calculated. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 713 IF the value for a field is THEN the value for this parameter will be any number fixed to that value. Description of fields Field Option Description Model Bursa-Wolf or MolodenskyBadakus The transformation model to be used. Refer to standard surveying literature for details on the models. Shift dX Editable field Shift in X direction. Shift dY Editable field Shift in Y direction. Shift dZ Editable field Shift in Z direction. Rotation X Editable field Rotation around the X axis. Rotation Y Editable field Rotation around the Y axis. Rotation Z Editable field Rotation around the Z axis. Scale Editable field Scale factor. AND THEN Next step IF a field displays - the parameter ---must be fixed to a value Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System highlight the field. Fix. Enter the value of the parameter. 714 Check Residuals IF AND THEN a field displays a value the parameter highlight the field. Adjust. must be calculated all parameters are configured - OK computes the transformation and continues to Check Residuals. Displays a list of the matched points used in the transformation calculation and their associated residuals. OK To accept the residuals and to continue with the subsequent screen. Result To view results of the transformation. Refer to "31.3.5 Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep". More To display information about height residuals. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description WGS84 pts The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job. East The Easting residual. If positions are not used in the transformation calculation then ----- will be displayed. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 715 Column Description North The Northing residual. If positions are not used in the transformation calculation then ----- will be displayed. Height The Height residual. If heights are not used in the transformation calculation then ----- will be displayed. ! Indicates residuals that exceed the residual limit defined in Configuration, Residuals page. ! Indicates the largest residual in East, North and Height. Next step IF the residuals are THEN unacceptable ESC returns to Matched Points (n). Matched points can be edited, deleted or temporarily removed from the list and the transformation recalculated. acceptable OK continues to Store Coordinate System. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 716 Store Coordinate System, Summary page Store To store the coordinate system to the DBX and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the coordinate system can be changed. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces. Transformation type Display only The type of transformation used No. of matched Display only pts Number of matched points. Easting Display only Largest Easting residual from the transformation calculation. Northing Display only Largest Northing residual from the transformation calculation. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 717 Field Option Description Elevation Display only Largest Height residual from the transformation calculation. Next step Page changes to the Coord system page. Store Coordinate System, Coord system page Description of fields Field Option Description Residuals None, 1/distance, 1/distance² or 1/distance³/² The method by which the residuals of the control points will be distributed throughout the transformation area. Geoid model Display only Name of geoid model used. Pre Transform Display only For Twostep: Name of the pre-transformation used. Transformation Display only For Classic 3D: Name of transformation used. Ellipsoid Display only For Twostep and Classic 3D: Name of ellipsoid used. Projection Display only For Twostep and Classic 3D: Name of projection used. CSCS model Display only For Classic 3D: Name of CSCS model used. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 718 Next step Store stores the coordinate system to the DBX and attaches it to the WGS84 points job selected in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs, replacing any coordinate system attached to this job. WGS84 points job becomes the working job. Determine Coord System Description of fields Field Option Description The type of transformation to be used when determining a coordinate system. Method Onestep Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to local grid and vice versa without knowledge about the local ellipsoid or the map projection. Procedure: 1 The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto a temporary Transverse Mercator Projection. The central meridian of this projection passes through the centre of gravity of the common control points. 2 The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates for the WGS 1984 points. 3 These preliminary grid coordinates are matched with the local grid control points. The Easting and Northing shifts, the rotation and the scale factor between these two sets of points are then computed. This process is known as a classic 2D transformation. 4 The height transformation is a single dimension height approximation. Refer to "H.11 T". Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 719 Field Option Description Twostep Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position and height separately, but is not restricted to smaller areas. Procedure: 1 The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common control points are shifted closely to the local datum using a given Classic 3D pre-transformation. This Classic 3D transformation is typically a rough transformation valid for the country of the local datum. 2 The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary grid, but this time using the true map projection of the local points. 3 A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with the Onestep transformation. Refer to "H.11 T". Classic 3D Also known as Helmert transformation. Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian to local cartesian coordinates and vice versa. A map projection can then be applied to obtain grid coordinates. As a similarity transformation, it is the most rigorous transformation type and keeps the full geometrical information. Refer to "H.11 T". Modify existing To modify an existing determine coordinate system. Refer to "31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System". Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 720 Next step IF the selected method is THEN Onestep, Twostep or Classic 3D OK to access Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Refer to the following paragraph: Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Modify existing OK to access Coordinate Systems. Refer to "31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System". Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 721 31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System Access OK in Determine Coord System when Method: Modify existing. Coordinate Systems Select an existing coordinate system and press OK. All the following steps are identical with the determination of a new coordinate system from the Matched Points (n) screen onwards. Refer to "31.3.2 Determining a New Coordinate System" Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 722 31.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points Description Before calculating a transformation, it must be defined which points in WGS84 points job and Local points job are to be matched. Pairs of matched points are displayed in one line in Matched Points (n). New pairs of matched points can be created, existing pairs of matched points can be edited and pairs of matched points can be deleted. Access Press New.. or Edit.. in Matched Points (n). Choose Matching Points/Edit Matching Points OK To return to Matched Points (n) and to adds a new line of matched points to the matched points list. Survy.. To manually occupy a point and store it in WGS84 points job. Available when WGS84 point is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description WGS84 point Selectable list A WGS 1984 control point. Local point Selectable list A local control point. Match in Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System The type of match to be made between the points selected. 723 Field Option Description P & H, P only, H only or None. Available for Onestep and Twostep. P & H or None Available for Classic 3D. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 724 31.3.5 Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep Access Press Result in Check Residuals. Transformation Results, Position page Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are shown for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Position page and the Height page. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the pages as indicated. OK To return to Check Residuals. Scale.. or Ppm Available on the Position page. To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Rms or Param.. To switch between the root mean square values of the parameters and the actual parameter values. The name of the screen changes to Transformation Results rms when displaying rms values. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Shift dX Display only Shift in X direction. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 725 Field Option Description Shift dY Display only Shift in Y direction. Rotation Display only Rotation of transformation. Scale Display only Scale factor used in transformation. Either true scale or ppm. Rotation X Display only Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation. Rotation Y Display only Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation. Next step Page changes to the Height page. Transformation Results, Height page Description of fields Field Option Description Slope in X Display only Tilt of the transformation in the X direction. Slope in Y Display only Tilt of the transformation in the Y direction. Height shift Display only Shift in height between WGS 1984 datum and local datum. Next step OK returns to Check Residuals. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 726 31.3.6 Transformation Results for Classic 3D Access Press Result in Check Residuals. Transformation Results, Parameters page Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are shown for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Parameters page and the Rotation origin page. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the pages as indicated. OK To return to Check Residuals. Scale.. or Ppm Available on the Position page. To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Rms or Param.. To switch between the root mean square values of the parameters and the actual parameter values. The name of the screen changes to Transformation Results rms when displaying rms values. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Shift dX Display only Shift in X direction. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System Description 727 Field Option Description Shift dY Display only Shift in Y direction. Shift dZ Display only Shift in Z direction. Rotation X Display only Rotation around the X axis. Rotation Y Display only Rotation around the Y axis. Rotation Z Display only Rotation around the Z axis. Scale Display only Scale factor used in transformation. Either true scale or ppm. Next step Page changes to the Rotation origin page. Transformation Results, Rotation origin page Description of fields Field Option Description Model Display only Classic 3D transformation model used for the transformation. Rotation orgn X Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation. Rotation orgn Y Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation. Rotation orgn Z Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in the Z direction of the origin of rotation. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 728 Next step OK returns to Check Residuals. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 729 31.4 The One Point Localisation Method 31.4.1 Determining a New Coordinate System Access Press OK in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method being checked. Set Height Mode OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Transformation name Editable field A unique name for the transformation. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces. If a coordinate system is being updated then its name is displayed. Transfrm Type Display only The type of transformation to be used when determining a coordinate system. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 730 Field Option Description The height mode to be used in the determination of a coordinate system. Height mode Orthometric or Ellipsoidal Available when determining a new coordinate system. Display only Available when updating a coordinate system. The height mode shown is the same as the mode used in the existing system. Next step OK continues to Choose System Components. ) Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to mean also Bearing. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 731 Choose System Components This screen contains different fields, depending on what method was chosen in Determine Coord System. OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. For Onestep Description of fields Field Option Description Geoid model Selectable list The geoid model to be used in the transformation. Pre Transform Selectable list For Twostep: The pre-transformation to be used for the preliminary 3D transformation. Ellipsoid Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid to be used in the transformation. Display only For Twostep: The ellipsoid being used by a fixed projection when selected in Projection. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 732 Field Option Description Projection Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The projection to be used in the transformation. CSCS model Selectable list For Classic 3D: The CSCS model to be used in the transformation. Next step OK continues to Choose Common Point. Choose Common Point OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Survy.. Available for WGS84 point being highlighted. To occupy a point manually and store it in WGS84 points job. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 733 Description of fields Field Option Description For Onestep and Twostep: How the horizontal and vertical shifts of the transformation will be computed. Match in Position & height Position and height are taken from the same pair of matching points. Position only Position is taken from one pair of matching points. The height can be taken from another pair of matching points. WGS84 point Selectable list The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control point chosen from WGS84 points job. Local point Selectable list The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control point chosen from Local points job. Match height Check box For Onestep and Twostep: Available for Match in: Position only. Activates the determination of the vertical shift from a separate pair of matching points. Local height Use WGS84 point ht or Use Local point ht For Classic 3D: The source of the height information to use in the transformation. Next step For Onestep and Twostep: OK continues to Determine Rotation. For Classic 3D: OK continues to Store Coordinate System. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 734 Determine Rotation For Onestep and Twostep only. OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Inv Available for Method: Two WGS84 points and Method: User entered. To compute an azimuth between two local points. Refer to "31.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth". Survy.. To manually occupy a point and store it in WGS84 points job. Available when Point 1 or Point 2 are highlighted for Method: Two WGS84 points or when WGS84 point is highlighted for Method: Convergence angle. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 735 Description of fields Field Option Method Use WGS84 north, Method by which the rotation angle for the transforUser entered, mation is determined. Convergence angle or Two WGS84 points Rotation Display only Coord system Description • For Method: Use WGS84 north: Transformation will be rotated to North as defined by the WGS 1984 datum. North is 0.00000 °. • For Method: Convergence angle: The rotation of the transformation calculated as 0.00000 ° minus the computed convergence angle. The field is updated as Coord system and WGS84 point are changed. • For Method: Two WGS84 points: The rotation of the transformation calculated as required azimuth minus azimuth. The field is updated as Point 1, Point 2 and Required azimuth are changed. Editable field • For Method: User entered: Allows the orientation of the transformation to be manually typed in or calculated in Compute Required Azimuth. Selectable list Coordinate system to provide the direction of grid North in the area where the control point used for determining the local coordinate system, is located. Available for Method: Convergence angle. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 736 Field Option Description WGS84 point Selectable list WGS 1984 point of which the convergence angle will be calculated. Available for Method: Convergence angle. Point 1 Selectable list First point to use for computation of Azimuth. Available for Method: Two WGS84 points. Point 2 Selectable list Second point to use for computation of Azimuth. Available for Method: Two WGS84 points. Azimuth Display only Computed azimuth between Point 1 and Point 2. Available for Method: Two WGS84 points. Required azimuth Editable field The required grid azimuth, computed between two local points. Refer to "31.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth". Available for Method: Two WGS84 points. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 737 Diagram for Onestep, Method: Convergence angle c d e b f a SYS13_008 Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System a) b) c) d) e) f) α WGS 1984 coordinate system Local coordinate system Geodetic North Grid North Point on WGS 1984 datum Meridian Convergence angle 738 Diagram for Onestep, Method: Two WGS84 points a b c d a b SYS13_009 a) b) c) d) α β WGS 1984 coordinate system Local coordinate system Line between two WGS 1984 points Line between two local points Azimuth of two WGS 1984 points Known azimuth or azimuth of two local points Next step OK continues to Determine Scale. Determine Scale For Onestep and Twostep only. The scale is calculated using the formula (r + h)/r where r is the distance from the centre of the ellipsoid to the WGS 1984 point selected in Choose Common Point, and h is the height of this point above the WGS 1984 ellipsoid. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 739 OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Grid.. Available Twostep and for Method: Combined SF. To compute the grid scale factor. Refer to "31.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor". Hgt.. Available Twostep and for Method: Combined SF. To compute the height scale factor. Refer to "31.4.4 Computing the Height Scale Factor". Scale or Ppm To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Survy.. To manually occupy a point and store it in WGS84 points job. Method: Convergence angle when WGS84 point is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 740 Description of fields Field Option Method Known WGS84 pt, Available for Onestep: Method of determining the Known WGS84 ht scale factor of the transformation. or User entered User entered or Combined SF Scale (Reducing Editable field points to the ground) Description Available for Twostep. The default method for determining the Combined Scale Factor to be used in the transformation process. Available for Onestep. Allows the scale factor to be typed in manually. Available for Method: User entered. Display only Available for Onestep. The calculated scale factor. Available for Method: Known WGS84 pt and Method: Known WGS84 ht. WGS84 point Selectable list Available for Onestep. WGS 1984 point from which the scale factor will be calculated. The scale factor is calculated using the height of the known WGS 1984 point. Available for Method: Known WGS84 pt. Known height Editable field Available for Onestep. The WGS 1984 height of a point can be typed in. The scale factor is calculated using this height. Available for Method: Known WGS84 ht. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 741 Field Option Description Grid SF Display only Available for Twostep and Method: Combined SF. The grid scale factor as computed in Compute Grid Scale Factor. Refer to "31.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor". Height SF Display only Available for Twostep and Method: Combined SF. The height scale factor as computed in Compute Height Scale Factor. Refer to "31.4.4 Computing the Height Scale Factor". Available for Twostep. The combined scale factor of the transformation. Combined SF Editable field Available for Method: User entered. The scale factor can be typed in. Display only Available for Method: Combined SF. The product of the grid scale factor and the height scale factor. Next step OK continues to Store Coordinate System. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 742 Store Coordinate System Store To store the coordinate system to the DB-X, attach the system to WGS84 points job that was selected in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs and return to Main Menu. Scale or Ppm For Onestep and Twostep. To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Coord For Classic 3D: To view other coordinate types. Fn Quit To exit the screen. For Onestep Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the coordinate system. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces. Shift dX Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Shift in X direction. Shift dY Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Shift in Y direction. Shift dZ Display only For Classic 3D: Shift in Z direction. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 743 Field Option Description Rotation Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Rotation of transformation. Scale Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Scale factor of transformation. Rotation orgn X Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation. Rotation orgn Y Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation. Next step Store stores the coordinate system and returns to Main Menu. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 744 31.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth Description Available for: • One Point Localisation method with Onestep or Twostep transformation. • Method: Two WGS84 points and Method: User entered in Determine Rotation. Allows two local points to be chosen from local job between which the required azimuth will be computed. This azimuth is then used with an azimuth computed between two WGS 1984 points chosen from the WGS84 job to calculate the rotation of the transformation. The computed required azimuth appears in the Required azimuth field for Method: Two WGS84 points and the Rotation field for Method: User entered in Determine Rotation. Access Press Inv in Determine Rotation. Compute Required Azimuth OK To calculate the required azimuth and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 745 Description of fields Field Option Description From Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the azimuth calculation. To Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the azimuth calculation. Azimuth Display only The calculated azimuth. Next step OK returns to Determine Rotation. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 746 31.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor Description For One Step Localisation method with Twostep transformation. Calculates the grid scale factor. The grid scale factor is the scale factor of the point chosen, relative to the projection being used. Access Press Grid.. in Determine Scale. Compute Grid Scale Factor OK To confirm the selections and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Scale or Ppm To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Method by which the grid scale factor is to be calculated. Method User entered Grid scale factor can be manually typed in. Known local pt Grid scale factor is computed using the position of a known local point. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 747 Field Option Description Local point Selectable list Available for Method: Known local pt. The point ID of the point chosen from the local job from which the grid scale factor is computed using the projection selected. The grid scale factor. Grid SF Editable field Available for Method: User entered. To type in the grid scale factor. Display only Available for Method: Known local pt. The computed grid scale factor. Next step OK returns to Determine Scale. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 748 31.4.4 Computing the Height Scale Factor Description For One Point Localisation method with Twostep transformation. Calculates the height scale factor of the point chosen. Access Press Hgt.. in Determine Scale. Compute Height Scale Factor OK To confirm the selections and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Scale or Ppm To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Method by which the height scale factor is to be calculated. Method User entered Height scale factor can be manually typed in. Known local pt Height scale factor is computed using the position of a known local point. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 749 Field Option Description Known local ht Height scale factor is computed using an entered height value. Known Point Selectable list Available for Method: Known local pt. The point ID of the point chosen from the local job from which the height scale factor is computed. Known height Editable field Available for Method: Known local ht. A known local height. The height scale factor. Height SF Editable field Available for Method: User entered. To type in the height scale factor. Display only Available for Method: Known local pt and Method: Known local ht. The computed height scale factor. Next step OK returns to Determine Scale. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 750 32 QuickGrid 32.1 Selecting the Transformation Method ) For an overview of determine coordinate systems, refer to "31.1 Overview" Description QuickGrid is designed to allow for quick coordinate system determination on site. Particularly for those users who must combine GPS and TPS data. All points must be measured by GPS, and therefore this method is not available in TPS mode. There are five different methods to choose from, Single point, Multi point, Single point from base, Orientate to line & Quickshift. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\QuickGrid. Choose QuickGrid Method Description of fields Viva Series, QuickGrid Field Option Description Method Single point This method is fast and targeted at the basic customer who wants to set up a local coordinate system based on a single point. The orientation is fixed to WGS 1984 north. A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to “ground” using measured point WGS 1984 height. Multiple points This method is fast and targeted at the more rigorous customer who wants to set up a local coordinate system based on multiple points. Rotation and scale are as calculated. 751 Field Option Description Single point base This method is fast and targeted at the basic customer who wants to set up a local coordinate system based on the base station position. The orientation is fixed to WGS 1984 north. A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to “ground” using measured point WGS 1984 height. Orientate to line This method is fast and targeted at the more advanced customer who wants to set up a local coordinate system based on a single point, but set the orientation of the resulting grid by measuring a second point. The rotation is as calculated. A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to “ground” using measured point WGS 1984 height. QuickShift This method is fast and targeted at the more advanced customer who wants to shift their existing coordinate system based on a single point. A 3D transformation is calculated. Next step IF the selected method is THEN Single point, Multiple points, OK to access Define Local Quickgrid Point. Refer to paraSingle point base or Orientate graph Define Local Quickgrid Point. to line Viva Series, QuickGrid 752 Select Coordinate System IF the selected method is THEN QuickShift OK to access Select Coordinate System. Refer to paragraph Select Coordinate System. This screen is only available for Method: QuickShift. OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Coord system Selectable list Select the coordinate system to be shifted. Transformation Display only Viva Series, QuickGrid The type of transformation. Ellipsoid Display only The coordinates are based on this ellipsoid. Projection Display only The map projection. Geoid model Display only The geoid model. 753 Field Option Description CSCS model Display only The Country Specific Coordinate System model. Next step OK accesses Define Local Quickgrid Point. Define Local Quickgrid Point OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, QuickGrid Field Option Description Local point User entered The local QuickGrid point is entered by the user. From working job The local QuickGrid point is selected from the working job. From control job The local QuickGrid point is selected from the control job. 754 Field Option The point ID of the local QuickGrid point. Point ID Editable field For Local point: User entered. Selectable list For Local point: From working job and Local point: From control job. The Easting coordinate of the local QuickGrid point. Easting Editable field For Local point: User entered. Display only For Local point: From working job and Local point: From control job. The Northing coordinate of the local QuickGrid point. Northing Editable field For Local point: User entered. Display only For Local point: From working job and Local point: From control job. The orthometric height of the local QuickGrid point. Elevation Viva Series, QuickGrid Description Editable field For Local point: User entered. Display only For Local point: From working job and Local point: From control job. Ignore local height & use WGS84 height Check box When this box is checked, no height adjustment is calculated. When this box is not checked, a height adjustment is calculated. Use geoid Check box Check this box to select a geoid model for the calculation. 755 Field Option Description Geoid model Selectable list Available when Use geoid is checked. To select a geoid model. Next step OK accesses Measure QuickGrid Point. Viva Series, QuickGrid 756 32.2 Determining a New Coordinate System Access Press OK in Define Local Quickgrid Point. Measure QuickGrid Point This screen is similar to the standard Survey screen. Refer to "44.1.2 Real-Time Rover Operations". Next step • For Method: Multiple points: After measuring and storing a point, Matched Pts & Residuals is accessed. • For Method: Orientate to line: Measure the points of the line. Then Store Coordinate System is accessed. • For all other QuickGrid methods: After measuring and storing a point, Store Coordinate System is accessed. Matched Pts & Residuals This screen shows what points have been matched so far. More points can be added, matched points can be deleted. OK To confirm the selections, compute the transformation and continue with the subsequent screen. New.. To survey another point and return to the Survey screen. Match To change the type of match for the highlighted point. Viva Series, QuickGrid 757 Delete To delete the highlighted point from the list. More To display information about height residuals. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description WGS84 pts The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job. Match The type of match to be made between the QuickGrid point and the surveyed point. This information is used in the transformation calculation. Position & Height, Position only, Height only or None. East, North and The residuals of the matched points. Height Next step Press New.. to return to Measure QuickGrid Point and to survey another point for the calculation. Press OK to continue with Store Coordinate System. Viva Series, QuickGrid 758 Store Coordinate System, Summary page The available fields, keys and pages depend on the selected QuickGrid method. Store To store the coordinate system and to exit the Determine Coordinate System application. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the new coordinate system. No. of matched Display only pts Available for Multiple points. The number of matched points. Largest resid- Display only uals East, North and Height Available for Multiple points. The largest residuals of the transformation. Rotation from north Viva Series, QuickGrid Display only Available for Orientate to line. The rotation is shown in the configured angle units. 759 Field Option Description Shift dX Display only Available for QuickShift. Shift in X direction. Shift dY Display only Available for QuickShift. Shift in Y direction. Shift dZ Display only Available for QuickShift. Shift in Z direction. Next step Page changes to the Coord system page. Store Coordinate System, Coord system page The available fields, keys and pages depend on the selected QuickGrid method. Store To store the coordinate system and to exit the Determine Coordinate System application. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, QuickGrid 760 Description of fields Field Option For Multiple points. The method by which the residuals of the control points will be distributed throughout the transformation area. Residuals None No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their associated points. 1/distance, 1/distance² or 1/distance³/² Distributes the residuals according to the distance between each control point and the newly transformed point. Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach. Transformation Display only Viva Series, QuickGrid Description Available for QuickShift. The type of transformation. Ellipsoid Display only Available for QuickShift. The coordinates are based on this ellipsoid. Projection Display only Available for QuickShift. The map projection. Geoid model Display only Available for Multiple points and QuickShift. The geoid model used. CSCS model Display only Available for QuickShift. The Country Specific Coordinate System model. 761 Next step Store safes the new coordinate system. Viva Series, QuickGrid 762 33 Reference Line 33.1 Overview Description The Reference Line application can be used to set out or measure points relative to a reference line or a reference arc. Reference line tasks The Reference Line application can be used for the following tasks: • Measuring to a line/arc where the coordinates of a target point can be calculated from its position relative to the defined reference line/arc. • Staking to a line/arc where the position of a target point is known and instructions to locate the point are given relative to the reference line/arc. • Gridstaking a line/arc where a grid can be staked relative to a reference line/arc. • Staking points relative to an alignment. Other functionality available includes: • Offsetting the reference line/arc horizontally or vertically. The radius of the arc changes with the horizontal offset. • Shifting the reference line with parallel offsets or rotating to match predefined setting out instructions. • Measuring points and staking points on slopes related to a reference line/arc. Activating the application The Reference Line application must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "24.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to activate the application. ) Measuring and staking out of points is possible for RTK base and TPS. Viva Series, Reference Line 763 Point types Reference lines/arcs can be created from points stored as: • WGS 1984 geodetic • Local grid Heights and positions are always taken into account. Points must have full coordinate triplets. Properties of measured points The properties stored with staked points are: • • Class: Either Meas or for point was measured. Sub class: • • • also Nav depending on the position status when the Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed. • TPS Source: RefLine (Grid), RefLine (Meas), RefLine (Stake), RefLine (Seg) Instrument source: GPS or TPS Deleting points A point that is used to define a reference line/arc can be deleted. If one or more points defining the reference line/arc have been deleted, a reference line/arc can still be used. Within Edit reference line and Edit reference arc, the deleted point field is shown in grey. Within MapView, the reference line is still displayed but the deleted point or points is/are not. Terms Reference point: Viva Series, Reference Line Used in this chapter to refer to the point from which the perpendicular offset, from the reference line/arc to the target point, is measured. 764 Defining a reference line/arc Target point: The design point. • For measuring to a reference line, this term refers to the point with the coordinates of the current position and the designed or calculated height. • For staking or grid staking to a reference line, this term refers to the point to be staked. Measured point: The current position. A • • • • reference line can be defined in the following ways: Two known points One known point, an azimuth, a distance and a gradient One known point, an azimuth, a distance and a difference in height Alignments can be imported from a DXF job and selected from a list or on the Map page. Refer to "33.8.1 Overview". P1 d1 P0 GS_015 Viva Series, Reference Line d2 P0 P1 d1 d2 α β Start point End point Known distance Difference in height, ΔHt Azimuth Elevation angle between the start point and the end point 765 P2 d1 P1 P0 TS_021 d2 P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 α β Instrument station Start point End point Known distance Difference in height, ΔHt Azimuth Elevation angle between the start point and the end point A reference arc can be defined in the following ways: • Two known points and a radius • Three known points Viva Series, Reference Line 766 P2 P1 r P0 GS_016 P0 P1 P2 r Start point End point Known point Radius of arc P0 P1 P2 P3 r Instrument station Start point End point Known point Radius of arc P3 P2 r P1 P0 TS_022 Defining chainage The chainage of the start point of a reference line/arc can be defined. Viva Series, Reference Line 767 ) It is possible to define an arc that has an opening angle of more than 180°. ) Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to mean also Bearing. Coordinate systems Direction of values It is possible to use a valid coordinate system, but have the line or part of it lying outside the projection or CSCS model being used. In these cases, the field values relating to the difference in coordinates between the point being staked and the current position, are shown as -----. The following diagram shows the direction of positive and negative values for distance and height differences between the target point and the reference point for reference lines. P1 P2 P0 GS_017 Viva Series, Reference Line + + - P2 P3 P0 P1 P2 P3 Start point End point Target point Reference point 768 P2 P3 P0 TS_023 Viva Series, Reference Line P1 + P3 + - P4 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 Instrument station Start point End point Target point Reference point 769 33.2 Accessing Reference Line Access • • For measuring tasks: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Measure to ref line. For staking tasks: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stake to ref line. Reference Line Startup OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of the Reference Line tasks Reference line task Description Measure to line or Measure to arc Calculates the coordinates of a point from its position relative to the reference line/arc. Stake to line or Stake to Allows points to be staked relative to the reference line/arc. arc Viva Series, Reference Line 770 Reference line task Description Stake grid from line or Stake grid from arc Allows a grid to be staked out relative to the reference line/arc. Stake alignment Allows points to be staked relative to an alignment. This option uses line and area data from CAD as simply as possible. Next step IF THEN Reference line task: Stake alignment OK accesses Stake alignment. Refer to "33.8 Staking to Alignment". Reference line task is OK accesses Choose Control Job. Refer to "Choose Control Job". NOT Stake alignment Choose Control Job OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Reference Line 771 Description of fields Field Option Description Height to use Selectable list Depending on the task chosen this parameter controls the following: • When measuring to a line/arc, it determines the delta height value which is displayed when points are being measured. • When staking to or gridstaking a line/arc, it determines the height value to be staked out. Reference line Heights are computed along the reference line/arc. Start point Heights are computed relative to the height of the starting point. DTM The stakeout height is computed from the DTM being used. Choose control Selectable list job The original points to be staked and the reference lines/arcs are stored in this job. Next step OK and continue with the subchapters for the various Reference Line tasks. Viva Series, Reference Line 772 33.3 Configuring Reference Line Access Press Fn Config.. in the Reference Line Startup, Choose Control Job or the Choose Alignment screen. Configuration, General page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Show addiCheck box tional page from My Survey Screen Page to show Viva Series, Reference Line Selectable list Description Shows a selectable list for the survey screen pages. The user-defined survey screen page to be shown. All survey screens defined in My Survey Screen Settings be selected. 773 Field Option Use chainages Check box Description Activates the use of chainages within the reference line application. Next step For all reference line tasks except for Stake alignment, Page changes to the Quality control page. For Reference line task: Stake alignment, page changes to the Key points page. Configuration, Key points page This page is only available for Reference line task: Stake alignment. On this page, the type of horizontal points to be staked is set. Refer to "33.8 Staking to Alignment" for a graphic and an explanation of the abbreviations. Description of fields Field Option Description PC, PT, AP Check box Start/end of a curve & angle point where two straights meet Only these horizontal key points are calculated for staking, skipping the radius and midpoints of arcs and the angle bisector point on lines. RP - Radius point of Check box a curve Additional to other options checked, the radius point is calculated for staking. MP - Mid point of a curve Check box Additional to other options checked, the mid point is calculated for staking. BP - Point where two offset lines bisect Check box Additional to other options checked, the bisected point is calculated for staking. Viva Series, Reference Line 774 Configuration, Alignment options page Field Option Description Vertical key points (VPI, Low, High) Check box Additional to other options checked, the vertical point of intersection, and the low and high points of the vertical alignment are calculated for staking. This page is only available for Reference line task: Stake alignment. Description of fields Field Option Description Sets behaviour of the chainage after a point is stored. After storing point automatically select Current point Does not change the chainage after a point is stored. Previous point (Ch-) Proceeds to the next key point down chainage after each stored staked point. Next point (Ch+) Proceeds to the next key point up chainage after each stored staked point. Tangent to use Back tangent or in void areas Forward tangent Defines which tangent is used in those areas of the alignment which does not have points. Use a different Check box chainage increment on curves Option to use a different chainage increment along a curve. Increment Viva Series, Reference Line Editable field Available when Use a different chainage increment on curves is checked. Chainage increment to be used along the small radius curve. 775 Field Option Description For radius under Editable field Available when Use a different chainage increment on curves is checked. Defines the threshold value of a small radius curve. For example, a curve with a radius smaller than this value, uses the chainage increment defined in the following field. Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Configuration, Quality control page This page is only available for staking operations. Description of fields Field Option Check distance Check box before storing Description Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordinate difference between the staked point and the point to be staked. If the defined Limit is exceeded, the stakeout can be repeated, skipped or stored. Limit Editable field Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate difference which is accepted in the position check. Check cut/fill before storing Check box Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference between the manually measured staked point and the point to be staked. If the defined Limit is exceeded, the stakeout can be repeated, skipped or stored. Viva Series, Reference Line 776 Field Option Description Limit Editable field Sets the maximum vertical difference accepted in the height check. Next step Page changes to the Heights page. Configuration, Heights page Description of fields Field Option Description Allow design height of point to be edited Check box The design height is the height of the point to be staked. The initial value is as configured in the heights field. The value for the desing height can be changed. Next step Page changes to the Graphics page. Configuration, Graphics page This page is only available for staking operations. Description of fields Field Navigate direction Viva Series, Reference Line Option Description The reference direction to be used to stakeout points. The stakeout elements and the graphical display shown in the Reference Line application are based on this selection. 777 Field Option Description From instrument The direction of the orientation is from the instrument to the point to be staked. To instrument The direction of the orientation is from the point to be staked to the instrument. To north The North direction shown in the graphical display based on the active coordinate system. To sun The position of the sun calculated from the current position, the time and the date. To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point. If no points are yet staked, To north is used for the first point to be staked. To point (cntrl job) A point from Control job selected in Choose Control Job. To point Viva Series, Reference Line A point from the working job. To reference line The direction of the orientation is parallel to the reference line or the reference arc. Following arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current position to the point to be staked. The graphical display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of the point to be staked. 778 Field Option Description Point Selectable list Available for Navigate direction: To point (cntrl job) and Navigate direction: To point. To select the point to be used for orientation. The method of staking out. Navigate using Direction & distance The direction from the orientation reference, the horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed. In/out, left/right The distance forwards/backwards to the point, the distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is displayed. Switch to bulls eye Check box when 0.5m from target When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is shown in the stakeout graphic when less than half a metre from the point being staked. Beep faster when getting close to point Check box The instrument beeps when the horizontal radial distance from the current position to the point to be staked, is equal to or less than defined in Start within. Distance to use Elevation The distance in height is used as indicator. Horizontal distance The distance from Easting and Northing is used as indicator. Position & height The distance from Easting, Northing and Height is used as indicator. Editable field The horizontal radial distance from the current position to the point to be staked when a beep will be heard. Start within Viva Series, Reference Line 779 Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Viva Series, Reference Line 780 Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Reference Line 781 33.4 Choosing Reference Lines/Arcs 33.4.1 Overview Description There are two ways by which a reference line/arc can be defined. Manually Enter • A reference line/arc can be defined by manually entering known parameters. • The line is only temporary and is not stored once the Reference Line application has been exited. Select from Job • Reference lines/arcs can be created, edited, stored and deleted in the Choose Control Job. • The reference lines/arcs can be recalled for use later. Viva Series, Reference Line 782 33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc Access Press OK in Choose Control Job. Reference Line To Use/ Reference Arc To Use, Reference page The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid as indicated. For all point fields, the MapView interactive display can be used to select the desired point. OK To accept changes and continue with the subsequent screen. Survy.. To manually measure a point. Available when a point field is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Select one of the following options to enter a reference line manually. Create line using 2 points Viva Series, Reference Line Description For lines. Uses two known points to define the reference line. 783 Field Option Description Pt, brng, dist, grade For lines. Defines the reference line using a known point, a distance, an azimuth and the gradient of the line. Pt, brng, dist, Δht For lines. The same as Pt, brng, dist, grade but uses the difference in height instead of the gradient. 3 points For arcs. Defines the reference arc using three known points. 2 points/radius For arcs. Defines the reference arc with two known points and a known radius. Select existing line Refer to "33.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from or Select existing the Job" arc Δ height Editable field For lines: Available for Create line using: Pt, brng, dist, Δht. The difference in height from the start point to the end point of the reference line. Arc distance Display only Available for arcs. The horizontal grid distance along the arc between the three points. If the distance cannot be calculated, ----- is displayed. Azimuth Editable field For lines: Available for Create line using: Pt, brng, dist, grade and Create line using: Pt, brng, dist, Δht. The azimuth of the reference line. Viva Series, Reference Line 784 Field Option Description Chainage Editable field Available when Use chainages in Configuration, General page is checked. Defines the chainage of the start point of the reference line/arc. The input format depends on the selection for Chainage format in Regional Settings, Distance page. End point Selectable list For lines: Available for Create line using: 2 points. For arcs: Available for Create line using: 2 points/radius. The last point forming the reference line/arc. Grade Editable field For lines: Available for Create line using: Pt, brng, dist, grade. The gradient of the line from the start point to the end point of the reference line. Horiz distance Editable field For lines: Available for Create line using: Pt, brng, dist, grade and Create line using: Pt, brng, dist, Δht. The horizontal grid distance from the start point to the end point of the reference line. Line length Display only For lines. The horizontal grid distance between the two points of the line. If the distance cannot be calculated, ----- is displayed. Radius Editable field For arcs: Available for Create line using: 2 points/radius. The radius of the reference arc. Second Point Selectable list For arcs: Available for Create line using: 3 points. The medium point forming the reference arc. Viva Series, Reference Line 785 Field Option Description Start point Selectable list For lines: Available for Create line using: 2 points and Create line using: Pt, brng, dist, grade. For arcs: Available for Create line using: 2 points/radius and Create line using: 3 points. The first point forming the reference line/arc. Next step Page changes to the Slope page, Line shifts page and the Map page. For information on the Slope and Line shifts pages, refer to "33.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc Slopes"and"33.4.5 Defining Reference Line/Arc Shifts". Viva Series, Reference Line 786 33.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from the Job Access Press OK in Choose Control Job. Description New reference lines/arcs can be created, existing reference lines/arcs can be edited and previously entered reference lines/arcs can be selected from the control job. Reference Line To Use/ Reference Arc To Use, Reference page Refer to "33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc" for a description of softkeys. Description of fields Field Option Description Create line using / Create arc using Select existing line Select these options to enter a reference line/arc or Select existing manually. For the other available options refer to arc "33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc". Reference line Selectable list The reference line to be used. If the desired reference line must be created, edited or selected, highlight this field and press . Reference arc Selectable list The reference arc to be used. Open the list to select an arc. If the desired reference arc must be created, edited or selected, highlight this field and press . Next step For a description of the other pages refer to "33.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc Slopes" and "33.4.5 Defining Reference Line/Arc Shifts". Highlight Reference line or Reference arc and press to access Manage Reference Lines/Manage Reference Arcs. Viva Series, Reference Line 787 Manage Reference Lines/Manage Reference Arcs Apart from the screen name the appearance of the screen and the functionality of the softkeys is the same for reference lines and arcs. OK To select the highlighted reference line/arc and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a reference line/arc. The fields are the same as for manually creating a reference line/arc. Refer to "33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc". Edit.. To edit a reference line/arc. The fields are the same as for manually creating a reference line/arc. "33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc". Delete To delete a reference line/arc. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Name Names of all the reference lines/arcs available in the control job. Date Date that the reference line/arc was created. Viva Series, Reference Line 788 Viva Series, Reference Line 789 33.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc Slopes Description It is possible to measure points and stake points on slopes related to a reference line/arc. A slope can be defined and cut/fill values can then be displayed to the slope when measuring along the reference line/arc. The slope is a plane from the reference line/arc and extends along the length of the reference line/arc. Slopes can be used when, measuring to a reference line/arc, staking a point relative to a reference line/arc, or performing a grid stakeout relative to a reference line/arc. Reference Line To Use/ Reference Arc To Use, Slope page OK To confirm the selections and to return to the previous screen. Info.. To edit the screen page which will be displayed for slopes. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit Reference Line application. Description of fields Field Option Description Define & use slope Check box Check to define a slope. Slope direction Viva Series, Reference Line The method how the slope is created. 790 Field Option Description Left down Creates a downward plane extending to the left of the defined reference line/arc. Right down Creates a downward plane extending to the right of the defined reference line/arc. Left up Creates an upward plane extending to the left of the defined reference line/arc. Right up Creates an upward plane extending to the right of the defined reference line/arc. Slope grade Editable field Inclination of the slope. Horizontal offset to hinge Editable field Horizontal offset from the line/arc that sets where the slope starts. Vertical offset to hinge Editable field Vertical offset from the line/arc that sets where the slope starts. Next step Info.. to edit the screen page. Slope Information to Show Description of all values which can be displayed on the Slope screen page Field Antenna height Description To enter the antenna height. Chainage Displays the current chainage. Current slope Displays the current slope of the target position to the hinge. Viva Series, Reference Line 791 Field Description Design slope Displays the slope grade as defined by the user. Easting Displays the Easting coordinate of the current target position. Elevation Displays the Height value of the current target position. Line space full Insert full line space. Line space half Insert half line space. Northing Displays the Northing coordinate of the current target position. Point ID To enter the point ID. Quality 2D Display only field for the current 2D coordinate quality of computed position. Quality 3D Display only field for the current 3D coordinate quality of computed position. RTK positions Display only field for the number of positions recorded over the period of point measurement. Appears in the survey screen page of real-time rover configurations. SD to hinge Displays the slope distance offset from the hinge to measured point. SD to line Displays the slope distance offset from line/arc to measured point. Slope cut/fill Displays the value of the difference between the actual target elevation to the slope elevation at that position. A cut is above the slope. A fill is below the slope. Start chainage Displays the starting chainage as defined by the user. Target height Viva Series, Reference Line To enter the target height. 792 Field Description ∆ end of line/arc Displays the horizontal distance from the end point of the line/arc to the base point of the measured point, along the line/arc. ∆ ht hinge Displays the delta height from the current position to the hinge. ∆ ht line Displays the delta height from the current position to the line/arc. ∆ line/arc Displays the horizontal distance from the start point of the line/arc to the base point of the measured point, along the line/arc. ∆ offset Displays the perpendicular offset from the line/arc to measured point. ∆ offset hinge Displays the perpendicular offset from the hinge to measured point. Viva Series, Reference Line 793 33.4.5 Defining Reference Line/Arc Shifts Description A reference line can be offset, shifted and rotated, a reference arc can be offset. Diagram Reference line shifts P1c P1a P1 P1b P1d P0a d1 GS_018 Viva Series, Reference Line d2 P0 P0c d3 P0b P0 P1 P0a P1a P0b P1b P0c Start point End point Start point with Height offset End point with Height offset Start point with Shift line left/right End point with Shift line left/right Start point with Shift line forward/back P1c End point with Shift line forward/back P1d End point with Rotate line d1 Height offset d2 Shift line left/right d3 Shift line forward/back α Rotate line 794 P2c P2a P2 P2b P2d P0 d1 P1a d2 TS_024 Viva Series, Reference Line P1 P1c d3 P1b P0 P1 P2 P1a P2a P1b P2b P1c Instrument station Start point End point Start point with Height offset End point with Height offset Start point with Shift line left/right End point with Shift line left/right Start point with Shift line forward/back P2c End point with Shift line forward/back P2d End point with Rotate line d1 Height offset d2 Shift line left/right d3 Shift line forward/back α Rotate line 795 Reference arc shifts P1a P1b d2 r2 r1 P1 P0b P0a P0 P1 P0a P1a P0b P1b d1 d2 r1 r2 Start point End point Start point with Height offset End point with Height offset Start point with Shift arc left/right End point with Shift arc left/right Height offset Shift arc left/right Radius before shift Radius after shift P0 P1 P2 P1a P2a P1b P2b d1 d2 r1 r2 Instrument station Start point End point Start point with Height offset End point with Height offset Start point with Shift arc left/right End point with Shift arc left/right Height offset Shift arc left/right Radius before shift Radius after shift d1 P0 GS_019 P2a P2b d2 r1 P1b P1a d1 P0 TS_025 Viva Series, Reference Line P1 r2 P2 796 Reference Line To Use/ Reference Arc To Use, Line shifts page OK To confirm the selections and to return to the previous screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit Reference Line application. Description of fields Field Option Shift line Check box Check to define an offset. Shift line left/right or Shift arc left/right Editable field Distance to offset the reference line/arc horizontally to the left or right. When an offset is applied to an arc the radius of the arc changes. Shift line forward/back Editable field Available for lines unless Height to use: Reference line in Choose Control Job. Distance to shift the reference line horizontally forward or back. Vertical shift Editable field Available for Height to use: Start point and Height to use: Reference line. The vertical offset of the reference line/arc. Viva Series, Reference Line Description ) 797 Field Option Description Rotate line Editable field Available for lines unless Height to use: Reference line in Choose Control Job. Angle by which to rotate the reference line. DTM Offset Editable field Available for Height to use: DTM. The vertical offset of the DTM model. Viva Series, Reference Line 798 33.5 Measuring to a Reference Line/Arc Description The horizontal and vertical position and the chainage of a manually measured point can be calculated relative to the defined reference line/arc. Measure to line - horizontal measurements P1 d3 d5 P3 d1 d2 P0 GS_020 Viva Series, Reference Line d4 P2 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ offset ∆ line ∆ end of line Check Dist 1 Check Dist 2 799 P2 d3 d5 P4 d1 d2 P3 d4 P0 TS_026 P1 Measure to line vertical measurements P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Instrument station Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ offset ∆ line ∆ end of line Check Dist 1 Check Dist 2 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Start point End point Measured point Reference point Temporary point Horizontal base point ∆ ht line ∆ perp dist ∆ spatial dist ∆ ht start of line ∆ perp height P1 P3 d3 P4 d2 d5 P5 P2 d1 d4 P0 GS_021 Viva Series, Reference Line 800 P2 P4 P5 d2 d3 d5 P6 d4 P1 P0 TS_027 Measure to arc - horizontal measurements P3 d1 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Instrument station Start point End point Measured point Reference point Temporary point Horizontal base point ∆ ht line ∆ perp dist ∆ spatial dist ∆ ht start of line ∆ perp height P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ offset ∆ arc ∆ end of arc Check Dist 1 Check Dist 2 Target point inside arc d3 d2 P3 P1 d1 d4 P0 GS_022 Viva Series, Reference Line P2 d5 801 d3 P4 d2 P2 d5 d1 d4 P3 P1 P0 TS_028 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Instrument station Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ offset ∆ arc ∆ end of arc Check Dist 1 Check Dist 2 P0 p1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ offset ∆ arc ∆ end of arc Check Dist 1 Check Dist 2 Target point outside arc d3 d2 P1 d5 P0 d4 P3 d1 P2 GS_023 Viva Series, Reference Line 802 d3 d2 P2 d5 d4 P1 P4 d1 P3 P0 TS_029 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Instrument station Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ offset ∆ arc ∆ end of arc Check Dist 1 Check Dist 2 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ ht start of line ∆ ht arc Measure to arc vertical measurements P1 P3 P2 d2 P0 GS_024 Viva Series, Reference Line d1 803 P2 P4 P3 d2 d1 P0 TS_030 Measure Points, Ref Line/Ref Arc page P1 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 d2 Instrument station Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ ht start of line ∆ ht arc An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used. Meas To start measuring the point being staked. The key changes to Stop. The difference between the current position and the point being staked is still displayed. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Viva Series, Reference Line 804 Stop To end measuring the point being staked. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The position mode icon changes to the moving icon. The key changes to Store. Store To store the measured point. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General page, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. Line.. To define/select a reference line/arc. Stake.. To define reference line offsets to be staked out in relation to the reference line. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Available when Meas is displayed. Refer to "33.3 Configuring Reference Line". Viva Series, Reference Line 805 Fn Conect and Fn Disco To dial the number of the base station configured in the active working style and to hang up immediately after the survey is completed. Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for real-time devices of type digital cellular phone or modem. Available when Auto connect when measuring is not checked in RTK Rover Settings, General page. Fn Init To select an initialisation method and to force a new initialisation. Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for working styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to "44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations". Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. The fields available depend on the options chosen for Height to use in Choose Control Job and the Reference line task selected in Reference Line Startup. The following fields are always available: Viva Series, Reference Line 806 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list The point ID of the point to be measured. Antenna height Editable field The default antenna height. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. Target height Editable field The last used target height is suggested. An individual target height can be typed in. ∆ offset Display only Perpendicular offset from the reference line/arc measured from the reference point to the measured point. For reference arcs, ∆ offset, ∆ arc and ∆ end of arc values are always calculated to produce the smallest ∆ offset possible. To ensure the smallest ∆ offset possible, the arc will be extended if necessary. Refer to paragraph "Measure to arc - horizontal measurements". Chainage Display only Chainage of the current position along the line/arc. This value is the chainage of the start of the reference line/arc plus ∆ line/∆ arc. Check Dist 1 Display only Horizontal distance from start point to measured point. Viva Series, Reference Line 807 Field Option Description Check Dist 2 Display only Horizontal distance from end point to measured point. For task Measure to line Description of fields Field Option Description ∆ line Display only Horizontal distance along the reference line from the start point to the reference point. ∆ end of line Display only Horizontal distance along the reference line from the end point to the reference point. For task Measure to arc Description of fields Field Option Description ∆ arc Display only Horizontal distance along the reference arc from the start point to the reference point. ∆ end of arc Display only Horizontal distance along the reference arc from the reference point to the end point. Viva Series, Reference Line 808 For task Measure to line/Measure to arc, Height to use: Start point and Allow design height of point to be edited is not checked in the Configuration Heights page. Description of fields Field Option ∆ ht start of line Display only Elevation Display only Description Height difference between the start point and the measured point. Height of measured point. For task Measure to line, Height to use: Reference line and Allow design height of point to be edited is not checked in the Configuration Heights page. Description of fields Field Option Description ∆ ht line Display only Height difference between the temporary point on the reference line and the measured point. Elevation Display only Height of measured point. ∆ perp dist Display only Slope distance between the reference point and the measured point, perpendicular to the reference line. ∆ perp height Display only Slope distance between the reference point and the horizontal base point. ∆ spatial dist Display only Slope distance between the start point and the reference point. Viva Series, Reference Line 809 For task Measure to arc, Height to use: Reference line and Allow design height of point to be edited is not checked in the Configuration Heights page. Description of fields Field Option Description ∆ ht arc Display only Height difference between the reference point on the arc and the measured point. Elevation Display only Height of measured point. For task Measure to line, Height to use: DTM and Allow design height of point to be edited is not checked in the Configuration Heights page. Description of fields Field Option Description ∆ ht DTM Display only Height difference between the measured point and the DTM. Elevation Display only Height of measured point. For any task and height type and Allow design height of point to be edited is checked in the Configuration Heights page. Description of fields Field Option Description Design Ht Editable field The design height of the target point can be entered. ∆ ht design Display only Height difference between the Design Ht: and the height of the measured point. Viva Series, Reference Line 810 Next step Page changes to the Map page. Displayed is • the horizontal distance or chainage along the reference line/arc from the start point to the reference point. • the perpendicular offset from the reference line/arc measured from the reference point to the measured point. Viva Series, Reference Line 811 33.6 Staking to a Reference Line/Arc Description Allows for the position of a point to be defined relative to a reference line/arc and then staked. Stake to line - horizontal measurements P1 P3 d1 P2 d2 GS_003 P0 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 Start point End point Target point Reference point Offset Dist along line P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 d2 Instrument station Start point End point Target point Reference point Offset Dist along line P2 P4 d2 P0 TS_031 Viva Series, Reference Line P1 d1 P3 812 Stake to line - vertical measurements P1 P2 P3 d2 d1 P0 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 GS_025 Start point End point Target point Reference point Height offset, for Height to use: Start point Vertical shift, for Height to use: Reference line P2 P4 P3 d2 P0 P1 TS_032 Viva Series, Reference Line d1 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 d2 Instrument station Start point End point Target point Reference point Height offset, for Height to use: Start point Vertical shift, for Height to use: Reference line 813 Stake to arc - horizontal measurements P1 P3 d1 P2 d2 P0 GS_004 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 Start point End point Target point Reference point Offset Along arc P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 d2 Instrument station Start point End point Target point Reference point Offset Along arc P2 P4 d1 P3 d2 P1 TS_033 Viva Series, Reference Line P0 814 Stake to arc - vertical measurements P1 P3 P2 d2 d1 P0 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 Start point End point Target point Reference point Vertical shift, for Height to use: Start point P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 Instrument station Start point End point Target point Reference point Vertical shift, for Height to use: Start point GS_024 P2 P4 P3 d2 d1 P0 TS_030 Viva Series, Reference Line P1 815 Define Point to Stake This screen is for typing in the stakeout values for a point relative to the reference line/arc. The fields available depend on the options chosen for Height to use in Choose Control Job and the Reference line task selected in Reference Line Startup. The following fields are always available: The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid in all cases. OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Line.. To define/select a reference line/arc. Survy.. To measure a point relative to the reference line/arc. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Available when Meas is displayed. Refer to "33.3 Configuring Reference Line". Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Reference Line 816 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The point ID of the target point to be staked. Offset Editable field The offset from the reference point to the target point. Dist along line Editable field Available for Reference line task: Stake to line. Horizontal distance from the start point to the reference point along the reference line. Along arc Editable field Available for Reference line task: Stake to arc. Horizontal distance from the start point to the reference point along the reference arc. Chainage Editable field Chainage along the line/arc. This value is the chainage of the start of the reference line/arc plus Dist along line/Along arc. Height offset Editable field Available when Allow height of point being staked to be edited is not checked unless Height to use: DTM. The height offset of the target point. Viva Series, Reference Line • For Height to use: Start point The height of the target point is calculated as the height of the start point plus Height offset. • For Height to use: Reference line The height of the target point is calculated as the height of the reference point plus Height offset. 817 Field Option Description Design height Editable field Available when Allow height of point being staked to be edited is checked. The design height of the target point. • For Height to use: Start point The suggested height is the height of the start point. • For Height to use: Reference line The suggested height is the height of the reference point. Next step OK to accept changes and continue to Stakeout. Refer to "42.4 Staking Out". Viva Series, Reference Line 818 33.7 Gridstaking to a Reference Line/Arc Description A grid can be defined relative to a reference line/arc and points staked out in that defined grid. Stake grid from line Start at Begin P1 d1 P0 GS_026 Viva Series, Reference Line d3 d2 P0 P1 d1 d2 d3 Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line 819 P2 d1 P1 d3 d2 P0 TS_034 P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 Instrument station Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line P0 P1 d1 d2 d3 Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line Current Grid Pt P1 d1 P0 GS_027 Viva Series, Reference Line d3 d2 820 P2 d1 P1 d3 d2 P0 TS_035 Stake grid from arc P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 Instrument station Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line P0 P1 d1 d2 d3 Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line Start at Begin P1 d3 d1 GS_028 Viva Series, Reference Line P0 d2 821 P2 d2 d3 d1 P1 P0 TS_036 P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 Instrument station Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line P0 P1 d1 d2 d3 Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line Current Grid Pt P1 d2 d3 d1 GS_029 Viva Series, Reference Line P0 822 P2 d3 d2 d1 P1 P0 TS_037 Define Grid to be Staked P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 Instrument station Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Line.. To return to the Reference Line To Use/Reference Arc To Use screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Available when Meas is displayed. Refer to "33.3 Configuring Reference Line". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Reference Line 823 Description of fields Field Option Description Distance along Editable field line to first grid point Distance along the reference line/arc from the start point to the first target point to be staked. Chainage Editable field Chainage of the first target point to be staked along the line/arc. This value is the chainage of the start of the reference line/arc plus the Distance along line to first grid point. Grid spacing along line Editable field Spacing between points on the grid line. Grid spacing across line Editable field Spacing between grid lines. Method by which the grid will be staked out. Stake next grid line In same direction Each new grid line is started at the same end as where the previous grid line started. In reverse direction Each new grid line is started at the same end as where the previous grid line finished. Determines the format of the point ID for grid points. Store point using Grid reference Viva Series, Reference Line Point ID is shown as the position of the grid being staked, where +yyy.yy is the chainage position along the grid line, and +xxx.xx is the grid line offset. 824 Field Option Description Pt ID template The point ID template as defined in the active working style is used. The point ID template can be defined in Main Menu: User\Work settings. Next step OK to accept changes and continue to the stakeout screen. Stake +yyy.yy +xxx.xx The title of this screen indicates the position of the grid being staked, where +yyy.yy is the chainage position along the grid line, and +xxx.xx is the grid line offset. The functionality of this screen is similar to the Stakeout screen. Differences between the two screens are outlined here. Refer to paragraph "42.4 Staking Out" for all other key and field explanations. Skip To skip the currently displayed chainage and increment to the next chainage. Available when Meas is displayed. Line+ To start staking the next grid line. The position of the first point on the new line is determined by the option selected for Stake next grid line. Available when Meas is displayed. Viva Series, Reference Line 825 Description of fields Field Option First field on the Editable field screen Elevation Display only Description The point ID of the grid point to be staked. The point ID is based on the selection for Store point using in Define Grid to be Staked. If a different point ID is typed in, the next point ID will still be shown as the next automatically computed point ID. Available when Allow height of point being staked to be edited is not checked in the configuration. The orthometric height of the current position is displayed. If the orthometric height cannot be displayed, the local ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to display the local ellipsoidal height, the WGS 1984 height is displayed. Design Ht Editable field Available when Allow height of point being staked to be edited is checked in the configuration. The design height, which is the orthometric height of the target point to be staked, is displayed. If the orthometric height cannot be displayed, the local ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to display the local ellipsoidal height, the WGS 1984 height is displayed. If a design height has been entered and Skip or Line+ is used, the true grid height for the next point is shown as the suggested height. Viva Series, Reference Line 826 Next step Page changes to the Map page. Displayed is • the horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked. • the height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be staked. Viva Series, Reference Line 827 33.8 Staking to Alignment 33.8.1 Overview Description The reference line task Stake alignment allows points to be staked relative to an alignment. This option uses line and area data from CAD as simply as possible. Preparing the data Line data can be created by one of the following methods: Method Description Data from CAD Selecting the alignments in the drawing that you want to stake in the field and saving them into a DXF file. Manually creating lines with existing points In some cases, DXF files are not available to create lines and areas. If so, the lines can be created from uploaded points using the line management function. Refer to "5.4.3 Editing a Line/Area". Measuring lines in the field It is also possible to create the lines to be staked by measuring points in the field. Lines can be made using the linework commands in the Survey page. Also, taking measurements with line objects open as well using the Data, Lines page or line codes can create lines. Any line that is listed in the Data, Lines page can be used for staking in this application. Using Design to Field Using the Design to Field tool of LEICA Geo Office, the user is able to bring in lines from multitudes of formats. For example, XML, DXF, Microstation XML and many more. Refer to LGO Online Help for information on Design to Field. Viva Series, Reference Line 828 Method Description Using Alignment Editor Using the Alignment Editor application, a simple centerline alignment can be created and be imported in Stake alignment. Only straight and curve elements are supported. The alignment created with the Alignment Editor application has to be converted to a RoadRunner Job. ) Creating Lines in LGO Options to convert the DXF file to a job ) It is possible as well to create the necessary lines in LGO. Refer to LGO Online Help. To help with the electronic transfer of lines, from the plans to the surveying instrument, different tools have been created to read DXF format into a SmartWorx Viva job. DXF Import: Copy the DXF files to the \Data directory on the data storage device of the Viva Series instrument. Once the card is back in the instrument the DXF import program can be used to bring the lines into the job. Design to Field: This module is included in LEICA Geo Office and allows the conversion of DXF files into a SmartWorx Viva job. This method makes the task of transferring several lines into a single job quick and efficient. Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device" for the placements of the data files on the data storage device. Viva Series, Reference Line 829 33.8.2 Accessing Staking an Alignment & Choosing an Alignment Access step-by-step Select the task Stake alignment in Reference Line Startup and press OK. Choose Alignment OK To select the highlighted alignment and to continue with the subsequent screen. Rprt.. To view an alignment report. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Available when Meas is displayed. Refer to "33.3 Configuring Reference Line". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Choose alignment Selectable list The alignment to use. Height to use Reference line Heights are computed along the reference line/arc. Start point Heights are computed relative to the height of the starting point. DTM The stakeout height is computed from the DTM being used. Viva Series, Reference Line 830 Next step Rprt.. to access Alignment Report. Alignment Report, Points page Lines can be either 2D or 3D depending on the input data and are shown as such. OK To return to the screen from which this screen was accessed. Edit.. To edit details of the highlighted point. Save.. To save the alignment report. More To change the values displayed between Msd offset, Cut/fill, Msd elevation, Design elevation, Point ID and Pt code. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Viva Series, Reference Line 831 33.8.3 Stake Parameters Description This screen allows defining operating parameters while the Coords and Map pages allow validating the points to be staked. Access OK in Choose Alignment. Stake, Parameters page Viva Series, Reference Line OK To accept the parameters and to continue with the subsequent screen. Rprt.. To view an alignment report. ChTo decrease the chainage value, down chainage, by the defined chainage interval Chainage incremnt. Ch+ To increase the chainage value, up chainage, by the defined chainage interval Chainage incremnt. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn BOP To return the chainage value to the beginning of the project. Fn EOP To send the chainage value to the end of project. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 832 Description of fields Field Option Description Alignment name Display only The name of the selected alignment. Start chainage Display only The beginning chainage of the line. The start chainage can be edited from Line Selection, Lines page with Edit... ) Length Display only The length of the line. End chainage Display only The chainage of the end of the line. Chainage Editable field The chainage to be staked initially. Any chainage can be entered. Offset Editable field The distance to stake off the line. Any value between -2000 m and 2000 m can be entered. Vertical shift Editable field To shift the line vertically. The best example of the use of this feature is a situation where all grades of the line are finish grade, but the stakes are set referenced to subgrade. Chainage incremnt Editable field The interval at which chainages will be staked. Incrementing begins from Chainage. Next step Page changes to the Coords page. This page allows validation of the coordinate values of the point to be staked. Viva Series, Reference Line 833 Page changes to the Map page. This page allows visualisation of the position of the points. Top line shows the current horizontal geometry as well as any horizontal or vertical key points. Viva Series, Reference Line 834 33.8.4 Staking Operation Description Once in the Stakeout screens, the user is guided to reach design positions. Basic rules for polyline stakeout P3’ P4’ P5 P2’ P4 P2 P1’ P5’ P3 P6’ P1 P6 P7 SYS13_010 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 BOP - Beginning of project PC - Beginning of curve RP - Radius point PT - End of curve PI - Point of intersection AP - Angle point EOP - End of project a) b) c) d) e) General terms: Curve - Curve segment Extension - Line extension MCP - Mid curve point Straight - Straight segment Viva Series, Reference Line P1’ P2’ P3’ P4’ P5’ P6’ P7’ P8’ P7’ P8’ BOP - Beginning of project PC - Beginning of curve PI - Point of intersection PT - End of curve AP-B - Angle point, back tangent BP - Bisected point AP-F - Angle point, forward tangent EOP - End of project 835 Access OK in Stake. Stakeout, Stake page The functionality of this screen is similar to the Stakeout screen. Differences between the two screens are outlined here. Refer to paragraph "42.4 Staking Out" for all other key and field explanations. ChTo decrease the chainage value, down chainage, by the defined chainage interval Chainage incremnt. Ch+ To increase the chainage value, up chainage, by the defined chainage interval Chainage incremnt. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Pt Editable field The point ID of the point to be staked. hA Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Viva Series, Reference Line 836 Field Option Description Hr Editable field The last used target height as defined is suggested. An individual target height can be typed in. Ch Editable field The current chainage to be staked. Of Editable field Current offset being staked. ME Display only Measured elevation. The orthometric height of the current position is displayed. DE Display only Design elevation. The orthometric height of the point to be staked is displayed. Next step Page changes to the Details page. Stakeout, Details page This page shows a live version of more information regarding the staked point. Description of fields Field Option Description Pt Editable field Point ID of the point being staked. Antenna height Editable field The height of the antenna. Target height Editable field The height of the target. Design Chainage Editable field Msd chainage Display only The chainage of the current position. Design offset Editable field The design offset to be staked. Viva Series, Reference Line The design chainage to be staked. 837 Field Option Description Msd offset Display only The offset of the current position from the alignment. Design elevation Editable field The design elevation, which is the orthometric height of the point to be staked, is displayed. Msd elevation Display only The height of the current position. Cut/Fill Display only The height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be staked. Fill Display only The positive height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be staked. Move up. Go forward Display only The horizontal distance along the line defined by station and reflector from the current position to the point to be staked. Go back Display only The horizontal distance in reverse direction from the line defined by station and reflector from the current position to the point to be staked. Go right Display only The direction depends on the selection for Navigate direction in Configuration, General page. The horizontal distance orthogonal to the right of the line defined by station and reflector from the current position to the point to be staked. Viva Series, Reference Line 838 Field Option Description Go left Display only The direction depends on the selection for Navigate direction in Configuration, General page. The horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked orthogonal to the left of the line defined by station and reflector. Measured slope Display only The slope between the current position and the alignment. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Viva Series, Reference Line 839 33.8.5 Results of Stakeout Access This screen opens automatically once a point is measured and stored Results, General page OK To return to the Stake screen. Elev.. To add a vertical offset to the design height and to display the new height. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The point ID of the point staked. Msd chainage Display only The chainage measured at the staked point. Msd offset Display only The offset from the alignment measured at the staked point. Design elevation Display only The entered design elevation. Msd elevation Display only The height measured at the staked point. Viva Series, Reference Line 840 Field Option Description Cut/Fill Display only The height difference between the Design elevation and the Msd elevation. Annot 1 Display only Fixed value recorded for certain software packages. Annot 2 to Annot 4 Editable field Available for additional notes. Next step Page changes to the Coords page. This page displays the design coordinates as well as the differences between design and measured coordinates. Page changes to the Code where codes can be selected or typed in. Page changes to the Map page. This page provides an interactive display of the data. Viva Series, Reference Line 841 34 Reference Plane 34.1 Overview Description The Reference Plane application can be used to measure points relative to a reference plane. A reference plane can also be scanned in a predefined grid. Reference plane tasks The Reference Plane application can be used for the following tasks: • Measuring points to calculate and store the perpendicular distance to the plane. • Viewing and storing the instrument and/or local coordinates of the measured points. • Viewing and storing the height difference from the measured points to the plane. • ) ) Scanning a defined area. Planes can only be computed with grid coordinates. Face scan is available for motorised instruments with reflectorless EDM. Activating the application The Reference Plane application must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "24.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to activate the application. Properties of measured points The properties stored with measured points are: • • Class: Either Meas or for point was measured. Sub class: • • Viva Series, Reference Plane also Nav depending on the position status when the Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed. • TPS Source: • Ref Plane (Meas) 842 • Defining a reference plane • for Scan: Ref Plane (Scan) Instrument source: GPS or TPS Reference planes are created using a right hand system. For two points defining a plane, a vertical plane is used. A reference plane is defined with the X axis and the Z axis of the plane. The Y axis of the plane defines the positive direction of the plane. A reference plane can be defined in the following ways: • vertical • tilted • horizontal P1 P3 P4 P2 P5 GS_058 Viva Series, Reference Plane P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Point Point Point Point Point defining defining defining defining defining reference reference reference reference reference plane plane plane plane plane 843 P3 P4 P1 P2 P5 P0 TS_039 ) Tilted plane P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Instrument station Point defining reference plane Point defining reference plane Point defining reference plane Measured point Measured point • : The Reference Plane application is applicable for tilted and horizontal plane definitions. • : The Reference Plane application is applicable for tilted, horizontal and vertical plane definitions. Any number of points define the plane. The axes of the tilted reference plane are: X axis: Z axis: Y axis: ) For Viva Series, Reference Plane Horizontal and parallel to the plane Defined by steepest direction of the plane Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis. : 844 Z a Z a Y X P1 P1 X Y b GS_059 For b GS_060 : a a Z Z Y X P1 X P1 Y TS_041 Viva Series, Reference Plane b TS_041a b 845 a b N P1 X Y Z Horizontal plane Height Easting Northing Origin of plane X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane The axes of the horizontal reference plane are: X axis: Z axis: Y axis: ) For Horizontal and parallel to the plane Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined Parallel to the plane Offsets are applied in the direction of the Z axis. : Z Z a a Y P1 X X P1 Y GS_114 Viva Series, Reference Plane b GS_115 b 846 a b N P1 X Y Z Height Easting Northing Origin of plane X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane For : a a Z Z Y P1 X X P1 P2 TS_066 a b N P1 P2 X Y Z Viva Series, Reference Plane b Y TS_066a P2 b Height Easting Northing Origin of plane Point of plane X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane 847 Vertical plane The axes of the vertical reference plane are: X axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane; X axis starts in point defined as origin point Parallel to the instrument zenith and parallel to the plane Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis. Z axis: Y axis: ) a a Z Y P1 TS_040 a b N P1 P2 X Y Z Viva Series, Reference Plane Z P2 P2 X X b P1 Y TS_040a b Height Easting Northing Origin of plane Point of plane X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane 848 ) With four or more points, a least squares adjustment is calculated resulting in a best fit plane. Origin The origin of the reference plane can be defined to be in the plane coordinates or in relation to the national coordinate system. Positive direction of plane The positive direction of the plane is defined by the direction of the Y axis. The direction of the Y axis can be redefined by selecting a point on the desired side of the plane. Offset of the plane Z Z P2 d1 P2' Y d1 P1 X Y d2 X P1 TS_039 TS_038 P1 X Y Z d1 d2 Viva Series, Reference Plane Origin of plane X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane Positive offset Negative offset P1 P2 P2’ d1 X Y Z Origin of plane Point defining offset of plane P2 projected on original plane Offset defined by P2 X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane 849 34.2 Accessing Reference Plane Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\ Survey+\ Reference plane. Choose Task & Plane OK To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the reference plane. Refer to "34.5 Configuring Reference Plane". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Task Measure to plane The coordinates of measured points are calculated relative to the reference plane. Scan Measures a sequence of points along a vertical, tilted or horizontal face. Create new plane Defines a new reference plane. Select from job Reference plane is selected in Ref plane name. Plane to use Viva Series, Reference Plane 850 Field Option Description Ref plane name Selectable list Available for Plane to use: Select from job. The reference plane to be used. Accesses Manage Reference Planes. No. of points Display only Available for Plane to use: Select from job. Number of points used for plane definition for the plane shown in Ref plane name. Std deviation Display only Standard deviation of used points for plane definition. ----- is displayed for less than four points. Max ∆d Display only Maximum distance between a point and the calculated plane. ----- is displayed for less than four points. Offset Display only The offset method used as defined in New Reference Plane/Edit Reference Plane, Offset page. Origin Display only The origin method used as defined in New Reference Plane/Edit Reference Plane, Offset page. Next step IF THEN a new plane is to be created OK accesses New Reference Plane, General page. Refer to "34.3 Creating/Editing a Reference Plane". a new plane is to be selected open the selectable list for Ref plane name. Refer to "34.4 Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job". Viva Series, Reference Plane 851 IF THEN points are to be measured to a plane OK accesses Measure Points to Plane, Reference page. Refer to "34.6 Measuring Points to a Reference Plane". Viva Series, Reference Plane 852 34.3 Creating/Editing a Reference Plane Access • • In Choose Task & Plane, select Plane to use: Create new plane. Press OK. In Manage Reference Planes, press New.. or Edit... New Reference Plane, General page Store To compute and store the reference plane. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Ref plane name Editable field Description The name of the new reference plane. No. of points Display only Number of points used for plane definition. Std deviation Display only Standard deviation of used points for plane definition. ----- is displayed unless more than four points are used to define the plane. Viva Series, Reference Plane 853 Field Option Description Max ∆d Display only Maximum distance between measured point and defined plane. ----- is displayed unless more than four points are used to define the plane. Next step Page changes to the Points page. New Reference Plane, Points page • • • An * is shown to the right of the point for a point which will be used as origin of the plane. An ! is shown to the left of the point if the point is outside maximum distance between a point and the calculated plane as defined on the General page. The column Δd displays the perpendicular distance of the point from the definition of the plane. Store To compute and store the reference plane. +Point To add points from the working job to define the reference plane. Use To change between Yes and No in the Use for the highlighted point. Viva Series, Reference Plane 854 Delete To remove the highlighted point from the list. Survy.. To measure a point to be used for the plane. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Origin To use the highlighted point as the origin of the plane. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Page changes to the Origin page. New Reference Plane, Origin page Store To compute and store the reference plane. Survy.. Available when Point is highlighted. To measure a point to define the plane direction. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Reference Plane 855 Description of fields Field Option Description Use as origin Plane coordinates Point results are additionally stored with X, Y, Z coordinates based on the local plane coordinate system. Instrument coords Points on the plane are transformed into the national coordinate system. X coordinate Editable field Available for Use as origin: Plane coordinates. Enter local X coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as the projection of the measured point onto the calculated plane. Z coordinate Editable field Available for Use as origin: Plane coordinates. Enter local Z coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as the projection of the measured point onto the calculated plane. Point Selectable list Defines the direction of the Y axis. Next step Page changes to the Offset page. Viva Series, Reference Plane 856 New Reference Plane, Offset page Store To compute and store the reference plane. Survy.. Available when Offset pt ID is highlighted. To measure a point to define the offset point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Offset plane Selectable list An offset can be defined by a point or a distance. The defined plane is shifted along the Y axis by the offset. Offset pt ID Selectable list Available for Offset plane: Offset to a point. Point ID of offset point. Offset Display only Distance by which to offset the plane along the Y axis. For Offset plane: Offset by distance, the distance can be entered. For Offset plane: Offset to a point, the calculated distance to the adjusted plane is displayed. ----- if no values are available. Viva Series, Reference Plane 857 Next step Page changes to the Plot page. New Reference Plane, Plot page Points displayed depend on the settings in Configuration, Parameters page. Points defining the plane are displayed in black, the other points are displayed in grey. Select the Viva Series, Reference Plane icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane. 858 34.4 Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job Access In Choose Task & Plane, select Plane to use: Select from job. Highlight Ref plane name. Press ENTER. Manage Reference Planes OK To select the highlighted reference plane. New.. To create a new reference plane. Refer to "34.3 Creating/Editing a Reference Plane". Edit.. To edit the highlighted reference plane. Refer to "34.3 Creating/Editing a Reference Plane". Delete To delete the highlighted reference plane. More To display information about date and time of when the reference plane was created and the number of points defining the plane. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Reference Plane 859 34.5 Configuring Reference Plane Description Allows options to be set which are used within the Reference Plane application. These settings are stored within the working style. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\ Survey+\ Reference plane. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Parameters page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To edit the survey screen page currently being displayed. Available when a list item in Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "19.3 My Survey Screen" Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Reference Plane 860 Description of fields Field Option Description Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. Max +/- ∆d for Defining plane Editable field The maximum perpendicular deviation of a point from the calculated plane. Face scan Editable field This parameter defines the points displayed in the Plot and Map pages of the Reference Plane application in the plan view. Display Slice width The maximum perpendicular deviation of a measured point in face scan from defined plane. Scanned points outside the defined limit are not stored. All points Displays all points in the plan view. Pts within slice Displays points within the defined Slice width in the plan view. Editable field Available for Display: Pts within slice. This parameter defines the distance from the plane in which points are displayed. This distance is applied to both sides of the plane. If lines and areas are displayed in a Map page, then the parts of lines and areas that fall within the defined slice are also displayed. Viva Series, Reference Plane 861 Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Viva Series, Reference Plane 862 Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Reference Plane 863 34.6 Measuring Points to a Reference Plane Access In Choose Task & Plane select Task: Measure to plane. Press OK. Measure Points to Plane, Reference page Meas To start measuring the point. The key changes to Stop. The difference between the current position and the adjusted plane is displayed. Stop To end measuring the point. The key changes to Store. After ending the measurement, the differences between the measured point and the adjusted plane are displayed. Meas To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store the point information. Viva Series, Reference Plane 864 Cmpare To calculate offsets to previously measured points. Plane To edit the selected reference plane. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The number of the measured point. Target height Editable field The target height. Offset perp dist Display only The perpendicular distance between the measured point and the adjusted plane. Display only The vertical distance between the measured point and the adjusted plane. Offset ht X coordinate, Y Display only coordinate, Z coordinate Viva Series, Reference Plane For Use as origin: Plane coordinates. 865 Field Option Description Easting, Northing, Elevation Display only For Use as origin: Instrument coords. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Select the Viva Series, Reference Plane icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane. 866 34.7 Scanning a Plane Description Face Scan automates the process of measuring a sequence of points along the defined vertical, tilted or horizontal face. The boundaries of the window of interest and the increment values are defined by the user. Face scan can be run on motorised instruments with the option "reflectorless EDM" only. Diagram P1 d2 Known P1 First corner of plane P2 Second corner of plane d1 Horizontal grid spacing d2 Up slope grid spacing d1 P2 Unknown Grid point coordinates TS_042 Access In Choose Task & Plane, select Task: Scan. Press OK. Define Scanning Parameters Description of fields Field Option Description Horizontal Editable field For tilted and vertical planes. Horizontal grid distance. Viva Series, Reference Plane 867 Field Option Description Up slope Editable field Up slope grid distance. Start pt ID Editable field The point ID to start with. Pt ID Inc Editable field The incrementation used for Start pt ID. No point ID template used • • • For Start pt ID: RMS and Pt ID Inc: 10 the points are RMS, RMS10, RMS20, ..., RMS100, ... For Start pt ID: 100 and Pt ID Inc: 10 the points are 100, 110, ..., 200, 210, ... For Start pt ID: abcdefghijklmn89 and Pt ID Inc: 10 the points are abcdefghijklmn99, point ID incrementing fails. Scanning area Display only Size of the area to be scanned. Estimated points Display only Estimated number of points to be scanned. Next step Start to access Scanning Status. Viva Series, Reference Plane 868 Scanning Status, Scanning page Stop To stop the scanning of points. Pause To pause the scanning of points. Scan To continue scanning. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Points scanned Display only Points remaining Display only Points rejected Display only Description Number of points being scanned. Number of points remaining to be scanned. Number of skipped points. % completed Display only Percentage of points scanned. Time left Display only Estimated time remaining until scan is finished. Point ID Display only Point ID of last stored point. Viva Series, Reference Plane 869 Next step Page changes to the Plot page. Points currently scanned are displayed in black, previously measured points, lines and areas are displayed in grey. Select the Viva Series, Reference Plane icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane. 870 35 Roads - General 35.1 Overview ) Please be aware that the terminology or workflow used on different construction sites can vary from the one used in this manual. However, basic principles remain the same. Description Roads is an umbrella term for four subapplications. Name of subapplication Description Alignment Editor • • • Roads Viva Series, Roads - General Alignment Editor is an "add-on" component to the Roads application. It is only intended for quick and easy modification of existing alignments, or creation of new ones. Alignment Editor is not an onboard road planning and design application. This application supports the following alignment types: • Horizontal alignments • Vertical alignments • Cross section templates • Cross section assignments • Chainage equations This application is a free application provided by Leica Geosystems AG. If the application does not appear on your menu or you are otherwise unable to access it, please contact your Leica Geosystems AG representative. • This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of roads and other alignments. • It can be used with GPS and with total stations. 871 Name of subapplication Description Rail Viva Series, Roads - General • It consists of two main functions: • Roads - As built check for checking or measuring existing stringlines, cross slopes, slopes or surfaces and comparing the measurements against design data. • Roads - Stakeout for setting or staking out and adjusting road elements during construction using design data. • The data can be typed in manually by using the Alignment Editor or data created in a design package can be converted. The Design to Field component of LEICA Geo Office offers converters from several road design and CAD packages. • This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of railways and other alignments. • It can be used with GPS and with total stations. • It consists of two main functions: • Rail - As built check for checking or measuring an existing track and comparing the measurements against design data. • Rail - Stakeout for setting or staking out and adjusting track features during construction using design data. 872 Name of subapplication Description Tunnel Viva Series, Roads - General • Single track or multiple track designs can be imported for use with this application. • For horizontal and vertical alignments, the data can be typed in manually by using the Alignment Editor application or data created in a design package can be converted. • For multiple track designs, it is possible to define one centreline which is common to all tracks. • A superelevation table can be created for each track using the Rail Editor computer application. This application is part of the Design to Field component in LEICA Geo Office. • This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of tunnels. • It is for use with total stations only. • It consists of two main functions: • Tunnel - As built check for checking a built or excavated tunnel with a tunnel design. • Tunnel - Stakeout for setting out tunnel features during construction. • The centreline of the tunnel can be imported for use onboard the instrument using the industry standard LandXML data format. Alternatively the centreline can be imported in formats exported from many other tunnel design packages using the Design to Field component of the LEICA Geo Office. 873 Name of subapplication Description • ) Tunnel design profiles can be created using the Tunnel Profile Editor computer application. This application is integrated into the Design to Field component in LEICA Geo Office. Roads, Rail and Tunnel subapplications are licence protected. They can be activated through a licence key which is specific to the instrument. This licence key can be entered either through Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys or alternatively, the first time the program is started. Viva Series, Roads - General 874 35.2 Accessing Roads Applications Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads. Then select the subapplication required to access Job Selection. For the Alignment Editor, refer to "36.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor". Job Selection ) When the application is resumed, the last active selections are remembered and can be accessed again. This ability means the settings do not need to be reselected every time after turning off the instrument. Every job selection field displays only the jobs that are valid. OK To continue with the next screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - General 875 Description of fields Field Option Description Working job Selectable list The working job is where information generated in the field is recorded. All measurements, points and other values stored in the field are added to this job. This job determines the coordinate system. Road alignment Selectable list file Available for Road. Contain all the information about the road design. For example, the geometry of the line, the formation layer of the road or the information related to the construction of cuttings and embankments. The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX. The data is either typed in manually in the Alignment Editor application or converted from a road design package. For tunnel projects, all road design information for road data outside of the tunnel must be stored in the road job. The road job is a read-only source of information and cannot be selected as a working or control job. Rail job Viva Series, Roads - General Selectable list Available for Rail. Contains all the information about the rail design including the geometry of the centreline and the rail definition (superelevation). The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX. 876 Field Option Description The rail job is a read-only source of information and cannot be selected as a working or control job. Tunnel job Selectable list Available for Tunnel. Contains all the information about the tunnel design including the geometry of the centreline and the tunnel profile. The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX. The tunnel job is a read-only source of information. Use a control job Check box When this box is checked, a control job can be selected. Individual points of a control job can be staked out and set in relation to the alignment by using the Tools menu. Control job Selectable list The control job is the one control points are stored in. The control job holds all control point information needed in the field. For example, control points, points with known coordinates used for a TPS setup. ) Use a DTM Viva Series, Roads - General Check box The same job can be used as a working and control job. Available for Roads and Rail. When this box is checked, a DTM job can be selected. A DTM job holds DTM (Digital Terrain Model) or TIN (Triangular Irregular Network) data. The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX. 877 Field Option Description DTM Selectable list Available for Roads and Rail. Holds DTM (Digital Terrain Model) data or TIN (Triangular Irregular Network) data. The DTM job to be used must be stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory device. The DTM job is a read-only source of information and cannot be selected as a working or control job. ) If only a DTM job is selected, then only check measurements relative to the selected DTM layer can be done. Next step IF you want to continue with THEN refer to job management "35.4 Jobs & Design Data". configuration "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Roads "37 Roads - Road". Rail "38 Roads - Rail". Tunnel "39 Roads - Tunnel". Viva Series, Roads - General 878 35.3 Configuring Roads Applications 35.3.1 Configuration Settings Access In Job Selection press OK and then, depending on the subapplication Config.. or Fn Config... Configuration, Graphics page OK To confirm the changes and move to the previous screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option The reference direction used to stakeout points. The stakeout elements and the graphics displayed are based on this selection. Navigation direction Viva Series, Roads - General Description To alignment The stake out is relative to the alignment. To north The North direction shown in the graphical display based on the active coordinate system. 879 Field Option Description To sun The position of the sun calculated from the current position, the time and the date. To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point. If no points are yet staked, Navigation direction: To north is used for the first point to be staked. To point (cntrl job) A point from the control job is selected. Point ID Following arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current position to the point to be staked. The graphical display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of the point to be staked. From station The reference direction is from the station to the current position. To station The reference direction is from the current position to the station. Selectable list Available for Navigation direction: To point (cntrl job). To select the point or line to be used for orientation. The method of staking out. Navigate using Viva Series, Roads - General Direction & distance The direction from the orientation reference, the horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed. In/out, left/right The distance forwards to/backwards from the point, the distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is displayed. 880 Field Option Description Switch to bulls Check box eye when 0.5m from target When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is shown in the stakeout graphic when less than half a metre from the point being staked. Check box The instrument beeps when the distance from the current position to the point to be staked is equal to or less than defined in Start within. The closer the instrument is to the point to be staked the faster the beeps will be. Beep faster when getting close to point Distance to use Height, Horizontal Available when Beep faster when getting close to distance or Posi- point is checked. The type of distance to use for the tion & height stake beep. Start within Editable field Available when Beep faster when getting close to point is checked. The horizontal radial distance, from the current position to the point to be staked, when a beep is to be heard. Next step Page changes to the Design page. Viva Series, Roads - General 881 Configuration, Design page Description of fields Field Option Description Working corridor Editable field Valid offset range defined by the working corridor left and right of the centreline. If a measured point is further away from the working corridor distance, an error message is displayed. Refer to "35.7 Understanding Terms and Expressions" for more information on the working corridor. Show tangent points Check box When this box is checked, a message box is shown when a tangent point has been detected within the chainage increment range. This tangent point can be selected for stakeout. Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for further details. When this box is not checked, no tangent points are indicated. Available when Show tangent points is checked. Type Slope signs Viva Series, Roads - General Horizontal Indicates tangent points of the horizontal alignment only. Vertical Indicates tangent points of the vertical alignment only. Horizontal & vertical Indicates all tangent points. Available for Road only. Selects sign definition method for slopes and cross slopes. 882 Field Option Description Mathematical All slopes sign defines from left to right, independent of whether left or right of the centreline. + Road_054c Relative to CL + + Slope signs defined relative to the centreline. + Road_054a Relative from CL + + + Slope signs defined relative from the centreline. + + + Road_054b Available for Road only. To configure the warning handling for slope stakeout. This configuration allows the workflow of slope stakeout to be optimised. Extend slopes Yes (with warning) The slope is expanded beyond and above or below the hinge point. A warning is shown as soon as leaving the defined slope. Viva Series, Roads - General Yes The slope is expanded beyond and above or below the hinge point. No warning is when leaving the defined slope. No The slope is not expanded beyond and above or below the hinge point. 883 Field Option Description Extend lines Check box Extend each stringline at its beginning and end with a tangent. The extension is used for projecting a point to the stringline and for intersecting the stringline. Checked ) Intersection points on extended stringlines are not shown in cross-sections and cannot be staked out. a b c Road_094 a) Centreline b) Extended centreline c) Projected point on extended centreline Viva Series, Roads - General 884 Field Option Not checked Description ) This option is recommended when working with closed alignments (for example roundabout, slip road, motorway exit). a Road_095 b a) Centreline b) Projected point on centreline Next step IF you work with THEN Page changes to the Road Quality control page. Rail Rail design page. Tunnel Viva Series, Roads - General Tunnel design page. 885 Configuration, Rail design page Available for Rail only. Description of fields Field Option Nominal gauge Editable field Description Nominal distance between the active (internal) faces of the left and right rails. a b Rail_014 a) Superelevation base b) Nominal gauge Superelevatn base Editable field Superelevation Design Viva Series, Roads - General Distance over which the superelevation is to be applied. This distance normally corresponds to the distance between the rail axes. To use the superelevation values from the design. If these values don’t exist in the design, then all superelevation values are ignored. Manual To ignore all superelevation values from the design and to enter them manually. None All superelevation values are ignored. 886 Field Option Description CL height CL geometry The centreline height is taken from the alignment centreline. Rail interpolated The centreline height is interpolated between the left rail height and right rail height. Lower rail The height of the lower rail is used as centreline height. Check box Chainage calculation method when checking points of multiple tracks with respect to a chainage centreline. The direct measurement method is when the chainage is calculated by projecting the measured point directly onto the chainage centreline. The indirect measurement method is when the chainage is calculated by first projecting the measured point onto the track centreline, and then projecting the point onto the chainage centreline. Calculate chainage directly onto chainage centerline Viva Series, Roads - General 887 Field Option Description Checked Project measured point directly onto the chainage centreline. a f c b d Rail_010 a) b) c) d) e) f) Viva Series, Roads - General e Chainage centreline Track centreline Left rail Right rail Measured point Direct chainage 888 Field Option Description Not checked Project measured point onto track centreline and then make a second projection onto the chainage centreline. a f c g b d Rail_011 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Disable chainage centerline Viva Series, Roads - General Check box e Chainage centreline Track centreline Left rail Right rail Measured point Indirect chainage Measured point projected onto track centreline Only affecting multiple track designs. The defined chainage centreline is disabled and the track centreline is used for chainage calculations. 889 Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Configuration, Tunnel design page Available for Tunnel only. Description of fields Field Option Description Defines the direction in which the design profile is considered. The setting has an influence on the profile offset sign. Theoretical profile direction Clockwise The design profile is defined in a clockwise direction. In underbreak areas the profile offset values are negative where as in overbreak areas they are positive. Counter-clockwise The design profile is defined in a counter-clockwise direction. In underbreak areas the profile offset values are positive where as in overbreak areas they are negative. Profile definition Vertical Profiles are always defined as vertical. Tilted Profiles are always defined perpendicular to the vertical alignment of the tunnel axis. Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Viva Series, Roads - General 890 Configuration, Quality control page Description Especially when checking points in an as-built control or when staking out it is useful to enable the Quality control criteria available. For every point stored the chosen parameters are checked and if the check limits are exceeded a warning is shown. This function guarantees a higher productivity as it is no longer necessary to check the values for every shot taken. When checking layers of a road, a too thick layer results in higher costs as more material is used. Alternatively, a too thin layer can lead to problems and could cause serious damage. Therefore different check limits for above and below the design can be defined. Graphic a d b c e Road_087 a) b) c) d) e) Layer is too thick Design surface Layer is too thin Height limit ↑ Height limit ↓ Height limits below the design surface are entered as negative values (for example, the Height limit ↓ with -10 mm in the previous diagram). By using the signs of the height limits, it is also possible to cover situations like the one shown in the following diagram, with a valid range between -10 to -50 mm below the design surface. a b c Road_088 Viva Series, Roads - General a) Design surface b) Height limit ↑ c) Height limit ↓ 891 Description of fields Field Option Description Check deltas to point before storing Check box When this box is checked, a position check is done when storing a staked or checked point. When the defined tolerance is exceeded, the stake out/check can be repeated, skipped or stored. When this box is not checked, no quality check is done during stake out/check of points. ) Delta values Depending on this selection the following lines are enabled/disabled. Ch, offset & height Check for chainage, horizontal offset and height. Ch & offset Check for chainage and horizontal offset. Position & height Check for 2D position and height. Position Check for 2D position. Height Check for height. Profile Available for Tunnel. Check for distance from design profile. Chainage limit From 0.001 to 100 Maximum difference in chainage. Offset limit From 0.001 to 100 Maximum horizontal offset from defined position. Position tolerance From 0.001 to 100 Maximum radial horizontal distance. Viva Series, Roads - General 892 Field Option Description Height limit ↑ From -100 to +100 Maximum height difference. Height limit ↓ From -100 to +100 Maximum height difference. Profile tolerance From 0.001 to 100 Available for Tunnel. Permitted distance from design profile. Next step Page changes to the Info page. Configuration, Info page Two things can be configured on this page: 1) The required information for each stakeout and check method to be displayed on the Info page. Depending on the working method used on the construction site, different information is written on the stakes. The information to be written on the stake is displayed on the Info page. 2) If and which additional user-defined survey screen page is displayed. Viva Series, Roads - General 893 OK To confirm the changes and continue. Clear To clear all parameters from all lines. Default To set the default value for all lines. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Show additional page from My Survey Screen Check box The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in the stake or check screen. Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. Viva Series, Roads - General 894 Field Option Description Method Display only The method is based on the selected subapplication and, if available, the setting for Method to use. The settings in the following lines can only be changed for the current method. The method defines the parameters available to view on the Info page of the application. Different combinations of the parameters to view can be stored 1st line to 16th line Selectable list To modify the selection on any particular line, place the cursor on the line to modify using the arrow keys and press the ENTER key.Use the arrow keys to select the required parameter and press the ENTER key to confirm the choice. Define which parameters are viewed on each line. Up to 16 lines of parameters can be defined. The available parameters depending on the Method selected are explained separately: Viva Series, Roads - General • For Road Stringline, refer to "35.3.2 Road Stringline - Info Page". • For Road Individual stringline, refer to "35.3.3 Road Individual Stringline - Info Page". • For Road Cross slope, refer to "35.3.4 Road Cross Slope - Info Page". 895 Field Option Description • For Road Manual slope and Slope, refer to "35.3.5 Road Manual Slope and Slope - Info Page". • For Road Crown, refer to "35.3.6 Road Crown Info Page". • For Road Layer, refer to "35.3.7 Road Layer Info Page". • For Road DTM, refer to "35.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page". • For Rail refer to "35.3.9 Rail - Info Page". • For Tunnel refer to "35.3.10 Tunnel - Info Page". Next step Page changes to the TPS page. Page changes to the Report sheet page. Viva Series, Roads - General 896 Configuration, TPS page Description of fields Field Option Description Only update stakeout values when distance is measured Check box When this box is checked, angles and stakeout values are updated after a distance measurement. All values are then frozen until the next distance is taken. When Target aiming: Lock is selected and the instrument is locked onto a target the angular values do not change. When this box is not checked, angles are updated with telescope movement after a distance was measured. Turn to point Check box Available for Road and Rail and when Turn to point is checked. Turn to Position only Viva Series, Roads - General Available for Road and Rail. To make stake out of points even more efficient, a motorised instrument offers you the possibility to aim automatically at the stakeout position. The instrument positions horizontally in the direction of the point to stake out. 897 Field Option Description Position & height The instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point to stake out. The instrument only points to the correct position on the ground if the point to stake out has the same height as the natural surface. If the natural surface is higher than the point to stake out, the measured point would be closer than the stakeout point. If the natural surface is lower than the point, the measured point would be further away. With Position & measure, the possibility of iterative positioning using the auto position, this problem can be avoided. b a c Road_071 a) Point to stake out, defined with 3D coordinates b) Position if natural surface is higher than point to stake out c) Position if natural surface is lower than point to stake out Position & measure Viva Series, Roads - General Allows the instrument to aim at a 2D position. As the natural surface height is unknown the correct position is calculated via iterations. 898 Field Option Description ) Depending on the settings chosen for Red laser pointer the instrument will turn on the red laser as soon as the position is found. The first position (b) the instrument points to is defined by the 2D coordinates (a) of the point to stake out ( = horizontal direction) and the current vertical angle. Therefore, aim the instrument at the approximate position of the point to stake out.The measured 2D position is compared with the stakeout position to determine a new position (c) to aim at. As no information about the natural surface is available, a point at the same height as the measured position is calculated. The new position (d) is measured and compared again with the point to stake out (a).This iteration process runs until the tolerances defined for the stakeout are reached. Viva Series, Roads - General 899 Field Option Description a f d e b c a d e b c Road_064 a) 2D position to stake out b) First position measured defined by 2D coordinates and current vertical angle c) New position calculated based on height of b d) Second position measured e) New position calculated base on height of d. The measured position for this point is within the defined tolerance, the correct position is found. Viva Series, Roads - General 900 Field Option Description Prompt before turn The method how the instrument turns is not fixed but is selected when pressing Positn. Additionally to the three methods listed above, an option allowing the instrument to find the height on the peg is available: a c b Road_072 a) Peg placed at the correct position b) First height, manually chosen direction c) Required height on the peg Position limit From 0.001 to 10 Maximum permitted radial horizontal distance. Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt before turn. Height limit From 0.001 to 10 Maximum height difference. Available for Road and Rail. Chainage limit From 0.001 to 10 Chainage tolerance of the position to stake out. Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt before turn. Viva Series, Roads - General 901 Field Option Description Offset limit From 0.001 to 10 Maximum horizontal offset from defined position. Available for Road and Rail. Defines when the visible red laser beam is turned on during the automatic search of the position. Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt before turn. Red laser pointer Always off Visible red laser is turned off. On at point only Visible red laser is turned on as soon as the point is found. Always on Visible red laser is turned on during the whole search. The laser can also be permanently turned on by using the instrument settings. Refer to "10.6 Lights" for more information. ) Max iterations From 2 to 10 Maximum number of iterations for the distance measurement before stopping. Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt before turn. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Viva Series, Roads - General 902 Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Roads - General 903 35.3.2 Road Stringline - Info Page Description This info page is used for staking and checking Road stringlines. Available fields e b f d c a Road_043 a) b) c) d) e) f) Stringline to stake out Centreline Strgl offset Strgl ht diff CL offset CL ht diff The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Strgl task Name defined for the stringline task. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. Viva Series, Roads - General 904 Field Description ) If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Strgl offset Horizontal offset from the stringline. Strgl ht diff Height difference from the defined stringline. Strgl name Name of the stringline to stake out or the stake out is relative to. Additional line The name of an additional line. Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line. Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the Offsets page. Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. Viva Series, Roads - General 905 Field Description CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Offset angle The current angle to alignment. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. Viva Series, Roads - General 906 Field Description e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Viva Series, Roads - General 907 Field Description Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 908 35.3.3 Road Individual Stringline - Info Page Available fields c b d e f g a Road_085 Stake out of roundabout a) Position to stake out b) Stringline to stake out c) Centreline d) Chainage e) ∆ chainage f) ∆ offset g) ∆ height The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Strgl task Name defined for the individual stringline task. Additional line The name of an additional line. Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line. Viva Series, Roads - General 909 Field Description Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the Offsets page. Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. ) If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Strgl offset Horizontal offset from the stringline. Strgl ht diff Height difference from the defined stringline. Strgl name Name of the stringline to stake out or the stake out is relative to. Viva Series, Roads - General 910 Field Description CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Offset angle The current angle to alignment. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to " Stake screen, Stake page" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. Viva Series, Roads - General 911 Field Description e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point at the stringline). Viva Series, Roads - General 912 Working with pipelines Field Description Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position (relevant point at the stringline). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point at the stringline). Ht end vert align Height at the endpoint of the vertical alignment of the stringline. ∆ ht end of v align Height difference to the endpoint of the vertical alignment of the stringline. Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Description When staking/checking pipes, a common task is to use height differences at the start/end of the pipe. The two Info page items for individual stringlines enable the height difference to be added to the end of the vertical alignments ∆ ht end of v align and Ht end vert align. Viva Series, Roads - General 913 35.3.4 Road Cross Slope - Info Page Available fields e d i c f j g m a b o k l h n Road_044 a) Cross slope to stake out b) Right stringline of the cross slope Right name c) Left stringline of the cross slope Left name d) Centreline e) f) g) h) i) j) CL offset CL ht diff Cross slope offset Cross slope ht diff Left offset Left ht diff k) l) m) n) o) Right offset Right ht diff Cross slope ratio Width Square offset The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Cross slope task Name defined for the cross slope task. Additional line The name of an additional line. Viva Series, Roads - General 914 Field Description Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line. Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the Offsets page. Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. ) If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Cross slope offset Horizontal offset from the cross slope. Cross slope ht diff Height difference to the cross slope. If no stake height difference is used Cross slope ht diff = ∆ height. Viva Series, Roads - General 915 Field Description Left name Name of the left stringline defining the cross slope. Left offset Horizontal offset from the left point of the cross slope. Left ht diff Height difference from the left point of the cross slope. Right name Name of the right stringline defining the cross slope. Right offset Horizontal offset from the right point of the cross slope. Right ht diff Height difference from the right point of the cross slope. Ref line Indicates which side of the cross slope the stake out is relative to. Ref offset Horizontal offset from the stringline of the cross slope used as reference. Depends on Ref line and is identical to Right offset or Left offset. Ref ht diff Height difference from the stringline of the cross slope used as reference. Depends on Ref line and is identical to Right ht diff or Left ht diff. Cross slope ratio Slope ratio of the cross slope. Square offset Offset from the cross slope, perpendicular to the cross slope. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL ht diff Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. Viva Series, Roads - General 916 Field Description CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Width Horizontal width of the cross slope. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. Viva Series, Roads - General 917 Field Description e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point on the cross slope = Actual easting). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point on the cross slope = Actual easting). Viva Series, Roads - General 918 Field Description Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point on the cross slope). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 919 35.3.5 Road Manual Slope and Slope - Info Page Available fields g e m k b h p a n l i f d r q c j o Road_045 a) Slope to stake out/check b) Hinge point Hinge name, reference line c) Second stringline of slope Additnl line name d) Real catch point e) Centreline f) Natural surface Viva Series, Roads - General g) h) i) j) k) l) m) CL offset CL ht diff Slope offset Slope height diff Hinge offset Hinge ht diff Slope dist hinge n) o) p) q) r) Slope ratio Square offset Current ratio Additnl line offset Additnl line ht diff 920 The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Slope task Name defined for the slope task. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. ) If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Slope offset Horizontal offset from the slope. Slope height diff Height difference from the slope. If no stake height difference is used Slope height diff = ∆ height. Ht diff rail Height difference from the batter rail to mark the slope (for Type: Batter rail in Slope Stakeout Settings). Hinge name Name of the stringline defining the hinge of the slope. Hinge offset Horizontal offset from the hinge point of the slope. Viva Series, Roads - General 921 Field Description Hinge ht diff Height difference from the hinge point of the slope. Additnl line name Name of the second stringline defining the slope. Additnl line offset Horizontal offset from the second stringline of the slope. Additnl line ht diff Height difference from the second stringline of the slope. Slope ratio Ratio of the slope. Slope dist hinge ) ) The display format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings, Slope page. Slope distance to the hinge point. All defined settings for a batter rail or reference point are already taken into account. This value is the information to write on the stake. Slope ratio gon Slope ratio in gon. Slope ratio degree Slope ratio in decimal degrees. Slope ratio % Slope ratio in percent. Current ratio Ratio of the slope from the current position to the hinge. ) For the catch point the Current ratio is identical to the Slope ratio. Square offset Offset from the slope, perpendicular to the slope. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. Viva Series, Roads - General 922 Field Description CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Offset angle Available for manual slope. The defined value for the angle to alignment. Traveler height Height of the traveller in use. Refer to "37.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings" for information on the different methods of slope staking. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. Viva Series, Roads - General 923 Field Description e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point on the slope = Act Easting). Viva Series, Roads - General 924 Field Description Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point on the slope = Act Northing). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point on the slope). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 925 35.3.6 Road Crown - Info Page Available fields v c d m j g e n k o r i l f q u b p h a s t Road_056 a) Left cross slope of road crown b) Right cross slope of road crown c) Centreline d) CL offset e) CL ht diff f) Left most stringline of the crown Left name Viva Series, Roads - General g) Middle stringline of the crown Mid name h) Right most stringline of the crown Right name i) L cross slope ht diff j) R cross slope ht diff k) Left offset l) Left ht diff m) Mid offset n) Mid ht diff o) p) q) r) s) t) Right offset Right ht diff L cross slope ratio Rt cross slope ratio Left width Right width 926 The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Crown task Name defined for the road crown task. Additional line The name of an additional line. Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line. Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the Offsets page. Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page. ∆ offset Horizontal offset to the stringline of the crown defined as the reference line. If working in the toggle offset left/right mode, the correct stringline is automatically selected as the reference depending on whether the measured point is to the left or right of the middle stringline. Refer to "37.3.7 Measuring Road Crowns" for more information on the toggle offset left/right mode. ∆ ht left Vertical offset to the left/right cross slope defining the road crown. ∆ ht right Vertical offset to the left/right cross slope defining the road crown. Viva Series, Roads - General 927 Field Description ∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. ) If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. L cross slope ht diff Height difference from the road crowns left cross slope. R cross slope ht diff Height difference from the road crowns right cross slope. Ht diff crown Height difference from Active cross slope of the crown. Active cross slope Indicates if you are on the left or right cross slope of the road crown. Actv cross slp ratio Slope ratio of Active cross slope. This value is equal to L cross slope ratio or Rt cross slope ratio depending on the value of Active cross slope. Left name Name of the left most stringline defining the road crown. Left offset Horizontal offset from the left stringline of the road crown. Left ht diff Height difference from the left stringline of the road crown. Right name Name of the left most stringline defining the road crown. Right offset Horizontal offset from the right stringline of the road crown. Viva Series, Roads - General 928 Field Description Right ht diff Height difference from the right stringline of the road crown. Mid name Name of the mid stringline defining the road crown. Mid offset Horizontal offset from the mid stringline of the road crown. Mid ht diff Height difference from the mid stringline of the road crown. L cross slope ratio Slope ratio of the road crowns left cross slope. Rt cross slope ratio Slope ratio of the road crowns right cross slope. Left width Horizontal width of the road crowns left cross slope. Right width Horizontal width of the road crowns right cross slope. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Curve type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Viva Series, Roads - General 929 Field Description Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point on the crown = Actual easting). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point on the crown = Actual northing). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point on the crown). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 930 35.3.7 Road Layer - Info Page Available fields b c n e k i h f l o g d a m j Road_047 a) b) c) d) e) f) Relevant part of the layer Centreline CL offset CL ht diff Slope offset Layer ht diff g) h) i) j) k) l) Right name Right offset Right ht diff Left name Left offset Left ht diff m) Width n) Slope ratio or Cross slope ratio o) Square offset The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Layer task Name defined for the layer task. Layer name Name of the layer to check. Chainage Chainage of the current measured position. Viva Series, Roads - General 931 Field Description ∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. ) If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Layer offset Horizontal offset from the layer. Surface between Left line and Right line. Layer ht diff Height difference of the measured position to the layer ∆ height Height difference to the layer, including the stake or check height difference. Left name Name of the stringline next to the current position on the left side. Left offset Horizontal offset from the left stringline Left name. Layer ht diff Height difference to the left stringline Left name. Right name Name of the stringline next to the current position on the right side. Right offset Horizontal offset from the right stringline Right name. Right ht diff Height difference to the right stringline Right name. Slope ratio Ratio of the slope between the left stringline Left name and the right stringline Right name. Viva Series, Roads - General 932 Field Cross slope ratio Description ) The display format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings, Slope page. Ratio of the cross slope between the left stringline Left name and the right stringline Right name. ) The display format of the Cross slope ratio depends on the type chosen for Cross slope on Regional Settings, Slope page. Square offset Offset from the slope, perpendicular to the slope. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Curve type of the centreline. CL offset Horizontal offset from the centreline at the current chainage. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Traveler height The height of the traveller. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Viva Series, Roads - General 933 Field Description Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Viva Series, Roads - General 934 Field Description Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point on the crown = Actual easting). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point on the crown = Actual northing). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point on the crown). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 935 35.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page ) An Info page for Road DTM is only available for Roads - As built check. Available fields e a b g d f c Road_046 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Relevant triangle of the DTM Projected point on DTM Easting Northing DTM height diff Flow direction Flow ratio The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description DTM task Name defined for the DTM task. DTM height diff Vertical height difference to the DTM. ∆ height Height difference to the layer including the stake or check height difference. DTM height Height of the DTM at the current measured position. Viva Series, Roads - General 936 Field Description Flow direction Direction of maximum slope ratio on the current DTM triangle. This direction is the direction water would flow toward from the projected point. Flow ratio Slope ratio of the DTM. This ratio is the maximum slope ratio of the triangle. DTM name Name of the DTM surface. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the DTM for the current position (= Actual easting). Current dsgn north Northing of the DTM for the current position (= Actual northing). Current dsgn ht Height of the DTM for the current position. Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 937 35.3.9 Rail - Info Page Available fields The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description ∆ offset Distance from the measured point to the point to set out in a direction perpendicular to the horizontal alignment. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. ) If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the horizontal alignment at the chainage of the measured point. CL type Element type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Viva Series, Roads - General 938 Field Description CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to " Stake screen, Stake page" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Ht diff lower rail Height difference between the measured point and the lower rail. Ht lower rail Height of the lower rail at current chainage. Current design cant Design cant at the current position. Viva Series, Roads - General 939 Field Description Ref offset Horizontal distance between the measured point and the rail or centreline being used as a reference. Ref ht diff Height difference between the measured point and the rail or centreline being used as a reference. Offset (using cant) Offset calculated regarding the cant. Ht diff (using cant) Height difference calculated regarding the cant. Rail task Name of the current task. Rail name Name of the centreline or rail being used as a reference. Defined desgn cant Design cant at the defined chainage. Pendular length The pendulum length as distance value: The difference in elevation of the pendulum centre on the original track and above the axis point. Def pendulum displacement The defined horizontal displacement for the track. Def pendulum angle The pendulum angle is defined by the pendulum displacement and the superelevation (cant). Actl pendulum displacement The current horizontal displacement for the track. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Current cant Available for Check. Superelevation of the current position. This value is calculated by using the ’Second Point of Cant’ option, which is located in the Tools menu. Viva Series, Roads - General 940 35.3.10 Tunnel - Info Page Available fields The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Strgl task Name of the current task. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. ) If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Strgl offset Horizontal offset from the stringline. Strgl ht diff Height difference from the defined stringline. Strgl name Name of the stringline to stake out or the stake out is relative to. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. Viva Series, Roads - General 941 Field Description Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to " Stake screen, Stake page" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Viva Series, Roads - General 942 Field Description Actual northing Northing of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Actual height Height of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. ∆Prof Distance from the design profile to the measured point. Profile element no. Element number of the closest design profile element to the measured point. Profile element(%) Distance in percentage terms of the measured point along the design profile element. Dist along profile Distance of the measured point along the design profile starting at the origin of the profile. Top distance Distance of the measured point along the design profile starting at the top of the profile. Viva Series, Roads - General 943 35.3.11 Workflow for Height (aim to stake ht) Step-by-step In this example, the height of the cross slope is marked on a peg by using the auto position function. a c b Road_072 a) Peg placed at the correct position b) First height, manually chosen direction c) Required height on the peg Step Description 1. In the Configuration, TPS page, select Turn to: Prompt before turn. 2. After staking out the peg at the correct position with Stake Cross Slope, aim the instrument at the peg. 3. Press Fn Positn to open the Configuration screen. 4. Configuration ) Make sure that the instrument uses the reflectorless EDM mode. Highlight Height (aim to stake ht). 5. ) ) Viva Series, Roads - General Press OK. The instrument searches for the point on the peg at the required height without changing the horizontal direction. As soon as the defined Height limit ↑/Height limit ↓ from Configuration, Quality control is reached, the instrument stops. 944 Step ) Viva Series, Roads - General Description Depending on the settings chosen, the instrument turns on the red laser to mark the height. 945 35.4 Jobs & Design Data 35.4.1 Choosing a Job Access Start the Roads subapplication required. In Job Selection open the selectable list for Road alignment file, Rail job or Tunnel job. Road Jobs/Rail jobs/Tunnel jobs This screen is similar to the system job selection. Refer to "4.4 Choosing a Job"for a description of the screen. Viva Series, Roads - General 946 35.4.2 Working with a DTM Job Access Start the Roads or Rail subapplication. In Job Selection check Use a DTM. Open the selectable list for DTM. DTM OK To select the highlighted DTM job and continue. Layrs.. To view the DTM layers and the number of triangles of the highlighted DTM job. A DTM job can consist of multiple DTM layers or surfaces. These DTM layers can cover different locations, be on top of each other or intersect each other. Delete To delete the highlighted DTM job. CF card, SD card, USB or Intrnl To change between viewing jobs stored on another data storage device or internal memory. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - General 947 35.4.3 Design Data Design data for Road 2D and 3D lines Depending on the method to be used, the design in all road jobs must consist of either 2D or 3D lines. 2D lines are required at least when working with stringlines, individual stringlines, manual slope or layer. If the design consists of 2D lines, heights can be considered manually. 3D lines are required when working with slope, cross slope or crown. 3D lines can also be used when working with stringlines, individual stringlines, manual slope or layer. Description Depending on the complexity of the road job, the design data can vary from a single horizontal alignment to a design containing profiles with dozens of defined vertices. Design elements can be grouped logically for faster access. Stringlines When manually typing in a road job, alignments and cross sections are used. Alignments are defined by geometric elements, for example straights and arcs, and the cross sections by vertices. Furthermore, at which chainage a certain cross section is used is also defined. By defining these elements the vertices are connected to create a series of lines representing the three-dimensional design of the road. Viva Series, Roads - General 948 Road_029 Stringline representation of a road design. In Roads, such lines defining the design are called stringlines. Stringlines are the base elements used for stakeout and check activities. Stringlines have a project unique name by which they are identified and selected. Whenever a new road design is typed in or imported from a design package these stringlines are generated automatically in the background. ) Road_030 Viva Series, Roads - General A cross section can be derived from the stringline model by slicing the group of stringlines with a vertical plane orthogonal to the centreline. Vertical cut of a stringline group defines a cross section. 949 ) ) Design data for Rail Stringlines are referenced by layers and can be used in more than one layer. Every layer is relative to a centreline. This centreline does not have to be a part of the layer. In the previous example, layer one - general fill - uses the centreline for calculation even though the centreline is not part of the layer surface. Whereas the centreline is part of layer three - final surface. Horizontal and vertical alignments All rail jobs must consist of at least one horizontal alignment. Each horizontal alignment can either be typed in manually using the Alignment Editor application, or converted from a rail design package using the Design To Field component within the LEICA Geo Office program. Horizontal alignments can consist of straights, circular curves, clothoides, parabolic curves and bloss curves. Vertical alignments can consist of straights, circular curves and parabolic curves. If a design comprises of multiple tracks, one horizontal alignment can be defined as the chainage centreline. From the chainage centreline all chainages will be calculated and additional horizontal and vertical alignments can be used to define each track. Rail definition Rails can be defined by: • entering the design data manually in the field • by using the Alignment Editor • by converting data from a rail design package using the Design To Field component and if required the Rail Editor (for defining the superelevation) component within the LEICA Geo Office program Rails are stored as stringlines (continuous 2D or 3D lines) within the rail job. Viva Series, Roads - General 950 Tracks Tracks are used to group related stringlines (centreline and rails) together. In the case of a single track, the track centreline and the two rails are grouped together in one track. In the case of multiple tracks where one chainage centreline is used for all tracks, each track consists of four stringlines: the track centreline, the chainage centreline and the left and right rails. In the case of multiple tracks where chainage is calculated relative to the track centreline, each track is stored as a single track as described previously. Design data for Tunnel Horizontal and vertical alignments All tunnel jobs must consist of at least a horizontal and a vertical alignment. This data can be converted from a road design package using the Design To Field component within the LEICA Geo Office application. Profiles Depending on the complexity of the tunnel job, the design data can vary from a single horizontal and vertical alignment to a design containing many different design profiles with dozens of defined vertices. Design profiles can be defined and edited using the Design To Field component within the LEICA Geo Office application. Viva Series, Roads - General 951 Layers Tunnels generally consist of layers made of different materials, for example a shotcrete surface or a lining. At different times throughout a project, it may be required to work with different layers of the tunnel. The Tunnel Profile Editor allows the possibility of creating such layers by grouping together design profiles that will be used at the same chainage. ab B4 A4 B3 B5 A3 B2 B1 Tunnel_023 A5 A2 A6 A1 A7 B6 B7 a) The vertices A1-A7 could be grouped together in a layer (a) and represent the final lining of the tunnel. b) The vertices B1-B7 could be grouped together in a layer (b) and represent the inner shotcrete layer of the tunnel. Design Profile Layers can be assigned to chainages along the centreline using the Tunnel Profile Editor within the Design To Field component. The layer of the tunnel to set out or check can be defined when creating a task. Viva Series, Roads - General 952 35.4.4 Viewing and Editing the Design Data Access Start the Roads subapplication required. In Job Selection highlight Road Jobs, Rail job or Tunnel job. Open the selectable list In Road Jobs/Rail jobs/Tunnel jobs highlight a job and press Data. View & Edit Data The design data stored within the road/rail/tunnel job contains all information about the road/rail/tunnel design. This information includes the stringlines and layers, for example, the geometry of the centreline or the layers of the different materials/surfaces which form the road/tunnel. The design data can be viewed and partially edited on this screen. OK To return to the job selection. Edit.. To edit the general job details and the start chainage of the centreline of the selected layer. For Road additionally to select another centreline and include/exclude stringlines from the selected layer. View To view geometry details of the stringlines and to view cross-section plots. For Road and Rail additionally to view the list of all stringlines in the layer. Fn Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - General 953 Description of fields Field Option Description Job name Display only The name of the active road/rail/tunnel job, as selected in Job Selection. Layer Display only To select a layer from the active road/rail/tunnel job. All layers within the active road/rail/tunnel job can be selected. No. of stringlines Display only Available for Road and Rail. The number of stringlines from the selected layer. Number of profiles Display only Available for Tunnel. The number of profiles from the selected layer. Centreline Display only The name of the layer centreline. Every layer must have a centreline. Chainage Editable field To enter chainage to use when viewing the data. The default value is the start chainage of the layer centreline. Ch increment Editable field To enter a chainage increment to use when stepping through the data. ) Next step IF you want to THEN press edit data Edit.. to access the screen Edit:. Refer to "Edit:, Layer page". view data View to access the screen View at. Refer to "View at, Line Info page". Viva Series, Roads - General 954 Edit:, Layer page Only available for Road. Store To store data and return to the previous screen. Centre To set the highlighted line as centreline. Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for excluding/including the highlighted line of selected layer. Page To change to the next page. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Line name Displays the name of all the lines in the layer. CL Shows CL for the line selected as centreline. Use For Yes: The selected line is used for stake/check. For No: The selected line is not used for stake/check. Next step Page changes to the Centreline page. Viva Series, Roads - General 955 Edit:, Centreline/Chainage stringline page Store To store changes and return to the previous screen. Reset To clear all changes made and to reset to the original start chainage. The original start chainage is always remembered. Page To change to the next page. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Centreline/Chai Display only nage stringline Description The name of the centreline. Set start chainage Editable field To enter a start chainage for the layer centreline. End chainage Display only The end chainage of the layer centreline. By using the centreline length, the end chainage is automatically calculated. Next step Store to store the changes. View to access the screen View at. Viva Series, Roads - General 956 View at, Line Info page If a value is unavailable in the design data, the field is shown as -----. OK To return to the previous screen. ChTo decrease the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in the View & Edit Data screen. Ch+ To increase the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in the View & Edit Data screen. Segmnt To access Segment Info - Start Point. Hz or Vt To change between the vertical alignment data and the horizontal alignment data. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Line name Selectable list All stringlines available at the defined chainage are displayed and can be selected. Viva Series, Roads - General 957 Field Option Description Easting, Northing and Height Display only The East/North coordinate and height of the stringline at defined chainage. Hz tangent Display only The tangent direction of the stringline at defined chainage. Grade Display only The grade of the stringline at defined chainage. Hz radius Display only The horizontal radius of the stringline segment at defined chainage. Vertical radius Display only The vertical radius of the stringline segment at defined chainage. Hz type Display only The horizontal segment type at defined chainage. Vertical type Display only The vertical segment type at defined chainage. Hz offset Display only The horizontal offset to the layer centreline at defined chainage. Vertical offset Display only The vertical offset to the layer centreline at defined chainage. Next step Page to change to the Lines page. Viva Series, Roads - General 958 View at, Lines page Unavailable for Tunnel. OK To return to the previous screen. ChTo decrease the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in the View & Edit Data screen. Ch+ To increase the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in the View & Edit Data screen. Segmnt To access Segment Info - Start Point. More To change between the height differences or absolute heights at the selected chainage. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Line name The name of the stringlines available at defined chainage in the selected layer. Viva Series, Roads - General 959 Column Description CL offset The horizontal offset of the stringline from the layer centreline. Ht diff The height difference of the stringline to the layer centreline. Height The absolute height of the stringline. Next step Page to change to the Plot page. The Plot page shows a cross section, profile and planar view of the design data at the selected chainage. Segmnt to access Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point. Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point, Hz alignment page If a value is unavailable in the design data, the field is shown as -----. Viva Series, Roads - General OK To return to the previous screen. SegTo move to the previous segment. Seg+ To move to the next segment. End Pt or Start Pt To change between the start point and the end point of the segment. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. 960 Description of fields Field Option Line name Display only The name of the selected stringline. Chainage Display only The chainage of start/end point of the segment. Easting Northin Display only g and Height Description The East/North coordinate and height of the start/end point of the segment. Hz tangent Display only The tangent direction at the start/end point of the segment. Hz radius Display only The radius at the start/end point of the segment. Hz type Display only The current segment type. Next step Page to change to the Vertical alignment page. Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point, Vertical alignment page Refer to "Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point, Hz alignment page" for a description of keys. If a value has not been defined, the field is shown as -----. Description of fields Field Option Description Line name Display only The name of the selected stringline. Chainage Display only The chainage of start/end point of the segment. Northing, Northing and Height Display only The East/North coordinate and height of the start/end point of the segment. Viva Series, Roads - General 961 Field Option Description Grade Display only The grade at the start/end point of the segment. Vertical radius Display only The radius at the start/end point of the segment. Vertical type Display only The current segment type. Next step OK returns to the previous screen. Viva Series, Roads - General 962 35.5 Working with Shifts Description When working on site, often design data does not match the measured data. For example, an existing road surface that should intersect with the design surface may be 15 cm higher than the plans indicate. To guarantee a smooth intersection, this difference has to be distributed over the remaining 100m of paving. To handle these situations, shifts can be added to the existing design data. A shift is applied when selecting the element to stake out/check. Horizontal and vertical shifts can be applied to the selected element. By using these shifts the design can be lifted/lowered and moved horizontally. A shift is always an overlay of the existing design and is stored with the task. For a horizontal alignment, the shift is applied perpendicular to the centreline. For the vertical part of the alignment, shifts are applied following the plumb line. ) Shifts are applied temporarily to the design data. The original design data is not modified when a shift is applied. Access Press Shifts.. in the Define screen. Shift settings, Horizontal shift/Vertical shift/Tunnel shifts/Apply tunnel shift page The parameters required for applying the shift are identical for all entities. Viva Series, Roads - General 963 Description of fields Field Option Description Apply horizontal shift/Apply vertical shift Check box When this box is checked, shifts can be defined. Horizontal shifts are always rectangular to the centreline of the element being worked with. Whereas vertical shifts are defined along the plumb line. a b Road_013 a) Horizontal alignment with constant shift b) Vertical alignment with constant shift Shift type a b c Road_014 a) Constant shift b) Linear shift c) Parabolic shift and reverse curve Viva Series, Roads - General 964 Field Viva Series, Roads - General Option Description Linear The difference between the shift at the begin chainage and the shift defined at the end chainage is distributed in a linear fashion. The difference between the shift at the begin chainage and the shift defined at the end chainage is distributed in a linear fashion. Constant A constant shift is applied from the begin chainage of the shift to the end chainage of the shift. The shift stays the same from its start chainage or station to the end chainage or station. Parabolic Available for Road and Rail. The difference between the shift at the begin chainage and the shift defined at the end chainage is distributed using a cubic parabola. Parabolic shifts allow a smooth transition between the existing curve and the shifted part. Reverse curve Available for Road and Rail. Two arcs with the same radius are used to distribute the shift. As for parabolic shifts, reverse curves guarantee a smooth transition between the existing curve and the shifted part. 965 Field Option Description b g c g d e Road_077 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Begin chainage Editable field i h f a Chainage Shift Start shift at chainage (e) End shift at chainage (f) Start chainage of the shift End chainage of the shift Radius of the two arcs used as transition curve Random chainage between (e) and (f) Shift applied at chainage (h) Chainage from which the shift is applied. Begin shift Editable field Magnitude of the shift to apply at the begin chainage. Shift value Editable field Available for Shift type: Constant. The magnitude of shift. End chainage Editable field Chainage at which the shift ends. End shift Editable field Magnitude of the shift to apply at the end chainage. Viva Series, Roads - General 966 Field Option Description Available for Road and Rail. Defines the object outside of the defined shift range. Before / after a b c Road_057 a) None b) Step c) Parallel Plot page with shifts None The object only exists within the defined shift range. Parallel The begin shift and the end shift are continued parallel. The start shift is used from the start of the alignment until the start chainage. The end shift is used from the end chainage until the end of the alignment. Step Before/after the defined shift range, no shift is added. Outside of the defined shift area the original design is used. This option means a "step" will appear at the start and/or end of the shifted area. The application offers for all stakeout and check methods a page showing a graphical representation of the measured position in relation to the design. If shifts are applied to the design the plot shows the original unshifted cross section view of the design as well as the shifted element. The current element is shown in blue. Viva Series, Roads - General 967 Sign convention for shifts The sign convention for design shifts is identical to the convention used for stake offset and height difference. a b e f d c Road_053 ) ++ g a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Centreline Stringline on left side Negative horizontal shift Negative vertical shift Stringline on right side Positive horizontal shift Positive vertical shift Horizontal stake offsets are always defined perpendicular to the centreline of the layer the stringline/s belongs to. c a d b Road_010 Viva Series, Roads - General a) b) c) d) Stringline the horizontal shift is applied to User defined horizontal shift for the stringline Centreline Shifted stringline 968 Shifts for stringlines, slopes, layers and DTMs The shifts applied to stringlines, slopes, road crowns layers and DTMs are identical with one exception: Given that DTMs are not defined relative to a centreline and hold no orientation information, no horizontal shift is possible for a DTM. b a c d e Road_016 Shift for cross slopes and road crowns a) b) c) d) e) Slope to shift Centreline Value for horizontal shift Value for vertical shift Shifted slope Description To allow widening and narrowing of cross slopes and road crowns, only one of the two stringlines defining the cross slope or crown, is shifted when adding a horizontal shift. This behaviour is useful for small changes to the original design, for example to bus stops or emergency bays. a b c Road_017 Viva Series, Roads - General a) Centreline b) Original stringline of the design c) Stringline with horizontal parabolic shift 969 Horizontal shift For cross slopes and crowns, the horizontal shift is added to the stringline that is defined as the reference line. To maintain the original cross slope/crown ratio the stringline is shifted along the cross slope/crown. c a b Road_018 d + e a) b) c) d) e) Cross slope to shift Reference stringline of the cross slope Second stringline of the cross slope Positive horizontal shift Position of the shifted reference stringline Vertical shift The vertical component of the shift for a cross slope or crown is applied to all stringlines. c a d e Road_019 Viva Series, Roads - General b a) b) c) d) e) Cross slope to shift Right stringline of the cross slope Left stringline of the cross slope Negative vertical shift Shifted cross slope 970 Horizontal alignment with constant horizontal shift Horizontal shifts are always perpendicular to the centreline. b c d Rail_013 Viva Series, Roads - General a Plan view a) Reference line b) Point to stake c) Stake height difference d) Stake offset 971 35.6 Tasks Description When staking out or checking a road/rail/tunnel, often it is not possible to finish a particular task in one go. The element to be staked out or checked can be stored together with all defined settings as a work task. Stored in a task are: • Selected layer • Working chainage • Selected line(s) or element • Shifts Tasks are stored within the selected Road/Rail/Tunnel job. They can be created at any time when working in the field or during preparation in the office. Deleting a task does not delete the referenced jobs. Deleting a Road/Rail/Tunnel job deletes all referencing tasks. Tasks are method-specific. Creating a task Step Description 1. Start the Roads/Rail/Tunnel application. 2. In the screen Job Selection, select the required jobs and press OK. 3. Select a method, if required, and press OK. 4. In the Define screen press Save... 5. Type in a name for the task and press OK. Viva Series, Roads - General 972 Loading a task Access Press Load.. in the Define screen. Load a Defined Task OK To select the highlighted task and continue. Delete To delete the selected task. More To display information about Date, Time, Creator and Description. Fn Name or Time To sort task list by name or time. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - General 973 35.7 Understanding Terms and Expressions 35.7.1 Road - Basic Terms Terms and expressions a b j k i e f c g Road_001 e h g c d i h a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) Cut situation Fill situation Centreline Natural surface Hinge point Catch point Carriage way Shoulder Slope Top Toe Term / expression Description Carriage way The part of the road on which users drive once the road is finished. Shoulder or Verge Often located next to the carriage way, usually with a slightly higher slope ratio than the carriage way. Slope Located next to the verge and can be thought of as linking the road level with the natural surface. The ratio of the slope is greater than the ratio of the verge. A slope starts at the hinge point. Natural surface or original ground The undisturbed surface before project construction. Viva Series, Roads - General 974 Term / expression Description Finished road level Describes the final road surface. Catch point or daylight point Indicates the point of intersection between the slope and the natural surface. Both the hinge point and the catch point lie on the slope. For a cut slope, the catch point forms part of the top of a bank. For a fill slope, the catch point forms part of the bottom of a bank. Chainage or station The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently but not always starting at zero. Viva Series, Roads - General 975 35.7.2 Road - Horizontal and Vertical Geometry Elements Horizontal alignment The application supports the following elements in the horizontal component of alignments: • Straights • Arcs • Clothoids, entry and exit as well as partial • Cubic parabolas, entry and exit as well as partial • Bloss curves, entry and exit as well as partial; only available for Rail • Multipoints, all elements that cannot be described by one of the previous types are represented by discrete points along the curve. For example, a line parallel to a clothoid. Vertical alignment The application supports the following elements in the vertical component of alignments: • Straights • Arcs • Quadratic parabolas • Multipoints, all elements that cannot be described by one of the previous types are represented by discrete points along the curve. Viva Series, Roads - General 976 35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements Description In general, there are four different basic stakeout and check elements: • Cross slopes, for example, the final carriage way • Stringlines, for example, a centreline • Slopes, for example, the end-slopes of a cross section • Surfaces, for example, a DTM surface a a b b c Road_002 a a c b b a) Stringlines b) Cross slopes c) Slopes Every stakeout or check is based on one or more of these four base elements. For example, a road crown consists of two cross slopes with one common stringline. Stringlines The stake out of a stringline is used in different situations: • Centre line of a road • Edges of a road or any other change in slope • Gutters • Pipelines, cables and any other alignment-related design feature Viva Series, Roads - General 977 a c a) Stringline to stake out or check, in this case the centreline b) Stringline offset c) Stringline height difference b Road_003 Cross slopes Cross slopes are defined by two stringlines. The two stringlines define the right and left edge of the cross slope. One of the two stringlines is used as the reference line. c a b d Road_004 Slopes e a) b) c) d) e) Cross slope to stake out or check Reference line Horizontal offset to reference line Height difference to reference line Height difference to expanded cross slope Slopes, like cross slopes, are defined by two stringlines. Different to cross slopes, only one edge of the slope, the hinge point, is known. The second edge, catch point or daylight point, is defined by the intersection of the slope and the natural surface. As the natural surface is unknown this edge can only be staked out in the field. Finding and staking out the catch point is the most important task when working with slopes. Viva Series, Roads - General 978 a c b f g d e Road_005 Surfaces h a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Centreline Slope Hinge Point Second stringline defining the slope Catch point Natural surface Δ Offset from the slope Height difference from the slope There are two types of surfaces supported that represent a three-dimensional design: • DTM / TIN (Digital Terrain Model; Triangular Irregular Network) • Layer A DTM consists of several 3D triangles. DTMs do not include information relating the DTM to a centreline. Positions are defined by easting, nothing and height values. c a b Road_006 Viva Series, Roads - General a) Height difference from the triangle of the DTM found in the same vertical line as the measured point b) Easting of coordinate system c) Northing of the coordinate system 979 A layer is a combination of stringlines that form a 3D surface relative to a centreline. Thus it is possible to define points by chainage or station, offset and height. Refer to "35.4.3 Design Data" for more information. a b c Road_007 Viva Series, Roads - General a) Chainage or station b) Layer Offset c) Layer height difference 980 35.7.4 Road - Stake Offset and Stake Height Difference Description When conducting a stake out, the aim is usually to mark the position of geometric elements defined by the design. For example, in the graphic below, the catch point of a slope. A point can be staked either directly or indirectly. For a directly staked point, the peg ends up at exactly the position of the point to be staked. Staking the same point indirectly, the peg will be placed with a certain offset to the point. a Road_009 ) Stake offset c d b One reason to stake out a point indirectly is that the peg would not last long at the position of the actual point. In this example, the peg staked directly would be removed as soon as the excavation work starts. Horizontal stake offsets are, like shifts, defined perpendicular to the centreline of the layer the stringline(s) belongs to, if no offset angle on Offsets page has been defined. For cross slopes and road crowns, the stake offset is applied following the same rules as stated for horizontal shifts. Refer to "35.5 Working with Shifts" for more information. For each stakeout method, a horizontal and/or vertical offset can be defined. The stake offset and stake height difference are defined on the Offsets page of the stake screen. Viva Series, Roads - General 981 Sign convention for stake offset and height difference The sign convention for stake offsets and height differences is identical to the convention used for design shifts. a b d c Road_011 Plot page with stake offset and stake height difference e a) b) c) + + g d) e) f f) g) Centreline Stringline on left side Negative stake offset Negative stake height difference Stringline on right side Positive stake offset Positive stake height difference The application offers for all stake out methods a page showing a graphical representation of the measured position in relation to the design. If stake offset and/or stake height difference are used, the plot shows the original cross section view of the design as well as the position to stake out. The position to stake out is marked by a yellow/black peg. Viva Series, Roads - General 982 35.7.5 Road - Chainage or Station Equations Description Chainage or station equations are used to adjust the alignment chainage or station. The most common reason for doing so is the insertion or removal of curves during the design process. Inserting or removing a curve would require recalculating the chainage or station of an entire alignment. Using chainage or station equations eliminates this need. Chainage or station equations can create either a gap or an overlap as shown in the following diagrams. 11 12 13 14 15 10 9 9 10 8 7 a 8 b 6 7 6 5 5 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 2 1 Road_062 Viva Series, Roads - General 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Gap chainage or station equation. Chainage or station back 10 = chainage or station ahead 15. a) Old b) New 983 10 9 11 8 12 13 7 6 7 5 6 4 a 5 4 3 3 2 b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 Road_063 Overlap chainage or station equation. Chainage or station back 13 = chainage or station ahead 7. a) New b) Old Multiple chainage or station In the case of the overlap shown in the example, the chainages or stations between seven and thirteen appear twice. When a duplicate chainage or station is entered, a message asks which one is to be used. Example As more than one chainage or station equation is possible, a chainage or station can appear more than twice on a design. In this example, the chainages or stations 11 to 13 appear three times. 0.. ..5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Road_069 11 12 13 14 15 16.. ..24 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Overlap chainage or station equation. Chainage back 13 = chainage ahead 7 and chainage back 15 = chainage ahead 11. In this example, when chainage or station 12 is entered in Road - Multiple Chainage, the following screen shows how the option to select the right chainage or station is displayed: Viva Series, Roads - General 984 OK To select the highlighted chainage or station equation and return to the stake out screen. More To switch the value displayed in the last column to show the end chainage or station of the chainage or station equation. Description of columns Column Description End Shows the end chainage or station for the chainage or station equation. In this example, the field shows 13.000 for Nr. 1, 15.000 for Nr. 2 and 24.000 for Nr. 3. End shows to which chainage or station, the current chainage or station equation is valid. As for the first part of the alignment, no chainage or station equation exists, Ahead stays empty for the first row. Viva Series, Roads - General 985 35.7.6 Road - Working Corridor Description A working corridor defines the valid offset range left and right of the centreline. When working with irregular alignments such as traffic islands and parking lots, working corridors are useful to avoid displaying results from the wrong centreline element. The following example shows the result if working without a defined working corridor. For the measured position (b), the application finds the centreline point (c) with the minimum perpendicular offset (f). With a defined working corridor (e), the application would display a message advising that the measured position is outside of the defined centreline. d d c e a f e a) b) c) d) e) f) Road_081 Viva Series, Roads - General b Centreline Measured position Projected point on the centreline Defined offset range for the working corridor Working corridor Offset from the centreline, if no working corridor is used 986 The working corridor is defined in Configuration, Design page. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications" for more information. Viva Series, Roads - General 987 35.7.7 Road - Extension of the Centreline Description Whenever centrelines must be extended, for example, at the start and end area of an alignment or slope. The projection of the measured position to the centreline is made using the tangent of the start/end point of the centreline. In this case a warning appears informing that the original design is exceeded. The application will advise as soon as a measured position is within the design area once again. Concept When expanding the centreline the geometry will be continued using the tangent of the start/end point of the centreline. a Road_090 Method ) b a) Centreline b) Extended centreline Description When staking out in the region of the start/end area of the design centreline, situations occur where an expansion of the centreline is useful. As soon as measurements are outside the defined centreline, the application will prompt if, and with which method, the centreline should be expanded. The extension of a centreline is made following its start/end tangent. Outside of the original design area correct results cannot be guaranteed. Viva Series, Roads - General 988 35.7.8 Road/Rail - Working with Heights Description Normally, heights stored with the design data are used. The Rail application offers the possibility to switch to either: • a height which is entered manually by the user, This option enables the manual definition of a height, which can be applied for staking out or checking. This height is entered in the General page. • a height which is retrieved from an existing Height Layer, as defined in the DTM job associated with the project. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height reference for the staking out or checking of alignments. 2D and 3D are possible. This option is configured in the Tools menu. Understanding priorities of various heights Type of height Overrules Stake Height Diff Manually entered All other heights Considered Of individual point All other heights Considered From height layer of DTM Design height Considered From design No other heights Considered Viva Series, Roads - General 989 35.7.9 Terms and expressions Rail - Working with a Single Track Term / expression Description Track A track comprises two separate rails. Single track A single track is defined as one track with one centreline and two rails. All chainages are calculated from the centreline. Track centreline Geometric alignment in two or three dimensions to which all design elements of the project are referenced. It could be that the vertical component of the alignment does not coincide with the plan component. In this case the vertical part of the alignment will generally coincide with the lowest rail. Chainage or station The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently but not always starting at zero. Left/right rail Planimetric position of the left/right rail of a track. The sense of the left/right rail is given by the direction of increasing chainage. When a section of the track is viewed in the direction of increasing chainage, the left rail is to the left of the centre of the track. Nominal gauge The nominal distance between the active (internal) faces of the left and right rails. Superelevation base The distance over which the superelevation is applied. This distance is normally the distance between the centre of the left and right rail. Viva Series, Roads - General 990 Term / expression Description Left/right superelevation The superelevation or height difference of each rail with Left/right cant respect to the track centreline. Usually expressed in millimetres. If one of the rails is used to rotate the track section, or the height of the vertical alignment coincides with the lowest rail, the superelevation of the rotation point or lowest rail will be zero. Superelevation is also known by the term cant. These two words can be interchanged. Diagram - Plan b d Rail_001 Diagram - Section a c a) b) c) d) Track centreline Left rail Right rail Nominal gauge Two generic methods can be used to define the section of the track. Viva Series, Roads - General 991 Method 1 - A definition using rotation around a known point This method involves rotating the section around a known point, normally the lowest rail. e f d c a) b) c) d) e) f) b Rail_002 a Left rail Right rail Rotation point Nominal gauge Superelevation base Superelevation (cant) Method 2 - A definition using relative height distances This method uses height differences relative to the vertical alignment to define the height of the left and right rail. e a f g d c Rail_003 Viva Series, Roads - General b a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Track centreline Left rail Right rail Nominal gauge Superelevation base Left superelevation (left cant) Right superelevation (right cant) 992 Viva Series, Roads - General 993 35.7.10 Rail - Working with Multiple Tracks Description Multiple tracks are used when more than one track share a common centreline, from which all chainages are calculated. When there are multiple tracks with independent centrelines for each track, each track is then considered as a single track. Refer to "35.7.9 Rail - Working with a Single Track" for details on single tracks. Diagram - Plan c b d a f e g Rail_004 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Chainage centreline Left track centre ine Left track left rail Left track right rail Right track centreline Right track left rail Right track right rail Diagram - Section b g f j e d i a Rail_005 Viva Series, Roads - General k c h 994 a) b) c) d) e) f) Calculations Chainage centreline Left track centreline Left track left rail Left track right rail Left track left rail superelevation Left track right rail superelevation g) h) i) j) k) Right Right Right Right Right track track track track track centreline left rail right rail left rail superelevation right rail superelevation For multiple tracks, the chainage centreline is used only to calculate the chainage. The superelevation of each track is calculated with respect to the corresponding (left / right) vertical alignment. The chainage centreline can consist of a plan and a vertical component. Although the vertical component of the chainage centreline is not used for any calculation. Viva Series, Roads - General 995 35.7.11 Rail - Check Elements and Stakeout Elements Description Points can be staked with respect to three basic elements of the track: • Track centreline • Left rail • Right rail Centreline stakeout Description The line to stake out can be a track centreline or, in the case of multiple tracks, the left or right track centerline. In both cases, a horizontal offset with respect to the centreline can be applied. Additionally, if a vertical alignment is available for a track centreline, a vertical offset can be applied. Diagram - Single track elements d f a e a c Rail_006 Viva Series, Roads - General b a) b) c) d) e) Track centreline Left rail Right rail Point to stake Horizontal offset from track centreline f) Vertical offset from track centreline 996 Left/right rail stakeout Description The left or right rail of a track can be staked out: • directly, • horizontal and/or vertical offsets can be used to stake any point relative to either rail. Diagram - Staking out a point relative to the right rail d f a e c Rail_007 ) Viva Series, Roads - General b a) b) c) d) e) Track centreline Left rail Right rail Point to stake Horizontal offset from right rail f) Vertical offset from right rail The position from which the horizontal and rail offsets will be applied depends on how the left and right rails were defined in the imported design data. Using standard practice, the horizontal offset would be defined from the active face of the rail, and the height offset would be defined from the highest part of the rail, as shown in the diagram. 997 35.7.12 Rail - Working with Offsets Sign convention for offsets The sign convention for offsets is: + d e Rail_008 Viva Series, Roads - General - a c + b a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Positive horizontal offset Positive vertical offset Negative horizontal offset Negative vertical offset 998 35.7.13 Terms and expressions Tunnel - Basic Terms Term / expression Description Centreline Geometric alignment in two or three dimensions to which all design elements of the project are referenced. Chainage or station The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently but not always starting at zero. Design Profile Geometric description of the designed shape of the crosssection of the tunnel. The design profile can contain straight or curve elements. Excavated Profile Shape of the cross-section of the tunnel that has been excavated. Underbreak When the excavated profile is inside the design profile, the underbreak is the perpendicular distance between the design profile and the excavated profile. Overbreak When the excavated profile is outside of the design profile, the overbreak is the perpendicular distance between the design profile and the excavated profile. Tunnel Portal The open end of a tunnel. Tunnel Face The point where the excavated tunnel meets existing terrain. Superelevation (Rotation) Angle of rotation of a design profile. Used to take into account the velocity of a moving vehicle through a curve. Rotation Point The point about which the design profile is rotated. This point may or may not coincide with the centreline. Viva Series, Roads - General 999 General terms e f g h a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) a d b c Tunnel_001 Centreline Centreline offset Point on design profile Centreline height offset Design profile Excavated profile Underbreak Overbreak 3D View Tunnel_002 Viva Series, Roads - General a b c a) Centreline or axis b) Tunnel portal c) Tunnel face 1000 Superelevation a c d b Tunnel_003 Viva Series, Roads - General e a) b) c) d) e) Centreline or axis Rotation point Centreline offset Centreline height offset Superelevation (Rotation) 1001 35.7.14 Tunnel - Elements for Stake Out and Check Measurements Tunnel face Staking tunnel faces It is usually required to stake out the tunnel face to indicate the position to excavate when certain tunnelling methods are used. For example, Drill and Blast or excavation using a roadheader. The points to stake on the tunnel face can be defined in various ways: Horizontal and vertical offsets By horizontal and vertical offsets with respect to the centreline: a d Tunnel_004 Viva Series, Roads - General b c a) b) c) d) Centreline Point on tunnel face to stake Centreline offset Centreline height offset 1002 Distance along profile By the distance from the start of the design profile and an offset from the design profile. e b d a c Tunnel_005 a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Point on tunnel face to stake Point defining start of design profile Distance from start of design profile Offset perpendicular to design profile Distance along a particular element By the distance along a particular element of the design profile and an offset from the element. b d e c Tunnel_006 Viva Series, Roads - General a a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Point on tunnel face to stake Element of design profile to stake Distance from start of design profile element Offset perpendicular to design profile 1003 Tunnel profiles Staking tunnel profiles Tunnel profiles are normally staked after excavation to indicate the position of tunnel design elements or services such as lighting or ventilation. Basic terms Usually a tunnel under construction is designed and built in various stages such that a given chainage can have various design profiles. For example shotcrete or final lining. Each design profile is called a layer. b c a Tunnel_007 a) Centreline or axis b) Final lining c) Shotcrete Measuring tunnel profiles Tunnel profiles are normally measured after excavation to compare the excavated profile with the design profile. This check can occur during the excavation phase of the project or for quality control checks of the built tunnel. Viva Series, Roads - General 1004 When measuring tunnel profiles, it is possible to scan various profile from one instrument position. The profiles to scan are defined with respect to a defined chainage. Profiles can be scanned at a given forward and back interval within a given forward and back distance from the defined profile. Measuring tunnel profiles - Plan view d h i e a b Tunnel_009 Viva Series, Roads - General f c g a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Centreline Instrument position Tunnel face Defined profile to scan Instrument profile Back distance Forward distance Back interval Forward interval 1005 Profile view Tunnel profiles can be measured vertically, horizontally or perpendicular to the tunnel centreline. c d e b a Tunnel_010 Viva Series, Roads - General a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Tunnel face Horizontal profile Profile perpendicular to centreline Vertical profile 1006 35.7.15 Tunnel - Shifts Description When working on site, often design data does not match the measured data. For example, an existing road surface that should intersect with the design surface may be 15 cm higher than the plans indicate. To guarantee a smooth intersection, this difference has to be distributed over the remaining 100 m of paving. To handle these situations, the application allows the possibility of adding shifts to the existing design data. A shift is applied when selecting the element to stake out/check. ) Centreline shifts Shifts do not change the stored design. They are applied temporarily for stake out purposes. Horizontal and vertical shifts Horizontal shifts are always perpendicular to the centre ine whereas vertical shifts are applied along the plumb line. a Road_013 b a) Horizontal alignment with constant shift (plan view) b) Vertical alignment with constant shift (profile view) Constant and linear shifts are supported For both horizontal and vertical shifts, two different types can be applied: Constant: Linear: Viva Series, Roads - General The shift remains the same from its start chainage or station to the end chainage or station. The shift is linearly interpolated along the chainage or station. 1007 a b c Tunnel_025 a) Constant shift b) Linear shift Sign convention The sign convention for design shifts is identical to the conventions used for centreline offset and height shifts difference. d (-) e (-) Tunnel_011 Design profile shift a b (+) c (+) a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Positive horizontal shift Positive vertical shift Negative horizontal shift Negative vertical shift A shift can be applied to the design profile. The shift is applied perpendicularly to the design profile at any point along the design profile. Viva Series, Roads - General 1008 A positive shift will increase the size of the profile, a negative shift will decrease the size of the profile. a (-) b c (+) d (-) e (+) Tunnel_012 Viva Series, Roads - General a) b) c) d) e) Design profile with negative shift Original design profile Design profile with positive shift Negative shift Positive shift 1009 36 Roads - Alignment Editor 36.1 Basic Terms Description A • • • road the the the surface can be thought of three different types of design elements: horizontal alignment vertical alignment cross section Basic concepts a bc B’ B’’ B’’’ A’ A’’ TS_051 A’’’ a b c A’’/B’’ A’/B’ A’’’/B’’’ - Natural surface. The vertical alignment. The horizontal alignment. Points on horizontal alignment Points on real surface Points on vertical alignment Any point A in a project has ENH coordinates in a determined coordinate system. Each point has three different positions: • A’ - Point on real surface • A’’ - Point on horizontal alignment • A’’’- Point on vertical alignment Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1010 By adding a second point B to the project an alignment is defined. The alignment can be thought in three ways: • Horizontal alignment (A’’-B’’) • Projection of the horizontal alignment onto the real surface (A’-B’) • Vertical alignment (A’’’-B’’’) The angle between the horizontal and the vertical alignment is the grade (α). Geometric elements ) A • • • road design is fitted to a base plan or map using the three basic geometric elements: Straight Curve Spiral Refer to "Appendix H Glossary" for a definition of the terms. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1011 36.2 Starting Alignment Editor 36.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Alignment Editor. Alignment Editor Startup OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "36.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Select an option and press OK. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1012 36.2.2 Creating a New Alignment Access Select Create new alignment in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK. New Alignment OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "36.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the new Alignment editor raw alignment. Description Editable field Optional description of the new raw alignment. Creator Editable field Optional description of the creator of this alignment. Alignment type Selectable list Device Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor Selectable list Defines if the alignment is for Roadrunner Road or Rail applications. The device on which the new Alignment editor raw alignment will be stored. Depending on the inserted memory devices, this field may be a display only field. 1013 Next step Press OK to access the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu". Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1014 36.2.3 Modifying an Existing Alignment Access Select Edit existing alignment in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK. Select Alignment Description of fields Field Option Description Alignment name Selectable list All existing Alignment editor raw alignments currently stored in the \Data\XML folder with the file extension *.xml. Alignment type Selectable list Defines if the alignment is for Roadrunner Road or Rail applications. Next step Highlight the Alignment name field and press ENTER. Alignments OK To select the highlighted raw alignment and continue. New.. To create a new raw alignment. Refer to "36.2.2 Creating a New Alignment". Edit.. To edit the name and description of an existing raw alignment. Delete To delete an existing raw alignment. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1015 More To switch the last column between Date, Time and Size. CF card, SD card or Intrnl To change between viewing jobs stored on another data storage device or internal memory. Fn Backup To restore a raw alignment file with the extension *.xmb currently stored in the \Data\XML folder. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Press OK to select the highlighted raw alignment and return to the Select Alignment screen. Press OK to access the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu". Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1016 36.2.4 Importing Alignment Data Access 1) Select Import alignment from file in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK. 2) Create a new alignment in the New Alignment screen. Refer to "36.2.2 Creating a New Alignment". 3) Press OK. Import Line OK To import the selected alignment data to active raw alignment. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "36.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description The file type of the data source. Data source Survey job To import lines or areas from the selected control job. Road job To import lines from an existing Road job. Road+ (GSI format) To import GSI alignment data. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1017 Field Option Description From job Selectable list All jobs are available for selection. Available for Survey job and Road job. Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the selected Survey job or Road job. Line Selectable list Line or area element from the selected job. Available for Survey job. Alignment Selectable list Stringline from the selected Road job. The stringline must be stored in the \dbx folder of the memory device to be selectable. Available for Road job. Alignment (.aln) file Selectable list Horizontal alignment file in GSI format. The GSI alignment file must be stored in the \GSI folder of the memory device to be selectable. Available for Road+ (GSI format). Vertical (.prf) file Selectable list Vertical alignment file in GSI format. The GSI alignment file must be stored in the \GSI folder of the memory device to be selectable. Available for Road+ (GSI format). Next step OK imports the selected alignment data and accesses the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu". Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1018 36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu Access This screen is always accessed after successfully creating, editing or importing an alignment file from the Alignment Editor Startup screen. Alignment Editor Menu Description of options Option Description Edit horizontal alignment To create, edit and delete elements of a horizontal alignment. Refer to "36.4 Edit Horizontal Alignments". Edit vertical alignment To create, edit and delete elements of a vertical alignment. Refer to "36.5 Edit Vertical Alignments". Edit cross section templates To create, edit and delete cross section templates. Refer to "36.6 Edit Cross Section Templates". Only available for road jobs. Edit cross section assignments To create, edit and delete cross section assignments. Refer to "36.7 Edit Cross Section Assignments". Only available for road jobs. Edit chainage equation To create, edit and delete chainage equations. Refer to "36.8 Edit Chainage Equation". Convert to RoadRunner job To convert existing LandXML alignments to a RoadRunner job. Refer to "36.9 Convert to RoadRunner Job". To be able to convert alignments to a Roadrunner job, at least a horizontal alignment must exist. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1019 36.3 Configuring Alignment Editor Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Alignment Editor. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Quality control page OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Check horizontal deflection Check box Possibility to do a deflection check for the horizontal alignment. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1020 Field Option Description Horiz limit Editable field The deflection tolerance for horizontal alignments. The tolerance value used for determining deflection errors. A deflection error occurs when the beginning curve tangent of an element does not match the ending tangent of the previous element. If the actual error in deflection is greater than this value, the error will be reported. Check vertical deflection Check box Possibility to do a deflection check for the vertical alignment. Vert limit Editable field Confirm end Check box coordinates of segment before storing The deflection tolerance for vertical alignments. If this box is checked, then each time a new alignment element has been entered, a confirmation message displays the end coordinates for confirmation. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Configuration, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Description Parameter defining the parabola. Vertical parabola definition Parameter p Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1021 Field Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor Option Description K factor K factor = Parameter p/100. 1022 36.4 Edit Horizontal Alignments 36.4.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing and deleting of the following elements: • • • • • • Start Point Straight (Tangent) Curve Clothoid Cubic Parabola Partial Bloss as well as checking the horizontal alignment. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit horizontal alignment. Press OK. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1023 Horizontal Alignment OK To accept the screen entries and return to the Alignment Editor Menu. Add To add a new horizontal element after the highlighted element. Edit.. To edit the highlighted element of the horizontal alignment. Delete To delete the highlighted element of the horizontal alignment. Either all following elements or only the next element can be adjusted. Check To check the horizontal alignment. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1024 36.4.2 Editing the Start Point Access In Horizontal Alignment, highlight the start point and press Edit... Horizontal Start Point OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Get Pt To apply coordinates or heights from an existing point in the working job. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "36.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Start chainage Editable field Start chainage of the horizontal alignment. Easting Editable field Easting of the start point of the horizontal alignment. Northing Editable field Northing of the start point of the horizontal alignment. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1025 Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1026 36.4.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Horizontal Alignment Access In Horizontal Alignment, highlight the start point, or an element if one exists, and press Add or Edit... Elements can be added after the start point and either before or after other elements. ) Add Horizontal Element ) Creating and editing an alignment element are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of an alignment element is explained and differences are clearly outlined. Description of fields Field Option Description Element type Straight To insert/edit a straight to/in a horizontal alignment. Curve To insert/edit a curve to/in a horizontal alignment. Clothoid To insert/edit a clothoid to/in a horizontal alignment. Cubic parabola To insert/edit a cubic parabola to/in a horizontal alignment. Bloss To insert/edit a bloss curve to/in a horizontal alignment. Only available for rail jobs. The options available for the field Method depend on the Element type selected. For Element type: Straight Field Option Description Method Azimuth & length Using the azimuth and the length of the straight. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1027 Field Option Description Azi & end chainage Using the azimuth and the end chainage of the straight. End coords Using the end coordinates of the straight. For Element type: Curve Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the curve and its length. Radius & delta Using the radius and the delta angle of the curve. Radius & end chain Using the radius of the curve and the end chainage. Radius & end coords Using the radius and the end coordinates of the curve. Center & end coords Using the coordinates of the centre point and the end point of the curve. 3 points Using three points. For Element type: Clothoid Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the clothoid and its length. Radius & end chain Using the radius of the clothoid and the end chainage. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1028 Field Option Description Param & length Using the parameter A and the length of the connecting curve. Param & end chain Using the parameter A and the end chainage of the spiral. Radius & parameter Using the parameter A and the radius. For Element type: Cubic parabola Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the cubic parabola and its length. Radius & end chain Using the radius of the cubic parabola and the end chainage. For Element type: Bloss Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the connecting curve and its length. Radius & end chain Using the radius of the connecting curve and its end chainage. Rad,lngth,end coord Using the radius, length and end coordinates of the bloss curve. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1029 Next step OK to access the next screen. Horizontal Straight/Horizontal Curve/Horizontal Clothoid/Horizontal Cubic Parabola/Horizontal Bloss, Input page Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Inv.. To calculate the distance and angle between two points from the working job. Last.. To select values from the last inverse calculations. Get Pt To apply coordinates or heights from an existing point in the working job. Available when coordinates must be typed in. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Available when coordinates must be typed in. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access the Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. 1030 Description of fields Field Option Description Start chainage Display only The end chainage of the start point / previous element is automatically used and cannot be edited. The other fields and options available depend on the Method and Element type selected in Add Horizontal Element. For Element type: Straight Field Option Description Azimuth Editable field The azimuth displayed is from the previous element. Another value can be entered manually. Available for Method: Azimuth & length or Method: Azi & end chainage. End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for Method: Azi & end chainage. End easting Editable field Easting for the end chainage. Available for Method: End coords. End northing Editable field Northing for the end chainage. Available for Method: End coords. Length Editable field Length of the straight element. Available for Method: Azimuth & length. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1031 For Element type: Curve Field Option Description Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This azimuth is used from the previous element. The value can be edited. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & delta or Method: Radius & end chain. CP easting Editable field Easting of the centre point of the curve. Available for Method: Center & end coords. CP northing Editable field Northing of the centre point of the curve. Available for Method: Center & end coords. Curve direction Right or Left The direction of the curve when looking in the direction of increasing chainage. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & delta, Method: Radius & end chain or Method: Radius & end coords. Radius Editable field Radius of the curve. The signs are set by the system depending on the curve direction defined in Curve direction. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & delta, Method: Radius & end chain or Method: Radius & end coords. Delta Editable field The deflection angle. Available for Method: Radius & delta. Length Editable field Length from the start to the end point of the curve. Available for Method: Radius & length. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1032 Field Option Description End chainage Editable field The end chainage of the curve element can be typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end chain. Int easting Editable field Easting of the intermediate point of the 3-pt-arc. Available for Method: 3 points. Int northing Editable field Northing of the intermediate point of the 3-pt-arc. Available for Method: 3 points. End easting Editable field Easting for the end chainage. Available for Method: Radius & end coords, Method: Center & end coords and Method: 3 points. End northing Editable field Northing for the end chainage. Available for Method: Radius & end coords, Method: Center & end coords and Method: 3 points. For Element type: Clothoid Field Option Description Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This azimuth is used from the previous element. The value can be edited. Spiral direction Right or Left The direction of the clothoid looking in the direction of increasing chainage. Spiral in/out Spiral in For transition from tangent to curve. Spiral out For transition from curve to tangent. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1033 Field Option Description Radius Editable field Radius of the clothoid. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & end chain and Method: Radius & parameter. Parameter A Editable field The parameter A defining the clothoids. Available for Method: Param & end chain, Method: Param & length and Method: Radius & parameter. Length Editable field Length of the clothoid element. Available for Method: Param & length and Method: Radius & length. Start radius Editable field The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius & end chain when Use partial spiral is checked. End radius Editable field The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius & end chain when Use partial spiral is checked. End chainage Editable field The end chainage of the clothoid can be typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end chain and Method: Param & end chain. Use partial spiral Check box To create partial clothoids. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius & end chain. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1034 For Element type: Cubic parabola Field Option Description Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This azimuth is used from the previous element. The value can be edited. Spiral direction Right or Left The direction of the cubic parabola looking in the direction of increasing chainage. Spiral in/out Spiral in For a transition from tangent to curve. Spiral out For a transition from curve to tangent. Radius Editable field Radius of the cubic parabola. Start radius Editable field The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available when Use partial spiral is checked. End radius Editable field The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available when Use partial spiral is checked. Length Editable field Length of the cubic parabola element. Available for Method: Radius & length. End chainage Editable field The end chainage of the cubic parabola element can be typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end chain. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1035 Field Option Description Use partial spiral Check box To create partial cubic parabolas. For Element type: Bloss Field Option Description Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This azimuth is used from the previous element. The value can be edited. Spiral direction Right or Left The direction of the bloss looking in the direction of increasing chainage. Spiral in/out Spiral in For a transition from tangent to curve. Spiral out For a transition from curve to tangent. Radius Editable field Radius of the bloss. Start radius Editable field The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available for Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. End radius Editable field The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available for Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1036 Field Option Description Length Editable field Length of the bloss curve element. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. End chainage Editable field The end chainage of the bloss curve element can be typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end chain. End easting Editable field Easting for the end chainage. Available for Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. End northing Editable field Northing for the end chainage. Available for Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. Next step Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are displayed. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1037 36.5 Edit Vertical Alignments 36.5.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing and deleting of the following elements: • • • • Start Point Straight (Tangent) Parabola Curve as well as checking the vertical alignment. Throughout the whole component height and elevation is used for local orthometric height. If no local orthometric height is available, the local ellipsoidal height is used instead. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit vertical alignment. Press OK. Vertical Alignment The available keys are identical to the keys in Horizontal Alignment. Refer to the paragraph "Horizontal Alignment". Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1038 36.5.2 Editing the Start Point Access In Vertical Alignment, highlight the start point and press Edit... Vertical Start Point OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Get Pt To apply heights from an existing point in the working job. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Start chainage Editable field Start chainage of the vertical alignment. Elevation Editable field Elevation at the start chainage of the vertical alignment. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1039 36.5.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Vertical Alignment Access In Vertical Alignment, highlight the start point and press Add or Edit... ) ) Add Vertical Element Creating and editing an alignment element are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of an alignment element is explained and differences are clearly outlined. For grade units, the system settings are applied. Refer to "23.1 Regional settings" to change the system setting. Description of fields Field Option Description Element type Straight To insert/edit a straight to/in a vertical alignment. Parabola To insert/edit a parabola to/in a vertical alignment. Curve To insert/edit a curve to/in a vertical alignment. The options available for the field Method depend on the Element type selected. For Element type: Straight Field Option Method Length & end elev Using the length and the end elevation of the straight. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor Description End chain & elev Using the end chainage and the elevation of the straight Length & grade Using the length and the grade of the straight. 1040 Field Option Description End chain & grade Using the end chainage and the grade of the straight. For Element type: Parabola Field Option Description Method Length & grades Using the length and the grades of the parabola. End chain & grades Using the end chainage and the grades of the parabola. Param & end elev Using the parameter and the end elevation of the parabola. 3 elevations Using three elevations at defined chainages of the parabola. For Element type: Curve Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the curve and its length. Radius & end chain Using the radius and the end chainage of the curve. Radius & grades Using the radius and the grades of the curve. Length & grades Using the length and the grades of the curve. End chain & grades Using start, intermediate and end elevation and chainage of the curve. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1041 Next step OK to access the next screen. Vertical Straight/Vertical Parabola/Vertical Curve, Input page Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Inv.. To calculate the distance and angle between two points from the working job. Last.. To select values from the last inverse calculations. Get Pt To apply coordinates or heights from an existing point in the working job. Available when coordinates must be typed in. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Available when elevation must be typed in. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access the Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn %/V:H/H:V To switch between h:v, v:h and % for the grade unit. 1042 Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Start chainage Display only The end chainage of the previous element is automatically used and cannot be edited. Start elevation Display only The end height of the previous element is automatically used and cannot be edited. The other fields and options available depend on the Method and Element type selected in Add Vertical Element. For Element type: Straight Field Option Description Length Editable field Length of the straight element as slope distance. Available for Method: Length & end elev and Method: Length & grade. End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for Method: End chain & elev and Method: End chain & grade. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1043 Field Option Description End elevation Editable field Height at the end of the element. Type in manually or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus is on this line to select the height from an existing point in the working job. Available for Method: Length & end elev and Method: End chain & elev. Grade Editable field The grade of the straight element. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for Method: Length & grade and Method: End chain & grade. For Element type: Parabola Field Option Description Curve type Crest The curve type is convex. Available for Method: Param & end elev. Sag The curve type is concave. Available for Method: Param & end elev. Parameter p or Editable field K factor Parameter of the parabola. Available for Method: Param & end elev. The field name depends on the value chosen for the Vertical parabola definition in the Configuration, Advanced page. Editable field Length of the parabola as horizontal distance. Available for Method: Length & grades and Method: Param & end elev. Length Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1044 Field Option Description Int chainage Editable field Chainage of the second elevation. Available for Method: 3 elevations. Int elevation Editable field Second elevation. Type in manually or press Get Pt when the focus is on this line to select the height from an existing point in the working job. Available for Method: 3 elevations. End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for Method: End chain & grades and Method: 3 elevations. End elevation Editable field Height at the end of the element. Type in manually or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus is on this line to select the height from an existing point in the working job. Available for Method: Param & end elev and Method: 3 elevations. Grade in Editable field The grade at the beginning of the parabola. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for parabolas with Method: Length & grades and Method: End chain & grades. Grade out Editable field The grade at the end of the parabola. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for Method: Length & grades and Method: End chain & grades. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1045 For Element type: Curve Field Option Description Curve type Crest The curve type is convex. Sag The curve type is concave. Radius Editable field Radius of the curve. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & end chain and Method: Radius & grades. Length Editable field Length of the curve along the segment. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Length & grades. End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for Method: End chain & grades and Method: Radius & end chain. End elevation Editable field Height at the end of the element. Type in manually or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus is on this line to select the height from an existing point in the working job. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius & end chain. Grade in Editable field The grade at the beginning of the parabola. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for Method: Radius & grades, Method: Length & grades and Method: End chain & grades. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1046 Field Option Description Grade out Editable field The grade at the end of the parabola. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for Method: Radius & grades, Method: Length & grades and Method: End chain & grades. Next step Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are displayed. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1047 36.6 Edit Cross Section Templates 36.6.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing, deleting and duplicating of cross section templates. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit cross section templates. Press OK. Templates OK To accept the screen entries and continue. New.. To create a new cross section template. Edit.. To edit the highlighted cross section template. Delete To delete the highlighted cross section template. Duplct To duplicate the highlighted template. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1048 36.6.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template Access In Templates press New.. to create a new cross section template OR highlight an existing template and press Edit... ) Creating and editing a cross section template are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of a cross section template is explained and differences are clearly outlined. New Template, General page OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access the Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Template name Editable field Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor Description Name of the cross section template to be created/edited. 1049 Field Option Allow absolute Check box heights for cross section definition Center height Editable field Description If this box is checked, in addition to relative to line input methods, absolute heights can also be entered to define cross section segments. To be able to create segments using absolute heights, a centre height must be defined. Available if Allow absolute heights for cross section definition is checked. Next step Page changes to the Layers page where the layers of the template are listed. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1050 36.6.3 Add/Edit a Layer Access In New Template/Edit Template, Layers page, press New.. or Edit... ) Creating and editing a layer of a cross section template are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of a layer is explained and differences are clearly outlined. New Layer, Segments OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Add To create and add a new segment. Edit.. To edit the highlighted segment. Delete To delete the highlighted segment. More To switch between CL horizontal offset, Slope distance, Horiz distance in the second column and between CL vertical offset, Slope ratio, Vertical distance in the third column. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Mirror To mirror the entered segments to the other side of the cross section. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1051 Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Name List of segments of the selected layer. CL horizontal offset Horizontal offset to the centre line of the segment. CL vertical offset Vertical offset to the centre line of the segment. Slope distance Slope distance to the neighbouring vertex. Slope ratio Slope ratio of the segment. Horiz distance Horizontal distance to the neighbouring vertex. Vertical distance Vertical distance to the neighbouring vertex. Next step Add to add a segment. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1052 Add Segment, Input page OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Inv.. To calculate the distance and angle between two points from the working job. Last.. To select values from the last inverse calculations. %/V:H/H:V To switch between h:v, v:h and % for the slope ratio. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access the Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Template name Display only Name of the cross section template to be edited. Display only Name of the cross section template to be edited. Layer name Method Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor Method to be used for defining the segment. 1053 Field Option Description Horiz dist & slope Using a horizontal distance and slope ratio to define the segment. Horiz dist & vert dist Using a horizontal distance and a vertical distance to define the segment. CL offsets Using a horizontal and vertical offset in relation to the centre line. Slope dist & ratio Using a slope distance and slope ratio to define the segment. Horiz dist & height Using a horizontal and absolute height to define the segment. Only available for templates with Allow absolute heights for cross section definition enabled. CL offset & height Using a horizontal offset in relation to the centre line and absolute height. Only available for templates with Allow absolute heights for cross section definition enabled. Horiz distance Editable field Horizontal distance of the segment. Available for Method: Horiz dist & slope and Method: Horiz dist & vert dist. Vertical distance Editable field Vertical distance of the segment. Available for Method: Horiz dist & vert dist. CL horizontal offset Editable field Horizontal centre line offset of the segment. Only available for Method: CL offsets. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1054 Field Option Description CL vertical offset Editable field Vertical centre line offset of the segment. Only available for Method: CL offsets. Slope distance Editable field Slope ratio Editable field Slope distance of the segment. Only available for Method: Slope dist & ratio. Slope ratio of the segment. Available for Method: Horiz dist & slope and Method: Slope dist & ratio. Next step Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are displayed. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1055 36.7 Edit Cross Section Assignments 36.7.1 Overview Description Allows the creation, editing and deleting of cross section assignments as well as checking the cross section assignments. A cross section assignment defines from which chainage on a cross section template is to be used. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit cross section assignment. Press OK. Cross Section Assignments OK To accept the screen entries and continue. New.. To create a new cross section assignment. Edit.. To edit a cross section assignment. Delete To delete a cross section assignment. Check To check the cross section assignments. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1056 36.7.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Assignment Access In Cross Section Assignments press New.. or Edit... ) ) Creating and editing a cross section assignment are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of a cross section assignment is explained and differences are clearly outlined. Assigned cross section templates must contain the same number of vertices. New Cross Section Assgnmnt OK To accept the screen entries and continue. StartCh To take the start chainage of the vertical alignment for Chainage. End Ch To take the end chainage of the vertical alignment for Chainage. Fn Config.. To access Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Chainage Editable field The chainage to which the cross section template is assigned to. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1057 Field Option Description Type in or edit the value for Chainage. Alternatively press StartCh or End Ch to apply the start or end chainage of the vertical alignment. Template name Selectable list The cross section template to be assigned to. All existing cross section templates currently stored to the alignment can be selected. Select an existing template from the list or create a new one to be assigned to the Chainage. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1058 36.8 Edit Chainage Equation 36.8.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing and deleting of: • Gaps • Overlaps Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit chainage equation. Press OK. Chainage Equation OK To accept the screen entries and continue. New.. To create a new chainage equation. Edit.. To edit a chainage equation. Delete To delete a chainage equation. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1059 36.8.2 Creating/editing a Chainage Equation Access In Chainage Equation press New.. or Edit... ) Creating and editing a Chainage equation are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of a Chainage equation is explained and differences are clearly outlined. New Chainage Equation Description of fields Field Option Chainage back Editable field Chainage ahead Editable field Description Chainage back. Type in or edit the value. Chainage ahead. Type in or edit the value. Next step OK to create the chainage equation or to store the edited chainage equation. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1060 36.9 Convert to RoadRunner Job Description Allows the onboard conversion of existing LandXML alignments including horizontal alignment, vertical alignment, cross sections and chainage equations to a RoadRunner job. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Convert to RoadRunner job. Press OK. Convert to Road Job/ Convert to Rail Job Description of fields Field Option From alignment Display only To road job Selectable list Description Displays the modified or newly created alignment to be converted. The Road job to which the alignment will be converted. Create a new job. Available if the Alignment type is set to Road in Select Alignment. ) To rail job Selectable list The Rail job to which the alignment will be converted. Create a new job. Available if the Alignment type is set to Rail in Select Alignment. ) Conversion mode Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor If a new job with the same name as an existing job must be created, then the existing job must be deleted first. If a new job with the same name as an existing job must be created, then the existing job must be deleted first. Defines the mode to be used for the conversion process. 1061 Field Option Description Horiz & vert Only horizontal and vertical alignment will be converted. Horizontal only Only horizontal alignment will be converted. Hz,vert,cross section Horizontal alignment, vertical alignment and cross sections will be converted. Only available for road jobs. Next step Press OK to start the conversion. Alignment Editor creates a report sheet during the conversion. The file LandXml2Dbx.log can be found in the \Data\XML folder on the data storage device. After the successful conversion, press OK to return to the Main Menu on the instrument. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1062 37 Roads - Road 37.1 Creating a New Road Job Description There are two ways of creating road/rail jobs: Typing them in manually by using the Alignment Editor application. OR Converting data created in a design package. Manually entered data Data can be typed in and edited with Alignment Editor. Refer to "36 Roads - Alignment Editor" for information on how to enter data manually. Converted data The Design to Field component of LEICA Geo Office offers converters from several road/rail design and CAD packages. Several design packages also include a built-in converter to Roads/Rail. As different design packages follow different philosophies in representation, creation and storage of data the conversion process differs slightly. LEICA Geo Office Road_065 LEICA Geo Office can be found on the LEICA Geo Office DVD. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1063 The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of: • myWorld@Leica Geosystems https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com • of the Leica Geosystems website: http://www.leica-geosystems.com/en/page_catalog.htm?cid=3291 Viva Series, Roads - Road 1064 37.2 Defining the Work 37.2.1 Defining the Method and the Task Access 1) Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Roads - Stakeout or Roads - As built check. 2) In the screen Job Selection, select the required jobs. Refer to "35.4.1 Choosing a Job". 3) Press OK Define the Work to be Done OK To continue to the next screen. Fn Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Method To define what is shown in the selectable list for Method to use. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of the methods Viva Series, Roads - Road Method Description Stringline To stake/check any type of line, for example a centreline or kerb. Chainage information is related to the centreline. Individual stringline Like the previous method when staking/checking any line of a layer. The stake/check is always in relation to the chainage of the line itself and not the centreline of the layer. 1065 Method Description Cross slope To stake/check a cross slope defined by the road design. Two stringlines define the cross slope (a lane or running surface). Manual slope To stake/check a manually defined slope relative to an existing centreline. The slope is defined by one stringline (hinge point) and the slope direction with ratio. Slope To stake/check a slope defined by two stringlines of the 3D road design. Crown To stake/check a road crown defined by two cross slopes and one common stringline. The information for both cross slopes is displayed at the same time. Layer To stake/check a layer surface defined by the road design relative to the layer centreline. DTM To checks a DTM surface. Available for Roads - As built check only. Next step OK accesses the Define Task screen. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1066 Define Task screen OK To continue to the next screen. Slope Available for Method to use: Manual slope and Method to use: Slope. To define the slope parameters. Refer to "37.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings". Shifts.. To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the selected element. Refer to "35.5 Working with Shifts". Load.. To load a task. Refer to "35.6 Tasks". Save.. To save the settings as a task. Refer to "35.6 Tasks". Page Available for Method to use: Manual slope. To change to Hinge offset page. Fn Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. The fields available depend on the selection for Method to use in Define the Work to be Done. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1067 Description of fields Common to all methods Field Option Description Layer Display only or selectable list The selected layer in the working job. For Method to use: Stringline Viva Series, Roads - Road Field Option Description Working chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage. Line Selectable list To select a stringline. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line". Toggle offsets left/right Check box When this box is checked, points can be staked/checked on the left/right side of the centreline in one process. Refer to "37.2.4 Toggle Offsets Right/Left". 1068 Viva Series, Roads - Road Field Option Description Refer to an additional line Check box When this box is checked, a second stringline can be selected. Allows chainage, offset and height difference information to be obtained from any other string of the layer, independent from those strings currently selected for the chosen method. For example: Staking a cross slope where the height information comes from the cross slope, but the chainage information comes from a string which is not the centreline of the current layer. For the additional line, an offset and a height difference can be defined on the Offsets page. Line Selectable list The stringlines available as second stringlines. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line". 1069 For Method to use: Individual stringline Field Option Description Line Selectable list To select a stringline. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line". Toggle offsets left/right Check box When this box is checked, points can be staked/checked on the left/right side of the centreline in one process. Refer to "37.2.4 Toggle Offsets Right/Left". Refer to an additional line Check box When this box is checked, a second stringline can be selected. Allows chainage, offset and height difference information to be obtained from any other string of the layer independent from those strings currently used. For example: Staking a cross slope where the height information comes from the cross slope but the chainage information comes from a string which is not the centreline of the current layer. Line Selectable list The stringlines available as second stringlines. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line". For Method to use: Cross slope Viva Series, Roads - Road Field Option Description Working chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage. 1070 Field Option Description Left stringline Selectable list The name of the left stringline defining the cross slope. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line". Right stringline Display only Viva Series, Roads - Road The name of the right stringline defining the cross slope. Reference line Left stringline or Right stringline To select one of the stringlines to be used as the reference line. Toggle offsets left/right Check box When this box is checked, points can be staked/checked on the left/right side of the centreline in one process. Refer to "37.2.4 Toggle Offsets Right/Left". Refer to an additional line Check box When this box is checked, a second stringline can be selected. Allows chainage, offset and height difference information to be obtained from any other string of the layer independent from those strings currently used. For example: Staking a cross slope where the height information comes from the cross slope but the chainage information comes from a string which is not the centreline of the current layer. Line Selectable list The stringlines available as second stringlines. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line". 1071 For Method to use: Manual slope Field Option Description On the Slope page: Working chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage. Hinge line Selectable list To select the hinge point of the slope. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line". Slope type Cut right, Cut left, Differentiates if the defined slope is a cut/fill and Fill right or Fill left left/right. a Road_079 a) b) c) d) e) Slope ratio Viva Series, Roads - Road Editable field b c d e Hinge Point Cut left Cut right Fill left Fill right Defines the ratio of the slope. The slope ratio format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings, Slope page. ) 1072 Field Option Description On the Hinge offset page: Apply hinge offsets Check box When this box is check, a horizontal and vertical offset of the hinge point can be defined. The vertical offset type for the hinge point. Offset type Absolute The only option available for 2D lines. Relative to line or Relative to DTM Available for 3D lines. Offset Editable field The horizontal offset of the hinge point from the centreline/reference line. Elevation Editable field The elevation of the hinge point (absolute height). Available for Offset type: Absolute. Height difference Editable field For Offset type: Relative to line: A vertical offset for the hinge point using a height difference can be defined. For Offset type: Relative to DTM: A height difference to the DTM height can be applied. For Method to use: Slope Viva Series, Roads - Road Field Option Description Working chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage. Left stringline Selectable list The name of the left stringline defining the slope. 1073 Field Option Right stringline Display only Reference line Left stringline or Right stringline Description The name of the right stringline defining the slope. To select one of the stringlines to be used as the reference line (= hinge line). For Method to use: Crown Field Option Description Working chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage. Crown line Selectable list Stringline defining the middle line of the crown. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line". Left stringline Display only The name of the stringline defining left line of the crown. Right stringline Display only Viva Series, Roads - Road The name of the stringline defining right line of the crown. Reference line Left stringline or Right stringline To select one of the stringlines to be used as the reference line. Toggle offsets left/right Check box When this box is checked, points can be staked/checked on the left/right side of the centreline in one process. Refer to "37.2.4 Toggle Offsets Right/Left". 1074 Field Option Description Refer to an additional line Check box When this box is checked, a second stringline can be selected. Allows chainage, offset and height difference information to be obtained from any other string of the layer independent from those strings currently used. For example: Staking a cross slope where the height information comes from the cross slope but the chainage information comes from a string which is not the centreline of the current layer. Line Selectable list The stringlines available as second stringlines. For Method to use: Layer Field Option Description Layer Selectable list A list of all available layers of the selected Road job. Centreline Display only Active centreline of the selected layer. Extend end slopes Check box When this box is checked, the left most and right most end slopes of the design are extended. For Method to use: DTM, available for Roads - As built check Viva Series, Roads - Road Field Option Description DTM layer Display only A list of all DTM surfaces available in the selected DTM job. 1075 Field Option Description Number of triangles Display only Number of triangles the selected DTM consists of. Next step OK to access the Stake or Check screen. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1076 37.2.2 Selecting a Line Access In the Define screen, open a selectable list for a line, for example for Line or Left stringline. ) Lines The selection of stringlines depends on: • Availability of horizontal alignments • Availability of vertical alignment information • View (plan or cross section view) • Working chainage defined or not • Selected method If no working chainage has been entered, the list shows all stringlines of the current layer. If a working chainage is available, all stringlines existing at that chainage are listed only. OK To return to the previous screen. More To display information about the absolute height or the height difference. Unavailable for individual stringlines. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1077 Description of columns ) Column Description Line name The name of the line. CL offset The offset from the centreline. The format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings. Height The absolute height of the line. Ht diff The height difference to the centreline. In addition to the list selection the required lines and slopes can also be selected on Plot page. Lines can be selected in a graphical way by using the • cross section view. The cross section view is available if a working chainage has been defined. • planar view which is always available. The defined working chainage is displayed as a grey line. The size corresponds to the working corridor settings. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1078 <-To select the previous line. --> To select the next line. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1079 37.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings Access Press Slope in the Define screen. General slope stakeout Description This method involves a generic approach to slope stakeout for direct stakeout of the catch point. No special batter rails or reference point parameters are defined. c b a) Slope to stake out b) Natural surface c) Catch point a Road_055 Workflow As the natural surface is unknown the catch point can only be staked out iteratively. If staking out on a horizontal natural surface, the values shown for ∆ offset indicates how far the catch point is away. If the natural surface is not horizontal, more iterations could be needed. Slope Stakeout Settings Description of fields Common to all types Field Option Use advanced Check box slope stakeout Viva Series, Roads - Road Description When this box is checked, slope stakeout settings are available. 1080 Field Option Description Type Reference Point Stakeout of a reference peg with a defined offset from the catch point. Refer to "Slope staking using Reference Point". Batter rail Stakeout of batter rails with defined peg heights. Refer to "Slope staking using Batter rail". Reference batter Stakeout of batter rails with a defined offset from the catch point. Refer to "Slope staking using Reference batter". Ref point surface Stakeout of a reference peg in the slope surface with a defined height difference to the hinge point. Slope values for the reference point cannot be entered. Refer to "Slope staking using Ref point surface". For Use advanced slope stakeout: Reference Point Field Option Description Ref offset Editable field The defined offset of the reference point from the catch point. For Use advanced slope stakeout: Batter rail Field Option Description Batter type Cut or Fill Defines the cut or fill rail. Rail over batter Editable field Viva Series, Roads - Road The vertical height of the rail top above the batter. 1081 Field Option Description Rail over ground Editable field The vertical height of the rail over the ground. For Use advanced slope stakeout: Reference batter Field Option Description Ref offset Editable field The defined offset of the inner peg from the catch point. Traveler height Editable field The vertical height of the rail above the batter. For Use advanced slope stakeout: Ref point surface The only available fields are Use advanced slope stakeout and Type. Next step OK returns to the Define screen. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1082 Slope staking using Reference Point Description When staking out slopes using the reference point method, the catch point of the slope is marked with a reference peg using a defined offset. The grade of the slope is marked and controlled by "grade checkers". d b c a Road_022 e a) b) c) d) e) Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Defined reference point offset Reference peg The reference point offset guarantees that all pegs are placed with the same horizontal offset to the catch point. Workflow 1 2 e b d a Road_023 Viva Series, Roads - Road c c d g f a) b) c) d) e) Slope to stake out Natural surface Real catch point Projected catch point Approximate staked out catch point after three iterations f) Defined reference point offset g) Reference peg 1083 Step Description 1. The first step when staking out is to find the catch point of the slope. As the natural surface is unknown, this process has to be done iteratively. As soon as the measured position (e) is close enough to the real catch point (c), it can be used as the approximate catch point. Based on this approximate catch point, the projected catch point (d) on the slope is calculated. No reference point offset and no traveller height are taken into account for this step. The projected catch point (d) is then used as a starting point for the stakeout of the reference peg (g). 2. The second step is to stake out the reference point relative to the projected catch point. Select Place reference peg from the Tools menu. Values in Stake Slope Reference Point, Stake page will guide the user to the position to place the peg. The defined reference point offset (f) is already taken into account. The catch point is marked indirectly via the reference peg. Values to be marked on the reference peg can be found on Stake Slope Reference Point, Info page. The closer the real catch point and the approximated stakeout catch point are, the closer the projected catch point gets to the real catch point. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1084 Slope staking using Batter rail Description When staking out slopes with the Batter rail method,the grade of the slope is marked with a board. Using this method it is not necessary to stake out the catch point first. 1 2 1 Batter rail for a cut e e d b a c b c RR12_024 d a 2 Batter rail for a fill a) b) c) d) e) Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Rail over ground Rail over batter The defined rail over ground should guarantee that the rails are positioned as high as possible, to make them easier to use. Viva Series, Roads - Road Step Description 1. The first peg to stake out is always the peg closest to the hinge point. Stake out the position of the first peg of the batter by using ∆ offset on the Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. The height of the rail over ground Rail over ground is taken into account for ∆ offset. This action means that when ∆ offset is equal to zero the first peg is in the correct position. 2. Place the pole on top of the first peg. The value for ∆ height indicates how far below the top of the batter has to be placed. 3. Stake out the second peg of the batter rail by using ∆ chainage and place the peg. 1085 Step Description 4. Place the pole on the position of the batter rail to be used as a reference for the slope values to mark on the batter rail. ∆ height should now read zero. All values shown under the Info page are relative to the original slope. ) Slope staking using Reference batter Description This method is used if batter rails with a constant distance from the inner peg to the catch point are required. d e a) b) c) d) e) b a c Road_025 Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Defined reference point offset Height of the "traveller" Workflow Step ) Viva Series, Roads - Road Description The first step is to stake out the catch point of the slope. The reference point offset and traveller height are not taken in account in this step. Based on this approximate catch point the projected catch point on the slope is calculated. The projected catch point is used as a starting point for the stakeout of the reference peg. 1086 Step Description 1. Stake out the position of the catch point by using ∆ offset and/or ∆ height on the Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. When ∆ offset and ∆ height are equal to zero, the catch point has been located. 2. Fn Tools.. to access the Tools screen. The measured position is used as the catch point for the stake out of the reference point. 3. Select Place reference peg to access the stakeout screen for the reference peg. 4. Stake out the reference point using ∆ offset. When ∆ offset is equal to zero the reference peg position has been found. 5. Place the pole on top of the reference peg. The value for ∆ height indicates how far below the top of the peg the batter has to be placed. 6. Place the pole on the position of the batter rail to be used as a reference for the slope values to mark on the batter rail. ∆ height should now read zero. All values shown under the Info page are relative to the original slope. 7. Viva Series, Roads - Road to return to Stake Slope. Stake out the next catch point from this screen. 1087 Slope staking using Ref point surface Description When staking out slopes using the reference point surface method, the reference peg is staked out with a defined height difference to the hinge point. a b c d e f Road_096 a) b) c) d) e) f) Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Reference peg Defined hinge height difference Hinge point Workflow 1 a) b) c) d) e) 2 g e b d a Road_097 Viva Series, Roads - Road c c f h Slope to stake out Natural surface Real catch point Projected catch point Approximate staked out catch point after three iterations f) Hinge point g) Reference peg h) Defined hinge height difference 1088 Step ) The first step when staking out is to find the catch point of the slope. As the natural surface is unknown, this process has to be done iteratively. As soon as the measured position (e) is close enough to the real catch point (c), it can be used as the approximate catch point. Based on this approximate catch point, the projected catch point (d) on the slope is calculated. The projected catch point (d) is then used as a starting point for the stakeout of the surface reference peg (g). 1. Stake out the position of the catch point by using ∆ offset and/or ∆ height on the Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. When ∆ offset and ∆ height are equal to zero, the catch point has been located. 2. Define the hinge height difference. Fn Tools.. to access the Tools screen. 3. Select Place surface reference peg to access the define screen for the reference peg field. The measured position from step 1. is used as the catch point for the stake out of the reference point. The Actual hinge height difference field displays the Hinge ht diff value from the Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. Type in the appropriate value for Defined hinge ht diff. 4. Stake out the surface reference point relative to the projected catch point. Values in Stake Slope Ref Point Surface, Stake page guide you to the position to place the peg. The defined hinge height difference (h) is already taken into account. Values to be marked on the reference peg can be found on Stake Slope Ref Point Surface, Info page. 5. Viva Series, Roads - Road Description to return to Stake Slope. Stake out the next catch point from this screen. 1089 The closer the real catch point and the approximated stakeout catch point are, the closer the projected catch point gets to the real catch point. Extending design slopes When using slopes generated by a design package, the quality of the change from cut to fill or where slopes start and end, depends on the terrain model used for the project. Occasionally a cut is required where the design still shows a fill, or one of the lines defining the slope ends before intersecting with the natural surface. The application can handle these different situations with various slope extras. A message appears prompting if the slope should be extended, as soon as a measurement is taken outside of the defined design slope. The extension of a line is always based on the endtangent of the stringline. When moving back into the defined design a notification appears. Road_083 Slopes left and right of design changing from cut to fill. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1090 37.2.4 Toggle Offsets Right/Left Description If staking out a street that is defined as a centreline with offsets of 2.5 m left and right, this functionality allows to toggle between the two lines to stake out. a d b b c a) b) c) d) Road_073 Centreline Defined Stake offset Parallel right stringline Parallel left stringline This functionality is available for the following stake out/check methods: Viva Series, Roads - Road Type Description Stringline Toggle between parallel stringline left and right. Cross slope Toggle between left and right stringline of the cross slope. Crown Toggle between left and right cross slope 1091 The application automatically detects which side of the centreline is being used and selects the appropriate stringline as a reference. Auto position Viva Series, Roads - Road When pressing auto position Fn Positn a message box comes up prompting if either the left or right side should be staked out/checked. 1092 37.3 Staking/Checking the Road 37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen Stake/Check screen, General page The Stake Stringline is shown as example. Meas To start measuring the point being staked. The key changes to Stop. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Stop To end measuring the point being staked. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. After ending the measurements, the differences between the measured point and the point to be staked are displayed. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1093 Store To store the measured point. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General page, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. ChAvailable for Roads - Stakeout. To decrease the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Ch+ Available for Roads - Stakeout. To increase the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Positn To position the total station to the defined stakeout point, including defined offsets. This depends on the settings for Turn to point in Configuration, TPS page. Refer to " Configuration, TPS page". Viva Series, Roads - Road 1094 Fn Tools.. To access the method-specific Tools Menu. Refer to "37.4 The Tools Menu". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field ) Option Description The following fields are always shown in all Stake and Check methods. Point ID Editable field Name of the next point to be stored. The ID is incremented/decremented whenever a point gets stored. Antenna Editable field Height of the antenna. Editable field Height of the prism. height Target height ) The following fields are always shown in all Stake methods, except for method Layer. Stake chainage Editable field Chainge increment ) Viva Series, Roads - Road Editable field Nominal chainage of the point to be staked out. Chainage increment. Value by which the nominal chainage increases/decreases when pressing Ch/Ch+. The following field is shown in the Stake and Check methods except for Slope andManual slope. 1095 Field Option Description Use manual height instead of design heights Check box When this box is checked, a height value typed in manually is used instead of design height or DTM height. When this box is not checked, the height from design is used. Manual height Editable field The height to be used. Next step Page changes to the Offsets page. Stake/Check screen, Offsets page Viva Series, Roads - Road Refer to "Stake/Check screen, General page" for a description of keys. Description of fields Field Option Description Apply offsets Check box When this box is checked, the defined stake/check offsets are applied. Stake offset Editable field Available for Stake. Horizontal offset from the reference stringline (as defined by the chosen method) of the point to stake. Stake height diff Editable field Available for Stake. Vertical offset from the reference stringline or surface (as defined by the chosen method) of the point to stake. Check offset Editable field Available for Check. Horizontal offset from the reference stringline, as defined by the chosen method, of the point to stake. 1096 Field Option Description Check height diff Editable field Available for Check. Vertical offset from the reference stringline or surface, as defined by the chosen method, of the point to stake. ) The following field is shown for the Stake methods Stringline, Individual stringline and Manual slope. Work with non- Check box perpendicular offset Offset angle ) Editable field When this box is not checked the measured point is projected in an right angle to the selected stringline. When this box is checked, any projection angle can be defined. Manually defined projection angle. The following fields are shown in the Stringline, Individual stringline, Cross slope and Crown methods when Refer to an additional line is checked in the Define screen. Apply offsets to Check box aditional line When this box is checked, an offset to the additional line can be defined. Offset Editable field Horizontal stake/check offset to the additional line. Height difference Editable field Vertical stake/check height difference to the additional line. Next step Page changes to the Stake page. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1097 Understanding priorities of various heights Stake screen, Stake page Type of height Overrules Stake height diff Manually entered OR Obtained from individual point All other heights Considered Use DTM height for stakeout (Tools menu: Use heights from DTM) Design height Considered From design No other heights Considered Show DTM height difference on Info page (Tools menu: Use heights from DTM) No influence on priorities For additional info only - ) This page is available for Roads - Stakeout only. This page displays the differences between the measured points and stakeout points (delta values). If these values are zero, the measured point coincides with the stakeout point. Refer to "Stake/Check screen, General page" for a description of keys. Refer to "42.4 Staking Out" for a description of the elements of the graphical display. Description of fields Viva Series, Roads - Road Field Option Description Chainage Display only The current chainage. CL O Display only Perpendicular horizontal offset to the centreline. 1098 Field Option Description ∆ chainage Display only Difference between the defined Stake chainage and the current chainage Chainage of the measured position. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field shows ----. NrTP Display only The chainage difference between the measured point and the nearest tangent point (start/end point of a road segment) of the design is displayed. a b Road_099 a) Vertical alignment b) Horizontal alignment Only tangent points (start/end point of a road segment) are detected. ∆O Viva Series, Roads - Road Display only Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. The Stake offset defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. 1099 Field Option Description ∆ height Display only Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. The Stake height diff defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. Next step Page changes to the Info page. Stake/Check screen, Info page A user definable Info page exists for each of the stake methods and check methods. Refer to the chapters from "35.3.2 Road Stringline - Info Page"to "35.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page". Refer to "Configuration, Info page" for information on all available items for the Info page and how to select them. Stake/Check screen, Plot page The Plot page for Stake shows information about the measured point relative to the design. The design is defined by the selected layer and stringline, and the values entered on the General page. The Plot page for Check and Stake are similar. The only difference is that the current chainage is always shown instead of ∆ chainage. For Check and when only a DTM job is used, the Plot page shows the DTM and the lines of selected Road layer - always in plan view. At the top of the page, DTM height and delta height are shown. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1100 Refer to "Stake/Check screen, General page" for a description of keys. Fn Layrs.. To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and off. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job"for information on CAD files and CAD background maps. The following information is shown: 1) Chainage difference between the measured point and the defined chainage. When working with random chainages, for instance if no defined chainage has been entered on the General page, ∆Ch changes to Ch. Ch is the current chainage as shown on the Stake page. 2) Horizontal offset (left/right arrow) to the design 3) Height difference (up/down arrow) to the design 4) The measured point 5) The element to stake is shown in bold and blue. The position to stake is marked with a yellow-black peg. 6) The plot can be shown as a cross plot or plan view by using the level of MapView toolbar. Viva Series, Roads - Road eye icon on second 1101 37.3.2 Measuring Points by Chainage and Offset Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check b b f f e e i c c d Road_034 h a h g d a g Road_080 a) Position to stake out, defined by chainage, stake offset and, optionally, stake height difference b) Centreline/stringline the position is defined relative to c) Stake offset d) Stake height diff e) Chainage f) CL offset/Ref offset g) ∆ chainage h) ∆ offset i) ∆ height Viva Series, Roads - Road a) Position to check, defined by check offset and, optionally, check height difference b) Centreline/stringline the position is defined relative to c) Check offset d) Check height diff e) Chainage f) CL offset/Ref offset g) ∆ offset h) ∆ height 1102 Description • • Required elements Viva Series, Roads - Road • • When staking points, the points are defined by the stake chainage and, if enabled, by the stake offset and the stake height difference relative to an existing 2D or 3D centreline or stringline. When checking points, the points are defined by the check offset and the check height difference relative to an existing 2D or 3D centreline or stringline. For 2D, a horizontal centreline is required. For 3D, a 3D centreline is required. 1103 37.3.3 Measuring Stringlines Relative to a Centreline Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check c b d a c e a e f f h d g h b i g e c f f h h a=b c=d i a=b g Road_066 Road_035 Description Viva Series, Roads - Road a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Position to stake out Stringline to stake out Centreline Stake chainage Chainage CL offset ∆ chainage ∆ offset ∆ height • Stringlines define various elements, including: • Centreline of the design • Change in slope ratio, for example, the edge of a carriage way a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Stringline to check Projected point on stringline Centreline Chainage CL offset CL ht diff ∆ offset ∆ height 1104 Required elements Viva Series, Roads - Road • • Gutter, cable, pipeline or any other type of alignment element Refer to "35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements" for information on the usage of stringlines. • • For 2D, at least a 2D stringline and a 2D centreline are required. For 3D, a 3D stringline and a 2D or 3D centreline are required. 1105 37.3.4 Measuring Individual Stringlines without Centrelines Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check c b a b d e c f d g e a Road_085 Description Viva Series, Roads - Road Road_084 Stakeout of Roundabout Checking a Roundabout a) Position to stake out b) Stringline to stake out c) Centreline of the layer- is not used for the individual stringline d) Chainage e) ∆ chainage f) ∆ offset g) ∆ height a) Stringline to check b) Chainage c) Centreline of the layer- is not used for the individual stringline d) ∆ offset e) ∆ height This process is different to stringlines, where the stake/check is always relative to the centreline defined for the layer. Individual stringlines no longer have a relationship to an overall centreline. Individual stringlines are used to check roundabouts, parking bays, subdivision works and any other type of lines. The different stringlines to stake/check can be 1106 stored within one layer, which does not require a defined centreline. This ability is different to the stake/check of any other type which always require a centreline. Required elements A 2D or 3D design of the line to stake/check is required. Indefinite triangle Description In almost all situations, a measured position is shown relative to the individual stringline by the stringline chainage and a square offset to the stringline. However, situations can arise where a road design has extreme changes in the deflection angle of tangent points. In these cases, it is not always possible to show a measured position by the nominal chainage and offset. An indefinite triangle is a region in which these situations arise. Points measured within an indefinite triangle are shown relative to the tangent point. Graphic A B b b a Road_091 Viva Series, Roads - Road b‘ b a b“ 1107 Road Design A a) Individual stringline b) Measured position (displayed relative to the stringline by chainage and square offset) Road Design B a) Individual stringline with extreme changes in the deflection angle of tangent points b) Measured position within indefinite triangle This position cannot be shown in the usual manner and is displayed relative to the tangent point b") Measured position within indefinite triangle This position can be shown in the usual manner and is displayed by chainage and square offset Screen Points measured within an indefinite triangle are always shown relative to the tangent point. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1108 37.3.5 Measuring Cross Slopes Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout f Roads - As built check b d d a j g e e c h f h g i c b i k a k e d h c j b a=d f b k g h a c i Road_067 Road_036 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) Viva Series, Roads - Road Position to stake out Cross slope to stake out Left stringline Right stringline Centreline Working chainage Chainage CL offset ∆ chainage ∆ offset ∆ height a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Cross slope to check Left stringline Right stringline Centreline Chainage ∆ offset ∆ height Cross slope offset Cross slope ht diff 1109 Description • • Required elements Viva Series, Roads - Road Surfaces such as the final carriage way, are often staked/checked using cross slopes. A cross slope consists of a combination of two stringlines. Refer to "35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements" for information on the usage of cross slopes. A 3D design of the road is required. 1110 37.3.6 Measuring Manual Slopes and Design Slopes Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout b Roads - As built check g b g d d h h c f a Road_037 Description Viva Series, Roads - Road c f e a i e i Road_037 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Catch point Centreline Slope to stake out Hinge point = left stringline Second / right stringline Natural surface CL offset ∆ offset ∆ height • • Surfaces, such as the end slopes of a cut or fill, are staked/checked using slope methods. Slopes are defined by two stringlines. Refer to "35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements". a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Catch point Centreline Slope to check Hinge point Second stringline of the slope Natural surface CL offset Slope offset Slope height diff 1111 • • When staking slopes, the point of interest is the intersection of the defined slope with the natural surface (= catch point). Refer to "37.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings" for information on the slope staking methods supported. When checking slopes, the slope check is independent of the slope method selected. Description of manual slopes The slope is defined manually relative to a selected 3D stringline, slope direction and slope ratio or relative to a 2D stringline using a manual height, slope direction and slope ratio. Description of design slopes For this method, a 3D representation of the slope, defined by two stringlines, is required. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1112 37.3.7 Measuring Road Crowns Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check e h g a c b a) Position to stake out, in this case the left stringline of the crown b) Middle stringline of the crown, in this case also the centreline c) Left cross slope to stake out d) Right cross slope to stake out e) CL offset f) ∆ offset g) ∆ ht left h) ∆ ht right • • Viva Series, Roads - Road f g d Road_040 Description e h f a c b d Road_076 a) Left stringline of the crown b) Middle stringline of the crown, common for both cross slopes c) Left cross slope to check d) Right cross slope to check e) CL offset f) ∆ offset g) ∆ ht left h) ∆ ht right Staking road crowns allows the stake out of two cross slopes at the same time. If Toggle offsets left/right is checked, the reference for ∆ offset is automatically switched between the right and left cross slope depending on whether the measured position is to the right or left of the middle stringline. When checking road crowns, it allows the check of two cross slopes at the same time. The information for both cross slopes is shown at the same time. 1113 Required elements A 3D design of the road, defining a crown consisting of three stringlines, is required. Specific fields The following fields vary from the description used in "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen": Field Option ∆ ht left/ ∆ ht right Display only or ∆HtL/∆HtR Viva Series, Roads - Road Description Vertical offset to the left/right cross slope defining the road crown. 1114 37.3.8 Measuring Road Layers Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout b b d a Road_068 Roads - As built check e c a) Relevant part of the layer for the current position b) Left stringline Left name c) Right stringline Right name d) ∆ offset e) ∆ height d a Road_068 e c a) Relevant part of the layer for the current position b) Left stringline Left name c) Right stringline Right name d) Slope offset e) Layer ht diff Description All stringlines are grouped in layers. Such a layer describes a surface of the road. When staking/checking out a layer, it is automatically detected the stringline left and right of the measured position. Required elements A 3D design of the road is required. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1115 37.3.9 Measuring Digital Terrain Models (DTM) Graphical overview Roads - As built check e a b g d f c Road_046 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Relevant triangle of the DTM Projected point on DTM Easting Northing DTM height diff Flow direction Flow ratio Description A DTM check returns the height difference between the current height and the height the DTM at the measured position. Required elements A DTM job is required. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1116 37.4 The Tools Menu 37.4.1 Overview Access Press Fn Tools.. on any page of the Stake/Check screen. Description The Tools menu contains additional functionality for each of the stake and check methods. This functionality is additional to those already existing functions which are available via the function keys. The functionality differs between the stake and check methods. Refer to these subchapters for a detailed description of the functionalities: • "37.4.2 Use heights from DTM" • "37.4.3 Apply current chainage" • "37.4.4 Get current angle to alignment" • "37.4.5 Individual point" • "37.4.6 Additional layer information" • "37.4.7 Box / base definition" • "37.4.8 Get current slope" • "37.4.9 Reset slope to design" • "37.4.10 Shift reference line" • "37.4.11 Re-initialise search" Viva Series, Roads - Road 1117 37.4.2 Use heights from DTM Availability This menu function is available for the following stake/check methods: Stringline, individual stringline, cross slope, crown, layer. Description The application offers the possibility to • switch to a height which is retrieved from an existing height layer, as defined in the selected DTM job. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height reference for the staking out or checking of alignments. • retrieve heights from an existing layer, as defined in the DTM job associated with the project. The DTM used is not considered for the stake values. Three new information lines are added to the Info page: DTM 2 Ht Diff, DTM 2 Height and DTM 2 Name. • show the DTM triangles in the planar view and in the cross section view on the Plot page. Once defined, each layer remains active until it is turned off. DTM heights can be used for both 2D and 3D alignments. Use heights from DTM OK To confirm the settings and return to the Stake/Check screen. Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1118 Description of fields Field Option Description DTM Display only DTM from the selected DTM job. Use DTM height Check box for stake out Viva Series, Roads - Road When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM is used as a height reference. When this box is not checked, no DTM heights are applied for stakeout or check. DTM layer Selectable list Available when Use DTM height for stake out is checked. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant triangle of the DTM is shown on the Plot page. Show DTM height difference on Info page Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM to be used as a height reference on the Info page. When this box is not checked, no additional height information relative to the DTM is shown on the Info page. DTM layer Selectable list Available when Show DTM height difference on Info page is checked. Layer of the DTM to be used as a height reference. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant triangle of the DTM is shown in cross section view on the Plot page. Show DTM on map Check box When this box is checked, the DTM triangles are displayed in planar view on the Plot page. DTM layer Selectable list All available layers are selectable. 1119 37.4.3 Apply current chainage Availability This menu function is available for all stake/check methods except layer. Description To set Stake chainage on the General page of the stakeout to the current chainage. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1120 37.4.4 Get current angle to alignment Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of stringlines and individual stringlines. Description To project a measured point to the alignment considering the entered Stake chainage. This functionality is only available when Work with non-perpendicular offset is checked in the Stake screen on the Offsets page. Graphic c b a Road_098 Workflow Step Description 1. Measure a point: a) b) c) α Alignment Defined chainage Current position Angle to alignment Dist Meas and Stop Viva Series, Roads - Road 2. Press Fn Tools.. to access the Tools menu. 3. Select Get current angle to alignment. 4. At the defined chainage, the angle between the tangent direction and the direction to the current position is calculated. This angel is set as Offset angle for Work with non-perpendicular offset on the Offsets page. 1121 Viva Series, Roads - Road Step Description 5. Continue with staking out using the calculated Stake chainage and Offset angle values. These values are valid until new values are defined manually or by using Get current angle to alignment. 1122 37.4.5 Individual point Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of stringlines and individual stringlines. Description To select the point to stake from the selected Working job. If a control job has been selected on the Job Selection screen, a point from the control job can be selected. When staking out/checking an individual point, the selected point is set in relation to the alignment and all line relevant values are calculated and displayed. To access Data:, Points page, which allows staking out points with known Easting, Northing and Height. Points can either be selected from the Working job or manually typed in. The Stake chainage and Stake offset of the Stake screen are calculated based on the coordinates of the selected point. The height for the stakeout can be set as Manual height. ) Viva Series, Roads - Road If the chosen point has no height the design height will be used. If the point has a height it is possible to use that one or continue working with the design height. 1123 37.4.6 Additional layer information Availability This menu function is available for all stake/check methods except layer. Description This function allows additional road data to be obtained during a check or stake survey of a road element. Road elements include centrelines, kerb and gutters and slopes. The map shows cross section view only and allows setting the vertical exaggeration. Additional layer information OK To store the selected element, which is then automatically recalled. <-- or --> To select the relevant element in the plot. The information displayed shows the current slope ratio and the height difference of the element. Also displayed are the offset and height differences from the left and right vertices of the element. Reset To move back to the originally selected element. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1124 37.4.7 Box / base definition Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of stringlines and individual stringlines. Description This function allows a box or similar structure to be set out during a check or stake survey of a road element. The box is set out relative to a stringline chainage and parallel offset. A base point of the box, user-defined dimensions of the box (a base distance and a base offset) are required. Diagram f d e c g a b Road_092 Viva Series, Roads - Road a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Centreline Defined chainage Stake offset Base point Base offset Base distance Box to stake out 1125 Box / base definition OK To store the selected element, which is then automatically recalled. Define To overwrite the values before pressing Base If a different base had been defined before. Base or Clear To freeze or unfreeze the values of the base point. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Base chainage Display only The position defined by Stake chainage. Base offset Display only The position defined by Stake offset. Distance box Editable field The distance in the direction of increasing chainage of base point is positive. Offset box Editable field The offset to the right of base point is positive. Base easting, Base Editable field northing and Base height Viva Series, Roads - Road The coordinates of the base point, either from the Working job or from a surveyed point. 1126 Example Field Option Description Base direction Editable field The orientation of the local coordinate system (azimuth). The following steps describe the stakeout of two reference pegs from a centreline chainage and offset. f e+ d ec f a b Road_093 Viva Series, Roads - Road a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Defined chainage Stake offset Base point Base distance, positive (e+), negative (e-) f) Peg to stake out Step Description 1. Define the base point for the box/base stakeout using Stake offset and Stake height diff from the Offsets page. 2. Press Fn Tools.. to access the Tools menu. 3. Select Box / base definition. Press OK to continue to the next screen. 1127 Step Description 4. The position defined by Stake chainage and Stake offset is used as Base chainage and Base offset when accessing Box / base definition for the first time within a stakeout session. 5. Similar to the stakeout of individual points in the Tools menu. The Box/Base functionality calculates the new point to stake out and changes the according values of Stake chainage and Stake offset. The Box/Base functionality also activates the Manual height functionality. 6. To avoid these values being used as the next base point when accessing the box/base menu, press Base in the Box/Base Definition screen. Pressing this key freezes the values of the base point. Base is now replaced by Clear. If a different base had been defined before, use Define to overwrite the values before pressing Base. 7. Define the Distance box and Offset box. Both follow the same rules as used for the definition of offsets and chainages in general. That is; offset to the right = positive; distance in direction of increasing chainage = positive. 8. Press OK to continue to the next screen. 9. The values of Stake chainage, Stake offset and the Manual height are adjusted accordingly. 10. The fields ∆ chainage, ∆ offset and ∆ height on the Stake page guide you to the new position to stake out. Press Fn Tools.. to access Tools menu. 11. Viva Series, Roads - Road Select Box / base definition. Press OK to continue to the next screen. 1128 Step Description 12. The next point of the box to stake out can now be defined. To change back to the original chainage and offset defined for the base point definition use Clear. 13. Viva Series, Roads - Road Start with step 1. to define a new box/base. 1129 37.4.8 Get current slope Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of slopes and manual slopes. Description To access Slope Definition. The slope ratio Current ratio of the last measured position is used as the defined Slope ratio. All others values in Slope Definition are filled in with the last measured position. The defined manual slope is used for all points to stake out or check. The manual slope is active until it is turned of with Reset slope to design from the Tools menu. ) Graphic Slopes are defined relative to the centreline. a d e b Road_038 Viva Series, Roads - Road f c a) b) c) d) e) f) Centreline Hinge point New slope Defined hinge offset Offset Defined hinge height difference Height difference Slope ratio 1130 Slope Definition OK To accept changes and move to the next screen depending on the settings for slope staking. Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Hinge line Display only The stringline the slope is defined relative to. The vertical offset type for the hinge point. Hinge offset Relative to line Define the hinge point by the height difference relative to the selected Reference line. a)Hinge point b)Slope a b Road_039a Viva Series, Roads - Road 1131 Field Option Description Absolute Define the hinge point using its absolute height. a)Hinge point b)Slope a b Road_039b Viva Series, Roads - Road Hold hinge The hinge point of the slope stays fixed at the defined stringline. Offset Editable field The horizontal offset of the hinge point from the centreline/reference line. Height difference Editable field The height difference of the hinge point from the centreline/reference line. Available for Hinge offset: Relative to line. Elevation Editable field The absolute height of the hinge point. Available for Hinge offset: Absolute. 1132 Field Option Description Slope type Selectable list Differentiates if the defined slope is a cut/fill and left/right. a Road_079 a) b) c) d) e) Slope ratio Editable field b c d e Hinge point Left cut Right cut Left fill Right fill Defines the ratio of the slope. The measured slope ratio is the default value. This value can be edited manually. The display format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings, Slope page. ) Viva Series, Roads - Road 1133 37.4.9 Reset slope to design Availability This menu function is available for the following stake/check methods: Stringline, individual stringline, cross slope, crown, layer. Description This option is only available if a slope has been defined by using Get current slope. The manually defined slope is deactivated and reset to the design slope. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1134 37.4.10 Shift reference line Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of slopes and cross slopes. The Shift reference line item of the Tools menu stays disabled until the first measured position is available. The current chainage is used for the cross section shown to pick the reference line. Description When staking out or checking different layers of the road strata, such as the subgrade, gravel or asphalt, it is often found that not all these layers are available in the design. For such cases, the application offers the possibility to apply either a negative or positive height shift to the design values. Example A gravel layer with a thickness of 10 cm is to be staked out. A negative vertical shift to the final design surface is applied. This shift is applied: • by pressing Shifts.. in the Define screen and • by applying a vertical shift of -10 cm. As shown, the selected cross slope is shifted by 10 cm. c 10 cm a d 15 cm Road_086 Viva Series, Roads - Road b a) b) c) d) Reference surface Shifted reference point Original cross slope Shifted cross slope 1135 When staking out the newly shifted cross slope, the original left edge of the shifted cross slope is of little interest. It is the intersection with the left end slope that is of greater interest. Reference Shift OK To confirm the settings and return to the Stake/Check screen. Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1136 Description of fields Field Option Description Shift slope reference line Check box When this box is checked, the settings for the shift can be set. Left line Display only Shows the name of the left stringline from the surface. Right line Display only Shows the name of the right stringline from the surface. The vertical shift applied to the surface selected. Shift mode Shift value Viva Series, Roads - Road Plumbline The shift defined under Shift value gets applied following the plumb line. Perpendicular The shift defined under Shift value gets applied perpendicular to the selected surface. Editable field Value the selected surface gets shifted following the chosen Shift mode. 1137 The graphical selection. The expanded element and the shifted reference line, marked with a cross, are shown in the Plot page in the Stake/Check screen. On the Stake page, the ∆ offset and ∆ height guide you to the new shifted position. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1138 37.4.11 Re-initialise search Availability This menu function is available for all stake/check methods except layer. Description When staking or checking complex road designs it can happen that the current position is not projected to the desired segment of the alignment. The Re-initialise search forces a reprojection of the current position. Example Before initialisation This screen shows the projection of the current position to the left segment, although the distance to the right segment is shorter. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1139 After initialisation This screen shows the projection after the reinitialisation. Viva Series, Roads - Road 1140 38 Roads - Rail 38.1 Creating a New Rail Job 38.1.1 Overview Description There are two ways of creating road/rail jobs: Typing them in manually by using the Alignment Editor application. OR Converting data created in a design package. Manually entered data Data can be typed in and edited with Alignment Editor. Refer to "36 Roads - Alignment Editor" for information on how to enter data manually. Converted data The Design to Field component of LEICA Geo Office offers converters from several road/rail design and CAD packages. Several design packages also include a built-in converter to Roads/Rail. As different design packages follow different philosophies in representation, creation and storage of data the conversion process differs slightly. LEICA Geo Office Road_065 Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1141 LEICA Geo Office can be found on the LEICA Geo Office DVD. The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of: • myWorld@Leica Geosystems https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com • of the Leica Geosystems website: http://www.leica-geosystems.com/en/page_catalog.htm?cid=3291 Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1142 38.1.2 Installing all necessary Software Install LEICA Geo Office LGO runs under WindowsXP or Windows Vista and can only be installed successfully if the user is logged in as the Administrator. To install LGO, run the setup file from the DVD and follow the instructions on the screen. Install Design To Field To prepare the track design for use on the instrument successfully, the data must first be converted from its original format to an onboard job. This conversion is achieved using Design to Field, a component of LGO which is automatically installed with LGO. Install Importers The field importers are used by Design to Field to read in the track design. These importers are installed separately and have the file extension *.rri. The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of: • myWorld@Leica Geosystems: https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com • of the Leica Geosystems website: http://www.leica-geosystems.com/en/page_catalog.htm?cid=3291 Install Rail Editor Rail Editor is a computer program for defining the height of the rails relative to the horizontal and vertical alignments (superelevation). Rail Editor is automatically installed into LGO from the Field Importers install package, which can be found in the downloads section of the Leica Geosystems website. Rail Editor can be run either externally or within Design To Field. Install Roads and Rail Roads and Rail are the onboard programs which are loaded onto the instrument: • via a data storage device (under the System folder), which is inserted into the instrument, • via a serial cable and LGO. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1143 38.1.3 Importing the design Importing the Track Design with LEICA Geo Office Step Description 1. Starting the Design to Field program To import a track centreline select Design to Field from the Tools menu in LGO. 2. Selecting an Import Type To prepare track design for onboard use successfully, it has to be converted from its original data format to an onboard job which will run on the instrument. Select Importer Type: Rail Data Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1144 Step Description 3. Selecting a Field Importer Importers are used to convert the data. Additional importer formats can be added to the selectable list by clicking Manage. Select the importer related to the track design from the selectable list of available importers. 4. Viva Series, Roads - Rail Importing Click Import to start the file selection wizard. 1145 Step Description 5. Selecting the job type For single tracks, select Rail Design-Single Track. A single track design can consist of a horizontal alignment, a vertical alignment and superelevation. • For double tracks, select Rail Design-Double Track. A double track design can consist of a horizontal alignment, a vertical alignment and superelevation for each track. Alternatively, a third horizontal alignment can also be defined and used for calculating the chainage of both tracks (chainage centreline). Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. • Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1146 Viva Series, Roads - Rail Step Description 6. Selecting the horizontal and vertical alignment files 1147 Step Description • For a single track, select the horizontal and vertical alignments using the browse button. • For a double track, three screens are used to define the design data. The arrows at the bottom of the screens can be used to move between the different screens. First screen - Centreline: The first screen defines the horizontal and vertical alignment of the chainage centreline. If the chainage for each track is to be calculated relative to each track centreline, then it is not mandatory to select a chainage centreline. The horizontal and vertical alignment on the first screen can be left blank. Second screen - Left track: The second screen defines the horizontal and vertical alignments and the rail definition (superelevation) of the left track. Third screen - Right track: The third screen defines the horizontal and vertical alignments and the rail definition (superelevation) of the right track. Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. 7. Viva Series, Roads - Rail Superelevation (rail definition) • Design data which is compulsory: A track design must contain a horizontal alignment. • Design data which is optional: A track design can include a vertical alignment and a rail definition (superelevation). Superelevation is only possible when the track design includes a vertical alignment. 1148 Step Description A • • • superelevation file can be obtained in the following ways: by selecting an existing superelevation file. by selecting an existing superelevation file and modifying it with Rail Editor. by creating a new superelevation file with Rail Editor. Creating a superelevation (rail definition) To create a rail definition (superelevation) for any track, click the Edit button next to the Superelevation file name. This action starts the Rail Editor program. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1149 Step Description The Rail Editor program is used to define the height of the rails at a given chainage. The height of the rails can be defined by a rotation point and a cant or by a left and right cant. Describing the screen elements - Entering Track Information Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1150 Step Description Superelevation left and right To define the height of the rails using one superelevation value for the left rail and another superelevation value for the right rail. Superelevation by curve To define the rails using a rotation point and a superelevation value. ) Viva Series, Roads - Rail Once the method by which the superelevation values are defined has been selected, it cannot be changed Co-Planar (for multiple tracks) To define the height of the rails of the second track by extending the plane which runs through the rails of the first track. Nominal Gauge The default nominal distance between the active (internal) faces of the left and right rails. This value can be changed if necessary for part any rail definition (superelevation). Superelevation Base The distance over which the superlevation is applied. This distance is normally the distance between the centre of the left and right rail. This value can be changed if necessary for any rail definition (superelevation). Default Rotation Axis If a rotation point is used, this selection will be used as the default for all new rail definitions. This value can be changed if necessary for any rail definition (superelevation). 1151 Step Description Superelevation Format The format in which the superelevation values are entered. Once all superelevation data has been entered, press the button to add the data to the chainage assignment screen. To delete an element, select the element and press the button. To modify an existing element, select the element, modify the data and press the button. Once all values have been entered for the entire alignment, the file can be saved in an XML format using Save from the File menu. To return to the Design To Field converter, select Exit from the File menu. To modify an existing rail definition (superelevation) file, for example XML files, use Load option from the File menu. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1152 Step Description 8. Entering the alignment tolerances Enter the appropriate horizontal and vertical tolerances to be used during the checking of the alignments. Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1153 Step Description 9. Checking the track design When the track design has been imported, information is displayed to show the success or failure of the import. • • • Viva Series, Roads - Rail When the import is successful: Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. When the import is unsuccessful: Click Back to step back through the wizard. If a problem is encountered a red symbol appears. Double click on the red symbol and a window containing a description of the problem appears. 1154 Step Description 10. Entering the range of chainages to be used Enter the range of chainages to be exported. Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1155 Viva Series, Roads - Rail Step Description 11. Checking the summary report • When the report is correct: Click Finish to complete the wizard. • When the report is incorrect: Click Back to step back through the wizard. 12. Viewing the track design The track design can be viewed graphically. 1156 Step Description Click Export to create the files for onboard use. 13. Creating the files for onboard use The track design can now be prepared. Click OK to create the files for onboard use. The database files are created and are located in the same folder as the source alignment files. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1157 ) Viva Series, Roads - Rail Refer to the Design to Field User Manual for details on importing various types of data with various field importers. This manual is included in the Design to Field Converters install application RR_Design_to_Field.exe, which can be downloaded. 1158 38.1.4 Loading the Track Design onto the Instrument Loading the design Once the track design has been converted, copy all the database files to the \DBX folder of the data storage device of the instrument. Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device". Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1159 38.2 Defining the Work Access 1) Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Rail - Stakeout or Rail - As built check. 2) In the screen Job Selection, select the required jobs. Refer to "35.4.1 Choosing a Job". 3) Press OK. Define OK To continue to the next screen. Shifts.. To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the selected element. Refer to "35.5 Working with Shifts". Load.. To load a task. Refer to "35.6 Tasks". Save.. To save the settings as a task. Refer to "35.6 Tasks". Fn Config.. To access the Rail configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1160 Description of fields Field Option Description Layer Display only or selectable list Layers contained in the active rail job can be selected, for example layer of left or right track design. Chainage strin- Display only gline Working chainage Editable field To enter a chainage (ranging between the start chainage and end chainage) of the chainage centreline. Only those elements which appear at this chainage can then be selected from Line. The measured point values can be compared with the left rail, the right rail or the track centreline. The selectable list allows the selection of the stringline with which measured values are then compared. Line Centre line Viva Series, Roads - Rail Shows the name of the chainage stringline, at the selected layer. The track centreline. 1161 Field Option Description Left rail or Right rail • • • Viva Series, Roads - Rail For design data including the rails: When working with design data including the rails, the horizontal and vertical alignment of the design is used. Depending on the rail design configuration setting, the superelevation of the design or the manually defined superelevation can be used. For design data without rails (only track centreline): If the design data does not contain the rail design, then the position of the left rail is calculated. The nominal gauge entered in the program configuration is used for the calculation. When working with horizontal alignments only: The height of the rails is calculated by using the values for Manual cant definition defined on Stake Track/Check Track, General page. 1162 38.3 Staking/Checking the Track 38.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen Staking points It is possible to stakeout points using a rail job with and without a stored rail design. When the position of the rails is not stored in the rail job, it is possible to stake out: • The horizontal and vertical alignment of the track centreline • Points with a known horizontal and vertical offset from the horizontal and vertical alignment of track centreline • The rails of the track by entering the track superelevation, superelevation base and nominal gauge • Points with know horizontal and vertical offsets from the manually defined rails. When the position of the rails is stored in the rail job, it is possible to stake out: • The horizontal and vertical alignment of track centreline • Points with a known horizontal and vertical offset from the horizontal and vertical alignment of track centreline • The rails of the track • Points with known horizontal and vertical offsets from the defined rails. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1163 Stake Track/Check Track, General page Information regarding the measured point can be entered. This screen allows any point of the track to be checked against design values. Meas To start measuring the point being staked. The key changes to Stop. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Stop To end measuring the point being staked. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in GPS Settings Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. After ending the measurements, the differences between the measured point and the point to be staked are displayed. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1164 Store To store the measured point. When Automatically store point is checked in GPS Settings Quality Control, General page, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. ChAvailable for Rail - Stakeout. To decrease the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Ch+ Available for Rail - Stakeout. To increase the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access Rail configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Positn To position the total station to the defined stakeout point, including defined offsets. This depends on the settings for Turn to point in Configuration, TPS page. Refer to " Configuration, TPS page". Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1165 Fn Tools.. To access the Tools Menu. Refer to "38.4 The Tools Menu". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field Name of the next point to be stored. The ID is incremented/decremented whenever a point gets stored. Antenna Editable field Height of the antenna. Editable field Height of the prism. height Target height Stake chainage Editable field The defined chainage of the point to be staked out. For multiple tracks that have a defined chainage centreline, the chainage to be staked out always refers to the chainage of the chainage centreline, not to the chainage of the track centreline. Editable field Value by which the nominal chainage increases/decreases when pressing Ch-/Ch+. If a point is to be staked at more than one chainage, a chainage increment can be defined. Chainge increment Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1166 Viva Series, Roads - Rail Field Option Description Use manual height instead of design heights Check box When this box is checked, a height value typed in manually is used instead of design height or DTM height. When this box is not checked, the height from design is used. Manual height Editable field Available when Use manual height instead of design heights is checked. The height to be used. Manual cant definition Display only This field and the following fields are available for Superelevation: Manual in Configuration, Rail design page. Ht lower rail Editable field Defines the absolute height of the lowest rail at the defined chainage. Cant left Editable field Defines the superelevation at the left rail. • When working with horizontal alignments only: If the superelevation is rotated around the left rail, the superelevation would be zero. • When working with horizontal and vertical alignments: If the track is rotated around the left rail, the vertical alignment would coincide with the left rail and the superelevation would thus be zero. 1167 Field Option Description Cant right Editable field Defines the superelevation at the right rail. • When working with horizontal alignments only: If the track is rotated around the right rail, the superelevation would be zero. The total superelevation (left + right) is applied across the distance defined as the superelevation base in the configuration. • When working with horizontal and vertical alignments: If the track is rotated around the right rail, the vertical alignment would coincide with the right rail and the superelevation would thus be zero. The total superelevation (left + right) is applied across the distance defined as the superelevation base in the configuration. Next step Page changes to the Offsets page. Stake Track/Check Track, Offsets page Viva Series, Roads - Rail Refer to "Stake Track/Check Track, General page" for a description of keys. 1168 Description of fields Field Option Description Apply offsets Check box When this box is checked, offsets can be typed in. Often it is necessary to set out points with a fixed plan offset and fixed height offset from a known reference line (track centreline or rail). Offsets are applied in the same way, irrespective of how the rail design has been entered, whether the offsets are manually entered or if library offsets are used. The sign of the offsets conforms to the offset sign convention described in "35.7 Understanding Terms and Expressions". b c d a Rail_013 a) b) c) d) Viva Series, Roads - Rail Reference line (right rail) Point to stake Stake height diff Stake offset 1169 Viva Series, Roads - Rail Field Option Description Offsets Manual Offsets can be entered in Stake offset/Check offset or Stake height diff/Check height diff. From library The offset is stored as part of the rail job and recalled whenever required. Offsets Selectable list Available for Offsets: From library. The point ID of the stored stake offsets. To select a different stored offset or to create a new point, highlight this field and open the selectable list. Refer to "38.3.2 Offset Library". Stake offset Editable field Available for Stake. Horizontal offset applied to the position of the reference line as defined by the design data or as calculated from manually entered data using the nominal gauge. Stake height diff Editable field Available for Stake. Vertical offset applied to the height of the reference line as defined by the design data or as calculated from manually entered data using the superelevation and superelevation base. Check offset Editable field Available for Check. Horizontal offset applied to the position of the reference line as defined by the design data or as calculated using manually entered data using the nominal gauge. Check height diff Editable field Available for Check. Vertical offset applied to the height of the reference line as defined by the design data or as calculated from manually entered data using the superelevation and superelevation base. 1170 Field Option Description Work with pendular displacement Check box This functionality is used in railway tunnels. The functionality is available for Rail - Stakeout and Rail - As built check. Some rail projects require additional pendular displacement calculation for the design axis. The track is rotated based on a line with a defined height offset (pendulum length) from the track centreline. This action defines a horizontal displacement for the track. The vertical alignment is independent from the pendular displacement and does not change. ) The pendular displacement calculation only influences the horizontal position of the design axis. It does not change the height of the track. When this box is checked, a pendulum length can be entered. From the original track definition, a pendulum centre is defined exactly above the axis point. The difference in elevation of the pendulum centre is the pendulum length. With the help of the superelevation, a displacement is calculated. The effect of the pendular displacement is displayed on the Info page. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1171 Field Option Description a b c d Rail_016 a) Pendulum length: The difference in elevation of the pendulum centre on the original track and above the axis point b) Resulting pendular displacement c) Displaced design axis based on pendular displacement calculation d) Design axis defined in horizontal alignment α Pendulum angle Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1172 Field Option Description Pendular length Editable field Available when Work with pendular displacement is checked. The pendulum length as distance value. Positive values (0 - 9999.9999) point upwards. Negative values are not allowed. Next step Stake Stringline, Stake page IF you work with THEN Page changes to the Rail - Stakeout Stake page. Rail - As built check Info page. ) This page is available for Rail - Stakeout only. This page displays the differences between the measured point and the defined point. The position of the point to stake is reached when all difference values are close to zero. The chainage can be de-/incremented by pressing left/right arrow key. The defined value for chainage increment is applied. Refer to "Stake Track/Check Track, General page" for a description of keys. Refer to "42.4 Staking Out" for a description of the elements of the graphical display. Description of fields Viva Series, Roads - Rail Field Option Description Chainage Display only The current track chainage. CL O Display only Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. 1173 Field Option Description ∆ chainage Display only Difference between the defined Stake chainage and the current chainage Chainage of the measured position. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field shows ----. NrTP Display only The chainage difference between the measured point and the nearest tangent point (start/end point of a road segment) of the design is displayed. a b Road_099 a) Vertical alignment b) Horizontal alignment Only tangent points (start/end point of a road segment) are detected. ∆O Viva Series, Roads - Rail Display only Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. The Stake offset defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. 1174 Field Option Description ∆ height Display only Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. The Stake height diff defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. Next step Page changes to the Info page. Stake Track/Check Track, Info page The Info page displays the differences between the measured and design data. The fields viewed on this page can be configured in Rail Configuration, Info page. Refer to "Configuration, Info page" for information on all available items for the Info page and how to select them. Stake Track/Check Track, Plot page The Plot page displays a plot of the measured point with respect to the track design. The design is defined by the selected rail or track centreline, and the values entered on the General page. The Plot page for Check and Stake are similar. The only difference is that the current chainage is always shown, as shown on the Info page. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1175 Refer to "Stake Track/Check Track, General page" for a description of keys. Fn Layrs.. To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and off. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job"for information on CAD files and CAD background maps. The following information is shown: 1) Chainage difference between the measured point and the defined chainage. When working with random chainages, for instance if no defined chainage has been entered on the General page, ∆Ch changes to Ch. Ch is the current chainage as shown on the Stake page. 2) Horizontal offset (left/right arrow) to the design 3) Height difference (up/down arrow) to the design 4) The measured point 5) The element to stake is shown in bold and blue. The position to stake is marked with a yellow-black peg. 6) The plot can be shown as a cross plot or plan view by using the level of MapView toolbar. Viva Series, Roads - Rail eye icon on second 1176 38.3.2 Offset Library Description To select a different stored offset or to create a new point. Access 1) In Stake Track/Check track, Offsets page, select Offsets: From library. 2) Highlight Offsets and open the selectable list. Rail job: Job name This screen allows offsets relative to a reference line to be defined and stored in the rail job. These points can be recalled at any time. OK To select a defined offset and to continue. Add To enter an offset. Edit.. To edit an existing offset. Delete To delete an existing offset. More To display information about the reference rail or the Offset and the height difference. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Press Add or Edit... Rail job: Job name, Offsets Viva Series, Roads - Rail This screen allows the values of the stake/check offsets to be entered/edited. In addition to the horizontal and vertical offsets, an offset name (point ID) can be entered for each item. 1177 Next step Press OK twice to return to Stake Track/Check track. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1178 38.3.3 Working with Pendular Displacements Requirements In Stake Track/Check Track, Offsets page, check Work with pendular displacement and type in a value for Pendular length. Specific values on the Info page Value Description Pendular length The defined pendulum length as entered on Offsets page. Def pendulum displacement Resulting horizontal displacement at defined chainage. Viva Series, Roads - Rail Actl pendulum displacement Resulting horizontal displacement at current chainage. Def pendulum angle Resulting pendulum angle at defined chainage. Actl pendulum angle Resulting pendulum angle at current chainage. 1179 38.4 The Tools Menu 38.4.1 Overview Access Press Fn Tools.. on any page of the Stake/Check screen. Description Additional functions for staking/checking the track can be accessed through the Tools menu. This functionality is additional to those already existing functions which are available via the function keys. The functionality differs between the stake and check methods. Refer to these subchapters for a detailed description of the functionalities: • "38.4.2 Use heights from DTM" • "38.4.3 Apply current chainage" • "38.4.4 Individual point" • "38.4.5 Second point of cant" Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1180 38.4.2 Use heights from DTM Availability This menu function is available for stake and check. Description The application offers the possibility to • switch to a height which is retrieved from an existing height layer, as defined in the selected DTM job. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height reference for the staking out or checking of alignments. • retrieve heights from an existing layer, as defined in the DTM job associated with the project. The DTM used is not considered for the stake values. Three new information lines are added to the Info page: DTM 2 Ht Diff, DTM 2 Height and DTM 2 Name. • show the DTM triangles in the planar view and in the cross section view on the Plot page. Once defined, each layer remains active until it is turned off. DTM heights can be used for both 2D and 3D alignments. Use heights from DTM OK To confirm the settings and return to the Stake/Check screen. Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1181 Description of fields Field Option Description DTM Display only DTM from the selected DTM job. Use DTM height Check box for stake out Viva Series, Roads - Rail When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM is used as a height reference. When this box is not checked, no DTM heights are applied for stakeout or check. DTM layer Selectable list Available when Use DTM height for stake out is checked. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant triangle of the DTM is shown on the Plot page. Show DTM height difference on Info page Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM to be used as a height reference on the Info page. When this box is not checked, no additional height information relative to the DTM is shown on the Info page. DTM layer Selectable list Available when Show DTM height difference on Info page is checked. Layer of the DTM to be used as a height reference. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant triangle of the DTM is shown in cross section view on the Plot page. Show DTM on map Check box When this box is checked, the DTM triangles are displayed in planar view on the Plot page. DTM layer Selectable list All available layers are selectable. 1182 38.4.3 Apply current chainage Availability This menu function is available for stake. Description To set Stake chainage on the General page of the stakeout to the current chainage. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1183 38.4.4 Individual point Availability This menu function is available for stake. Description To select the point to stake from the selected Working job. If a control job has been selected on the Job Selection screen, a point from the control job can be selected. When staking out/checking an individual point, the selected point is set in relation to the alignment and all line relevant values are calculated and displayed. To access Data:, Points page, which allows staking out points with known Easting, Northing and Height. Points can either be selected from the Working job or manually typed in. The Stake chainage and Stake offset of the Stake screen are calculated based on the coordinates of the selected point. The height for the stakeout can be set as Manual height. ) Viva Series, Roads - Rail If the chosen point has no height the design height will be used. If the point has a height it is possible to use that one or continue working with the design height. 1184 38.4.5 Second point of cant Availability This menu function is only available for check. Description To determine the current cant of two rails. In order to calculate the current cant, it is necessary to measure two points, one on each rail. A mechanical device can be used to measure these points if necessary. Additionally, the current cant can be calculated by first measuring any two points (example, the track centreline and lower rail) and then using the superelevation base. The calculation is dependent upon the superelevation base. Diagram d e c b Rail_015 Procedure Viva Series, Roads - Rail a a) b) c) d) e) Left rail Right rail first point Second point of cant Current cant Measuring the first point The first point can be measured directly from the Check Track screen. 1185 Measuring the second point The second point is measured after accessing the Second point of cant in the Tools menu. Once the second point has been measured, the value Current cant is displayed on the Info page. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1186 39 Roads - Tunnel 39.1 Creating a New Tunnel Job 39.1.1 Preparing Design Data Downloads section The tunnel design data is imported for use onboard the instrument using • the industry standard LandXML data format • formats exported from some other design packages using the Design to Field component of the LEICA Geo Office computer application. Converters are available for more than 15 different design packages. ) The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of: • myWorld@Leica Geosystems https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com • the Leica Geosystems website: http://www.leica-geosystems.com/en/page_catalog.htm?cid=3291 Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1187 39.1.2 Tunnel Centreline Basics The tunnel centreline is defined in two or three dimensions. If design profiles are to be used, a three-dimensional centreline is required. Design to field Step Description 1. To import a centreline using the Design to Field component select the Tools/Design to Field option of the LEICA Geo Office computer application. 2. ) For general information about Design to Field, please refer to the LEICA Geo Office manual or Online Help. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1188 39.1.3 Design Profiles Tunnel design profiles If tunnel design profiles are available, they are created using the Tunnel Profile Editor computer application. This application is integrated in the Design to Field viewer. It allows users to import or create tunnel data like profiles, layers and rotations. Refer to the Tunnel Profile Editor online help for more information. Tunnel Profile Editor, Profile details view Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1189 Tunnel Profile Editor, Layer details view Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1190 Vertical or perpendicular profiles The Tunnel Profile Editor allows users to define tunnel profiles vertically or perpendicular to the vertical alignment of the tunnel axis. This results in different tunnel sizes for equal profile definitions as shown in the graphic. A B a a Tunnel_027 Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel c b d b A Perpendicular (tilted) profile B Vertical profile a) Vertical alignment of tunnel axis b) Horizontal alignment of tunnel axis c) Chainage for perpendicular profile definition d) Chainage for vertical profile definition 1191 39.1.4 Data Transfer to Instrument Getting data onboard Once the design data have been converted, copy the database files to the DBX folder of the data storage device that is used on the instrument. The file names are jobname.x**. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1192 39.2 Defining the Work Access 1) Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Tunnel - Stakeout or Tunnel - As built check. 2) In the screen Job Selection, select the required jobs. Refer to "35.4.1 Choosing a Job". 3) Press OK. Define the Work to be Done OK To continue to the next screen. Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of the methods Method Description Stake face Stakeout points at the tunnel face. Points are defined relative to the tunnel axis or the tunnel profile. Stake profile Stakeout points at defined chainages. Points are defined relative to the tunnel axis or the tunnel profile. Check profile Measure deviations of the built tunnel to the original design. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1193 Method Description Scan profile Automatically scan profiles in a defined section of the tunnel Next step OK accesses the Define screen. Define The screen is an example valid for Method to use: Stake face. OK To continue to the next screen. Shifts.. To apply horizontal, vertical and profile shifts to the selected element. Refer to "35.5 Working with Shifts". Load.. To load a task. Refer to "35.6 Tasks". Save.. To save the settings as task. Refer to "35.6 Tasks". Fn Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1194 Description of fields Common to all methods Field Option Description Layer Display only or selectable list Layers contained in the active tunnel job can be selected. Centreline Display only The name of the layer centreline. For Method to use: Stake face Field Option Description Drilling rig orientation Check box Available for Method to use: Stake face. This functionality helps to orientate the drilling rig when drilling holes parallel to the tunnel axis direction. The entry point at the tunnel face is marked and delta angles to align the drilling rig are provided. Drilling distance Editable field The bore hole length. Available when Drilling rig orientation is checked. Boom length Editable field The length of the drilling rig. Available when Drilling rig orientation is checked. Tolerance Editable field Defines how accurate the drilling rig must be positioned to calculate the delta angles (max 10% of boom length). Available when Drilling rig orientation is checked. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1195 For Method to use: Check profile Field Option Description Apply target radius Check box Available for Method to use: Check profile. When using a prism to check a design profile, it is important to take the prism radius into account. The measured point is projected by a distance equivalent to the radius of the prism in a direction perpendicular to the tangent of the design profile. When this box is not checked, the design profile is compared to the coordinates of the centre of the prism at the measured position. a d b >4m ~2m c Tunnel_013 Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1196 Field Option Description a) b) c) d) Tangent to design profile Prism radius Prism Design profile If reflectorless measurements are used or no design profile has been defined, the prism radius parameter will not be used in the calculation. In Check Profile, Plot page a plot of the measured point regarding the design profile is displayed. Target radius Editable field Available for Method to use: Check profile and when Apply target radius is checked. The radius of the prism. For Method to use: Scan profile Field Option Description Scan area defnd by Chainage or Distance Available for Method to use: Scan profile. When measuring tunnel profiles, it is possible to scan various profiles from one instrument position. Profiles are scanned at a given forward and back interval within a given forward and back distance or chainage from the defined profile. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1197 Field Option Description Plan view d h i e a b Tunnel_009 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel f c g Centreline Instrument position Tunnel face Defined profile to scan Instrument profile Back distance Forward distance Back interval Forward interval 1198 39.3 Staking/Checking the Tunnel 39.3.1 Overview Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile, General page This screen is an example valid for Method to use: Stake profile. Meas To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. ChAvailable for Tunnel - Stakeout. To decrease the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Dist+ To increase the distance along the profile. Available for Input method: Profile, dist & offset and Input method: Dist from top&offset. Ch+ Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To increase the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1199 Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Positn Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To stake the point automatically. The instrument aims toward the point at the given chainage and offsets and measures a distance. If this distance is not within the required tolerance an iterative process is started until: - the number of iterations set as the configuration parameter Max iterations is reached, or - the difference between the measured point and the design point is less than the value set as the configuration parameter Position limit. Fn Tools.. Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To access the tools menu. Refer to "37.4 The Tools Menu". Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1200 Description of fields Field Option Point ID Editable field Description The point identifier of the point to be staked. Stake chainage Editable field Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. The defined or approximate chainage of the point to be staked out. Chainge increment Editable field Available for Method to use: Stake profile.Chainage increment. Value by which the nominal chainage increases/decreases when pressing Ch+/Ch-. If a point is to be staked at more than one chainage, a chainage increment can be defined. Target height Editable field Available for Method to use: Check profile. The height of the prism. If a prism is used, type in the vertical difference between the point to be measured and the point of the prism pole. Next step Page changes to the Offsets page. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1201 Scan profile, General page Start Available for automatic scanning. To start the scanning process. Refer to "Making a scan". Stop Available for automatic scanning. To stop the scanning process. Pause To pause the scan. Refer to "Making a scan". GetBck Available for automatic scanning. To measure a distance from the instrument position and to calculate the difference in chainage between the measured point and the chainage of the instrument position. The calculated difference is then set as Back distance. The measured point for a back distance must always be at a chainage less than the chainage of the instrument position. If this condition is not met, an error message is displayed and it is necessary to redefine the distance. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1202 GetFwd Available for automatic scanning. To measure a distance from the instrument position and to calculate the difference in chainage between the measured point and the chainage of the instrument position. The calculated difference is then set as Forward distance. The measured point for a forward distance must always be at a chainage greater than the chainage of the instrument position. If this condition is not met, an error message is displayed and it is necessary to redefine the distance. Meas Available for manual scanning. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Dist Available for manual scanning. To measure a distance. Store Available for manual scanning. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Manual or Auto To switch between manual and automatic scanning. Refer to "Defining discrete points to measure". Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1203 Fn Config.. To access configuration settings. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Limit To define the scan limits. Refer to "Making a scan". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The point identifier of the point to be staked. Stake chainage Editable field The defined or approximate chainage of the point to be staked out. Editable field Profiles are scanned at a given forward/back interval within a given forward/back distance/chainage from the defined profile. Back interval and Forward interval ) The scan area can be defined by distances from the instrument setup point or as chainage range. Back distance and Forward distance Editable field Back chainage Editable field and Forward chainage Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel The limit for the profile measurements is entered manually or is measured using the GetBck/GetFwd. Available for Scan area defnd by: Distance. Available for Scan area defnd by: Chainage. 1204 Next step Page changes to the Offsets page. Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile/Scan profile, Offsets page Refer to "Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile, General page" for a description of keys. Description of fields Common for all methods Field Option Description Apply offsets Check box When this box is checked, horizontal and vertical offsets can be applied. For Tunnel - Stakeout Field Option To define the position of the point to be staked out. Input method Offset & height Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel Description The point is staked out with a known perpendicular and vertical offset from the horizontal and vertical alignments respectively. 1205 Field Option Description c b a Tunnel_018 a) Centreline b) Centreline height difference c) Centreline offset Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel From job The offsets of the point are stored as coordinates in the Working job. The Stake offset is stored as the X coordinate and the Stake height diffis stored as the Y coordinate. Profile, dist & offset The point is defined by the distance from the start of the profile and an offset perpendicular to the design profile. 1206 Field Option Description b c a Tunnel_019 a) Centreline b) Profile offset c) Distance from start of design profile Dist from top&offset Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel The point is defined by the distance from the top of the tunnel and an offset perpendicular to the design profile. 1207 Field Option Description - + d b c a Tunnel_028 a) b) c) d) Element & offset Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel Centreline Top of profile Offset perpendicular to the profile segment Distance from the top of the profile The point to stake out is defined by: 1) The number of the element on which the point lies 2) The percentage of the distance along the element of the point to stake out 3) The offset perpendicular to the design profile. 1208 Field Option Description c d e a b Tunnel_020 a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Point defining start of design profile Offset perpendicular to profile segment Distance from start of start point of segment in % Start point of segment Stake offset Editable field Applies a horizontal offset perpendicular to the centreline. Available for Input method: Offset & height. Stake height diff Editable field Applies a vertical offset to the centreline. Available for Input method: Offset & height. Point ID Selectable list Available for Input method: From job. Profile distance Editable field Top distance Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel Editable field The distance from start of design profile. Available for Input method: Profile, dist & offset. The distance from the top of the tunnel. Available for Input method: Dist from top&offset. 1209 Field Option Description Profile offset Editable field The offset from the design profile. Available for Input method: Profile, dist & offset, Input method: Dist from top&offset and Input method: Element & offset. Increment Editable field To increment the distance for offset definitions as distance and offset. Available for Input method: Profile, dist & offset and Input method: Dist from top&offset. Element no. Editable field Element number 1 is the first element of the design profile. % Element Editable field Distance in percentage terms of the measured point along the design profile element. Check offset Editable field Available for Method to use: Check profile. Applies a horizontal offset perpendicular to the centreline used for comparing to the measured point. Check height diff Editable field Available for Method to use: Check profile. Applies a vertical offset to the centreline used for comparing to the measured point. For Tunnel - As built check Field Option Description Check offset Editable field Applies a horizontal offset perpendicular to the centreline used for comparing to the measured point. Check height diff Editable field Applies a vertical offset to the centreline used for comparing to the measured point. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1210 Next step Stake face/Stake profile, Stake page IF you work with THEN Page changes to the Tunnel - Stakeout Stake page. Tunnel - As built check Info page. ) This page is available for Tunnel - Stakeout only. This page displays the differences between the measured point and the defined point. The position of the point to stake is reached when all difference values are close to zero. Refer to "Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile, General page" for a description of keys. Refer to "42.4 Staking Out" for a description of the elements of the graphical display. Description of fields Field Option Description Chainage Display only The current chainage. CL O Display only Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. ∆ chainage Display only Difference between the Stake chainage and the current chainage. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field shows ----. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1211 Field Option Description ∆O Display only Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. The offset defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. ∆ height Display only Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. The height difference defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. Next step Page changes to the Info page. Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile/Scan profile, Info page The Info page displays the differences between the measured and design data. The fields viewed on this page are be configurable. Refer to " Configuration, Info page" for information on all available items for the Info page and how to select them. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1212 Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile/Scan profile, Plot page The Plot page displays a plot of the measured point regarding the tunnel design. This screen is an example valid for Method to use: Stake profile. ChAvailable for Tunnel - Stakeout. To decrease the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Ch+ Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To increase the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1213 39.3.2 Stake face Stake face Overview When excavating a tunnel, it is required to stake out the tunnel portal before excavation can begin. In addition, for excavation methods other than those involving tunnel boring machines (TBMs), it is then required to stake out the tunnel face at given intervals during the excavation. The tunnel face can be staked out at any time within the Tunnel application using Stake face. This function allows the setting out of a series of points perpendicular to the horizontal alignment. The horizontal alignment indicates the position of the design profile at the chainage of the tunnel face. Cross section view a Tunnel_015 Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel a) Points to stake out 1214 Given that it is likely that a degree of rock debris is present at the tunnel face or that inexact excavation techniques such as blasting are used, it cannot be assumed that the tunnel face at any stage of the excavation is perpendicular to the horizontal alignment. This situation in turn implies that we cannot stake out a point on the tunnel face at a given chainage as the chainage of the tunnel face at any particular point is unknown. Iterative techniques are necessary to enable any defined point on the tunnel face to be staked out accurately. The Stake face function involves setting out a point on the tunnel face at this unknown chainage. First of all the point to stake out on the tunnel face is stake out at an approximate chainage (e). The point is defined by offsets regarding the centreline or by its position along the design profile and its offset from the profile. Given that the excavated tunnel face does not intersect the defined chainage, another point (e') is measured. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1215 First iteration e e' a e' c d e b a Tunnel_016 a) b) c) d) e) e') Centreline Instrument position Tunnel face Approximate chainage to stake out Point to stake out at approximate chainage Point to stake out on tunnel face The true chainage of the measured point of the first iteration (e') is then calculated. The defined point (e) is staked out at the calculated chainage (d). Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1216 Second iteration This process is repeated until the differences between staked point and the defined point are within a tolerance set by the user. e a e c b Tunnel_017 Drilling rig orientation a d a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Instrument position Tunnel face Calculated chainage from first iteration Point to stake out at calculated chainage Description This functionality helps to orientate the drilling rig when drilling holes parallel to the tunnel axis direction. The entry point at the tunnel face will be marked and delta angles to align the drilling rig are provided. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1217 Drilling rig orientation step-by-step Step Description 1. Make sure that Tunnel - Stakeout and Method to use: Stake face is selected. 2. In the Define screen check Drilling rig orientation and type in the values. 3. In Stake Face, General page, define the entry position relative to the axis or to the profile. ) Fn Positn to stake out that point. 4. Roughly position the drilling bit and target to its end. 5. Fn Tools... Select Check Jumbo position to get the delta angles for the final rig orientation. α Horizontal angle β Vertical angle Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1218 39.3.3 Stake profile and Check profile Stake/Check point on surface c d b e f a Tunnel_021 a) b) c) d) e) f) Centreline Design point to stake out Excavated profile Design profile Centreline offset Centreline height difference If it is not possible to stake out the defined point between successive iterations, the instrument will maintain the chainage and height difference from the vertical alignment fixed. The horizontal offset from the centreline to calculate the new position of the point are modified. The point that will be staked out will thus maintain the defined chainage and height difference but will have a modified offset value from the centreline. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1219 c d b e f a Tunnel_022 Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel a) b) c) d) e) f) Centreline Point to stake out on excavated profile Excavated profile Design profile Centreline offset Centreline height difference 1220 39.3.4 Scan profile ) The instrument measure always the profile in the chainage where the instrument is stationed before measuring additional profiles. Scan limits Inclusive and exclusive sections Once the chainages of the profiles to scan have been defined, and before starting the measurement, it is necessary to define the limits of the scan. The scan limits are used to define the angular limits to be scanned in a plane perpendicular to the centreline. These limits normally define the starting point and end point of the profile to scan as well as any zone that is excluded from measuring. Limits are defined regarding the instrument axis. In the following example, a limit is defined. This limit includes the entire area to be scanned and an overlapping area that is not scanned because a ventilation shaft is obstructing a clear view of the tunnel surface. Any number of limits is definable. In addition each limit must be defined as an include limit, that is measure within the defined zone, or an exclude limit, that is do not measure within the defined zone. If overlapping zones are defined, an exclude limit has priority over an include limit. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1221 c d b a Tunnel_014 a) b) c) d) Instrument axis Ventilation shaft Include limit Exclude limit Access Press Fn Limit in Scan Profile. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1222 Angular Limits OK To return to Scan Profile after defining the angular limits, New.. To create a new angular limit. Edit.. To edit a defined limit. Delete To delete a defined limit. Fn Default To use the angular limits by default. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Limit The name of the limit. Measure Yes indicates an include limit within which points are measured. No indicates an exclude limit which is not measured. Increment The approximate distance between the points to be measured. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1223 Next step New.. to access New Angular Limits. New Angular Limits OK To store the defined limit and return to Angular Limits, Dist To measure the distance to points at the starting angle and the end angle of a limit. Available when Angle start or Angle end is highlighted. Positn To review the position of the limit once it has been defined. The instrument turns to the corresponding angle. Available when Angle start or Angle end is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Hz Display only Current horizontal angle of the instrument. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1224 Field Option Description V Display only Current vertical angle of the instrument. Slope distance Display only The slope distance measured by pressing Dist. Limit name Editable field The name of the limit. Measured status Check box When this box is checked, it can be defined whether points are measured within the limit. Increment Editable field The approximate distance between points to be measured. Full scan Yes The whole measurement area is scanned. The area around the tripod cannot be scanned. No The limit is defined manually. Angle start Display only The angle measured to the point at the beginning of the limit. Angle end Display only The angle measured to the point at the end of the limit. Defining a limit step-by-step Step Description 1. Type in the Limit name. 2. Highlight Angle start. 3. Turn the instrument to point at the starting angle of the limit. 4. Press the Dist to measure the distance. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1225 Defining discrete points to measure Step Description 5. Highlight Angle end. 6. Turn the instrument to point at the end angle of the limit. 7. Press the Dist to measure the distance. 8. Enter the approximate distance between points to be measured on the line Increment. Measure additional points In addition to defining the chainage and the angular limits of the profiles to scan, it is also possible to define discrete points in the profile. Discrete points are to be measured at each chainage. These points could represent a breakpoint in the section, for example, or a point that is required for positioning services such as electricity cables. Defining a manual point step-by-step Step Description 1. In Scan Profile press Manual. 2. Aim at the point to measure. 3. Use Meas, Dist and Store to measure the point in the usual manner. 4. Repeat the process for all the manual points that are required to be added to the profile. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1226 Making a scan Starting the scan Once all manual points have been defined, the scanning of the profiles is started by pressing Auto. If no manual points are required, scanning of the profiles is started by pressing Start. Once scanning has started, the values of the measured point are viewed in Scan Profile, Info page. The values shown on this screen can be configured in the configuration. Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications" for more information. It is possible to end the scan once started using Stop. To pause the scan, for example to allow passing site traffic through, use Pause. Pause and options before continuing Once the scan has been paused, several options are available before continuing: • Stop: To end the scan. • Resum: To continue the scan at the next position. Turn the instrument to skip a section of the profile if needed. • Prof+: To skip the remaining points in the profile being measured and to move on to the next profile. • Manual: To add a point measured manually to the measured profile. If this key has been pressed, the automatic scan is resumed by pressing Auto. Invalid measurements This process is repeated until the measured point is within the chainage limit or the maximum number of iterations has been reached. Invalid measurement situations could occur, for example: Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1227 • • Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel in irregular tunnel surfaces, where the horizontal alignment is formed by a curve with a small radius. if the back distance or forward distance defined in Scan Profile, General page were too large. 1228 40 Sets of Angles 40.1 Overview Description Sets of Angles: • This application is used to measure multiple sets of directions and distances (optional) to pre-defined target points in one or two faces. The application can include Monitoring as an option. • The mean direction and mean distance (optional) to each target point, within a set is calculated. The residual for each direction and distance (optional) within a set is also calculated. • The reduced average direction and average distance (optional) to each target point, for all active sets is calculated. Monitoring: • This module can be integrated within the Sets of Angles program. • With this module, it is possible to use a timer to enable repeated and automated angle and distances measurements to pre-defined target points at defined intervals. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1229 Diagram P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P0 TS_048 Known: P1 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) P2 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) P3 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) P4 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) P5 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) Unknown: a) Mean direction and mean distance (optional) to each target point, within a set b) Residual for each direction and distance (optional ), within a set c) Reduced average direction and average distance (optional) to each target point, for all active sets Measure at least: a) Two target points b) Two sets Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1230 Automatic aiming Automatic aiming (search and measurements) can be performed to a prism. After completing the first measurements to each target point, the measurements to the target points in subsequent sets are automated. Station setup and station orientation If oriented grid coordinates are to be recorded, a station set up and station orientation is required before starting the Sets of Angles application. Point properties The properties stored with Sets of Angles points are: • Class: Meas or None • Sub class: TPS • Source: Sets of Angles • Instrument source: TPS Point averaging An average is never calculated for Sets of Angles points, even if a measured point of class Meas already exists with the same point ID. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1231 40.2 Sets of Angles 40.2.1 Accessing Sets of Angles Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Sets of Angles. Choose Control Job OK To accept changes and access the next screen. The chosen settings become active. Fn Config.. To configure the Sets of Angles application. Refer to "40.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Control job Selectable list The job where the target points to be observed can be selected and a points list created. Next step OK accepts the changes and accesses Sets of Angles Menu. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1232 Sets of Angles Menu OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the next screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Sets of Angles application. Refer to "40.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of Sets of Angles Menu options Options Description Manage points list To create, edit and manage a points list of the target points for the survey. Refer to "40.2.3 Managing the Points List". Measure new points To define the target points and to measure the first set. Refer to "40.2.4 Measuring the New Points". Measure sets To measure the second set and any further sets. Refer to "Measure Sets". Calculate angles To calculate horizontal/vertical angles and their residuals. Refer to "40.2.6 Calculations - Calculating Angles and Distances in Two Faces". Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1233 Options Description Calculate distances To calculate distances and their residuals. Refer to "40.2.7 Calculations - Viewing Angle and Distance Results in Two Faces". End Sets of Angles To end the Sets of Angles program. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1234 40.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Sets of Angles. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Tolerances page Description of fields Field Option Description Use tolerances Check box If checked, the entered horizontal, vertical and distance tolerances are checked during the measurements to verify accurate pointing and measurements. Hz tolerance Editable field Tolerance for horizontal directions. V tolerance Editable field Tolerance for vertical directions Distance tolerance Editable field Tolerance for distances. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1235 Field Option Description Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1236 40.2.3 Managing the Points List Description A points list of the target points for the survey can be created, edited and managed. New points are always added from the fixpoint job, as defined in the Sets of Angles Begin screen. Access Highlight Manage points list in Sets of Angles Menu and OK. Point list name OK To return to the Sets of Angles Menu. New To create a new points list. Edit To edit an existing points list. Delete To delete an existing points list. More To display additional information. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step New to access New Points List. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1237 New Points List, General page Store To store the new points list. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point list name Editable field The name of the points list. Automatically survey this point Check box Check this box to survey the target points automatically. The instrument will automatically turn and measure the target point. For instruments with automatic aiming. Auto sort points Check box Check this box to sort the target points automatically. The instrument will work in a clockwise direction and find the shortest path to move between the target points. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1238 New Points List, Points page Viva Series, Sets of Angles Store To store the points to the list. + All To add points from the fixpoint job to the list. +1 To add one point from the fixpoint job to the list. Remov To remove the highlighted point from the list. The point itself is not deleted. More To display additional information. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Rmv all To remove all points from the list. Fn Quit To exit the application. 1239 40.2.4 Measuring the New Points Description The points to be used for Sets of Angles can be selected and the first set measured. The measurement settings of the first measurement to each point are used for all further sets. Access Highlight Measure new points in Sets of Angles Menu and OK. Define Points for Set OK To measure the entered point and to access Select Points - Survey. Done To finish selection of points and access Sets of Angles Menu for further steps. Fn Get Pt To select points stored in the database. Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1240 Description of fields Field Option Description Automatically survey this point Check box Available for instruments with automatic aiming and Target aiming: Automatic. If checked, search and measurements are done to specified targets in additional sets. Next step IF THEN new or selected points are to be measured OK to access Select Points - Survey. existing points are to Fn Get Pt to select a point from Data, Points page. be selected all desired points have been selected and measured Viva Series, Sets of Angles Done to return to the Sets of Angles Menu. 1241 Select Points - Survey, Sets page Meas To measure and store the angles and distance, and to return to Define Points for Set. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store data and to return to Define Points for Set. Positn To position the instrument to the selected target point. Available if the target point has been selected using Fn Get Pt in the Define Points for Set screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Δ Hz Display only Difference between the current horizontal angle and the horizontal angle to this target when selected. ΔV Display only Difference between the current vertical angle and the vertical angle to this target when selected. Δ slope Display only Difference between the current slope distance to the target and the slope distance to this target when selected. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1242 Next step Meas to measure and store the angles and distance, and to return to Define Points for Set. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1243 40.2.5 Measuring the Sets Description The selected points from Measure new points are used for measuring further sets. The settings of measurements are taken from the first measurement to each target. Access Highlight Measure Sets in Sets of Angles Menu and OK. Measure Sets OK Opens a screen to measure the points. When auto survey is activated, measurements are done automatically. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description No. of sets Editable field The number of sets to measure with the target points. There is a maximum of 99 sets allowed. No. of points Display only The number of target points. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1244 Next step OK to measure further sets of the defined points. Set n of n, Pt n of n, Sets page Viva Series, Sets of Angles Meas To measure and store the angles and distances, and to increment to the next point. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store data and to increment to the next point. Skip To skip measuring the displayed point and continue with the next point. Done To end the sets of angles measurements and to return to Sets of Angles Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Positn To position the instrument to the selected target point. Fn Quit To exit the application. 1245 Description of fields Field Option Description Δ Hz Display only Difference between the current horizontal angle and the horizontal angle to this target when selected. ΔV Display only Difference between the current vertical angle and the vertical angle to this target when selected. Δ slope Display only Difference between the current slope distance to the target and the slope distance to this target when selected. Next step Meas to measure further sets of the selected points. ) • • ) For the calculation, two entire sets must be measured. Horizontal and vertical angles and distances can be calculated individually. Viva Series, Sets of Angles Motorised instruments point automatically in the direction of the targets. Instruments with automatic aiming and auto survey activated, measure the targets automatically. 1246 40.2.6 Calculations - Calculating Angles and Distances in Two Faces Description For two or more sets, measured with angles and distances in two faces calculations can be done for angles and distances. For sets measured in one face, the results can be viewed but no calculations are done. Refer to "40.2.8 Calculations - Viewing Results in One Face" for more information. Access Highlight Calculate Angles or Calculate Distances in Sets of Angles Menu and OK. Calculate Angles/Calculate Distances, Hz Set/V Set/Distance set page The softkeys are the same for vertical angles, horizontal angles and distances. OK To access Sets of Angles Menu. More To view results of calculation. Refer to "40.2.7 Calculations - Viewing Angle and Distance Results in Two Faces". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Points active Display only Number of active points which are set to Yes in the Use column and used for calculation. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1247 Field Option Description Sets active Display only Number of active sets which are set to Yes in the Use column and used for calculation. SD single direction Display only Standard deviation of a single horizontal or vertical direction. SD single distance Display only Standard deviation of a single distance. SD avg direction Display only Standard deviation of the average horizontal or vertical direction. SD avg distance Display only Standard deviation of the average distance. Next step Page accesses the Plot page. The functionality and softkeys available are described in the MapView chapter. Refer to "28.4.1 Screen Area" for information functionality. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1248 40.2.7 Calculations - Viewing Angle and Distance Results in Two Faces Access Press More in Calculate Angles or Calculate Distances. Angle Results/Distance Results OK To return to the previous screen. Edit.. To access View Residuals in Set n. Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for the highlighted set. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Set Displays the numbers of all sets measured. Use For Yes: The selected set is used for calculations. For No: The selected set is not used for calculations. Hz Σr Shows the calculated sum of residuals in Hz of the selected set. The sum of residuals is the sum of the difference between the reduced average direction and each sets directions. For sets not used in the calculation, ----- is shown. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1249 Column Description V Σv Shows the calculated sum of residuals in V of the selected set. The sum of residuals is the sum of the difference between the average vertical angles and each sets vertical angles. For sets not used in the calculation, ----- is shown. Next step Edit.. to access View Residuals in Set n. View Residuals in Set n OK To return to the previous screen. Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for the highlighted point. More To view additional information. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1250 Description of columns when calculating angles Column Description Point ID This column is always visible. Point ID of the measured points in the order they were defined and measured in Measure new points. Use For Yes: The selected point is used for calculations in all sets. For No: The selected point is not used for calculations in any set. sd Residual in the angle of the selected point within the single set. sd Residual in the Hz value of the selected point within the single set. Resdl V Residual in the V value of the selected point within the single set. Avg Hz Reduced Average Hz value of the point in all active sets. Avg V Average V value of the point in all active sets. Mean Hz Mean Hz value of the point within the single set. Mean V Mean V value of the point within the single set. Description of columns when calculating distances Column Description Point ID This column is always visible. Point ID of the measured points in the order they were defined and measured in Measure new points. Use For Yes: The selected point is used for calculations in all sets. For No: The selected point is not used for calculations in all sets. Resdl SD Residual in the distance value of the point within the single set. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1251 Column Description Avg SD Average distance value of the point in all active sets. Mean SD Mean distance value of the point within the single set. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1252 40.2.8 Calculations - Viewing Results in One Face Access Highlight Calculate Angles or Calculate Distances in Sets of Angles Menu and press OK. Single Face Results OK To return to the previous screen. More To view additional columns. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Point ID Point ID of the measured points in the order they were defined and measured in Measure new points. SD Hz Standard deviation of all Hz readings to the point. Avg Hz Average value of all Hz readings to the current point. SD V Standard deviation of all V readings to the current point. Avg V Average value of all V readings to the current point. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1253 Column Description SD distance Standard deviation of all distance measurements to the current point. Avg SD Average value of all distance measurements to the current point. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1254 40.3 Monitoring Description Monitoring is a module integrated within the Sets of Angles application. Monitoring uses a timer to enable repeated and automated angle and distances measurements to pre-defined target points at defined intervals. The ability to configure the handling of message screens during measurement sets is also enabled. Important aspects For monitoring, instruments must be motorised. ) Monitoring is licence protected and is only activated through a licence key. The licence key can be entered manually or loaded from the data storage device. Monitoring preparation This step-by-step description is an example on preparing a set for monitoring. Step Description 1. Set station coordinates and station orientation. 2. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Sets of Angles. 3. In Choose Control Job, select the control job and press OK. 4. In Sets of Angles Menu press Fn Config.. to configure Sets of Angles for monitoring. For the Parameters page set: Viva Series, Sets of Angles • Measure method: A'B'A"B" (for example purposes only). • Page to show: None (for example purposes only). • Stop measuring for: All messages (for example purposes only). • Time out: 10 secs (for example purposes only). 1255 Step Description • Define time when sets should be measured (timer monitoring) (this option must be selected for monitoring). This setting will enable access to the Define Monitoring Timer screen. 5. Press OK to access the Sets of Angles Menu screen. 6. Select Measure new points. 7. Press OK to access the Define Points for Set screen. 8. Enter details of the target point as required. For each target point, ensure that auto survey is activated. This setting will enable the automated measurement and recording of the target point in the other face. The setting also enables the automated measurement and recording of all target points during monitoring. 9. Press OK to access the Select Points - Survey screen. 10. Measure and record the measurement to the target point as required. 11. Continue with steps 8. to 10. until all target points for the first measurement set have been measured and recorded. 12. Press Done to complete the selection of the target points for the first measurement set in one face. This action then begins the measurement of the target points in the other face. On completion, the Sets of Angles Menu screen will be accessed. 13. Select Measure Sets. 14. Press OK to access the Define Monitoring Timer screen. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1256 Define Monitoring Timer Description of fields Field Option Description Begin date Editable field Start date for monitoring. Begin time Editable field Start time for monitoring. End date Editable field End date for monitoring. End time Editable field End time for monitoring. Interval Editable field The time between the start of each scheduled measurement set. Stop measuring for Selectable list To define what action is taken when a message screen appears during a measurement set. The setting for this editable field has already been defined in the configuration. It can be changed in this screen if desired, before starting the monitoring process. Time out Selectable list To define the time delay for the automatic closing of message screens during a measurement set. This selectable list is not available for Stop measuring for: Never stop. The setting for this editable field has already been defined in the configuration. Here, it can be changed if desired, before starting the monitoring process. Next step When all required information is entered press OK to begin the monitoring process. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1257 A screen displays a notice that monitoring is in progress. If necessary, press Abort to stop the monitoring process and return to Sets of Angles Menu. Refer to "40.2 Sets of Angles" for information about calculations and the viewing of results. Monitoring interval Description The dates and times entered define the timeframe for when the monitoring will take place. The time interval defines the time between the start of each measurement set during the monitoring period. The interval time begins at the start of a measurement set and ends at the start of the next measurement set. Example Data; • • • • 3 target points Begin Date: 03.11.2010 End Date: 06.11.2010 Interval: 30 min • • • 4 measure sets Begin Time: 14:00:00 End Time: 14:00:00 Results; • The time taken to measure 4 sets of 3 target points in both faces is 10 minutes. • The measurements will start at 14:00:00 on 03.11.2010. • At 14:10:00, the first measurement set is complete. • The instrument will wait until 14:30:00 for the next scheduled measurement set. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1258 41 Setup 41.1 Overview Description The Setup application is only available for use with TPS instruments. Setup determines the station coordinates and the instrument orientation using TPS measurements and/or GPS measurements. SmartPole allows target points to be determined using GPS measurements. The new points are then used as control points for the TPS setup. SmartStation allows TPS station coordinates (position and height) to be determined from GPS measurements. Setup Method Viva Series, Setup "On-the-Fly" setup type Setup with GPS using SmartStation "Standard" setup type Setup methods Setup with GPS using SmartPole Methods for TPS Methods for SmartPole Methods for SmartStation Set orientation 9 - 9 - 9 Known backsight 9 - 9 9 9 Multiple backsights 9 9 9 9 9 Transfer height 9 - 9 9 - Resection 9 9 9 9 - Orientate to line 9 - 9 - 9 1259 • • Setup types Each setup method requires different input data and a different number of target points. All setup methods are described in "41.7 Setup Methods". "Standard" setup "On-the-Fly" setup This type of setup is the traditional type. The user must always measure all setup points consecutively to complete the setup. The TPS station coordinates and TPS orientation must be set before measuring survey points. This setup type allows the user to move between setup and survey before completing the setup (working "on the fly"). When leaving setup the TPS station coordinates and orientation do not have to be final, they can be set at anytime during the survey. This setup can only be used when measuring survey points. When staking out points, the TPS station coordinates and TPS orientation must be set first. Incomplete setups • For a "Standard" setup, the user must always measure all setup points consecutively to complete the setup. This type of setup is always regarded as a complete setup. • For "On-the-Fly" setups, the setup points can be measured together with the survey points. It is not necessary to complete the setup before measuring survey points. Until the user selects Set in Station Results, this type of setup is regarded as incomplete. An incomplete setup, or a setup where more targets can be added, can be accessed in the following ways: 1. In the Survey application, Setup can be accessed by selecting the Setup softkey. 2. When entering any panel where it is possible to do a measurement, a message is displayed to notify that the setup is incomplete. It is then possible to: a) continue with the existing application, or OK Viva Series, Setup 1260 b) start Setup and create a new station setup, or New.. c) start Setup and continue to measure additional fixpoints. Setup 3. Assigning the function TPS - Continue open setup to the favourites or a hot key. Properties of setup points TPS points The properties stored with a TPS point are: Type Station Target Class Ref Meas or None Sub class TPS TPS Source Setup(setup method) Setup(setup method) Instrument source TPS TPS GPS points (only applicable when using SmartPole or SmartStation) The properties stored with a GPS point are: Viva Series, Setup Type Station Station Class Meas Nav Sub class GNSS Fixed GNSS Code Only Source Setup(setup method) Setup(setup method) Instrument source GPS GPS 1261 41.2 Accessing Setup Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Setup. Total Station Setup An illustration and a description is shown for each Setup method. OK To accept changes and access the subsequent screen. The chosen settings become active. Refer to "41.4 Set Station Point" or "41.5 Enter Station Information". Fn Config.. To configure the Setup application. Refer to "41.3 Configuring Setup". Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Viva Series, Setup 1262 41.3 Configuring Setup Access Press Fn Config.. in Total Station Setup. Configuration, General page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Viva Series, Setup Option Description Remind me of last Check box setup before measuring Current instrument setup details can be displayed to remind the user to either keep the current instrument setup, check the backsight, or create a new setup. Refer to "41.6 Setup Reminder" for details. Use two face meas- Check box urements in setup Defines if the instrument measures the second face automatically after storing the first. 1263 Field Option Description When this box is checked, after storing a measurement with All or Store motorised instruments change face automatically, non-motorised instruments access Telescope Positioning. The measurements of face I and face II are averaged. The averaged value is stored. When this box is not checked, no automatic measurement in two faces. Use graphics to help Check box choose setup method When this box is checked, the setup methods are displayed in a screen accompanied by a graphic and text describing each setup method. When this box is not checked, the setup methods are selected from the drop-down menu in Go to Work!. Show message when setup is complete Check box When this box is checked, a message informs when the setup is finished. Next step Page changes to the Known backsight page. Viva Series, Setup 1264 Configuration, Known backsight page For Setup method: Known backsight, the settings on this page apply. Description of fields Field Option Description Check backsight position Check box Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordinate difference between the existing and the measured known backsight point. If the defined Position limit is exceeded, the setup can be repeated, skipped or stored. Position limit Editable field Available when Check backsight position is checked. Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate difference accepted in the position check. Check backsight height Check box Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference between the existing and the measured known backsight point. If the Height limit is exceeded, the stake out can be repeated, skipped or stored. Height limit Editable field Available when Check backsight height is checked. Sets the maximum vertical difference accepted in the height check. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Viva Series, Setup 1265 Configuration, Advanced page For Setup method: Resection and Setup method: Multiple backsights, the settings on this page apply. Description of fields Viva Series, Setup Field Option Description Auto position to setup targets Check box When this box is checked, the instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point. Calculate scale from Check box target observations Only if available if the job properties do not have Compute scale using set to Stn & coord system. If checked, a station scale will be calculated from the target observations. The user will have the option to apply this new scale (calculated ppm + current ppm = new ppm) to all survey observations, including the setup observations, from that setup. If not checked, then the calculated ppm will not be displayed and therefore not applied to any survey observations. Use Helmert method Check box for resection Helmert calculation is used. Height weighting 1/distance or 1/distance² Available when Use Helmert method for resection is checked. To change the distance weighting that is used in the calculation of the station height in the resection. Edit default station quality checks Check box Check to type in values for standard deviation, position and height accuracy. If the limits are exceeded, a message will be shown when Calc is selected. 1266 Field Option Description Orientation limit Editable field Available when Edit default station quality checks is checked. Define a limit for the standard deviation of the orientation. Position limit Editable field Available when Edit default station quality checks is checked. Define a position accuracy of the target point. Height limit Editable field Available when Edit default station quality checks is checked. Define a height accuracy of the target point. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Viva Series, Setup Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. 1267 Field Option Description Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Setup 1268 41.4 Set Station Point Access A station point must be selected for Setup method: Set orientation, Setup method: Known backsight, Setup method: Multiple backsights and Setup method: Transfer height. Set Station Point is then accessed automatically from Setup. Set Station Point OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Scale.. To type in values for the scale corrections. Refer to "New Job, Scale page". Atmos.. To type in values for the atmospheric corrections. Refer to "Atmospheric Corrections, Atmospheric ppm page". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Instrument height Editable field The height of the instrument. Station point from Viva Series, Setup The selection made here determines the availability of the other fields on this screen. 1269 Field Option Description Job A station point can be selected from a job on a data storage device. Enter new point Pressing OK opens a screen where a new point can be typed in. After pressing Store there, the Setup application continues. GPS - SmartStation Available when TPS and GPS are used. Pressing OK opens the GPS Survey application. After measuring a point with Meas, Stop, Store there, the Setup application continues. Refer to "44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations". ) ) ) Last used station Viva Series, Setup In order to use GPS, a coordinate system for the setup is required and must be attached to the working job. If not, then a coordinate system must be selected, or local coordinates for the station must be typed in, during the setup process. To obtain the correct elevation of the setup point, measure the instrument height as usual and ensure the antenna type is set to the relevant SmartStation antenna. If SmartPole is used in the setup or later in Survey, remember to update the antenna type after finishing the SmartStation measurement. The station used last in the Setup application is displayed. 1270 ) Viva Series, Setup Field Option Description Job Selectable list The job from which the station is to be selected. Refer to "4.4 Choosing a Job". Point ID Display only The point ID of the station point. Easting, Northing and Elevation Display only The coordinates of the station point. Current scale Display only The scale according to the scale settings for the selected station. Refer to "12 Antenna Heights" for further information regarding height values used in a SmartStation. 1271 41.5 Enter Station Information Access Station information must be typed in for Setup method: Resection and Setup method: Orientate to line. Enter Station Information is accessed after selecting OK in Total Station Setup with one of these setup methods selected. Enter Station Information For a description of keys refer to "41.4 Set Station Point". Description of fields ) Viva Series, Setup Field Option Description Station ID Editable field Type in an ID for the station point. Point code Selectable list Select a point code for the station point if desired. Instrument height Editable field The height of the instrument. Use control job for the target points Check box Target points can be selected from the control job. Job Selectable list The control job from which the target points can be selected. Refer to "4.4 Choosing a Job". Current scale Display only The scale according to the scale settings for the selected station. Refer to "12 Antenna Heights" for further information regarding height values used in a SmartStation. 1272 41.6 Setup Reminder Description When activated, the setup reminder appears whenever the user enters a measurement screen. The reminder allows the user to check the current station setup details before proceeding with the survey. When this reminder appears, three options are available to the user: 1) To keep the current station setup and proceed with the survey. 2) To check the backsight point. 3) To create a new station setup. Current Setup Details OK To accept the selection. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Description Continue with current The last setup is used and recorded in the working job. setup Viva Series, Setup 1273 Viva Series, Setup Field Description Check the backsight To open the Check Point screen. The point suggested is the point which Setup uses as the reference orientation. For the setup methods Set orientation and Known backsight, the orientation target point is suggested. For the setup methods Multiple backsights, Transfer height, Resection and Orientate to line, the first target is suggested. Make a new setup To start the Setup application and create a new station setup. 1274 41.7 Setup Methods 41.7.1 Set orientation and Known backsight Requirements The position coordinates of the station point are required. For Set orientation: The instrument is set up and oriented to either a known or unknown target point, to which a true or assumed azimuth is set. For Known backsight: The instrument is set up and oriented to a known backsight target. For SmartStation, the position coordinates of the station are unknown and are determined with GPS. The instrument is set and oriented to either a known or unknown target point, to which a true or assumed azimuth is set. Updating Hz measurements A station setup using the Set orientation method, is always automatically flagged with an ’update later’ attribute. If the backsight point is measured again, for example from another station, and found to have different coordinates, then a message will appear. The user can then select whether to update the original setup or not. The update will use the backsight point coordinates to recalculate the orientation and subsequently update all measured points connected to the setup. Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Set orientation or Known backsight. Press OK. In Set Station Point, select a station. Press OK. Viva Series, Setup 1275 Set Station Orientation, Orientation page Set To set the station and orientation and exit the Setup application. Dist To measure a distance to the point being used to set the azimuth. For Set orientation: A distance measurement is NOT required when setting the Station and the Orientation with Set. GPS For Known backsight applicable when using SmartPole. To enter the GPS Survey screen and measure a point with GPS. The antenna height is automatically converted from the target height. Store To store the measurement with or without a distance. Only available when Use two face measurements in setup is selected in the Setup configuration. More To change between the slope and the horizontal distance. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Setup 1276 Fn Run / IndivID Available for Setup method: Set orientation only. Run automatically chooses the next available point ID from the list of points already stored. IndivID allows the user to type in any value for Backsight ID. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID of the backsight point. Backsight ID Editable field For Set orientation. Selectable list For Known backsight. Select a point from the points stored in the control job. Viva Series, Setup Target height Editable field Height of the target above or below the backsight point. The last setup target height is always remembered. Direction Editable field Available for Set orientation. The direction is set to 0 by default. This value can be edited. The value is not set to the system until Set is pressed. Slope distance Display only Available for Set orientation. The slope distance measured between the station point and the backsight point. Horiz distance Display only Available for Set orientation. Press Dist to measure a distance to the target point being used to set the azimuth. 1277 Field Viva Series, Setup Option Description Height difference Display only Available for Set orientation. The vertical distance between the station point and the backsight point. Computed direc- Display only tion Available for Known backsight. Displays the calculated azimuth from the selected station to the backsight point. Computed hz dist Display only Available for Known backsight. Displays the calculated horizontal distance between the selected station and backsight point. Computed slp dist Display only Available for Known backsight. Displayed after More was pressed. The calculated slope distance to the backsight point. Δ hz dist Display only Available for Known backsight. The difference between the calculated horizontal distance from station to backsight point and the measured horizontal distance. ?slope dist Display only Available for Known backsight. Displayed after More was pressed. The difference between the calculated slope distance from station to backsight point and the measured slope distance. ?height Display only Available for Known backsight. The difference between the control height of the backsight point and the measured height of the backsight point. If the backsight point is a 2D point, this field shows -----. 1278 Next step Page changes to the Backsight page. Set Station Orientation, Backsight page Viva Series, Setup Set To set the station and orientation and exit the Setup application. +Attrib To create additional attributes for this point code. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values for the selected code. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 1279 Description of fields Field Option Description Backsight ID Editable field Point ID of the backsight point. or display only Point code Selectable list The code for the backsight point. Description Display only A short description of the code. Next step Page changes to the Station page. Set Station Orientation, Station page Set To set the station and orientation and exit the Setup application. Dist To measure a distance to the point being used to set the azimuth. A distance measurement is NOT required when setting the Station and the Orientation with Set. SF / Ppm To switch between displaying the current scale as a scale factor or ppm value. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Setup 1280 Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Station ID Display only Station ID as selected in Set Station Point. Instrument height Editable field The instrument height. Point code Selectable list The code for the backsight point. Current PPM / Current scale Display only The current job scale. Refer to " New Job, Scale page" for more information on scale corrections. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. Viva Series, Setup 1281 41.7.2 Multiple backsights Requirements The position coordinates of the station point are required. The instrument is set up and oriented to one or more known backsight targets. For SmartStation, the position coordinates of the station are unknown and are determined with GPS. The instrument is set up and oriented to one or more known backsight targets. For TPS and SmartStation, the orientation is determined by sighting to one or more known target points (maximum of ten target points). Only angles or both angles and distances can be measured. The height of the station point can also be derived from the target points. Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Multiple backsights. Press OK. In Set Station Point, select a station. Press OK. Measure Target Unless otherwise stated the following screen and description applies to the setup methods: Multiple backsights, Transfer height, Resection, and Orientate to line. Meas To measure and store the distances and angles made to the control points. After storing the measurement data, the next point ID in the job is displayed. The instrument positions to the point if enough data is available. Dist To measure and display distances. Viva Series, Setup 1282 Store Records displayed values temporarily. The target measurements will not be stored to the current job until the station is set. A distance measurement is not necessary before pressing Store. After recording the measurement data, the next point ID in the job is displayed. The instrument positions to the point if enough data is available and the instrument is robotic. GPS Applicable when using SmartPole. To enter the GPS Survey screen and measure a point with GPS. The antenna height is automatically converted from the target height. Done For Resection only. To temporarily exit the Setup application. The station setup will be incomplete but can be continued and completed at a later time. This softkey is replaced by Calc when sufficient data is available. Viva Series, Setup 1283 Calc For Multiple backsights: Available after the first measurement. Allows the user to see the calculated station orientation and other results. For Resection: Available after measuring two target points or as soon as a preliminary station and orientation can be calculated. The calculated station coordinates and overall “quality” of the results are displayed. Fn Find Stakeout values are provided to guide the prism holder to the selected target point. For Resection: Available once sufficient data is available for calculation. Refer to "41.9 Finding a Target Point". Fn Positn To position the instrument to the selected target point. For Resection: Available once sufficient data is available for calculation. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Setup Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list The point ID of the target point to be measured. 1284 ) Viva Series, Setup Field Option Description Target height Editable field The height of the target above or below the backsight point. The last setup target height is always remembered. Hz angle Display only The current horizontal angle. V angle Display only The current vertical angle. Slope distance Display only The measured slope distance after Dist was pressed. Δ azimuth Display only Displays the difference between the calculated azimuth and the current horizontal angle. If Setup method: Resection, displays ----- until sufficient data for calculation is available. Δ hz dist Display only The difference between the calculated and the measured horizontal distance. Δ height Display only The difference between the given and the measured height of the target point. A maximum of ten target points can be measured and used for the calculation. When the maximum number of points is exceeded, a message will appear. The user can remove previous points or finish the setup. Points can be removed from the Station Results, Targets page. 1285 41.7.3 Transfer height Requirements This method is used to compute a station height to apply to the selected station. Only the height is updated, the orientation is not updated. The position coordinates of the station point are required. Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Transfer height. Press OK. In Set Station Point, select a station. Press OK. ) Viva Series, Setup For a description of the Measure Target screen, refer to "41.7.2 Multiple backsights". 1286 41.7.4 Resection Requirements The coordinates of the station point are unknown. The coordinates and orientation are determined by sighting to at least two or more known target points (maximum of ten target points). Only angles or both angles and distances can be measured. For a resection, least squares or robust calculations are used. The resection calculations can be done using the Helmert method, robust method or least squares method, after three measurements to known backsights have been completed. Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Resection. Press OK. In Enter Station Information, type in the required information. Press OK. ) Viva Series, Setup For a description of the Measure Target screen, refer to "41.7.2 Multiple backsights". 1287 41.7.5 Orientate to line Description This method can be used to calculate the 2D or 3D local coordinates for the instrument station and the orientation of the horizontal circle. The calculation is done using the distance and angle measurements to two target points. The first target point always defines the origin of the local coordinate system. The second target point, in conjunction with the first target point, always defines the local direction of North or East (depending on the working style). Requirements Important features: • All coordinates calculated are local coordinates. • The first target point always defines the origin of the local coordinate system (North=0, East=0, Height=0 (optional)) • The second target point, in conjunction with the first target point, always defines the local direction of North or East. Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Orientate to line. Press OK. In Enter Station Information type in the required information. Press OK. Viva Series, Setup 1288 Define Station Ht & Axis OK To accept all settings and continue. The chosen settings are activated and the next screen, Measure Target, is displayed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Use station height User entered The height value of the station will be entered by the user and used to calculate the height of the measured points. Transfer from The height of the station will be calculated relative to trgt 1 the first measured point. Station height Editable field Available for Use station height: User entered. The elevation of the instrument station. Target 1 height Editable field Available for Use station height: User entered. The height of the first measured point. Axis defined between target 1 & 2 Viva Series, Setup To define the positive North or positive East axis. 1289 Field ) Viva Series, Setup Option Description North axis The second point measured defines the direction of the positive North axis. East axis The second point measured defines the direction of the positive East axis. For a description of the Measure Target screen, refer to "41.7.2 Multiple backsights". 1290 41.8 Setup Results Description The results screen is displayed after pressing Calc in the Measure Target screen. The results screen is part of the Multiple backsights, Transfer height, Resection and Orientate to line setup methods. Excluding Orientate to line, after three measurements to known targets, the calculations can be done using the robust method or the least squares method. For Resection, the calculations can also be done using the Helmert method. After the station is set, all following measurements will be related to this new station and orientation. Station Results, Results page Set To set the orientation, to store all setup data and exit the application. For Transfer height: To store all setup data and exit the application. Done To exit the setup without setting it, the setup is incomplete. Robust or LSqrs To display the results for the robust or the least squares calculation method. Trgt+ To access Measure Target and to measure more target points. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Setup 1291 Fn 3 par or Fn 4 par Switches between a 3 parameter and 4 parameter calculation. For 3 parameter, the current scale is not applied to setup observations for a new station calculation. For 4 parameter, the current scale is applied. The station coordinates will be automatically updated according to the setting used. Defaults to 4 parameter. SF or ppm To display the scale results by scale factor or as a ppm value. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Setup Field Option Description New orientation Display only New oriented azimuth with running angle as telescope moves. Not available for setup method Transfer height. ?height Display only The difference between the new calculated height and the old height. Available for setup methods Multiple backsights and Transfer height. 1292 Field Option Use the new height Check box Viva Series, Setup Description For setup method Multiple backsights: When this box is checked, both orientation and height are updated. If not checked, only the orientation is updated. For setup method Transfer height: When this box is checked, the station height is updated. If not checked, the station height does not change. Not available for any other setup methods. New height Display only The calculated height is displayed. Available for setup methods Multiple backsights and Transfer height. Old height Display only The original height is displayed. Available for setup methods Multiple backsights and Transfer height. σ height Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station height. Available for setup methods Transfer height. Easting Display only The calculated Easting is displayed. Available for setup methods Resection and Orientate to line. Northing Display only The calculated Northing is displayed. Available for setup methods Resection and Orientate to line. Elevation Display only The calculated Height is displayed. Available for setup methods Resection and Orientate to line. 1293 Field Option Apply the computed Check box elevation for this station Description When this box is checked, then the height from the solution is set as the station height. When this box is not checked, then the scale is not updated. Available for setup method Resection. Next step Page changes to the Station page. Station Results, Station page Set To set the orientation, to store all setup data and exit the application. For Transfer height: To store all setup data and exit the application. Done To exit the setup without setting it, the setup is incomplete. Scale.. To type in values for the scale corrections. Refer to "New Job, Scale page". Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Setup 1294 Fn 3 par or Fn 4 par Switches between a 3 parameter and 4 parameter calculation. For 3 parameter, the current scale is not applied to setup observations for a new station calculation. For 4 parameter, the current scale is applied. The station coordinates will be automatically updated according to the setting used. Defaults to 4 parameter. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Station ID Display only Station ID of the current station set up. Instrument height Editable field The current instrument height. Point code Selectable list Select a point code for the station point if desired. Current PPM / Current scale Display only The current job scale. Refer to " New Job, Scale page" for more information on scale corrections. Next step Page changes to the Quality page. Station Results, Quality page Viva Series, Setup For a description of the softkeys refer to "Station Results, Station page". This page is not available for setup methods Transfer height or Orientate to line. 1295 Description of fields Field Option Description New orientation Display only New oriented azimuth with running angle as telescope moves. Available for setup method Multiple backsights. σ new orientation Display only Standard deviation of the calculated orientation. ?height Display only Delta height, the difference between original and calculated height. Available for setup method Multiple backsights. σ height Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station height. σ easting Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station Easting. Available for setup method Resection. σ northing Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station Northing. Available for setup method Resection. Next step Page changes to the Targets page. Viva Series, Setup 1296 Station Results, Targets page This screen displays information about the accuracy of the measured target points and allows exclusion of measurements that are not to be used in the calculation. Additional measurements can be made and measurements can be deleted. This page is not available for setup method Orientate to line. Set To recalculate the station data and update all values after target points have been deleted or excluded from the calculation. Use To change between using the selected point as 3D, 2D, 1D or not at all, in the calculation. The change automatically updates any new coordinate or orientation values. Remov To delete a point from the list of measured target points and exclude it from the Setup calculation. More To change the value displayed in the fourth column. For Resection: To change between ?Hz, Δ hz dist, Δ height, Δ easting and Δ northing. For Multiple backsights: To change between ?Hz and Δ height. For Transfer height: Only Δ height available. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Setup 1297 Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Viva Series, Setup Column Description ! The ! indicates that the delta value of either measured horizontal angle, distance or height exceeds the calculation limit. Point ID The point ID of the measured target points. Use Indicates if and how a target point is used in the station calculation. Choices are 3D, 2D, 1D and No. ?Hz Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between calculated and measured horizontal angle for the target points. If a target point does not have coordinates, ----- are displayed. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by a !. Δ hz dist Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between calculated and measured distance from the station to the target points. If a target point does not have coordinates, ----- are displayed. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by a !. Δ height Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between the known control point height and the measured height of the target point. If a target point does not have a height coordinate, ----- are displayed. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by a !. 1298 Column Description Δ easting Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between control point and measured point, calculated from new station coordinates. Δ northing Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between control point and measured point, calculated from new station coordinates. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. Viva Series, Setup 1299 41.9 Finding a Target Point Description The Find Target screen can be accessed, to guide the prism to the selected target point. The screen is only available if the Stakeout application is available on the instrument. The functionality of this screen is similar to a stake out routine and is intended to help find hidden survey bench marks or base points. Access Press Fn Find in Measure Target once enough data is available to calculate roughly the new orientation. Find Target This screen is similar to the Stakeout, Stake page and is configured through the Stakeout configuration settings. Refer to "Stakeout, Stake page" for a detailed description of this screen. Viva Series, Setup 1300 42 Stakeout 42.1 Overview Description The Stakeout application is used to place marks in the field at predetermined points. These predetermined points are the points to be staked. The points to be staked can • be uploaded to a job on the instrument using LGO. • already exist in a job on the instrument. • be uploaded from an ASCII file to a job on the instrument using Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import ASCII data. Diagram P1 d2 d1 P0 GS_057 Viva Series, Stakeout P0 P1 d1 d2 α Current position Point to be staked Stake out distance Height difference between current position and point to be staked Stake out direction 1301 P1 d1 P2 d2 d3 P0 TS_009 Stakeout modes ) ) Coordinate system Viva Series, Stakeout P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 Station Current position Point to be staked Stake out element Stake out element Stake out element Points can be staked using different modes: • Polar mode. • Orthogonal mode. Staking out is possible for RTK rover and TPS. The points to be staked must exist in a job on the active memory device or can be typed in. If staking local grid points with GNSS, always ensure that the correct coordinate system is being used. For example, if the points to be staked are stored in WGS 1984, the active coordinate system must also be WGS 1984. 1302 Point types It is possible to stake: • Position only points. • Height only points. • Points with full sets of coordinates. Height types Height type of the point to be staked: Height type computed for current position: Height source Heights can be taken into account from • the vertical component of a coordinate triplet. • a Digital Terrain Model. The DTM licence key must be loaded. Refer to "24.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to enter the licence key. If loaded, the height of the points to be staked can be edited in the field. Coding of staked points Codes can be attached to staked points, lines and areas. The behaviour of the coding functionality depends on the definition of a survey screen page with editable fields for coding and attributes. Properties of staked points The properties stored with staked points are: • • Viva Series, Stakeout Class: Meas or for point was measured. Sub class: Orthometric OR ellipsoidal Orthometric OR ellipsoidal depending on the • configured transformation, • availability of a geoid model, • height type of the point to be staked. If possible, the height type of the point to be staked is computed for the current position. also Nav depending on the position status when the staked 1303 • • • Averaging of staked points Viva Series, Stakeout Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed. • Stakeout Source: Stakeout Instrument source: GPS or TPS The principles for averaging are identical to the averaging principles of the Survey application. 1304 42.2 Accessing Stakeout Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout. Choose Control Job OK To accept changes and access the subsequent screen. The chosen settings become active. Fn Config.. To configure Stakeout application. Refer to "42.3 Configuring Stakeout". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Stakeout Field Option Description Control job Selectable list The job containing the points to be staked. Points which are measured during staking out are stored in the working job. ) 1305 Next step Viva Series, Stakeout IF the Stakeout application THEN is to be accessed OK accepts the changes and accesses Stakeout application. Refer to "42.4 Staking Out". is to be configured Config... Refer to "42.3 Configuring Stakeout". 1306 42.3 Configuring Stakeout Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout. Press Fn Config... Configuration, General page This screen consists of five pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for all pages, unless otherwise stated. OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Stakeout 1307 Description of fields Field Option Description Automatically select next closest point Check box The order of the points suggested for staking out. When this box is checked, then the next point suggested for staking out is the point closest to the point which was staked. If there are many points in the job, the search can take a few seconds. When this box is not checked, the next point suggested for staking out is the subsequent one in the job. Show addiCheck box tional page from My Survey Screen The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in the Stakeout screen. Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. Store point ID with Stake point ID The staked points are stored with the same point IDs as the points to be staked. Prefix Adds the setting for Prefix / suffix in front of the original point IDs. Suffix Adds the setting for Prefix / suffix at the end of the original point IDs. Editable field Available for Store point ID with: Prefix and Store point ID with: Suffix. The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the staked point. Prefix / suffix Viva Series, Stakeout 1308 Field Option Only update Check box stakeout values when distance is measured Automatically turn to point Check box When this box is checked, angles and stakeout values are updated after a distance was measured. Then all values are frozen until the next distance is taken. When this box is checked, the instrument positions automatically to the point to be staked. Available when Automatically turn to point is checked. Turn to Position only Instrument positions horizontally to the point to be staked. Position & height Instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point to be staked. Show direction message to next point Viva Series, Stakeout Description For each point which is selected for staking, angle and distance information is momentarily displayed in the message line. Instrument The delta horizontal angle that the instrument must turn to the point, and the distance from the instrument to the point, is displayed in the message line. Last point The delta horizontal angle that the instrument must turn to the point, and the distance from the last staked point, is displayed in the message line. 1309 Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Configuration, Quality control page Description of fields Field Option Check distance Check box before storing Description Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordinate difference between the staked point and the point to be staked. If the defined Limit is exceeded, the stake out can be repeated, skipped or stored. Limit Editable field Available when Check distance before storing is checked. Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate difference accepted in the position check. Check cut/fill before storing Check box Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference between the staked point and the point to be staked. If the defined Limit is exceeded, the stake out can be repeated, skipped or stored. Limit Editable field Available when Check cut/fill before storing is checked. Sets the maximum vertical difference accepted in the height check. Next step Page changes to the Heights page. Viva Series, Stakeout 1310 Configuration, Heights page Description of fields Field Option Allow height of Check box point being staked to be edited Description When this box is checked, the field Design height is displayed in Stakeout, Stake page. The design height is the height of the point to be staked. The value for Design height can be changed. When this box is not checked, the field Current height for the height of the current position is displayed in Stakeout, Stake page. The value for Current height cannot be changed. Offset height of Check box all points being staked Height offset Editable field Allows a constant height offset to be applied to the height of the points being staked. The height offset that is applied. Next step Page changes to the Graphics page. Configuration, Graphics page Description of fields Field Navigate direction Viva Series, Stakeout Option Description The reference direction to be used to stakeout points. The stakeout elements and the graphical display shown in the Stakeout application are based on this selection. 1311 Field Option Description From instrument The direction of the orientation is from the instrument to the point to be staked. To instrument The direction of the orientation is from the point to be staked to the instrument. To north The North direction shown in the graphical display based on the active coordinate system. From north The direction of the orientation is from the North direction to the point to be staked. To sun The position of the sun calculated from the current position, the time and the date. To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point. If no points are yet staked, Navigate direction: To north is used for the first point to be staked. To point A point from the working job. To point (cntrl job) A point from the Control job selected in Choose Control Job. Viva Series, Stakeout To line (cntrl job) The direction of the orientation is parallel to a reference line from the Control job. Open the listbox to create, edit or delete a reference line. To line The direction of the orientation is parallel to a reference line from the working job. Open the listbox to create, edit or delete a reference line. 1312 Field Option Description Following arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current position to the point to be staked. The graphical display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of the point to be staked. Point ID or Line Selectable list Available for Navigate direction: To point (cntrl job), Navigate direction: To point, Navigate direction: To line (cntrl job) and Navigate direction: To line. To select the point or line to be used for orientation. Navigate using The method of staking out. Direction & distance The direction from the orientation reference, the horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed. In/out, left/right The distance forwards to/backwards from the point, the distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is displayed. Switch to bulls Check box eye when 0.5m from target When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is shown in the stakeout graphic when less than half a metre from the point being staked. Check box The instrument beeps when the distance from the current position to the point to be staked is equal to or less than defined in Start within. The closer the instrument is to the point to be staked the faster the beeps will be. Beep faster when getting close to point Distance to use Height, Horizontal The type of distance to use for staking. distance or Position & height Viva Series, Stakeout 1313 Field Option Description Start within Editable field Available when Beep faster when getting close to point is checked. The horizontal radial distance, from the current position to the point to be staked, when a beep is to be heard. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Viva Series, Stakeout Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. 1314 Field Option Description Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Stakeout 1315 42.4 Staking Out Diagram This diagram shows an example for Navigate using: In/out, left/right with Navigate using: To north. P1 d2 d1 GS_054 Viva Series, Stakeout P0 d3 P0 P1 d1 d2 d3 Current position Point to be staked Forwards or backwards Right or left Fill or cut 1316 P1 d1d2+ P2 d3+ P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 P0 TS_011 Station Current position Point to be staked Forward or backwards Right or left Cut or fill This diagram shows an example Navigate using: Direction & distance with Navigate using: To north. P1 d2 d1 GS_055 Viva Series, Stakeout P0 P0 P1 d1 d2 α Current position Point to be staked Distance Cut or fill Direction 1317 P1 a b TS_010 Stakeout, Stake page P0 P2 c P0 P1 P2 a b c Station Current position Point to be staked Distance Horizontal angle Cut or fill The pages shown are from a typical working style. An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used. Meas To start measuring the point being staked. The key changes to Stop. The difference between the current position and the point being staked is still displayed. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Viva Series, Stakeout 1318 Stop To end measuring the point being staked. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. After ending the measurements, the differences between the measured point and the point to be staked are displayed. Store To store the measured point. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General page, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. Near To search the Control job for the point nearest to the current position when the key is pressed. The point is selected as the point to be staked and is displayed in the first field on the screen. After staking and storing the nearest point, the next point suggested for staking out is the one which was suggested before the key was pressed. Available when Meas is displayed. Viva Series, Stakeout 1319 Revers To reverse the graphical display top to bottom. A reversed graphical display can be used when the point to be staked lies behind the current position. Survy.. To survey additional points which may be needed during staking out. To return to Stakeout application, press Fn Quit or ESC. Available when Meas is displayed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Stakeout application. Refer to "42.3 Configuring Stakeout". Fn Conect and Fn Disco To dial the number of the base station configured in the active working style and to hang up immediately after the survey is completed. Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for real-time devices of type digital cellular phone or modem. Available for Auto connect when measuring unchecked in RTK Rover Settings, General page. Viva Series, Stakeout 1320 Fn Init To select an initialisation method and to force a new initialisation. Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for working styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to "44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations". Fn 2D Pos To position the telescope (X,Y) onto the point to be staked. Fn 3D Pos To position the telescope (X,Y,Z) onto the point to be staked. Fn Mnual.. To enter angle and distance values to stake out a point. Fn Quit To exit Stakeout application. Description of the elements of the graphical display The graphical display provides a guide to find the point to be staked out. Element Description Point to be staked / known point North Viva Series, Stakeout 1321 Element Description Sun Defined line From instrument Follow arrow Forward arrow, distance to point Side arrow, distance to point Polar arrow, direction to point Viva Series, Stakeout 1322 Element Description Height The current position and/or height is within the configured stake out limit for position and/or height. Description of fields Viva Series, Stakeout Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list The point ID of the point to be staked. Antenna ht Editable field The default antenna height. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. Target height Editable field Current height Display only The default prism height. Available when Allow height of point being staked to be edited is not checked in Configuration, Heights page. 1323 Field Option Description The orthometric height of the current position is displayed. If the orthometric height cannot be displayed, the local ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to display the local ellipsoidal height, the WGS 1984 height is displayed. The value for Height offset configured in Configuration, Heights page is taken into account. Design height Editable field Available when Allow height of point being staked to be edited is checked in Configuration, Heights. The design height, which is the orthometric height of the point to be staked, is displayed. If the orthometric height cannot be displayed, the local ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to display the local ellipsoidal height, the WGS 1984 height is displayed. The value for Height offset configured in Configuration, Heights page is not taken into account. Changing the value for Design height changes the values displayed for cut and fill. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Refer to "28 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the functionality and softkeys available. Viva Series, Stakeout 1324 42.5 Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded Description If configured a check is made on the horizontal and/or vertical coordinate distance from the staked point to the point to be staked. Refer to "42.3 Configuring Stakeout" for information on configuring the check and the limits. Access If either of the configured difference limits are exceeded, the following screen is accessed automatically when the point is stored. Stakeout Limit Exceeded The availability of the fields depends on the configuration for Navigate using. The limits that have been exceeded are shown in bold and indicated by a !. Back To return to the Stakeout screen without storing the point. Staking out of the same point continues. Store To accept the coordinate differences, store the point information and return to the Stakeout screen. Skip To return to the Stakeout screen without storing the point. According to filter and sort settings the next point is suggested for staking out. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Stakeout 1325 Description of fields Viva Series, Stakeout Field Option Description Point ID Display only The point ID of the point to be staked. Store point ID Editable field The unique number which is used to store the staked point. Allows a different point ID to be typed in, if needed. Cut Display only The negative height difference from the height of the staked point to the height of the point to be staked. To move down. Fill Display only The positive height difference from the height of the staked point to the height of the point to be staked. To move up. 2D distance Display only Displays the horizontal difference from the staked point to the point to be staked. 3D distance Display only Displays the spatial difference from the staked point to the point to be staked. ∆Hz Display only The bearing from the staked point to the point to be staked. ∆Dist Display only Horizontal distance from the staked point to the point to be staked. Forward Display only The horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked in the direction of the orientation. 1326 Viva Series, Stakeout Field Option Description Back Display only The horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked in the reverse direction of the orientation. Right Display only Horizontal distance from the staked point to the point to be staked orthogonal to the right of the orientation direction. Left Display only Horizontal distance from the staked point to the point to be staked orthogonal to the left of the orientation direction. 1327 42.6 Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM Description A Digital Terrain Model can be staked alone or together with points. The heights of the current positions are compared against the heights of a selected DTM job. The height differences are calculated and displayed. Staking a DTM can be used for • staking out where the DTM represents the surface to be staked. • quality control purposes where the DTM represents the final project surface. DTM jobs are created in LGO. DTM jobs are stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory device. Diagram d2 P1 d1 GS_056 Viva Series, Stakeout P1 d1 d2 Point to be staked Antenna height Cut or fill 1328 d2 P1 d1 P1 d1 d2 TS_012 Point to be staked Cut or fill Reflector height Access Both applications are activated via a single Stakeout DTM licence key. To stake out DTM heights only: Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stake a DTM. To stake out positions of points and DTM heights: Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stake points & DTM. Choose Control Job Description of fields Field Option Description Control job Selectable list The positions of points in the job selected here are staked out. Heights to be staked out are taken from the DTM job. Points which are measured during staking out are stored in the working job. ) DTM Viva Series, Stakeout Selectable list The DTM job to be used must be stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory device. Heights without positions are staked out relative to the selected DTM job. 1329 ) Viva Series, Stakeout The stake out procedure is identical as for the normal Stakeout application but the heights to be staked are taken from the selected DTM job. The negative or positive height differences from the current position to the equivalent point in the selected DTM job is calculated and displayed. Height offsets apply. Refer to "42.3 Configuring Stakeout", "42.4 Staking Out" and "42.5 Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded". 1330 43 Base Menu - Start base 43.1 Start base over known point Description In this option, a known point stored in the working job is used to set up the RTK base. Access Select Base Menu\Go to Work!\Start base over known point. Set antenna height & type Type in the antenna height and select the antenna being used. Next To accept changes and access the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Antenna height Editable field Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base Description The height of the antenna that is being used. 1331 Field Option Description RTK base antenna Selectable list Leica Geosystems antennas are predefined as default and can be selected from the list. Default antennas contain an elevation-dependent correction model. New antenna correction models can be set up and transferred to the instrument using LGO. Open the list to define or edit additional antennas. Refer to Antennas for information on antennas. Vertical offset Display only The vertical offset of the measurement reference point. Next step Next to access Select known point. Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 1332 Select known point Select the point to be used as base station. A point could already be stored in the control job either by manual entry, by measuring or by transfer from LGO. If a new point is to be created, open the selectable list for Point ID and press Point ID. If an existing point is to be edited, open the selectable list for Point ID and press Edit... ) ) ) Next To accept changes and access the subsequent screen. Coord To view other coordinate types. Local coordinates are available when a local coordinate system is active. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Next to access Base setup complete. Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 1333 43.2 Start base over last setup Description To use the same coordinates as when the instrument was last used as a base. Available when the instrument has previously been used as a base and no point in the control job has the same point ID as the one last used. After turning off, the base coordinates are stored in the System RAM. They can be used again the next time the instrument is used as a base. This functionality means that even if the data storage device that previously contained the base coordinates is formatted, the last used coordinates can still be used. Access Select Base Menu\Go to Work!\Start base over last setup. Set antenna height & type This screen is identical with the one in Start base over known point. Refer to Start base over any point. Next step Next to access Last used RTK base point. Last used RTK base point The point ID and coordinates of the last used base are displayed in grid. When no local coordinate system is active, WGS 1984 coordinates are displayed. Refer to Start base over any point for information on the keys. Next step Next to access Base setup complete. Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 1334 43.3 Start base over any point Description To use the coordinates of the current navigation position as base coordinates. Access Select Base Menu\Go to Work!\Start base over any point. Set antenna height & type This screen is identical with the one in Start base over known point. Refer to Start base over any point. Next step Next to access Measure new point. Measure new point Type in a point ID for this new point. Refer to Start base over any point for information on the keys. Code information or annotations can be added in the rover menu in View & edit data. The properties stored with the point are: Class: Nav Sub class: GNSS Code Only Source: Survey (Static) Instrument source: GPS Next step Next to access Base setup complete. Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 1335 44 Survey - General 44.1 Surveying Points 44.1.1 Post-Processed Kinematic and Static Operations Requirements • Access For RTK rover: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. If configured for post-processed kinematic operations, the logging of moving observations begins. A typical working style for a static or post-processed kinematic operation is used. Ensure that the working style has Log data for post-processing selected in the Raw Data Logging Settings screen. ) Survey, Survey page The fields shown are from a typical working style for static or post-processed kinematic operations. The screen described consists of four pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the Survey page, the Code page and the Annot page. Refer to "28 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page. The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other applications where individual point measurements are needed. Viva Series, Survey - General 1336 Meas To start logging of static observations. The key changes to Stop. Stop To end recording of positions when enough data is collected. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General, recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. Store To store the point information. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. Near To compare the user’s current position with the coordinates of all points already stored in the job and find the nearest point. This point ID is then suggested as the next point ID to be used. HdnPt.. To measure a hidden point. Refer to "48 Survey - Hidden Points". Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Survey - General 1337 Fn Config.. To configure SmartCodes, auto points and hidden point measurements. Refer to "20.5 SmartCodes", "46 Survey - Auto Points" and "48 Survey - Hidden Points". Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually measured points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: Viva Series, Survey - General • To start a new sequence of point IDs type over the point ID. • For an individual point ID independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. 1338 Field Option Antenna height Editable field 3D CQ Viva Series, Survey - General Display only Description The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. 1339 44.1.2 Real-Time Rover Operations Requirements • • Access For RTK rover: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Survey, Survey page The fields shown are from a typical working style for real-time rover operations. The screen described consists of four pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the Survey page, the Code page and the Annot page. Refer to "28 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page. The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other applications where individual point measurements are needed. A typical working style for real-time rover operations is used. The appropriate real-time device is attached and working properly. Meas To start logging of static observations. The key changes to Stop. Stop To end recording of positions when enough data is collected. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General, recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. Viva Series, Survey - General 1340 Store To store the point information. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where they can be corrected. Refer to "20.6 Code and Attribute Mismatch". Near To compare the user’s current position with the coordinates of all points already stored in the job and find the nearest point. This point ID is then suggested as the next point ID to be used. HdnPt.. To measure a hidden point. Refer to "48 Survey - Hidden Points". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure SmartCodes, auto points and hidden point measurements. Refer to "20.5 SmartCodes", "46 Survey - Auto Points" and "48 Survey - Hidden Points". Viva Series, Survey - General 1341 Fn Avg To check the residuals for the averaged position. Available for Mode: Average in Job Properties:, Averaging page and for more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point. Refer to "5.3.3 Mean Page". Fn Abs To check the absolute difference between measurements. Available for Mode: Average in Job Properties:, Absolute differences page and for more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point. Refer to "5.3.3 Mean Page". Fn Conect and Fn Disco To dial the number of the base station configured in the active working style and to hang up immediately after the survey is completed. Available for real-time devices of type digital cellular phone or modem. Available for Auto connect when measuring unchecked in RTK Rover Settings, General page. Fn Init.. To select an initialisation method and to force a new initialisation. Available for working styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to "44.4 Initialisation for RealTime Rover Operations". Viva Series, Survey - General 1342 Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually measured points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: Antenna height Editable field 3D CQ Viva Series, Survey - General Display only • To start a new sequence of point IDs type over the point ID. • For an individual point ID independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. 1343 44.2 Adding Annotations Description Annotations can be used to add either field notes or comments to points being surveyed. Access For RTK rover: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Go to the Annot page. If it is not already displayed, the Annot page can be configured to appear in the Survey application through the My Survey Screen Settings screen. Refer to "19.3 My Survey Screen"for more information. ) Survey, Annot page Description of fields Field Option Description Annot 1 to Annot 4 Editable field Type in the annotation. The annotation can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. ) ) ) ) Viva Series, Survey - General When the ASCII input interface is configured to be used and an annotation is reserved for the incoming ASCII string, then no other information can be typed in for the particular annotation. CE to clear the entry. Last to recall all annotations entered for the previously surveyed point. Any annotations just entered are overwritten. ENTER. The next line is highlighted. 1344 Next step Step Description 1. Meas to start the point measurement. 2. Stop to end the point measurement. 3. Store to store the point information including the annotations. Viva Series, Survey - General 1345 44.3 Timed Measurements Description Surveying regulations in some countries require that several instruments in a session start the point measurement simultaneously at a predefined time. Timed measurements are possible for all types of GPS operations, except for real-time base operations. Requirements • • Access Automatically start measuring point on entering survey: Timed is configured in Quality Control, Advanced page. Refer to "11.4 Quality control". Time at point is configured for one of the lines in one of the survey screen pages. Refer to "19.3 My Survey Screen". For RTK rover: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Survey, Survey page Refer to "44.1 Surveying Points" for a description of keys. Viva Series, Survey - General 1346 Description of fields Field Option Description Start time Editable field The current local time with the seconds rounded to 00, for example for the current local time 07:37:12 it is 07:38:00. Type in the start time in hours, minutes and seconds for when the point measurement will begin. Press Meas. The point measurement does not start yet. The name of the field changes to Time to go. Time to go Display only The countdown time in hours, minutes and seconds before the point measurement starts automatically. The point measurement starts when it is 00:00:00. Then, data is logged as configured in the working style. Any measurement counter defined to be used in survey screen page is displayed and starts incrementing. The name of the field changes to Time at point. Time at point Viva Series, Survey - General Display only The time in hours, minutes and seconds from when the point is measured until point measurement is stopped. Press Stop and Store when enough data is collected. The name of the field changes to Start time. 1347 44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 44.4.1 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations Requirements • Access For RTK rover: • Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Press Init... • Access is possible from other screens where individual point measurements are needed, for example from Inverse Pt - Pt with Survy... Re-initialise the RTK Initialisation method Description The active working style is a real-time rover configuration. Refer to chapter Initialise while moving The rover antenna can be moved during the inilialisa- "44.4.2 tion process. Initialise while Moving" Initialise while static Initialise on a known point Viva Series, Survey - General ) ) ) The antenna setup must be static on a pillar, a "44.4.3 tripod or on a pole with a quickstand. Initialise while Static" The antenna setup must be static on a pillar, a tripod or on a pole with a quickstand. The coordinates of the point must be stored in, or able to be converted to, the WGS 1984. They must be stored in the working job either by manual entry or by measuring. "44.4.4 Initialise on Known Point" 1348 44.4.2 Initialise while Moving Initialise while moving step-by-step Step Description 1. Does the instrument currently have a fixed solution? • If yes, continue with step 3. • If no, continue with the next row. ) 2. Continue with the row after step 3. 3. Yes to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded. The initialisation starts automatically. ) 4. The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved. 5. Continue with the surveying operation. Viva Series, Survey - General Meas is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is gained. 1349 44.4.3 Initialise while Static Initialise while static step-by-step Step Description 1. Does the instrument currently have a fixed solution? • If yes, continue with step 3. • If no, continue with the next row. ) 2. Continue with step 6. 3. Yes to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded. ) ) The initialisation starts automatically. Stop is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is gained. The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved. 4. Any configurations for Automatically stop point measurement in Quality Control, General page are ignored. Stop when enough data is collected. 5. When Automatically stop point measurement is not checked in Quality Control, General page, Store to store the point information. 6. Continue with the surveying operation. Viva Series, Survey - General 1350 44.4.4 Initialise on Known Point Initialise on known point step-by-step Step Description 1. Does the instrument currently have a fixed solution? • If yes, continue with step 3. • If no, continue with step 4. 2. Yes to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded. 3. In Data:, Points page, highlight the known point for the initialisation. 4. OK starts the initialisation. ) Survey screen Point ID: The ID of the selected known point is displayed. Antenna height: The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. ) ) ) ) 5. Viva Series, Survey - General Enter the correct antenna height. If desired, add a code. If desired, add an annotation. Stop is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is gained. The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved. Any configurations for Automatically stop point measurement in Quality Control, General page are ignored. Stop when enough data is collected. 1351 Step Description 6. When Automatically stop point measurement is not checked in Quality Control, General page, Store to store the point information. ) 7. Viva Series, Survey - General An average is automatically calculated with the known coordinates. Continue with the surveying operation. 1352 45 Survey - General Description The Survey application is used for point measurement. Angles and distances for points can be measured and the calculated coordinates stored using Meas, Dist and Store. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey. Survey, Survey page The fields shown are from a typical working style. The screen described consists of four pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the Survey page, the Offset page, and the Code page. Refer to "28 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page. The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other applications where individual point measurements are needed. Meas To measure and store distances and angles. Stop Available if Measure mode: Continuous and Dist was pressed. Stops the distance measurements. The key changes back to Meas. Dist To measure and display distances. Viva Series, Survey - General 1353 Store To record data. If Measure mode: Continuous and/or Log auto points is checked, records measured point and continues tracking. RmtHt. To access Survey Remote Point. Available if Measure remote pts is checked in Configuration, Remote pt page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure SmartCodes, auto points and remote point measurements. When Fn Avg or Fn Abs are active, this key is not available. Refer to "20.5 SmartCodes", "46 Survey - Auto Points" and to "50 Survey Remote Point" for information on the fields and keys. Fn Avg To check the residuals for the averaged point. Available for Mode: Average in Job Properties:, Averaging page and for more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point. Refer to "5.3.3 Mean Page". Viva Series, Survey - General 1354 Fn Abs To check the absolute difference between the measurements. Available for Mode: Average in Job Properties:, Absolute differences and for more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point. Refer to "5.3.3 Mean Page". Fn 2 Face Available for Measure mode: Single and Measure mode: Single (fast). To take a measurement in Face I and Face II. The point stored is an average of the two measurements. When using instruments fitted with auto aiming, the point is automatically measured in both faces. The resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face. Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates"User Work settings ID templates. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Survey - General 1355 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for measured points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed: • To start a new sequence of point IDs overtype the point ID. • For an individual number independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Target height Editable field The last used target height is suggested when accessing the Survey application. An individual target height can be typed in. Hz Display only The current horizontal angle. V Display only The current vertical angle. Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance after Dist was pressed. No distance is displayed when accessing the screen and after Store or Meas. Height difference Display only The height difference between station and measured point after Dist. Displays ----- when accessing the screen and after Store or Meas. Easting Display only Easting coordinate of the measured point. Northing Display only Northing coordinate of the measured point. Elevation Display only Elevation of the measured point. Viva Series, Survey - General 1356 46 Survey - Auto Points 46.1 Overview Description Auto points are used to automatically log points at a specified rate. Additionally, individual auto points can be stored outside the defined rate. Auto points can be collected in the Survey application. An Auto page is visible when logging of auto points is active. Auto points are used in moving applications to document a track which was walked or driven along. Auto points that are logged between starting and stopping logging of auto points form one chain. A new chain is formed each time logging of auto points is started. Up to two offset points related to one auto point can be logged. The offset points can be both to the left or right and they can be coded independently of each other and of the auto points. ) Coding of auto points Logging of auto points is possible for TPS and in the GPS rover menu. Coding of auto points is similar to coding manually occupied points. Refer to "20 Coding" for information on coding. The differences are: • • • • • Thematical coding: Available for Store points:To DBX (pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto points page. Always available. Free coding: Always available. Quick coding: Not available. Codes of auto points overwrite the codes of points with the same point ID but a different code, existing in the working job. Codes of auto points can be changed when no auto points are being logged. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1357 • Properties of auto points Up to three attributes can be stored with a code. The properties stored with auto points are: • • Class: Either Meas or, for Sub class: • • • Averaging of auto points also Nav Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed. • TPS Source: Survey (Auto) or Srvy Auto Offset Instrument source: GPS or TPS An average is never calculated for auto points even if a manually occupied point of class Meas already exists with the same point ID. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1358 46.2 Configuring Auto Points Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Log auto points page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To configure what is viewed in the Auto page in the Survey application. Available for Log auto points checked. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Log auto points Check box Activates the logging of auto points. All other fields on the screen are active and can be edited. Store points by Time Auto points are logged according to a time interval. The time interval is independent from the update interval for the position on the screen. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points ) 1359 Field Option Description Distance The difference in distance from the last stored auto point, which must be reached before the next auto point is logged. The auto point is logged with the next available computed position. Height difference The height difference from the last stored auto point, which must be reached before the next auto point is logged. The auto point is logged with the next available computed position. Distance or height Before the next auto point is logged, either the difference in distance or the difference in height must be reached. The auto point is logged with the next available computed position. Stop & Go User decides An auto point is stored when the position of the antenna/prism does not move more than the distance configured in Minimum distance between points within the Stop time. Once a point has been stored, the position must change more than the distance configured in Minimum distance between points before the routine starts again. An auto point is stored upon pressing Meas ( )/ Store ( ) in Survey, Auto page. In the beginning, the chain to which the auto points will be assigned must be started with Start. In the end, the chain must be closed with Stop. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1360 Field Option Description Available unless Store points by: Distance or height. Log every Editable field For Store points by: Distance and Store points by: Height difference. The difference in distance or height before the next auto point is logged. From 0.05s to 60.0s For Store points by: Time. The time interval before the next auto point is logged. Max distance Editable field Available for Store points by: Distance or height. The value for the difference in distance before the next auto point is logged. Max height Editable field Available for Store points by: Distance or height. The value for the height difference before the next auto point is logged. Minimum Editable field distance between points Stop time Store points Editable field Available for Store points by: Stop & Go. The distance within which the position is considered stationary. Available for Store points by: Stop & Go. The time while the position must be stationary until an auto point is stored. ) Changing this setting while auto points are being logged stops the logging. It must then be restarted. To MDB (pts only) Logs auto point to a job file. Point logging at up to 20 Hz. Coding and logging of offset points is not possible. Points cannot be displayed in MapView or output via format files. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1361 Field Logging Option Description To DBX (pts&codes) Logs auto points to the DBX. Point logging at up to 1 Hz. Coding and logging of offset points is possible. Points can be displayed in MapView or output via format files. Automatically Logging of auto points starts immediately when the Configuration screen is accessed. Controlled Logging of auto points starts upon pressing Start on the Auto page in Survey. starts Don't store Check box auto log point if CQ exceeds limit 3D CQ Editable field Available if Don't store auto log point if CQ exceeds limit is checked. Limit for the coordinate quality above which an auto point is no longer automatically stored. When the CQ of the auto point falls again below the defined value then the storing of auto points begins again. Logging Instrument beeps when storing an auto point. Never Instrument never beeps. limit Beep when auto logged point is If checked, monitoring of the coordinate quality is activated. Auto points are stored when the coordinate quality is within the defined limit. For example, only phase fixed solutions can be logged by defining a CQ limit. stored Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1362 Next step IF the survey screen mask THEN is not to be configured OK closes the screen and returns to the previous screen. is to be configured Config... Configure Page OK To accept changes and to return to previous screen. Clear To set all fields to Line space full. Default To recall the default settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the page is shown as page name in Survey. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1363 Field Option Show in the Check box Survey application 1st line Display only 2nd line to 16th line Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Description Shows or hides the page as a page in Survey. Fixed to Point ID. For each line, one of the following options can be selected. Angle right Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position. % completed Display only field for the percentage of the time for which the point has been occupied based on the setting for Stop criteria in screen Quality Control. Appears in the page during the point occupation if Quality Control is checked. Annotation 1 to Annotation 4 Editable field for comments to be stored with the point. Antenna height Input field for antenna height for static observations. Attrib (free) 01 to Attrib (free) 20 Display only field for attributes for free codes. Attrib 01 to Attrib 20 Editable field for attributes for codes. Automation Unavailable for SmartStation. Select automation type. 1364 Field Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Option Description Avg max #distances Input field for maximum number of distance measurements in the averaging EDM mode. Azimuth Display only field for the azimuth. Backsight pt ID Display only field for the point ID of the backsight point. Code Editable field for codes. Code (free) Editable field for free codes. Code desc (free) Display only field for the description of free codes. Description Display only field for the description of codes. Easting Display only field for Easting coordinate of measured point. GDOP Display only field for the current GDOP of the computed position. HDOP Display only field for the current HDOP of the computed position. Elevation Display only field for the height coordinate of the measured point. Height difference Display only field for the height difference between station and reflector. Horiz distance Display only field for horizontal distance. 1365 Field Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Option Description Humidity Editable field for relative humidity to be stored with point. Hz angle Display only field for the horizontal angle. Instrument height Display only field for the instrument height. Line space full Insert full line space. Line space half Insert half line space. Linework Selectable list with option for flagging a line/area. Measure mode Select EDM measurement mode. Measure Select EDM type. Moving antenna ht Input field for antenna height for moving observations. Msd PP obs Display only field for the number of static observations recorded over the period of point occupation. Appears in the page when recording of static observations is configured. Northing Display only field for Northing coordinate of measured point. Number of dists Display only field for number of averaged distances measured with EDM mode averaging. 1366 Field Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Option Description Offset left/right Input field for horizontal distance offset for measured point, perpendicular to the line of sight. Offset height Input field for height offset for measured point. Offset in/out Input field for horizontal distance offset, in the direction of line of sight. Offset mode Select offset mode. PDOP Display only field for the current PDOP of the computed position. PPM atmos Display only field for atmospheric ppm. PPM geometric Display only field for geometric ppm value. PPM total Display only field for the total ppm value. Point ID Editable field for the point ID. Pressure Editable field for atmospheric pressure. Prism constant Display only field for additive constant of currently selected reflector. Quality 1D Display only field for the current height coordinate quality of computed position. Quality 2D Display only field for the current 2D coordinate quality of computed position. 1367 Field Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Option Description Quality 3D Display only field for the current 3D coordinate quality of computed position. RTK positions Display only field for the number of positions recorded over the period of point occupation. Appears in the page of real-time rover configurations. SD (last recorded) Display only field for the last recorded distance. Slope distance Display only field for measured slope distance. Station ID Display only field for current station ID. Station easting Display only field for current station Easting coordinates. Station height Display only field for current station height coordinates. Station northing Display only field for current station Northing coordinates. Std deviation Display only field of standard deviation in millimetres of averaged distances. Target Select a prism. Target height Input field for prism height. 1368 Field Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Option Description Temp dry Editable field for dry temperature to be stored with point. Temp wet Editable field for wet temperature to be stored with point. Time at point Display only field for the time from when the point is occupied until point occupation is stopped. Appears in the page during the point occupation. Type Display only field for the type of code, for example point code, line code or area code. V angle Display only field for vertical angle. V angle display Select vertical angle display. VDOP Display only field for the current VDOP of the computed position. 1369 46.3 Measuring Auto Points Requirements • Log auto points in Configuration, Log auto points page. • The rover menu must be used. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Go to the Auto page. Survey, Auto page Before logging of auto points has started, the page appears as shown: Start For Logging starts: Automatically in Configuration, Log auto points page, logging of auto points starts immediately when the survey screen is accessed and Start need not be pressed. To start logging of auto points and offset points if configured or, for Store points by: User decides, to start the chain to which the auto points will be assigned. The first auto point is stored. Measure mode: Continuous becomes active. For Measure: Prism instrument locks onto prism. For Measure modeLong range (>4km), Measure: Prism is set and instrument locks onto the prism. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1370 Stop To end recording of auto points and offset points if configured or, for Store points by: User decides, to end the chain to which the auto points are assigned. Meas Available for Stop. To store an auto point at any time. Store Available for Stop. To store an auto point at any time. Offst1.. To configure recording of the first type of offset points. Refer to "46.4.2 Configuring Offset Points". Available for Store points: To DBX (pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto points page. Offst2.. To configure recording of a second type of offset points. Refer to "46.4.2 Configuring Offset Points". Available for Store points: To DBX (pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto points page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1371 Fn Config.. To configure auto points. Refer to "46.2 Configuring Auto Points". Quit To exit the Survey application. Point information logged until pressing Fn Quit is saved in the database. Description of fields Field Option Description Auto point ID Editable field Available unless GPS auto points: Time & date/TPS auto points: Time & date in ID Templates. The identifier for auto points. The configured ID template for auto points is used. The ID can be changed. To start a new sequence of point IDs, type over the point ID. Time & date Available for GPS auto points: Time & date/TPS auto points: Time & date in ID Templates. The current local time and date is used as identifier for auto points. Editable field The default antenna height for auto points as defined in the active working style is suggested. Editable field The default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set is suggested. Moving antenna ht Target height Code (auto) Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points The thematical code for the auto point. 1372 Field Option Description • If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The occupied point is stored with the selected code independently of any line/area. • If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the selected code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID template. The occupied point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until it is closed manually or another line code is selected. • If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines. Selectable list Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. The attributes are shown as display only, editable field or selectable list fields depending on their definition. Editable field Available if Use a list box to view codes is not checked. Codes can be typed in but not selected from a codelist. A check is performed to see if a code of this name already exists in the job. If so, the according attributes are shown. Configure a survey screen mask with a selectable list for code types to define if a point, line or area code is typed in. Description Display only The description of the code. Msd auto points Display only Available after pressing Start. The number of auto points logged since Start has been pressed. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1373 Field Option Description Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. Slope distance Display only The measured slope distance. When Start is pressed, Measure mode: Continuous is set and the slope distance is constantly updated. 3D CQ Hz Display only The current horizontal angle. V Display only The current vertical angle. Next step IF THEN auto points are to be Start. Then, for Store points by: User decides, Meas whenever an logged auto point is to be logged. offset points are to be configured Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Offst1.. or Offst2... Refer to "46.4 Offset Points of Auto Points". 1374 46.4 Offset Points of Auto Points 46.4.1 Overview Description Offset points • can be created with auto points when auto points are stored to the DBX. • can be to the left or to the right of auto points. • are automatically computed with the logging of auto points, if configured. • form a chain relative to the chain of auto points to which they are related. Subsequent computed chains are independent from each other. • can be coded independently of auto points. • have the same time of when they were stored as the auto points to which they are related. • have the same coding functionality, properties and averaging functionality as auto points. Up to two offset points can be related to one auto point. The screens for the configuration of offset points are identical except for the title Auto Points - Offset 1 and Auto Points - Offset 2. For simplicity, the title Auto Points - Offset 1 is used in the following description. Computation of offset points The computation of offset points depends on the number of auto points in one chain. One auto point No offset points are computed or stored. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1375 Two auto points The configured offsets are applied perpendicular to the line between two auto points. P4 P1 P5 P2 d1 P0 GS_061 d2 P3 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 d1 d2 First auto point Second auto point First offset point for P0 Second offset point for P0 First offset point for P1 Second offset point for P1 Horizontal offset to the left Horizontal offset to the right P1 P2 P4 P3 P5 P6 d1 d2 First auto point Second auto point First offset point for P1 Second offset point for P1 First offset point for P2 Second offset point for P2 Horizontal offset to the left Horizontal offset to the right P5 P2 P6 P3 d1 P1 TS_044 Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points d2 P4 1376 Three or more auto points The first offset points are computed perpendicular to the line between the first and the second auto point. The last offset point is computed perpendicular to the line between the last auto point and the one before. All other offset points are computed on a bearing. The bearing is half of the angle between the last and the next measured auto point. P7 P8 P4 P5 P9 P1 P6 P2 d1 P0 GS_062 Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points d2 P3 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 d1 d2 α1 α2 First auto point Second auto point First offset point for P0 Second offset point for P0 Third auto point First offset point for P1 Second offset point for P1 Fourth auto point First offset point for P4 Second offset point for P4 Horizontal offset to the left Horizontal offset to the right Angle between P0 and P4 Angle between P1 and P7 1377 P8 P9 2 P6 1 P10 P2 P7 P3 d1 P1 TS_045 Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points d2 P4 P5 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 d1 d2 α1 α2 First auto point Second auto point First offset point for P1 Second offset point for P1 Third auto point First offset point for P2 Second offset point for P2 Fourth auto point First offset point for P5 Second offset point for P5 Horizontal offset to the left Horizontal offset to the right Angle between P1 and P5 Angle between P2 and P8 1378 46.4.2 Configuring Offset Points Requirements Available for Store points: To DBX (pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto points page. Access Press Offst1.. or Offst2.. in Survey, Auto page. Auto Points - Offset 1, General page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Offst2.. and Offst1.. To switch between configuring offset point type one and two. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Store offset 1 points and Store offset 2 points Check box Activates logging of offset points. All other fields on the screen are active and can be edited with this setting. Horiz distance Editable field The horizontal offset between -1000 m and 1000 m at which the offset point is collected. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points ) 1379 Field Option Description Height offset Editable field The height offset between -100 m and 100 m from the related auto point. Identifier Editable field The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the auto point. This ID is then used as the point ID for the related offset point. This functionality could support an automatic workflow into CAD packages including setting symbols and stringing lines. Prefix/suffix Prefix Adds the setting for Identifier in front of the auto point ID. Suffix Adds the setting for Identifier at the end of the auto point ID. Next step Page changes to the Code page. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1380 Auto Points - Offset 1, Code page Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. +Attrib To create additional attributes for the selected code. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Name or Value To highlight the attribute field or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values for the selected code. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 1381 Description of fields Field Option Description Point code Selectable list The thematical code for the offset point. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. The attributes are shown as display only, editable field or selectable list fields depending on their definition. Code Editable field The thematical code for the offset point. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Codes can be typed in but not selected from a codelist. A check is performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in the job. If so, the according attributes are shown. Description Display only Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. The description of the code. Attributes Editable field Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Up to three attribute values can be stored. Next step IF THEN offset point configu- OK to return to the survey screen. ration is finished a second offset point Page and then Offst2.. or Offst1.. to change to configuration screen is to be configured for the second point. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1382 Example for offset point IDs ) The offset point ID is a combination of the auto point ID and an identifier as a prefix or suffix. The right most part of the auto point ID is incremented within the point ID. If the length of the auto point ID plus identifier is greater than 16 characters, then the auto point ID is truncated from the left. Auto point ID Identifier Prefix/Suffix Offset point ID Auto1234 Auto1235 OS1 Prefix OS1Auto1234 OS1Auto1235 … Auto1234 Auto1235 OS1 Suffix Auto1234OS1 Auto1235OS1 … Refer to "19.1 ID templates" for more information on point IDs. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1383 47 Survey Cross Section 47.1 Overview Description The Survey Cross Section application allows for the automatic changing of codes during a survey. This function is useful when surveying multiple cross sections. Examples could include surveys of railway lines, roads, small waterways, driveways and paths. The codes for the elements in the cross section to be surveyed are all stored and predefined in a template. The codes are then automatically changed after each point observation. Diagram a GS_075 Template a) Cross section element Templates are used to pre-define the order of the codes for the survey. A template pre-defines • the coding sequence of a cross section. • the type of coding. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1384 Cross section methods and directions Templates can be applied • to the ZigZag method or the Same Direction method. • in either a forward direction or in a backward direction. ZigZag Same Direction GS_077 GS_076 ) Coding of cross section elements Survey Cross Section is possible for RTK base and TPS. Codes can be attached to cross section elements. Refer to "20 Coding" for information on coding. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1385 • • • Properties of cross section points Thematical coding: Available Free coding: Available Quick coding: Not available The properties stored with cross section points are: • • Class: Either Meas or for point was measured. Sub class: • • • also Nav depending on the position status when the Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed. • TPS Source: Cross Section Instrument source: GPS or TPS Averaging of cross section elements The principles for averaging are identical to the principles use in the Survey application. Refer to "5.3.3 Mean Page" for information on averaging. Exporting data The points and lines are recorded as for all other applications. The data can be exported as normal. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1386 47.2 Accessing Survey Cross Section Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Survey cross section. Description Cross section templates • pre-define the sequence of codes for a cross section. • consist of elements. Elements can be defined such that the surveyed points of a cross section are • stored with a point code. • stored with a free code. During the process of surveying a cross section, the code for the next element to be measured is then selected and suggested automatically. Templates All cross section templates stored in the working job are listed in alphabetical order, including the number of elements in each cross section template. OK To select the highlighted cross section template and to start surveying a cross section. New.. To create a cross section template. Edit.. To edit the highlighted cross section template. Delete To delete the highlighted cross section template. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1387 Copy.. To create a cross section template based on the one currently highlighted. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1388 47.3 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template Access In Templates, press New.., Copy.. or Edit... New Template/Edit Template/Copy Template, General page Type in a name for the new cross section template. Next step Page changes to the Elements page. New Template/Edit Template/Copy Template, Elements page Viva Series, Survey Cross Section Store To store the cross section template and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Add To add one or more elements to the end of the current list. Edit.. To edit the highlighted element. Delete To delete the highlighted element from the list. Insert To insert one element before the currently highlighted element of the list. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. 1389 Description of columns Field Description No. The number of the element. Code The code assigned to the element. If no code is assigned to the element, ----- is displayed. Code type The type of the code assigned to the element. Next step Add, Edit.. or Insert accesses Add Element/Edit Element/Insert Element. Add Element/Edit Element/Insert Element The functionality of the screens adding, editing and inserting an element are similar. Differences are outlined. OK To add the element at the end of the cross section template or to store the changes. To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Next In Add Element: To add the element to the end of the Elements list and stay in the Add Element screen to add further elements. In Edit Element: To update the element in the Elements list and stay in the Edit Element screen to edit details of the next element in the list. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1390 Prev Available in Edit Element. To update the element in the Elements list and stay in the Edit Element screen to edit details of the previous element in the list. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Element number Display only For Add Element and Insert Element: The number of the element to be added. For Edit Element: Displayed as x/y. x Number of the element to be edited. y Total number of elements on the active template. The type of code to be used with the element. Code type Free codes To store a code independent of the element as timerelated information. Thematic codes To store a code together with the element. Store free code After pt is stored or Determines if a free code is stored before or after Before pt is stored the point. Available for Code type: Free codes. Code (free) Selectable list The code which will be stored before or after the point/line. Available for Code type: Free codes. Code Selectable list The code which will be stored with the next point/line. Available for Code type: Thematic codes. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1391 Field Option Description Description Display only A line for a detailed description of the code. Next step OK adds the element or stores the changes. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1392 47.4 Surveying Cross Sections Description The fields on this screen indicate which cross section element is to be surveyed next. Access Press OK in Templates. Survey, General page The pages shown are from a typical working style. An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used. Meas Available if a template has been opened with Start. To start measuring the next point of the cross section. The key changes to Stop. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Stop To end measuring the point. The key changes to Store. Store To store the measured point. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1393 Start and End To open and close the selected cross section template. While the template is open, the elements of the cross section can be surveyed. Survy.. To manually measure a point that is not part of the cross section. The point is not treated as an element of the cross section. The open template remains open. Available if a template has been opened with Start. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Cross Section Survey application. Refer to "47.5 Configuring Survey Cross Section". Fn Prev To select the previous element of the cross section template. The currently measured element will not be stored. Available when End is displayed. Fn Next To select the next element of the cross section template. The currently measured element will not be stored. Available when End is displayed. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1394 Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually measured points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: Antenna ht Editable field Target height Editable field Template Viva Series, Survey Cross Section • To start a new sequence of point IDs type over the point ID. • For an individual point ID independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. The default antenna height. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. The default prism height. The active template for the cross section. 1395 Field Element Option Description Selectable list The cross section template is closed. Opening the selectable list accesses Templates where a new template can be created and an existing template can be selected or deleted. Refer to "47.3 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template". Display only The cross section template is open. Display only Displayed as x/y. x The number of the next element on active template. The number increases/decreases as moving across the cross section depending on the selection for Method in Configuration. y Total number of elements on active template. Code Display only Distance to last Display only Viva Series, Survey Cross Section The name of the code. Point codes will be stored with the measured point. Free codes will be stored, depending on the configuration, before or after the measured point. The horizontal distance from the current position to the last surveyed element position in the previous cross section. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. 1396 Next step IF THEN a cross section template is to be select the desired template and press Start. opened an element of a cross section is to be surveyed Meas, Stop and then Store. ) Meas, or Dist and then Store. Once the end of a cross section is surveyed then the next cross section will be measured. Depending on the Method selected in Configuration, General page, the measurement is either in the same direction or in the reverse direction. a cross section template is to be select the desired template and press End. closed data is to be viewed graphically Page. An element of a cross section template can also be surveyed from the Map page. Refer to "28 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the functionality and softkeys available. the application is to be exited Fn Quit. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1397 47.5 Configuring Survey Cross Section Access In the survey screen of the cross section application, press Config... Configuration, General page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To edit the survey screen page currently being displayed. Available when a list item in Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "19.3 My Survey Screen" Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Method Viva Series, Survey Cross Section Option Description Method by which subsequent cross sections will be surveyed. Refer to "47.1 Overview" for a diagram. 1398 Field Option Description Zig-zag Each new cross section is started at the same end as where the previous cross section finished. Same direction Each new cross section is started at the same end as where the previous cross section started. The way of surveying the cross section. This influences in which order the elements of a template will be applied. Refer to "47.1 Overview" for a diagram. Direction Forward The cross sections will be surveyed in the same way as the elements are defined in the selected template. Backward The cross sections will be surveyed in the reverse way as the elements are defined in the selected template. Show distance Check box to last msd section Activates a display only field in the survey screen. The horizontal distance from the current position to the last surveyed element position in the previous cross section will be displayed. Show code attribute Checkbox When this box is checked, some attribute fields are displayed in the survey screen. Useful if the surveyor is stringing, to see that the correct string attribute value is being used. Attribute to show From 1 to 20 The number of attribute fields which is displayed in the survey screen. Available when Show code attribute is checked. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1399 Field Option Show addiCheck box tional page from My Survey Screen Page to show Selectable list Description When this box is checked, a user-defined survey screen page is shown in the survey screen. The names of the available survey screen pages. Available when Show additional page from My Survey Screen is checked. Next step OK returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1400 48 Survey - Hidden Points 48.1 Overview Description Hidden points are points which cannot be measured directly by GPS, because, either they cannot be physically reached, or because satellites are obstructed, for example by trees or tall buildings. • • • A hidden point can be calculated by measuring distances and/or azimuths to the hidden point using a hidden point measurement device. Or for distances a tape can be used. Additional auxiliary points can be manually measured. Bearings can be computed from previously measured points. In contrast to the COGO application, hidden point measurements is more of a measuring application than a calculation application. Example Application: Completing a survey of telegraph poles for a telecommunication company. Aim: The telegraph poles must be surveyed to 0.3 m accuracy in plan but height is not of concern. Use of hidden point measurements: For poles surrounded by heavy undergrowth, where it is not possible to measure the pole directly without taking time to cut a path through the undergrowth. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1401 ) Hidden point measurement methods ) Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in hidden point measurements does not result in the hidden point being recomputed. A hidden point can be measured by • • • Bearing and distance Two bearings Two distances • • Chainage and offset Backwards bearing and distance A hidden point measurement device can be attached to the instrument such that the measurements are automatically transferred to the instrument. Heights If configured, heights are taken into account. Refer to "48.7 Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights" for information on configuring height offsets. Device height and Target height configured in Hidden Point Device Offsets are applied when the hidden points are computed. Δ height in Hidden Point Connection is the value directly from the hidden point measuring device. Coding of hidden points • Thematical coding: • Free coding: • Quick coding: Properties of hidden points Available in Hidden Point Result after the calculation of a hidden point. Thematical coding of hidden points is identical to coding of manually measured points. Can be started while in Hidden Point Connection. Free coding of hidden points is identical to coding of manually measured points. Not available. The properties stored with hidden points are: • Class: Meas • Sub class: Hidden Point Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1402 • • Source: Bearing-Distance, 2 bearings, 2 distances, Chainage % offset or Backward brgdst depending on the hidden point measurement method used Instrument source: GPS Averaging of hidden points An average is calculated for hidden points if a point of class Meas already exists with the same point ID. ) Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to mean also Bearing. Auxiliary points Auxiliary points are used to compute azimuths required for the calculation of hidden point coordinates. Auxiliary points can be points existing in the job or they can be manually measured. The point ID template configured for Auxiliary points in ID Templates is applied. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1403 48.2 Hidden Point Methods 48.2.1 Bearing & Distance Description One point must be known. It • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The distance and the bearing from the known point to the hidden point are to be determined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. The auxiliary point can be determined in the direction from the known point to the hidden point. Diagram P2 d P1 GS_063 Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points P0 Known P0 Known point To be measured d Distance from P0 to P2 α Bearing from P0 to P2 P1 Auxiliary point, optional Unknown P2 Hidden point 1404 48.2.2 Using 2 Bearings Description Two points must be known. They • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The bearings from the known points to the hidden point are to be determined. Auxiliary points help compute the bearings which might not be known. Auxiliary points can be measured in the direction from the known points to the hidden point. Diagram P3 P4 P1 GS_064 Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points P0 P2 Known P0 First known point P3 Second known point To be measured α1 Bearing from P0 to P2 α2 Bearing from P3 to P2 P1 First auxiliary point, optional P4 Second auxiliary point, optional Unknown P2 Hidden point 1405 48.2.3 Using 2 Distances Description Two points must be known. They • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The distances from the known points to the hidden points are to be determined. The location of the hidden point relative to the line between the two known points is to be defined. Diagram P2 d2 b P1 a d3 d1 GS_065 Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points P0 Known P0 First known point P2 Second known point d3 Line from P0 to P2 a Right of d3 b Left of d3 To be measured d1 Distance from P0 to P1 d2 Distance from P2 to P1 Unknown P1 Hidden point 1406 48.2.4 Chainage & Offset Description Two points must be known. They • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The chainage from one known point along the line between the two known points must be determined. The offset of the hidden point to the line between the two known points must be determined. Diagram P1 d2 d1 GS_067 Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points P0 P2 Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point To be measured d1 Chainage d2 Offset Unknown P2 Hidden point 1407 48.2.5 Backwards Bearing & Distance Description In order to compute the hidden point, the measurements are taken from the hidden point. One point must be known. It • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The distance and the bearing from the hidden point to the known point are to be determined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. An auxiliary point can be measured in the direction from the hidden point to the known point. Diagram P2 P1 d GS_068 Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points P0 Known P0 Known point To be measured α Bearing from P2 to P0 d Distance from P2 to P0 P1 Auxiliary point, optional Unknown P2 Hidden point 1408 48.3 Hidden Point Measurements ) Hidden point measurements are possible from the Survey application and when the Survey application screen is called from another application, for example from Stakeout. Access Press HdnPt.. in the survey screen. Hidden Point Connection The setting for Method on this screen determines the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys. Calc To calculate the hidden point and to display the results. EAO Available for Angle offset: New for each point or Angle offset: Permanent in Hidden Point Device Offsets. To change or enter an External Angle Offset. Hts.. To type in the device and target heights to be considered. Sun Available when Azimuth is highlighted. The azimuth from the direction of the sun to the known point is computed. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1409 Azmth Available when Azimuth is highlighted. To select or manually measure an auxiliary point and to compute the azimuth. Posn ? To determine chainage and offset of the current position relative to the line between the two known points. The values are displayed in Chainage and Offset. The point from where the chainage has been measured is selected in Chainage from. Slope Available when Horiz distance or Chainage is highlighted. To measure a slope distance and an elevation angle or percentage grade. The values are used to compute the horizontal distance. Survy.. Available when a point field is highlighted. To measure the known point manually for the calculation of the hidden point. Fn Config.. To configure hidden point measurements. Refer to "14 Instrument connections - All other connections". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1410 Description of fields Field Option Description Method Selectable list The method for measuring hidden points. Refer to "48.2 Hidden Point Methods" for a description of the methods. Point Selectable list The point ID of the current position. This point is the known point for the calculation of the hidden point. To type in coordinates manually for the known point open the selectable list and create a new point. ) Point A Selectable list The point ID of the current position. This point is the first known point for the calculation of the hidden point. To type in coordinates manually for the known point open the selectable list and create a new point. ) Point B Selectable list The point ID of the current position. This point is the second known point for the calculation of the hidden point. To type in coordinates manually for the known point open the selectable list and create a new point. ) Azimuth Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points Editable field The azimuth from the known point to the hidden point. Type in an azimuth. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the azimuth, the value is automatically transferred. 1411 Field Option Description Horiz distance Editable field The horizontal distance from the known point to the hidden point. Type in a distance. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the distance, the value is automatically transferred. Location Selectable list Available for Method: Using 2 distances. The location of the hidden point relative to the line from Point A to Point B. Chainage from Selectable list Available for Method: Chainage % offset. The chainage from one known point along the line between the two known points. Looking from the point selected in Chainage from, a positive chainage is towards the second known point. A negative chainage is into the opposite direction of the second known point. Next step Calc calculates the hidden point and displays the results in Hidden Point Result. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1412 48.4 Hidden Point Results Computed distances on Hidden Point Result d5 d4 d1 d6 d3 P0 GS_066 P2 d2 P1 P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 First known point Hidden point Second known point Distance from P0 to P1 Distance from P2 to P1 Check chainage A Check chainage B Check offset Check distance AB Hidden Point Result Store To store the result. Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Next To store the hidden point and to return to Hidden Point Connection. Another hidden point can be measured. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1413 Fn Quit To not store the hidden point and to exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the hidden point. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed. Type in a point ID. Check distance Display only AB Check bearing AB Display only Available for Method: Using 2 bearings and Method: Using 2 distances. The computed horizontal distance between Point A and Point B. Available for Method: Using 2 bearings and Method: Chainage % offset. The computed bearing from Point A to Point B. Check distance Display only A Available for Method: Using 2 bearings and Method: Chainage % offset. The computed horizontal distance between Point A and the hidden point. Check distance Display only B Available for Method: Using 2 bearings and Method: Chainage % offset. The computed horizontal distance between Point B and the hidden point. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1414 Field Option Description Check chainage A Display only Available for Method: Using 2 distances. The computed distance on the line from Point A to Point B from Point A to the point of intersection with Check offset. Check chainage B Display only Available for Method: Using 2 distances. The computed distance on the line from Point B to Point A from Point B to the point of intersection with Check offset. Check offset Display only Available for Method: Using 2 distances. The computed perpendicular distance from the hidden point to the line from Point A to Point B. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Map page, measured distances are indicated by solid arrows, bearings are indicated by half solid and half dashed arrows. Store stores the hidden point. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1415 48.5 Computing an Azimuth 48.5.1 Using the Sun Description The azimuth for a hidden point measurement can be computed using a known point and the sun. The known point can be manually measured. The location of the hidden point can be away from the sun or in the direction towards the sun. Ensure that the shadow of the pole falls in the direction of the point. Diagram P1 P1 P0 P0 GS_069 GS_070 P0 P1 α Requirements Known point Hidden point Bearing from P0 to P1 P0 P1 α Known point Hidden point Bearing from P0 to P1 Bearing & distance, Using 2 bearings or Back brng & distance must be selected for Method. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1416 Access In Hidden Point Connection highlight Azimuth. Press Sun. Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1417 48.5.2 Using Auxiliary Point Description The azimuth for a hidden point measurement can be computed using an auxiliary point. The auxiliary point • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The location of the auxiliary point can be in the direction towards the hidden point or away from the hidden point. Diagram P2 P2 P0 P1 P0 GS_071 P0 P1 P2 α Known point Auxiliary point, Azimuth Pt Hidden point Bearing from P2 to P0 Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points GS_072 P0 P1 P2 α P1 Known point Auxiliary point, Azimuth Pt Hidden point Bearing from P0 to P2 1418 Requirements Bearing & distance, Using 2 bearings or Back brng & distance must be selected for Method. Access In Hidden Point Connection highlight Azimuth. Press Azmth. Choose Azimuth Point OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The azimuth is computed and displayed in Azimuth in Hidden Point Connection. Survy.. Available for Azimuth Pt being highlighted. To measure the auxiliary point manually for the calculation of the azimuth. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Azimuth Pt Selectable list The auxiliary point for the calculation of the azimuth. Direction Selectable list The location of the auxiliary point relative to the hidden point. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1419 Next step OK closes the screen. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1420 48.6 Computing Horizontal Distances from Slope Distances Description The horizontal distance for a hidden point measurement can be computed using a slope distance, and an elevation angle or percentage grade. The slope distance and the elevation angle can either be typed in or measured with a hidden point measurement device. Diagram P1 d1 d2 P0 GS_073 P0 P1 d1 d2 α Known point Hidden point Slope distance Horizontal distance Elevation angle Requirements Bearing & distance, Using 2 bearings or Back brng & distance must be selected for Method. Access In Hidden Point Connection highlight Horiz distance. Press Slope. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1421 Slope distance OK To take over the result. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Slope distance Editable field Type in a distance from the known point to the hidden point. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the distance, the value is automatically transferred. Elevation angle Editable field Type in the elevation angle from the known point to the hidden point. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the elevation angle, the value is automatically transferred. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1422 Field Option Description Grade (%) Editable field The grade from the known point to the hidden point is automatically computed from the slope distance and the elevation angle. The value for Grade (%) can be typed in instead of the value for Elevation angle. Then Elevation angle is computed automatically. ) Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance from the known point to the hidden point is automatically computed from the slope distance and the elevation angle. Δ height Display only Available if using heights is configured. The height difference between the known point and the hidden point is automatically computed from the slope distance and the elevation angle. Next step OK returns to Hidden Point Connection. The horizontal distance is displayed in Horiz distance. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1423 48.7 Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights Diagram P1 d2 d3 b d1 a P2 d5 d4 P0 P1 P2 a b d1 d2 d3 d4 P0 GS_074 Configuration step-bystep d5 Known point Target point Hidden point Height of P0 Height of P2 = a + d1 + d4 - d3 Device height: Height of hidden point measurement device above P0 Slope distance Target height: Height of P1 above P2 Height difference between hidden point measurement device and P1 Horizontal distance Step Description 1. Compute height for hidden points is checked in Configuration. 2. Height offset: Device & target ht in Hidden Point Device Offsets. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1424 Hidden Point Connection Description of fields Field Option Description Δ height Selectable list The positive or negative height difference between the centre of the hidden point measurement device and the target point. Type in the value. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the height difference, the value is automatically transferred. For hidden point measurement methods using two known points, Δ height must be determined from each known point. Refer to "48.3 Hidden Point Measurements" for a description of all other fields on the screen. ) Next step Press Hts... Device & Target Height Description of fields Field Option Description Device ht at pt A Editable field The height of the hidden point measurement device above Point A. Target height Editable field The height of the target point above the hidden point when measured from Point A. Device ht at pt B Editable field Available for hidden point measurement methods using two known points. The height of the hidden point measurement device above Point B. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1425 Field Option Description Target height Editable field Available for hidden point measurement methods using two known points. The height of the target point above the hidden point when measured from Point B. Next step OK closes the screen and returns to Hidden Point Connection. There, Δ height still displays the positive or negative height difference between the centre of the hidden point measurement device and the target point. The heights of the hidden point measurement device above the ground, and the target point above the hidden point, are applied when the hidden point is computed. For hidden point measurement methods using two known points, this computation is done for each known point. In this case, the height of the hidden point is the average. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1426 49 Hidden Point 49.1 Overview Description Hidden points cannot be measured directly by a TPS instrument, because they are not directly visible. A hidden point can be calculated from measurements to prisms mounted on a hidden point rod. The spacing and length of the hidden point rod are known. The hidden point rod can be held at any angle, as long as it is stationary for all measurements. Measurements for the hidden point are calculated as if the hidden point was observed directly. These calculated measurements can also be recorded. The hidden point rod can have either two or three prisms. If three prisms are used the average will be calculated. Hidden point rod The prisms on the hidden point rod are also called auxiliary points after they have been measured. 1 d2 3 d3 2 d1 TS_046 Viva Series, Hidden Point 1 2 3 d1 d2 d3 Prism 1 Prism 2 Prism 3 Rod length Distance from prism 1 to prism 2 Distance from prism 1 to prism 3 1427 Properties of hidden points The properties stored with the hidden point and auxiliary points are: • Class: Meas • Sub class: Hidden Point • Source: COGO • Instrument source: TPS Hidden point tasks The Hidden Point application can be used for the following tasks: • The hidden point application can be used to obtain accurate three-dimensional coordinates for a point that is blocked from direct measurement by an obstruction. • Determination of flow line locations and elevations in manholes, without measuring from the manhole rim to the flow line, and then estimating corrections for nonverticality of the measuring tape and eccentricity from the rim measurement to the flow line. • Determination of recesses in building corners for detailed surveys, without estimating right angle offsets, with or without taping of the dimensions. • Measurements behind overhangs, buttresses and columns for quantity determinations in underground construction or mining, without estimating right angle offsets, with or without taping of the dimensions. • Measurements of industrial process piping or other equipment in close quarters. • Detailed architectural surveys for remodelling or cultural preservation or restoration work • Any place where accurate measurements would require many more instrument setups in order to achieve line of sight from the instrument to the points being measured. ) Viva Series, Hidden Point The TPS Hidden Point application does not generate a report sheet. 1428 49.2 Accessing Hidden Point and Measuring Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\TPS hidden point. Diagram 1 3 2 P0 TS_047 P1 d3 d2 d1 d1 d2 d3 Rod length Distance from prism 1 to prism 2 Distance from prism 1 to prism 3 Measure Reflector 1, Hidden pt page Meas To measure and store the prism, and access the next screen. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store data. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Hidden Point 1429 Fn Config.. To configure the TPS hidden point application. Refer to "49.3 Configuring Hidden Point". Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Hidden Point Field Option Description Aux point ID Editable field The point ID of the auxiliary point, the prism on the hidden point rod. The Auxiliary Points ID template is used. Hz Display only The horizontal angle to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is displayed. V Display only The vertical angle to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is displayed. Slope distance Display only The slope distance to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is displayed. Height difference Display only The height difference to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is displayed. 1430 Field Option Description Rod length Editable field The length of the rod can be adjusted before the hidden point result is displayed. The rod length always keeps the distances R1-R2 for two prisms and R1-R3 for three prisms into account. Next step Take the measurements to prism 2 and, if desired, to prism 3. After the last prism of the hidden point rod is measured, Hidden Point Result, Result page is accessed. Hidden Point Result, Result page Store To measure the prism and exit the application. Next To store the hidden point and to access Measure Reflector 1 to take more hidden point measurements. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Viva Series, Hidden Point 1431 Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The name of the hidden point. The configured point ID template is used. Hz Display only The calculated horizontal angle to the computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. V Display only The calculated vertical angle to the computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. Slope distance Display only The calculated slope distance to the computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. Height difference Display only The calculated height difference from instrument to computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. Easting, Northing and Height Display only The calculated coordinates of the computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. Next step Page changes to the Code page. Type in a code if desired. Page changes to the Plot page. Measured distances are indicated by solid arrows. Viva Series, Hidden Point 1432 49.3 Configuring Hidden Point Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\TPS hidden point. Press Fn Config... Configuration OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To configure the selected survey screen page. Refer to "19.3 My Survey Screen" Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Hidden Point 1433 Description of fields Field Option Description Page to show Selectable list The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in Measure Reflector 1, Measure Reflector 2 and Measure Reflector 3. Measure tolerance Editable field Limit of the difference between input and measured spacing of the prisms. For three prisms being used, limit for maximum deviation of the three measurements. ) Delete aux points Yes or No The auxiliary points are deleted when the hidden point is stored. The auxiliary points are prism 1, prism 2 and prism 3 of the hidden point rod. The Auxiliary Points ID template is used for the auxiliary points. The Survey Points ID template is used for the computed hidden point. Viva Series, Hidden Point No. of reflectors 2 or 3 Two or three prisms are used on the rod. Auto position Yes or No Available for No. of reflectors: 3. The third prism is aimed at automatically. Rod length Editable field Total length of hidden point rod. Distance R1-R2 Editable field Spacing between the centres of prism 1 and prism 2. Distance R1-R3 Editable field Available for No. of reflectors: 3. Spacing between the centres of prism 1 and prism 3. Prism 3 is situated between prism 1 and prism 2. 1434 Next step OK returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed from. Viva Series, Hidden Point 1435 50 Survey - Remote Point 50.1 Overview Description Remote point is used to determine the 3D coordinates of inaccessible points, for example on bridges. The horizontal distance to a base point directly underneath or above the remote point is measured. Then the instrument is aimed at the remote point. The coordinates of the remote point are calculated with the distance measured to the base point and the angles measured to the remote point. Diagram a P2 d1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P2 d1 α TS_043 a ) Instrument station Base point Remote point Horizontal distance to the base point Vertical angle between base point and remote point Vertical axis from P1 to P2 To ensure correct results, the remote point and the prism must be lined up vertically. If it is not possible to maintain an exactly vertical line, the acceptable Hz dist tolerance must be chosen. The horizontal distance to the remote point and to the base point should coincide. Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 1436 Properties of remote points The properties stored with auto points are: • Class: Meas • Sub class: TPS • Source: Survey (Rem Pt) • Instrument source: TPS Averaging of remote points An average can be calculated for remote points if a measured point of class Meas already exists with the same point ID. The average flag for the point is Auto. Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 1437 50.2 Accessing Remote Point Description Remote point measurements are possible from the Survey application when Measure remote pts is checked in the Configuration, Remote pt page and a valid distance measurement is available. Access Press RmtHt. in Survey, Survey page after one point is measured with Dist. Survey Remote Point, Remote pt page Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point Store Stores the remote point. Stays in this screen. Base pt Returns to the Survey screen. The distance measurement is cleared. Page To change to another page on this screen. The page available depends on the Page to show selected in the Configuration, Remote pt screen. Refer to "50.3 Configuring Remote Point". Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the application. 1438 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field Displays the point ID for the remote point. The point ID in Survey Remote Point is always identical to the point ID in Survey. Δ Ht BaseRem Display only The elevation difference between the base point and the remote point. Hz Display only The current horizontal angle. V Display only The current vertical angle. Slope distance Display only The current slope distance to the remote point calculated from the horizontal distance to the base point and the current vertical angle. Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance measured to the base point. Easting Display only Calculated Easting coordinate for the remote point. Northing Display only Calculated Northing coordinate for the remote point. Elevation Display only Calculated height for the remote point. Next step IF THEN if a remote point is to be stored Store. a new base point is to be measured Base pt to return to the Survey screen. Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 1439 50.3 Configuring Remote Point Access In Survey press Fn Config.. to access Configuration. Configuration, Remote pt page OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Config.. To configure the selected survey screen page. Available when Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "19.3 My Survey Screen". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Measure remote pts Check box Hz dist tolerance Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point Editable field Description If checked, the remote point function is active. RmtHt. is added to the function keys in Survey after Dist is pressed. The horizontal distance to the remote point is equal to the horizontal distance of the base point. The value for Hz dist tolerance is the maximum tolerated length of the chord between the base point and the remote point. 1440 Field Option Page to show Selectable list All survey screen pages from Main Menu: User\Work settings\My Survey Screen can be selected. Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point Description 1441 51 Traverse 51.1 Overview Description The Traverse application is used to fulfil one of the most common operations done by surveyors; to establish a control point base system to be used as a skeleton for other survey operations. For example, topographic survey, point stakeout, line stakeout or road stakeout. Types of traverse • • • • External reference & closed loop Internal reference & position check Open end & position check Closed end traverse P6 P2 P1 P5 P10 P8 P3 TS_049 Properties of Traverse points Viva Series, Traverse P4 P9 P7 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 Traverse point Backsight point Traverse point Sideshot point Traverse point Sideshot point Sideshot point Closing point Sideshot point Closing angle point The properties stored with the Traverse points are: • Class: Meas • Sub class: TPS 1442 • • Averaging of Traverse points Viva Series, Traverse Source: Traverse Instrument: TPS An average point of class Meas is calculated by the Traverse application. 1443 51.2 Accessing Traverse Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Traverse. Traverse OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "51.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Viva Series, Traverse IF THEN a traverse is to be created or selected highlight the relevant option and press OK. Traverse is to be configured Fn Config... Refer to "51.6 Configuring Traverse". 1444 51.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse Access • • In Traverse, select Create a new traverse. Press OK. In Manage Traverses, press New.. or Edit... New Traverse/Edit Traverse OK To store the settings. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "51.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Viva Series, Traverse Field Option Description Traverse ID Editable field The ID of the traverse. Description Editable field A line for a detailed description of the traverse, for example, work to be performed. Optional. Operator Editable field The person’s name who is creating the traverse. Optional. 1445 Viva Series, Traverse Field Option Description Date Display only The date of when the traverse was created. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. Time Display only The time of when the traverse was created. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. Status Open The traverse is not closed in position. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. Position closed The traverse has been closed in position on a control point. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. Posn & angle closed The traverse has been closed both in position and angularly. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. Adjusted The traverse data is the result from an adjustment. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. 1446 51.4 Selecting an Existing Traverse Access In Traverse, select Existing Traverse. Press OK. Existing Traverse OK To accept the settings. Data.. To display traverse data. Refer to "51.5 Traverse Data". Not available for adjusted traverses. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "51.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields The fields are identical with those fields in the Edit Traverse screen. Refer to "51.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse". Next step ENTER when Traverse ID is highlighted. Accesses Manage Traverses. Viva Series, Traverse 1447 Manage Traverses All traverses of the working job are displayed. OK To confirm selection of highlighted traverse and return to Select an existing traverse. New.. To create a new traverse. Refer to "51.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse". Edit.. To edit the traverse ID and description of the highlighted traverse. Refer to "51.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse". Data.. To display traverse data. Refer to "51.5 Traverse Data" for more information. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Traverse 1448 51.5 Traverse Data Description This screen allows the review and editing of traverse stations inside of a traverse and allows the user to access Point Results for editing. Access Data.. in Manage Traverses. OR Data.. in a Confirmation window of the Point Results screen. Traverse Data OK To return to where this screen was accessed from. Edit.. To access the Point Results screen. Refer to "51.8 Traverse Point Results". Delete To permanently delete the LAST traverse station. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Viva Series, Traverse Column Description Station ID Point ID of the station. 1449 Viva Series, Traverse Column Description Backsight ID The backsight point measured from the current station ID. No. sets Number of measured sets. No. FS Number of measured foresight points. 1450 51.6 Configuring Traverse Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Traverse. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Parameters page OK To accept changes and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To edit the survey screen page currently being displayed. Available when a list item in Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "19.3 My Survey Screen". Available on the Parameters page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Viva Series, Traverse Field Option Description Measure sequence B'F'...F''B'' All points are measured in face I, then measured in face II in reverse sequential order. B'F'...B''F'' All points are measured in face I, then measured in face II. 1451 Field Foresight Option Description B'B''F'F''... Backsight point is measured in face I immediately followed by face II. Other points are measured in face I, face II order. B'B''F''F'... Backsight point is measured in face I immediately followed by face II. Other points are measured in alternating face order. B'F'... All points are measured in face I only. Check box Option to define if only one foresight point or multiple points are used during the sets. When using autoCheck box matic target aiming, automatically measure the targets For instruments with automatic aiming and this option checked, automatic aiming search and automatic aiming measurements are done to specified targets and subsequent sets. Show additional page from My Survey Screen Check box The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in the Traverse screen. Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Viva Series, Traverse 1452 Configuration, Quality control page Description of fields Field Option Description Check for errors before storing Check box The entered horizontal, vertical and distance tolerances are checked during the measurements to verify accurate pointing and measurements. Hz tolerance Editable field Tolerance for horizontal directions. V tolerance Editable field Tolerance for vertical directions. Distance tolerance Editable field Tolerance for distance. Check for backsight Check box height The entered height tolerance for the backsight point is checked during the measurements to verify accurate pointing and measurements. Editable field Height limit Tolerance for the backsight height. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Viva Series, Traverse Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. 1453 Field Option Description Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Traverse 1454 51.7 Traverse Methods 51.7.1 Starting Traverse Start traverse step-bystep The quickest setup method is described. Step Description 1. Start the Traverse application. 2. Traverse Select Create a new traverse. 3. OK to access New Traverse. 4. New Traverse Type in the name of the new traverse. 5. OK to access Configuration. Check the settings. 6. OK to access Total Station Setup. Any standard setup method can be used. 7. Set to set the station and orientation. 8. A confirmation window is displayed. FS Pt.. 9. Foresight, Set: Foresight ID The name of the foresight point. Target height The target height of the foresight point. Number of sets The number of sets to be measured. Viva Series, Traverse 1455 Step Description 10. Meas to measure and record. The measurement settings for the first measurement to each point are used for all further sets. 11. Point Results OK to move to the next station, to return to the Point Results screen (and set a point as a closing point), to survey a sideshot, to view traverse data or to end the traverse. 12. ) Viva Series, Traverse Move to move to the next station. After pressing Move, Traverse is exited. To continue with the traverse from the next station refer to "51.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse". 1456 51.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse Measure traverse stepby-step Step Description 1. Start the Traverse application. 2. Traverse Select Select an existing traverse. 3. OK to access Existing Traverse. 4. Existing Traverse ) ) 5. Traverse ID The name of the traverse. ENTER to select a different existing traverse. Data.. to view data of the active traverse. Fn Config.. to change the working style settings. OK to access Backsight, Set:. Enter Instrument height. Hz, V and Horiz distance The measured values are displayed. Calc azimuth The calculated azimuth from the current station point to the backsight point. ) Viva Series, Traverse Δ hz dist and Δ height The difference between the computed and measured values. More to change between the displayed values. 6. Meas to measure and record the backsight point. 7. FS Pt.. to measure a foresight point. 8. Foresight, Set: 1457 Step ) Description Foresight ID The name of the foresight point. Target height The target height of the foresight point. Number of sets The number of sets to be measured. Survy.. to measure sideshot points. 9. Meas to measure and record the foresight points. The measurement settings for the first measurement to each point are used for all further sets. 10. Point Results OK 11. A confirmation window is displayed. 12. Repeat steps 1. to 11. until traverse is ready to be closed. Move to move to the next station. Viva Series, Traverse 1458 51.7.3 Closing Traverse Close traverse step-bystep Step Description 1. Refer to paragraph "51.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse" to measure a traverse. Measure a backsight on a new station. 2. The confirmation window in Foresight, Set: is displayed. Close.. to begin the process for closing the traverse. 3. The confirmation window to select a known point is displayed. OK 4. The Data: screen for the control job is displayed. Highlight the closing point. 5. OK to select the highlighted point. 6. Foresight, Set: Meas to measure and record the closing point. 7. Point Results OK to view traverse results. 8. Traverse Results OK to display the confirmation window. 9. C Ang.. to close the traverse with angular closure. ) 10. Move to the closure point and start Traverse application. 11. Traverse Optionally the traverse can be adjusted. Select Select an existing traverse. Viva Series, Traverse 1459 Step Description 12. OK to access Existing Traverse. 13. Existing Traverse Traverse ID The name of the traverse to be closed is displayed. 14. OK to access Close Angle. 15. Close Angle Closing method To measure onto a known point or a known azimuth. Foresight ID The point ID of the foresight point. Known azimuth Available for Closing method : By known azimuth. Known azimuth for foresight point. 16. OK to access Backsight, Set:. 17. Meas to measure all sets. 18. Point Results OK to view traverse results. 19. Traverse Results OK to exit viewing traverse results. 20. ) Close traverse on internal reference Viva Series, Traverse Quit to quit the Traverse application. Optionally the traverse can be adjusted. This option is used for determining the closure of a closed loop traverse, consisting of a single control point with an arbitrary backsight azimuth. This function allows completion of a traverse without having to reoccupy the initial station setup to measure a closing angle. The positional closure is calculated by comparing the control position of the initial station 1460 setup to the measured position of the final foresight. The angular closure is calculated by comparing the set azimuth of the initial backsight to the azimuth of the final measured leg. P6 P5 P4 P1 TS_050 Viva Series, Traverse P2 P3 The first station setup is on P1, and an assumed direction to backsight P6. Upon closing this traverse, with the last setup over P6, the closing point is P1. In this case the only point that is considered as a control is P1. Step Description 1. The first station setup is on P1 in the diagram shown. Begin the traverse, moving in the direction P1, P2...P6. 2. When on the last setup point (P6 in the diagram shown), measure a backsight. 3. Close 4. Data: Select the closing point from the available list (P1 in the diagram shown). OK 5. Measure all the sets to the closing point as per a standard traverse. 1461 Viva Series, Traverse Step Description 6. Point Results OK when the review of the results is completed. 7. Yes to confirm the automatic calculation. 8. Traverse Results The traverse closure is shown with positional and angular values. 1462 51.7.4 Creating a Control Point from Backsight by Azimuth Description If a traverse is to be established on existing control points, two control points must be defined to start the traverse. If the traverse absolute position is arbitrary, it can be convenient to define the control in the field with arbitrary values. This functionality is an option to turn the averaged position value into a control point when a backsight by azimuth is collected. Access At the beginning of a traverse, when all the measurements are completed to the backsight: On the Point Results screen, select Page to reach the Backsight page. Fn Ctrl. OR Anytime during the traverse: On the Traverse Data screen, highlight the first station setup then Edit... On the Point Results screen, select Page to reach the Backsight page. Fn Ctrl. Point Results Confirmation No To close the confirmation window without further action. Yes To store the point as control point. Viva Series, Traverse 1463 51.8 Traverse Point Results Description Point observation results are displayed on this screen. Access Is displayed automatically after measuring all sets from the current station. OR In Traverse Data press Edit... Point Results, Foresight page and Backsight page Viva Series, Traverse The softkeys are explained, except for the softkeys on the Map page. OK While measuring a traverse: Displays a confirmation window with traverse measurement options. Otherwise: To return to Traverse Data. +Sets.. To add more sets while still at the setup. It could be necessary on particular legs of a traverse that more than the designated number of sets is required. Possibly some of the sets from the first run exceeded the tolerance limit and must be disabled. Sets.. To include or exclude measured sets in the calculation of a foresight point. In the Sets, Point screen press Use to include or exclude a set and Spread/Resid to review the effect of using the set. 1464 Close.. To set a point as a closing point if not selected before measurement. Or to revert a closing point to a normal foresight. More To display additional information. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "51.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Edit.. To edit point code and annotations. Fn Check.. Available on the Foresight page. To check inverse distances and closure between the selected point and a point from the fixpoint job. Fn Ctrl Available on the Backsight page of the initial station. Refer to "51.7.4 Creating a Control Point from Backsight by Azimuth". Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Traverse 1465 Description of fields Viva Series, Traverse Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list Selected point ID. or display only Target height Selectable list The target height of the target point. or display only Point type Foresight, Closing point or Closing angle The current point type. Available on the Foresight page. No. of used sets Display only The number of sets out of all measured sets used for the calculation. Available on the Foresight page. Number of sets Display only The number of sets the point was measured in. Available on the Backsight page. Hz arc average Display only Average horizontal angle. V average Display only Average vertical angle. Dist average Display only Average distance. Hz arc std dev Display only Standard deviation of horizontal angle. V std dev Display only Standard deviation of vertical angle. Dist std dev Display only Standard deviation of distance. Hz spread Display only Spread of horizontal angle. V spread Display only Spread of vertical angle. Dist spread Display only Spread of distance. 1466 Next step Page changes to the Stn info page. Point Results, Stn info page Description of fields Field Option Description Station ID Display only The station ID of the instrument station. Instrument height Editable field Current instrument height. Editable. Easting Display only Easting value of the station position. Northing Display only Northing value of the station position. Elevation Display only Orthometric height of the station position. Scale Display only Scale factor used in the calculation. Temperature Display only Temperature set on the instrument. Pressure Display only Atmospheric ppm set on the instrument. Next step Page changes to the Map page which provides an interactive display of the data. IF accessed THEN after sets measure- OK opens a confirmation window with options that are dependent ment on traverse status: • Viva Series, Traverse For an open traverse: Move to next station, return to Point Results, to survey a sideshot, to view traverse data or to quit the traverse application. 1467 IF accessed THEN • For a closed traverse: Move to close angle, return to Point Results, to survey a sideshot, to adjust the traverse or to quit the traverse application. from Traverse Data OK returns to Traverse Data. Viva Series, Traverse 1468 51.9 Traverse Results Description Traverse closure results are displayed on this screen. Access Is displayed automatically after the traverse closing point is measured or selected. OR Reslt.. in Traverse Data when a traverse is closed. Traverse Results, Position page Viva Series, Traverse OK To move to close angle, to return to Traverse Results, to survey a sideshot, to adjust the traverse or to quit the Traverse application. N & E or L & D To view the misclosure error in north/east or length/direction. Adjust.. To adjust the traverse. Data.. To display traverse data. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "51.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. 1469 Description of fields Field Option Description Starting point Display only The point ID of the traverse start point. Closing point Display only The point ID of the traverse closing point. Length of error Display only The length of the misclosure error. Direction of error Display only The direction of the misclosure error. Δ north Display only Error in north. Δ east Display only Error in east. Δ elevation Display only Error in height. Total distance Display only Total length of the traverse. 2D accuracy Display only Position ratio of misclosure. 1D accuracy Display only Height ratio of misclosure. Next step Page changes to the Angle page. Traverse Results, Angle page Viva Series, Traverse Description of fields Field Option Description Foresight ID Display only Point ID of the closing angle point. Displays ----- if no values are available. Known azimuth Display only Defined azimuth of closing line. Displays ----- if no values are available. 1470 Field Option Description Azimuth average Display only Mean value of the measured azimuth closing line. Displays ----- if no values are available. Angular misclosure Display only Angular misclosure of traverse. Displays ----- if no values are available. Next step OK to move to close angle, to return to Traverse Results, to survey a sideshot, to adjust the traverse or to quit the Traverse application. Viva Series, Traverse 1471 51.10 Traverse Adjustment 51.10.1 Accessing Traverse Adjustment Description • • • ) Access Viva Series, Traverse A traverse adjustment can be performed on three components: 2D positions, angles and elevations. Various adjustment methods are available for selection. Once the adjustment is performed, the results can be reviewed. Adjusted points are stored into a new job, and a report can be generated. This option is protected and is only activated by the entry of a licence key. Survey points have to be measured while Traverse is running to be part of the adjustment calculations. The traverse adjustment option can be reached in different ways based on specific conditions. Upon completing the observations onto the closing point, Adjust.. to access Traverse Adjustment. OR After the measurements are done on the closing line for angular closure, Adjust.. to access Traverse Adjustment. OR When the traverse is closed: Reslt.. in Traverse Data, then Adjust.. in Traverse Results to access Traverse Adjustment. 1472 Traverse Adjustment, Method page OK To calculate the result. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "51.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Traverse ID Display only The ID of the traverse. Horiz adjustment Compass rule Suitable for surveys, where angles and distances were measured with equal precision. Transit rule Suitable for surveys, where angles were measured with a higher precision than the distances. No distribution No distribution is made. Angle balance Equally The angle misclosure is distributed equally. No distribution No distribution is made. Vert adjustment Viva Series, Traverse Equally The height error is distributed equally. By distance The height error is distributed by distance. 1473 Field Option Description No distribution No distribution is made. Next step OK starts the adjustment calculation. Viva Series, Traverse 1474 51.10.2 Adjustment Results Description The results of the adjustment calculations can be reviewed by accessing the different pages. Access OK in Traverse Adjustment. Adjustment Results, Position page OK To access the next screen. N & E or L & D To view the misclosure error in north/east or length/direction. More To display the values for the unadjusted, the balanced and the adjusted solution. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "51.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Traverse 1475 Description of fields Field Option Description Closure data type Adjusted, Unadjusted or Balanced More to change between the options and display the values accordingly. Starting point Display only The point ID of the traverse start point. Closing point Display only The point ID of the traverse close point. Length of error Display only The length of the misclosure error. Direction of error Display only The direction of the misclosure error. Δ north Display only Error in north. Δ east Display only Error in east. Δ elevation Display only Error in height. Total distance Display only Total length of the traverse. 2D accuracy Display only Position ratio of misclosure. 1D accuracy Display only Height ratio of misclosure. Next step Page changes to the Angle page. Adjustment Results, Angle page Viva Series, Traverse Description of fields Field Option Description Closure data type Display only More to change between the options. 1476 Field Option Description Known azimuth Display only Defined azimuth of closing line. Displays ----- if no values are available. Azimuth average Display only Mean value of the measured azimuth closing line. Displays ----- if no values are available. Angular misclosure Display only Angular misclosure of traverse. Displays ----- if no values are available. Next step Page changes to the Points page. Adjustment Results, Points page The adjusted points are listed. The Point type column shows the function for each point. View.. shows the coordinate values of the highlighted point. Next step Page changes to the Method page. Adjustment Results, Method page The adjustment methods previously selected in Traverse Adjustment and used for the adjustment are displayed. Next step Page changes to the Map page. The Map page provides an interactive display of the data. OK accesses Adjustment Store. Viva Series, Traverse 1477 Adjustment Store Description of fields Field Option Description Traverse ID Display only The ID of the traverse. Store adjusted job to Selectable list The location to save the adjusted job. The job can be saved to the CF card, SD card, USB or Internal memory. New job Editable field The new job name. Once adjustment results have been reviewed and accepted, the adjusted position of the points are stored in a separate job. Include survey points Check box Survey points can be included or not. Adjusted points are stored in the new job as a triplet of class ADJ (adjusted). Store point ID with Same point ID Adjusted points are stored in the new job with the original point IDs. Prefix / suffix Prefix Adjusted points are stored in the new job with a prefix in front of the original point IDs. Suffix Adjusted points are stored in the new job with a suffix at the end of the original point IDs. Editable field Available when Prefix or Suffix is selected in Store point ID with. The value that is added to the front or end of the original point ID. Next step Store.. stores the results. Viva Series, Traverse 1478 52 Volume Calculations 52.1 Overview Description The Volume Calculations application allows surfaces to be measured and volumes (and other information) to be computed from these surfaces. Volume calculations tasks The Volume calculations application can be used for the following tasks: • Measuring points (surface points and boundary points) defining a new surface or extending existing surfaces from the working job. • Calculating the triangulation of the measured surface points to establish the surface. • Calculating volumes from a base (3D point, entered elevation) or by a stockpile method. The surface calculation can be made from: • existing point data in the job. • manually occupied points. • entered coordinates. Activating the application The Volume Calculations application must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "24.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to activate the application. ) Volume Calculations are possible for RTK rover and TPS. Point types Surfaces can be created from points stored as: • Local grid • Height mode can be ellipsoidal or orthometric. Heights and positions are always taken into account. Points must have full coordinate triplets. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1479 Properties of measured points The properties stored with measured points are: • • Class: Either Meas or for point was occupied. Sub class: • also Nav depending on the position status when the GPS float, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Float, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed. • • • TPS Source: Survey Instrument source: GPS or TPS Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1480 52.2 Accessing Volumes Calculations Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Volume calculations. Volume Calculations OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Volume Calculations application. Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume Calculations". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step IF THEN a Volume Calculations method is to be started highlight the relevant option and press OK. Volume Calculations is to be configured Fn Config... Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume Calculations". Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1481 52.3 Configuring Volume Calculations Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Volume calculations. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1482 Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1483 52.4 Calculating Volumes 52.4.1 Create a New Surface by Measuring New Points Access Select Create a new surface by measuring new points in Volume Calculations. Create a new surface by measuring new points Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Editable ID The name/number of the new surface. Next step OK to access Survey points to surface or Surface status. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1484 Survey points to surface, Survey page The pages shown are from a typical working style. An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used. Meas To start measuring the surface point. The key changes to Stop. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Stop To end measuring the surface point. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The position mode icon changes to the moving icon. The key changes to Store. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store the measured surface point. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality control, General, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1485 Near To search the working job for the point nearest to the current position when the key is pressed. The point is selected as the point to be measured and is displayed in the first field on the screen. After measuring and storing the nearest point, the next point suggested is the one which was suggested before the key was pressed. Available when Meas is displayed. »Bndry / »Surf To change the type of point to be measured between surface point and boundary point. Done To finish measuring. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Conect and Fn Disco To dial the number of the base station configured in the active working style and to hang up immediately after the survey is completed. Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for real-time devices of type digital cellular phone or modem. Available for Auto connect when measuring unchecked in RTK Rover Settings, General page. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1486 Fn Init.. To select an initialisation method and to force a new initialisation. Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for working styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to "44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations". Fn IndivID and Fn Run To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually occupied points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: Viva Series, Volume Calculations • To start a new sequence of point IDs type over the point ID. • For an individual point ID independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. 1487 Field Option Antenna height Editable field Description The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. 3D CQ Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. Target height Editable field The last used target height is suggested when accessing this screen. An individual target height can be typed in. Hz Display only The current horizontal angle. V Display only The current vertical angle. Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance after Dist was pressed. No distance is displayed when accessing the screen and after Store or Meas. Height difference Display only The height difference between station and measured point after Dist. Displays ----- when accessing the screen and after Store or Meas. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1488 Next step Measure all points. Then press Done. Continue with "52.4.2 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points". Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1489 52.4.2 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points Access Select Create a new surface from previously stored points in Volume Calculations. When accessing the Edit Surface screen after selecting Create a new surface from previously stored points the Points page is active. Any other time this screen is accessed the General page is active. ) Create a new surface by measuring new points Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Editable ID The name/number of the new surface. Next step OK to access Survey points to surface or Surface status. Edit Surface, General page Viva Series, Volume Calculations OK To accept all settings and continue with the next screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Volume Calculations application. Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume Calculations". Fn Del Srf To delete the surface. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 1490 Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Selectable list Name of the surface to be triangulated. No. of surface pts Display only Number of points inside the surface. No. of boundary pts Display only Number of boundary points of the surface. ID of last stored Display only pt ID of the last measured point of the chosen surface. Date Display only Date of the last measured point of the chosen surface. Time Display only Time of the last measured point of the chosen surface. Surface status Triangulation done The surface has been triangulated and not been modified since the last triangulation. Triangulation needed The surface has been modified since the last triangulation or no triangulation exists. Next step Page changes to the Points page. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1491 Surface status, Points page OK To accept all settings and continue with the next screen. +All.. To add all points from the working job to the surface. +One.. To add one point from the working job to the surface. Bndry To use this point for the boundary. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn -One To remove the marked point from the surface. Fn -All To remove all points from the surface. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step OK continues to Surface Task Selection. Refer to "52.4.4 Selecting the Surface Task". Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1492 52.4.3 Choosing an Existing Surface Access Select Select an existing surface in Volume Calculations. Existing Surface The fields available are identical with the fields in Surface status, General page. Refer to "52.4.2 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points". Next step Select the desired surface ID then press OK. OK continues to Surface Task Selection. Refer to Selecting the Surface Task. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1493 52.4.4 Selecting the Surface Task Surface Task Selection Description of the options Options Description Measure more points to the surface To measure points defining a new surface or extending existing surfaces and boundaries by surveying. Refer to "52.4.1 Create a New Surface by Measuring New Points". Review & edit the surface To view the surface summary and add/remove points from the surface. Refer to "52.4.2 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points". Edit the boundary & triangulate surface To define/redefine the boundary using manual point selection, or one of the existing automatic methods, and then create a triangulation. A DXF model can then be exported if desired. Refer to "52.4.5 Boundary Definition". Calculate the volume To compute the volume of a surface by a reference (3D point, entered elevation) or by the stockpile method. Refer to "52.4.6 Compute Volumes". Available when a valid triangulation of the surface exists. End the application To end the application and return to the screen from where Volume Calculations was accessed. Next step Select the task to do next. OK selects an option. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1494 52.4.5 Boundary Definition Edit Boundary, Points page OK To start calculating the triangulation. +One.. To add points from the working job to the surface. ↑ To move the focused point one step up within the boundary definition. ↓ To move the focused point one step down within the boundary definition. Fn Tools To access to the Boundary Tools Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn -One To remove the marked point from the surface. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step IF you want to THEN check the triangulation reults OK to access Triangulation Results. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1495 Triangulation Results IF you want to THEN access the Tools menu Tools accesses Boundary Tools Menu. The Summary page and the Details page contain only display only fields. Information such as the number of triangles/surface points/boundary points, the minimum/maximum elevation or the 3D area is shown. The Map page contains a plot of the triangles of the surfaces triangulation and also its boundary. OK To return to Surface Task Selection. DXF To go to a screen where the triangulation can be saved as a DXF. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the report sheet. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Boundary Tools Menu Description of fields Field Description Add many points Lists all points in the working job. Remove all points Method to remove all points that are indicated in Edit Boundary, Points page. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1496 Field Description Sort points by time Method to sort all points in Edit Boundary, Points page by the time they were stored. Sort points by proximity Method to sort all points Edit Boundary, Points page by the closest proximity. Compute rubber band Method to define a new boundary as if a rubber band was placed bndry around the points. The current list of boundary points will be ignored. Next step Select the task to do next. OK selects an option and returns to Edit Boundary. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1497 52.4.6 Compute Volumes Volume Calculation OK To compute the volume. Fn Config.. To configure the Volume Calculations application. Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume Calculations". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Surface ID Selectable list Surface chosen from the triangulated surfaces currently stored to the working job. No. of triangles Display only Number of triangles from the triangulation of the surface. To calculate the volume of the triangulated surface. Calculate using Viva Series, Volume Calculations Description Stockpile Volume between the triangulated surface and the plane defined by the boundary points of the surface. Surface to elevation Volume between the triangulated surface and the height entered by the user. 1498 Field Option Description Surface to point Volume between the triangulated surface and the height of a selected point. Next step OK calculates the volume and continues to Volume Calculation Results. Volume Calculation Results, Summary page OK To close the triangulation of the surface. DXF To export the triangulation results to a DXF file on the data or root directory of the CF Card. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Volume Calculations application. Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume Calculations". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Display only Name of the surface used for the calculation. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1499 Field Option Description Point ID Display only The point to which the volume is calculated. Available for Calculate using: Surface to point. Elevation Display only The elevation of the point to which the volume is calculated. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Area Display only Area of the base plane. Net volume Display only Volume of the surface. Volume cut Display only Volume of the base plane. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Volume fill Display only Volume of the base plane. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Next step Page changes to the Details page. Volume Calculation Results, Details page Description of fields Field Option Description Minimum elevation Display only Minimal elevation of the triangulated surface. Maximum elevation Display only Maximal elevation of the triangulated surface. Average thickness Viva Series, Volume Calculations Display only Average thickness of the calculated volume. 1500 Field Option Description Perimeter Display only Perimeter of the measured surface area (intersection of the measured surface to the reference datum). Next step Page changes to the Plot page. Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1501 Appendix A Menu Tree Menu tree for GNSS RTK rover and TPS |—— Go to Work! | | Viva Series, Menu Tree | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |—— | |—— | |—— | |—— | | | | | | | Setup | | | | |—— TPS hidden point | | | | | | | | | |—— Sets of angles | |—— Determine coord system | | | | | |—— QuickGrid | Survey Stakeout Survey+ | |—— Measure to ref line | |—— Reference plane | |—— Volume calculations | 1502 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Viva Series, Menu Tree | | | | |—— | | | | | | | |—— | | | | | | | | | | | | | |—— | |—— Traverse | |—— Survey cross section Stakeout+ | |—— Stake to ref line | |—— Stake a DTM | |—— Stake points & DTM COGO.. | |—— Inverse | |—— Traverse | |—— Intersection | |—— Line & arc calculations | |—— Area division | |—— Shift, rotate & scale Roads.. | 1503 Viva Series, Menu Tree | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |—— | |—— | |—— | |—— | |—— | | | | | |—— Tunnel - Stakeout | | | | | |—— Tunnel - As built check | | |—— | | | | | | | | | | | |—— Switch to Base menu Alignment Editor Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check Rail - Stakeout Rail - As built check Jobs & Data | |—— New job | |—— View & edit data | |—— Job properties | |—— Choose working job | |—— Choose control job | 1504 Viva Series, Menu Tree | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |—— | |—— | | | | | |—— Instrument | | | |—— TPS settings | | | | | | |—— Measure mode & target | | | | | |—— Prism search settings | | | | | |—— Atmospheric corrections | Import data | |—— Import ASCII data | |—— Import DXF data Export & copy data | |—— Export ASCII data | |—— Export DXF Data | |—— Export LandXML Data | |—— Export FBK/RW5/RAW data | |—— Copy data between jobs 1505 Viva Series, Menu Tree | | | | |—— Level bubble & compensator | | | | | |—— Quality control & offsets | | | | | |—— Lights | | |—— GPS settings | | | | | | |—— RTK rover wizard | | | | | |—— Satellite tracking | | | | | |—— Antenna heights | | | | | |—— Quality control | | | | | | |—— Raw data logging | |—— Instrument connections | | | | | | |—— TPS connection wizard | | | | | |—— GPS connection | 1506 | | | | | | | |—— All other connections | |—— Instrument status info | |—— Battery & memory | | | |—— Satellite tracking | | | |—— RTK data link status | | | |—— Current GPS position | | | | | |—— Raw data logging | |—— Connection status | | |—— TPS current station info | |—— User | |—— Work settings | | | |—— ID templates | | | |—— Coding & linework | | Viva Series, Menu Tree 1507 | | | | |—— | |—— | | | | | | | |—— | | | | | | | | | | | | | |—— Viva Series, Menu Tree |—— My Survey Screen | |—— Hot keys & favourites Working style wizard System settings | |—— Regional settings | |—— SmartWorx options | |—— Screen & audio Tools & other utilities | |—— Transfer user objects | |—— Load firmware & Apps | |—— Load licence keys | |—— Field to office | |—— Format memory devices | |—— View contents of ASCII files About Leica Viva 1508 Menu tree for GPS RTK base Viva Series, Menu Tree |—— | | | | | | | | | |—— Go to Work! | |—— Start base over known point | |—— Start base over last setup | |—— Start base over any point | |—— Go to rover menu Instrument | |—— Base settings | | | |—— Satellite tracking | | | |—— Base raw data logging | |—— Base connections | | | |—— Connect to base sensor | | | |—— All other connections | |—— Base status info | |—— Battery & memory | 1509 |—— | |—— | |—— | |—— Viva Series, Menu Tree Satellite tracking Current position Raw data logging Connection status 1510 Appendix B Internal Memory Available memory > 500 MB. Data stored to the internal memory The following are examples of the data types that can be stored to the internal memory. • Applications • Codelists • Coordinate systems • Format files • Geoid and CSCS files • Jobs & Data • System languages • Working styles Viva Series, Internal Memory 1511 Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device Description On the memory device, files are stored in certain directories. The following diagram of the directory structure refers to the data storage devices and the internal memory. All files are fully compatible with Leica System 1200 and vice versa, with the exception of the following listed files which are not compatible between the systems: • Working styles and configuration sets • System.ram and VivaSystem.zip • Licence files • Language files, and • Application files. Directory structure |—— | |—— | |—— | |—— | | | | | | | CODE • Codelists, various files CONFIG • Working style files (*.xfg) CONVERT • Format files (*.frt) DATA | | | |—— GPS | |—— CSCS | • • ASCII, DXF, LandXML files for import/export to/from job (*.*) Report sheets created from applications • CSCS field files (*.csc) Viva Series, Directory Structure of the Memory Device 1512 | | | | |—— | | | |—— | |—— | | | |—— | | |—— |—— GEOID | |—— RINEX • Geoid field files (*.gem) • RINEX files DBX | |—— JOB • • • DTM jobs, various files Coordinate system file (Trfset.dat) Job files, various files. Jobs are stored in a folder per job. DOWNLOAD • Various files, downloaded by Field to office application (*.*) GPS • • • Antenna file (List.ant) GSM/Modem station list (*.fil) Server list (*.fil) GSI • • GSI files (*.gsi) ASCII files for export from job (*.*) SYSTEM • • • • • Application files (*.axx) Firmware files (*.fw) Language files (*.s*) Licence file (*.key) System files (VivaSystem.zip) Viva Series, Directory Structure of the Memory Device 1513 Appendix D Pin Assignments and Sockets D.1 GS10 Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the GS10 ports. In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the GS10 are explained. Ports at the instrument front panel d a b c e GS_093 a) b) c) d) e) Pin assignments for port P1 1 2 4 PIN_001 7 8 3 6 5 Port Port Port Port Port P3: Power out, data in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO PWR: Power in. 5 pin LEMO ANT: GNSS antenna in P1: CS field controller in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO P2: Power out, data in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1514 Pin assignments for port P2, and port P3 1 2 7 8 3 4 6 5 PIN_003 Pin assignments for port PWR 1 2 5 3 PIN_004 4 Pin Signal Name Function Direction 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In 8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general-purpose signal In or out Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 RTS RS232, ready to send Out 2 CTS RS232, clear to send In 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In 7 GPIO RS232, configurable function In or out 8 +12 V 12 V power supply out Out Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 PWR1 Power input, 11 V-28 V In 2 ID1 Identification pin In 3 GND Signal ground - 4 PWR2 Power input, 11 V-28 V In Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1515 Sockets Pin Signal Name Function Direction 5 ID2 Identification pin In Port P1 Port P2 and port P3: Port PWR: Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMA.1B.308.CLNP LEMO-1, 5 pin, LEMO HMG.1B.305.CLNP 1516 D.2 GS15 Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the GS15 ports. In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the GS15 are explained. Ports at the instrument underside a b c a) b) c) d) GS_094 Pin assignments for port P1 1 2 8 3 4 PIN_001 7 6 5 Port 1 (USB and serial) QN-connector Port 2 Port 3 Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In 8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general-purpose signal In or out Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1517 Pin assignments for port P2 1 2 7 8 3 4 6 5 PIN_003 Pin assignments for port P3 A1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PIN_005 A2 Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 RTS RS232, ready to send Out 2 CTS RS232, clear to send In 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In 7 GPIO RS232, configurable function In or out 8 +12 V 12 V power supply out Out Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 PWR 4 V power supply in In 2 Tx Transmit data In 3 Rx Receive data Out 4 GPO/DCD General-purpose out, carrier detect out Out 5 RTS Request to send In 6 CTS Clear to send Out 7 GPI/CFG General-purpose in, config mode in In 8 PWR 6 V power supply in In 9 GPIO General-purpose signal In or out 10 GND Signal and chassis ground - Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1518 Sockets Pin Signal Name Function Direction 11 USB+ USB data line (+) In or out 12 USB- USB data line (-) In or out 13 GND Signal and chassis ground - 14 ID Identification pin In or out 15 GPIO General-purpose signal In or out A1 NC Not used - A2 RF1 Antenna port, radio to antenna - Port 1: Port 2: Port 3: Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMA.1B.308.CLNP 15 pin RS232:RS232, 15 pin, DE15 1519 D.3 CS10/CS15 Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the CS10/CS15 ports. In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the CS10/CS15 are explained. Ports at the instrument bottom panel - DSUB9 connector a CS_022 b c a) DSUB9 port b) USB Mini port c) USB A Host port b a) Lemo port (USB and serial) b) USB A Host port Ports at the instrument bottom panel - Lemo connector CS_021 Pin assignments for RS232 serial port 2 1 6 PIN_002 3 7 4 8 a Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 NC Not connected - 2 RxD RS232, receive data In 3 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 5 9 Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1520 Pin assignments for 8 pin LEMO-1 1 2 7 8 3 4 6 5 PIN_001 Sockets Pin Signal Name Function Direction 4 NC Not connected - 5 GND Signal Ground - 6 NC Not connected - 7 RTS RS232, request to send Out 8 CTS RS232, clear to send In 9 NC Not connected - Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In 8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general purpose signal In or out 9 pin RS232: 8 pin LEMO-1: Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets RS232, 9 pin, DE9 LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN 1521 D.4 TPS1200+ Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the instrument port. In this chapter, the pin assignments and socket for the port 1 of the TPS1200+ instrument are explained. Ports at the TPS instrument a 5 1 4 3 2 a) Port 1 TS_002 Pin assignments for port P1 1 2 5 3 4 PIN_006 Sockets Pin Name Description Direction 1 PWR_IN Power input, + 12 V nominal (11 - 16 V). In 2 - Not used. - 3 GND Single ground. - 4 RX- RS232, receive In 5 TX- RS232, transmit Out Port 1: Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets For TPS1200+: LEMO-0, 5 pin, LEMO ENA.OB.305.CLN 1522 Appendix E Cables E.1 GPS Cables Power cables Name Description GEV97 • • • Allows GS10 (power port) to be externally powered LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° 1.8 m GEV71 • • • Allows powering of any device from car battery. Crocodile clips / LEMO-1, 5 pin , 30° (female) 4.0 m GEV172 • Allows GS10 (power port) to be externally powered from two external batteries LEMO-1, 5 pin / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° 2.8 m • • GEV219 • • • • GEV235 • • • Viva Series, Cables Allows CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) to be externally powered via the LEMO port Allows GS10/GS15 (port 1) to be externally powered LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° 1.8 m Allows CS10/CS15 (with either connector modules) to be externally powered via the power jack Wall adapter / 3 mm barrel connector 1.5 m 1523 Y cables Name Description GEV172 • • • GEV205 • • • GEV215 • • • Radio programming cables Allows connections between GS10/GS15 (port 1), an external radio in GFU1200 housing and the GEB71, with GS10/GS15 and a radio being externally powered LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° (female) / LEMO-1, 5 pin 1.8 m Allows connections between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module), the GS10/GS15 (port 1) and the GEB71, with the GS10/GS15 being powered from the GEB71. LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° 2.0 m Name Description GEV231 • • • GEV171 • • • Viva Series, Cables Allows GS10 (power port) to be externally powered from two external batteries LEMO-1, 5 pin / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° 2.8 m Allows an “SLR” radio device to be externally powered and programmed by a computer 15 pin (GS15 slot-in port) (female) / 9 pin, RS232 serial / LEMO-1, 5 pin 1.8 m Allows a radio within a GFU1200 device to be externally powered and programmed by a computer LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° (female) / 9 pin, RS232 serial / LEMO-1, 5 pin 1.8 m 1524 Radio cables Name Description GEV67 • • • GEV125 • • • GEV232 • • • GEV233 • • • Serial data transfer cables Allows a Satel modem (not inside housing) to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / 15 pin, RS232 serial 1.8 m Allows System 1200 GFU housings to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° (female) 2.8 m Allows System 1200 GFU housings to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° (female) 0.8 m Name Description GEV160 • • • Viva Series, Cables Allows System 500 GFU housings to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° 0.5 m Allows serial connection between GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) to a computer to stream NMEA or RTK data LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / 9 pin, RS232 serial 2.8 m 1525 Name Description GEV162 • • • • • GEV163 • • • USB to serial converter cables Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and GS10/GS15 port 1. This connection is useful when using thirdparty software such as Carlson SurvCE on the CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and a cable connection is required to the GS10/GS15. LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° 1.8 m Name Description GEV195 • • • Viva Series, Cables Allows serial connection between GS10/GS15 (port 1) to a computer to stream NMEA or RTK data Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and, for example, a hidden point device, ASCII input device, or computer. Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02 connector module) and GS10/GS15 (port 1). This connection is useful when using third-party software such as Carlson SurvCE on the CS10/CS15 and a cable connection is required to the GS10/GS15. LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / 9 pin, RS232 serial 2.8 m Allows GS10 (port 2 and 3) or GS15 (port 2) to be connected to a computer where a serial connection is required, but no 9 pin RS232 port physically exists on the computer. This cable allows a serial connection through the USB port of the computer to the CS10/CS15 or GS10/GS15 hardware. LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / USB type A 2.0 m 1526 Name Description GEV218 • • • USB data transfer cables Name Description GEV223 • • • GEV234 • • • • • Viva Series, Cables Allows CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and GS10/GS15 (port 1) to be connected to a computer where a serial connection is required, but no 9 pin RS232 port physically exists on the computer. This cable allows a serial connection through the USB port of the computer to the CS10/CS15 or GS10/GS15 hardware. LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / USB type A 2.0 m Allows USB data transfer between CS10/CS15 (both connector modules) and a computer. USB Type A / Mini USB Type B 1.8 m Allows a CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02 connector module) to connect to a GS10/GS15 (port 1). This cable is for when a cable connection is needed between CS10/CS15 and GS10/GS15 when the CS10/CS15 is using the CBC02 connector module. Allows a USB connection between the USB port of a computer and the GS10/GS15 (port 1) Allows a USB connection between the USB port of a computer and the CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / USB type A 1.65 m 1527 Name Description GEV237 • • • Antenna cables Viva Series, Cables Allows a CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) to connect to a GS10/GS15 (port 1). This cable is for when a cable connection is needed between CS10/CS15 and GS10/GS15 when the CS10/CS15 is using the CBC01 connector module. LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° 1.65 m Name Description GEV108 • • TNC connector / TNC connector 30 m GEV119 • • TNC connector / TNC connector 10 m GEV120 • • TNC connector / TNC connector 2.8 m GEV134 • • TNC connector / TNC connector 50 m GEV141 • • TNC connector / TNC connector 1.2 m GEV142 • • TNC connector / TNC connector (male) 1.6 m - • • TNC connector / TNC connector 70 m 1528 E.2 Power cables Radio / Y cables TPS Cables Name Description GEV52 • • • Name Description GEV186 • • • Serial data transfer cables Allows connections between TPS1200+, an external battery and TCPS27/TCPS28 LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-0, 8 pin,30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin 1.8 m Name Description GEV102 • • • • GEV162 • • • Viva Series, Cables Allows TPS1200+ to be externally powered LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin 1.8 m Allows serial connection between TPS1200+ and a computer Allows serial connection between TPS1200+ and CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02 connector module) LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / 9 pin, RS232 serial 2.0 m Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02 connector module) and a computer LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / 9 pin, RS232 serial 2.8 m 1529 Name Description GEV187 • • • Allows connections between TPS1200+, an external battery and a computer LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / 9 pin, RS232 serial / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° 2.0 m GEV217 • Allows serial connection between TPS1200+ and CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-0, 5 pin,30° 1.8 m • • USB to serial converter cables Name Description GEV189 • • • USB data transfer cables Name Description GEV234 • • • Viva Series, Cables Allows TPS1200+ to be connected to a computer where a serial connection is required, but no 9 pin RS232 port physically exists on the computer. This cable allows a serial connection through the USB port of the computer to the TPS1200+ or DNA hardware LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / USB type A 2.0 m Allows a USB connection between the USB port of a computer and the CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / USB type A 1.65 m 1530 Appendix F NMEA Message Formats F.1 Overview Description National Marine Electronics Association is a standard for interfacing marine electronic devices. This chapter describes all NMEA-0183 messages which can be output by the instrument. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument\All other connections\NMEA 1 or NMEA 2. Press Mesgs. ) A Talker ID appears at the beginning of the header of each NMEA message. The Talker ID can be user defined or standard (based on the NMEA 3.0). The standard is normally GP for GPS but can be changed in NMEA Output 1 or NMEA Output 2. Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1531 F.2 Symbols Used for Describing the NMEA Formats Description NMEA messages consist of various fields. The fields are: • • • • • Header Special format fields Numeric value fields Information fields Null fields Certain symbols are used as identifier for the field types. These symbols are described in this section. Header Symbol Field Description Example $ - Start of sentence $ --ccc Address • -- = alphanumeric characters identifying GPGGA the talker Options: GP = GPS only GL = GLONASS only GN = Global Navigation Satellite System • Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats ccc = alphanumeric characters identifying the data type and string format of the successive fields. Usually the name of the message. 1532 Special format fields Symbol Field Description Example A Status • A = Yes, Data Valid, Warning Flag Clear V • V = No, Data Invalid, Warning Flag Set • Degreesminutes.decimal • Two fixed digits of degrees, two fixed digits of minutes and a variable number of digits for decimal fraction of minutes. • Leading zeros are always included for degrees and minutes to maintain fixed length. • Degreesminutes.decimal • Three fixed digits of degrees, two fixed digits of minutes and a variable number of digits for decimal fraction of minutes. • Leading zeros are always included for degrees and minutes to maintain fixed length. llll.ll yyyyy.yy Latitude Longitude 4724.538950 00937.04678 5 eeeeee.eee Grid Easting At the most six fixed digits for metres and 195233.507 three fixed digits for decimal fractions of metres. nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing At the most six fixed digits for metres and 127223.793 three fixed digits for decimal fractions of metres. Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1533 Symbol Field Description Example hhmmss.ss Time • hoursminutesseconds.decimal 115744.00 • Two fixed digits of hours, two fixed digits of minutes, two fixed digits of seconds and a variable number of digits for decimal fraction of seconds. • Leading zeros are always included for hours, minutes and seconds to maintain fixed length. • Monthdayyear - two fixed digits of 093003 month, two fixed digits of day, two fixed digits of year. • Leading zeros always included for month, day and year to maintain fixed length. • Some fields are specified to contain M predefined constants, most often alpha characters. • Such a field is indicated by the presence of one or more valid characters. Excluded from the list of valid characters are the following that are used to indicate other field types: A, a, c, x, hh, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, yyyyy.yy. mmddyy No specific symbol Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats Date Defined field 1534 Numeric value fields Information fields Null fields ) ) Symbol Field Description Example x.x Variable numbers • Integer or floating numeric field 73.10 = 73.1 = 073.1 = 73 • Optional leading and trailing zeros. Decimal point and associated decimalfraction are optional if full resolution is not required. hh_ Fixed HEX field Fixed length HEX numbers 3F Symbol Field Description Example c--c Variable text Variable length valid character field A aa_ Fixed alpha field Fixed length field of upper case or lower case alpha characters N xx_ Fixed number field Fixed length field of numeric characters 1 Symbol Field Description Example No symbol Information unavailable for output Null fields do not contain any information. ,, Fields are always separated by a comma. Before the Checksum field there is never a comma. When information for a field is not available, the position in the data string is empty. Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1535 F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data Syntax $--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GGA Header including Talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x Position quality indicator 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Valid fix for GNSSPrecise Positioning Service mode, for example WAAS 4 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26. x.x HDOP x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1536 Examples Field Description M Units of altitude as fixed text M x.x Geoidal separation in metres. The Geoidal separation is the difference between the WGS 1984 earth ellipsoid surface and mean sea level. M Units of geoidal separation as fixed text M x.x Age of differential GNSS data, empty when DGPS not used xxxx Differential base station ID, 0000 to 1023 *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGGA,113805.50,4724.5248541,N,00937.1063044,E,4,13,0.7,1171.281,M,-703.398, M,0.26,0000*42 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1537 F.4 GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP Syntax $--GGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,EHTx.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GGK Header including Talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x Position quality indicator 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26. x.x GDOP EHT Ellipsoidal height x.x Altitude of position marker as local ellipsoidal height. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1538 Examples Field Description *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNGGK,113616.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,12,1.7,EHT1171.742,M *6D User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGGK,113806.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,13,1.4,EHT1171.746,M *66 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1539 F.5 GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP, Trimble Proprietary Syntax $PTNL,GGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,EHTx.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $PTNL $ = Start of sentence delimiter, talker ID fixed with PTNL GGK GGK sentence formatter hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x Position quality indicator 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Not existing 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed 4 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26. x.x PDOP EHT Ellipsoidal height Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1540 Examples Field Description x.x Altitude of position marker as local ellipsoidal height. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $PTNL,GGK,113616.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,12,1.5,EHT1171.742 ,M*4C User-defined Talker ID = GN $PTNL,GGK,113806.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,13,1.2,EHT1171.746 ,M*43 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1541 F.6 GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ Syntax $--GGQ,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GGQ Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x Position quality indicator 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26. x.x Coordinate quality in metres x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1542 Examples Field Description M Units of altitude as fixed text M *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNGGQ,113615.50,041006,4724.5248556,N,00937.1063059,E,3,12,0.009,1171.281,M *22 $GPGGQ,113615.50,041006,,,,08,,*67 $GLGGQ,113615.50,041006,,,,04,,*77 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGGQ,113805.50,041006,4724.5248541,N,00937.1063044,E,3,13,0.010,1171.281,M *2E Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1543 F.7 GLL - Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude Syntax $--GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GLL Header including talker ID llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West hhmmss.ss UTC time of position A Status A = Data valid V = Data not valid a Mode indicator A = Autonomous mode D = Differential mode N = Data not valid *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1544 ) Examples The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field is set to A for the Mode indicators A and D. The Status field is set to V for the Mode indicator N. Standard Talker ID $GNGLL,4724.5248556,N,00937.1063059,E,113615.50,A,D*7B User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGLL,4724.5248541,N,00937.1063044,E,113805.50,A,D*7E Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1545 F.8 GNS - GNSS Fix Data Syntax $--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,xxxx*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GNS Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West c--c Mode indicator N = Satellite system not used in position fix or fix not valid A = Autonomous; navigation fix, no real-time fix D = Differential; real-time position, ambiguities not fixed R = Real-time kinematic; ambiguities fixed xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 99 x.x HDOP x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. x.x Geoidal separation in metres Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1546 Examples Field Description x.x Age of differential data xxxx Differential base station ID, 0000 to 1023 *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNGNS,113616.00,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,RR,12,0.9,1171.279,703.398,0.76,0000*6C $GPGNS,113616.00,,,,,,08,,,,,*69 $GLGNS,113616.00,,,,,,04,,,,,*79 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGNS,113806.00,4724.5248547,N,00937.1063032,E,R,13,0.7,1171.283,703.398,0.76,0000*39 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1547 F.9 GSA - GNSS DOP and Active Satellites Syntax $--GSA,a,x,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GSA Header including talker ID a Mode M = Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D mode A = Automatic, allowed to change automatically between 2D and 3D x Mode 1 = Fix not available 2 = 2D 3 = 3D xx Numbers of the satellites used in the solution. This field is repeated 12 times. 1 to 32 = PRN numbers of GPS satellites 33 to 64 = Numbers of WAAS and WAAS like satellites 65 to 96 = Slot numbers of GLONASS satellites x.x PDOP x.x HDOP x.x VDOP *hh Checksum Carriage Return Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1548 Examples Field Description Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNGSA,A,3,01,11,14,17,19,20,24,28,,,,,1.5,0.9,1.2*26 $GNGSA,A,3,65,66,67,81,,,,,,,,,1.5,0.9,1.2*29 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGSA,A,3,01,11,14,17,19,20,23,24,28,,,,65,66,67,81,,,,,,,,,1.2,0.7,1.0*27 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1549 F.10 GSV - GNSS Satellites in View Syntax $--GSV,x,x,xx,xx,xx,xxx,xx,.....*hh Description of fields ) ) Field Description $--GSV Header including talker ID x Total number of messages, 1 to 4 x Message number, 1 to 4 xx Number of theoretically visible satellites according to the current almanac. xx PRN (GPS) / Slot (GLONASS) number of satellite xx Elevation in degrees, 90 maximum, empty when not tracking xxx Azimuth in degrees true north, 000 to 359, empty when not tracking xx Signal to Noise Ration C/No in dB, 00 to 99 of L1 signal, null field when not tracking. ... Repeat set PRN / Slot number, elevation, azimuth and SNR up to four times *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Satellite information can require the transmission of multiple messages, specified by the total number of messages and the message number. The fields for the PRN / Slot number, Elevation, Azimuth and SNR form one set. A variable number of these sets are allowed up to a maximum of four sets per message. Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1550 Examples Standard Talker ID $GPGSV,3,1,11,01,55,102,51,11,85,270,50,14,31,049,47,17,21,316,46*7A $GPGSV,3,2,11,19,31,172,48,20,51,249,50,22,00,061,,23,11,190,42*7E $GPGSV,3,3,11,24,11,292,43,25,08,114,,28,14,275,44,,,,*45 $GLGSV,2,1,06,65,16,055,42,66,64,025,48,67,46,262,42,68,01,245,*64 $GLGSV,2,2,06,81,52,197,47,83,07,335,,,,,,,,,*68 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGSV,3,1,10,01,55,100,51,11,86,263,50,14,31,049,47,17,22,316,46*65 $GNGSV,3,2,10,19,30,172,48,20,52,249,51,23,12,190,42,24,12,292,42*6C $GNGSV,3,3,10,25,09,114,,28,14,274,44,,,,,,,,*62 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1551 F.11 LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP Syntax $--LLK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $--LLK Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date eeeeee.eee Grid Easting in metres M Units of grid Easting as fixed text M nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing in metres M Units of grid Northing as fixed text M x Position quality 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed xx Number of satellites used in computation x.x GDOP x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M *hh Checksum Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1552 Examples Field Description Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNLLK,113616.00,041006,764413.024,M,252946.774,M,3,12,1.7,1171.279,M*0F $GPLLK,113616.00,041006,,,,,,08,,,*57 $GLLLK,113616.00,041006,,,,,,04,,,*47 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNLLK,113806.00,041006,764413.021,M,252946.772,M,3,13,1.4,1171.283,M*04 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1553 F.12 LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality Syntax $--LLQ,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $--LLQ Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date eeeeee.eee Grid Easting in metres M Units of grid Easting as fixed text M nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing in metres M Units of grid Northing as fixed text M x Position quality 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed xx Number of satellites used in computation x.x Coordinate quality in metres x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M *hh Checksum Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1554 Examples Field Description Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNLLQ,113616.00,041006,764413.024,M,252946.774,M,3,12,0.010,1171.279,M*12 $GPLLQ,113616.00,041006,,,,,,08,,,*4D $GLLLQ,113616.00,041006,,,,,,04,,,*5D User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNLLQ,113806.00,041006,764413.021,M,252946.772,M,3,13,0.010,1171.283,M*1A Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1555 F.13 RMC - Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data Syntax $--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh Description of fields Field Description $--RMC Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position fix A Status A = Data valid V = Navigation instrument warning llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x.x Speed over ground in knots x.x Course over ground in degrees xxxxxx Date: ddmmyy x.x Magnetic variation in degrees a East or West a*hh Mode Indicator A = Autonomous mode D = Differential mode Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1556 Field Description N = Data not valid Examples Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNRMC,113616.00,A,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,0.01,11.43,100406,11.43,E,D* 1C User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNRMC,113806.00,A,4724.5248547,N,00937.1063032,E,0.00,287.73,100406,287.73,E, D*10 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1557 F.14 VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed Syntax $--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh Description of fields Field Description $--VTG Header including talker ID x.x Course over ground in degrees true north, 0.0 to 359.9 T Fixed text T for true north x.x Course over ground in degrees magnetic North, 0.0 to 359.9 M Fixed text M for magnetic North x.x Speed over ground in knots N Fixed text N for knots x.x Speed over ground in km/h K Fixed text K for km/h a Mode Indicator A = Autonomous mode D = Differential mode N = Data not valid *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1558 ) Examples The Magnetic declination is set in the instrument in Regional Settings, Angle page. Standard Talker ID $GNVTG,11.4285,T,11.4285,M,0.007,N,0.013,K,D*3D User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNVTG,287.7273,T,287.7273,M,0.002,N,0.004,K,D*3E Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1559 F.15 ZDA - Time and Date Syntax $--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh Description of fields ) Examples Field Description $--ZDA Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time xx UTC day, 01 to 31 xx UTC month, 01 to 12 xxxx UTC year xx Local zone description in hours, 00 to ±13 xx Local zone description in minutes, 00 to +59 *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed This message is given high priority and is output as soon as it is created. Latency is therefore reduced to a minimum. Standard Talker ID $GPZDA,091039.00,01,10,2003,-02,00*4B User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNZDA,113806.00,10,04,2006,02,00*76 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1560 Appendix G AT Commands AT commands Hayes Microcomputer Products is a leading manufacturer of modems that has developed a language called the AT command set for controlling digital cellular phones and modems. This AT command set has become the de facto standard. List of selected AT commands The characters in this table are the most commonly used AT commands when configuring a digital cellular phone or modem. Refer to the manual of the used digital cellular phone or modem for information on which AT commands to use. Viva Series, AT Commands AT command Description ~ Inserts a delay of 1/4 second. ^# Inserts the phone number as defined in digital cellular phone connection. ^^ Inserts character ^. ^C Bearer Service: Connection Element. ^M Inserts a carriage return and send command. ^S Bearer Service: Speed including Protocol and NetDataRate. AT Starts a command line to be sent to phone. AT&F[ ] Sets the configuration parameters to default values specified by manufacturer of phone. : • 0 = Factory default configuration profile ATD Starts a call to the phone number given as parameter. If “;” is present, a voice call to the given number is performed. 1561 AT command Description AT+CBST= [ [, [, ]]] Sets the bearer service with data rate , and the connection element . Refer to the manual of the used digital cellular phone or modem for a list of supported name, speed and connection element values. AT+CREG= [ ] Enables/disables network registration reports depending on the parameter . AT+CREG? Reports the and registration status of phone. : • 0 = Disable network registration unsolicited result code • 1 = Enable network registration unsolicited result code : • 0 = Not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to register to • 1 = Registered, home network • 2 = Not registered, but ME is currently searching a new operator to register to • 3 = Registration denied • 4 = Unknown • 5 = Registered, roaming Viva Series, AT Commands 1562 AT command Description AT+COPS= [ [, [, >[, < AcT>]]]] Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM\UMTS network operator. : • 0 = Automatic choice • 1 = Manual choice : • 0 = Alphanumeric long form • 1 = Short format alphanumeric • 2 = Numeric, 5 digits : • Network operator in format defined by : Access technology selected: • 0 = GSM • 2 = UTRAN AT+COPS? Returns the currently registered network operator. AT+COPS=? Returns a list of all available network operators in form of: , long alphanumeric , short alphanumeric , numeric , : : Operator availability: • 0 = Unknown • 1 = Available • 2 = Current • 3 = Forbidden Viva Series, AT Commands 1563 AT command Description : Access technology selected: • 0 = GSM • 1 = GSM Compact • 2 = UTRAN AT+CPIN= Sends the PIN to the phone. [, ] AT+CPIN? Returns the status of the PIN request: • READY = Phone can be used • SIM PIN = PIN is not set, phone not ready for use. • SIM PUK = PUK is required to use the device • ERROR = No SIM card inserted AT+CSQ Reports received signal quality indicators in form of: AT+CSQ=? Returns the supported ranges. AT+FLO= Selects the flow control behaviour of the serial port in both directions. • 0 = Flow control None • 1 = Flow control Software (XON-XOFF) • 2 = Flow control Hardware (CTS-RTS) Viva Series, AT Commands 1564 Appendix H Glossary H.1 A A (parameter) For horizontal alignments: A2 = R * L R = Radius of the connecting circular curve. L = Length of the spiral. Arc Refer to "Curve". Attribute Description The use of attributes allows additional information to be stored with the code. Up to twenty attributes can be related to one code. Attributes are not compulsory. Viva Series, Glossary 1565 Structure of attributes Viva Series, Glossary 1566 Example Attribute types Code Attributes Attribute value type Attribute value Example for the region attribute value region Birch Height Real Range 0.5-3.0 Condition Text Selectable list Good, Dead, Damaged Remark Text None - The attribute type defines the input requirements for the attribute. Normal: Mandatory: Fixed: Attribute value regions The attribute value region defines if the attribute values must be selected from a predefined list. None: Range: Selectable list: Viva Series, Glossary An input for the attribute is optional. The attribute value can be typed in the field. New attributes with this attribute type can be created in LGO or on the instrument. An input for the attribute is compulsory. The attribute value must be typed in the field. New attributes with this attribute type can be created in LGO. The attribute value is a predefined default which is displayed but cannot be changed in the field. This attribute value is automatically attached to the code. New attributes with this attribute type can be created in LGO. An input for the attribute must be typed in. New attributes with this attribute value region can be created in LGO or on the instrument. An input for the attribute must fall within a predefined range. New attributes with this attribute value region can be created in LGO. An input for the attribute is selected from a predefined list. New attributes with this attribute value region can be created in LGO. 1567 Attribute value types The attribute value type defines which values are accepted as input. Text: Real: Integer: Averaging mode Viva Series, Glossary Any input for the attribute is interpreted as text. New attributes with this attribute value type can be created in LGO or on the instrument. An input for the attribute must be a real number, for example 1.23. New attributes with this attribute value type can be created in LGO. An input for the attribute must be an integer number, for example 5. New attributes with this attribute value type can be created in LGO. Averaging Mode The averaging mode defines the checks which are performed when more than one set of measured coordinates are recorded for the same point. The selected averaging mode also affects the behaviour of the instrument when editing a point and calculating averages. 1568 H.2 C Chainage equation Chainage equations define adjustments for the chainage values in the horizontal alignment. These adjustments can be necessary when a horizontal alignment is modified, by inserting or removing an element, and the chainage values in the horizontal alignment are not recomputed. This situation can occur when editing manually or editing with a program that does not automatically recompute. Chainage equations define leaving a gap or allowing an overlap at certain chainages. The elements involved in the equations are: • chainage back • chainage ahead. Class The class describes the type of coordinate triplet. Description of classes The following table shows the classes in descending hierarchical order. Class Characteristic Description Ctrl Type Control points. Automatically assigned to entered points or manually assigned to calculated points from COGO. Instrument source GPS, TPS or LGO Number of triplets One Type Adjusted points using the adjustment program. Instrument source LGO Number of triplets One Type • Adj Ref Viva Series, Glossary Reference point received by a real-time rover 1569 Class Characteristic Description • Avge Meas Nav Est Viva Series, Glossary Station point set by Setup application. Instrument source GPS, TPS or LGO Number of triplets One Type Averaged point calculated when more than one coordinate triplet of class MEAS exist for the same point ID unless Averaging Mode: Off. Instrument source GPS or TPS Number of triplets One Type • Measured points differentially corrected using real-time phase, real-time code or postprocessing. • Measured points with angles and distances. • Calculated from some applications. Instrument source GPS, TPS or LGO Number of triplets Multiple. With more than one measured coordinate triplet, the average for the position and the height can be computed. Type Navigated points using uncorrected code solutions of a single epoch or SPP positions. Instrument source GPS Number of triplets Multiple Type Estimated points from LGO. 1570 Class None Code Viva Series, Glossary Characteristic Description Instrument source LGO. Possible number of triplets One Type Measured points with angles. Instrument source TPS Possible number of triplets Unlimited Description A code is a description which can be stored with an object or alone. 1571 Structure of codes Viva Series, Glossary 1572 Code group A code group allows codes belonging to the same theme to be grouped. Individual groups can be activated or deactivated. The codes belonging to a deactivated code group cannot be selected from the selectable list for code selection. Code types The code type defines how and for which objects a code can be used. It is possible to create a code of the same name but of different code types both on the instrument and in LGO. Example: The code Oak can exist with code type point code and with code type line code. Point code: Line code: Area code: Free code: Quick code: Coordinate system elements Viva Series, Glossary To record a code directly with a point. Thematical point coding. To record a code directly with a line. Thematical line coding. To record a code directly with an area. Thematical area coding. To record a code based on time in between objects. To start a point occupation and store the code by typing in one, two or three predefined digits. The five elements which define a coordinate system are: • a transformation • a projection • an ellipsoid • a geoid model • a Country Specific Coordinate System model 1573 Z Z d Y X Y X a e b f c g h GS_042 i a) WGS 1984 cartesian: X, Y, Z b) WGS 1984 ellipsoid c) WGS 1984 geodetic: Latitude, longitude, ellipsoidal height d) 7 parameter transformation: dX, dY, dZ, rx, ry, rz, scale e) Local cartesian: X, Y, Z f) Local ellipsoid g) Local geodetic: Latitude, longitude, ellipsoidal height h) Local projection i) Local grid: Easting, Northing, orthometric height All these elements can be specified when creating a coordinate system. Viva Series, Glossary 1574 Coordinate triplet A measured point consists of three coordinate components - two horizontal components and one vertical component. The generic term for the three coordinate components is coordinate triplet. Depending on the class, a point ID can contain more than one coordinate triplet of the same and/or of different classes. CSCS field file CSCS field files can be used in the field to convert coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to local grid without the need of transformation parameters. Creation: Extension: CSCS model In LGO with export onto a data storage device or the internal memory of the instrument. *.csc Description Country Specific Coordinate System models • are tables of correction values to convert coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to local grid without the need of transformation parameters. • take the distortions of the mapping system into account. • are an addition to an already defined coordinate system. Types of CSCS models The correction values of a CSCS model can be applied at different stages in the coordinate conversion process. Depending on this stage, a CSCS model works differently. Three types of CSCS models are supported. Their conversion process is as explained in the following table. Any suitable geoid model can be combined with a geodetic CSCS model. Viva Series, Glossary Type Description Grid 1 Determination of preliminary grid coordinates by applying the specified transformation, ellipsoid and map projection. 1575 Type Description 2 Determination of the final local grid coordinates by applying a shift in Easting and Northing interpolated in the grid file of the CSCS model. Cartesian 1 Performing the specified transformation. 2 Determination of local cartesian coordinates by applying a 3D shift interpolated in the grid file of the CSCS model. 3 Determination of the final local grid coordinates by applying the specified local ellipsoid and map projection. Geodetic 1 Determination of local geodetic coordinates by applying a correction in latitude and longitude interpolated from the file of the CSCS model. 2 Determination of the final local grid coordinates by applying the local map projection. ) Coordinate quality for GPS Viva Series, Glossary Using a geodetic CSCS model excludes the use of a transformation in a coordinate system. Description The Coordinate Quality is • computed on the rover for code solutions and phase fixed solutions. • an indicator for the quality of the observations. • an indicator for the current satellite constellation. • an indicator for different environmental conditions. • derived such that there is at least a two third probability that the computed position deviates from the true position by less than the CQ value. • different from the standard deviation. 1576 CQ versus standard deviation The standard deviation as CQ would often be too optimistic, therefore the computation of the CQ is not based on the basic standard deviation algorithms. There is a 39.3% statistical probability in 2D, that the computed position deviates from the true position, by less than the standard deviation. This probability is not enough for a reliable quality indicator. This unreliability is particularly true for low redundancy situations such as a constellation of four satellites. In such a case, the RMS converges to zero and the standard deviation would show an unrealistically small value. Viva Series, Glossary 1577 Computation Range For a phase fixed solution: Viva Series, Glossary Centimetre level 1578 For a code solution: From 0.4 m to 5 m. Position CQ versus height CQ All GPS computed positions are almost twice as accurate in plan than in height. For the position determination, satellites can appear in all four quadrants. For the height determination, satellites can appear in two quadrants. Fewer quadrants weakens the height position compared to the plan position. N E N H GS12_041 Position determination with satellites appearing in all four quadrants. Coordinate quality for TPS Viva Series, Glossary Height determination with satellites appearing in two quadrants. Description The Coordinate Quality is an indicator for the estimated quality of the point coordinates. The coordinate quality of the measurements is used in point averaging. 1579 Column Description Est 3D CQ Estimated 3D coordinate quality of computed position. Est 2D CQ Estimated plan coordinate quality of computed position. Est 1D CQ Estimated height coordinate quality of computed position. Vertical angles are always assuming zenith angles and not elevation angles. Standard deviations of circle readings relate to one face measurements. ρ= 200 π Standard deviation of circle reading σ Hz, V rad σHz, V gon = ρ σHz,V Standard deviation of circle reading if σHz = σV. σHz: Standard deviation of horizontal circle reading. σV: Standard deviation of vertical circle reading. Standard deviation of distance measurement σD = cD + ppm * D σD cD ppm D Viva Series, Glossary Standard deviation of distance measurement. Constant part of EDM accuracy. ppm part of EDM accuracy. Slope Distance. 1580 1D estimated coordinate quality 2 2 2 2 2 1D CQ = σ D * cos V + σ Hz, V * D * sin V 1D CQ Estimated coordinate quality of the height. V Zenith angle. 2D estimated coordinate quality 2D CQ = σ2D * sin2 V + σ2Hz, V * D2 2D CQ Estimated horizontal coordinate quality. 3D estimated coordinate quality 3D CQ = σ2D + σ2Hz, V * D2 * (1 + sin2 V) 3D CQ Estimated spatial coordinate quality. Working Example 1 Instrument: Angular accuracy: EDM accuracy: Slope distance: Hz: V: 1D CQ = 0.00207 m 2D CQ = 0.00303 m 3D CQ = 0.00367 m Viva Series, Glossary TXA1200 2" = 6.1728*10-4 gon => σHz,V = 2"* 2 mm + 2 ppm for an IR measurement 150 m 210 gon 83 gon 2.1 mm 3.0 mm 3.7 mm 1581 Working Example 2 Instrument: Angular accuracy: EDM accuracy: Slope distance: Hz: V: TXA1200 2" = 6.1728*10-4 gon => σHz,V = 2"* 2 mm + 2 ppm for an IR measurement 7000 m 210 gon 83 gon 1D CQ = 0.0927 m 2D CQ = 0.0972 m 3D CQ = 0.1343 m 1D CQ = 0.00054 m 2D CQ = 0.00120 m 3D CQ = 0.00132 m 0.5 mm 1.2 mm 1.3 mm Cross section assignments One cross section is valid until a new one is defined at a chainage ahead. Cross section definition can be at any chainage. The chainages need not necessarily correspond to chainages where a design element starts or ends. Cross section template A Cross section gives a profile view. It requires vertical alignment or actual elevation on each chainage. The elements involved are straight elements. The points are called vertices. You can optionally define slopes at the vertices most left and most right. Points are defined by: • DH and DV • DH and slope in percentage • DH and slope in ratio Viva Series, Glossary 1582 Curve Viva Series, Glossary For horizontal alignments: Circular curve with constant radius. For vertical alignments: Circular vertical curve with constant radius. 1583 H.3 D Data Data is a generic term for points, lines and areas. Device The hardware which is connected to the chosen port. Devices are used to transmit and receive real-time data and to communicate with the instrument, for example to download raw observations from a remote location. Devices are used to transmit and receive measurement data. Viva Series, Glossary 1584 H.4 G Geoid model Description GPS operates on the WGS 1984 ellipsoid and all heights obtained by measuring baselines are ellipsoidal heights. Existing heights are usually orthometric heights, also called height above the geoid, height above mean sea level or levelled height. The mean sea level corresponds to a surface known as the geoid. The relation between ellipsoidal height and orthometric height is Orthometric Height = Ellipsoidal Height - Geoid Separation N P0 d1 d2 a b GS_043 a b WGS 1984 ellipsoid Geoid P0 d1 d2 Measured point Ellipsoidal height Geoid separation N, is negative when the geoid is below the ellipsoid N value and geoid model The geoid separation (N value) is the distance between the geoid and the reference ellipsoid. It can refer to the WGS 1984 or to the local ellipsoid. It is not a constant except over Viva Series, Glossary 1585 maybe small flat areas such as 5 km x 5 km. Therefore it is necessary to model the N value to obtain accurate orthometric heights. The modelled N values form a geoid model for an area. With a geoid model attached to a coordinate system, N values for the measured points can be determined. Ellipsoidal heights can be converted to orthometric heights and back. Geoid models are an approximation of the N value. In terms of accuracy, they can vary considerably and global models in particular should be used with caution. If the accuracy of the geoid model is not known, it can be safer to use local control points with orthometric heights and apply a transformation to approximate the local geoid. Geoid field file The geoid separations in a geoid field file can be used in the field to change between ellipsoidal and orthometric heights. Creation: Extension: In LGO with export onto a data storage device or the internal memory of the instrument. *.gem GPS mode Current active instrument is GPS. GPS points The coordinates of GPS points are always stored in the WGS 1984 coordinates system. WGS 1984 is a three-dimensional Cartesian coordinate system with the origin at the centre of the Earth. WGS 1984 coordinates are given as X,Y,Z Cartesian coordinates, or latitude, longitude and height (above the WGS 1984 ellipsoid). GPS points are stored as class Meas or class Nav: Viva Series, Glossary 1586 • • GPS surveying techniques Viva Series, Glossary Class Meas: If there are 5 or more satellites, and the distance to the reference is not too great for the prevailing ionospheric conditions, SmartStation will compute a GPS real-time position. The CQ indicator for this type of point is about 0.01 m to 0.05 m. Class Nav: If the reference stops working, or if the communication link between the reference and SmartStation fails, SmartStation will only compute a navigation position. The CQ indicator for this type of point is about 3 m to 20 m. Depending on the surveying task and the instruments being used, certain GPS surveying techniques are possible. The three existing types of GPS surveying techniques are: GPS surveying Characteristic technique Description Static • Base set up over a point with accurately known coordinates. • Rover set up over a point with known or unknown coordinates. • Data recorded at both instruments simultaneously at the same data rate, typically 15 s, 30 s or 60 s. • Post-processing is compulsory. Way of working Use For long baselines, geodetic networks, tectonic plate studies. Accuracy High over long and very long baselines. Working speed Slow 1587 Viva Series, Glossary GPS surveying Characteristic technique Description Post-processed kinematic • Base set up as static over a point with accurately known coordinates. • Rover moves from one point to another. The instrument remains turned on while moving. • Static and moving raw observations are collected. • Post-processing is compulsory. Way of working Use For detail surveys and measuring many points in quick succession. Accuracy High for baselines up to 30 km. Working speed Efficient for surveying many points that are close together. 1588 GPS surveying Characteristic technique Description Real-time, Way of working base and rover • Base set up as static over a point with accurately known coordinates in WGS 1984. • Rover equipment is set up on a pole and moves from one unknown point to another. • A data link, for example a radio or digital cellular phone, transmits satellite data from the base to the rover. • Data coming from the base and GNSS signals received on the rover are processed together on the rover as the survey is carried out in real-time. • Ambiguities are solved, coordinates of the surveyed points are calculated and displayed. • applications as on conventional instruments like stakeout or COGO can be performed. • Post-processing is optional. Use For surveying detail with many points in one area. Accuracy High for baselines up to 30 km. Working speed Efficient as the results are generated in the field. Refer to standard surveying literature for more details on GNSS surveying techniques. Viva Series, Glossary 1589 H.5 H Horizontal Alignment The horizontal alignment defines the road axis of a project. Horizontal alignments are comprised of the elements: • straights (tangents) • curves (arcs) • spirals (clothoid or cubic parabola) • bloss curves (element type used for railway track design) Each element involved is defined by individual horizontal design elements such as chainage, Easting, Northing, radius and parameter A. Viva Series, Glossary 1590 H.6 I Initialisation For cm positioning with GNSS, the ambiguities must be fixed. The process of fixing ambiguities is called initialisation. In order to carry out an initialisation, the active working style must be a real-time rover configuration allowing for phase fixed solutions. A minimum of five satellites on L1 and L2 is required. The three existing types of initialisation methods are: InitialisaCharacteristic tion method Description Moving Principle The rover instrument is moved from the beginning of the GNSS operation on, recording data. The trajectory of the moving rover is recorded. Ambiguities are fixed while moving. A new initialisation starts automatically when, after losing the minimum number of required satellites, enough satellites are tracked again. Antenna setup On a pole. Beginning of initialisa- Immediately. tion Static Use For fast initialisations over distances up to 30 km. Principle The rover instrument is kept stationary at the beginning of the GNSS operation. Antenna setup On a pole with a quickstand. Beginning of initialisa- Immediately. tion Viva Series, Glossary 1591 InitialisaCharacteristic tion method Use Known point Principle Antenna setup Description If it is proving difficult to initialise while moving and no known point is available. The rover instrument is kept stationary over a point with known coordinates at the beginning of the GNSS operation. On a pole with a quickstand. Beginning of initialisa- After selecting the known point. tion Use If it is proving difficult to initialise while moving and to speed up an initialisation while static. Instrument source The instrument source describes where the coordinate triplet was measured or entered. The options are GPS, TPS, LGO or Level. Interface The procedures, codes and protocols that enable two entities to interact for an exchange of data. Each interface is given a meaningful display name which enables easy distinction between interfaces. Viva Series, Glossary 1592 H.7 N Ntrip Networked Transport of RTCM via Internet Protocol • is a protocol streaming real-time corrections over the Internet. • is a generic protocol based on the Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP/1.1. • is used to send differential correction data or other kinds of streaming data to stationary or mobile users over the Internet. This process allows simultaneous computer, laptop, PDA, or instrument connections to a broadcasting host. • supports wireless Internet access through mobile IP networks like digital cellular phones or modems. The Ntrip Server could be the GPS instrument itself. This setup means the GPS instrument is both the Ntrip Source generating the real-time data and also the NTRIP Server transferring this data to the Ntrip Caster. NTRiPClient NTRiPServer er NTRiPCast rver InternetSe GS_044 Ntrip Caster Viva Series, Glossary Ntrip and its role in the Internet The Ntrip Caster 1593 • • • is an Internet server handling various data streams to and from the Ntrip Servers and Ntrip Clients. checks the requests from Ntrip Clients and Ntrip Servers to see if they are registered to receive or provide real-time corrections. decides whether there is streaming data to be sent or to be received. Ntrip Client The Ntrip Client receives data streams. This setup could be, for example a real-time rover receiving real-time corrections. In order to receive real-time corrections, the Ntrip Client must first send • a user ID • a password • an identification name, the so-called Mountpoint, from which real-time corrections are to be received to the Ntrip Caster. Ntrip Server The Ntrip Server transfers data streams. In order to send real-time corrections, the Ntrip Server must first send • a password • an identification name, the so-called Mountpoint, where the real-time corrections come from to the Ntrip Caster. Before sending real-time corrections to the Ntrip Caster for the first time, a registration form must be completed. This form is available from the Ntrip Caster administration centre. Refer to the Internet. Ntrip Source The Ntrip Source generates data streams. This setup could be base sending out real-time corrections. Ntrip system components Ntrip consists of three system components: Viva Series, Glossary 1594 • Viva Series, Glossary Ntrip Clients • Ntrip Servers • Ntrip Caster 1595 H.8 O Objects Objects • are points, lines and areas. • have a unique identification ID. This ID is the point ID, the line ID and the area ID. • can have a code attached. This code is either a point code, a line code or an area code depending on the type of object. Viva Series, Glossary 1596 H.9 P Parabola Parabolic vertical curve with constant rate of grade change. Parameter A Refer to "A (parameter)". Port A connection through which a separate device can communicate with the instrument. Viva Series, Glossary 1597 H.10 S Source The source describes the application or functionality that generated a coordinate triplet and the method with which it was created. Viva Series, Glossary Source Originated from application/functionality Instrument source ASCII file Convert Data, Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job GPS or TPS Arc base pt COGO, Arc Calculation - Base Point GPS or TPS Arc centre pt COGO, Arc Calculation - Centre Point GPS or TPS Arc offset pt COGO, Arc Calculation - Offset Point GPS or TPS Arc segment pt COGO, Arc Calculation - Segmentation GPS or TPS Backward brg-dst Hidden point measurements, Backward Bearing and Distance GPS Bearing-Distance Hidden point measurements, Bearing and Distance GPS Chainage % offset Hidden point measurements, Chainage and Offset GPS COGO Area Div COGO Area Division GPS or TPS COGO Shift/Rtn COGO, Shift, Rotate & Scale (Manual) COGO, Shift, Rotate & Scale (Match Pts) GPS or TPS COGO Traverse COGO, Traverse GPS or TPS Copied Point Convert Data, Copy points between jobs GPS or TPS Cross Section Survey Cross Section GPS or TPS Using 2 bearings Hidden point measurements, Double Bearing GPS 1598 Viva Series, Glossary Source Originated from application/functionality Instrument source Using 2 distances Hidden point measurements, Double Distance GPS GSI file Convert Data, Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job GPS or TPS Hidden Point Hidden Point, auxiliary points TPS Intsct (Brg Brg) COGO, Intersection - Bearing - Bearing GPS or TPS Intsct (Brg Dst) COGO, Intersection - Bearing - Distance GPS or TPS Intsct (Dst Dst) COGO, Intersection - Distance - Distance GPS or TPS Intsct (4 Pts) COGO, Intersection - By points GPS or TPS LandXML Design to Field in LGO converting data from LandXML software to be used in the field LGO Line Base Pt COGO, Line Calculation - Base Point GPS or TPS Line Offset Pt COGO, Line Calculation - Offset Point GPS or TPS Line Segmt Pt COGO, Line Calculation - Segmentation GPS or TPS None No information on the source is available GPS or TPS RefLine (Grid) Reference Line, staked out in a defined grid GPS or TPS RefLine (Meas) Reference Line, measured GPS or TPS RefLine (Seg) Reference Line, segmented GPS or TPS RefLine (Stake) Reference Line, staked out GPS or TPS Ref Plane (Meas) Reference Plane, measured GPS or TPS Ref Plane (Scan) Reference Plane, scan TPS RoadRunner Road Runner GPS or TPS 1599 Viva Series, Glossary Source Originated from application/functionality Instrument source Sets of Angles Sets of Angles TPS Setup (Known BS) Setup, Known Backsight Point TPS Setup (LocCoord) Setup, Local Coordinates TPS Setup (Loc Rsct) Setup, Local Resection TPS Setup (Ori&Ht) Setup, Orientation and Height Transfer TPS Setup (Resect) Setup, Resection TPS Setup (Resect H) Setup, Resection Helmert TPS Setup (Set Az) Setup, Set Azimuth TPS Srvy Auto Offset Survey Auto Points, automatically recorded with offsets GPS or TPS Stakeout Stakeout GPS or TPS Survey Survey, measured TPS Survey (Auto) Survey Auto Points, automatically recorded TPS Survey (Event) Survey, Event input GPS Survey (Instant) Survey, measured with Pt Occupation: Instanta- GPS neous in CONFIGURE Point Occupation Settings Survey (Rem Pt) Survey, Remote Point Survey (Static) Survey, measured with Pt Occupation: Normal in GPS CONFIGURE Point Occupation Settings Traverse Traverse TPS TPS 1600 Source Originated from application/functionality Instrument source Unknown - GPS or TPS User Application Customised applications GPS or TPS User entered Manually entered point GPS or TPS Spiral For horizontal alignments: Spirals are used to connect straights and curves. A full spiral has an infinite radius at its start or end point whereas a partial has a finite radius at its start and end point. In. Radius at the start point is bigger than at the end point. Out. Radius at the start point is smaller than at the end point. Straight Straight line between two points. Its end point is identical with the beginning of a curve or spiral. The tangent is perpendicular to the radius of the curve. Sub class The sub class describes certain classes in detail. It indicates the status of the position when a coordinate triplet was measured and how the coordinates were determined. Viva Series, Glossary Sub class Description Instrument source COGO Indirect coordinate determination with application GPS or TPS COGO. None Direction is available but no coordinates. TPS Height is available but no position coordinates. Level TPS Measured with distances and angles. TPS Fixed (Height) Manually entered and fixed in height. GPS or TPS 1601 Viva Series, Glossary Sub class Description Instrument source Fixed (Position) Manually entered and fixed in position. GPS or TPS Fixed (Pos & Ht) Manually entered and fixed in position and height. GPS or TPS GNSS Code Only Direct coordinate determination with code solution. GNSS Fixed Direct coordinate determination with phase fixed GPS solution. GNSS Float Direct coordinate determination with autonomous GPS solution coming from LGO. Hidden Point Indirect coordinate determination with hidden point measurements. GPS GPS or TPS 1602 H.11 T Tangent Refer to straight. TPS mode Current active instrument is TPS. Transformations A transformation is the process of converting coordinates from one geodetic datum to another. Requirements • Transformation parameters. • In some cases a local ellipsoid. • In some cases a map projection. • In some cases a geoid model. Transformation parameters A transformation consists of shifts, rotations and scale factors, depending on the type of transformation used. Not all these parameters are always required. These parameters can already be known, or can be computed. Description of transformations • Classic 3D, also called Helmert transformation • Onestep • Twostep Viva Series, Glossary 1603 Viva Series, Glossary Transformation Characteristic Description Classic 3D Principle Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian to local cartesian coordinates and vice versa. A map projection can then be applied to obtain grid coordinates. As a similarity transformation, it is the most rigorous transformation type and keeps the full geometrical information. Positions and heights Positions and heights are linked. The accuracy is fully maintained and does not distort the measurements. Use When measurements are to be kept homogenous. Requirements • The positions and heights are known in WGS 1984 and in the local system for at least three points. Four points or more are recommended to obtain higher redundancy. • Parameters of the local ellipsoid. • Parameters of the local map projection, to convert between grid coordinates and geodetic coordinates. • Parameters of the local geoid model, to convert between orthometric and ellipsoidal heights. This information is not compulsory. Area Especially wide networks with large height differences. Local grid coordinates must be accurate. Advantage • Accuracy of the measurements is maintained. 1604 Transformation Characteristic Disadvantage Onestep Principle Description • It can be used over any area as long as the local coordinates, including heights, are accurate. • The local ellipsoid and map projection must be known for the local grid coordinates. • In order to obtain accurate ellipsoidal heights, the geoid separation at the measured points must be known. This information can be determined from a geoid model. Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to local grid and vice versa without knowledge about the local ellipsoid or the map projection. Procedure: 1) The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto a temporary Transverse Mercator Projection. The central meridian of this projection passes through the centre of gravity of the common control points. 2) The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates for the WGS 1984 points. 3) These preliminary grid coordinates are matched with the local grid control points. The Easting and Northing shifts, the rotation and scale factor between these two sets of points can then be computed. This process is known as a classic 2D transformation. 4) The height transformation is a single dimension height approximation. Viva Series, Glossary 1605 Transformation Characteristic Description Positions and heights The position and height transformations are separated. Use When measurements are to be forced to tie in with local existing control. For example: A site where the coordinates of the control points are based on a purely local grid. The coordinate values within this grid are arbitrary and are in no way connected with any ellipsoid or map projection. Obviously a Classic 3D transformation cannot be used here, as cartesian coordinates cannot be calculated from such a grid. Requirements Area Viva Series, Glossary • The position is known in WGS 1984 and in the local system for at least one point. Three or more points are recommended to obtain redundancy. • Additional height information for one point enables the transformation of heights. • Parameters of the local geoid model. This information is not compulsory. • No parameters of the local ellipsoid. • No parameters of the local map projection. • Limited to about 10 x 10 km as no projection scale factor is applied and a standard Transverse Mercator Projection is used to compute the preliminary WGS 1984 grid coordinates. 1606 Transformation Characteristic Description • For areas without large height differences. Points and trans- The transformation parameters determined depend formation param- on the number of available points with position eters information. Points and height transformation Viva Series, Glossary • One point: Classic 2D with shift in X and Y. • Two points: Classic 2D with shift in X and Y, rotation about Z and scale. • More than two points: Classic 2D with shift in X and Y, rotation about Z, scale and residuals. The type of height transformation performed depends on the number of available points with height information. • No point: No height transformation. • One point: Heights are shifted to fit to the height control point. • Two points: Average height shift between the two height control points. • Three points: Tilted plane through the three height control points to approximate the local heights. • More than three points: Best fitting average plane. 1607 Transformation Characteristic Advantage Disadvantage Viva Series, Glossary Description • Errors in height do not propagate into errors in position since the height and position transformations are separated. • If local heights have low accuracy or do not exist, a transformation of position can still be calculated and vice versa. • The height points and position points do not have to be the same points. • No parameters of the local ellipsoid and map projection is required. • Parameters can be computed with a minimum of points. Care must be taken when computing parameters using just one or two local points, as the parameters calculated are valid in the vicinity of the points used for the transformation. • Restriction in the area over which the transformation can be applied. This restriction is because there is no provision for scale factor in the projection. • The accuracy in height depends on the undulation of the geoid. The bigger the geoid variations the less accurate the results are. 1608 Transformation Characteristic Description Twostep Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position and height separately, but is not restricted to smaller areas. Procedure: Principle 1) The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common control points are shifted closely to the local datum using a given Classic 3D pre-transformation. This Classic 3D pre-transformation is typically a rough transformation valid for the country of the local datum. 2) The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary grid, but this time using the true map projection of the local points. 3) A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with the Onestep transformation. Viva Series, Glossary Positions and heights The position and height transformations are separated. Use When measurements are to be forced to tie in with local existing control in areas larger than 10 x 10 km. Requirements • The position is known in WGS 1984 and in the local system for at least one point. Four points or more are recommended to obtain higher redundancy. • Parameters of the local ellipsoid. 1609 Transformation Characteristic Area Description • Parameters of the local map projection. • Parameters of a pre-transformation. Virtually any area as long as the local coordinates are accurate. Points and trans- Identical with the Onestep transformation. formation parameters Viva Series, Glossary Points and height transformation Identical with the Onestep transformation. Advantage • Errors in height do not propagate into errors in position since the height and position transformations are separated. • If local heights have low accuracy or do not exist, a transformation of position can still be calculated and vice versa. • The height points and position points do not have to be the same points. • Fits much better over larger areas than a Onestep transformation. Reason: 1610 Transformation Characteristic Description The first step of a Twostep transformation avoids any distortions because the preliminary grid coordinates are built on a different ellipsoid than the local points. The second step ensures that the influence of the map projection scale factor is taken into account before the final 2D transformation is computed. Disadvantage Viva Series, Glossary • The local ellipsoid must be known. • The map projection must be known. • A pre-transformation must be known. A null transformation can be used. • In order to obtain accurate ellipsoidal heights, the geoid separation at the measured points must be known. This information can be determined from a geoid model. 1611 H.12 V Vertical alignment The vertical alignment gives information about the pattern of heights of the road axis as it is defined in the horizontal alignment. A vertical alignment is comprised of the elements: • tangents (straight segments) • curves • parabolas. Each element involved is defined by individual vertical design elements such as chainage, Easting, Northing, radius and chainage P. Viva Series, Glossary 1612 H.13 W WGS 1984 WGS 1984 is the global geocentric datum to which all GPS positioning information is referred to. Viva Series, Glossary 1613 Index 3 3D transformation .................................................. 1604 A Absolute coordinate difference Display ................................................................... 88 Limit exceeded ....................................................... 88 Absolute difference between two points .................... 87 Access Find target point ................................................ 1300 Joystick .................................................................. 40 Known backsight ................................................ 1275 Multiple backsights ............................................. 1282 Orientate to line ................................................ 1288 Orientate with compass ......................................... 44 Positioning Hz/V ..................................................... 42 Remote point ..................................................... 1438 Resection ........................................................... 1287 Set orientation ................................................... 1275 Sets of angles .................................................... 1232 Setup application ............................................... 1262 Survey ................................................................ 1353 TPS settings ........................................................... 34 Transfer height .................................................. 1286 Access Point Name .................................................... 366 Activate Code filter ............................................................ 111 Viva Series, Index Code group ..........................................................111 Adapter, screw-to-stub .............................................235 Add point to line .......................................................100 Adj, class .................................................................1569 Adjustment results ..................................................1475 Alignment Backup ..............................................................1016 Horizontal .........................................................1010 Vertical ..............................................................1010 Preparing data ......................................................828 Staking .................................................................828 Alignment Editor Configuration ....................................................1020 Menu .................................................................1019 Angle, display format ................................................487 Annotations Add ....................................................................1344 Configuration .......................................................262 Recall .................................................................1344 Antenna Calibration ............................................................230 Create ..................................................................214 Edit ......................................................................214 Recall deleted default ...........................................213 Antenna file, directory .............................................1513 Antenna height .........................................................229 Determine ............................................................233 1614 Antenna management, access ................................... 213 Antennas .................................................................. 213 Default ................................................................ 211 APN .......................................................................... 366 Application COGO ................................................................... 563 Customised .......................................................... 562 Delete .................................................................. 502 Description .......................................................... 561 Determine coordinate system Traditional ....................................................... 698 Loadable and non-loadable .................................. 562 Reference Line ..................................................... 763 Reference plane ................................................... 842 Sets of angles .................................................... 1229 Setup ................................................................. 1259 Stakeout ............................................................ 1301 Survey Auto points ................................................... 1357 Hidden points ............................................... 1401 Survey Cross Section .......................................... 1384 Survey GPS General ......................................................... 1336 Survey TPS General ......................................................... 1353 Remote point ................................................ 1436 TPS hidden point ................................................ 1427 Traverse ............................................................. 1442 Upload ................................................................. 502 Viva Series, Index Application program file, directory ...........................1513 Applications memory, formatting ...............................506 Applications, general information ..............................561 Arc Calculations,COGO calculation method .................629 Arc, reference ...........................................................763 Area Code ..................................................................1573 Create ....................................................................93 Delete ....................................................................75 Edit ........................................................................98 Area management .......................................................92 Areas,sorting and filter ..............................................104 Arrow, orientate to Reference Line .....................................................778 As built check, definition ...........................................872 ASCII Export format .......................................................158 Import format ......................................................148 ASCII input Connection ...........................................................260 Status ..................................................................403 AT Msg ......................................................................371 Atmospheric ppm ......................................................189 ATR Measurement .......................................................513 Search ..................................................................513 Window ................................................................514 1615 Attribute Add for Free code ........................................................ 453 Thematical code ...................................... 447, 466 Description ........................................................ 1565 Type in new ......................................................... 119 Attribute mismatch ................................................... 469 Attribute type ......................................................... 1567 Attribute value region ............................................. 1567 Attribute value type ................................................ 1568 Auto points Averaging ........................................................... 1358 Coding ............................................................... 1357 Configure ........................................................... 1359 Properties .......................................................... 1358 Store ................................................................. 1361 Auto position, Roads ................................................. 897 Automatic aiming ...................................................... 512 Automatic Prism Search ............................................ 185 Automatic targeting mode ........................................ 179 Auxiliary points Azimuth computation ......................................... 1418 Hidden point measurements .............................. 1403 Averaging .................................................................... 86 Auto points ........................................................ 1358 Configure ............................................................... 57 Cross section elements ...................................... 1386 Hidden points .................................................... 1403 Include/exclude coordinate triplet .......................... 88 Viva Series, Index Limit, exceeded ......................................................91 Offset points ......................................................1375 Sets of angles ....................................................1231 Staked points .....................................................1304 Traverse points ...................................................1443 Averaging mode ......................................................1568 Define ....................................................................86 Avge, class ..............................................................1570 Azimuth, compute Determine coordinate system ...............................745 Hidden point measurements ...............................1416 Azimuth/bearing fields ...............................................488 Azmth .....................................................................1419 B Backsight point, check .................................................37 Backward in Survey Cross Section ............................1399 Backwards Bearing & Distance Hidden point measurements ...............................1408 Backwards compatible .............................................1512 Base pt ...................................................................1438 Basic terms .............................................................1010 Batter rail ................................................................1085 Battery, status ..........................................................378 Bearing ......................................................................488 Bearing & Distance Hidden point measurements ...............................1404 Bearing/azimuth fields ...............................................488 Beep .........................................................................496 Auto points ........................................................1362 1616 Hz-Sector ............................................................. 497 Screen ................................................................. 497 C Cables ..................................................................... 1523 Calculate sets of angles .......................................... 1247 Calculator .................................................................. 523 Operating mode ................................................... 523 Calibrate touch screen .............................................. 496 Calibration, antennas ................................................ 230 Cant Left/Right Description for Rail Check .................................. 1167 Carriage way ............................................................. 974 Carrier ....................................................................... 235 Cassini projection ...................................................... 140 Catch point ............................................................... 975 CDMA ........................................................................ 324 Connection, configure .......................................... 329 Centreline ................................................................. 999 Chainage .............................................................. 994 Extension ............................................................. 988 Chainage ................................................................... 975 Ahead ...................................................... 1569, 1582 Back ................................................................... 1569 Centreline ............................................................ 994 Equation .............................................................. 983 Format ................................................................. 485 Gap ...................................................................... 983 Overlap ................................................................ 983 Reference Line ............................................. 767, 774 Viva Series, Index Chainage & Offset Hidden point measurements ...............................1407 Chainage equation ..................................................1569 Edit ...................................................................1019 Chainage, definition ..................................................990 Change Radio channel, requirements ................................336 Change face ................................................................35 Channel changing, requirements ................................336 Check Backsight point .......................................................37 Recorded point .......................................................37 Check tunnel .............................................................873 Class .......................................................................1569 Classic 3D transformation ........................................1604 Results .................................................................727 Classification of points, hierarchy ............................1569 Clear To Send ............................................................372 Clockwise, Tunnel ....................................................1210 Cmnd.. ......................................................................261 CMR/CMR+, data format ............................................277 Cntrl.. Configure station to dial ...............................348, 352 Code Area ...................................................................1573 Create ..................................................................119 Description .........................................................1571 Edit ......................................................................119 Free ...................................................................1573 1617 Line ................................................................... 1573 Point .................................................................. 1573 Quick ................................................................. 1573 Code filter for lines and areas ................................... 111 Code group ............................................................. 1573 Activate/deactivate .............................................. 111 Manage ................................................................ 122 Code mismatch ......................................................... 468 Code type ....................................................... 120, 1573 Codelist, directory ................................................... 1512 Codelists ................................................................... 114 Codes Manage Job codes .......................................................... 68 Point, line, area codes ..................................... 117 Sort Codelist management ...................................... 118 Data management .......................................... 112 Coding Auto points ........................................................ 1357 COGO points ........................................................ 564 Configure settings ................................................ 426 Cross section elements ...................................... 1385 Hidden points .................................................... 1402 Offset points ..................................................... 1375 Staked points ..................................................... 1303 Thematical With codelist ................................................... 446 Without codelist .............................................. 451 Viva Series, Index COGO ........................................................................563 Arc Calculations ....................................................566 Area Division ........................................................566 Configure .............................................................568 Distance input/output ..........................................568 Intersections ........................................................566 Inverse .................................................................565 Line Calculations ...................................................566 Modify values .......................................................694 Shift, Rotate & Scale ............................................567 Traverse ...............................................................565 COGO points Coding ..................................................................564 Properties ............................................................564 Combined Scale Factor ..............................................741 Command, send to device .........................................264 Compass, orientate with ..............................................44 Compatible with Leica System1200 .........................1512 Compensator .............................................................192 Configuration .......................................................192 Comps .........................................................................35 Computation, offset point .......................................1375 Configuration Hidden point .....................................................1433 Compensator ........................................................192 Offsets .................................................................197 Remote point .....................................................1440 Sets of angles ....................................................1235 Setup .................................................................1263 1618 Traverse ............................................................. 1451 Configure SBAS .................................................................... 287 Connection Configure ............................................................. 251 Connections, status .................................................. 401 Constant ................................................................. 1007 Control points ........................................................... 698 Convert to RoadRunner ................................. 1019, 1061 Converters, Tunnel .................................................. 1187 Coordinate geometry calculations ............................. 563 Coordinate Quality GPS .................................................................... 1576 TPS .................................................................... 1579 Coordinate system .................................................... 124 Active .................................................................. 125 Create .................................................................. 128 Default ................................................................ 125 Determine ............................................ 708, 730, 757 Edit ...................................................................... 128 Recall deleted default .......................................... 127 Turn into user defined default .............................. 127 Update ................................................................. 722 Coordinate system file, directory ............................. 1513 Coordinate system management, access ................... 126 Coordinate triplet .................................................... 1575 Copy data ................................................................. 158 Copy points/data between jobs ................................. 175 Counterclockwise, Tunnel ........................................ 1210 Viva Series, Index Country Specific Coordinate System models ............1575 CQ GPS ....................................................................1576 TPS .....................................................................1579 Create Area .......................................................................93 Code ....................................................................119 Codelist ................................................................116 Coordinate system ...............................................128 CSCS models .........................................................147 Ellipsoid ................................................................137 Geoid model .........................................................146 ID template ..........................................................422 Line ........................................................................93 Point ......................................................................77 Prism ....................................................................183 Projection .............................................................141 Reference arc .......................................................782 Reference line ......................................................782 Transformation .....................................................133 Traverse .............................................................1445 Cross section assignment ........................................1582 Check ................................................................1056 Create ...............................................................1057 Delete .....................................................1056, 1059 Edit .........................................................1019, 1057 Cross section element Average ..............................................................1386 Coding ................................................................1385 1619 Properties .......................................................... 1386 Cross Section Survey, configure .............................. 1398 Cross section template ............................................ 1582 Add a layer ........................................................ 1051 Create ............................................................... 1049 Delete ............................................................... 1048 Duplicate .......................................................... 1048 Edit ......................................................... 1019, 1049 Cross slope ............................................................... 978 Stake out ........................................................... 1109 Cross slope Road, Info page ...................................... 914 Crown Road Info page ............................................................. 926 Crown, Stakeout ..................................................... 1113 csc file .................................................................... 1575 CSCS field file .......................................................... 1575 Directory ............................................................ 1512 CSCS model ............................................................... 147 Create from data storage device .......................... 147 Description ........................................................ 1575 Types ................................................................. 1575 CSF ........................................................................... 741 Ctrl CDMA ................................................................... 329 Class .................................................................. 1569 GPS Real-Time ...................................................... 337 GSM ..................................................................... 325 Internet/Ethernet ................................................. 343 Modem ................................................................ 333 Viva Series, Index Radios for remote control ....................................340 RS232 ..................................................................342 CTS ............................................................................372 Current key ...............................................................469 Current position, status .............................................394 Curve .......................................................................1038 Customised application ..............................................562 Cut-off angle .....................................................208, 411 D Data ........................................................................1584 Copy between jobs ...............................................175 Preparing for staking alignment ............................828 Data export ...............................................................158 Directory ......................................................161, 162 Data format, real-time ......................................277, 277 Data management .......................................................72 Access ....................................................................73 Data storage device ................................................1192 Daylight point ............................................................975 DBX .........................................................................1192 Deactivate Code filter ............................................................111 Code group ..........................................................111 Default prisms ...........................................................181 Default targets ..........................................................181 Default, recall Antenna ...............................................................213 Coordinate system ...............................................127 Devices ................................................................369 1620 Ellipsoid ............................................................... 136 Projection ............................................................ 139 Survey screen settings ............................... 432, 1363 Target .................................................................. 182 Deflection error ...................................................... 1021 Delete Antenna ............................................................... 213 Application ........................................................... 502 Code .................................................................... 118 Codelist ................................................................ 115 Coordinate system ............................................... 126 Coordinate triplet ................................................... 88 Cross section template ....................................... 1387 Element in alignment ......................................... 1024 Element in cross section template ...................... 1389 Ellipsoid ............................................................... 135 Format file .... 573, 780, 862, 903, 1236, 1268, 1315, 1454, 1482 From Data Log ..................................................... 103 Geoid model ........................................................ 145 ID template .......................................................... 420 Inverse COGO calculation ...................................... 692 Job ......................................................................... 67 Language ............................................................. 491 Line/area ............................................................... 75 Matched points ............................................ 687, 712 Point ...................................................................... 73 Point from line ..................................................... 100 Projection ............................................................ 138 Viva Series, Index Report sheet .573, 780, 862, 903, 1236, 1268, 1314, 1454, 1482 RTK Profile ...................................................204, 205 Surface ...............................................................1490 Target ..................................................................182 Transformation .....................................................131 Working style .......................................................481 Descr ........................................................................403 Design element .......................................................1011 Bloss curve ........................................................1590 Parabola ..................................................1583, 1597 Spiral .................................................................1601 Straight (tangent) ...................................1601, 1603 Design height ..................................................989, 1098 Design to Field Description .........................................................1143 Installing ............................................................1143 Devce.. ..............................................................315, 368 Device Configure .............................................................371 Create ..................................................................371 Description .........................................................1584 Edit ......................................................................371 Device height Hidden point measurements ...............................1424 Devices Configuration .......................................................356 Configure .............................................................368 Control .................................................................324 1621 For Internet, configure ......................................... 368 Overview .............................................................. 356 Recall deleted default .......................................... 369 Difference limit exceeded in Stakeout ..................... 1325 Digital cellular phone Control ................................................................. 324 Version ................................................................ 388 Digital cellular phones ............................................... 357 Requirements for using ........................................ 357 Supported ............................................................ 358 Dimensions, carrier and adapter ................................ 235 Display ...................................................................... 496 Settings ............................................................... 431 Distance input/output in COGO ................................. 568 Distribution Residuals COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale .................. 572 Residuals throughout transformation area ........... 706 Documentation ............................................................. 3 Double Stereographic projection ............................... 140 Downloads, Tunnel ................................................. 1187 Drilling rig orientation ............................................. 1217 DTM height ..................................................... 989, 1098 DTM job, directory ................................................... 1513 DTM layer, select ..................................................... 1329 DXF ........................................................................... 149 Data export ......................................................... 162 Data import ........................................................ 156 Export format ....................................................... 158 Dynamic ATR window ................................................ 186 Viva Series, Index Dynamic PS window ..................................................186 E EAO Configure .............................................................270 Hidden point measurements ...............................1409 Edit Area .......................................................................98 Code ....................................................................119 Codelist ................................................................116 Coordinate system ...............................................128 Ellipsoid ................................................................137 Job .........................................................................63 Line ........................................................................98 Measured coordinate triplet ...................................88 Point ......................................................................82 Projection .............................................................141 Transformation .....................................................133 Traverse .............................................................1445 EDM ..........................................................178, 511, 511 EGL ...........................................................................520 EGNOS, real-time data format ...................................281 Electronic Distance Measurement ..............................511 Electronic serial number ............................................331 Elevation .................................................................1582 local ellipsoidal height .......................................1038 local orthometric height ....................................1038 Elevation mask ..................................................208, 411 Ellipsoid Create ..................................................................137 1622 Delete .................................................................. 135 Edit ...................................................................... 137 Recall deleted default .......................................... 136 Ellipsoid distance in COGO ......................................... 569 Ellipsoid management, access ................................... 135 Ellipsoidal height ..................................................... 1585 Ellipsoids ................................................................... 135 Emitting Guide Light EGL ........................................... 520 End date, line/area ...................................................... 98 End time, line/area ...................................................... 98 ESN number .............................................................. 331 Est, class ................................................................. 1570 European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System ............................................ 281, 287 Exceeded limit Absolute coordinate difference .............................. 88 Average ................................................................. 91 Coordinate quality ................................................ 217 Difference in Stakeout ....................................... 1325 Height Reference Line ................................................ 776 Stakeout ....................................................... 1310 Position Reference Line ................................................ 776 Stakeout ....................................................... 1310 Exclude coordinate triplet from averaging ................... 88 Expiry date, software maintenance ........................... 510 Export ......................................................................... 64 Export & copy data ................................................... 158 Viva Series, Index Export data ...............................................................158 Export format ............................................................158 Export Job, connection ..............................................273 Export key .................................................................467 Exporting cross section elements ............................1386 F Favourites, configuration ...........................................439 FBK ...........................................................................170 Field controller, control key beep ..............................497 Field file CSCS ...................................................................1575 Geoid .................................................................1586 Field of view ..............................................................512 Filter Activate/deactivate for codes ...............................111 Height smoothing .................................................286 Point, line and area codes ....................................111 Points, lines and areas ..........................................104 Filter setting, define ....................................................74 Filter symbol .............................................................104 Filter.. .........................................................................74 Areas .....................................................................75 Export ..........................................................160, 168 Lines ......................................................................75 Finding a target point ..............................................1300 Fine search ........................................................514, 516 Finished road level ....................................................975 Firmware file, directory ............................................1513 Firmware, current version ..........................................510 1623 Firmware, upload ...................................................... 502 Firmware, version ..................................................... 510 FKP, Flächenkorrekturparameter ............................... 286 Following arrow, orientate to Stakeout ............................................................ 1313 Format Data storage device ............................................. 506 Export .................................................................. 158 Import .................................................................. 148 NMEA message .................................................. 1531 Format file, export ASCII ............................................ 158 Format files, directory ............................................. 1512 Forward in Survey Cross Section .............................. 1399 Free code ................................................................ 1573 Delete .................................................................. 103 Free coding ............................................................... 443 Frequency, change for radio ...................................... 336 Functions .................................................................. 511 Functions, main menu ................................................. 46 G GAGAN .............................................................. 281, 288 gem file .................................................................. 1586 GeoC++ ..................................................................... 562 Geoid field file ........................................................ 1586 Directory ............................................................ 1513 Geoid model ............................................................. 143 Create from Data storage device / internal memory ............ 146 Delete .................................................................. 145 Viva Series, Index Description .........................................................1585 Management, access ............................................144 View .....................................................................145 Geoid separation .....................................................1585 Geoid, height above ................................................1585 Geometric elements ................................................1011 Geometric ppm ............................................................58 GetPt .......................................................................1240 GGA .................................................................293, 1536 GGK .........................................................................1538 GGK(PT) ..................................................................1540 GGQ ........................................................................1542 GLL ..........................................................................1544 GNS .........................................................................1546 Go to Work! .................................................................46 Go To Work! Menu Description .............................................................48 GPRS .........................................................................366 GPRS device Requirements for using ........................................366 Supported ............................................................367 GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation ..........281, 288 GPS used for TPS Setup ...........................................1270 Grade In ............................................................1045, 1046 Out .........................................................1045, 1047 Graph, showing satellites ..........................................382 Grid distance in COGO ...............................................569 Ground distance in COGO ..........................................569 1624 Group Codes .................................................................. 118 Coding Thematical ...................................... 447, 453, 466 Job codes ............................................................... 69 GSA ......................................................................... 1548 GSI Data ..................................................................... 315 Format ................................................................. 315 Output ................................................................. 315 Word information ................................................. 319 GSI file, directory .................................................... 1513 GSI16 ........................................................................ 149 GSI8 .......................................................................... 149 GSM .......................................................................... 324 GSM connection, configure ....................................... 325 GSV ......................................................................... 1550 GUS74 Laser Guide .................................................... 522 H HdnPt.. ................................................................... 1409 Height Design ....................................................... 989, 1098 Ellipsoidal ........................................................... 1585 Entered manually ................................................. 989 Entered manually, Roads .................................... 1098 Geoid ................................................................. 1585 Height layer of DTM ................................... 989, 1098 Hidden point measurement ................................ 1424 Individual point .................................. 989, 989, 1098 Viva Series, Index Info layer of DTM ................................................1098 Levelled ..............................................................1585 Mean sea level ....................................................1585 Orthometric ........................................................1585 Pole ......................................................................241 Priorities .............................................................1098 Road and Rail .......................................................989 Second height ....................................................1098 Height (aim to stake ht) ............................................944 Height filter ...............................................................286 Height mode .............................................................134 Height offset, stakeout ...........................................1311 Height smoothing ......................................................289 Height type Current position .................................................1303 Point to be staked ..............................................1303 Hidden point measurement devices ...........................364 Supported ............................................................365 Hidden point measurement, heights ........................1424 Hidden point, connection ..........................................265 Hidden points ..........................................................1401 Averaging ...........................................................1403 Coding ................................................................1402 Method ..............................................................1404 Properties ..........................................................1402 Hinge point ...............................................................974 Hlth.. .................................................................207, 411 Horizontal alignment .......................................976, 1590 Create a bloss curve ..........................................1030 1625 Create a curve ................................................... 1030 Create a straight ............................................... 1030 Edit ................................................................... 1019 Edit a bloss curve .............................................. 1030 Edit a curve ....................................................... 1030 Edit a straight ................................................... 1030 Delete element .................................................. 1024 Hot keys Configure ............................................................. 439 Description ............................................................ 30 Hts.. ......................................................................... 151 I ID ............................................................................ 1596 ID template ............................................................... 418 Create .................................................................. 422 Identification number ................................................ 493 Illumination ............................................................... 522 Import ......................................................................... 64 Format ................................................................. 148 Importers Description ........................................................ 1143 Installing ............................................................ 1143 Include coordinate triplet in averaging ......................... 88 Increase point ID ....................................................... 422 Increasing NE, SE, SW, NW ........................................ 488 Incrementation ......................................................... 423 Point ID’s ............................................................. 422 Indefinite triangle ................................................... 1107 IndivID ............................ 1240, 1338, 1343, 1355, 1438 Viva Series, Index Individual stringline Stakeout ............................................................1106 Individual stringlineInfo page .....................................909 Info page ..................................................................893 Initialisation ..................................................1342, 1591 Access ................................................................1348 Methods .............................................................1591 Moving ...............................................................1349 On known point .................................................1351 Static .................................................................1350 Instrument ..................................................................46 Instrument source ...................................................1592 Instrument, orientate to Reference Line .....................................................778 Stakeout ............................................................1312 Interface, description ..............................................1592 Interference ..............................................................336 Internal memory ......................................................1511 Internet Connection ...........................................................253 Control .................................................................343 Status ..................................................................402 Internet device Requirements for using ........................................366 Supported ............................................................367 Intersection, COGO calculation method ......................600 Intfce Status Internet ...................................................402, 402 1626 Remote ........................................................... 405 Rover .............................................................. 404 Inv.. .......................................... 596, 607, 612, 617, 622 Inverse, COGO calculation method ............................. 575 J Job Control job, Roads ................................................ 877 Create .................................................................... 54 Default .................................................................. 53 Digital Terrain Model (DTM) job, Roads ................. 878 Edit ........................................................................ 63 Management .......................................................... 53 Management, (Road, Rail, Tunnel) ........................ 946 Rail job, Roads ..................................................... 876 Tunnel job, Roads ................................................ 877 Working ................................................................. 53 Working job, Roads .............................................. 876 Job file, directory ..................................................... 1513 Jobs & Data ................................................................ 46 Joystick, move by ........................................................ 40 K Keys, configure ........................................................... 30 Known backsight ..................................................... 1275 Known point, initialisation method .......................... 1592 L Lambert 1 Parallel projection ..................................... 140 Lambert 2 Parallel projection ..................................... 140 Viva Series, Index LandXML Data export .........................................................167 Export format .......................................................159 Language Delete ..................................................................491 Select ...................................................................491 Upload .................................................................503 Language file, directory ...........................................1513 Laser plummet ..........................................................522 Last point, orientate to Reference Line .....................................................778 Stakeout ............................................................1312 Layer Select DTM, Stakeout ........................................1329 Road, Info page ....................................................931 Stakeout ............................................................1115 Layers .......................................................................952 Left rail .....................................................................990 Leica 4G, data format ................................................277 Leica Geosystems TPS prism system ..........................184 Leica SmartWorx Viva software, exit ............................46 Leica, data format .....................................................277 Length ........................................................................99 Levelled height ........................................................1585 LGO Creation Antenna records ..............................................230 Attributes ......................................................1567 Codes ............................................................1573 1627 CSCS field files .............................................. 1575 DTM jobs ....................................................... 1328 Geoid field files ............................................. 1586 Quick codes .................................................... 445 Download Coordinate systems ......................................... 124 Jobs .................................................................. 53 Upload Coordinate systems ......................................... 124 Jobs .................................................................. 53 Licence file, directory .............................................. 1513 Licence key ............................................................... 562 Limit, exceeded Absolute coordinate difference .............................. 88 Average ................................................................. 91 Limits, Tunnel ......................................................... 1221 Line Create .................................................................... 93 Delete .................................................................... 75 Edit ........................................................................ 98 Orientate to Reference line ................................................. 778 Stakeout ............................................. 1312, 1312 Reference ............................................................ 763 Line calculations, COGO calculation method .............. 629 Line code ................................................................ 1573 Filter .................................................................... 111 Line management ....................................................... 92 Viva Series, Index Line style Coding ..................................................................121 For line/area code ..................................................71 New line .................................................................94 Linear ......................................................................1007 Lines, sorting and filter .............................................104 Linework ...........................................................120, 471 Using the linework field ........................................472 with thematical coding .........................................473 List reference stations ...............................................339 LLK ..........................................................................1552 LLQ .........................................................................1554 Loadable application ..................................................562 Lock ..........................................................................517 Log of messages .......................................................310 Log raw observations ................................194, 226, 415 Logging status ...........................................................397 Loss of Lock ..............................................................517 M Main menu ..................................................................46 Management Antennas ..............................................................213 Area .......................................................................92 Codelists ..............................................................114 Coordinate systems ..............................................124 Data .......................................................................72 Jobs ........................................................................53 Jobs (Road, Rail, Tunnel) .......................................946 Line ........................................................................92 1628 Points .................................................................... 77 Prisms .................................................................. 181 Manual slope Road, Info page ................................... 920 Manual, validity ............................................................. 3 Manually entered height ................................. 989, 1098 MapView ................................................................... 542 Access ................................................................. 543 Area with focus, symbol ....................................... 550 Configure ............................................................. 544 Example of results in plot mode ........................... 558 Keys ..................................................................... 552 Line with focus, symbol ........................................ 550 North arrow ......................................................... 549 Point symbols ...................................................... 555 Point with focus, symbol ...................................... 550 Scale bar .............................................................. 549 Screen area .......................................................... 549 Select Lines and Areas ......................................... 556 Select Points, Lines and Areas .............................. 556 Softkeys .............................................................. 552 Symbol Instrument station .......................................... 551 Reflectors ....................................................... 551 Rover .............................................................. 551 Toolbar Description ..................................................... 552 Symbol ............................................................ 550 View results ......................................................... 558 Master-Auxiliary Correction ............................... 285, 285 Viva Series, Index Match points .....................................................687, 712 Matching points Choose .................................................................723 Edit ......................................................................723 MAX ..........................................................................285 Mean page ..................................................................86 Access ....................................................................87 Mean sea level, height .............................................1585 Meas, class ..............................................................1570 Measure Antenna height ....................................................229 Sets, sets of angles ............................................1244 Setup points .......................................................1282 Measure & target settings .........................................177 Measure mode Fast ......................................................................178 Long range ...........................................................179 Standard ..............................................................178 Tracking ...............................................................179 Measure to ................................................................178 Measured points, properties Reference line ......................................................764 Reference plane ...................................................842 Mechanical Reference Plane ......................................231 Memory Device to be formatted ........................................507 Status ..................................................................378 Menu Go To Work! ...........................................................48 1629 My Favourites ......................................................... 32 Mercator projection ................................................... 140 Message log .............................................................. 310 Mismatch Attribute .............................................................. 469 Code .................................................................... 468 Mode Targeting ............................................................. 514 Mode, Calculator ....................................................... 523 Modem ..................................................................... 359 Control ................................................................. 333 Requirements for using ........................................ 359 Supported ............................................................ 359 Modify values in COGO .............................................. 694 Molodensky-Badekas ................................................ 134 Mountpoint ....................................................... 345, 540 Move by joystick ......................................................... 40 Moving initialisation method ................................... 1591 MRP .......................................................................... 231 MSAS ........................................................................ 281 MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System .......... 281, 288 Multiple backsights .................................................. 1282 Multiple chainage ...................................................... 984 N National Marine Electronics Association .................. 1531 Natural surface ......................................................... 974 Nav, class ................................................................ 1570 Negative offset, COGO .............................................. 594 Viva Series, Index Next available point ID Real-time rover operations .................................1343 Static operations ................................................1338 NMEA ......................................................................1531 NMEA, connection .....................................................302 Nominal gauge ..........................................................990 None, class .............................................................1571 Non-loadable application ...........................................562 North, orientate to Reference Line .....................................................778 Stakeout ..................................................1312, 1312 NTRIP ......................................................................1593 Number of satellites, used in solution 385, 386, 386, 386 O Object Delete ..................................................................103 Description .........................................................1596 Oblique Mercator projection ......................................139 Offset Antenna Input ...............................................................214 Vertical ....................................................229, 238 External angle .......................................................270 Hidden point measurements .................................268 Reference line ......................................................794 Reference plane ...................................................849 Stakeout, height .................................................1311 Toggel, Roads .....................................................1091 1630 Offset point Computation ...................................................... 1375 Configure ........................................................... 1379 Description ........................................................ 1357 ID ....................................................................... 1383 ID, Examples ...................................................... 1383 Offsets ........................................................... 194, 1002 Defining, Rail check ............................................ 1177 Sign convention ................................................... 998 Using offsets with Rail ....................................... 1168 Onestep transformation .......................................... 1605 Results ................................................................. 725 Orientate Reference Line ..................................................... 777 Stakeout ............................................................ 1311 Orientate with compass .............................................. 44 Origin, reference plane ............................................. 849 Original ground ......................................................... 974 Orthometric height ................................................. 1585 Overbreak ................................................................. 999 Overlapping zones, Tunnel ...................................... 1221 Overwrite, code for auto points .............................. 1357 P Parabola ................................................................. 1038 Parameters, set for transformation ........................... 713 Partial Bloss Curve ................................................... 1023 Pendular displacement ............................................ 1172 Pendulum length ........................................... 1171, 1172 Perpendicular .......................................................... 1007 Viva Series, Index Phase center variations, vertical ................................230 Pillar setup ................................................................233 Pin assignment ........................................................1514 Plumb line ...............................................................1007 Point Add to line ...........................................................100 Auto .........................................................1357, 1357 Auxiliary .............................................................1403 Azimuth computation .........................................1418 COGO ...................................................................564 Create ....................................................................77 Delete ....................................................................73 Delete from line ...................................................100 Edit ........................................................................82 Height ................................................................1098 Hidden ...............................................................1401 Measured Reference line .................................................764 Reference plane ..............................................842 Orientate to, Reference Line ................................778 Orientate to, Stakeout .......................................1312 Staked, Stakeout ................................................1303 Point code ...............................................................1573 Filter ....................................................................111 Point ID Incrementation .....................................................422 Next available Real-time rover operations ............................1343 Static operations ...........................................1338 1631 Point management ...................................................... 77 Point symbols, MapView ............................................ 555 Points Copy between jobs ............................................... 175 Sorting and filter .................................................. 104 Polar Stereographic projection .................................. 140 Pole Height .......................................................... 241, 241 Setup ................................................................... 240 Port, description ..................................................... 1597 Portal ........................................................................ 999 Positioning Hz/V .......................................................... 42 Positive offset, COGO ................................................ 594 Post-processed kinematic ....................................... 1588 Power down .............................................................. 494 PowerSearch ............................................................. 515 ppm Atmospheric ......................................................... 189 Geometric .............................................................. 58 Transformation results ................................. 725, 727 Prediction ......................................................... 185, 518 Advantages ......................................................... 288 Description .......................................................... 288 Recommended settings ........................................ 289 Priority of heights ..................................................... 989 Prism Create .................................................................. 183 Default ................................................................ 181 Prism search ............................................................. 512 Viva Series, Index After prediction ....................................................518 Prism system Leica Geosystems TPS ..........................................184 True zero ..............................................................184 Prisms Management ........................................................181 PRN ...........................................................................381 Profile .....................................................................1582 Projection Cassini ..................................................................140 Create ..................................................................141 Delete ..................................................................138 Double Stereographic ...........................................140 Edit ......................................................................141 Lambert 1 Parallel .................................................140 Lambert 2 Parallel .................................................140 Mercator ..............................................................140 Oblique Mercator ..................................................139 Polar Stereographic ..............................................140 Recall deleted default ...........................................139 RSO ......................................................................140 Transverse Mercator .............................................139 UTM .....................................................................139 Projection distortion ....................................................58 Projection management, access .................................138 Projections ................................................................138 Properties Auto points ........................................................1358 COGO points .........................................................564 1632 Cross section element ........................................ 1386 Hidden points .................................................... 1402 Measured points Reference line ................................................. 764 Reference plane .............................................. 842 Offset points ..................................................... 1375 Sets of angles .................................................... 1231 Setup points ...................................................... 1261 Staked points ..................................................... 1303 Traverse points .................................................. 1442 PS ............................................................................. 515 360° search ......................................................... 516 Window ............................................................... 516 Pseudorandom Noise ................................................ 381 Q Quadrant .................................................................. 488 Quick access to screens, configure ............................ 439 Quick code .............................................................. 1573 Quick coding ............................................................. 444 Quick Settings ............................................................. 34 R Radio Change channels .................................................. 336 Default ................................................................ 362 For GPS ................................................................ 360 For TPS ................................................................ 362 Interference ......................................................... 336 Supported .................................................... 360, 362 Viva Series, Index User defined .........................................................362 Version .................................................................389 Radio Link Protocol ....................................................328 Rail Check Check height of lower rail ...................................1167 Checking a track .......................................1163, 1163 Rail Editor Description .........................................................1143 Installing ............................................................1143 Rail, Info page ...........................................................938 RAW ..........................................................................170 Raw data logging .......................................................397 Raw observations, log ...............................194, 226, 415 RCS ...........................................................................519 Ready To Send ..........................................................372 Real-time ..................................................................275 Base ...................................................................1589 Rover .................................................................1589 Status ..................................................................385 Recall Annotations .......................................................1344 Default Attribute values ...........................................79, 95 Survey screen settings ...........................432, 1363 Deleted default Antenna ..........................................................213 Coordinate system ..........................................127 Devices ............................................................369 Ellipsoid ...........................................................136 1633 Projection ....................................................... 139 Target ............................................................. 182 Last used attribute values ................................ 79, 95 Previous result, COGO .......... 596, 607, 612, 617, 622 Receive data from third party device ......................... 260 Recorded point, check ................................................. 37 Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic projection ................ 140 Red laser ................................................................... 199 Visible .................................................................. 522 Ref, class ................................................................ 1569 Reference arc Chosse ................................................................. 782 Define .................................................................. 783 Define offsets ...................................................... 794 Delete .................................................................. 788 Enter manually ..................................................... 783 Measure to .......................................................... 799 Select from job .................................................... 787 Stake to ............................................................... 812 Reference datum ........................................................ 59 Reference line Choose ................................................................ 782 Configure ............................................................. 773 Define .................................................................. 783 Define offsets ...................................................... 794 Delete .................................................................. 788 Enter manually ..................................................... 783 Measure to .......................................................... 799 Select from job .................................................... 787 Viva Series, Index Stake to ...............................................................812 Reference plane Application ...........................................................842 Tilted ....................................................................844 Reference point ..............................................764, 1083 Reference point surface ..........................................1088 Refraction Coefficient ...........................................................191 Correction ............................................................191 Relock .......................................................................518 Remote connection, configuration .............................310 Remote point ..........................................................1436 Access ................................................................1438 Configuration .....................................................1440 Use ....................................................................1440 Report sheet Directory ............................................................1512 Report sheet, create name .....573, 780, 862, 903, 1236, 1268, 1314, 1454, 1482 Resection ................................................................1287 Residual Distribution COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale ...............572 Distribution throughout transformation area ........706 Results ....................................................................1469 Sets of angles One face .......................................................1253 Two faces ......................................................1249 Traverse .............................................................1464 Traverse adjustment ...........................................1475 1634 Resurvey staked point ............................................. 1325 Reticule ..................................................................... 200 Reticule illumination .................................................. 200 Retry ......................................................................... 513 Right rail ................................................................... 990 RINEX file, directory ................................................ 1513 RLP ........................................................................... 328 RmtHt ..................................................................... 1354 Road alignment file ................................................... 876 Road job, new ......................................................... 1063 Robotic targeting mode ............................................ 179 Rotate, MapView ....................................................... 545 Rotation Point ........................................................... 999 Rotations, set for transformation ............................. 714 RPN mode ................................................................. 523 RS232 ....................................................................... 363 RSLT1 ............................................................... 614, 619 RSLT2 ............................................................... 614, 619 RSO projection .......................................................... 140 RTCM Data format ......................................................... 277 V3 ........................................................................ 277 RTK Profile Create new .......................................................... 202 Delete .......................................................... 204, 205 Edit ...................................................................... 202 Select another ..................................................... 202 RTS ........................................................................... 372 Run ........................................... 1240, 1338, 1343, 1355 Viva Series, Index RW5 ..........................................................................170 S S/N ............................................................................381 Same Direction, Survey Cross Section ......................1385 Satellite status ..........................................................380 Satellite tracking, settings .................................206, 409 Satellites Health ..........................................................208, 411 Number used in solution ..............385, 386, 386, 386 SBAS, description ......................................................287 Scale Set for transformation .........................................714 Transformation results .................................725, 727 Scale factor, combined ..............................................741 Scan ........................................................................1005 Scan, Tunnel ............................................................1198 Search Windows ........................................................185 Segment Slope distance ...................................................1052 Slope ratio ........................................................1052 Select DTM layer ......................................................1329 Select points, sets of angles ....................................1240 Serial number ............................................................509 Set orientation ........................................................1275 Set-D Coordinate system ...............................................127 Ellipsoid ................................................................136 Projection .............................................................139 Transformation .....................................................132 1635 Sets of angles ......................................................... 1229 Access ............................................................... 1232 Configuration ..................................................... 1235 Measure sets ..................................................... 1244 Menu ................................................................. 1233 Results One face ....................................................... 1253 Two faces ..................................................... 1249 Select points ...................................................... 1240 Setup Access ............................................................... 1262 Application ......................................................... 1259 Configuration ..................................................... 1263 Known backsight ................................................ 1275 Measure target points ........................................ 1282 Methods ............................................................ 1275 Properties of points ........................................... 1261 Resection ........................................................... 1287 Set orientation ................................................... 1275 Setup on TPS using GPS .......................................... 1270 Setup reminder ....................................................... 1273 Shift Constant .............................................................. 965 Cross slope .......................................................... 969 Linear .................................................................. 965 Parabolic .............................................................. 965 Reverse ................................................................ 965 Sign convention ................................................... 968 Shift, Rotate & Scale, COGO ...................................... 668 Viva Series, Index Shifts ......................................................................1007 For Roads .............................................................963 Set for transformation .........................................714 Shoulder ....................................................................974 Sign convention .......................................................1008 Signal to noise ratio ..................................................381 Single Point Position ..................................................555 Skip point Sets of Angles ....................................................1245 Stakeout ............................................................1325 Skyplot ......................................................................382 Slope .........................................................................978 Distance Hidden point measurements ..........................1421 Slope Road Info page ..............................................................920 Slope, key ...............................................................1421 SmartAntenna firmware, upload ................................502 SmartCodes ...............................................................458 Assigning codes ............................................464, 466 Code Block ...........................................................464 Configuration .......................................................459 Copying code block ...............................................467 Smoothing heights ....................................................286 Socket .....................................................................1514 Sockets ...................................................................1522 Soldner Cassini projection ..........................................140 Sort Codes 1636 Codelist management ...................................... 118 Data management .......................................... 112 Points, lines and areas ......................................... 104 Sort settings, define ................................................... 74 Source .................................................................... 1598 Space-Based Augmentation System .......................... 287 Spiral In ...................................................................... 1601 Out ................................................................... 1601 Spiral parameter A .................................................. 1565 SPP ........................................................................... 555 Stake Alignment ............................................................ 828 Height difference ..................................... 1096, 1170 Offset ...................................................... 1096, 1170 To alignment ........................................................ 830 Stake mode, Roads ................................................... 880 Stake offset .............................................................. 981 Sign convention ................................................... 982 Stake out Chainage and offset ........................................... 1102 Cross slope ........................................................ 1109 Direct ................................................................... 981 Indirect ................................................................ 981 Stringline ........................................................... 1104 Stake tunnel ............................................................. 873 Staked points Average ............................................................. 1304 Coding ............................................................... 1303 Viva Series, Index Properties, Stakeout ...........................................1303 Stakeout Configure ...........................................................1307 Crown ................................................................1113 Definition .....................................................872, 872 Difference limit exceeded ...................................1325 Individual stringline .............................................1106 Layer, Roads ......................................................1115 To centre line .......................................................996 To rail ...................................................................997 Standard deviation ..................................................1580 GPS ....................................................................1577 Standard mode ..........................................................523 Start up .....................................................................494 Static ......................................................................1587 Initialisation method ...........................................1591 Station ......................................................................975 Equation ...............................................................983 Station setup, delete in Traverse .............................1449 Station to dial Configure .............................................................348 Create ..................................................................350 Edit ......................................................................350 Station, definition .....................................................990 Status .......................................................................375 Connections .........................................................401 Store, auto points ...................................................1361 Stored key .................................................................469 Straight ...................................................................1038 1637 Stringline .......................................................... 948, 977 Stake out ........................................................... 1104 Stringline Road, Info page ......................................... 904 Sub class ................................................................. 1601 Sun ......................................................................... 1417 Azimuth computation ......................................... 1416 Orientate to Reference Line ................................................ 778 Stakeout ....................................................... 1312 Superelevation .................................................. 991, 999 Superelevation base .................................................. 990 Surface ..................................................................... 979 DTM ..................................................................... 979 Layer ................................................................... 980 Surface, delete ........................................................ 1490 Survey Access ................................. 1336, 1340, 1346, 1353 Auto points ........................................................ 1357 Default screen ................................................... 1353 Hidden points .................................................... 1401 Post-processed kinematic operations ................. 1336 Real-time rover operations ................................. 1340 Static operations ................................................ 1336 Status TPS ............................................................ 376 Survey Cross Section Direction ............................................................ 1399 Methods ............................................................ 1385 Survey GPS Application general ............................................ 1336 Viva Series, Index Points .................................................................1336 Survey remote point, TPS ........................................1438 Survey screen page ...................................................431 Survey TPS Application general .............................................1353 Points .................................................................1353 Remote point .....................................................1436 Symbols, for points in MapView .................................555 System ......................................................................506 System file, directory ..............................................1513 System information, status .......................................509 System1200, backwards compatible ........................1512 T Talker ID ..................................................................1531 Tangent ...................................................................1038 Target Default .................................................................181 Recall deleted default ...........................................182 Target height, hidden point measurements .............1424 Target point ..............................................................765 Find ....................................................................1300 Task, Roads ...............................................................972 Template, Survey Cross Section .....................1384, 1387 Text ...........................................................................496 Thematical coding .....................................................442 Time slicing ...............................................................300 Time stamp ...............................................................444 Timed measurement ................................................1346 Toe ...........................................................................974 1638 Toggle offset .......................................................... 1091 Tolerances, Traverse ............................................... 1453 Tools Menu For Rail .............................................................. 1180 Top ........................................................................... 974 Touch screen on, off ................................................. 497 TPS Corrections ......................................................... 189 TPS Settings ................................................................ 34 Track ......................................................................... 990 Centre line ........................................................... 990 Definition of a single track ................................... 990 Definition of multiple tracks ................................. 994 Transfer objects ........................................................ 499 Transformation Create .................................................................. 133 Delete .................................................................. 131 Description ........................................................ 1603 Edit ...................................................................... 133 Requirements ............................................. 698, 1603 Set parameters .................................................... 713 Transformation management, access ........................ 131 Transformation model ............................................... 134 Transformation parameters ..................................... 1603 Transformations ........................................................ 131 Transverse Mercator projection ................................. 139 Traveller .................................................................. 1086 Traverse Application ......................................................... 1442 Backsight screen; Backsight, traverse ................. 1457 Viva Series, Index Close traverse ....................................................1459 Configuration .....................................................1451 Continuing an existing traverse ...........................1457 Create ................................................................1445 Delete station setup ...........................................1449 Edit ....................................................................1445 Point results .......................................................1464 Start traverse .....................................................1455 Traverse point, averaging ........................................1443 Traverse, COGO calculation method ...........................593 Triplet .....................................................................1575 Tripod setup ..............................................................238 True zero prism system .............................................184 Tunnel centreline .....................................................1188 Tunnel Profile Editor ................................................1189 Layer details view ...............................................1190 Profile details view .............................................1189 Two real-time devices ........................................358, 361 Twostep transformation ..........................................1609 Results .................................................................725 Type in new attribute ................................................119 U Underbreak ...............................................................999 Universal Transverse Mercator projection ...................139 Update coordinate system .........................................703 Upload Application ...........................................................502 Firmware ..............................................................502 Language .............................................................503 1639 User ............................................................................ 47 Using 2 Bearings, hidden point measurements ........ 1405 Using 2 Distances, hidden point measurements ...... 1406 UTM projection .......................................................... 139 V Verge ........................................................................ 974 Versions of system firmware ..................................... 510 Vertical alignment ..................................................... 976 Create a curve ................................................... 1042 Create a parabola .............................................. 1042 Create a straight ............................................... 1042 Delete an element ............................................ 1024 Edit ................................................................... 1019 Edit a curve ....................................................... 1042 Edit a parabola .................................................. 1042 Edit a straight ................................................... 1042 Vertical offset, antenna .................................... 229, 238 Vertical plane ............................................................ 848 View File ....................................................................... 508 Geoid model ........................................................ 145 Points, lines, areas, free code stored in job ............ 73 Virtual Reference Station .......................................... 286 Volume Calculations, end application ....................... 1494 VRS ........................................................................... 286 VTG ......................................................................... 1558 WGS84 ....................................................................1613 Wide Area Augmentation System .......................280, 287 Wildcard ....................................................................107 Wizard for RTK Rover settings ...................................201 Work Settings... .........................................................418 Working style Default .................................................................479 Description ...........................................................479 User defined .........................................................479 Wizard ..................................................................479 Working style file, directory .....................................1512 Z ZDA .........................................................................1560 ZigZag, Survey Cross Section ....................................1385 Zoom ........................................................................552 Window ................................................................553 W WAAS ........................................................ 280, 281, 287 Viva Series, Index 1640 Ask your local Leica Geosystems dealer for more information about our TQM program. Leica Geosystems AG Heinrich-Wild-Strasse CH-9435 Heerbrugg Switzerland Phone +41 71 727 31 31 www.leica-geosystems.com Original text Printed in Switzerland © 2009Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Switzerland Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Switzerland, has been certified as being equipped with a quality system which meets the International Standards of Quality Management and Quality Systems (ISO standard 9001) and Environmental Management Systems (ISO standard 14001). 772940-1.0.0en Total Quality Management: Our commitment to total customer satisfaction.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c321 44.398116, Tue Aug 04 2009 14:24:39 Modify Date : 2009:12:08 12:42:48+01:00 Create Date : 2009:12:08 12:41:34+01:00 Metadata Date : 2009:12:08 12:42:48+01:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:366b1aa0-b86f-45b2-adb0-e5c2cfda8ce8 Instance ID : uuid:68791177-2a75-4db9-ada1-746a3addcd4b Page Count : 1641EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools